ffilrreirg  nf 

Wihttltr 


GREEK  LESSONS 

PART  I.    THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH 
PART  II.    THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON 


BY 

THOMAS  DWIGHT  GOODELL,  PH.D. 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSOR  IN  YALE  UNIVERSITY 


NEW    YORK 

HENRY  HOLT   AND   COMPANY 
1892 


COPYRIGHT,  1886,  1889,  1892, 

BY 

HENRY  HOLT  &  CO. 


GIFT 


TYPOGRAPHY  BY  J.  S.  CUSHING  &  Co.,  BOSTON, 


PREFACE. 


THE  two  parts  of  this  book,  though  divided  in  date  of 
publication  by  an  interval  of  nearly  six  years,  were  planned 
each  for  the  other,  and  form  together  a  consistent  whole. 
The  Greek  in  English  may  still  be  obtained  in  separate  form, 
and  in  the  preface  of  that  edition  will  be  found  a  fuller 
account  of  what  it  aims  to  accomplish  for  those  who  do  not 
intend  to  carry  Greek  farther.  For  one  who  does  intend  to 
continue  the  study  there  are  obvious  advantages  in  beginning 
with  that  part  of  the  language  which  appears  in  English. 
It  is  easier  to  get  a  start  in  the  grammar,  if  the  memory  is 
not  forced  at  the  same  time  to  struggle  with  a  vocabulary 
wholly  strange;  any  study  is  more  interesting,  if  we  see 
from  the  beginning  its  practical  use;  and  even  those  who 
may  give  up  the  subject  at  the  end  of  the  first  term  will 
have  no  reason  to  regret  as  wasted  a  single  hour  given  to 
Greek.  It  is  a  great  gain  if  the  first  weeks  of  a  study  can 
thus  be  made  immediately  fruitful. 

In  Part  I.  the  main  stress  is  laid  on  the  relations  between 
Greek  and  English  words,  and  the  grammatical  outline 
includes  only  the  commonest  and  most  regular  declensions, 
and  only  the  present  indicative  and  infinitive  of  verbs.  Con- 
traction is  left  untouched,  to  be  taken  up  with  contract  verbs, 
where  it  is  learned  most  easily.  This  temporary  ignoring 
of  contraction,  and  the  almost  complete  restriction  of  the 
vocabulary  to  words  that  appear  in  English,  give  a  non- Attic 

iii 


IV  PBEFACE. 

and  unliterary  look  to  the  exercises.  But  in  any  case  uncon- 
tr acted  forms  must  precede  the  contracted ;  and  how  much 
of  literary  style  is  there  in  the  disconnected  extracts  that  are 
usually  put  before  the  beginner  ?  All  that  can  be  asked  of 
such  exercises  at  first  is  that  they  shall  furnish  drill  in  the 
elements  of  grammar,  be  correct,  and  be  no  more  dreary 
than  is  inevitable. 

In  Part  II.  the  leading  idea  is,  in  the  words  of  Professor 
Gildersleeve,  "early  contact  with  the  language  in  mass." 
But  not  too  early,  lest  the  student  be  bewildered  by  the 
multitude  of  new  and  apparently  unrelated  facts  confronting 
him  in  every  sentence.  The  aim  is  to  prepare  the  way 
adequately,  but  to  shorten  the  road  so  far  as  it  can  be  with 
safety,  by  concentrating  attention  upon  groups  of  essentials, 
leaving  what  is  less  urgent  until  it  presents  itself  in  Xeno- 
phon.  Hence  the  regular  verb  in  its  most  common  varieties 
is  first  presented  in  the  indicative,  infinitive,  and  participles, 
without  which  connected  discourse  is  impossible.  The  order 
of  presentation  is  so  chosen  as  to  enable  the  pupil  to  conquer 
the  difficulties  in  small  detachments.  Hence  also  the  most 
common  differences  of  idiom  between  the  two  languages  are 
introduced  early.  The  aorist  tense,  the  middle  voice,  the 
particles,  a  word-order  differing  from  that  of  both  English 
and  Latin,  —  these  and  like  features  convey  so  much  of  the 
spirit  of  the  language  that  they  cannot  too  early  become 
familiar  in  their  simpler  uses.  The  exercises  gradually 
approach  the  character  of  connected  passages  from  Xeno- 
phon,  until  the  Anabasis  is  begun.  From  this  point  refer- 
ences are  made  to  the  two  leading  Grammars,  and  the 
remaining  inflections  and  principles  of  syntax  are  introduced 
in  great  part  through  such  references.  Thus  the  book 


PREFACE.  V 

changes  by  degrees  from  an  elementary  Grammar  with  exer- 
cises to  an  annotated  edition  of  an  author,  while  at  the 
same  time  introducing  to  the  larger  Grammar.  In  this  way 
the  long  step  from  disconnected  exercises  to  Xenophon  is 
taken  almost  imperceptibly;  and  meantime  what  was  first 
learned  as  partially  isolated  groups  of  facts  is  slowly  put 
together  into  a  grammatical  system,  that  it  may  the  better 
be  retained  for  use  in  reading. 

As  regards  vocabulary,  both  parts  together  contain,  besides 
proper  names,  about  865  Greek  words.  Of  these  about  275 
furnish  one  or  more  English  words  apiece,  as  explained  in 
Part  I. ;  while  610  appear  in  the  first  three  chapters  of  the 
Anabasis.  Of  the  93  proper  names  also,  all  but  four  are 
found  in  the  same  three  chapters,  and  therefore  could  not 
be  omitted.  Altogether  it  is  believed  that,  without  omit- 
ting anything  that  is  needed,  this  book  makes  less  demand 
upon  the  beginner  than  any  other  course  leading  to  the 
same  point  of  progress.  The  large  amount  of  space  given 
to  explanation  does  not  increase  the  amount  to  be  learned. 
Average  classes  can  easily  finish  both  parts  in  one  year. 

The  maker  of  a  book  like  this  is  bound  to  show  that  he 
has  learned  from  his  predecessors.  Those  acquainted  with 
this  branch  of  school  literature  will  recognize  that  there  is 
little  here  that  is  new.  In  trying  to  solve  certain  definite 
pedagogical  problems  the  best  light  within  reach  has  been 
sought  during  many  years  of  preparatory  and  college  teach- 
ing. Among  those  who  have  helped  me  directly,  especial 
thanks  are  due  to  Mr.  F.  S.  Morrison,  of  the  Hartford  High 
School,  who  did  me  the  great  favor  of  reading  the  manu- 
script critically  in  an  early  state ;  to  my  colleagues,  Professor 
Seymour  and  Professor  Clapp,  who  have  given  many  valu- 


VI  PREFACE. 

able  suggestions ;  and  to  Professor  Goodwin,  whose  kindness 
enabled  me  to  make  the  references  to  the  1892  edition  of  his 
Grammar,  printing  at  the  same  time  with  this.  The  assist- 
ance of  Mrs.  Goodell  also,  by  counsel  and  criticism  as  well 
as  otherwise,  has  been  such  as  to  call  for  public  acknowledg- 
ment. 

YALE  UNIVERSITY^  July,  1892. 


CONTENTS. 


I.     THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 

PAGE 

INTRODUCTION.    Why  every  one  should  know  some- 
thing of  Greek          •        •        .        .        .        .        •        1 

Writing,  Pronunciation,  Transliteration       .        .        ,7 
The  Article  .  .......      14 

Nouns :  First  or  A-Declension      .        .        .        .        .      16 

O- Verbs :  Present  Indicative  and  Infinitive  Active       .      22 
A-Declension  :  Second  Class  of  Feminines    ...      26 

A-Declension:  Masculines 29 

O- Declension  :  Masculines  and  Feminines    .        .        .33 

O- Declension :  Neuters 39 

Additional  A-  and  O-Stems  .        .        .        .        .        .43 

Adjectives  of  the  Vowel  Declension      .        .        .        .      48 

O- Verbs :  Present  Indicative  and  Infinitive  Middle  and 

Passive     . 56 

Consonant  Declension  :  Stems  in  -*-  and  -y-          .        .      63 
Consonant  Declension :  Stems  in  -T-,  -£-,-#-  .        .68 

Consonant  Declension :  Stems  in  -v-  and  -p-  74 

Consonant  Declension :  Neuter  Stems  in  -ar-  and  -cos 

HoXvs     ,.        . .79 

Consonant  Declension  :  Stems  in  -t-  and  -cv.    AWO/JOI      86 

Mt-Verbs :  Ti%u  and  AiSoyu 93 

Mi-Verbs :  lon^u  and  Kcpawv/u         .        .        .        .     100 
The  Verb  4>iy/u :  the  Adjective  Has      .        .        .        »    106 

vii 


Viil  CONTENTS. 

II.     THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 

PAGE 

Present,  Imperfect,  and  Aorist  Tenses  .         .        .116 

The  Middle  Voice         .         . 129 

The  Future  System 137 

First  Passive  System     .         .         .        .        .        .         .138 

First  Perfect  System     . 144 

Perfect  Middle  System 148 

The  Mt- Aorist      .         .         .        .        .         .        .         .149 

The  Infinitive  Mode     .        *      >        .        .        .         .156 

The  Participle      .        .        ....        .        .        .159 

Contract  Verbs     .         .        .        .        , ...      .        .         .     176 

Liquid  Verbs        .         .        .        ...        .         .192 

Second  Passive  System 194 

Second  Aorist .         .200 

Second  Perfect 203 

Comparison  of  Adjectives 204 

Classification  of  Consonants 212 

Mute  Themes 215 

Anabasis  I.,  1,  1-2 226 

The  Subjunctive  Mode 229 

Anabasis  L,  1,  3-4 240 

The  Optative  Mode 244 

Anabasis  L,  1,  5-7 253 

The  Imperative  Mode 257 

Anabasis  L,  1,  8-11 267 

Anabasis  I.,  2        . .275 

Formation  of  Words 292 

Anabasis  L,  3 299 

Greek-English  Vocabulary 319 

English-Greek  Vocabulary 355 

Index  of  Derivatives 365 


PART  I. 
THE  GKEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


THE   GREEK   IN   ENGLISH. 


INTRODUCTION. 

WHY  EVERY  ONE  SHOULD  KNOW  SOMETHING 
OF  GREEK. 

EVERY  person  who  begins  this  book  is  supposed 
to  have  already  studied  Latin  a  little.  Now  before 
going  very  far  in  the  study  of  Latin,  every  student 
must  have  begun  to  notice  that  a  great  many  Latin 
words  looked  like  English  words.  Not  exactly  like 
English  words,  perhaps ;  and  of  course  it  was  found 
that  many  more  Latin  words  were  quite  unlike 
English,  and  were  rather  hard  to  remember  because 
their  forms  were  new  and  strange.  And  yet  it  was 
plain  that  rex,  reg-is,  was  somewhat  like  reg-al ; 
and  miles,  milit-is,  like  milit-ary ;  virgo,  virgin-is, 
like  virgin;  animal  like  animal;  stella  like  con- 
stella-tion ;  agricola  like  agricul-ture  ;  and  a  great 
many  other  resemblances  of  the  same  kind  ap- 
peared as  the  study  continued.  In  cases  like 
these,  too,  the  English  words  not  only  look  and 
sound  like  the  Latin  words,  but  there  is  plainly 
some  connection  in  meaning  also.  For  instance, 


2  T3L  G^EEtf  IN  ENGLISH. 

agriculture  is  th;3  v/ork  of  agricolae,  farmers ;  a 
constellation  is  made  up  of  a  number  of  stellae, 
stars ;  templum  means  temple ;  virtuous  means 
having  virtus,  virtue  ;  "  my  paternal  house  "  means 
the  house  of  my  father,  pater :  and  so  on.  Of 
course  such  a  great  number  of  resemblances  in 
both  form  and  meaning  of  words  could  not  possi- 
bly be  accidental.  There  must  be  some  reasonable 
explanation ;  and  the  most  natural  one  is  that  one 
language  inherited  or  borrowed  words  from  the  other. 
As  Latin  is  some  centuries  older  than  English, 
plainly  English  must  be  the  borrower  in  this  case. 
And  now,  on  tracing  back  the  history  of  our  tongue 
a  few  centuries,  we  see  beyond  question  that  our 
explanation  is  the  true  one :  that  there  was  a  time 
when  the  people  who  spoke  English  —  and  espe- 
cially those  who  wrote  English  —  felt  a  need  of 
more  words,  and  that  they  took  the  words  they 
wanted,  in  great  part,  directly  from  Latin. 

One  might  ask,  Why  did  these  people  go  to  the 
Latin  rather  than  to  any  other  language  to  borrow 
words  ?  Or,  indeed,  why  did  they  not  make  their 
new  words  out  of  the  stock  which  English  already 
had,  by  putting  together  the  old  words  in  new  com- 
binations? For  that  was  the  way  in  which  the 
Germans,  for  instance,  and  the  Greeks,  and  the 
Romans  to  some  extent,  made  the  new  words 
which  they  wanted.  To  answer  such  questions 
fully  would  take  too  much  time,  and  might  not  be 
easy;  but  a  part  of  the  reasons  can  be  quickly 
given. 


INTRODUCTION.  3 

England  had  been  conquered  by  the  Normans, 
who  spoke  a  form  of  French.  Although  the  con- 
querors could  not  compel  the  mass  of  the  people 
to  learn  French,  yet  they  were  strong  enough  in 
numbers  and  influence  to  bring  into  English  a 
great  many  French  words.  The  English  lan- 
guage, then,  at  the  time  we  speak  of,  had  become 
mixed,  as  the  people  had;  and  the  new  part  of  the 
language,  like  the  new  part  of  the  people,  was 
French.  Now  French  is  mainly  derived  from 
Latin  —  is  a  sort  of  corrupted  or  changed  form 
of  Latin  :  and  everybody  was  used  to  that  kind  of 
Latin  words  in  every-day  speech.  This  circumr 
stance  would  of  itself  naturally  open  the  door  a 
little  way  for  other  Latin  words. " 

Then  again  the  old  Latin  was  at  that  time  a 
sort  of  common  tongue  for  all  educated  people. 
Everybody  who  studied  at  all  studied  Latin ; 
everybody  who  could  read  at  all  read  Latin  ;  books 
were  generally  written  in  Latin  all  over  Europe  as 
well  as  in  England.  As  Latin,  then,  was  so  gen- 
erally understood,  a  speaker  or  writer,  if  he  wanted 
a  new  or  more  dignified  word,  might  very  natu- 
rally help  himself  to  a  Latin  one.  This  went  on 
until  our  language,  especially  the  part  of  it  used 
in  serious  and  thoughtful  speech  and  writing,  is 
quite  largely  borrowed  from  the  language  of  the 
Romans ;  and  besides,  the  custom  of  thus  borrow- 
ing and  forming  new  words  has  become  firmly 
fixed,  and  the  process  is  still  going  on.  And  this 
is  one  great  reason  why  the  study  of  Latin  in 


4  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 

school  is  so  necessary.  No  one  can  know  English 
well  without  knowing  something  about  Latin. 
Every  one  who  begins  the  study  of  this  book  can 
already  partly  see,  from  his  or  her  own  experience, 
the  truth  of  this  statement. 

And  with  Greek  the  case  is  pretty  much  the 
same.  Some  Greek  words  have  come  into  English 
through  Latin.  For  the  Romans  learned  much 
of  their  civilization  from  the  Greeks.  The  very 
alphabet  was  taught  them  by  the  Greeks,  whose 
literature  the  Romans  translated  and  imitated ; 
and  along  with  every  art  or  science  partly  or 
wholly  learned  from  Greece  —  such  as  painting, 
sculpture,  geometry,  medicine,  architecture  - 
there  came  into  the  language  a  larger  or  smaller 
number  of  Greek  words  connected  with  that 
branch  of  knowledge.  These  words,  then,  were 
a  part  of  the  Latin  language,  and  were  taken 
thence  into  English  as  readily  as  other  Latin 
words. 

Besides  this,  for  several  hundred  years  now 
Greek  and  Latin  have  been  studied  together  a 
great  deal.  This  was  natural,  because  the  civili- 
zation which  our  ancestors  learned  from  the  Ro- 
mans was  so  largely,  as  was  just  said,  Greek  in 
its  origin.  People  saw  that  it  was  worth  while  to 
go  back  to  the  source,  and  become  acquainted  at 
first  hand  with  the  works  of  that  remarkable  people 
with  whom  the  progress  of  the  modern  world  began. 
Hence,  after  the  custom  of  borrowing  Greek  words 
through  Latin  was  once  fixed,  it  seemed  quite  nat- 


INTRODUCTION.  5 

ural  to  take  a  step  farther  and  borrow  from  the 
Greek  directly.  This  step  was  made  all  the  easier 
because  new  compounds  and  derivatives  were  not 
freely  made  in  Latin,  but  in  Greek  they  were 
made  with  the  greatest  freedom.  Thus  it  came 
about  that  if  Latin  could  not  give  just  the  word 
desired,  nor  Greek  either,  two  Greek  words  would 
be  put  together  into  a  new  word  that  no  Greek 
ever  heard  of.  Many  of  our  scientific  terms,  like 
thermometer  and  telephone,  are  of  this  last  sort. 

In  all  these  ways,  then,  Greek  words  have  come 
over  into  English ;  and  however  much  we  might 
wish  to  get  them  out,  we  cannot  do  it.  In  fact 
new  ones  are  all  the  while  being  brought  iri,  and 
our  need  for  new  words  will  probably  continue  for 
a  long  time  to  be  supplied  largely  from  Greek. 
The  only  thing  for  us  to  do  is  to  learn  these  words 
as  soon  as  we  can,  if  we  wish  to  understand  what 
thinking  people  are  talking  about.  With  some  of 
them  we  make  a  partial  acquaintance  pretty  early. 
Arithmetic,  geography,  poetry,  music,  telephone, 
type,  dialogue  —  these  all  came  from  Greek ;  and 
all  readers  of  this  page  have  some  idea  of  what 
these  words  mean.  But  one  has  a  better  idea  of 
their  meaning  if  he  knows  also  what  the  Greek 
words  mean.  Besides,  it  is  very  interesting  to 
follow  words  back  to  their  origin  —  to  know,  for 
instance,  just  what  is  the  original  meaning  of  helio- 
trope, acrostic,  George,  tropic,  crystal,  and  a  host  of 
other  words,  even  though  one  may  have  already  a 
pretty  good  notion  of  their  present  significance, 


6-  THE  GEEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 

And  then,  as  one  comes  to  read  more,  and  tries  to 
find  out  what  wise  people  are  thinking,  and  all 
sorts  of  people  are  talking  about,  scores  of  less 
familiar  words  taken  from  Greek  present  them- 
selves —  some  among  them  not  very  short  —  which 
one  must  understand  clearly  in  order  to  know  at 
all  what  the  writer's  thought  is. 

Thus  it  becomes  necessary  to  learn  something  of 
Greek,  if  we  wish  to  thoroughly  know  one  impor- 
tant part  of  our  own  language.  In  order  to  grasp 
the  thoughts  which  are  expressed  by  some  of  these 
words  of  Greek  origin,  and  in  order  to  tell  them 
to  others,  we  must  learn  enough  of  Greek  to  be- 
come familiar  with  those  words. 


1] 


ALPHABET. 


I.  WRITING,  PRONUNCIATION,  TRANSLITERA- 
TIONS 

ALPHABET. 

1.  Greek  is  written  with  the  following  twenty- 
four  letters : 


Form 

Name. 

Sound. 

A 

a 

d\<f>a 

alpha 

a  in  father 

B 

/3 

ftrJTa 

beta 

b 

r 

1- 

ryCLLLLU 

%        gamma 

ffmgo 

A 

8 

Se'Xra 

delta 

d 

E 

€ 

€^T\ 

bv      epsilon 

e  in  met 

Z 

t> 

gfjra 

zeta 

dz  or  z 

H 

•n  - 

TITO, 

eta 

e  in  prey 

e 

e  # 

Brjra 

theta 

th  in  thin 

i 

I 

Icora 

iota 

i  in  machine 

K 

K 

KaTTTT 

a        kappa 

k 

A 

\ 

Xa/A/8 

Sa      lambda 

I 

M 

/* 

^ 

mu 

m 

1  Sufficient  explanation  —  and  that  often  means  a  great 
deal  of  explanation  —  should  always  be  given  in  class  before 
the  pupils  are  required  to  learn  a  lesson.  The  alphabet  must 
of  course  be  memorized  at  the  beginning.  For  the  rest  of 
this  chapter  it  will  be  enough  to  read  it  over  in  class  with 
explanatory  comments  (a  process  which  may  require  two  or 
three  recitation  hours),  and  then  go  on  to  Chapter  II.  Abun- 
dant opportunity  for  practice  in  writing,  pronunciation,  and 
transliteration  will  be  furnished  by  the  declensions  and 
exercises. 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[2- 


Form. 


N 

a 
o 
n 
p 

2 
T 


v 

e 

o 

7T 

P 
O-    9 

T 

V 


Name. 

vv  nu 

%l  xi 

o  filfcpdv  omicron 

irl  pi 

pa)  rho 

(riy/jLa  sigma 

rav  tau 


•^LT 

fl  O) 


upsilon 

phi 
chi 
psi 
omega 


Sound. 

n 
x 
o  in  obey 

P 
r 

s  in  see 

t 

French  u 

German  u 

ph 

German  ch 

ps 

o  in  no 


a.  At  the  end  of  a  word  5  is  written ;  elsewhere,  a-. 

2.  In  ancient  times  only  the  capitals  were  used ; 
but  as  writers  tried  to  make  the  letters  in  the 
easiest  way,  they  gradually  changed  the  capitals 
to  the  smaller  forms,  and  now  both  are  used.  It 
was  said  in  the  Introduction  that  the  Romans 
learned  the  alphabet  (a\c/>a  /S^ra,  or  A  B  C)  from 
the  Greeks.  This  occurred  at  a  time  when  some 
of  the  capitals  had  slightly  different  forms  from 
those  here  given ;  and  our  alphabet  was  borrowed 
from  the  Latin,  with  some  changes.  Hence  many 
of  our  letters  are  like  the  Greek,  but  not  all. 

a.  By  marking  in  the  list  and  writing  out  a  few  times 
those  Greek  letters  which  are  unlike  the  English  equivalents, 
the  pupil  can  memorize  them  without  much  difficulty.  Copy- 
ing out  the  Greek  names  of  the  letters  in  Greek  characters 
will  also  be  useful.  Observe  that  the  Greek  name  of  each 


5]  PRONUNCIATION.  9 

letter  begins  with  the  sound  of  that  letter.  Observe  also  the 
force  of  our  word  delta  from  the  shape  of  the  capital  letter, 
and  how  it  happens  that  the  phrase  "  alpha  and  omega" 
means  the  beginning  and  the  end,  and  that  iota  means  a  r<  /•</ 
small  quantity.  (Jot  is  a  corrupted  form  of  iota.) 

3.  Every  letter  (except  i  subscript ;  see  5,  6)  is 
sounded :  there  are  no  silent  letters. 

4.  Of  the  vowels,  e  and  o  are  always  short  in 
quantity — that  is,  were  pronounced  by  the  Greeks 
in  less  time  than  the  long  vowels;  77  and  co  are 
always  long  —  that  is,  had  more  time  given  them 
in  pronunciation.     The  others,  a,  i,  v,  are  some- 
times long  and  sometimes  short.     In  this  book  the 
long  a,  I,  v  will  be  printed  with  a  straight  mark 
over  the  letter  ;  short  a,  i,  v  will  be  left  unmarked. 

5.  The  diphthongs    (Si-00oy7<M  double   sounds; 
see  96,  1)  are 

(ll,  €1,  Ot,  dl',  6V,  Of, 

a,  j7,          p,  VL. 

a.  Originally  the  sounds  of  the  diphthongs  were 
made  by  simply  pronouncing  the  separate  vowels 
closely  together,  in  one  syllable.  But  some  of  the 
diphthongs  are  not  usually  sounded  so  now.  We 
may  pronounce 

ai  like  i   in  fine,  av  like  ow  in  now, 

ei  like  ei  in  rein,1  €v  like  eu  in  feud, 

01  like  oi  in  oil,  ov  like  ou  in  you, 

vi  like  we. 

a,  rjy  q>  are  pronounced  like  a,  w,  a>,  as  if  t  were 
not  there. 

1  Many,  however,  pronounce  ct  like  ei  in  height, 


10  THE  GEEEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [6— 

b.  This  silent  i,  written  below  the  other  letter, 
is  called  i  subscript  (Latin  sub-scriptus,  written 
below).  When  the  first  vowel  of  a  diphthong 
containing  i  subscript  is  written  as  a  capital,  L  is 
written  on  the  line :  HIAHI  =  *£lt,8$  =  cJSf;. 

6.  The  consonants  are  pronounced  like  the  corre- 
sponding English  consonants,  with  two  or  three 
exceptions,  as  follows : 

a.  Gamma  (7)  before  K,  7,  ^,  or  £  is  sounded 
like  n  in  anger,  ink,  and  is  represented  by  n  in 
English  words  from  the  Greek  :  ay/cvpa  (Latin  an- 
cora),  anchor.      When  sounded  in  this  way,  7  is 
called  7  nasal  (Latin  nasus,  nose),  because  all  the 
breath  used  in  making  the  sound  comes  out  through 
the  nose.     For  the  same  reason  p  and  v  are  called 
nasals. 

b.  Chi  (^)  is  now  pronounced  like  German  eh, 
and  English  has  no  corresponding   sound.     It  is 
between  the  sound  of  Jc  and  that  of  h.     One  should 
begin  by  pronouncing  it  as  h,  and  gradually  learn 
to  roughen  the  sound  sufficiently. 

c.  Zeta  (£)  is  pronounced  like  dz. 

BREATHINGS. 

7.  With  every  initial  vowel  is  written  one  or 
the  other  of  two  marks  called  breathings.     The 
rough  breathing  (f)  is  pronounced  like  our  h ;  the 
smooth  breathing  (')  is  not  pronounced  at  all,  but 
merely  shows  that  the  vowel  to  which  it  belongs 
has  no  h  sound  before  it.     These  breathings  are 
written  over  a  small  vowel,  but  at  the  left  of  a 


9]        BREATHINGS.  —  SYLLABLES.  —ACCENT.      11 

capital:  &pd  (Latin  hora)  season,  "OfjLTjpo?  Homer. 
Initial  p  also  has  the  rough  breathing:  prjr&p 
(rhetor*)  a  public  speaker.  Double  p  is  sometimes 
written  pp,  and  is  represented  by  rrh  in  English  : 
Kardppov?  catarrh. 

a.  A  diphthong  takes  the  breathing  over  the 
second  vowel:  avros  self.  But  t,  subscript  does 
not  take  the  breathing  :  "Ai&rjs  Hades,  wSi;  song. 


SYLLABLES. 

8.  Every  vowel  or  diphthong,  with  or  without 
one  or  more  consonants,  makes  a  separate  syllable  : 
v-yt-€i-a  health.     The  last  syllable  of  a  word  is 
called  the  ultima  ;  the  next  to  the  last,  the  penult  ; 
the  syllable  before  the  penult,  the  antepenult. 

ACCENT. 

9.  The  accented  syllable  in  Greek  is  always  marked,  and 
for  this  purpose  three  sighs,  called  accents,  are  used.     These 
are  :  the  acute  accent, 

the  circumflex  accent,  *   TO> 
the  grave  accent, 

These  different  accents  mark  differences  in  the  ancient 
Greek  pronunciation,  but  all  are  now  commonly  pronounced 
alike. 

a.  These  accents  are  written  over  the  vowel  of  the  accented 
syllable  ;  they  are  written  over  the  second  vowel  of  a  diph- 
thong, unless  the  second  vowel  is  t  subscript.  If  the  vowel 
has  a  breathing  also,  the  acute  and  the  grave  are  placed  at 
the  right  of  the  breathing  ;  the  circumflex  is  placed  above  the 
breathing  :  o  /u*pov,  of,  o>.  If  the  accented  vowel  is  a  cap- 
ital, the  accent,  as  well  as  the  breathing,  stands  just  before 
it  :  " 


12  THE  GHEES:  IN  ENGLISH.  [10— 

10.  a.  The  acute  accent  can  stand  only  on  one  of  the  last 
three  syllables  ;  the  circumflex  can  stand  only  on  one  of  the 
last  two  syllables,  and  only  on  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong. 

NOTE.  —  When  a  vowel  has  the  circumflex  accent,  there- 
fore, it  must  be  long,  and  the  mark  of  length  will  be  omitted 
in  this  book. 

b.  If  the  ultima  has  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong,  the  acute 
cannot  stand  on  the  antepenult  nor  the  circumflex  on  the 
penult. 

11.  The  general  rules  of  accent,  accordingly,  are  : 

(1)  A  word  with  short  vowel  in  the  ultima,  if  accented 

a.  on  the  antepenult,  has  the  acute:  Statra. 

b.  on  a  short  vowel  in  the  penult,  has  the  acute  :  LOTTOS. 

c.  on  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong  in  the  penult,  has  the  cir- 
cumflex :  yXcucr(ra. 

d.  on  the  ultima,  has  the  acute  :  0eog. 

(2)  A  word  with  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong  in  the  ultima, 
if  accented 

a.  on  the  penult,  has  the  acute  :  o-o<£id,  yAwcrcn/s. 

b.  on  the  ultima,  sometimes  has  the  acute  and  sometimes 
the  circumflex  :  <£a>vry,  <^>(ov^5. 

12.  Final  -at  and  -ot,  although  long,  have  the  effect  of  short 
vowels  on  the  accent  of  the  penult  and  antepenult  : 


13.  An  acute  on  the  ultima  changes  to  the  grave  when  fol- 
lowed by  another  word  in  connected  discourse  :  ryv,  but  rrjv 
This  is  almost  the  only  use  of  the  grave  accent. 


TRANSLITERATION. 

14.  Transferring  words  from  a  foreign  alphabet 
into  our  own  —  respelling  them  in  our  own  letters 
—  is  called  transliterating  them  (Latin  trans, 
across,  and  liter  a,  letter).  The  natural  way  of 
doing  this  would  seem  to  be  simple.  And  for  the 
most  part  the  transliteration  of  Greek  words  into 


141  TRANSLITERATION.  13 

'« 

English  is  in  fact  simple ;  but  a  few  points  need 
especial  notice. 

In  the  Introduction  it  was  said  that  some  Greek 
words  have  come  into  English  through  Latin,  hav- 
ing been  first  borrowed  by  the  Latins.  Nearly  all 
these  words  had  been  Latinized,  that  is,  sufficiently 
changed  in  form  to  seem  at  home  among  other  Latin 
words,  before  they  were  Anglicized  or  taken  into 
English.  Thus  a  fashion  was  set,  as  we  might  say, 
to  be  observed  by  any  later  comers  from  Greek 
into  English.  Again,  not  only  were  Greek  and 
Latin  studied  together,  but  for  a  long  time  Greek 
was  studied  only  through  Latin.  The  Greek  gram- 
mars were  written  in  Latin,  and  in  Greek  vocabu- 
laries and  dictionaries  the  definitions  were  given 
in  Latin.  Thus  the  fashion  of  treating  borrowed 
Greek  words  as  the  Romans  did  —  that  is,  of  Latin- 
izing them  —  was  firmly  established.  At  present 
this  custom  is  not  so  closely  followed  with  new 
words ;  but  generally,  in  tracing  out  connections 
between  Greek  and  English,  we  are  obliged  to 
notice  what  changes  are  due  to  this  Latinizing 
process.  All  these  changes  will  be  fully  illus- 
trated, later,  in  connection  with  the  derivatives  in 
which  they  are  found ;  but  for  convenience  the 
following  are  summed  up  here : 

a.  Zeta  (f),  though  pronounced  dz,  is  repre- 
sented by  z. 

b.  Kappa  (K)  is  usually  represented  by  <?,  which 
in  Latin  had  the  sound  of  our  &,  although  in  later 
borrowings  the  more  natural  k  is  often  used. 


14  THE  GEEEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [15— 

-* 

c.  Upsilon  (u),  if  not  part  of  a  diphthong,  is 
represented  by  y.     When  the  Romans  did  most  of 
their  borrowing,  v  had  a  sound  between  that  of  i  in 
machine  and  u  in  rule  (nearly  the  sound  of  French 
u  or  German  #),  and  that  sound  had  no  represen- 
tative in  the  Latin  alphabet.    Therefore  the  Latins 
transferred  the  Greek  letter  itself,  and  T  is  the 
origin  of  our  letter  Y.    Of  course  the  sound  of  our 
y  is  very  different ;  and  after  spelling  the  word  in 
the  Latin  way,  we  pronounce  it  in  the  English  way. 

d.  Chi  (^)  is  represented  by  ch,  which,  however, 
we  generally  pronounce  in  English  like  Jc. 

e.  The  diphthong  ai  is  represented  by  ae,  which 
in  Latin  had  nearly  the  same  sound  with  ai. 

f.  The  diphthong  ei,  usually  becomes  i,  sometimes 
e ;  for  in  the  Roman  period  the  pronunciation  of 
€4  changed  from  that  of  Latin  e  to  that  of  Latin  i. 

ff.  The  diphthong  OL  becomes  oe,  which  in  Latin 
had  nearly  the  same  sound  as  01.  To  represent 
better  our  own  pronunciation,  this  oe  is  often 
changed  to  e. 

h.  The  diphthong  ov  becomes  u  in  words  that 
have  come  through  Latin,  and  ou  in  words  taken 
from  Greek  directly. 

i.  Iota  subscript  is  omitted  in  transliteration. 

Jc.  It  was  mentioned  above  (7)  that  p  becomes 
rh,  and  pp  becomes  rrh. 

II.  THE  ARTICLE. 

15.  In  Greek,  as  in  Latin,  nouns,  pronouns,  ad- 
jectives, and  verbs  are  inflected;  that  is,  their 


18] 


THE  ARTICLE. 


15 


forms  are  varied  according  to  their  relations  to 
other  words  in  the  sentence.  For  example,  leav- 
ing other  parts  of  speech  till  later,  nouns  or  sub- 
stantives are  declined  to  denote  case  and  number; 
and  adjectives,  including  the  article  6,  17,  TO  ?//«', 
are  declined  to  denote  gender  also. 

16.  Greek  has 

a.  Three    genders:     masculine,    feminine,    and 
neuter. 

b.  Three  numbers :  the  singular  for  one  object, 
the  plural  for  more  than  one,  the  dual  for  two. 

c.  Five  cases :   the  nominative,  genitive,  dative, 
accusative,  and  vocative. 

17.  The  definite  article  6,  17,  TO  the  is  declined  in 
three  genders  and  numbers,  and  in  all  the  cases 
but  the  vocative.     As  the  article  may  be  used  with 
any  noun,  it  will  be  best  to  take  this  up  before  the 
nouns.    It  is  declined  as  follows : 


18. 


M. 

F. 

N. 

Sing.  Nom. 
Gen. 

i 
o 

TOO 

• 

TO 
TOO 

Dat. 
Ace. 

Tft) 
TOV 

#» 
T1JV 

TCO 
TO 

Dual  N.  A. 

TO) 

Tft) 

TO) 

G.  D. 

rOLV 

rolv 

rolv 

Plu.    Nom. 

ol 

at 

rd 

Gen. 

T&V 

T&V 

ra>v 

Dat. 

T019  , 

rat? 

TOtS 

Ace. 

TOU9 

£ 

rd 

16  THE  &REEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [19— 

19.  The  forms  6,  ^,  01,  at  (with  a  few  other  words  of  one 
syllable)  have  no  accent  of  their  own,  but  lean  forward  upon 
the  following  word,  and  hence  are  called  proclitics  (jrpo  for- 
ward and  /cAii/co  lean).    The  article  the  in  English,  unless 
emphasized,  is  a  proclitic,  as  are  many  other  words.    Thus 
when  we  say,  "  The  boy  has  a  jack-knife;  he  whittles,"  the, 
a,  and  he  have  no  separate  accent,  but  lean  forward  on  the 
following  words,  very  much  as  Greek  proclitics  do. 

It  will  assist  in  remembering  the  forms  to  note  that  all 
genitives  and  datives  have  the  circumflex,  and  that  all  other 
forms  (except  the  proclitics)  have  the  acute.  In  the  dual 
number,  which  was  not  much  used,  the  nominative  and 
accusative  of  all  genders  are  alike,  and  also  the  genitive  and 
dative  of  all  genders. 

NOTE.  —  From  this  point  on,  unremitting  practice  is  neces- 
sary both  in  writing  and  in  reciting  paradigms.  In  preparing 
these  the  pupil  should  first  copy  out  a  small  group  of  forms 
(say  the  singular  only,  or  even  less),  taking  especial  pains 
about  the  written  accent  and  pronouncing  each  form  aloud; 
then  should  close  the  book  and  write  the  same  group  from 
memory.  Next  let  him  compare  his  work  with  the  printed 
forms,  correct  all  mistakes,  and  try  again;  and  so  on,  until 
the  work  can  be  written  correctly  from  memory.  Then  let 
him  take  another  group  of  forms,  not  so  large  but  that  one 
or  two  trials  will  enable  him  to  master  it;  finally  let  the 
whole  paradigm  be  taken  together.  The  first  attempts  may 
perhaps  be  discouraging,  because  the  alphabet,  though  really 
differing  so  little  from  our  own,  is  unfamiliar.  But  a  few 
days  of  careful  practice  will  make  a  vast  difference,  and  soon 
an  entire  paradigm  can  be  mastered  at  one  trial. 

III.  NOUNS:  FIRST  OK  A-DECLENSION. 

20,  The  stem  of  a  noun  is  that  part  to  which  the 
case-endings  are  added  in  declension.     Noun-stems 
(and  also  adjective-stems)  are  classified  according 


23]          NOUNS:  FIRST  OR  A-DECLENSION.          17 

as  they  end  in  (1)  a,  (2)  o,  (3)  a  consonant  or  i 
or  v.  These  three  classes  of  stems  are  declined  in 
three  slightly  different  ways,  named  from  the  last 
letter  of  the  stem: 

The  A- Declension,  or  First  Declension. 

The  O- Declension,  or  Second  Declension. 

The  Consonant-Declension,  or  Third  Declension. 

21.  All  stems  ending  in  -a-  belong  to  the  a-declen- 
sion.     The  feminines  have  no  case-ending  in  the 
nominative  singular.   The  following  are  examples: 

22.  i)  (o>pa-)     1)  (#ea-) 

season  sight  head 

Sing.  Nom.      $        &pd 
Gen.       T?}?     a>pds 

Dat.        rrj       &pd  Oed  K€(j>a\fj 

Ace.        rrjv     &pd-v  Qid-v 

Voc.        &         &pd  Oed 

Dual  N.  A.V.  TO)       &pd  Bed  tce<f>a\a 

G.  D.      roiv    oypaiv          0eaiv          K€<f>a\aw 

Plu.    Nom.  al       &pai           0eai 

Gen.  TWV    wpwv 

Dat.  rat?    &pai<; 

Ace.  r«9     &pd$          0eds 

Voc.  w         oipat            ^eat 


a.  For  the  accent  of  TTJV,  TO>,  ras,  see  13.    For  <5p<u,  see  12 
and  11,  (1)  c.     (In  wpotv  and  wpcus,  cu  is  not  final.) 

b.  With  the  vocative   the  interjection  &    0  is 
often,  though  not   always,   used.     It  should  not 
usually  be  translated. 

23.  All  words  of  the  a-declension  are  declined 


18  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [24— 

alike  in  the  dual  and  plural.  In  the  singular  all 
feminines  originally  had  -a  in  the  nominative,  and 
were  declined  like  &pd.  But  in  many  words  this 
-a  has  been  shortened  in  the  nominative,  accusa- 
tive, and  vocative,  singular.  Hence  there  are  two 
classes  of  feminines.  In  this  section  we  take  up 
only  the 

24.  First  Class  of  Feminines.  —  These  have  a 
long  vowel,  a  or  77,  in  the  last  syllable  throughout 
the  singular. 

a.  Long  a  is  retained  after  e,  L,  or  p ;  otherwise 
it  is  changed  to  77  throughout  the  singular. 

Accent  of  Nouns. 

25.  The  accent  of  a  noun  remains,  in  all  the  forms,  on  the 
same  syllable  as  in  the  nominative  singular,  or  as  near  that 
syllable  as  the  general  rules  of  accent  (10,  11,  12)  allow. 

26.  An  accented  ultima  in  general  takes  the  acute  ;  but 

27.  In  the  genitive  and  dative  of  all  numbers  a  long  ultima, 
if  accented,  takes  the  circumflex. 

28.  Further,  in  the  a-declension  only,  the  genitive  plural 
always  has  the  circumflex  on  the  last  syllable. 

a.  This  is  because  the  stem-vowel  -d  and  the  ending  -cov 
were  contracted  to  one  syllable,  so  that  -dcov  became  -on/. 

29.   Vocabulary.1 

r)  afc/jitf,  -779  summit,  prime  (acme). 

'Y]  fiordvn,  -779  grass,  herb  (botan-y). 

1  It  will  assist  in  learning  the  vocabularies  to  read  over 
carefully,  in  connection  with  each  one,  the  corresponding 
section  of  Notes  on  Derivatives,  at  the  end  of  each  chapter; 
those  notes,  however,  should  not  be  required  to  be  learned 
until  after  the  preceding  Exercises  have  been  translated. 


SO]          NOUNS:  FIRST  OR  A-DECLENSION.          19 

77  777,  7%,  777,  7771;  earth,  land  (geography). 

ypdffxo  I  write  (geo-graph-y). 

eV,1  prep. w.  dat.  only,  in. 

eya*  I  have. 

77  77/877,  -775  youth  (Hebe,  goddess  of  youth). 

77  6edt  -£9  sight,  show  (thea-tre). 

77  tce<t>a\ij,  -779  head  (cephal-ic). 

iraKiVj  adv.,  again,  back  (palinode). 

7re/H,  prep.  w.  gen.,  about,  concerning. 

ri,  pron.,  what? 

77  (u^rfy  -779  song,  ode. 

77  &pd,  -£9  season,  appointed  time  (hour). 

30.  Exercises. 

I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  T7}9  &5S779.2  2.  eV  XT}  777.  3.  rals  ftordvais 
T779  7779.  4.  TT)I/  /Bordvrjv  €%co.  5.  fce<f)a\r)v  e^o). 
6.  T63  ypd(f>(t)  ;4  7.  rt  ypdcfxi)  irepl  r&v  f3orav£)v  ; 
8.  Trept  rr}9  7^79  ypd<f)(i)  (ge-o-graph-y).  9.  Trepl  TWI/ 
wpwv  ypd<f)a)  (hor-o-graph-y).  10.  eV  TT}  77/877  T779 

7779. 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  In  the  prime  of  youth.  2.  I  write  songs  in 
the  season  of  youth.  3.  I  write  about  the  season 
of  the  herbs.  4.  I  write  the  song  again  (palin-ode). 
5.  What  have  I  in  my  (Greek  idiom  in  the)  head 

1  Proclitic :  see  19. 

2  Unless  other  directions  are  given,  the  cases  may  be  trans- 
lated as  in  Latin. 

8  Tt  never  changes  its  acute  accent  to  the  grave. 

4  The  mark  of  interrogation  in  Greek  is  like  our  semicolon. 


20  THE  GEEEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [31— 

(en-cephal-on)  ?      6.   I   write    an    ode    about  the 
show. 

31.   Notes  on  Derivatives.1 

1.  Hints  have  been  given  as  to  a  few  English 
derivatives  from  words  in  the  above  vocabulary. 
For  instance,  acme   comes   to   us  with  only  the 
change  of  K  to  c  (see  14,  5),  and  its  meaning  is 
about  the  same  as  that  of  ateptf. 

2.  Botan-ist  and  botan-ic  remind  one  at  once  of 
botan-y,  and  usually  we  need  not  stop  to  mention 
more  than  one  member  of  a  family  in  which  the 
family  resemblance  is  so  plain.     We  shall  see  later 
that  the  endings  -ic  and  -1st  are  themselves  of  Greek 
origin,  -ic  making  adjectives  and  -1st  making  nouns 

1  The  entire  class  should  have  ready  access  to  at  least  one 
unabridged  English  dictionary,  as  the  Imperial,  Webster's  or 
Worcester's.  Before  leaving  a  chapter  all  English  deriva- 
tives —  the  words  partly  or  wholly  in  full-face  type  —  should 
be  looked  up,  and  the  connection  between  their  present  mean- 
ings and  the  Greek  originals  clearly  understood.  In  many 
cases  this  connection  is  explained  in  this  book ;  but  often  it 
is  only  hinted  at  and  left  to  be  brought  out  in  class.  This 
course  has  been  followed  because  a  little  independent  work 
on  the  part  of  the  scholar,  constantly  directed  and  aided  by 
suggestions  and  questions  from  the  teacher,  is  the  best  possible 
method  of  arousing  interest  and  fixing  indelibly  in  the  pupil's 
mind  just  those  facts  which  it  is  the  object  of  this  book  to 
teach.  To  repeat,  then,  constant  use  of  the  dictionary,  with 
constant  help  and  questioning  on  the  part  of  the  teacher, 
must  on  no  account  be  neglected. 

With  some  classes  it  may  be  thought  best  to  omit,  until 
review,  a  few  derivatives  whose  connection  with  their  primi- 
tives is  not  easily  made  clear, 


31]          NOUNS:  FIRST  OB  A-DECLENSION.          21 

that  denote  persons  (see  78,  11,  and  86,  11).  We 
shall  also  find  that  often,  as  in  botan-y,  the  final 
vowel  of  a  Greek  stem  is  dropped  off,  for  ease  of 
pronunciation,  in  derivatives  or  compounds. 

3.  Ge-,  meaning  earth  or  land,  appears  in  several 
words,  such  as  ge-o-logy  (see  50,  II.,  5),  ge-o-metry 
(see  57,  4),  apo-gee  (see  57,  1).     The  -0-  in  ge-o- 
graphy,  geology,  horography,  seems  to  have  no  busi- 
ness there ;  yet  we  shall  find  that  the  same  sylla- 
ble has  been  put  between  the  two  parts  of  a  large 
number  of  compounds,  in  which  it  has  no  more 
meaning  than  a  hyphen.     (See  51,  1.) 

4.  Oraph-ite  is  a  substance  used  in  pencils  for 
writing,  the  syllable  -ite  being  our  remnant  of  an 
ending  which  denotes  merely  a  vague  connection. 
(Compare  dynam-ite,  94.)     Oraph-ic,  in  some  of  its 
uses,  goes  back   to   another  meaning  of  ypd<f>co, 
namely,  draw  or  paint.     We  shall  meet  the  syl- 
lable -graph-  frequently.     For  -gram,  see  91,  4. 

5.  En-cephal-on,  a  more   learned   and  scientific 
name  for  brain,  shows  the  change  of  K  to  c,  and 
shows  also  the  form  cephal-  which  tce<f>a\ij  takes  in 
several  scientific  words,  such  as  cephal-ic,  pertain- 
ing to  the  head,  a-cephal-ous  f  see  60,  3,  i),  headless, 
cephal-algia  (see  110,  2),  headache. 

6.  HaXip  appears  in  palin-drome  (see  51,  3),  palin- 
genesis (see  96,  3),  and  palim-psest.     In  palim-psest 
(jra\i^^(Trov)  the  m  takes  the  place  of  n  for 
ease  of  pronunciation  before  a  jt?-sound ;  the  second 
part  is  from  a  verb,  i/rao>,  meaning  to  rub.     Parch- 
ment was  costly,  and  hence  was  often  used  a  second 


22  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [32— 

time,  the  old  writing  being  rubbed  off  again  ;  but 
this  process  still  left  faint  traces  of  the  older  writ- 
ing, and  some  very  valuable  ancient  books  have 
been  recovered  from  palimpsests. 

7.  Several  rather  common  words  contain  cJSr;  as 
one  element;  such  are  mel-ody  (see  100,  8),  par-ody 
(see  46,  5),  pros-ody,  and  rhaps-ody ;  and  also,  with 
a  change  which  obscures  the  form  of  oJS^,  trag-edy 
(rpaywSld,  Latin  tragoedia),  and  com-edy  (fccojiJLcp&id, 
Latin  comoedia).    The  significance  of  the  first  part 
of  rhaps-ody,  trag-edy,  and  com-edy  is  uncertain. 

8.  From  &pa  was  taken  the  Latin  hora;   and 
from  hora,  through  a  French  form,  is  derived  the 
English  hour.    Then  directly  from  Greek  we  have 
(with  the  inserted  hyphen-like  -0-)  hor-o-loge  (see  51, 
5,  a),  hor-o-scope  (see  74,  9),  hor-o-meter  (see  57,  4). 

IV.  fl- VERBS:  PRESENT  INDICATIVE  AND 

INFINITIVE  ACTIVE. 
32.  Present  Indicative  Active. 

Sing.  1  ypd(f)co  I  write 

2  rypdfais  you  write 

3  ypdfat,  he  (she,  if)  writes 

Dual  2  ypd^erov  you  (two)  write 

3  rypd<f)€Tov  they  (two)  write 

Plu.    1  ypdfofjLev  we  write 

2  .ypd<j>€T6  you  write 

3  ypd<j>ov(Ti,  they  write 

Present  Infinitive  Active, 
to  write 


35]  H-  VERBS.  23 

33.  Most  Greek  verbs  are  conjugated  in  the 
present  tense  like  ypd<f>ci),  and  are  called,  from  the 
ending  of  the  first  form,  co-verbs.  Besides  the 
singular  and  plural  they  have  a  second  and  third 
person  dual,  but  no  first  person  dual. 

a.  The  accent  of  the  verb,  with  but  few  exceptions,  stands 
as  far  from  the  end  of  the  word  as  possible  ;  that  is,  on  the  penult, 
if  the  ultima  has  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong,  otherwise  on  the 
antepenult,  if  there  is  an  antepenult. 

34.    Vocabulary. 

d/cova)  hear  (acon-stic). 

e5,  adv.,  well  (en-phony). 

17  UTTO/PUZ,  -a?  history,  story. 

fjMvOdvco  (root  /-uifl)  learn  (math-ematics). 

TI  fjLrj%ainj,  -%  machine  (mechanic). 

ou,  ov/c,  ov%,1  adv.,  not. 

17  (TXO\IJI  -779  (1)  leisure,  (2)  school. 

o-^oXafo)  (fr.  <TXO\IJ)  have  leisure. 

TT/X*,  adv.,  at  a  distance,  far  (tele-phono). 

77  </>o)i^7,  -779  sound,  voice  (tele-phone). 

(f)coveci)  (fr.  $0)1/17)  sound  (phon-ograph). 
hand  (chir-ography). 


35.  Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 
1.    T?7  iurixavy2    TTJ\€    rrjv    (fxDvrjv   (tele-phone) 


1  Proclitic  (see  19).   The  form  ov  is  used  before  a  consonant, 
OVK  before  a  smooth  breathing,  ov\  before  a  rough  breathing. 

2  Translate,  By  means  of,  etc.    The  dative  is  used  in  Greek, 
like  the  Latin  ablative,  to  denote  means  or  cause. 


24  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [36— 


dfcovo/Jiev.  2.  TI  fMj%avr)  ra?  <£eom9  ypdfai  (phono- 
graph). 3.  ev  rfj  cr%o\fi  rj  %elp  ypdfaiv  (chir-0- 
graphy)  pavOdvei.  4.  ov  cr^oXafe^?  ev  rrj 
5.  TI  o)Sr)  ev  (frcoveei  (eu-phony).  6.  ov 
d/coveiv  TTJV  i(7TOpidv*  7.  TL  /JLavOdvere  irepl 
8.  al  cJSai  ou^:  ev  (j>coveov<ri,. 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  machine  writes  at-a-distance  (tele-graph). 
2.  They  have-leisure  in  youth.  3.  What  are  you 
writing?  4.  What  do  you  hear?  5.  They  are 
writing  the  history  (histori-o-graph-er)  of  the  ma- 
chines. 6.  They  have  herbs.  7.  We  are  writing 
the  sounds  (phon-o-graphy).  8.  We  hear  songs  in 
the  season  of  the  herbs.  9.  Are  you  learning  the 
song  again  ? 

36.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  Acoustic,  pertaining  to  hearing,  is  a  clipped 
form  of  d/covo-rifcd?,  an  adjective  with  an  ending 
which  we  shall  meet  frequently.     The  addition  of 
an  -s  gives  the  noun  acoustics,  the  science  of  sounds, 
as  heard. 

2.  The  adverb  ev  appears  in  the  form  eu-,  with 
the  force    of  well,  easy,  good,  in  a  considerable 
number  of  words  besides  eu-phony.     (See  51,  5,  a  ; 
60,  1.) 

3.  Story  is  merely  a  corrupted  form  of  history, 
but  has  come  to  have  a  slightly  different  meaning. 
We  speak  of  such  forms  as  corrupted  (literally 
spoiled),  because  at  first  the  change  was  simply  a 


36]  fl-  VERBS.  25 

mistake,  or  blunder,  due  to  carelessness  or  igno- 
rance; but  after  a  while  the  new  form  became 
common,  accepted  by  every  one,  and  general  good 
usage  makes  a  word  entirely  respectable  and  cor- 
rect. These  slight  changes  of  form,  followed 
often  by  a  variation  of  meaning,  are  no  small  part 
of  the  growth  and  development  of  a  language, 
and  the  process  is  all  the  time  going  on. 

4.  Mrjxavij  also  is  represented  by  two  different 
forms.     First  it  became  in   Latin  machina;  this 
became  machine  in  French,  from  which  the  word 
was  taken  into  English.    Then  more  directly  from 
Greek  we  have  mechan-ic  (/t^aw/to?),  mechan-ism, 
with  various  derivatives  and  compounds. 

5.  A  special  meaning  of  tr^oX?;  was  leisure  de- 
voted to  study;  this  gave  the  Latin  schola,  from 
which  we  get  schol-ar  (Latin  scholar  is)  and  the 
corrupted  form  school     Scholastic  (o-^oXao-r^o?), 
is  from  cr;£oXafa>.     Again,  from  o-^oX?/  is  derived 
(with  a  changed  but   clearly  related   meaning) 
cr-)(o\iov  an  explanation,  comment,  scholium.   Scholium 
has  the   Latinized  ending,  ~um  for  -oi/.     Finally, 
from  o-^oX/oi/  is  derived  scholiast  (o-^oXmo-r^?),  a 
commentator,   especially   one   of    those   otherwise 
unknown   commentators  whose  explanations  are 
found  on  the  margins  of  old  Greek  and   Latin 
manuscripts. 

6.  Phonetics  (from  <f>cov>fy  is  the  science  of  spoken 
sounds,  or  the  sounds  of  the  human  voice,  and  is 
thus  to  be  distinguished  from  acoustics  (see  36, 1). 
Phonetic  (<£&>  1/77x1*09),  is  the  corresponding  adjective. 


26 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[37- 


V.  A-DECLENSION  :  SECOND  CLASS  OP  FEMININES. 


37. 


77 


•)  V 

ball 


77 


tongue 


rr 


r<f)aipa 


Sing.  Nom.  77 

Gen.  T 
Dat. 
Ace. 

Voc.  & 

Dual  N.  A.V.  TOO      afyaipd 

G.  D.  TO£I>     a<palpaiv 

Plu.  Nom.  at 

Gen.  TWI> 
Dat. 
Ace. 

Voc.  &>         crcfralpcu 


mode  of  life 
Siaira 


Bialry 

Staira-v 

Slaira 

Siaird 
Siairaiv 

<yXwo"(7a6        §laiTai 
SICUTWV 


Siairai 


38.  The  Second  Class  of  Feminines  of  the  a- 
declension  shorten  long  a  of  the  stem  to  short  a 
in  the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  singular 
only.  In  all  other  respects  these  nouns  are  like 
those  of  the  First  Class  (see  22,  23,  24,  a,  25-28). 

a.  In  all  the  nouns  of  this  class  the  accent  is  recessive,  that 
is,  stands  as  far  from  the  end  as  the  general  rules  of  accent 
allow. 

39.    Vocabulary. 


j  7\(S<7era  (or 
y\a)TTC(,),  -779 
77  §latTay  -779 
77  /jiovcra,  -779 
77  jAovo-i/ctj,  -779 


(1)  ^         (2)  j  (glossa-ry). 

mode  of  life  (diet). 
Muse. 


music, 


41]  A-DECLENSION  :  SECOND  CLASS.  27 


make  (poet). 
77  a(f)aipa,  -d?  ball,  sphere. 

77  vyteia,  -d?  health,  good  health  (Hygeia). 

-d9  she-goat  (chimaera). 


40.  Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  "E^owrt  <r<f)alpav.  2.  77  ^i/jLaipa  rrjv  fjiov<rt,/cr)v 
d/covei.  3.  al  /Jiova-ai  fjiovcri/crjv  7roi€ov<ri.  4.  ri 
€<m(y)1  (is)  77  Siaira  TT}?  xifjialpd?  ;  5.  17  777  ec 
<r<f>aipa.  6.  at'  /Z-OVOYU  ou  fJLavOdvov(Ti  ra? 
a>So9>  oiSe  (wor)  at  ;£//Aat/>at  TO? 
a58a9.  7.  vyieiav  e'xop.ev  ev  ij/3y. 


n.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  she-goat  by  her  (Greek  idiom  6y  £fo; 
compare  35,  I.,  1)  mode-of-life  has  good-health. 
2.  We  are  learning  about  the  mode-of-life  of  the 
muses.  3.  We  hear  the  language  of  the  muse. 
4.  They  are  writing  music.  5.  The  language 
sounds  well.  6.  He  is  making  a  ball.  7.  Do  you 
hear  the  music  of  the  spheres  ? 

41.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  rXwrra  appears,  in  the  sense  of  language,  in 
poly-glot  (poly-  means  many;  see  91,  12).  In  later 
Greek  yX&oraa  came  to  mean  an  obsolete  or  foreign 


1  After  €<m  and  also  after  any  word  ending  in  -o-t,  v  is  often 
added,  whether  the  next  word  begins  with  a  vowel  or  with  a 
consonant.  This  is  called  v  movable. 


28  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [41— 

word,  requiring  explanation,  and  then  an  explana- 
tion given  for  such  a  word.  In  this  sense  we  have 
the  form  gloss,  and  the  derivative  glossary.  The 
name  <y\u>TTL$,  from  y\a)rra,  was  given  (probably 
from  the  resemblance  in  shape)  to  the  mouthpiece 
of  a  musical  instrument  like  our  clarinet;  and 
Greek  physicians  applied  the  same  term  to  the 
narrow  upper  end  of  the  windpipe  or  larynx  (see 
76)  ;  the  latter  is  the  meaning  of  glottis. 

2.  The  muses  were  goddesses  of  literature  and 
the  arts,  and  everything  over  which  they  presided 
was  included  under  ^OVO-IKI'I.     Later,  /jLovo-ifcrj  was 
restricted  to  the  art  of  music,  as  we  understand 
that  term. 

3.  Henri-sphere  has  for  its  first  part  rj^i-,  a  Greek 
prefix  meaning  half,  related  to  the  Latin  prefix 
semi-,  and  never  used  as  a  separate  word.     Hemi- 
forms  part  of  many  English  scientific  terms.     In 
sphere  and  its  derivatives,  ae,  the  Latin  equivalent 
of  ai>,  has  been  replaced  with  e.     The  change  was 
made  because  the  letter  e  represents  more  simply 
the  sound  which  was  given  to  ae  in  the  English 
pronunciation  of  Latin.      So  in  diet  from  Slaira, 
and  in  chimera. 

4.  'Tyleia  was  personified  as  a  goddess  of  health, 
Hygeia,  the  English  word  representing  the  later 
shortened  Greek  form.     From  the  same  word  we 
have  hygiene  and  hygienic. 

5.  The  chimaera   was   a  fabulous   fire-spouting 
monster,  with  a  goat's  body,  a  lion's  head,  and  a 
serpent's  tail.     Hence  the  word  is  often  used  for 


43] 


k-LECLENSlON :  MASCULINES. 


29 


any  imaginary  object  of  fear.  It  is  usually  spelled 
chimera,  e  taking  the  place  of  ae,  as  in  sphere  and 
diet.  The  adjective  chimerical  often  does  not 
imply  fear,  but  only  that  the  thing  is  fanciful  and 
improbable  or  impossible. 


42. 


VI.  A-DECLENSION  :  MASCULINES. 

o  (tcpiTd-)     6  (ySopea-)     o  (TroXrra-) 


judge 

north-wind 

citizen 

Sing.  Nom. 

r 
0 

tcpt,Ttj-<: 

fioped-s 

7ToX*T17-9 

Gen. 

TOV 

KplTOV 

ftop4ov 

TroXfrou 

Dat. 

T$3 

/CplTTj 

fioped 

TToXtTT) 

Ace. 

TO  V 

Kpt,Tl')-V 

Poped-  v 

7TOX/T77-J/ 

Voc. 

& 

/CplTO, 

ftoped 

TToXtra 

DualN.A.V. 

TO) 

Kptra 

TroX^ra 

G.D. 

TOIV 

/cptTaiv 

TToXfTOlV 

Plu.   Nom. 

01 

tepiTat 

TroXZrat 

Gen. 

T&V 

KplT&V 

TroXZrwj/ 

Dat. 

rofc 

KpiTals 

TroXfrais 

Ace. 

\ 

KpiTas 

7ToXtT(Z9 

Voc. 

0 

KpiTai 

TTOXtTttt 

43.  Masculines  of  the  a-declension  are  like  the 
f eminines,  except  in  the  following  particulars : 

a.  They  take  the  case-ending  -9  in  the  nomina- 
tive singular. 

b.  The  genitive  singular  ends  in  -ov. 

c.  Nouns   in  -TT/<?   have   in   the   vocative   singu- 
lar -rd. 


30  THE  GKEEK  lit  ENGLISH. 


44.   Vocabulary. 

Pd\\a>  throw. 

6  /3opea9,  -ot>  north-wind  (Boreas). 

6  &e<T7roT?79,  -ou1      master,  owner  of  slaves  (despot). 
Kpivw  judge. 

o  Kpirris,  -ov  judge  (critic). 

•jrapd,  prep.  w.  dat.,  at  the  side  of,  beside  (£3X&-ffrapK). 
Trapa-  ySaXXca  compare  (literally,  throw  beside). 

(  poet  (literally,  maker,  from 

O  7T0497T779,    -OV  ,     N  J 

(          7TOL60)). 

rj  Trapa-  /3oX?;,  -979     comparison,  illustration,  parable. 
6  7ro\tT?79,  -ou  citizen  (polit-ics). 

ep,  prep.  w.  ace.,   beyond  (bypeY-criticafy. 

outdo,  excel  (literally,  throw  be- 
'  v  J  ' 


f  r         >o  A  /     «     i  excess,    extravagance    (literally, 
rj  v7T€p-fio\r),  -779    ]  ,      ..     ^   i.         i.  i 

(      over-shooting),  hyperbole. 

45.  Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 
1.    CH    ^el/o    roi)    TToXtrov    /3a\\ei    rrjv 

2.  Tra/m  r^  cJS?}  ypd<f)o/ji€v  (para-graph) 

3.  o   Sec77TOT7;9    oi  or^oXa£ei   ftd\\€iv   rrjv 

4.  T^I>  7?}^  a-fyaipa  7rapa/3d\\o/Jiev.     5.   <w 

oi^:  dfcoveis  rrjv  rov  Kpurov  (frcovijv  ;     6.   ot  iroKlrai 
OVK  atcovovcri  rrjv  7rapa/3o\rjv.    7.  ra>  Kpira  rypdfarov 

7T€pl    T^9    TCOZ/    7TO\2TO)V    V7Tep^O\^.        8.     Tt    UTTep   TOZ^ 

ftopedv  (hyper-borean)  eVrt  (is,  Latin  es^)  ; 

1  ACOTTOTT;?  draws  the  accent  back  in  the  vocative  singular  : 


46]  A-DECLENSION :  MASCULINES.  31 

n.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  citizens  are  throwing  ball  again.  2.  The 
master  compares  the  head  of  the  poet  to  a  ball. 
3.  Have  we  a  master  ?  4.  Citizens,  you  hear  the 
voice  of  the  judges.  5.  We  do  not  judge  the 
citizens.  6.  They  throw  the  ball  beyond  the 
master.  7.  We  are  comparing  the  judges.  8. 
Citizen,  you  are  learning  the  language  of  the 
poets. 

46.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  From  the  root  of  tcpivco  and  Kpnris  is  derived 
the  adjective  tcpinicos  capable  of  judging,  which 
gives  us  critic,  critical,  criticise,  criticism ;  also  tcpi- 
Trjptov  criterion,  and  Kpia^  judgment,  trial,  which 
gives  us  crisis. 

2.  From  TroXtrrj?  we  have  not  only  politics,  po- 
litical, politic ;  but  also  (through  TroXrre/o,  -a?  ad- 
ministration, form  of  government)  polity,  policy,  and 
the  still  farther  shortened  police. 

3.  The  derivatives  of  ySaXXw  show  the  original 
form  of  the  root  with  one  X,  and  often  with  a 
changed    to  o,    as   in    7rapaj3o\ij    and    i/TrepySoX?;. 
In   parable  the  o,   even,  has   been   dropped,  but 
the  adjective  parabolical  is  nearer   to  the  Greek 
form.     Another  compound  of  /3aXXa>  is  &a-/3aXXa> 
slander,  in  which  the  force  of  the  separate  parts 
is  not  very  clear.     From  Sia-fidXXco  come  SiafioXij 
slander  and  Smy8oXo<?  slanderer.     This  latter  was 
used  especially  as  a  title  of  Satan,  and  has  been 
corrupted  into  devil;  but,  as  with  parabolical,  the 


32  THE  GEEEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [46— 

adjective  diabolical  was  taken  more  directly  from 
the  Greek  form. 

4.  Poet,  poetry,  and  poesy  come  to  us  through 
the  Latin  forms  poeta  and  poesis,  which  have  lost 
the  i  of  the  original  Greek  form.     In  Greek  itself, 
however,   Troiea)   and  its   derivatives   were   often 
written  and  pronounced  7roeo>,  etc.,  without  i. 

5.  In  a  par-ody  (jraptoSla,  from  Trapd  and  cJS^ ; 
see  29  and  31,  7)  the  words  of  some  writing  are 
altered  just  enough  to  give  them  a  laughable  turn, 
while  they  still  remind  one  of  the  original.     Thus 
in  reading  the  parody  one  seems  to  hear  the  origi- 
nal, usually  a  poem,  sounding  beside  it.      Para- 
graph was  used  at  first  to  denote  a  mark  or  note 
written  beside  the  page,  in  the  margin.      Now  it 
denotes  especially  the  sign  ^[,  used  to  denote  a 
break  in  the  composition,  and  the  beginning  of  a 
new  line  farther  than  usual  from  the  margin ;  and, 
finally,  the  word  stands  for  a  section  or  division 
thus  begun.     Para-  is  an  element  in  many  scien- 
tific words. 

6.  The  preposition  virep  has  the  meaning  beyond 
in  a  few  English  derivatives;   thus  hyper-borean, 
literally  beyond  the  north-wind,  and  so  in  the  ex- 
treme north.    Secondly,  in  a  number  of  derivatives 
the  element  hyper-  denotes  an  extreme  degree,  or 
too  much,  of  something,  as  in  hyper-critical.    (Com- 
pare with  this  the  related  Latin  word  super-,  as  in 
super-natural,  super-sensitive.) 


49]  O -DECLENSION :  MASCULINES.  33 

VII.  O-DECLENSION:  MASCULINES  AND 
FEMININES. 

47.  6   (ai/0/Ht>7TO-)        O   (/Z1700-)       f)   (680-) 

man  tale  road 

Sing.  Nom.  avOpayrro-s          i*v0o-<;  oSo'-? 

Gen.  dvOpcoTTOv  p,v9ov  6Sov 

ACC.  aV0pQ)7TO-V  JJLV00-1'  6S6-V 

VOC.  aV0p(O7T€  fAV0€  6Se 

Dual  N.  A.  V.      dv0pd)7ra)          /JLV0Q)  68(0 

G.  D.  dv0p(iyjrotv         pv0oiv  oSolv 

Plu.    N.  V.  dv0pc&7rot,  fiv0OL  oSoi 

Gen.  CtV0p(t)7TG)V  U,vO(i)V  OuWV 

Dat.  dv0pa)7rois 

Ace.  dv0p(t)7rov$ 


48.  All  stems  of  the  second  declension  end  in  o. 
Masculines  and  feminines x  are  declined  alike. 

a.  The  rules  for  the  accent  of  nouns,  given  in  25-27,  apply 
to  all  declensions. 

49.    Vocabulary. 

6  avOpoyrros,  -ov     man  (anthropo-logy). 
6  $/o5,  -ov  life  (bio-graphy). 

yt,yvd)<TKQ)  perceive,  learn  to  know  (Gno-stic). 

read  (originally   know  again, 


ava-ywvotxr/ca)  .    . 

(      re-cognize). 

6  &po//,o9,  -of          a  running,  race  (palm-drome). 

1  The  number  of  feminine  -o-  stems  is  not  large,  and  only 
one,  68os,  is  used  in  The  Greek  in  English. 


34  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [50— 

icai  and. 

(  (1)  order.  (2)  ornament,  (3)  the 

Of  1  •  77X  N 

(      universe,  world  (cosmos). 
/coo-  flea)  adorn  (cosmetic). 

\eyco  speak,  tell. 

<  ^  i  s?     (  (1)    word,     (2)    £aZ&,   discourse, 

o  \0709,  -ou  (fr.  )  v  '  \  y          ': 

~/\  \      (o)   account,    description    (an- 

\67G>)  I          ^  i  \ 

V      thropo-logy). 

o  /jivOos,  -ov  tale,  legend,  myth. 

f  r^/        ^  (  roac?,  t^av  (odo-meter  ;   see  meter, 

7?   OS09,    -OV  '          ^ 


o/?acD  s^e  (cosm-orama). 

o  <f)i\os,  -ov  friend  (phil-anthropy). 

6  xpovos,  -ov  time  (chrono-logy). 


50.  Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.    Ol  Trotrjral   &)Sa9   TroieovGi.     2.    TOV  ftiov  rov 
pd(j)o/jL€v    (bio-graphy)  .      3.    <j)l\os    <ypdcf)€i, 
<j)cova)v  \d<yov  (phon-o-log^y)  KOI  rwv  /juvOcov  \6yov 
(mytho-logy).    4.  ^1X09  av0pd)7rcov  (phil-anthrop-ist) 
io-TOpidv  <ypd(f>€i.     5.  77  y\a)(rcra  TOV  Kpirov  ev  \6yei. 

6.  dva<yLyva)O'Ko/jL€v  r?}9  ^1)^9  \6<yov  (psych-o-logy)  . 

7.  o  7roXtT7;9   ov  ry(,<yva)crK€L  rbv  %p6vov.       8.   opdeTe 
TOV  $pd/jiov  ev  TTJ  oSco  ;     9.   TO^  /JLV()OV<;  TWV 
dvayiyvd)CTK€T€    €V    Trj    a"^o\f).       10.    e^ei    o 

(3d  meaning)  yjrv^v  ;  l    11.  €v  \eyei  Trepl  TOV  (say 
his)  <f)i\ov. 

1  Certain  ancient  thinkers  believed  that  it  has. 


51]  O-DECLJ-:\>1<>\  :    MA  >r r LINES.  35 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  A  citizen  of  the  world  (cosmo-polite)  is  read- 
ing an  account  of  the  times  (chrono-logy).  2.  The 
poets  speak  and  we  hear.  3.  They  are  reading 
the  tale  of  the  chimera.  4.  We  hear  the  words 
of  friends.  5.  They  read  an  account  of  life  (bio- 
logy) and  an  account  of  the  earth  (ge-o-logy ;  see 
31,  3).  6.  The  poet  is  making  an  ode  about  the 
soul.  7.  The  poets  adorn  the  legends  and  write 
poems  (^Troujfiara).  8.  The  life  adorns  the  man. 
9.  Do  you  see  a  man  beside  the  road?  10.  He  is 
speaking  about  the  race  of  a  man  and  a  she-goat. 

51.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  In  bio-graphy,  bio-logy,  cosmo-polite,  and  chrono- 
logy, it  is  plain  that  the  letter  o-  at  the  end  of  the 
first  part  of  the  compound  belongs  to  the  stem  of 
that  part,  —  ftio-,  KOOTAO-,  ^povo-.     The  number  of 
compounds  in  which  the  first  member  was  an  o- 
stem  was  very  large,  so  large  that  the  a-  came  to 
be  carelessly  regarded  as  a  mere  device  for  con- 
necting the  two  parts  of  any  compound.     Hence 
the  -0-  was  often  inserted  in  other  cases,  where  it 
is  only  a  sort  of  spoken  hyphen,  connecting  the 
two   members,  although   the   first    member    may 
have  ended  originally  in  a-  or  a  consonant.     (See 
31,  3.) 

2.  The  root  of  yiyvd^a-KO)  is  71/0-  or  71x0-,  related 
to  our  word  know,  in  which  the  k  was  formerly 
pronounced.   From  this  root  was 


36  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [51— 

"knowing"  whence  our  word  Gnostic.  An  ancient 
religious  sect  were  called  Gnostics,  because  they- 
claimed  to  be  particularly  "  knowing "  on  certain 
subjects.  (For  agnostic  see  60,  3,  5.)  Gnome  is 
also  a  derivative  of  yiryvcticrKG)  ;  certain  imaginary 
beings  were  so  called  because  they  were  supposed 
to  know  where  mineral  treasures  were  hidden  in 
the  earth. 

3.  Apo'yu<o9  appears   in  palin-dBome   (see   31,   6), 
and  dromedary,  which  comes  to  us  through  a  late 
Latin  form  dromedarius,  -edarius  being  a  combina- 
tion of  derivative  endings. 

4.  KocryLto?  appears  in  English  in  two  meanings, 
which  at  first  sight  seem   not  very  closely  con- 
nected.     First,  from  the   meaning  ornament,  we 
get,  through  /coo-peco  and  KOO-JJ^TIKO^  the  word  cos- 
metic.    Secondly,  the  visible  universe  was  called 
Koa-fio^  as  being  an  orderly,  well-arranged  system  ; 
and  in  this  sense  we  have  cosmos,  from  which  cos- 
mic and  cosmical  naturally  follow.     In  cosmo-polite, 
cosmo-politan  the  first  part,  instead  of  including  the 
entire  universe,  is  restricted  to  the  various  coun- 
tries of  the  earth.     So  in  cosm-orama,  of  which  the 
second  part  is  from  opda). 

5.  a.  The  syllable  -log-,  representing   Xo'yo?   in 
the  sense  of  discourse,  account,  description,  appears 
in  many  names  of  sciences,  like  those  in  the  Exer- 
cises.    In  fact  this  element,  preceded  by  an  -o-,  is 
so  familiar  that  there  has  even  been  formed  from 
it  the  separate  word  ology,  used  most  often  in  the 
plural  as  a  rather  humorous  name  for  the  sciences. 


51]  O-DECLENSION :  MASCULINES.  37 

Eu-logy  (see  36,  2)  is  good  talk,  a  speaking  well, 
about  one ;  that  is,  praise.  Eu-logium  is  a  longer 
form  of  the  same  word ;  eu-logize  is  the  correspond- 
ing verb.  A  pro-logue  (TT/DO  before,  Latin  pro)  is 
something  spoken  before,  as  an  introduction  to  a 
poem  or  play.  (Compare  epilogue,  68,  6.)  A  hor- 
o-loge  (&pd,  see  31,  8)  is  an  instrument  which  tells 
the  time.  Further,  Xoyo?  signifies  that  power  of 
the  mind  which  is  exhibited  in  speech,  namely, 
reason.  From  \6yos  in  this  sense  we  have  logic 
(\oyiKrf),  the  science  of  reasoning. 

b.  The  preposition  avd,  up  or  along,  has  taken  on 
a  variety  of  meanings,  the  connection  of  which  is 
not  so  plain  as  might  be  wished.  Like  Latin  re- 
(seen  in  re-pel,  re-novate,  re-new)  it  signifies  back 
and  again.  Thus  from  dva-ypd<f)co  write  back  or 
again,  we  have  ana-gram,  a  word  or  phrase  formed 
by  re-writing  in  a  different  order,  or  transposing, 
the  letters  of  another  word  or  phrase.  So  ana- 
chron-ism  is  a  transposition  or  confusion  of  the  time 
(^ovo?)  of  events.  In  dva-yiy wvo- /ceo  the  preposi- 
tion has  the  force  of  again,  and  likewise  in  ana- 
baptist, one  who  holds  that  those  baptized  in  infancy 
should  be  re-baptized  when  older  (/3a7rrt£co  bap- 
tize). Then  in  two  or  three  phrases  avd  was  used 
in  the  sense  of  according  to  ;  one  of  these  was  ova 
\dyov,  in  which  \6<yo<;  also  has  a  highly  specialized 
sense,  that  of  reckoning  or  ratio.  From  this  phrase 
was  formed  the  adjective  dvdXoyos  analogous,  ap- 
plied to  things  which  are  to  each  other  according 
to  a  certain  ratio,  or  which  are  alike  in  their  rela- 


38  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [51— 

tions  or  circumstances.  The  neuter  form  dvaXoyov 
gives  us  analogon  or  analogue,  an  analogous  word 
or  thing  ;  analogy  (avdXo^La)  is  the  relation  between 
analogous  things. 

The  prefix  ana-  is  found  in  many  scientific  terms, 
and  should  not  be  confused  with  negative  an-,  for 
which  see  60,  3,  b. 

c.  The  preposition  /card  down  is  also  much  used 
in  composition  with  meaning  more  or  less  changed. 
Thus  /card-\o<yos  a  telling  down,  as  it  were,  that  is 
list,  cata-logue;  cata-comb  (/CV/JL/STJ,  -779,  something 
hollow^),  underground  passages  where  the  dead 
were  deposited. 

6.  Philo-,  phil-,  and  -phile  are  the  representatives 
of  </>/Xo9,  as  in  phil-anthropy,  love  of  mankind,  phil- 
harmonic (dpfjiovid  harmony),  philter  ($l\rpov  love- 
charm,  or  means  of  producing  love),  pnilo-Turkish, 
Turco-phile,     Slavo-phile,    phil-hellenic    (r/E\\rjv  a 
GrreeK),  and  others.     Philo-logy  is  etymologically 
fondness  for  words  or  for  language ;    hence  the 
study  of  words  or  of  language,  or  in  a. larger  sense, 
the  study  of  literature  and  all  that  is  expressed  in 
language. 

7.  XpoVo9  gives  us  chronic,  applied  to  diseases 
that  have  lasted  a  long  time,  and  chronicle,  a  narra- 
tive of  events  in  the  order  of  time. 

8.  Psychic    (^£^#09)    is    our    adjective    from 
tyv'Xr).     Psych-o-logy  is  the  science  which  treats  of 
the  nature  and  powers  of  the  soul. 


54] 


O- DECLENSION :  NEUTERS. 


39 


VIII.   O-DECLENSION:  NEUTERS. 


52. 


TO   (/I6TpO-) 

measure 

/JL€TpO-V 

perpov 


TO    (07C777TTpO-) 

staff 


TO 

TOV 


(T/cijTrrpov 


TO 

& 


TO) 
TOW 

\ 
TO, 

TO)V 


/Ji€TpO-V 
fJL€TpO-V 

jJ,€TpQ) 
/JLCTpOLV 

fJL€Tpa 


(T/crjTTTpa 


TO,        /jLerpa 

9 
O) 


Sing.  Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 

DualN.A.V. 
G.D. 

Plu.    Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 


53.  Neuters  of  this  declension  differs  from  mas- 
culines only  in  the  nominative,  accusative,  and  voca- 
tive, singular  and  plural.  In  the  singular  these 
cases  take  the  case-ending  -v  :  in  the  plural  they 
change  the  stem-vowel  -o  to  -a.  (Compare  Latin 
metrum,  metrd.*) 

54.   Vocabulary. 

a-Tro,  prep.  w.  gen.  only,  from,  away  from  (apo-logy). 
TO  SevSpov,  -of  tree  (rhodo-dendron). 

Sid,  prep.  w.  gen.,  through  (dia-meter). 

eXe^/prep.w.gen.only,  out  of,  from  (Latin  ex). 


1  Proclitic  (see  19)  ;  CK  is  used  before  a  consonant,  e£  before 
a  vowel, 


40  THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [55— 

TO  epyov,  -ov  work  (en-erg-y) 

1  he  (she,  it)  is. 

1  they  are. 

6  ^X*o9,  -ov  sun  (helio-trope). 

TO  Oedrpov,  -ov  theatre  (p lace  of  seeing,  6 ea). 

TO  Oeppbv,  -ov  heat  (therm-al). 

TO  fjuerpov,  -ov  measure  (meter,  metr-ic). 
TO  opyavov-ov  (related j  imtrument  (          } 

to  epyov)  ) 

7repi,  prep.  w.  gen.,  about,  concerning. 

w.  ace.,  around  (peri-meter). 

TO  pobov,  -ov  rose  (rhodo-dendron). 

TO  o-KrjTrrpoVy  -ov  staff,  sceptre. 

TpeTTQ)  turn. 
6  T/OO'TTO?,  -ov (f r.  T/oe7r&)),  a  turn  (trope). 

55.  The  verb-forms  eon  and  eio-t,  with  a  few  other  words, 
are  enclitics  (from  cv  and  K\tva)  lean)  ;  that  is,  they  usually 
have  no  accent  of  their  own,  but  lean  on  the  preceding  word. 
As  to  accents  in  this  connection  we  have  the  following  rules : 

a.  The  word  before  an  enclitic,  (1)  If  it  has  the  acute  on 
the  ultima,  does  not  change  the  acute  to  the  grave :  Trot^TT/s 
eon.  (2)  If  it  has  the  circumflex  on  the  penult,  or  the  acute 
on  the  antepenult,  it  takes  also  an  acute  on  the  ultima :  <r<t>cupd 
€<m,  opyavov  ccrrt. 

6.  An  enclitic  of  two  syllables  takes  an  acute  on  the  ultima, 
if  the  preceding  word  has  an  acute  on  the  penult :  poSov  ecrrt. 

56.  ^Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 
1.  ?O    avdp&TTo?   €%€i  poSa  airo   SevSpov  (rhodo- 

1  See  40, 1.,  4,  with  note. 


56]  O-  DECLENSION  :  NEUTERS.  41 


dendron)  .     2.  6  ev  rcS  Oearpw^-  avOpwrros 

rpov.    3.  ri  ean  TO  perpov  rfjs  6Sov  Sia  (dia-meter) 

TOV   rj\lOV    KOI    TO  /JiCTpOV  T?}?  oSoV  7T€pl   (peri-Od)   TO  V 

rj\iov  (peri-helion)  ;  4.  e/c  TOV  opydvov  yiyvd^aicofiev 
TO  TOV  Oepfjiov  fierpov  (thermo-meter).  5.  o  Kpt,Tr)<s 
Tp&irei  TTJV  (say  his)  fce<f)a\r]v  CLTTO  TOV  rj\iov.  6.  €K 
TOV  ftlov  T^]V  -^rv^v  av0p(t)7TOV  ryiyvcocr/cofjiev.  7.  rot'9 

T/3O7TOU9    TT)?    6SoV    OV%    6pa€T€.          8.    OL     TTOirjTai    €iO~L 

<f)i\oi.  9.  ol  <f)l\oi  elorl  TroirjTai.  10.  ov  Trj\€  CLTTO 
TOV  Oearpov  SevSpov  etrrt.  11.  ol  <f)i\oi  Kocr^eovcn 
pdSoi?  Trjv  TOV  TTOtrjTov  K€<f>a\rjv.  12.  rt  TTOLCCI  TO 


II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  You  do  not  perceive  the  measure  of  the  time 
(chrono-meter).  2.  We  see  roses  in  the  theatres. 
3.  The  man  makes  a  road  around  the  earth  (peri- 
gee). 4.  The  earth  is  far  from  the  sun  (aph- 
elion 2).  5.  In  work  (energy),  not  in  talk,  is  the 
way  of  the  soul's  health.  6.  [There]  is  a  tree 
beside  the  road.  7.  On  the  tree  is  a  rose.  8.  The 
sun  makes  the  rose.  9.  I  see  the  helio-trope  (TO 
ff^io-TpoTnov)  and  the  roses.  10.  What  is  the 
measure  of  the  staff?  11.  The  sun  adorns  the 
earth  with  roses.  12.  The  heat  of  the  sun  turns 
back  the  citizen  from  the  road. 

1  Such  a  phrase  standing  between  the  article  and  its  noun 
modifies  the  noun. 

2  Before  the  rough  breathing  OLTTO  may  lose  its  final  vowel, 
and  then  takes  the  form  dd>'. 


42  THE  GEEEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [57— 

57.  Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  Apology  (a7ro-Ao7/a,  from  O/TTO  and  ^0705)  is 
literally  a  talking  off,  with  which  are  connected 
apologize  and  apologetic.     Apo-logue,  though  of  the 
same  derivation  exactly,  has  a  curiously  different 
meaning.     Usage  often  proves  stronger  than  ety- 
mology in  fixing  the  significance  of  words.     Apo- 
gee has  777  for  its  second  part. 

2.  Di-orama  is  from  Si-opdco  (from  Sid  and  o/oa&>) 
to  see  through.     (Compare  cosmorama,   51,  4,  and 
panorama,  110,  11.) 

3.  Exodus  (€£-0809)  is  from  e£  and  0809,  with 
Latinized  ending  -us.     Meth-od  (/-ie#-oSo9)  also  con- 
tains a  fragment  of  0809 ;  the  first  part  is  the  prep- 
osition fierd,  which  with  the  accusative  means  after. 
As  a?™  before  the  rough  breathing  becomes  «</>',  so 
//-era  becomes  pe6\     Method,  then,  is  primarily  a 
way  after,  or  a  going  after,  something ;  hence  an 
inquiry,  then  the    systematic  way  of  making  an  in- 
quiry or  investigation. 

4.  The  name  George  is  our  corruption  of  Tewp- 
7^09,  which  goes  back  finally  to  an  older  form  of 
777  and  the  root  of  epyov,  and  so  means  earth-worker, 
titter  of  the  soil.     In  forming  the  compound,  a  pe- 
culiar change  of  vowels  has  taken  place.    A  similar 
change  has  taken  place  in  geo-metry  (^yecofjuerpla), 
land-measuring;  for  the  Greek  science  of  geometry 
was  used  originally  for  measuring  land.     For  hor- 
o-meter  (also  containing  perpov)  compare  31,  8. 

5.  From  ^\609   come   various   scientific  terms, 


58]  ADDITIONAL  A-   AND  O- STEMS.  43 

such  as  heliacal,  connected  with  the  sun,  and  helio- 
meter,  originally  an  instrument  for  measuring  the 
diameter  of  the  sun. 

6.  Along  with  the  theatre  must  be  placed  amphi- 
theatre.     The  preposition  apfyi  around,   about,  is 
related  to  Latin  ambo,  both.      In  composition  it 
often  means  (1)  on  both  sides,  (2)  double.     The 
latter  is  the  force  of  amphi-  in  amphi-theatre,  and 
also  in  amphi-bious  (yS/o?),  having  a  double  life,  that 
is,  in  the  water  and  in  air. 

7.  The    tropic  is  the  apparent  turning-pl&cQ  of 
the  sun.     Trophy  is  a  corrupted  form  of  rpoTraiov, 
related  to  rpoVo?.     At  the  place  where  the  enemy 
turned  in  flight  during  a  battle,  the  Greeks  piled 
up,  or  fastened  on  a  tree,  part  of  the  armor  taken 
from  the  enemy.     This  remained  as  a  memorial  of 
victory.     (For  variation  of  e  of  rpeTro)  to  o  of  rpo- 
7T09  compare  /3aXAo>,  46,  3.) 

IX.  ADDITIONAL  A-  AND  O- STEMS. 
58.   Vocabulary. 

-ou  messenger  (angel). 

report,  announce. 

6  aSe\<£o9,  -ou  brother  (Adelphi). 

o  au\o9,  -oO  pipe  (hydr-aul-ic). 

eVt,  prep.  w.  ace.,  to  (after  verbs  of  motion). 

6  0eo9,  -ou1  a  god,  God  (theo-logy). 

6  J/7T7T09,  -ou  horse  (hippo-drome). 

1  The  vocative  singular  of  0cos  is  like  the  nominative. 
Compare  Latin  deus,  vocative  deus. 


44 


THE  GEEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[59— 


o  /cpv<TTa\\os,  -ov 


,  "OV 


TO  fjiovcrelov,  -ov 

fr.  /jLovaa) 
6  TrapdSeiaos,  -ov 
6  TroXe/409,  -ov 
o  TroTa/Jids,  -ov 


ice  (crystal). 

circle  (cycle,  cyclone). 

form  (morph-ology). 

house  of  the  muses,  museum. 

park  (paradise). 

war  (polemics). 

river  (hippo-potamus). 

send. 

send  away. 

envoy,  ambassador  (apostle). 

letter  (epistle). 

art,  skill  (techn-ology). 

place  (topo-graphy). 

water  (hydr-aulics). 

fear  (hydrophob-ia). 

59.  ^Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  To  v&cop  pel  (flows)  Sia  rov  av\ov  (hydr-aulic, 
hydr-aulics).  2.  opday  rov  ITTTTOV  eV  rcS  Trora/tft) 
(hippo-potamus).  3.  ol  aSeX</>ol  <f>i\oi,1  (Phil-adelphia) 
ela-f.  4.  <£/Xo9  VTTTTCOV  (Phil-ip,  <3>/A,fc7r7ro9)  Trepl  rwv 
TOTTCOV  ypdfat,  (topo-graphy)  rw^2  ev  rq>  TrapaSeto-q). 
5.  o  TTorayLto?  pel  eV  KVK\G)  (en-cycl-ical)  Trepl  TO 
liovcrelov.  6.  o  /3oped$  iroieei  /cpvcrTa\\ov  eV  rot? 

1  The  article  is  omitted  with  a  predicate  noun ;  thus  we  can 
often  distinguish  the  subject  from  the  predicate  noun  when 
they  stand  side  by  side,  as  here. 

2  The  repetition  of  rwv  shows  that  ev  ro>  TrapaSctW  belongs 

tO  TO7TODV. 


6  a7TO-(7ToXo9,  -OV 

rj  €Tri-crTO\r}y  -7)9 
97  rexyr],  -779 

O  T07T09,  -OV 

TO  vSoOp 

6      >0^09,  "OV 


60]  ADDITIONAL  A-   AND  Q-STEMS.  45 

Trora/iofc.      7.   o  ayyeXo?  opdei  TTJV  rov  6eov  /j,op<f)7Jv. 

8.  ol  6eol   &TiX\,ovo~i(y)   dyj€\ov<;    eirl 

9.  ol  aSe\cf)ol  (AdelpM)  p,av6dvovo-i(v) 

CTK6LV   Ta?    €7Tl<TTO\aS    TO)V    dTTOO'TOXwV.       10.    Ol    a-TTO- 

<7TO\oi  €7ricrTO\r)V  jpa^ovai  roS  Kptrfj.  11.  o  0oy8o9 
rov  /cpvo-Ta\\ov  rpeTrei  p,€  (me)  diro  rov  TOTTOU.  12.  ol 
deol  e^ovcrt  rrjv  (frcovrjv  ical  rrjv  fJLOp<f>r)V  dv0pa)7rct)v 
(anthropo-morphic).  13.  ol  aTrocrroXo^  ay<y€\\ovo-i 

TOU? 


II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  horses  in  the  park  are  learning  the  art 
of  war.  2.  The  messengers  announce  war.  3.  He 
turns  the  horse  in  a  circle  around  the  park  beyond 
the  museum.  4.  The  water  in  the  pipes  is  from 
the  river.  5.  The  horses  perceive  the  fear  of  the 
master.  6.  We  are  reading  an  account  of  the  arts 
(techn-o-logy).  7.  Fear  in  war  does  not  adorn  the 
citizens.  8.  You  do  not  see  the  forms  of  the  gods. 
9.  Have  you  letters  from  the  brothers  of  the  am- 
bassador? 10.  The  arts  adorn  the  life  of  men. 
11.  The  letter  reports  the  ambassador's  words 
about  war.  12.  The  heat  of  the  sun  sends-away 
ice  from  the  rivers.  13.  Do  you  see  instruments 
of  war  in  the  museums?  14.  The  brothers  per- 
ceive the  skill  of  the  citizens  in  war.  15.  The  am- 
bassador's friend  is  in  the  messenger's  place. 

60,  Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  As  was  said  before  (36,  2),  the  adverb  ev 
often  has  in  composition  the  meaning  good.  From 


46  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [60— 

ev  and  a7<yeXo9  was  formed  the  noun  ev-a<y<ye\i,ov 
good  tidings,  which  is  also  the  meaning  of  our 
Saxon  word  gospel.  In  Latin  this  became  evan- 
gelium,  the  sound  of  the  combination  of  Greek 
letters  eva-  being  best  represented  to  the  Roman 
ear  by  eva-,  pronounced  in  the  Roman  way.  Evan- 
gelium  gave  us  evangel,  evangelical,  evangelize,  etc., 
pronounced  in  our  English  way,  which  causes  the 
first  syllable  to  sound  very  different  from  the  Greek 
eS. 

2.  Philadelphia    is    usually  translated   brotherly 
love  ;  the  verb  c^Xeeo,  from  <£/Xo9,  is  the  common 
word  signifying  to  love. 

3.  a.  Theology  is  the  science  which  treats  of  the 
nature  of  God,  and  his  relation  to  his  works.     The- 
ist  and  theism  are  formed  from  0eo?,  as  deist  and 
deism  from  Latin  deus. 

b.  A-theist  has  for  its  first  element  the  syllable  a- 
(which  takes  the  form  av-  before  a  vowel),  called 
alpha  privative  (Latin  privo,  to  take  away).  This 
syllable  has  the  force  of  not  which  in-  and  un-  have 
in  such  words  as  in-active  and  un-known;  in  fact 
av-  is  the  original  form,  related  to  our  negative  in- 
(from  Latin)  and  un-,  and  might  more  fitly  be 
called  negative  av-.  Accordingly  a-theist  means  not- 
theist.  So  from  pop^rf  we  have  a-morphous,  literally 
shape-less;  from  vS&p,  an-hydrous  av-vSpo$  water-less; 
and  from  gnostic  (see  51,  2),  a-gnostic.  Care  is 
sometimes  necessary  in  order  to  distinguish  this 
an-  followed  by  -a-  from  the  preposition  ana-  (see 
51,  5,  i). 


60]  ADDITIONAL  A-   AND  O-  STEMS.  47 


c.  Apo-theosis  is  formed  directly  from 
deify,  which  goes  back  to  CLTTO  and  #609.  Theo-dore 
(0eo-Sw/309  gift  of  Grod)  has  for  its  second  part 
Swpov,  -ov,  gift.  Poly-theism  (see  91,  12)  is  a  belief 
in  many  gods. 

4.  Hippo-drome,  from  LTTTTOS  and  8po//,o?,  literally 
horse-race,  is  mostly  used  of  a  place  for  a  horse- 
race. 

5.  In  bi-cycle,  the  syllable  bi-  is  a  Latin  prefix 
meaning  double.     (For  tricycle  see  82,  8.) 

6.  Morpheus  (from  popfyrf)  was  the  god  of  dreams 
(literally  the  shaper  or  fashioner)  and  hence  the 
god  of  sleep.     From  Morpheus  in  this  latter  sense 
we  have  morphine.      In  meta-morphosis  (from  //,era- 
fjiop(f)6co  trans-form)  the  preposition  //-era,.  as  is  often 
the  case,  denotes  a  change.      So   also  in  met-em- 
psychosis  (/xer-e/i-i/ru^oct)  from  /xera,  eV,  and  ^t^*?), 
the  doctrine  that  the  soul,  after  the  death  of  the 
body  which  it  inhabits,  is   reborn   into   another. 
Anthropo-morph-ism  (avOpvTros)  is  the  representa- 
tion of  God  in  the  form  or  with  the  character  of 
man. 

7.  Apo-stle  is  another  instance  of  a  word  which 
has  lost  the  o-  of  the  Greek  original,  while  its  ad- 
jective apo-stolic  has  retained  the  vowel.     (Com- 
pare parable  and  parabolic,  devil  and  diabolic,  46,  3.) 
Epistle  and  epi-stol-ary  are   another   similar  pair. 
(With  the  variation  of  e  to  o  in  the  derivatives  of 
<TT€\Xa)  compare  the  variation  of  a  to  o  in  the  de- 
rivatives of  ySaXXw,  46,  3.     See  also  57,  7.) 

8.  Te%i>77  gives  us  technical,  pertaining  to  an  art 


48  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [61— 

or  trade ;  technique  (through,  the  French),  the 
technical  or  material  part  of  an  art,  as  distinguished 
from  the  intellectual  and  imaginative  part,  as  in 
music  or  painting ;  techn-o-logy,  a  description  of  the 
arts ;  also  poly-technic  (see  91,  12). 

9.  "YScop  generally  appears  in  English  as  hydr-. 
Examples  are  hydra  (a  portentous  water-serpent  on 
which  grew  two  new  heads  for  every  one  cut  off), 
hydr-ant,  hydr-o-meter  (//,er/x>j/),  hydr-o-graphy,  hydr- 
o-phobia (<£o/3o9). 

X.  ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  VOWEL  DECLENSION. 

61.  These  adjectives  follow  the  second  declen- 
sion in  the  masculine  and  neuter,  and  the  first  de- 
clension in  the  feminine.  Thus  the  nominative 
singular  ends  in  -09,  -a  (or  -?;),  -ov  (Latin  -us,  -a, 
-urn). 


O  "  "\T  A    f  A     f  J     f 

Gr.  (TOfyoV  (TO^ij^  (7O(f>OV 

\-s  •  (7O(pCt)  (TOfpfJ  (7O(D(t) 

-cV.  (TOCDOI/  (TO&TIV  (TOCpOlS 

Vi  /  i    /  •    / 

.  O"O(p€  GTOCbll  (TO(pOl/ 

Dual  N.  A.  V.  crochet)  cro(f)a  <70<f)(b 

G-pi  I     ^  I     «  f     « 

•  -L'.  (TOCpOiV  (TOtpCLlV  (TOCDOLV 

Plu.      N.  V.  (70(£>Oi  (TO(f)al  (TO<pd 

-U.  (TO(pOl$  (TOchai^  O"O(pOfc9 

At       /  i  ^  JL    ' 

•  ^0(1)01/9  ^O(DCi9  ^O(Z)Ct 


04]   ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  VOWEL  DECLENSION.  49 


other. 


Sing.  N. 

ere/909 

erepd 

erepov 

G. 

erepov 

erepd? 

erepov 

D. 

erepa) 

erepd 

erepa) 

A. 

ere/ooi/ 

erepdv 

erepov 

V. 

erepe 

erepd 

erepov 

Dual  N.A.V. 

ere/oft) 

erepd 

erepco 

G.D. 

erepoLv 

erepaw 

erepoiv 

Phi.    N.V. 

erepoi 

erepai 

erepa 

G. 

erep&V 

erepcov 

erepwv 

D. 

erepois 

erepais 

ere/Dot? 

A. 

erepovs 

erepdv 

erepa 

62.  The   feminine  singular  always   has  a   long 
vowel  throughout ;  long  -d  is  retained  after  e,  i,  or 
p;    otherwise  it  is  changed  to  -77,  as  in  the  first 
class  of  feminine  nouns.     (See  24,  a.) 

a.  In  the  nominative  and  genitive  plural  the  feminine  fol- 
lows the  accent  of  the  masculine. 

63.  Rule.   As  in  Latin,  the  adjective  must  agree 
with  its  noun  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 

64.  The  relative  pronoun,  09,  %,  o  who,  is  declined 

as  follows. 

Sing.  Flu. 

Nff  rf  ff  f/  f/  tf 

09     rj       o  01       ai       a 

G.          ov 


ov 


D.         cS     £ 


ov 


Dual  N.  A. 
G.D. 


OU9 

& 

olv 


a 


50  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [65— 

65,  Rule.  The  relative  pronoun  agrees  with 
its  antecedent  in  gender,  number,  and  person,  but 
takes  the  case  required  by  the  construction  of  its 
own  clause. 

66.   Vocabulary. 

dyaOds,  -77,  -dv  good  (Agatha). 

dvTi,  prep.  w.  gen.,        instead  of. 
TO  aaTpov,  -ov  star  (astr-al). 

!-self;  myself,  himself,  itself, 
etc.  (auto-biography);  pre- 
ceded by  the  article,  same. 
TO  Pi/3\iov,  -ov  book  (Bible). 

Sofceco  think. 

77  Sdga,  -779  (fr.  So/ee&>),  opinion  (ortho-dox). 
€7rt,  prep.  w.  dat.,          upon  (compare  58  eV&). 
erepo9,  -a,  ~ov  other  (hetero-dox). 

/ea/eo9,  -77,  -ov  bad  (caco-phony). 

6  Xi#o9,  -ov  stone  (litho-graph). 

alone,  only,  only  one  (mono- 


-77,  -ov  N 

gram). 

deal  out,  distribute  (Nemesis). 
6  v6/j,os?-ov(fi:.v€fjiG)),  law  (metro-nome). 

!(1)  straight,  (2)  upright, 
(3)  right  (as  opposed  to 
wrong')  (ortho-dox). 

1  The  neuter  nominative  and  accusative  singular  of  avros  is 
avro ;  otherwise  the  word  is  declined  like  o-o<£os,  "but  has  no 
vocative  form. 

2  Nojuo?  means,  first,  what  is  dealt  out  to  one,  and  so  what  is 
held  in  use  and  possession ;  hence  the  meanings  custom,  usage, 
and  finally  law.    For  change  of  e  to  o  compare  60,  7. 


67]   ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  VOWEL  DECLENSION.  51 

09,  r\y  o  who,  that,  which. 

7rco\ea)  sell. 

6  fiij3Xio-7rd)\r}<;,  -ov  book-seller,  biblio-pole. 

c-0009,  -i],  -dv  wise  (theo-soph). 

77  vofyid,  -09  wisdom  (Sophia). 

67.  Exercises. 
I.   Translate  into  English. 

1.  'O  KpiTr)$  ypdfai  dyaffov  j3i/3\lov  Trepl  TWV 
v6/jiQ)v.  2.  o  TToirjrr)?  avTos  ypdfai,  (auto-graph) 
TOV  (his)  /3lov  (auto-bio-graphy).  3.  ol  iroKlrai 
01  rou9  vop,ovs  avrol  Troieovaw,  avrovo/Jiol  (auto- 
nomous) eiai.  4.  ov  a"%o\d£o/Jb€v  eVl  \l0<p  TOV  vopov 
ypdfaiv  (litho-graph).  5.  6  a7roo-roXo9  e%e^  eVt- 
r;^  fj  dyj€\\€i  rrjv  Sogav  rwv  TroXlT&v.  6.  eV 
avOdvovGiv  dyada  y8t/3X/a  dva<yiyva)(TK€i,v 
avrl  /ca/cwv  /3^/3\t&)i/.  7.  6  \i0os  pr)<yvv<TL  (breaks) 

TOV  KpV<7TO\,\OV  CTTi  Tft)  TTOTa/Aft).  8.  TO9  TCt)V  (TO<f>O)V  * 
So^a9  7T6/51  TO)V  d(7TpCi)V  /JL(lV0dvO/JL€V  €K  /3l/3\l(0V. 

9.  6pa€T€  TOV  €T€pov  aSe\(f)ov  TOV  d<y<ye\ov.  10.  ol 
(To<f>ol  KOI  al  (T0(f>al  TO  avTo  (the  same  thing)  \e<y  overt, 
(tauto-logy).  11.  ri  So/ce€T€  avTol  Trepl  TOV  /3i/3\lov  ; 

12.  ®eo9  dyaOa  vepet,  TOI$  dyaOol?  /cal 

13.  ol   opOol  pdvot,  ev   dvayiryvcocr/covo'i,   TOU9   cv 

1/6//-OI/9.     14.  ov/c  e%ofjt,€v  TOL>9 


II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  Not  booksellers  alone  sell  (mono-poly)  books. 
2.   The   wise   and   good   man's   opinion   is   right 

1  The  adjective  may  be  used  alone  as  a  noun,  as  in  Latin. 


52  THE  GEEEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [68— 

(ortho-dox).  3.  Bad  citizens  do  not  make  wise 
laws.  4.  I  see  a  friend  of  wisdom  (philo-soph-er) 
who  has  a  bad  horse  to  sell.  5.  [They]  are  l  bad 
citizens  who  make  war  in  the  land.  6.  The  sun 
distributes  heat.  7.  The  bookseller's  only  brother 
is  throwing  stones.  8.  The  poets  tell  (\eyova-i)  a 
legend  about  the  two  (Svo)  ways  of  life.  9.  We 
are  ourselves  reading  a  book  about  the  laws  of 
the  stars  (astronomy).  10.  We  perceive  the  wis- 
dom of  God  in  the  stars.  11.  The  citizens  make 
laws,  which  they  write  on  stone.  12.  They  are 
reading  the  books  which  they  have.  13.  The  law 
alone  is  master  of  the  upright  citizen.  14.  Others 
have  the  same  law. 

68.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  As  a  preposition  avri  means  instead  of;  but 
its  original  force  was  rather  facing,  opposite  to, 
opposed  to,  and  this  last  is  its  common  meaning  in 
composition,  both  in  Greek  and  in  English.  Thus 
an  anti-periodic  (Tre/n-oSo?)  medicine  is  one  against 
a  periodical  disease  (as  quinine  for  fever  and 
ague).  The  word  avri-^wva  (</>o>z^),  an  adjective 
in  the  neuter  plural,  denoted  a  form  of  church 
music  in  which  one  choir  or  part  of  a  choir 
responds  to  another.  This  became  in  late  Latin 
antifona  (retaining  the  Greek  accent),  which 
being  taken  into  English  became  (through  the 
forms  ant&fne,  ant^vne,  antSmne,  dntemn,  dntem) 

1  An  enclitic  (55)  should  not  begin  a  sentence, 


68]   ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  VOWEL  DECLENSION.  53 

anthem,  taking  on  a  slightly  extended  meaning. 
Finally  anti-phone  was  reintroduced  in  the  original 
sense.  The  Anti-nomians  (1/0^09)  denied,  it  was 
said,  that  they  were  bound  by  the  moral  law. 
Anti-nomy  is  an  opposition  or  contradiction  of  laws. 
In  fact  anti-  has  been  so  fully  naturalized  that  it 
is  now  used  freely  as  a  prefix,  whether  the  rest 
of  the  word  is  Greek  or  not. 

2.  So  far  as  derivation  goes,  we  should  expect 
astro-logy  to   have  the   meaning  which  is   really 
given  to  astro-nomy  (1/0/409).     But  here,  as  often 
happens,  use  and  association  —  one  might  say,  the 
company  which  the  word  has  kept  —  have  given  a 
certain  twist  to  the  original  force  of  astro-logy,  so 
that  it  is  now  the  name  for  a  false,  astro-nomy 
for  a  true,   science   of  the   stars.     Another   form 
of    acrrpov    is    acrnjp;     this    gives    us   aster,    and 
asterisk  (do-repla/cos*)  is  a  diminutive  of  the  same 
word. 

3.  a.  A  people  that  has  the  right  of  using  or 
making  its   own   laws   is  called  auto-nomous,  and 
auto-nomy  is  the  right  itself.     Auto-maton  and  auto- 
matic also  contain  avros.     The  second  element  is 
from  a  Greek  root  pa-  to  desire,  or  will;  hence 
auto-maton  is  etymologically  acting  by  one's  own 
will,  and  so  self-acting.     The  word  is  especially 
used  of  machines. 

b.  With  the  article  before  it  auro?  signifies  the 
same ;  TO  avrd,  often  run  together  into  ravro, 
signifies,  therefore,  the  same  thing.  Hence  ravro- 
\oyid  tauto-logy. 


54  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [68— 

4.  A  biblio-graphy  is  a  description  or  list  of  the 
books  on  a  particular  subject.     Other  compounds 
of  ftcffXiov  are  biblio-mania  ^avia  madness),  and 
biblio-phile  (</>/Xo?). 

5.  Hetero-dox  is  usually  contrasted  with  ortho- 
dox.    In  para-dbx  the  first  element  is  irapd;    but 
the  preposition  here  means,  not  beside,  but  against, 
contrary  to.     Ao£<z  also  signifies  the  good  opinion 
which  others   have   of   one,   and  so  fame,  glory. 
This  is  the  force  of  dox-  in  dox-o-logy. 

6.  Epi-graphy  is  the  branch  of  philology  (see  51, 
6)  which  deals  with  inscriptions  cut  on  stone,  of 
which  there  are  thousands  in  Greek   and  Latin 
alone.      Epi-gram   (eiri^pa^fjba)    meant    originally 
such  an  inscription ;    but  as  these  were  usually 
short  and  often  in  verse,  the  word  came  to  be 
used  for  a  short,  pithy  poem,  or  saying.     The  epi- 
glottis (see  41,  1)  is  just  over  the  glottis.     In  all 
these  epi-  has  the  meaning  given  in  the  vocabu- 
lary  (66) ;    in   ep-ode   («&£)    and   epi-logue   (con- 
trasted with   prologue ;   see  51,  5,  a)  it   indicates 
something  added  on  at  the  end.     Further,  rj^epa  is 
the  Greek  word  for  day  ;  before  the  rough  breath- 
ing €7rl  loses  the  final  vowel  and  becomes   e$'; 
thus  is  formed  etjyrjfiepk  diary  or  day-book,  whence 
eph-emeris.     'Ec/y^te/oo?  eph-emeral  is  the  adjective, 
signifying  lasting  for  a  day. 

7.  Ka/eo?  appears  in  caco-phony,  the  opposite  of 
en-phony  (see  35,  I.,  5) ;  in  caco-doxy,  the  opposite 
of  orthodoxy  (see  68,  5);   and  in  caco-graphy,  the 
opposite  of  ortho-graphy  (see  68,  11). 


68]   ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  VOWEL  DECLENSION.  55 

8.  Lithol-ogy  is  another  of  the  "ologies" —  the 
science  which  treats  of  stones  or  rocks. 

9.  Moiw  is  represented  by  mono-,  with  the  force 
of  one,  or  single,  in  a  great  many  English  words. 
Common  examples  are  mono-gram;   mono-graph,  a 
treatise  on  a  single  subject,  usually  of  a  limited 
nature ;  mon-ody,  a  mournful  poem  (oJS?;)  express- 
ing one  person's  grief;   mono-theism  (#eo?),  belief 
in  one  God ;   mono-logne,  a  speech  uttered  by  one 
person,  contrasted  with  dialogue  (see  105,  2),  and 
not  quite  the  same  as  soli-loquy  (from  Latin  solus 
and  loquor) ;    mono-lith   (X^os),  a   large   column 
or  statue  of  a  single  block  of  stone  ;   mono-mania 
{pavia  68,  4)  madness  on  one  subject  only  ;  mono- 
tone (o  roVo9  tone,  from  TCWCD  strain) ;  mono-metallist 
(TO  fj,6Ta\\ov  originally  a  mine,  then  metal)  one 
who  holds  that  one  metal  only,  gold,  should  be  used 
as  the  standard  of  value,  whereas  a  fo-metallist 
(compare  W-cycle  60,  5)  believes  that  both  gold  and 
silver  should  be  used  as  a  double  standard ;  mono- 
syllable (see  110,  8) ;  mono-phthong,  a  single  vowel 
sound  (o  0^07709  sound)  contrasted  with  di-phthong 
(for  di-  see  96,  1).     Monad  is  also  from  /u,oVo9,  a 
derivative  of  the  same  sort  with  decad  (see  Se/ta9, 
80).     Further,  from  fjudvos  were  derived  /jiovd%co  to 
live  alone  and  /jLova%6$  single,  solitary.     The  latter 
has  been   corrupted  to   monk;    from  /jiovd£co  we 
have  mon-astery  {fjLovadrripiov,  -of)  and  monastic 
(/Aovaa-Ti/cos).    The  early  monks  lived  alone,  hence 
the  name.      Monachism  has  retained  the  -a-  of 


56  THE  GEEEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [69— 

10.  Metro-nome  might  be  rendered  law-giver  of 
the  measure  ^erpov  and  ^0/409) ;   it  is  the  name 
of  an  instrument  for  keeping  the  time  in  music. 
From  the  same  verb  ve/juco  are  derived  VO/JLOS  law 
(§ee  66  and  foot-note  to  1/0/^09)  and  1/0/^09  pasture 
(one  meaning  of  ve^a  is  graze  or  pasture} ;  vopa- 
Se9  was  a  term  applied  to  tribes  who  moved  from 
pasture  to  pasture  feeding  their  herds.      Hence 
our  word  nomad.    Ne/-fcecr£9  (originally  distribution) 
denoted  indignation  at  undue  or  too  great  good 
fortune ;  this  indignation  on  the  part  of  the  gods 
was  personified  as  a  goddess,  who  repaired  such 
inequality  by  humbling  those  who  were  too  proud 
in  prosperity,  especially  when   such  haughtiness 
led  to  impiety  or  crime ;  hence  our  word  nemesis, 
retribution,  divine  vengeance. 

11.  Ortho-graphy  is   right  writing ;    ortho-epy  is 
right  pronunciation  (TO  CTTOS  a  word). 

12.  A  theo-sophist  (#609  and  0-0^09)  is  one  who 
believes  that  superhuman  knowledge  may  be  at- 
tained by  direct  intercourse  with  God  and  superior 
spirits ;   theo-soph  is  sometimes  used  in  the  same 
sense,  and  theo-sophy  is  the  belief  or  doctrine  of 
theosophists.     (For  sophist,  etc.,  see  74,  10.) 

XL  H-VERBS:   PRESENT  INDICATIVE  AND 
INFINITIVE  MIDDLE  AND  PASSIVE. 

69.  The  passive  voice  represents  the  subject  as 
acted  upon,  while  the  active  voice  represents  the 
subject  as  acting.  There  is  also  in  Greek  a  middle 


71]          fl-  VERBS:  MIDDLE  AND  PASSIVE.          57 

voice  which  represents  the  subject  as  acting  either 
upon,  or  with  reference  to,  itself.  But  in  the  pres- 
ent tense  the  passive  and  middle  have  the  same 
endings,  and  often  are  to  be  distinguished  only  by 
the  connection  in  which  the  words  are  found.  In 
this  book,  only  the  one  word  <f>aiv(o  show  will  be 
used  in  the  middle  voice  ;  all  other  forms  with 
these  endings  may  be  understood  as  passive,  or 
else  as  deponent  (see  71). 

70.    Pres.  Ind.  Middle.  Passive. 

S.     1  (^aivo-^at    I  show  myself,  appear     am  shown 


2  fyaivei          you  show  yourself  are  shown 

3  <f>a[ve-Tat,     he  shows  himself  is  shown 


Du.  2  fyaive-a-Oov  you  two  show  yourselves  are  shown 
3  fyawe-a-Bov  they  two  show  themselves  are  shown 


PI.  1  <j>aivo-iJie6a  we  show  ourselves  are  shown 

2  (fxiive-aOe     you  show  yourselves         are  shown 

3  (fraivo-vrat,   they  show  themselves        are  shown 

Pres.  Inf. 
<f>alve-cT0cu  to  show  one's  self  to  be  shown 

71.  Deponent  verbs,  as  in  Latin,  are  such  as 
have  the  passive  (middle)  form,  but  are  active  in 
meaning,  as  a-fceTrrofjiai,  view.  The  inflection  is 
exactly  like  that  of  fyalvopai,  but  the  translation 
is  of  course  active. 


58 


THE  GEEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[72— 


72,    Vocabulary. 

ay  co  lead. 

6  ay  coy  6<t,  -ov  (fr.  ayco),  leader,  guide  (dem-agogue). 

the  people,  the  free  citizens, 
the  commons  (dem-agogue). 

true,    real,    genuine   (etymo- 


-OV 


-?;,  -ov 

-rj,  -ov1 
,  -a,  -ov 
-a,  -ov 

(H/C09,  -OV 
OL/C6CO 


-a,  -ov 

(7K€7TTOfJLCU,   dep., 

o  CT/COTTO?,  -ov  (fr. 


equal  (iso-thermal). 
long,  large  (macron). 
small,  little  (micro-scope). 
house  (oeco-nomy). 
inhabit,  dwell  in. 
older,  elder  (presbyter). 
examine,  view  (skeptic). 

watcher,  lookout  (micro-scope). 
overseer,  guardian  (episcop-al). 
be  clever,  or  wise  (sophist). 

under. 

show  (dia-phan-ous). 
show  one's  self,  appear 
(phenomenon). 

73.  Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 
1.  fO  rov  SIJ/JLOV  dycoyo?  (dem-agogue)  ov  opdofjuev 

1  Followed  by  the  dative. 

2  The  ending  -rcpos,  -d,  -ov  is  equivalent  to  the  English  -er, 
denoting  the  comparative  degree, 


0  e7T6-0-/C07r09,  -OV 

(rocftl^ofjLcu  (fr. 
0-0^)09),  dep., 
i?ro,  prep.  w.  dat., 


73]          £1-  VERBS:  MIDDLE  AND  PASSIVE.          59 


OVK  dyaOos  7roXiT?79  earl.      2.    ol  TroXirai  dyovrai 

€7rl  7r6\€/jLOV.       3.    fMKpOS  X/009  /3d\\€TCU  67Tt  fACLfCpOV 

(to  a  long  distance).  4.  fj  ryfj  virep  rov  ftopeav 
(see  46,  6)  OVK  olfceerai.  5.  Oeo?  ecrnv  eVar/toTTo? 
rov  fiaxpov  Koa/juov  (macro-cosm)1  /cal  rov  [uicpov 
Koa-fjiov  (micro-cosm)  .  6.  ol  €7rio-/co7roi 
ra?  oSou?.  7.  o  7rp€cr/3vT€pos  aSeX</>O9  cr 
/cal  €^€L  fti[3>\ia  ev  rcS  oil/cay.  8.  o  €TV/J,OS 

ervpovs  \dyov<$.  9.  ot  ayyeXoi  <f>aivovcri  TW 
r^z;  roi)  KpiTov  €7no-To\r)v.  10.  97  oliceo^evr] 
(inhabited)  <yf)  pa/cpa  eart.  11.  rt  VTTO  TO>  \i0q) 
earl  ;  12.  TO  Oeppov  r&v  acrTpwv  OVK  'iaov  ea"rl  rc3 
depute  (iso-thermal)  rov  rj\lov.  13.  Trpeo-ftvrepov 
d&€\<f>ov  e^o),  09  dyaObv  TOTTOV  e^ei  ev  rcS  ffearpa). 
14.  e^e^  o  &7/-&09  opOovs  dycoyovs  ;  15.  frrot  e^Vtz/  o/ 


II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  star  itself  is  not  small.  2.  To  learn-to- 
know  the  true  opinions  of  the  people  is  the  work 
of  a  wise  man.  3.  The  seasons  are  equal.  4.  The 
skill  of  the  overseer  himself  is  not  equal  to  the 
skill  of  the  little  bookseller.  5.  He  is  examining 
the  little  stones  which  are  in  the  road.  6.  True 
overseers  show  themselves  wise.2  7.  There  is 
water  under  the  house.  8.  The  laws  of  the  people 
are  (being)  written  in  books.  9.  I  am  writing  a 

1  In  contrast  with  the  mind  of  man,  the  micro  -cosm  or  little 
world,  the  larger  universe  was  called  macro  -cosm. 

2  A  predicate  adjective  belonging  to  the  subject  must  agree 
with  it  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 


60  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [74— 

long  letter.  10.  An  upright  leader  of  the  people 
speaks  true  words.  11.  In  the  long  time  of  ice 
we  do  not  see  roses.  12.  They  examine  the  little 
circles  which  you  are  making  on  the  ice.  13.  The 
leader  of  the  people  is-clever,  but  (aXXa)  does  not 
show  himself  wise. 

74.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  An  epi-demic  disease  is  one  prevailing  among 
the  people  (eVl  rcS  S^w).     Demotic,  belonging  to  the 
people,  is  often  contrasted  with  hieratic  (see  96,  6). 

2.  To  erv/jiov  was  the  Greek  term  for  the  literal 
sense  of  a  word ;  hence  we  have  etymon,  the  primi- 
tive from  which  a  word  is  derived,  and  etymo-logy. 

3.  From   ?cro9  %p6vo<$  equal   time  we  have  iso- 
chronous, lasting  an  equal  time;  from  laov  Oep/jiov 
equal   heat,  iso-therm,  an  iso-thermal  line,  or  line 
passing  through  places  of  which  the  average  tem- 
perature is  equal;  and  from  Icrov  fjierpov  equal  meas- 
ure,  iso-metric.     Iso-sceles  has  for  its  second  element 
TO  cr/eeXo9,  -609  a  leg. 

4.  The  mark  of  length  over  a  vowel  is  a  macron. 
The  macro-meter  measures  objects  a  long  way  off. 
Macro-  occurs  in  other  scientific  terms,  like  macro- 
cephalous (/eec^aX?;). 

5.  MZ/epo9  is  seen  in  micro-scope  (CT/COTTO?),  micro- 
meter,   micro-cephalous,    micro-nesia    ($    1^0-09    an 
island^). 

6.  Eco-nomy  (formerly  spelled  oeconomy ;  see  14,  #) 
is  from  ol/co-vo/jiia,  which  goes  back  to  oZ/eo?  and 

although   the    changes   of    meaning   seem 


74]  fl-TEEBS.   MIDDLE  AND  PASSIVE.          61 

strange  at  first  sight.  oZ/eo?  is  not  only  house,  but 
also  the  estate  orfarm  which  belonged  to  the  house; 
and  one  meaning  of  i/e/i<«,  the  primitive  of  vo/j,o$ 
(see  66  and  note  2),  is  to  manage.  An  oi/co-v6fjio$ 
was  a  manager  of  a  house  or  an  estate  ;  hence  ol/co- 
vopia  came  to  signify,  not  only  management,  but 
also  good  management,  of  property.  This,  then,  is 
the  proper  meaning  of  economy. 

7.  In  ol/ceo/jievr},  the    present   passive  (middle) 
participle  of  olfceco,  the  vowels  eo  were  contracted 
to  ou;   77  olfcovfjiewrj,  with   <yf)   understood,   was  a 
term  for  the  entire  inhabited  world.     Accordingly 
an  oecumenical  council  is  one  assembled  from  all 
lands. 

8.  Priest  is  corrupted  from  presbyter.     (An  in- 
termediate form  is  prester.) 

9.  Skeptic  or  sceptic  (cr/eeTTT^os),  from  cr/eeTrro/xaj, 
meant  originally  one  who  is  inclined  to  examine 
into  statements,  not  accepting  them  without  such 
examination.     The  root  also  takes  the  form  O-/COTT- 
in  ovtoTTo?,  which  means  not  only  watcher,  but  also 
the   thing  watched,  namely,  the  mark   aimed   at. 
Hence  the  original  meaning  of  scope  is  aim,  or  pur- 
pose.    From  this  are  derived  the  other  uses  of  the 
word.     Among  compounds  of  O-KOTTO?  in  the  sense 
of  watcher,  along  with  micro-scope  (see  74,  5)  we 
have  tele-scope  (r^Xe)  and  hor-o-scope,  a  view  or  de- 
scription of  the  position  of  the  planets  at  the  hour 
(wpa;    see  31,   8)   of  one's  birth;  for  astrologers 
held  that  one's  whole  life  could  be  foretold  from 
such  a  horoscope.     The  syllable  is  even  put  with 


62  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  f^— 

some  words  not  from  Greek,  as  in  spectro-wope, 
from  Latin  spectrum.  'ETTI-O-KOTTOS  gave  the  Lajin 
episcopus  and  our  epi-scopal,  epi-scopacy ;  bishop  is  a 
corrupted  form  of  eW-ovcoTro?  (in  old  English  bis- 
cop,  Us  ceo p). 

10.  From  ao^i^ofjiai  is  derived  crofaa-Tijs  sophist. 
The  sophists  were  teachers  of  eloquence,  philoso- 
phy, and  politics;    and  as  many  of  them  were 
skilled  in  a  wordy  and  showy,  but  false,  mode  of 
argument,  the  entire  class  got  a  bad  name.     Hence 
the  implication  of  dishonesty,  or  of  an  endeavor  to 
deceive,  in  our  words  sophistry,  sophism,  sophistical. 
To  sophisticate  is  primarily  to  give  one  the  quali- 
ties of  a  sophist ;  from  this  follow  sophisticated  and 
unsophisticated. 

11.  The  root  of  <$>aivw  is  <j>av-,  or  <£a-.     Phase 

,  phantasm  (^az/rao-^a),  phantasy  or  fantasy 
,  fantastic  (originally  phantastic),  phan- 
tom, epiphany  (eTri-fydveio)  —  all  these  have  mean- 
ings closely  connected  with  that  of  appearance. 
Fancy  is  a  shortened  form  of  fantasy.  Em-phasis 
(e/40a<7£9,  ez>  and  <£a6V&>),~  starting  from  nearly  the 
same  sense  of  an  appearing,  took  on  the  meanings 
declaration,  significance,  and  finally  special  signifi- 
cance or  force  in  an  expression.  Emphatic  is  the 
adjective.  Diaphanous  (&a-(£a*»?9)  signifies  letting 
things  show  through.  Finally,  fyaivopevos,  -77,  -ov 
appearing  is  the  present  middle  participle,  declined 
like  ayaOfa.  The  neuter  ^aivo^evov  phaenomenon, 
or  phenomenon,  signifies,  therefore,  that  which  ap- 
pears. 


CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 


63 


XII.    CONSONANT    DECLENSION:    STEMS  IN  -*- 
AND  -7-. 

75.  To  the  Third  or  Consonant  Declension  be- 
long nouns  whose  stems  end  in  (1)  a  consonant 
or  (2)  in  i  or  v.  Masculines  and  feminines  are 
declined  alike. 


77 


ladder 


Sing.  N. 

K\i/JLa% 

G. 

Khf/JLa/C-OS 

D. 

/cXtfjiafc-L 

A. 

/c\£/jiaK-a 

V. 

K\i/jiaj; 

Dual  N.A.V. 

K\£/jia/c-€ 

G.D. 

K\lp,dic-oiv 

Plu.    N.V. 

/c\f/jiatc-€s 

G. 

K\lfJidK-Q)V 

D. 

KtdfJba^i 

A. 

K\£/JLaK-as 

flesh 

throat 

o-dpl;  ^ 

\dpvyt; 

crap/c-o? 

\dpvyy-os 

aapK-i 

\dpvyy-i 

adpK-a 

\dpvyy-a 

crap!; 

\dpvyg 

crdpK-e 

\dpvyy-e 

(rap/c-oiv 

\apvyy-on 

\dpvryy-es 


crap/c-wv 

crapgi 

crdpK-a? 


a.  The  ending  of  the  nominative  singular  is  -9, 
which  unites  with  a  preceding  K  or  7  (or  ^)  to 
form  -£.  The  ending  of  the  dative  plural  is  -<™, 
and  the  same  combination  takes  place. 

I.  Monosyllabic  stems  of  the  consonant  declension  accent 
the  case-ending  in  the  genitive  and  dative  of  all  numbers: 
the  long  syllables  -otv  and  -o>v  take  the  circumflex. 


64 


THE  GEEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[76 


y  dep., 
-ov 


-r,  -ov 


,  -ov 


O 


6  \dpvyf;,  -7709 

-OV 

,  dep., 
^  dep., 

7T/}(MT09,  -^,  -OV 


crTe/3609,  -«,  -ov 
avv,  prep.  w.  dat., 

TV7TTO) 


6    TU7T09,   -OV 


t  -, 

V7ro-/cptvouai,  dep., 


<paye2v,  infinitive, 
o  ^^0-69,  -ov 


76.    Vocabulary. 

perceive  (aesth-etic). 

number. 

count  (arithmetic). 

naked,  bare. 

exercise. 

gymnasium  (place  for  exercise). 

ladder  (climax). 

throat,  larynx. 

imitator  (mime). 

imitate. 

shall  see  (syn-op-sis). 

first  (proto-type). 

flesh  (sarc-ophagus). 

firm,  solid  (stereo-type). 

with  (syn-opsis). 

strike. 

(  type  (originally,  what  is  caused 
\      by  a  blow). 

(1)  answer,  (2)  play  a  part  on 
^  '7  v  J  r    *     * 

trie  stage. 

actor  (hypo-crite,  hypo-crisy). 
to  eat  (sarco-phag-us). 
gold  (chrys-alis). 


77.  Exercises. 
I.   Translate  into  English. 


1  Future  of  6pao>,  but  from  a  different  root,  OTT-,  and  the 
future  suffix  -o-o-  or  -o-e-  ;  inflected  like  the  present  middle 
(passive),  ctyo/x,ai,  OI/KI,  o^erat,  etc. 


77]  CONSONANT  DECLENSION.  65 

2.  dvOpWTToi    el<riv   o?    jjbavOdvovcn    rrjv   crdpKa    av- 
OpwTTcov  (frayelv  (anthropo-phagons,  anthropo-phagi). 

3.  Ol    \lOot,    V7TO    TO)    O/LKG)    (TT€p€Ol    elcTl.         4.    OV/C    Ol- 

cr6dvecr6e  rrjv  <nepeav  (rdp/ca  ra)V  av6 ptoTrwv  o?  ev 
rofc  ryvfjivacriois  yv/jLvd^ovrai, ;  5.  rc3  opydvq)  rov 
rov  vTTOKpirov  \dpvyya  <T/c€7rT€Tai,  (laryng-0-scope) . 
6.»  6  OVCOTTO?  alcrOdvercn,  TO  Trpwrov  do-rpov.  7.  a7a- 
vTTO/cpiras  ev  rcS  Oearpa)  o^Jro/Jieda^  OL  rou?  rou 
dycoyovs  ev  pJifJieovTai.  8.  o  ^pvcrbs  OVK  dya- 
66$  can  (frayeiv.  9.  ou/c  6'^re^  ra  darpa  <rvv  ro3 
10.  TVTrreiv  erepov?  KCLKOV  ecrn.  11.  o  api6- 
TTO\IT&V  60-09  eVrl  ra>  dpiOfjiq)  r&v 

12.  ot  eTrlcrfcoTTOi,  dpiOpeova't,  rov  eV  r^  oSc3 

13.  oyjrofjieda  rov  /M/cpbv  OLKOV  bv  o  VTTOfcpirrjs  ol/ceet, ; 

14.  oliceei,  ev  ray  Trpcora)  OIKM  vTrep  rbv  rpoirov  rrjs 

6Bov. 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  With  the  actor  is  an  elder  .brother.  2.  The 
ladder  strikes  the  bookseller  on  the  head.  3.  They 
will  see  a  man  who  writes  letters  with  (dat.  of 
means)  types  (typo-graphy).  4.  Wise  actors  show 
art.  5.  The  throats  of  the  horses  are  long.  6.  The 
overseers  will  see  the  solid  types  (stereo-type). 
7.  We  perceive  solid  gold  in  the  stone.  8.  We 
see  men  who  do  not  have  flesh  to  eat.  9.  Actors 
exercise  their  tongues  (in  Greek  the  tongues)  and 
throats.  10.  To  exercise  the  muscles  (plural  of 
0-dpQ  well  is  the  way  of  health.  11.  We  shall 
see  the  messenger  on  a  bare  horse.  12.  With  the 
messengers  are  guides.  13.  The  first  actor  is  a 
good  imitator  of  others'  voices.  14.  To  count  the 


66  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [78— 

little  stones  in  the  river  requires  (in  Greek  is  of) 
a  long  time. 

78.  Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  From  av-  privative  (see  60,  3,  6)  and  the  root 
of  aiaOdvopai  we  have  an-aesthetic,  making  in-sen- 
sible, and  an-aesthesia,  the  condition  of  insensibility 
produced  by  an  anaesthetic.   The  word  aesthetic  (al- 
adrjTiKos*),  which  originally  meant  merely  capable  of 
perceiving,  has  been  narrowed  down  to  the  meaning 
capable  of  perceiving  beauty,  or  pertaining  to  beauty; 
hence  aesthetics,  the  science  of  beauty  or  taste. 

2.  The   connection   between   the   meanings   of 
71^1/09  and  <yv/jLvd£co  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
Greek  boys  and  men  trained,  in  the  gymnastic 
schools,  quite  naked.     Of  course  gymnic,  gymnast, 
gymnastic  are  all  from  the  same  primitive. 

3.  K\ljjLaKTijp  is  the  round  of  a  ladder ;  hence 
climateric,  one  of  the  successive  stages  of  develop- 
ment, and  hence  a  critical  time  of  life. 

4.  Mimic   and   mimetic   (/u/^r^o?),  as  well  as 
mime,  are  from  /iu//,o9,  /M/jLeopaL.     Panto-mime  has 
for  its  first  element  vra?  (see  110,  11). 

5.  The  root  of  0^0  fiat  is  OTT-,  which  appears  in 
optic,  optics,     Aut-opsy  (auro?)  is  self-seeing,  seeing 
for  one's  self. 

6.  The  sarc-o-phagus  was  so  named  because  it 
was  originally  made  of  a  kind  of  limestone  which 
quickly  consumed  the  flesh  of  a  corpse ;  then  the 
name  was  given  to  any  stone  coffin.     From  adp% 
was  also  derived  the  verb  crap/cdfa  to  tear  the  flesh, 
as  dogs  do.  From  this  we  have  sarcasm 


78]  CONSONANT  DECLENSION.  67 

7.  The  stereo-type  plate  is  a  solid  piece  of  metal, 
as  distinguished  from   the  separate  types.      The 
stere-opticon  (crrepeo?,  OTT-)  throws  on  the  screen  an 
image  which  appears  solid  ;  the  stereo-scope,  by  the 
arrangement  of    its  lenses,  causes  the  picture  to 
look  like  a  solid  object. 

8.  2vv  in  English  derivatives  takes  the  forms 
syn-,  sym-,  syl-,  or  sy-,  according  to  the  nature  of 
the  following  letter,  and  has  the  general  meaning 
of  together.     Thus,  we  have  syn-opsis  (OTT-),  a  col- 
lective view  (adjective  syn-optic)  ;  syn-od  (dSo?)  a 
meeting ;  syn-agogue  (crvv-aycoyrj ;    dyco),  place  of 
religious  assembly  among  the  Jews ;  syn-chronous, 
agreeing  in  time  (%/ooz>o9)  ;  syn-chronism ;  sym-metry, 
correspondence    in    measure    ^erpoii) ;    symphony 
(c/>ft>z>?7),  a   form  of   orchestral   music;    syl-logism 
(Xo7o?  in  the  sense  of  reason;  see  51,  5,  a,  end),  a 
form  of  reasoning.     Systole   (cru-o-ToX?; ;    avv  and 
cTTe'XX&>)  is  a  sending  together,  that  is,  contraction. 
It  is  contrasted  with  dia-stole  (S^a-cn-oX?;),  in  which 
Sid  has  the  force  of  apart,  Latin  dis-;  thus  dia-stole 
is  the  relaxation  of  the  muscles  of  the  heart,  which 
alternates  with  the  sy-stole.      The  same  force  of 
Sid  is  seen  in  dia-critical,  distinguishing  (see  46,  1), 
and  dia-gnosis  (<yi<yv(i)crfca)*),  the  determination  of  a 
disease  by  noting  its  distinguishing  marks. 

9.  The  various  significations  of  type  can  all  be 
traced  back  to  that  of  something  produced  by  a  blow. 
For  instance,  the  image  or  other  device  on  a  coin 
was  made  by  a  blow  upon  the  die  under  which  the 
disk  of  metal  had  been  placed.     Thus  TUTTO?  and 


68  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [79— 

type  get  the  meaning  of  stamp,  image,  and  next 
that  of  character  or  kind.  Among  compounds  and 
derivatives  are  typical,  proto-type  (jirp&ros),  phono- 
type  (a  printed  character  representing  a  sound, 
(frcovify,  auto-type  (avro^,  helio-type  (rpuo9),  the  two 
latter  being  arbitrarily  used  to  denote  varieties  of 
permanent  photographs. 

10.  From  xpvcros  we  obtain  chrysalis  (from  its 
color),  chryso-lite  (\lOo$),  chrys-anthemum  (avdefjiov, 
-ov  flower ;    compare  avOos,  98),  chrys-elephantine 
(e\e<l)dvTivos  from  e'Xe<£a9,  -avros  elephant,  and  then 
ivory).     In  some  of  the  finest  Greek  statues  the 
flesh  parts  were  of  ivory  and  the  rest  of  gold  ;  this 
kind  of  work  is  called  chrys-elephantine. 

11.  We  have  already  had   occasion   to   notice 
many  words  from  Greek  which  end  in  -ic,  repre- 
senting the  Greek  adjective  ending  -IKO?  ;  as,  in 
this  section,  aesthetic,  optic,  typic,  etc.     This  sylla- 
ble -ic  is  so  common  and  familiar  that  it  is  added 
to  many  words  not  derived  from  Greek. 

XIII.   CONSONANT  DECLENSION:  STEMS  IN 

5\        /5 

79. 

TO   (</>&)T-)  O    (TToS-)  6,  f]   (opvlO-) 

light  foot  bird 

Sing.  N.  <£(W9  7TOU9  opvl<$ 

(jr.  <l)Ct)T"09  7TOO-09  OpVi(/"0^ 

\JU  u)(t)T"i  7rOO~l>  OpViU"L 

A.  <£(W9  7r6S-a  opvlv 

V.  <£(W9  7TOU9  8pvl$ 


80]  CONSONANT  DECLENSION.  69 

Dual  N.  A.V.  0(wr-e  -rro'S-e  opvlO-e 

G.  D.  <f)(i)T-Ol,V  TToS-OlV  OpVtO-OlV 

Plu.    N.V.        <f)a)T-a  TroS-e?  opvW-es 

G.  <f)COT-Q)V  TToS-COV  6pvf0-O)V 

D.  <j)a)(7L  Trocrl  opvlai 

A.  <f)0)T-a  TroS-a?  opvlO-as 

a.  As  in  the  o-declension,  the  accusative  and 
vocative  of  neuters  in  the  consonant  declension  are 
like  the  nominative.  Before  -5  or  -o-^,  the  stem- 
consonant  r,  S,  or  6  is  dropped.  The  nominative 
Trow?  is  irregular.  The  ending  of  the  accusative 
singular  of  masculines  and  feminines  is  -a;  but 
opvls  usually  has  opvlv. 

b.  For  the  accent  of  monosyllabic  stems  see  75,  b.  But  the 
genitive  dual  and  plural  of  <£ois  do  not  follow  this  rule. 


80.    Vocabulary. 

(be  first,  hence)  (1)  begin,  (2)  rule. 
-779  (1)  beginning,  (2)  government. 

-a,  -ov       ancient  (archaeo-logy). 
rywvid,  -a9  corner,  angle  (deca-gon). 

Se/ca  (indeclinable)  ten  (deca-gon). 
77  Se/ea?,  -aSo9          company  of  ten,  decad  (decade). 
a  (indecl.)        seven  (hept-archy). 

7j,  -ov       seventh. 
TI  ey88o/^a9,  -aSo9     week,  seven  days  (hebdomadal). 
e'£a>,  adv.  w.  gen.,   outside  (exo-tic). 

),  adv.  w.  gen.,  inside,  within  (eso-teric). 

-ai,  -a          in  plural,  few  (olig-archy). 
6,  f)  8pvl$,  -^09        bird  (ornith-ology). 


70  THE  GEEEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [81— 

6,  r)  Trolly  TrcuSds1  child. 

Trai&evco  educate  (treat  as  a  child). 

„(  child-leader,  teacher,  paed-agogue 
ov<       ,  N 

(     (or  ped-agogue). 

7ro8o9         foot  (anti-podes). 
three  (tri-cycle). 
(f>epa)  bear,  carry  (Latin  fero). 

TO  0«9,  0o>T09         light  (photo  -graph). 


81.    Hlxercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  f/Q-7rov  (where)  o\i<yoi,  dvffpcoTroi  ap%ovo-i,  rov 
BtffjLov?  evravOd  (there)  ecmv  o\i<yap%ia  (oligarchy). 
2.   $e/ca  opvlOes  <yvfjbvd%ov<n,  row  \dpwyyas  ev  <ya>vla 
rov  7rapa&el<rov.      3.    eTrra   /Al/cpol  TratSe?   e^w  rov 
TrapaSelcrov  aKovov<ri  r&v  opirfdcov?     4.  cro(f)ol 
aycoyol  TOW  TralBa?  TraiSevovai,.       5.   eVo)  TOU 
vaviov  elal  rpeis  Se/caSe?  avOpcoTrcov.     6.  e^ofjbev  ev 
To3  oiK(p  e?TTa  /3fy8X/a  r&v  ap^aicov  TTOL^T^V.      7.  TO 
<^)ft)9  TOT)  rj\iov  rrj\€  (paiverai.      8.   ez/  TT} 
€7ri(7TO\rj<;    dvayiyvaxTKO/jiev    rbv 
9.  @eo?  /Aoi/o9  fipxei  (nion-arch)  TWZ^  avOpco- 
KOI  TWV  a<TTpa)v.     10.   97  777  <j>ep€i  SevBpa  /cal 
TO  SevSpov  (frepei  poSa.     11.  ou/c  ap%aioi,s 
12.    rj    K\la      Se/ca 


1  Vocative  Trat.    In  accent  Trat?  is  like  c^co?  (see  79,  and  6). 

2  Verbs  of  beginning  and  ruling,  like  apx0^  govern  the  geni- 
tive instead  of  the  accusative. 

3  Verbs  of  hearing  and  perceiving,  like  dfcovo)  and  at<r0avo/A<u, 
take  the  genitive  more  commonly  than  the  accusative. 

4  Ace.  of  extent,  as  in  Latin. 


82]  CONSONANT  DECLENSION.  71 


fjia/cpa  Ian.    13.  rpefc  e/3So/4a8e9  eia\  pa/epos  %p6vo<> 
rofc  TraiaL      14.  6  TraiSaycoyo?  e^ei  fu/cpov 
irepl   T&v  ap%ato)v 


II.  Translate  into  Greek. 
1.  The  stone  has  ten  corners  (deca-gon).  2.  The 
government  of  the  few  is  bad.  3.  With  the  first 
bird  we  see  seven  other  birds.  4.  The  seventh 
bird,  the  [one]  on  the  ladder,  is  an  overseer,  who 
is  educating  the  first  bird.  5.  [He]  who  begins 
war  is  not  wise.  6.  The  sun  shows  its  light  to 
the  earth.  7.  The  feet  of  the  children  are  in  the 
river.  8.  What  is  the  opinion  of  the  ancients 
about  the  government  of  the  few  ?  9.  The  actors 
are  leading  horses  which  carry  solid  gold.  10.  In 
a  few  weeks  we  shall  see  messengers  who  bear 
letters.  11.  Within  the  house  are  three  men  who 
rule  the  people.  12.  In  the  seventh  house  beyond 
the  corner  of  the  park  dwells  a  man  who  reads 
few  books.  13.  An  elder  brother  bears  the  child 
through  the  river. 

82,   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  a.  Both  meanings  of  ap^a)  (which  are  evi- 
dently nearly  related)  are  well  represented  in 
English.  Thus,  archaeo-logy  (ap^ato9)  is  an  account 
of  ancient  things;  archaic  (apxalicos,  -77,  6v)  and 
archaism  also  refer  to  ancient  things,  but  with  a 
slightly  different  shade  of  meaning  ;  arche-type 
(ap^e-TUTTo?)  was  originally  that  which  is  first 
struck  off  or  first  moulded  as  a  model  or  example. 


72  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [82— 

b.  Again,  an-archy  (avap^id;  av-  privative,  see 
60,  3,  0)  is  no-rule;  mon-archy  {pov-apyia)  is  the 
rule  of  one;  hept-archy,  the  rule  of  seven;  dec-archy, 
the  rule  of  ten.  A  patri-arch  is  a  clan-ruler  (rj 
irarpia  clan,  from  Trarrip,  Latin  pater,  father) ; 
archives  (TO  ap^elov,  government  house),  the  place 
where  government  records  are  kept,  or  the  records 
themselves.  Finally,  the  prefix  arch-  or  archi-  in 
arch-angel,  arch-bishop,  archi-episcopal,  archi-tect  (o 
re/crow  builder),  etc.,  is  also  from  ap%co,  and  has 
come  to  be  used  in  the  sense  of  chief  or  leader, 
with  many  words  not  from  Greek,  such  as  arch- 
duke,  arch-thief,  etc.  When  used  with  words  not 
from  Greek,  or  with  words,  like  bishop,  so  thor- 
oughly Anglicized  that  the  Greek  origin  is  ob- 
scured, the  ch  of  arch-  is  pronounced  as  in  child; 
in  words  directly  from  Greek  ch  is  pronounced 
like  k. 

2.  Tcovld  appears  in  goni-o-meter  (//,er/ooz>),  and 
gives  the  syllable  -gon,  angle,  in  dia-gon-al  (Sm), 
poly-gon  (see  91,  12),  tri-gon-o-metry  (TO  rpl-ycovov 
tri-angle  —  the  first  syllable  being  the  stem  of  rpeis 
—  and  fjierpov),  hex-a-gon  (eg-d-ycovov ;  e%  six,  with 
an  -a-  which  seems  to  have  been  inserted  from 
analogy). 

3.  Ae/ca   appears    in   deca-logue,   and   in   many 
names  of  metric  weights  and  measures,  such  as 
deca-gram  (see  91,  4),  deca-meter. 

4.  From  the  stem  of  e/38o^a9  we  have  hebdom- 
adal, a  clumsy  word  for  weekly. 

5.  An  exotic  plant  is  one  from  outside   (e^&)), 


82]  CONSONANT  DECLENSION.  73 

foreign.  Esoteric  (eW)  doctrines  are,  so  to  speak, 
the  "  inside,"  or  secret,  doctrines,  contrasted  with 
the  exoteric,  or  outside,  public,  doctrines,  which 
may  be  imparted  to  everybody. 

6.  Hat?  takes  the  forms  -paed-  and  -ped-;    the 
latter  syllable  must  not  be  confounded  with  ped 
in  derivatives  of  Latin  pes,  pedis,  foot.     A  ped-o- 
baptist  is  one  who  believes  in  child-baptism  (/3a?r- 
TL^CO  baptize').      Ortho-ped-y  is   child   straightening 
(op66<i),    curing    children's    deformities.       From 
TrcuSeta  education   (7r<uSeu&>)   we  obtain  en-cyclo- 
paedia and  cyclo-paedia  (eV  and  KVK\O<$). 

7.  The   nominative   TTOU?    appears   in   poly-pus, 
many-footed  (see  91,  12),  which  is  also  shortened 
to  poly-p.     The  stem-form  -pod-  is  seen  in  chir-o- 
pod-ist  (%e/p),  a  healer  of  hands  and  feet,  and  tri- 
pod (rpels),  and  in  numerous  scientific  words  like 
cephal-o-pod  (/ce^aX?;).     Finally,  anti-pode  has  been 
formed  as  the  singular  of  anti-pod-es  (avri),  and 
thus  has  final  e. 

8.  Tpefc  is  also  seen  in  tri-logy,  a  series  of  three 
connected  plays,  and  in  tri-cycle  (/cu/cXo9). 

9.  Peri-phery    (jrepL    and   </>ep&>)   is    the    exact 
equivalent,  etymologically,  of  circum-ference,  from 
Latin  circum  and  fero  ;  but  the  latter  is  used  only 
of  circles  and  spheres,  while  the  former  is  used  of 
other  figures.      The  root  of  fyepa)  takes  also  the 
form  <f>op-.     A  meta-phor  (/zera-^o/oo)  is,  in  a  cer- 
tain sense,  a  trans-fer  (Latin  trans  and  fero)  of 
meaning;   as  when  a  soldier  is   called  a  lion  to 
denote  that  he  is  brave,  the  word  lion  contains  a 
meta-phor. 


74 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[83- 


V 


divinity 


etccov 


orator 
prjrcop 


10.  Phos-phorus  (</>&>9-<£o/909)  signifies  light-bearer. 
The  stem  <f>cor-  is  found  in  phot-o-graph  (ypd<f>a) 
means  to  draw  or  paint  as  well  as  to  write ;  com- 
pare graphic,  31,  4),  phot-o-sphere  (a-fyalpa)  the 
burning  gas  which  envelopes  the  sun ;  photo- 
meter, an  instrument  for  measuring  the  quantity 
of  light ;  phot-o-litho-graph  (X/009),  a  print  from  a 
stone  on  which  the  picture  has  been  printed  by 
photography. 

XIV.   CONSONANT  DECLENSION:  STEMS  IN 

-V-  AND  -p-. 

83. 

c 

Sing.  N. 

G. 

D. 

A. 

V. 
Dual  N.A.V. 

G.D. 
Plu.   N.V. 

G. 

D. 

A. 

a.  Stems  in  -v-  and  -p-  omit  the  nominative  end- 
ing -9,  and  lengthen  a  preceding  e  or  o  to  rj  or  a*. 
Observe  that  the  long  vowel  is  retained  in  the 
vocative  singular  if  accented,  otherwise  not.  In 
the  dative  plural  v  before  -<n  is  dropped. 


&u>oz/-69 


el/cdv-i 
ei/cdv-a 
el/ccov 

el/COV-6 

eiicov-oiv 
eltcov-es 
eiicov-wv 
eiKocn 


prjrop-a 

pfjrop 

prjTop-e 


prjrop-es 
prjrop-cov 

ptfrop-cri, 

?  / 


84] 


CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 


75 


84. 


o  aycov,     <ya)vo$ 
i,,  dep., 


avr 

and  a<y.),  dep., 
o  dvT-aycomcmjs,  -ov 
6  dtfp,  depot; 
6  a#\O9,  -of 
TO  a6\QVy  -ov 
6  affhrjTtjs,  -ov 
6  Sal/jLwv,  -01/09 
fj  elictov,  -o'z/09 
6/377/1,09,  -?;,  -ov 
o  /cavd)V,  -01/09 


Vocabulary. 

contest  (agony). 
struggle,   engage  in  a  contest 
(agonize). 

struggle  against  (ant-agonize). 

ant-agonist, 
air. 

athletic  game, 
prize. 
athlete. 

divinity,  spirit  (demon). 
image,  statue  (icon-oclasm). 
solitary,  lonely  (erem-ite). 
measuring-rod,  rule  (canon). 
break  (icono-clasm). 
ship  (nausea). 
sailor  (nant-ical). 
fire  (pyr-otechnics). 
orator  (rhetor). 
pointed  stake, 
scratch. 

mark  (engraved  or  stamped  on 
something.    Character) . 


85.   Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 
1.  'H    <y\a)(7o-a    rov    ptfropo?    ap^et,    rov 

1  From  ayo) :    (1)  a  gathering,  (2)  a  gathering  for  athletic 
contests,  (3)  contest. 


r)  vavs 

o  vavrr)?,  -ov 

TO 


o  prjrcop,  -0^009 


-#09 


76  THE  GREEK:  IN  ENGLISH.  [85— 

2.  o\l<yoi,  d6\rjral  dff\a  (frepovcriv  e/c  TMV   dycovcov. 

3.  ev  Tofc  dya)(7iv  dyo)vi^ovTat  ol  dd\rjTal  <yv/jivoi.1 

4.  o  Trafc  Troieei  Trvp  ev  ycovia  TOV  oi/cov.     5.  ^apdcr- 
<rei  Trjv  el/cova  TOV  rwv  vavr&v  Oeov,  /cal  K\dei  rov 
rov  SpvlGo?  TroBa.       6.    ov  /ca/co$  irals  ecm ;     7.    r) 

TOV    %pvcrov    TCOV    dd\rjTc*)V    <f>epei.       8.    opvlv 
ev  TW  aepi.     9.  dyaffov  Salfjiova  €%€i  009  (as) 

€7Tl(7K07rOV.  10.      O     TOV     VTTOKpiTOV      dvTa<ytoVi(TTri<$ 

K\dei  ro9  ap^aid^  eiicovas  (icon-o-clast)  rwv  Oe&v. 
11.  opdo)  KpirrjV  6p0bv,  09  o\tyovs  0/Xou9  e^et,  /cal 
<$>aiv6TCU,  eprjfjios.  12.  6  eiricricoTros  /jLa/cpbv  Kavova 
/cal  opdet  rot'9  /Jil/cpovs  Tral&as  01  €7rl  TOO  /cpv- 
ela-L  13.  o/  7ra£Se9  TVTTTOVO-I,  TOV  ad\rjTtjv. 

II.   Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  child  bears  [away]  the  first  prize.  2. 
Through  the  air  are  borne  the  voices  of  birds. 
3.  In  the  air  are  good  spirits  who  are  guardians 
of  men.  4.  Small  marks  appear  on  the  gold. 

5.  The  statues  in  the  park  appear  lonely.     6.  The 
athlete   has    a   measuring-rod   seven   feet 2    long. 
7.  The  orator  is  an  antagonist  of  a  sailor  in  the 
first  contest  of  the  season.     8.  The  measuring-rod 
makes  a  long  mark  on  the  head  of  the  ancient 
mariner.      9.   Little  children  break  the  ice  with 
stones.     10.    The  fire  is  seen  afar.     11.  We  are 
reading  the  tale  of  the  ancient  mariner.     12.  A 
wise    orator   by  a   few   words   leads   the  people. 
13.  Shall  we  see  a  contest  of  athletes  under  the 

1  This  was  the  Greek  custom.         2  Accusative  of  extent. 


$6]  CONSONANT  DECLENSION.  77 

tree?     14.  The  fear  of  God  is  the  beginning  of 
wisdom. 

86.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  Agony  (ay&vid,  another  form  for  aywv)  is  prop- 
erly struggle,  then  the  pain  of  struggle  in  a  contest, 
but  has  come  to  include  any  severe  pain  or  anguish. 
From  dywvi£oij,ai,  is  formed  aycDVicrr^  contestant; 
this  with  Trpwro?  gives  prot-agonist,  first  contestant, 
used  especially  of  the  leading  actor  in  a  Greek 
play. 

2.  Aer-o-naut  is  an  air-sailor;  aer-o-lite,  a  stone 
which  falls  from  the  air.     As  aer  was  taken  from 
Greek  into  Latin,  some  of   our  derivatives  have 
Latin   endings   or    are   compounded   with    Latin 
words.     Such  are  aer-zW,  aer-ate,  aer-iform.     Air 
has   been  ^further   changed    by   coming    through 
French. 

3.  Daemon,  or  demon,  now  denotes   bad   spirits 
only,  quite  differently  from  Greek   usage ;    and 
daimon  is  sometimes  used   in   the   more   general 
sense  of  Sallow.      This  sense  is  retained  in  dai- 
monic,  and  sometimes,  though  not  usually,  in  dae- 
monic;   demoniac   and  demon-ology  are   connected 
rather  with  demon. 

4.  Icon-o-clasm  is  the  act  of  an  icon-o-clast ;  icon- 
o-graphy  is  the  description  of  images,  statues,  or 
pictures. 

5.  Eremite  (ep^pir^,  from  eprjfjuo^  is  less  com- 
mon than  hermit,  the  corrupted  form  of  the  same 
word. 


78  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [86— 

6.  The  various  meanings  of  canon  are  all  more 
or  less  closely  connected  with  the  figurative  sense 
of  rule.      For  example,  it  denotes  a  rule  of  the 
church;   the  list  of  sacred  books  accepted  by  the 
church  as  belonging  to  the  Bible ;  the  authoritative 
list  of  saints,  as  in  the  Roman  Catholic  church. 
Hence  we  have  canonical  and  canonize. 

7.  N<zur/Xo9,  which  is  merely  another  form  of 
vavrrjs,  is  Latinized  into  nautilus,  a  little  shell-fish 
that  sails  over  the  water  in  its  shell.     The  con- 
nection between  vav$  and  nausea  is  plain  to  any 
one  who  has  been  sea-sick. 

8.  On  a  pyre  (from  irvp)  the  dead  were  burned, 
among  the  Greeks  and  Romans.     Pyr-o-technics  is 
the  art  (re^^)  of  making  fire-works.    The  em-pyr- 
ean  (from  ep-Trvpos  in  fire  or  on  fire,  ev  and  Trvp)  is 
the  highest  heaven,  which  the  ancients  imagined  to 
be  pure  fire. 

9.  Rhetoric  is  primarily  f)  prjropLfcrj  re^yrj  the  art 
of  an  orator ;  but  the  term  is  now  used  to  denote 
the  art  of  composition,  while  oratory  has  more  ref- 
erence to  the  art  of  speaking  in  public. 

10.  The  primary  force  of  character  is  still  seen 
in   its   sense  of   a   distinctive  mark,   as   a   letter, 
figure,  or  sign.     Then  the  word  came  to  signify 
the  sum  of  those  invisible  marks  of  one's  nature, 
the  qualities  of  soul  which  make  up  what  is  called 
character.     Hence  characterize  (^xapa/crrjpl^co^  and 
characteristic. 

11.  In  this  and  former  chapters  we  have  met 
several  Greek  verbs  derived  from  nouns  and  end- 


87]  CONSONANT  DECLENSION.  79 

ing  in  -l£co  or  -l%o/j,ai.  This  ending  -/£o>  (-/£b//,eu) 
was  used  very  freely  in  Greek  to  change  nouns 
into  verbs  ;  and  so  many  Greek  verbs  have  been 
taken  into  English  with  the  termination  -ize  (or 
-ise)  that  this  ending  itself  has  been  pretty  fully 
naturalized,  and  is  added  to  many  nouns  and 
adjectives  which  have  themselves  nothing  to  do 
with  Greek.  Also,  from  the  same  class  of  verbs 
were  formed  nouns  in  -£07x09  and  -KTrfa  which 
have  given  us  the  endings  -ism  and  -1st. 

XV.  CONSONANT  DECLENSION:   NEUTER  STEMS 

IN   -ar-   AND   -e<7-.      Ho\vs. 
87. 

TO   (TTVeV/JLdT-^)  TO   (jy€V 

breath  race 

Sing.  N. 
G. 

D.  Trvevfjiar-i  yevei, 

A.  TTvev/Jia  «yei>o9 

V.  7TV€V/Jia  7€J>09 

Dual  N.  A.  V.  irvev/juar-e  yeve-e 

G.  D.  TTvevfidr-oiv  yeve-oiv 

Plu.    N.  V.  Trvev^ar-a  yeve-a 

G. 

D. 

A.  Trvevfjuar-a  <yeve-a 


a.  All  neuter  nominatives  singular  in  -a  have 
stems  in  -ar-;    final  r  of  the  stem  is  dropped  in 


80  THJS  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [8d— 

the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  singular, 
which  take  no  case-ending.  This  r  often  appears 
in  English  derivatives. 

b.  Stems  in  -e<7-  change  the  last  syllable  to  -09  in 
the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  singular. 
This  is  the  same  vowel-change  which  we  have 
already  met  in  Xe<y&>,  Xo^yo?;  rpeTrco^  T^OTTO?  (see 
57,  7)  ;  o-reXXo),  crroXo?  (see  60,  7)  ;  V€/JLQ>,  VO/JLOS  ; 
cr/ceTTTo/jLai,  CT/COTTO?  ;  (frepco,  (f>6pos  (see  82,  9).  Be- 
tween two  vowels,  and  before  -c™,  cr  is  dropped. 

88.  The  adjective  77-0X^9,  TroXX?;,  TTO\V  much 
(plural,  many)  has  the  stem  TTO\V-  in  some  for,ms, 
and  in  others  the  stem  ?roXXo-  (feminine,  ?roXXa). 


Sing.  N.  7roXu9  7roXX?7  TroXu 

G.  TTOXXOU  7TOXX?79  TTOXXoi) 

D.  TToXXft)  7TOXX?7  TTOXXft) 

A.  7TO\VV  TTOXX^J/  7TO\V 

V.  TroXu  TroXX?;  TToXiJ 

(Dual  wanting.) 

Plu.    N.  V.         TroXXo/  TroXXat  TroXXa 

G.  TTOXXWJ/  TTOXXCOJ/  TTOXXft)^ 

D.  TroXXoK  TroXXafc  7roXXot9 

A.  7roXXov9  7roXXa9  TroXXa 

89.    Vocabulary. 

aXXo9,  -77,  -o1  o^r  (allo-pathy). 

77,  -ov  S#s£  (aristo-crat). 


1  Declined  like  avrds  (see  66  and  note  !). 


90]  CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 

o  yd/j,os,  -ov 


81 


marriage  (poly-gam-y). 

become,    be    born,    (of  events) 

,77 
take  place. 


TO 


(fr. 


TO  rypafjifJLa,  -TO9 

TO  €tSo9,   -€O9 

/caXo9,  -?;,  -ov 

TO  /CaXXo9,  -€09 
TO  KpaTOS,  -€O9 

/cpaTeco  (fr.  /cpaTos) 
9,  -a,  -ov 


o/xou,  adv., 
TO  ovvfia,  -T09 
TO  7ra^o9,  -eo9 
TO  TTvev/jia,  -T09 
6  Trvevfitov,  -01/09 
7roXu9,  TToXX^,  TroXu 
7T/x>,  prep.  w.  gen., 
TO  xp&fjia,  -T09 
TO  i|re{)8o9,  -€09 


writing,  letter  (tele-gram). 

shape,  figure  (kal-eido-scope). 

beautiful  (kal-eidoscope). 

beauty. 

strength. 

rule  (aristo-crat). 

like  (homoeo-pathy). 

together. 

name  (Vyn-onym). 

x    J  m        S 

feeling,  passion  (pathos). 
breath,  wind  (pneumat-ic). 
lung  (pneumon-ia). 
much,  plural  many  (poly-gamy). 
before  (pro-gram). 
color  (chrome). 
falsehood  (pseudonym). 


90.    ^Exercises. 
I.   Translate  into  English. 

1.     'Ei/    Ty    dplo-Ty    apxfj    ol    apicrTOL    /cpaTeov&L 
(aristo-crat,  aristo-cracy).     2.  77  ap^rj  Kafctf  ICTTLV  el 


1  Root  ycv-  ;  compare  Latin  gigno,  genui,  genus. 


82  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [90— 


(if)  KCLKOS  Srj/jios  fcpareei  (demo-cracy)  r&v  aptcrrcov 
TroXZrooz'.1  3.  ol  deol  vepovcn  rco  r&v  dv0pa)7T(0v 
yevei  /caXXo?  KOI  Kpdros  Kal  ra  aXXa  dyaOd.  4.  ra 
TrdOea  T&V  Oewv  o/jioia  TOLS  rwv  dv6pu>7TG)v  TrdOecriv^ 
el(TL.  5.  7ro\\al  <yeveal  olfceovcnv  OJJLOV  rrjv  yfjv. 

6.  ol  /ca\ol  teal  dyaOol  TralSes  ov  \eyovcn  tyev&ea. 

7.  TO  %pO)/JLa  T&V    €7Tl  TCO    yS^ySX/ft)  ypa/JL/JLaTCOV    OfJiOlOV 

pv<ra>*  8.  pf  TrvevfJboves  rov  dO\rjrov  <yv/j,vd- 
irpb  rov  dywvos,  Kal  rj  crap%  yiyverai  6/jboid 
9.  TL  €(TTLV  ev  ovv/Jbari,  ;  10.  /ca\a  ei&ea 
o-K€7rrd/ji€0a  (kal-eido-scope).  11.  ol  opvlOes  elcri 
7ro\\a>v  xpco/jLaTcov^  (poly-chrome).  12. 
ypd(f>ovcn  Trepl  rov  jd/jiov  /caXXeo?  Kal 
13.  TroXXol  TrorafJiol  paKpa  ovvfjuara  e^ovcn.  14.  ov 
TTO\V  0o)5  e^ofjiev  CK  rwv  acrrpcov.  15.  <w  ?rat,  alaOd- 
vei  rb  Kpdros  rcov 


II.   Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  In  many  contests  the  best  men  bear  [away] 
the  prizes.  2.  The  athlete's  family  has  many 
marks  of  beauty.  3.  The  sailor's  horses  are  from 
a  beautiful  race.  4.  The  child  has  a  good  name 
and  a  figure  which  is  like  the  statues  of  the  gods. 
5.  You  are  painting  (ypdcfrco*)  the  letters  with 
beautiful  colors.  6.  Men  do  not  rule  the  winds. 
7.  The  ship  is  borne  by  the  strength  of  the  winds. 

1  As  a  verb  of  ruling  Kparew  takes  the  genitive  (see  81, 

i.,  i). 

2  "O/xotos  takes  the  dative,  like  tcros  (see  72  and  note  x), 

3  Predicate  genitive,  used  as  in  Latin. 


91]  CONSONANT  DECLENSION.  83 

8.  The  orators  are  exercising  their  lungs  ;  they  are 
reading  together  a  song  about  marriage.  9.  The 
marriage  takes-place  before  the  season  of  roses. 
10.  We  have  like  feelings  (homoeo-pathy)  with 
other  men.  11.  In  the  books  of  ancient  orators 
are  not  a  few  falsehoods.  12.  In  the  best  schools 
children  are  educated  together.  13.  The  soli- 
tary athlete  shows  much  strength,  but  not  much 
beauty. 

91.    Notes  on  Derivatives. 


1.  Allo-pathy  (aXXo?,  vra^o?),  the  use   of   such 
medicines  as  will  produce  effects  different  from 
those  produced  by  the  disease,  is  contrasted,  as  a 
mode  of  treating  disease,  with  homeo-pathy  (see  14,  #). 

2.  From  yd/jios  we  obtain  mono-gamy   (^01^09), 
poly-gamy  (vroXu?),  and  fo'-gamy;  the  last  is  another 
instance  of  the  combination  of   a  Latin   with  a 
Greek  element.     (Compare  fo'-cycle,  60,  5.) 

3.  Hetero-geneous  (erepo-yevrfs  ;  erepos  and  76^09) 
means   of  different  kinds,  and  is  contrasted  with 
homo-genedus  (0/^0-76^779  ;  for  o/no-  see  91,  8)  of  the 
same  kind,  or  all  of  one  kind.     Eu-gene  (evyevrjs, 
from  ev  and  761/09)  and  its  feminine  Eu-genia,  or 
Eli-genie  (the  French  form),  signify  well-born,  or 
of  good  race.     The  root  of  ^l^vo^ai  takes  the  form 
<yov-  (see  87,  b,  second  sentence)  in  theo-gony  (0eo- 
yovtd,  tfeoV),  birth  of  the  gods,  or  genealogy  of  the 
gods  ;  also  in  cosmo-gony,  birth  of  the  universe. 

4.  The  syllable  -gram,  from  ^pa^pa,  has   been 
already  given,  in  some  words,  as  from  rypd<f>a)  (epi- 


84  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [91- 

gram,  68,  6 ;  mono-gram,  68,  9 ;  deca-gram,  82,  3). 
Further,  pro-gram  (V/oo)  is  literally  a  before-writing ; 
grammar  was  first  applied  to  written  language  ;  the 
adjective  grammatical  shows  the  r  of  the  stem. 

5.  We  have  seen  that  in  many  compounds  the 
vowel  -o-  is  inserted  to  connect  the   two  parts, 
sometimes  taking  the  place  of  a  different  vowel  at 
the  end  of  the  first  stem.     (Compare  51,  1.)     In 
spher-oid    (from   a^aipd),   aster-oid    (from   darijp, 
dcrrpov),  delt-oid  (from  SeXra),  anthrop-oid  (in  which, 
if  it  stood  by  itself,  one  might  say  that  the  o  be- 
longed to  the  stem  of  dvOpcoiro?),  this  o  has  been 
contracted  with  -id,  the  remnant  of  eZSo?,  into  the 
syllable  -old.      Then,  as  this  ending  occurred  so 
frequently   (especially  in   technical   or   scientific 
words),  the  syllable  -old  has  come  to  be  regarded 
as  a  simple  suffix,  meaning   like,  which   may  be 
added  to  words  from  Latin  as  well  as  to  words 
from  Greek.     Thus  ov-oid.  (Latin  ovum,  egg),  albu- 
minoid., etc.     The  syllable  -ide,  frequent  in  chem- 
ical terms,  is  also  from  eZ&o?. 

6.  Instead  of  /caXo?  or  /eaXXos,  the  related  form 
/ca\\L-  was  used  in  composition.     This  gives  calli- 
in  calli-graphy,  calli-sthenics  (o-0eVo9,  -609,  strength, 
nearly  equivalent  to  Kpdros). 

7.  From    /cpdros,    tcpareco,    we    have    the    forms 
-crat-ic  and  -cracy  in  aristo-crat,  aristo-cracy ;  demo- 
crat,   demo-cracy ;     auto-crat     (auro?) ;     theo-cracy 
(#eo<?)  ;  pluto-crat,  pluto-cracy  (TrXoOro?,  -ov  wealth). 
These  words  have  made  the  meaning  of  the  part 
from  Kpdro<$  so  familiar,  that  -crat  and  -cracy  are 


91]  CONSONANT  DECLENSION.  85 

added  to  a  few  words  not  from  Greek.  Thus 
bureau-CT&t,  bureau-ci&cy ;  and  mob-o-CT&cy  is  some- 
times heard  instead  of  the  more  regular  ochlo-cracy 
(0^X09,  -ov  moH). 

8.  The  adverb  O/AOV  is  a  genitive  form  of  the  ad- 
jective 0/409,  -77,  -6v  same,  which  early  passed  out 
of  common  use.     But  a  number  of  compounds  of 
6/109  remained   in  common   use,  and  we  have  in 
English  homo-geneons  (6/40-76^77' 9 ;  see  91,  3) ;  hom- 
onym, hom-onymous  (ovvpa),  of  the  same  name,  that 
is,  pronounced  alike. 

9.  Besides  hom-onym,  ovv^a  gives  us  an-onymous 
(av-  privative ;  see  60,  3,  6) ;    syn-onym  (GVV),  a 
word  of  like  meaning  with  another  (to  be  distin- 
guished  from   hom-onym) ;   pseud-onym   (-^61)809) ; 
also  ep-onymous  (eVt),  giving  a  name  to,  and  ep- 
onym,  a  name  of  a  person  given  to  a  people  or  place. 
A  patr-onymic  is  a  name  derived  from  that  of  a 
father  (irarrip,  Trarp- 6s  father,  Latin  pater)  or  other 
ancestor.     Met-onymy  (yu,era  indicating  change  ;  see 
60,  6)  is  a  rhetorical  figure  consisting  in  a  certain 
kind  of  change  of  name. 

10.  From  Trdffos  are  derived  pathetic  (TraOrjTi/cos), 
a-pathetic  and  a-pathy  (alpha  privative;  see  60,  3, 0), 
anti-pathy  (aim),  sym-pathy  (cruz/),  hydr-o-pathy  (the 
treatment  of  disease  by  water,  vScop'),  and  path-o- 
logy,  the  theory  or  doctrine  of  disease. 

11.  The  r  of  TTvevfjuar-  appears  in  pneumatic. 

12.  The  representative  of  ?roXu9  in  English  is 
poly-  with  the  force  of  the  plural,  many,  which  has 
already  been  mentioned  with  a  number  of  com- 


86  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [92— 

pounds.       (See  41,    1;    60,   3,    <?;    60,    8;    82,    2; 
82,  7.) 

13.  Hp6  appears  in  pro-gnosis  (yiyvwo-fcci)*),  judg- 
ment  beforehand,   especially   as    to   the   probable 
course  and  result  of  a  disease,  whence  pro-gnostic 
and  pro-gnosticate. 

14.  From  ^pco/jia  we  have  mono-chrome  (/-toy  09), 
poly-chrome,  chrom-o-litho-graph  (see  67,  I.,  4),  and 
the  abbreviated  chromo.     Chromatic,  pertaining  to 
colors,  retains  the  stem.     It  is  most  often  used  of 
a  musical  scale  of  which  the  intervals  are  all  half- 
tones, the  intermediate  tones  having  been  at  one 
time  commonly  written  in  colors. 

XVI.   CONSONANT  DECLENSION:  STEMS  IN  -i- 

AND   -6V-. 
92. 

fj  (?roXt-) 

city  king 

Sing.  N. 
G. 
D. 

A.  iro\,L-v  /3acri\€-a 

V. 


Dual  N.  A.  V.  7roXe-e 

G.  D. 

Plu.  N. 
G. 
D. 


94]  CONSONANT  DECLENSION.  87 

a.  Stems  in  -i-  take  -&>?,  instead  of  -09,  in  the 
genitive  singular,  and  take  -v  in   the  accusative 
singular.     The  vowel  i  appears  only  in  the  nomi- 
native,  accusative,  and   vocative   singular;    else- 
where e  (in  the  accusative  plural  e^)  has  taken  its 
place. 

b.  The  genitive  singular  and  plural  of  stems  in  -t-  still  keep 
the  accent  on  the  antepenult. 

c.  Stems  in  -ev-  lose  v  before  a  vowel  in  the  end- 
ing ;  they  take  -o>9  in  the  genitive  singular,  -d  in 
the  accusative  singular,  and  -a?  in  the  accusative 
plural. 

93.  The  verb  Svva/j,cu  can,  am  able,  is  a  deponent, 
and,  like  Latin  possum,  takes  the  infinitive  in 
dependence  upon  it.  It  is  conjugated  as  follows  : 

Sing.  1          Svva-fjiai, 

2  Svva-a-ai 

3  Svva-rcu 

Dual  2         Svva-<70ov 
3 


Plu.    1 
2 

3  Svva-  vrat, 

94.  Vocabulary. 

TO  a/cpov,  -ov  top,  upper  part  (acro-stic). 

77  a/e/oo-7ro7U9,  -e«9  citadel,  acro-polis. 

6  /3<z<7fcXeu9,  -e&)  9  king. 

-€&>9  birth,  origin,  genesis, 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[95— 


oY9,  adv., 


s,  -eft>9 
o  SvvdcTT'rjs,  -ov 
lepds,  -a,  -6v 
o  iepevs,  -eft>9 
\vco 
TI  \V<TIS,  -eft)? 


,  -6ft>9 
TO  /U0-09,  -609 

-a,  -ov 


-€ft>9 


77  Tat9,  -€ft)9 

<f)VQ) 

f)  <f)VO-l,<},  -60)9 

TO  <f>VTOVy  -OV 


carve  (hiero-glyph-ic). 
i(?e,  related  to  Svo 


force,  power  (dynamite). 

ruler,  dynast  (dynasty). 

sacred  (hiero-glyphic). 

priest  (hier-archy). 

loose,  undo,  let  loose. 

a  loosing,  setting  free. 

unloose,  take  apart,  ana-lyze. 

an   undoing,   taking   apart, 
ana-lysis. 

hatred  (mis-anthrope). 

dead  (necro-polis). 

new,  young  (neo-phyte). 

city  (necro-polis). 

line  (as  of  writing). 

arrange  (tactics). 

arrangement  (syn-tax). 

make  grow. 

(  (originally   growth,   then) 
(      nature  (physical). 

plant  (neo-phyte). 


95.  Exercises. 
I.   Translate  into  English. 
1.   O/  lepees  ev  ry  aKpoiro\€i  yX 


2.   e 

Trep   T^9  ToO  /coafjiov  yeve(Tec0$  (cosmo-gony). 
3.   ol  Svvdo-rai,  TroXhrjv  Svvafuv  e%ov<ri  /cal  /cpareov- 


95]  CONSONANT  DECLENSION.  89 

(Ti  TTO\\WV  dvOpwTTCOV.  4.  8^9  dvajLjvci)a-/C€L  6  Paari- 
Xei;9  TO  veov  f3i/3\lov  Trepl  rrjs  rcov  dcrrpcov  Ta£eo>9. 
5.  ev  rrj  vea  vroXet  (Nea-polis,  Naples)  ylyverai  veov 
<yeVo9.  6.  TroXXal  teal  ica\ai  eicriv  al  TCDV  ve/cp&v 
7roXee9  (necro-polis).  7.  77  Svva/Ms  rov  rfKiov  <j)vet>  ra 
<f)vrd.  8.  TO  /i6o~o9  dv0pa>7rcov  (mis-anthropy)  /ca/cbv 
7ra#o9  ecrri.  9.  ol  6eol  \vovcn  ra  TrvevuaTa,  fcal  rj 
vavs  KO\  TO,  vea  <f>vra  /cXdovrat,.  10.  al  veai  Svvav- 
rai  dva\vew  TO  (frvTOV,  TO  ovv/jia  ov  Svvavrai  \eyeiv. 
11.  Svvacrai  rrjv  rwv  dcrrpcov  <f>vo-t,v  \eyeiv  ;  12.  ol 
iepees  oifceovaiv  ev  rfj  aKpO7r6\eiy  aXXa  ov  TTO\V  Kpd- 
T09  e^ovcn.  13.  TroXXol  crri^oi  <ypd<f>ovrai  Trepl  rfjs 
cro<l>la$  rov  veov  Swdcrrov.  14.  77  Tral? 
q>Sr)V  Seta 


II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  sacred  writings  are  carved  on  stones. 
2.  The  priests  rule  (hier-archy)  the  city,  and  ar- 
range the  sacred  [things].  3.  The  birth  of  a 
young  king  is  reported  in  the  sacred  city.  4.  The 
overseer  takes-apart  and  examines  the  new  ma- 
chine. 5.  The  force  of  the  wind  breaks  many 
trees.  6.  The  rulers  come-to-know  the  hatred  of 
the  citizens.  7.  The  priests  announce  the  loosing 
of  the  sacred  birds.  8.  Sailors  cannot  rule  the 
winds.  9.  Man  is  by  nature  a  little  world  (micro- 
cosm). 10.  The  plant  lives  in  the  air  and  has  a 
long  name.  11.  Many  races  of  men  arrange  their 
houses  in  cities,  and  have  kings  and  priests  who 
make  laws.  12.  In  the  sacred  books  are  many 
tales  about  the  birth  of  the  gods.  13.  The  wise 


90  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [96— 

man  writes  a  letter  to  the  ruler  about  the  nature 
of  the  laws.     14.  The  top  of  the  tree  is  dead. 

96.  Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  An  acro-stic  (a/cpov  and  0-7-^09,  -ov  verse  or 
line)  is  a  series  of  lines  of  which  the  first  or  last 
letters,  or  both,  form  a  word  or  words.     A  di-stich 
(&-  representing  &($  or  Suo)  is  a  couplet,  or  two 
lines   making   complete   sense.      This   prefix   di-, 
meaning  double,  or   two,  appears  in  a  number  of 
derivatives,  as  di-graph,  two  letters  standing  for  one 
sound  (pA,  for  example)  ;  di-morphic  or  di-morphous, 
appearing  under  two  forms  ;  di-phthong  (see  68,  9)  ; 
di-lemma  (see  110,  8)  ;   di-(s)  syllable  (see  110,  8). 
This  prefix  must  not  be  confused  with  the  di-  from 
Latin,  meaning  apart,  as  in  di-gress. 

2.  Basil,  as  a  proper  name  and  as  the  name  of  a 
plant,  is  from  fia<ri\evs.     Basilisk,  a  kind  of  serpent, 
is  from  ftao-iKio-Kos  little  king,  the  diminutive  of 
y8a<7£Xeu9,  so  called  because  something  on  its  head 
slightly  resembles  a  crown.     (Compare  asterisk, 
68,  2.)     A  basilica  ^/3aa-i\iKrf)  was  originally  the 
building  in  which  a   judicial   officer  at  Athens, 
called  /3a<™Xei;9,  held  court.    This  style  of  building, 
imitated  and  somewhat  changed  at  Rome,  became 
the  prototype  of  the  early  Christian  churches,  and 
churches  of  this  form  are  still  called  basilicas. 

3.  Genetic  is  the  adjective  corresponding  to  gen- 
esis.    Palin-genesis  (jrd\iv  and  yeveo-is ;  see  31,  6) 
is  again-birth,  re-generation. 


96]  CONSONANT  DECLENSION.  91 

4.  The  tri-glyph  (r/oefc  and  y\v<f>(D*)  is  a  kind  of 
architectural  ornament. 

5.  Dynamic  (Suz/a/u/eo?)    is   the    adjective   from 
Suz/a/u?.      Dynamo   is   a  common  contraction  for 
dynamo-electric  (rj\eicTpov  amber,  in  which  electricity 
was  first  observed)  machine,  so  called  because  in 
it  electricity  is  generated  by  force  from  a  steam- 
engine. 

6.  Hieratic    (Ve/wrrtAxfc)    is   the    adjective   from 
lepevs.     Hiero-glyphics  were  the  sacred  writing,  or 
picture-characters,  which  were  used  by  the  Egyp- 
tian priests,  and  which  have  come   down  to  us 
carved  on  stone.      A  hiero-phant   (</>atW)   is  one 
who   shows    (make  plain,   interprets*)    the    sacred 
things.    Hier-onymus  (6W/xa)  means  having  a  sacred 
name  ;  Jerome  is  a  corruption  of  the  same. 

7.  Para-lysis  (jrapd-\vcn<^)  is  a  loosing  aside,  or 
disabling,  the  name  of  a  disease  which  disables 
the  nerves.     Paralytic  (7rapa\vTifcd^  is  the  corre- 
sponding adjective,  as  analytic  is  the  adjective  cor- 
responding to  ana-lysis.     Palsy  is  a  corruption  of 
paralysis,  intermediate  forms  being  parlesy,  palesy. 

8.  A  necro-logy  is  an  account  of  the  dead. 

9.  Neo-logy  or  neo-logism  (i/eo?)  is  the  use  of  new 
words.      A   neo-phyte   is  one  newly  planted    (yeo- 
<f>vrov) ;  that  is,  a  new  convert,  or  a  new  member 
of  a  religious  society.    Also  from  z/eo?  we  obtain  the 
prefix  neo-  meaning  new,  used  with  a  considerable 
number  of  words,  as  neo-platonism  (TlXdrwv  Plato). 

10.  Miso-gamist  is  from  /ucro?  and  7^/109;  miso- 
gynist from  /jLiaos  and  yvvr],  yvvai/c-os  woman. 


92  TEE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [96— 

11.  IToXt?  has  been  put  at  the  end  of  several 
modern  names  of  cities,  such  as  Indiana-polls,  Anna- 
polis, in  imitation  of  ancient  Nea-polis  (literally  new 
town),  and  others.     In  Constantino-pie  (Kcova-Tavrl- 
vov-7ro\is  Constantine^ s  town)  and  in  some  others, 
the  last  element  has  been  shortened.     A  Greek 
metr-o-polis  was  the  mother  city  (/jitfTrjp  mother,  Latin 
mater)  which  sent  out  colonies,  and  to  which  these 
colonies  looked  back  as  to  a  common  centre.     The 
adjective  is  metro-politan  (TroXir???). 

12.  Tactics   and   tactic    (ratcTiicos   from  rdo-aco') 
have  reference  to  the  arrangement  of  military  or 
naval  forces.     Syntax  (crvv  and  ra^)  is  the  arrang- 
ing together  of  words  in  sentences ;  syn-tactic  is  the 
adjective. 

13.  From  <j)vo-i<?  are  derived  a  number  of  words 
which  show  quite  a  variety  of  meaning.      Thus 
physi-cal  signifies  pertaining  to  nature;  physi-o-logy 
is  the  science  of  nature,  but  in  use  the  word  is  re- 
stricted to  one  phase  of  the  nature  of  the  human 
body ;  physi-o-gnomy  (<yiyvd)crfcc0~)  is  the  art  of  dis- 
cerning the  nature  of  a  person  from  his  face,  and 
then  the  word   comes   to   mean   the   face   itself. 
Again,  physics  is  the  science  of  nature,  having  about 
the  force  which  we  should  expect  physiology  to 
have  from  its  etymology.     Physic  has  received  the 
special   meaning   of    the    art   of  healing    diseases 
(whence  physician)  ;  then  the  word  was  employed 
in  the  sense  of  medicine,  and  finally  for  that  par- 
ticular kind  of  medicine  with  which,  in  old  times, 
people  were  most  familiar.     In  meta-physics 


97]  Mi- VERBS:   Ti&y/u  AND  Ai'Soyu.  93 

signifies  after  (a  common  use  of*  /xera  with  the 
accusative),  since  meta-physics  was  considered  as 
coming  after  physics  in  the  order  of  studies.  It 
includes  the  study  of  the  phenomena  of  mind,  psy- 
chology (see  51,  8). 

14.  An  epi-phyte  (eW,  <f>vrov)  is  a  plant  growing 
on  another,  without  receiving  from  it  any  nourish- 
ment. 


XVII.   M^-VERBS:  Ti'0i//u  AND 

97.  A  few  verbs,  some  of  them  common  ones, 
are  conjugated  in  a  slightly  different  manner  from 
the  verbs  thus  far  given  (with  the  exception  of 
Svvafjiai).  This  form  of  conjugation  is  called  the 
/u-form,  from  the  last  syllable  of  the  present  in- 
dicative active  first  singular.  TlOrjfu  put  and  Sl- 
give  are  examples. 

Active.  Passive  (Middle). 

Sing.  1     ri-6^-fii 

2 
3 


Dual   2     ri-6e-Tov  Ti-6e-<r6ov 

3     ri-Oe-rov  Ti-6e-cr6ov 


Plu.     1  Ti-0e-fJL€V 

2  TL-0€-T€ 

3  Ti-6e-acri  ri-Oe-vrai 
Inf.  ri-Oe-vai 


94  THE  GREEK  tfr  ENGLISH.  [98— 

Active.  Passive  (Middle). 


Sing.  1 

2  6Y-&0-9  Sl-So-crcu 

3  oY-8G)-o"£  Si-Bo-rat, 


Dual  2  Si-So-rov 

3  S/-So-TOz/ 

Plu.    1  St-So-fjiev 

2  St-So-re  Si-So-(r0e 

3  Si-So-dai  Sl-So-vrai 


Inf.  St-So-z/a^  8l-&o-<r0ai, 


a.  The  root  of  rldrjfju,  is  #e-,  that  of  StSw/it  is  So-; 
the  syllables  ™-  in  ri-Orj-^i  and  S^-  in  Sl-So)-/M,  called 
the  reduplication,  do  not  appear  in  derivatives. 
(Compare  yi-yvco-cr/ca).)  The  root-syllables  0e-  and 
So-  are  lengthened  to  #??-  and  &a>-  in  the  singular 
active. 

98.    Vocabulary. 

TO  avOos,  -eo9  flower  (anther). 

TO  Sepfjia,  -TO?  s&iw,  Azc?^  (derm). 

SiS&fii,  give  (dose). 

Spdco  do,  accomplish. 

TO  SpafLa,  -TO?  (1)  ^^c?,  (2)  drama. 

TO  97^09,  -609  character  (eth-ics). 

Kev6<$y  -ij,  -6v  empty  (ceno-taph). 

TO  fcepas,  Keparos  horn  (rhino-ceros). 

o  fjidvTis,  -e&)9  soothsayer,  prophet  (necro-mancy). 

TO  /^e\09,  -eo9  song,  strain  of  music  (mel-ody). 

-179  memory  (mnem-onic). 


99]  Ui-VERBS:  Ti&y/u  AND  Ai'&»/u.  &5 

77  pf$,  plvo?1  nose  (rhin-o-ceros). 

d  Ta<£o9,  -ov  grave,  tomb  (cenotaph). 

riffrj/jLL  put,  place. 

77  Oecris,  -eo>9          position,  putting  (thesis). 

ow-ri0ijfJLt  put  together. 

a   putting   together,    composition 


77  <TVV-Ue(Tl<$,  -60)9  ,  .          .    x 

(      (syn-thesis). 
TO  <f)dpfjia/cov,  -ov   drug  (pharmacy). 

99.  Exercises. 
I.   Translate  into  English. 

1.  To  Oepfjiov  rov  r/Kiov  <f>v€t,  ra  avffea.  2. 
rc5  rdcfxt)  (epi-taph)  rov  fiavreco^  <y\v<f)o/ji€V  ra 
/jLara  rov  ovv^Laro^.  3.  77  fu/cpa  irals  rdcrcrec  avOea 
€7rl  ro3  Kevq>  rd(f)Q)  (ceno-taph).  4.  o  /3ao-i\evs  Sv- 
varai  Spdeiv  7ro\\a  /cal  dya0a  Spa/jLara.  5.  €7rl  rc3 
TT??  pivo?  /cepa?  (rhin-o-ceros)  eVrt.  6.  [77] 
v@pGt)7roL<?  7ro\\d  <f)dp/JLa/ca,,  a  6 
(pharmacist,  druggist^ 
7.  rot?  6/070^9  /cal  Spa/jLa<ri,  rov  TraiSbs 
TO  77^09.  8.  77  a-vvOeGLs  ov%  6/jLoid  earl  rfj  ava\v<T€i. 
9.  6  vavTijs  ri6r](TLV  vBcop  ev  TO)  icevto  SepfjiaTL 
pd$.  10.  ol  VTTO/cpiral  fyaivovrai  e^eiv  ev  rrj 
7ro\\d  fjbe\ea.  11.  ol  tepees  TiQeacn  %pv<rbv  VTTO 
\i0<p  ev  jcovia  rov  oil/cov.  12.  djaOd  fiova  \€yo/JLev 
Trepl  ro)V  vefcpwv.  13.  crvvriOe/Jiev  pdSa  /cal  a\\a 
avOea.  14.  &  ySao~tXei),  ov  Svvaaac  ftiov  rol<$  ve/cpol? 
StSovai. 

1  Accusative  ptva. 


96  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [100— 

II.   Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  soothsayer  sells  drugs  [which  are]  like 
dead  flowers.  2.  The  sun  gives  to  the  skin  of 
the  sailor's  nose  the  color  of  a  rose.  3.  A  good 
character  is  shown  by  good  deeds.  4.  The  best 
actors  have  a  good  memory.  5.  The  king  who 
makes  (riO^^i)  the  laws  of  the  people  cannot 
make  (nroieai)  the  songs.  6.  Nature  gives  horns 
to  the  she-goat  and  a  thick  (jra^ii)  hide  (pachy- 
derm) to  the  hippopotamus.  7.  The  first  flowers 
of  the  season  are  put  upon  the  graves  of  the  dead. 
8.  Can  you  tell  the  position  of  the  cities  which 
are  sending  their  citizens  to  war  ?  9.  The  peda- 
gogue is  writing  a  book  about  the  composition  of 
words.  10.  The  priest  is  examining  the  origin  of 
the  sacred  songs.  11.  Young  orators  are  able  to 
put  together  many  words  which  have  little  force. 

12.  The   gods   appear   to   the    soothsayer   alone. 

13.  A  beautiful  deed  is  like  a  light  which  can  be 
seen  afar. 

100.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  Anth-o-logy  is  properly  a  collection  of  flowers ; 
for  the  primary  meaning  of  \eyco,  from  which 
the  last  part  is  derived,  is  gather.  (^^K-\€KTL/CO<; 
eclectic,  from  e£  and  Xeyw,  shows  the  same  force 
of  the  verb.)  But  anth-ology  is  generally  used  in 
a  figurative  sense,  to  denote  a  collection  of  choice 
passages  from  authors,  especially  from  poets.  Heli- 
anthus  (rpuo?)  is  the  scientific  name  for  sun-flower. 


100]  Mi-VERBS:  TMrjfjii,  AND  A/Soyu.  97 

2.  Epi-dermis    (eW  and    8e/>/ia),   the    scientific 
word  for  the  outer  skin,  has  come  into  common 
use.     Hypo-dermis,  the  under  skin  (UTTO),  is  mostly 
confined  to  scientific  writing  and  speech,  although 
the  adjective  hypo-dermic  has  become  common  from 
the  practice  of  giving  certain  remedies  by  injec- 
tion under  the  skin.     The  element  hypo-  is  used  in 
many  scientific  terms  in  the  opposite  sense  to  that 
of  hyper-  (see  46,  6,  and  note  that  the  related  Latin 
prefix    sub-  is   in    like    manner   contrasted   with 
super-).      The    adjective    pachy-dermatous    (?ra^u 
thick)  preserves  the  -ar-  of  Sepfiar-.     Taxi-dermy  is 
the  art  of  preparing  skins  so  as  to  preserve  their 
natural  appearance. 

3.  Dose  is  our  remnant  of  So'o-i?,  -eo>9  a  giving, 
from  BiBcofiL.     Anti-dote  (avri-Sorov)  is  a  medicine 
given  against  —  that  is,  to  counteract  some  effect. 
An-ec-dote  is  from  dv-ex-Sorov.      The  plural  dv-etc- 
Sora  (literally  things  not  given  out  or  published) 
was  the  name  'given  by  Procopius  [a  Byzantine 
writer  of  the  sixth  century  A.D.]  to  the  unpub- 
lished memoirs  of   the  emperor  Justinian,  which 
consisted  chiefly  of  tales  of  the  private  life  of  the 
court;    whence  the   application  of   the  name  to 
short  stories  or  particulars.9 

4.  A  drastic  (Spao-ri/cds  from  Spdco)  remedy  is 
an  active,  vigorous  one.    The  r  of  the  stem  Spdpar- 
appears  in  dramatic,  dramatist,  and  in  dramat-urgy 
(SpdjAarovpytd  for  Spdfj.aT-o-€p<yid,  the  second  part 
being  from  epyov)   drama-making,  or  the   art  of 
writing  and  representing  plays. 


98  THE  GEEEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [100— 

5.  An  earlier  meaning  of  97^09  is  custom,  habit; 
hence,  that  body  of  habits  and  usages  which  make 
up  character  or  morals.     (In  the  same  way  Latin 
mos,  moris,  custom,  has  given  us  moral.*)      From 
rjdos  in  the  latter  sense  we  have  ethic,  ethical,  per- 
taining  to  morals,  and  ethics,  the  science  of  morals. 

6.  Besides    rhin-o-ceros    (plv-o-Kepco?    nose-horn) 
/ee/oce>5  gives  us  also  mono-ceros  (/jLovo-Kepcos)  unicorn 
(Latin  unus,  one,  and  cornu,  horn). 

7.  From  p,dvri<s  we  have  the  adjective  mantic 
{fjiavTiKos),  and  also  the  element  -mancy  ^avreia), 
divination,  in  chir-o-mancy,  divination  by  examin- 
ing the   hand   (%e//o),  necro-mancy,  divination  by 
consulting  the  dead  (veicpo<i),  pyr-o-mancy,  by  in- 
terpreting the   appearance   of   a  fire   (irvp),  and 
biblio-mancy,  by  selecting  hap-hazard  a  passage  of 
the   Bible   (Pij3\iov).     The  corresponding  adjec- 
tives are  necro-mantic,  etc. 

8.  MeXos  (which  refers  to  the  music,  while  cJS^ 
refers  more  to  the  words  of  a  song)  appears  in 
melody  (see  31,  7)  and  in  mel-o-drama,  song-play,  or 
play  interspersed  with  music. 

9.  From  fJLvtffjw)  is  derived  the  adjective  /jLvrf^cov 
mindful,  which  gives  our  word  mnemonic,  pertain- 
ing to  memory,  and  mnemonics,  a  system  of  artificial 
aids  to  memory.    A-mnesty  (a-^v^cfTeia,  alpha  priva- 
tive ;  see  60,  3,  5)  is  a  legal  lack  of  memory,  that 
is,  a  general  pardon  for  past  offences  in  time  of 
war. 

10.  a.  The  root  0e-  is  the  central  element  of  a 
number  of  important  derivatives.     Thesis  has  the 


100]  Mi- VERBS:  Tt%u  AND  A/S<w/u.  99 

figurative  meaning  of  a  position  taken  and  main- 
tained in  argument.  (Note  the  derivation  of  posi- 
tion from  Latin  positio,  from  pono,  to  place.)  Anti- 
thesis (aim)  is  op-position,  contrast;  par-en-thesis 
(jrapd,  ev)  is  literally  a  putting  in  beside,  then 
something  put  in  beside,  as  a  side  or  subordinate 
matter;  hypo-thesis  (UTTO)  is  under-putting,  a  sup- 
position (Latin  sub,  under) ;  syn-thesis,  putting 
together,  is  often  contrasted  with  ana-lysis,  taking 
apart.  The  corresponding  adjectives  are  anti-thetic 
(azm-0e™/eo9),  par-en-thetic,  etc.,  to  each  of  which 
-al  is  often  added.  Further,  epi-thet  (eW-0eroz/)  is 
a  descriptive  word  put  on  (figuratively)  to  a  person 
or  thing. 

b.  Again,  dtjKrj  is  a  case  or  chest  in  which  to  put 
things ;    an    apo-thecary   (airo)   was    originally  so 
called  because  he  has  his  drugs  put  away  in  cases; 
biblio-theke  (j3ij3\lov),  book-case,  is  an  old  word  for 
library.     Hypo-thecate  is  a  legal  term  which  goes 
back  to  the  elements  VTTO  and  Orj/cq.     Hence  re- 
hypothecate. 

c.  A  theme  (Oepa,  -TO?)  is  primarily  a  subject 
laid  down,  or  proposed  for  discussion ;   from  this 
are  derived  the  other  uses  of  the  word.   The  adjec- 
tive thematic  retains  the  -ar-  of  the  stem.    Finally, 
avddeiJia,  -TO?  (ava  here  meaning  up)  was  originally 
anything  put  up  in  a  temple,  that  is,  offered  or 
devoted  to  a  god.     Later,  however,  the  form  avd- 
OTJ/JLO,  was  used  in  this  sense,  and  avd-de/jLa  meant 
only  what  was  devoted  to  an  evil  power.     Hence 
ana-themat-ize  (ttya-0e//,aT/£a>)  signifies  to  devote  to 


100  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [101— 

evil,  to  curse  solemnly  ;  and  ana-thema  is  not  only 
the  person  thus  cursed,  but  also  the  curse  itself, 
which  was  formerly  a  solemn  ceremony  of  the 
church. 

11.  Pharmaco-poeia  (<f>ap/jLa/co-7roud)  signifies  a 
book  describing  drug-making,  or  the  preparation  of 
medicines. 


XVIII.   Mt-  VERBS  :  r/Icm7/u  AND 

101.    The  root  of  iorrrj/ja  set  up,  cause  to  stand,  is 


o-ra-,  the  same  root  which  appears  in  Latin  sta-re 

and  English  stand.      The  present  indicative  and 
infinitive  are  as  follows  : 

Active.  Passive  (Middle). 

Sing.  1        I-O-TVJ-JM  i-crra-fjiai, 

2        2-<7T?7-9  i-o-ra-aai, 
3 


Dual    2  i-(TTa-TOV 

3  i-ara-TOV  i-crra-crOov 

Plu.    1 

2 

3  (i-a-rd-da-i)  i-ara-vrac 

l-crrdo'L 

Inf.  i-crrd-vat, 


a.  The  syllable  /-  (originally  <™-)  is  a  reduplica- 
tion, like  TI-  in  rLO^^i.  (Latin  sisto  corresponds, 
in  formation  and  meaning,  to  r<7T?7/u.)  The  mean- 
ing stand  is  given  to  certain  other  tenses  of  the 


103]        Mi-VERBS :  f/lo-rrjfjLi  JND   lie  paw*  fit.      101 

verb,  which  we  shall  not  use  here,  and  most  of  the 
derivatives  show  this  meaning. 

102.  The  root  of  Kepavvvpi  mix  is  Kepa-,  which  is 
shortened  to  Kpd-,  in  derivatives.  The  syllable 
-vvv-,  -vvv-,  is  a  suffix  used  to  form  the  stem  of  the 
present  tense. 

Active.  Passive  ( Middle) . 


Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Kepd-vvv-s 
Kepd-vvv-cri 

Kepd-vvv-aaL 
Kepd-vvv-rat, 

Dual  2 
3 

Kepd-vvv-TOV 
Kepd-vvv-TOV 

Kepd-vvv-crOov 
Kepd-vvv-aOov 

Plu.   1 

2 
3 

Kepd-vvv-fJiev 
Kepd-vvv-Te 
fcepa-vvv-do'L 

Kepd-vvv-a-6e 
Kepd-vvv-vTai 

Inf. 

Kepa-vvv-vai 

Kepd-vvv-aOai 

103.  Vocabulary. 

aipeo)  seize,  grasp. 

alpeofjiai  (middle)       choose. 

-tj,  -ov          able  to  choose  (heretic). 
(di.eresis> 


aip€co) 
Sca-\eyofjLaty  dep.,        converse  (dia-lect). 

!in  compounds  only,  with  the 
force   of  hard  or  bad;   op- 
posed to  €v  (dys-pepsia). 
TO  %<pov,  -ov  animal  (zoo-logy), 


IN  ENGLISH.  [104— 

-a,  -ov  one's  own,  private  (idiom). 

set  up,  cause  to  stand  (stat-ic). 
fcepdvvv/jii  mix. 

o  fcpdrijp,  -77/009  mixing-bowl  (crater). 

6>aXo;9,  -77,  -ov  even,  level  (an-omalous). 

digest  (dys-pep-sia). 
form,  mould  (plas-tic). 
'cut  (tome). 
(f>pd£o)  make  known,  tell  (phrase). 

104,  Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  fO  plvoKepax;  (see  100,  6)  Svvarai  alpeetv  ra 
a\\a  %a)a  KOI  riOevau  ev  rc3  Trora/zft).  2.  6  ie 
icrrrjo-t,  Kevov  Kparrjpa  VTTO  rc3  Sez^S/ow.  3. 
TO,  Qdp/jLa/ca.  4.  eVt  rfj  o/jia\fj  <yfj  lara/JLev  ol/covs. 
5.  o  Trafc  Kepdvvvo-i  yrjv  /cat  vBcop  /cal  vrXacrcre^  /ca\as 
T&V  £(pa)v.  6.  6  pl/cpos  Tecopytos  (see  57,  4) 
rb  SevSpov,  d\\d  (but)  ov  Svvarai  T^evSo? 
.  7.  Svvacrai  fypd^eiv  rd  ovvfjuara  rwv  av6e<ov 
a  dva\vei<$  ;  8.  dvOpcoTroi  ev  TreTrrovcn  (en-peptic) 
rrjv  crdp/ca  £(pcov  /cal  (f>vrd.  9.  o  /cpvcrTaX\,os  ev  rw 
ISlep  7rapa$el<7G)  rov  f3aai\ea><$  o/i-aXo?  ean.  10.  ol 
6eol  bvvavrai  7T\dcrcr€iv  vroXXa  yevea  £q>cov.  11.  ol 
a7rd(7TO\oi  St,a\eyovrai,  avv  TO??  TroXtrat?  Trepl  rov 
7ro\€/jiov.  12.  alpeofieOa  dyadov  77^09  dvrl  r^9  ftao-i- 
Xe&)9  &vvd/JL€(t)<;.  13.  rt  Kepdvvvrai  ev  rc3  Kparrjpi  ; 
14.  ot  0eol  &8oa<rt  TroXXa  ro6?  Tra^crt  TWI/  dv- 


105]        Mi-VEBBS:  "IcrTrj/Jii  AND   Kepdwv/M.      103 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  solitary  dynast  converses  with  the  priest, 
and  makes-known  his  private  feelings  (idio-pathic). 
2.  The  young  [man]  cannot  mould  an  image  of  a 
hippopotamus.  3.  The  poets  make-known  the 
character  and  deeds  of  the  ancients.  4.  They 
mix  drugs  in  a  little  mixing-bowl.  5.  The  animal 
is  able  to  eat  and  digest  many  kinds  of  plants. 
6.  They  are  setting  up  a  new  machine,  which  cuts 
grass.  7.  It  is  best  to  choose  the  level  road. 
8.  In  time  we  learn  to  choose  the  good  instead  of 
the  bad.  9.  The  sailor's  brother  seizes  and  throws 
the  measuring-rod.  10.  The  leaders  of  the  people 
cannot  divide  the  city.  11.  To  converse  with 
others  is  not  given  to  many  animals.  12.  A  level 
road  leads  to  the  river.  13.  He  chooses  the  best 
place  in  the  theatre,  from  which  he  can  see  the 
drama  well. 

105.  Notes  on  Derivatives. 


1.  Di-eresis  or  di-aeresis  (Si-aipeaw,  -eews),  liter- 
ally a  taking  apart,  shows  the  active  signification 
of  alpeco.     From  alpeco  in  its  middle  sense  we  have 
heresy  (aspect,?,  -ew?),  a  choosing,  and  heretic.     The 
term  heretic  was  originally  given  to  people  who  did 
not  accept  the  doctrines  of  the  church,  but  chose 
their  own  beliefs;   and  heresy  was  a  belief  thus 
chosen. 

2.  From  Sm-Xeyo/^at  (Sm  and  \eyco,  in  which  the 
force  of  Bid  is  not  clear)  we  obtain  dia-lect  ( 


104  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [105— 

Xe/cro9,  -on  conversation,  way  of  talking},  and  dia- 
logue (Sm-Xo709).  Dia-lectics  was  first  used  of  a 
conversational  form  of  argument  and  investigation. 

3.  A  zoo-phyte  (£eooz>,  fyvrov)  is  an  animal-plant ; 
that  is,  an  animal  very  much  like  a  plant.     An  epi- 
zootic disease  is  one  which  prevails  among  animals 
(eVl  rofc  £&)(H5)  as  an  epi-demic  (see  74,  1)  among 
human  beings.     The  zodiac  (faSia/cds,  an  adjective 
formed  from  %q>§iov,  the  diminutive  of  £eSoi/),  that 
imaginary  belt  of  the  sky  through  which  the  sun 
seems  to  move,  contains  the  twelve  constellations, 
which  are  fancied  to  resemble  various  animals. 

4.  Idiom  (l§ia>p.ay  -ro9)  denotes,  first  one's  own 
peculiar  use  of  language ;  then  a  mode  of  expres- 
sion which  is  peculiar   to  a  particular  language. 
Idiomatic  retains  -ar-  of  the  stem.     Idiot  (iSicoTrjs, 
-ov)  was  formerly  used  in  the  Greek  sense  of  a 
private  person,  as  distinguished  from  one  in  public 
station.     Then  it  came  to  mean  a  common,  unedu- 
cated, or  simple  person, 'and  finally  one  who  has 
not  the  ordinary  degree  of  intelligence. 

5.  From  the  root  of  to-T7?/u  we  have  static  (<rra- 
TIKOS)  and  statics.     A  compound  of  statics  is  hydr-o- 
statics  (#&*)/)),  the  science  which  has  to  do  with  the 
laws  of  pressure  and  equilibrium  of  water  and  sim- 
ilar liquids.     An  apo-state  (aTro-o-raT?;?)  is  one  who 
stands  off  from,  or  deserts,  his  former  faith  or  party. 
Apo-stasy  (aTro-o-ra^^)  is  the  act  of  so  deserting. 
Ec-stasy  (e/e-o-racw),  a  standing  out,  is  an  extreme 
state  of  emotion,  in  which,  as  we  say,  one  is  "  be- 
side himself " ;  ec-static  is  the  adjective.     Sy-stem 


105]        Mi-VERBS  :  "lo-TV/M  AND   Kepavvvpi.      105 


-TO?,  from  <rvv  and  fa'Trjfii)  denotes  the 
standing  together  of  things,  in  an  orderly  manner; 
systematic  is  the  adjective,  and  systematize  the  verb. 
(Many  English  words  containing  the  root  sta  are 
from  Latin.) 

6.  The  Greek  /cpdrtfp  was  a  large  bowl  in  which 
the  wine  was  mixed  with  water  before  being  drunk  ; 
the  crater  of  a  volcano  is  so  named  from  its  resem- 
blance in  shape.     From  i&o?,  avv,  and  Kpa<ri<;  mix- 
ture  was  formed  ISio-a-vy-icpdcrid  idio-syn-crasy,  one's 
own  peculiar  mixture    of   qualities  ;    idio-crasy   is 
rarely  used  in  the  same  sense. 

7.  From  opa\b$  and  dv-  privative  (see  60,  3,  5), 
we  have  an-omalous  (dv-cl)fjLa\o$  with  an  irregular 
lengthening  of  o  to  o>),  irregular,  and  ano-maly 
(av-cofjLa\La),  irregularity. 

8.  Eii-peptic  and   eu-pepsia   are  contrasted  with 
dys-peptic,  (Sucr-  and  TreTrro))  digesting  ill,  and  dys- 
pepsia, bad  digestion. 

9.  From  7rXao-<7<*>  we   obtain   plaster   (e/^-TrXao-- 
rpov),  and  also  plastic  (TrXacrr^oV),  moulding,  or 
capable  of  being  moulded,  or  pertaining  to  moulding 
or  fashioning. 

10.  The  root  of  refivco  is  re/-t-,  which  appears  in 
English  derivatives  in   the  form    TO^-,  with  the 
common  change  of  e  to  o.     A  tome  (TO/W,  -oi/)  is 
a  part  of  a  work  cut  from  the  rest,  hence  a  volume. 
An  a-tom  (a-ro/io?,  alpha  privative')  is  a  particle  so 
small  that  it  cannot  be  cut  in  two,  an  indivisible  par- 
ticle.    Ana-tomy  is  primarily  the  cutting  up  (ava- 

?),  dissection  of  a  body  ;  then  it  came  to  mean 


106  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [107— 

the  structure  of  a  body,  as  learned  by  dissection. 
Zoo-tomy  is  the  anatomy  of  animals.  An  epi-tome 
(eV^-ro/x?;)  is  a  brief  summary  of  a  book,  the  result 
of  cutting  out  all  but  the  principal  statements. 
The  Greek  word  for  in-sect  (Latin  in  and  seco, 
cuf)  is  ev-To/jiov,  because  so  many  insects,  like  the 
wasp  and  spider,  are  cut  into  so  as  to  be  almost 
divided.  Hence  the  first  element  of  entomo-logy. 

11.  Phrase  is  our  form  of  (frpdais  speaking,  from 
(ppd^co.  Compounds  are  phrase-o-logy,  para-phrase 
(jrapd),  and  peri-phrasis  (jrepi),  with  the  adjective 
peri-phrastic.  (Compare  circum-locution  from  Latin 
circum  and  loquor.^) 

XIX.    THE  VEKB   <E>?7/u;   THE  ADJECTIVE  Ha?. 

106.  The  conjugation  of  fyripi  say,  affirm,  is  nearly 
like  that  of  lo-rrj/Ai  in  the  present  active  ;  but  the 
present  indicative  of  fy^^i  is  enclitic  (see  55),  ex- 
cept in  the  second  person  singular,  fyfo  ;  hence  it 
follows  the  rules  in  55,  a  and  b,  in  regard  to  ac- 
cent, and  should  not  be  placed  at  the  beginning  of 
a  sentence. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plu. 


2  (£779  <j)a-rdv  <f>a~T€ 

3  tyrf-ai  fya-rov  <j)d<7l 

Inf. 


107.  The  adjective  ?ra9  all  (sometimes,  in  the 
singular,  every}  is  of  the  third  declension  in  the 


108]     THE  VEEB  <f>r)fjil  ;   THE  ADJECTIVE  TTCLS.    107 


masculine  and  neuter,  and  of  the  first  declension 
in  the  feminine.  It  has  some  irregularities  of  ac- 
cent, and  is  therefore  given  in  full. 


Sing.  JN. 

7TC19 

Tracra                ircuv 

G. 
D. 
A. 

Traz/Tos 

TTCLVTl 

Trdvra 

Tracnjs               Travros 
Tracrrj                TTCLVTI 
ircLo'dV  •            Trciv 

V. 

TTCLV 

Trdara                irdv 

DualN.A.V. 

irdvre 

TTddCL                        7TCLVTC 

G.D. 

irdvroi 

v        Tracraw             irdmoiv 

Plu.    N.V. 

Trai/res 

r          Trdcrai,               Trdvra 

G. 

TrdvTcov         Trdcrwv              TrdvTcov 

D. 

Trda-L 

j.                         ~ 

TTCLddl^                   TTddi 

A. 

TTaVTCH 

?          7rao~a9               Trdvra 

108. 

Vocabulary. 

i]  dyopa,  -£9 
So/eel  (3rd  sing 

.of     , 

assembly  (phantasm-agor-ia}. 
pain  (neur-alg-ia). 
weight  (baro-meter). 
teach  (didac-tic). 

it  seems,  seems  true. 

TO  Soy/la,  -TO  9 
fcaa>  (root 


opinion  (what  seems  true' 
dogma). 

burn. 

burning,  caustic. 

conceal  (crypt). 
\a/jL/3dvco  (root  Xa/3-)  take  (syl-lab-le). 
p,av6dva>  (root  pad-)    learn  (philo-math). 


/cavern  /cos,  -77,  -ov 


108  THE  GEEEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [109— 


TO  /jidOrj/jia,  -TO?  lesson  (mathematics). 

fjivco  shut  the  eyes. 

TO  fjLvarrjpiov,  -ov  secret  doctrine,  mystery. 

fjLvo-Ti/cds,  -T],  -bv  secret,  mystic. 

0X05,  -rj,  -ov  whole  (holo-caust). 

Tra?,  iraa-a,  Trdv  all,  every  (pan-orama). 

r)  irelpa,  -a?  attempt,  trial  (em-pir-ic). 

o  Treipartfs,  -ov  pirate. 

Trpaa-ao)  accomplish  (prac-tical). 

TO  7rpa<y/jLa,  -TO?  deed,  affair  (pragmat-ic). 

sptit  (schism). 

say,  affirm  (eu-phe-mism). 


109.   Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  TV  <f>r)s  TO  ToO  fwou  /3apo?  elvai  ^  (to  be)  ; 
2.  ev  rfj  ayopa  T&V  iroXirwv  ol  ptfropes  pavQavovai 
To3  Stffjiq).  3.  Svvarai  6  Trpecr/Bvrepos  SiSd- 
Trdvra  ra  /jLVcrrrfpia  rwv  6e&v  ;  4.  TO??  eV 
cr%o\f)  fjiaOrf/JLao-t,  TrXdcrcrovrat,  ol  TraZSe?.  5.  rj 
r)  cro<j>id  r&v  ap^alcov  OVK  ere  (longer)  xpv- 
6.  ol  irdXlrai  <f>pd£ov(ri,  ra  S6<y/j,ara  TV)? 
T.  rj  Treipa  SiSd(r/c€i  rl  SwdpeOa  irpacro-ew. 
8.  ol  ireiparal  a7ro-T€  p^vovcn  (CLTTO-  =  off)  ra$  K€<f)a- 
Xa?  TrdvTwv  TWV  %<pcov  a  \a/ji/3dvov(ri.  9.  ov  Sv- 
vao~6e  cr^i^eiv  TO  SevSpov.  10.  vrai/Te?  ol  vra^Se? 
fiavOdvovcn  TO  0X01^  /jidOrj/jia.  11.  TO  Kavantcov 
Oeppov  rov  r)\lov  SiSoxTiv  aX^ea.  12.  o  ptfrcop  fyrjcrl 

1  The  verb  <f>r)p,L,  like  verbs  of  saying  in  Latin,  takes  the  in- 
finitive, with  or  without  a  subject-accusative,  as  its  object. 


110]    THE  VEEE   fapl  ;   THE  ADJECTIVE  Tra?.   109 


rov  Sfj/jiov  elvai,  crocfrbv  KCLI  ayaddv.  13.  Treipdowrcu 
Kaew  rd  SevSpa.  14.  o  fj\ios  icaei,  TO  Bepfia  rov  veov 
dffXrjrov.  15.  ra  i^va-Tripta,  a  ol  Trpeafivrepoi,  tcpv- 
TreipdovTdi,  Trdvra 


II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  They  conceal  the  nature  of  the  drugs  which 
they  give.  2.  The  fire  splits  all  the  stones  and 
burns  all  the  plants.  3.  The  whole  affair  is  secret. 
4.  Pain  teaches  many  lessons.  5.  Can  you  tell  in 
the  assembly  of  the  people  the  secret-doctrines 
which  the  priests  teach  ?  6.  The  pirate  takes  all 
the  gold  in  the  city.  7.  Caustic  words  give  pain. 
8.  The  king  conceals  the  attempt  of  the  sooth- 
sayers. 9.  The  air  in  the  lungs  has  not  much 
weight.  10.  We  learn  from  ancient  books  the 
opinions  of  the  ancients  about  nature.  11.  The 
wise  affirm  that  the  good  citizen  rules  (inf.)  his 
own  feelings,  and  gives  much  to  others.  12.  It  is 
best  to  learn,  not  many  [things],  but  much  about 
a  few  things.  13.  What  are  you  trying  to  accom- 
plish? 14.  The  image  which  the  citizens  are 
trying  to  set  up  is  a  work  of  much  skill. 

110.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  Phantasm-agoria  (^ai/racr/^a,  74,  11,  and  ayopa) 
denotes  an  assemblage  of  phantasms  or  images.  In 
pan-egyric  we  have  a  derivative  of  a  dialectic  form 
of  dyopa.  A  7rav-tfryvpi$  was  an  assemblage  of  all 
the  people,  as  at  the  great  Olympic  games  ;  and  a 


110  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [110— 

Trav-rjyvpi/cbs  \6<yo$  was  an  oration  delivered  at 
such  an  assembly.  As  such  orations  were  often 
in  praise  of  some  city  or  person,  the  term  came  to 
mean  a  eulogy. 

2.  From  a\<yo$  is  derived  the  last  part  of  cephal- 
algia  (see  31,  5)  and  neur-algia  (TO  vevpov  nerve). 

3.  In  bary-tone  the  y  stands  for  v  of  /3a/ou?  heavy, 
which  is  plainly  related  to  /3apo9-     The  word  is 
also  spelled  baritone,     (For  tone  see  mono-tone,  68, 
9.)    The  baro-meter  is  an  instrument  for  measuring 
the  weight  of  the  atmosphere. 

4.  Didactic  (StSa/cr^/co?,  from  &Sa<7/c&>,  the  root 
of  which  is  StSa/c-)  means  instructive. 

5.  Ao7//,a  sometimes  has  the  same  meaning  as 
So£a;   but  the  English  dogma  has  taken  on  the 
sense  of  an  accepted  opinion,  or  one  which  is  put 
forth   as   unquestionably  true.      Hence  dogmatic 
and  dogmatize. 

6.  The  verb  /caw  has  lost  the  v  which  is  shown 
by  other  forms  to  belong  to  the  root.     Cautery 
(/cavrrjpiov  a  branding-iron)  is  the  act  of  burning 
or  searing  in  surgery.     Cauterize  is  the  verb. 

7.  Apo-crypha    (ajrb'icpvfya,    from    aTro-Kpvirrfi)) 
signifies  properly  hidden  away ;  then  by  a  curious 
transfer  the  word  was  applied  to  those  books  of 
the  Bible  which  were  not  recognized  as  inspired. 

8.  Syl-lable   is   from   o-v\-\a/3rj   (<rvv  and  \ap- 
/3dva)),  what  is  taken  together,  that  is,  pronounced 
with  one  impulse  of  the  voice.     In  di-(s)syllable 
(for  di-  see  96,  1)  the  extra  s  was  originally  due 
to  a  blunder,  like  many  other  peculiarities  of  our 


lid]     THE  VERB  <f>rifjii;  TttE  ADJECTIVE  TTUS.  Ill 


spelling.  Tri-syllable  has  for  its  first  element  the 
stem  of  rpefc.  Syl-labus,  of  the  same  etymology 
with  syl-lable,  denotes  an  abstract  or  compendium. 
In  epi-lepsy  (literally,  an  attack,  seizure),  the  root 
Xa/3-  appears  in  the  slightly  different  form  \TJTT-. 
The  root  is  still  farther  changed  in  di-lemma  (St- 
\rjfji  /jia).  This  word  was  originally  the  technical 
name  of  a  peculiar  form  of  argument,  but  now  is 
often  used  for  a  difficult  situation,  in  which  any 
course  of  action  which  may  be  chosen  seems  likely 
to  lead  to  further  difficulty.  The  force  of  the 
word  may  be  roughly  given  as  double-catch;  for 
di-  see  96,  1. 

9.  In  mathematics  the  meaning  of  fjLadtjfjLara  has 
been  restricted  to  a  particular  branch  of  learning. 
A  philo-math  (<£/Xo9)  is  one  who  is  fond  of  learning. 

10.  Holo-caust  (0X09  and  fcavo-rds  from  KOW)  is 
used  of  sacrifices  which  were  wholly  burned.     The 
phrase   KaO'  o\ov  (for  Kara  oXou)  is  used  in  an 
adverbial  sense,  wholly  ;  from  this  was  formed  the 
adjective  Ka6o\uc6<s  universal,  general  ;  hence  our 
word  catholic. 

11.  IIa9  appears  in  English  in  the  forms  pant- 
and  pan-.     Thus,  pant-o-mime  (see  78,  4),  pant-o- 
phagous  (fayeiv),  equivalent  to  omni-vorous,  from 
Latin.     Fan-demonium  (Sa//4&>z/)  is  the  place  of  all 
demons  ;  pan-theon  (irav-Oelov,  #609),  a  temple  of  all 
gods;  pan-theism,  the  doctrine  that  the  universe, 
taken  as  a  whole,  is  Grod  ;  pan-orama  (6pa«),  a  com- 
plete view  ;    pan-acea  (nav-d/ceia,  from  aiceo^ai  to 
cure),  a  cure-all;  pan-oply  (jrav-oTrKia,  from  OTT\OV 


112  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  [110. 

armor),  complete  armor.  From  frequent  use  in 
these  and  similar  words,  the  syllable  pan-  has  come 
to  be  used  freely  with  a  like  meaning  in  forming 
new  compounds,  often  when  the  second  part  is 
not  Greek,  as  in  pan-evangelical,  ^n-Slavism.  Dia- 
pason is  an  abbreviation  of  Sia  Tracr&v  %op$a>v  (jj 
Xop&rj  the  string  of  a  lyre,  whence  our  chord) ;  it 
means,  therefore,  the  octave,  or  the  entire  scale. 

12.  An  em-piric  is  one  whose  knowledge  or  skill 
is  gained  only  in  trial  or  experiment  (eV  ireLpa), 
and  is  not  founded  on  scientific  principles.     A 
pirate  makes  hostile  attempts  or  attacks  on  others ; 
piracy  is  shortened  from  Treipareia. 

13.  From  Trpaao-co  we  have  practical  (nrpaicTiKo^, 
practice,    and   praxis    (jirpa^i^),   a   technical   term 
having  one  of  the  meanings  of  practice  ;  pragmatic 
shows  the  stem  of  7rpay/j,a. 

14.  A  schism  (a^iv^a,  -TO?,  from  a-^i^ai)  is  a 
"  split,"  or  division,  in   a  party  or  organization ; 
hence  schismatic, 

15.  From  eft-fa /JLOS  well-speaking  (et>  and  </>??/<<</) 
we   have   eu-phemism,  eu-phemistic.      A  Trpo-far^ 
is  one  who  speaks  for  another  (TT/OO,  like  Latin  pro, 
often  having  the  meaning  for) ;  pro-phet,  one  who 
speaks  for,  or  in  place  of,  God ;  that  is,  one  who  is 
inspired  by  God  and  declares  his  will.     Hence 
pro-phetic,  pro-phecy,  and  pro-phesy.     Hetero-phemy 
(ere/jo?)  is  a  euphemistic  word,  of  recent  forma- 
tion, for  false-speaking. 


PAET  II. 
THE  GKEEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


THE   GEEEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


111.  Nearly  all  the  verbs  hitherto  given  are  in  the  pres- 
ent indicative  or  infinitive.  In  learning  the  rest  of  the  verb 
it  will  be  a  great  help  to  observe  the  following  facts. 

a.  Although  the  forms  of  the  verb  are  many,  the  elements 
of  which  they  are  made  up  are  few,  each  having  a  definite 
meaning ;  and  these  elements  can  usually  be  clearly  distin- 
guished. For  example,  He  will  be  sent  for  is  a  sentence 
made  up  of  five  short  words ;  it  is  all  expressed'  in  Greek  by 
one  verb,  /xeTa-Tre/x^-^-o-e-rai,  but  that  verb  is  made  up  of 
five  elements,  each  of  which  is  just  as  distinct  in  form  and 
meaning  as  the  separate  English  words.  Yet  we  are  so 
accustomed,  in  English,  to  distributing  the  meaning  over 
several  short  words,  that  we  are  apt  to  overlook  the  separate 
elements  when  grouped  in  a  single  word,  even  when  the 
total  number  of  syllables  is  the  same.  It  is  absolutely  neces- 
sary, therefore,  to  gain,  as  early  as  possible,  the  habit  of  catching 
the  full  meaning  of  every  syllable  as  it  is  read  or  spoken.  In- 
deed, this  remark,  though  it  applies  especially  to  the  Greek 
verb,  applies  also  to  every  part-  of  any  foreign  language. 
Every  element  of  every  word  conveys  an  idea,  or  helps  to 
convey  an  idea.  To  learn  a  language  one  must  become  so 
familiar  with  its  elements  that  the  sign  shall  always  call  up 
the  idea  which  it  stands  for, 

115 


116  THE  GEEEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [112— 

b.  It  is  not  convenient  to  distinguish  different  conjuga- 
tions, as  in  Latin,  but  only  different  ways  of  forming  the 
several  tenses.    In  the  present  tense  we  have  seen  some  verbs 
conjugated  like   y/oa<£o>,  called   co-verbs,  others  conjugated 
like  riOrjfJii,  called  /xt-verbs  ;  but  these  names  apply  properly 
only  to  a  part  of  the  verb,  and  there  are  different  ways  of 
forming  both  /it-presents  and  w-presents.     So  in  other  tenses 
we  shall  find  formations  distinguished  as  "  first "  and  "  sec- 
ond," and  a  few  verbs  have  a  formation  called  the  "/u- 
aorist,"  because  of  a  certain  likeness  to  the  /xt-present.     All 
the  tense-formations  of  any  verb  are  shown  by  the  "  princi- 
pal parts"  (see  150). 

c.  The  verb  will  first  be  taken  up  by  modes,  beginning 
with  the  indicative,  the  uses  of  which  are  in  general  the 
same  as  in  Latin  and  English. 

PRESENT,  IMPERFECT,  AND  AORIST  TENSES. 

112.  In   the   indicative   mode   there   are   seven 
tenses :  the  present,  imperfect,  aorist,  perfect,  plu- 
perfect, future,  and  future  perfect.     The   tenses 
most  used  are  the  present,  imperfect,  and  aorist; 
these  will  therefore  be  described  first. 

113.  a.  The  present  tense  is  used  like  the  same 
tense  in  English. 

Most  English  verbs  really  have  two  forms  of  the  present, 
the  simple  present,  as,  He  writes,  and  the  compound  present, 
as,  He  is  writing.  The  former  denotes  an  act  simply  as  pres- 
ent, the  latter  denotes  an  act  as  going  on  in  the  present. 
The  latter  active  form  must  not  be  confused  with  the  com- 
pound present  passive,  as,  It  is  written.  All  these  forms  are 
expressed  in  Greek  by  the  present,  active  or  passive  as  the 


114]      PRESENT,   IMPERFECT,   AND  AORIST.      117 

case  may  be,  ypa<£ci  and  ypa<£ercu.     In  this  case  we  make  a 
distinction  in  English  which  Greek  does  not  express. 

b.  The   imperfect,  as   in    Latin,   represents   the 
action  as  going  on  in  past  time. 

It  often  corresponds  to  the  English  compound  imper- 
fect, as,  He  was  writing.  It  was  being  written;  it  sometimes 
implies  repetition  of  the  action,  as  in  Latin.  Thus  He  was 
writing  and  He  used  to  write  are  both  expressed  by  the  im- 
perfect active  2ypa<£e  ;  It  was  being  written  and  It  used  to  be 
written  by  the  imperfect  passive  cypa^ero. 

c.  The  aorist,1  in  the  indicative  mode,  represents 
an  act  simply  as  occurring  in  past  time. 

This  corresponds  to  the  English  simple  past  tense,  as, 
He  wrote  cypai/K,  It  was  written  cypa<£?;.  These  uses  must 
not  be  confused  with  those  of  the  imperfect.  Note  carefully 
the  English  phrases  by  which  we  habitually  make  the  same 
distinction  that  is  made  in  Greek  by  means  of  these  tenses. 
The  only  difference  is  that  we  use  various  groups  of  short 
words  where  the  Greeks  used  longer  single  words  slightly 
varied  in  form. 

114.  The  fu-formation  is  in  some  respects  sim- 
pler than  the  other.  For  comparison  io-rrj^  set 
up,  station,  and  \va)  loose  are  given  in  the  present, 
imperfect,  and  first  aorist  active. 

In  all  paradigms  the  elements  will  be  separated,  as  far  as 
possible,  by  hyphens.  If  not  so  separated,  this  means  that 

1  From  the  Greek  adpwrros  indefinite  (a  privative  and 
6pi£o>  define).  We  shall  see  later  that  the  term  is  more  suit- 
able to  other  modes  than  to  the  indicative, 


118 


THE  GEEEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[115— 


by  some  change  the  elements  have  been  so  closely  united 
that  a  mark  of  separation  might  lead  to  misunderstanding. 


115. 


Present  System. 


First  Aor.  Syst. 


PRESENT. 

IMPERFECT. 

/  set  or  am  set-    I  was  setting, 
ting,  etc.                 etc. 

I    set  or    stationed, 
etc.,  /  did  set,  did 
I  set,  etc. 

S.  1 
2 
3 

f/ 

tr 

l-CTTt}-(ri 

i'-cmj-v 

f-CTT?;-? 

f-a-rrj 

e-crrrj-cra 

V 

e-CTTrj-cre 

D.  2 

V 

f-crra-TOV 

e-o-rfo-a-roi/ 

3 

i-CTTa-TOV 

T-ard-rrjv 

e-cmj-crd'Trjv 

P.  1 

2 

1-ffTOr/JLeV 

i-crra-re 

T-crra-fjiev 
f-crra-re 

€~(7T11~(J'CL~/Ji€V 

>           / 
€~G'T11~G'CL'~T€ 

3 

(t-o-ra-acrt 

)     f-crra-crav 

e-arrj-aa-v 

l-crrdcn 

I  loose,  etc. 

I  was  loosing,  etc. 

I  loosed,  etc. 

S.  1 

\v-co 

e-\v-o-v 

€-\,v-(ra 

2 

\v-ex 

e-Xu-e-9 

€~\lV~(7Ct~^ 

3 

\v-ei 

e-Xu-e 

6~Xu~(7"6 

D.  2 

\v-e-rov 

€\-V-€-TOV 

6~Xu~O"tt"TOl^ 

3 

\v-e-rov 

e'-Xu-e-TT/z/ 

€~Xl'"O"£l"T77  1/ 

P.  1 

2  . 

\V-0-fJL€V 

\v-€-re 

€-\V~0-/Ji€V 

€-Xu-e-re 

e-Xu-cra-re 

3 

\V-OVCTL 

<!-\V-0-V 

e-\v-cra-v 

116]      PRESENT,  IMPERFECT,   AND  AORIST.      119 

NOTE.  —  In  reciting  paradigms,  a  practice  much  followed  in 
German  schools  will  be  found  useful  for  distinguishing  accents. 
A  slight  motion  of  the  forefinger,  as  if  one  were  writing  the 
accent  in  the  air,  will  show  whether  one  has  in  mind  the  acute 
or  the  circumflex  while  pronouncing  the  forms;  at  the  same 
time,  the  stress  of  voice  indicates  on  which  syllable  the  accent 
stands.  It  saves  trouble  in  the  end  to  take  pains  to  pronounce 
as  accurately  as  possible,  making  long  vowels  long,  short  vowels 
short,  and  doubling  the  consonants  if  they  are  doubled  (as  in 
English  coolly,  home-made,  fineness,  fire-red,  mis-step,  hop-pole, 
cat- tail,  sack-cloth). 

116.  a.  Comparison  of  the  paradigms  shows  that  in  each 
verb  one  element  appears  in  all  forms,  namely,  erra-  or  o-rrj- 
in  lo-Trjfu  and  Xv-  in  Avco.  This  element  is  called  the  verb- 
stem,  or  more  simply,  theme;  it  contains  the  fundamental 
idea  of  the  word.  Thus  ora-,  o-rrj-  expresses  the  simple  idea 
of  setting  up  or  stationing,  and  \v-  the  simple  idea  of  loosing ; 
the  other  elements,  added  to  this,  indicate  various  modifica- 
tions, as  of  tense,  voice,  person,  etc.  We  have  seen,  for 
instance,  that  the  suffix  -<n-  added  to  each  of  these  themes 
in  the  short  form  makes  a  noun-stem  denoting  the  action: 
Av'-o-i-s  (94)  and  (d7ro)-<rra-ai-s  (105,  5).  In  the  parts  here 
given  \v-  remains  unchanged,  having  the  vowel  long  through- 
out, though  in  Au'-cro  it  is  short ;  but  crra-  is  lengthened  to 
cm/-  in  the  present  and  imperfect  singular  active,  and  in  the 
aorist  throughout.  The  lengthening  in  the  present  singular 
has  also  been  illustrated  in  ri-Orj-fu  and  8i-8o>-/u  (97).  A 
theme  ending  in  a  vowel  is  called,  for  brevity,  a  vowel 
theme. 

b.  In  the  present  ora-,  orr/-  is  preceded  by  the  present 
reduplication  I-  (originally  (n-),  a  formation  which  is  also 
illustrated  by  ri-Orj-^i  and  8i-S<o-/u  (97),  and  by  yi-yvw-<r/co> 
(51,  2)  and  y£yv-o-/>uxi  (89).  Only  a  few  of  the  oldest  o>- 
and  ^u-verbs  take  this  present  reduplication;  whatever 


120  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [116— 

special  meaning  it  had  originally  has  disappeared.     Note 
that  the  vowel  of  the  present  reduplication  is  always  t. 

c.  In  both  imperfect  and  aorist  of  Avo>  the  syllable  e-  is 
prefixed  to  the  theme;   in  TorT/fii  the  aorist  has  the  same 
prefix,  but  the  imperfect  lengthens  the  initial  I-  of  the  pres- 
ent to  I-.     This  lengthening  of  the  initial  vowel  of  the  pres- 
ent is  called  the  temporal  augment,  the  prefixed  c-  is  called 
the  syllabic  augment,  since  one  increases  the  time  of  a  syllable 
and  the  other  increases  the  number  of  syllables  of  the  verb. 
The  two  forms  of  the  augment  have  the  same  force,  indi- 
cating past  time ;  they  belong,  therefore,  to  verb  forms  that 
denote  past  time ;  that  is,  to  the  indicative  imperfect,  aor- 
ist, and  pluperfect. 

d.  In  the  aorist  of  both  verbs  the  theme  is  followed  by 
the  syllable  -era-  (in  the  third  singular  -ore-)  ;  this  is  the  tense 
suffix  denoting  the  first  aorist ;  it  will  be  found  that  before 
this  tense  suffix  a  vowel  theme  usually  has  its  vowel  long, 
e-orrj-o-a-  and  c-Av-ora-  are  therefore  the  tense-stems  of  the 
first  aorist  indicative,  being  made  up  of  augment,  theme, 
and  tense  suffix ;   the  first  element  denotes  past  time,  and 
does  not  appear  in  the  other  modes,  the  second  denotes  the 
fundamental  idea  of  the  verb,  the  last  marks  the  aorist  tense. 

e.  In  lo-TrjfJLi  the  present  reduplication  appears  also  in  the 
imperfect  (the  only  difference  being  that  the  imperfect  is 
augmented),  and  no  other  element  stands  between  the  theme 
and  personal  endings.     Here,  then,  the  tense-stem  is  i-ora- 
or  t-orrj-,  with  no  tense  suffix,  but  augmented  in  the  imper- 
fect.    In  Avo),  on  the  other  hand,  another  element  stands 
between  the  theme  and  personal  endings  in  the  present  and 
imperfect.     Throughout  the  imperfect  and  in  part  of  the 
present  this  element  is  seen  to  be  -o-  or  -e-;   in  the  other 
forms  of  the  present  the  element  is  really  the  same,  but  is 
so  united  with  the  endings  that  its  original  form  is  obscured. 
Here,  then,  the  tense-stem  is  \v-o-  or  Av-e-,  augmented  in  the 


117]      PRESENT,   IMPERFECT,   AND  AORIST.      121 

imperfect.  The  vowel  -o-  or  -e-  is  the  present  tense  suffix 
of  this  verb;  it  is  called  the  variable  vowel  and  may  be 
written  -%- ;  it  is  -o-  before  p  or  v,  elsewhere  -c-.  Since  in 
all  verbs  the  stem  of  the  imperfect  is  merely  the  present 
stem  augmented,  while  in  the  other  modes  there  is  no  im- 
perfect, these  tenses  are  grouped  together  as  the  present  sys- 
tem, as  distinguished  from  the  first  aorist  system  and  others. 
That  is,  a  verb  system  includes  all  the  forms  that  contain  essen- 
tially the  same  tense-stem. 

f.  As  to  the  personal  endings,  observe  (1)  that  those  of 
the  past  tenses  differ  in  part  from  those  of  the  present; 

(2)  that  those  of  the  imperfect  and  aorist  of  A.vo>  are  alike, 
except  that  c-Av-aa,  in  the  first  singular,  omits  the  ending ; 

(3)  that  in  the  present  system  T-aTrj-fu.  takes  different  endings 
from  Xvo>  in  the  third  plural.     The  endings  of  the  present 
are  called  the  primary  endings,  and  belong,  as  we  shall  see, 
to  the  indicative  present,  future,  perfect,  and  future  perfect, 
which  are  called  the  primary  or  principal  tenses.     The  other 
set  of  endings  are  called  the  secondary  or  historical  endings, 
and  belong  to  the  indicative  imperfect,  aorist,  and  pluper- 
fect, which  are  called  the  secondary  or  historical  tenses.     The 
same  tenses  which  take  the  augment  take  also  the  secondary 
endings. 

The  significant  elements  in  these  paradigms,  then,  are  the 
theme,  augment,  tense  suffix,  and  personal  endings. 

117.  The  verb-stem  or  theme  expresses  the  fun- 
damental idea  of  the  verb.  A  theme  which  can- 
not be  further  divided  into  significant  elements  is 
called  a  root. 

ora-  and  \v-  are  roots  ;  TraiSev-,  the  theme  of  TrcuSevw,  is 
not  a  root,  because  it  is  seen  to  contain  the  noun-stem  TraiS- 
and  a  derivative  suffix  -cv-. 


122  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [118— 

118.  The  augment  indicates  past  time,  and  be- 
longs to  the  imperfect,  aorist,  and  pluperfect  in 
the  indicative  only.     It  has  two  forms  : 

1.  The  syllabic  augment,  made  by  prefixing  e- ; 
it  is  used  in  verbs  beginning  with  a  consonant. 

2.  The  temporal  augment,  made  by  lengthening 
an  initial  vowel;   it  is  used  in  verbs  beginning 
with  a  vowel. 

a-  and  a-  become  ?;-;  diphthongs  (except  ou-) 
lengthen  their  first  vowel.  The  breathing  remains 
unchanged. 

119.  The  tense  suffix,  added  to  the  theme,  indi- 
cates the  tense.     We  have  met, 

1.  In  the  present  system  -%-  or  none.     The  im- 
perfect is  distinguished  from  the  present  by  the 
augment  and  the  endings. 

2.  In  the  first  aorist  -era-,  in  the  third  singular  -ere-. 

120.  The  personal  endings  indicate  person  and 
number,  and  generally  voice.    The  active  endings  are 

Primary.  Secondary. 

(Principal  Tenses.)     (Historical  Tenses.) 
Sing.  1  -pi  -v 

2  -9  -9 

3  -cu  [-T] 
Dual  2            -TOV                        -TOP 

3  -TOV  -rr)v 

Plu.    1  -fjiev  -pep 

2  -re  -re 

3  -avi  or  -(V)0^  w^av  or  -v 


123]      PRESENT,  IMPERFECT,  AND  AORIST.     123 

The  old  secondary  ending  -T  in  the  third  singular  ceased 
very  early  to  be  pronounced. 

121.  The  /-^-inflection  is  followed 

1.  When  there  is  no  tense  suffix  ; 

2.  When  the  tense  suffix  does  not  end  in  -%- 
or  -a-. 

It  has  -acri  and  -crav  in  the  third  plural. 

The  endings  generally  appear  without  change. 

122.  a.  The  w-inflection  is  followed  when  the 
tense  suffix  ends  in  -%-  or  -a-.     It  has  -(y)at,  and  -v 
in  the  third  plural. 

b.  The  first  person  has  -CD  instead  of  -fu  ;  the  process  which 
has  made  -eis  out  of  -c-s  in  the  second  person  and  -a  out  of 
-c-cri  in  the  third  person  is  not  certainly  explained. 

In  the  third  plural  -(v)ort  very  early  lost  the  v;  this  caused 
the  preceding  vowel  to  be  lengthened  ;  thus  -o-vo-t  became  -overt. 

123.  Like  \vco  inflect  in  the  present,  imperfect, 
and  aorist  active  : 

d/covo)  (a/eou-1)  hear. 

/3ao-(,\€va)  (/3ae™\eu-)  be  king,  reign  (fr.  ySao-^Xei;?). 

POV\€VCO  (^ouXeu-)  plan  (fr.  ySouX^,  a  plan). 

KCO\VCO  (/cfc>A,{}-)  prevent,  hinder. 

Travco  (-Trau-)  cause  to  stop,  stop  (transitive). 

Like  terry/Jit,  inflect  : 

set  down,  establish  (/card  down 
and 


1  In  vocabularies  in  this  book  the  theme  of  each  verb  will 
be  given  in  parenthesis. 


124          THE  GHEES:  OF  XENOPHON.        [124— 

a.  To  inflect  these  verbs  put  the  new  theme  in  place  of 
that  in  the  paradigms,  the  other  elements  remaining  the 
same.  For  the  augment  of  d/covo)  see  118,  2.  The  imper- 
fect can  be  formed  easily  from  most  presents,  but  the  forma- 
tion of  the  aorist  cannot  always  be  inferred  from  the  present. 

b.  Compounds  of  a  preposition  and  a  verb  take  the  aug- 
ment after  the  preposition.     Thus  from  Katf-t'orrj/Ai  we  have 
KaO-io"Tr)v  imperfect,  and  Kar-eorrjo-a  aorist. 

c.  In   composition   Kara  loses  final  a  before   an   initial 
vowel.     If  the  initial  vowel  has  the  rough  breathing,  as  in 
foTiyfu,  the  breathing  and  T  are  written  together  as  0,  which 
had  anciently  the  sound  of  T  followed  by  a  distinct  ^-sound. 
Thus  Kara  appears  as  Kar-  or  Ka0-,  according  as  the  form  of 
the  simple  verb  begins  with  the  smooth  or  the  rough  breath- 
ing. 

124.    Vocabulary. 

6  'Apra£ep£?79,  -ov  Artaxerxes. 

n  QacriKeia,  -a?  (fr.  Bacn-  )  7  .      7  7 

1  ^   ,  ^  [  Kingdom,  royal  power. 

Dareios  or  Darius,1  king 
of  Persia  424-405  B.C. 


1  To  find  the  English  form  of  a  Greek  name,  transliterate 
it  according  to  14,  and  then  place  the  accent  according  td 
the  Latin  rule ;  i.e.,  accent  the  penult  if  it  is  long  or  if  the 
word  has  but  two  syllables,  otherwise  accent  the  antepenult. 
In  transliterating  there  is  a  difference  of  usage  among  schol- 
ars, some  preferring  to  Latinize  the  forms  more  fully  than 
others.  No  one  is  entirely  consistent,  or  can  be.  We  are 
equally  inconsistent  in  our  treatment  of  names  from  other 
languages.  A  name  like  Cyrus  is  so  thoroughly  adopted 
into  English  that  it  seems  pedantic  to  try  to  change  it.  In 
general  the  author  thinks  it  best  to  transliterate  simply, 


124]     PRESENT,   IMPERFECT,   AND  AORIST.      125 

Be,  conj.,  and,  but. 

Svo  two. 

els,  proclitic,  prep.  w.  ace.,  into. 

6  r/EXX77i;,  -05  Greek. 

eri,  adv.,  still,  further,  longer. 

t  A,  (  death  (Thanat-opsis,  eu- 

o  uavaros,  -ov  ,,          .  , 

(      tnanasia). 

o  KO/305,  -ov  Cyrus.1 

r  A  -*,-  (  Lydia,1  division  of  Asia 

rj  AvSia,  -a?  * 

(      Minor. 

prep.  w.  ace.,  after. 

w.  gen.,  with. 

-a,  -ov  younger. 

o  Hepo-rjs,  -ov  Persian. 

6  7r6\€/jLo$,  -ov  war  (polemic). 

o  crarpaTrrj^,  -ov  satrap,  Persian  governor. 

ri  why?  what? 

(  Phrygia,  division  of  Asia 
,  j 


without  Latinizing,  unless  the  name,  like  Cyrus,  is  actually 
used  as  an  English  name,  or  has  received  an  English  termi- 
nation, like  Athens.  The  reasons  which  have  made  this 
practice  universal  in  Germany  have  also  caused  it  to  be 
adopted  by  many  well-known  English-speaking  scholars, 
although  it  is  true  that  the  majority  in  England  and  Amer- 
ica would  Latinize  nearly  all  names  (not  Melos,  however, 
nor  Delos,  Latmos,  Tenedos,  Patmos,  Pergamos).  Pupils 
need  to  know  the  look  of  both  forms,  and  generally  in  this 
book  both  will  be  given  in  vocabularies. 
1  See  note  on  p.  124. 


126 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[125— 


125.    Exercises. 
I.   Translate  into  English.1 

O/f/EXX?7Z>e9  ryv/JLvdcria  KaOicrracrav  ev  rat?  Tro'Xe- 
criv,  ev  0*9  ol  vecorepoi  eyv/jiva^ov  -eavrov?  (them- 
selves^). —  Aa/)e£o9  €/3a(rl\€V€  T&V  Hepo-tov.  KCU, 
ryiyvovrai,  Adpeiov  ?ra£Se9  Suo,  Trpecrfivrepos 


1.  icaOtcrTcurav :  the  funda- 
mental meaning  of  a  word  or 
tense  may  be  variously  modi- 
fied by  the  circumstances  in 
which  it  is  used ;  in  other 
words,  the  context  is  just  as  im- 
portant as  the  vocabulary  in  de- 
termining the  meaning.  Here 
the  imperfect  should  be  ren- 
dered used  to  establish.  What 
is  it  in  the  context  that  shows 
this  to  be  the  meaning  rather 
than  were  establishing? 

3.  TWV  rUpo-wv:  verbs  of 
ruling  and  of  superiority,  like 
verbs  of  beginning,  take  the 
gen.  Compare  81,  I.,  1  and 
note  2. 


4.  A  ape  Co  v  :  the  gen.  here 
gives  the  source,  with  a  verb 
denoting  birth.  The  various 
senses  of  from  are  all  expressed 
in  Greek  by  the  gen.,  often  with 
a  preposition,  but  sometimes 
without  a  preposition.  —  |Uv :  a 
particle,  .meaning  that  some- 
thing not  yet  mentioned  is 
thought  of  as  contrasted  with 
the  word  before  ptv.  In  Eng- 
lish we  more  often  indicate 
this  idea  merely  by  the  tone  of 
voice,  or  by  a  slight  change  of 
pitch  in  speaking;  the  phrase 
on  the  one  hand  is  too  long  and 
clumsy  to  use  except  rarely ; 
indeed  sometimes  expresses  the 


1  It  is  intended  that  all  translation  from  Greek  in  the 
class  should  be  done  from  the  teacher's  reading.  This  trains 
the  ear,  and  affords  constant  practice  in  taking  the  meaning 
of  the  Greek  in  the  right  order,  and  will  be  found  to  add 
much  to  the  rapidity  of  progress.  The  Greek  exercise  should 
also  be  read  aloud  by  the  pupil  until  it  can  be  given  readily, 
and  on  review  should  be  translated  back  into  Greek  from  the 
English.  This  gives  the  best  kind  of  practice  in  writing 
Greek,  especially  after  the  Anabasis  is  begun. 


125]      PRESENT,   IMPERFECT,   AND  AOEIST.      127 


ved)T€po<;  Se  KOpo?.     TOV  fiev  vecorepov    5 
\dpeios  (rarpd'Trrjv  A.vSid$  /cal  <&pvyid$ 
en  TralSa  ovra  (being^),  o  Se  TT peer /3v7 epos  p*era  TOV 

o~ev  CLVTL   rov  aSe\<pov   /SacriXeveiv,  aXXa 


idea,  but  has   so  many  other 
uses  that  it  is  best  avoided. 

5.  v6«T6pos :  the  ending -repos 
has  the  same  force  as  in  irpeo-fiv- 
repos,  —  that  of  English  ~er  in 
young-er,  denoting  the  compar- 
ative degree.  Final  -o-  of  the 
stem  of  the  positive  vto-s  has 
been  lengthened  to  -o>-  before 
-repos.  —  84 :  conjunction,  trans- 
lated but  or  and.  It  means 
that  the  member  in  which  it 
stands  is  thought  of  as  con- 
trasted with  something  pre- 
ceding; here,  that  vedrepos  is 
contrasted  with  -rrpecr/StVe/oos,  as 
(j.tv  indicated  the  first  member 
of  the  contrasted  pair.  Thus 
fji^v  and  5^  correspond  to  each 
other;  that  is,  are  correlative. 
The  contrast  is  often,  as  here, 
so  slight  that  we  do  not  indi- 
cate it  at  all,  or  only  by  the 
tone  of  voice ;  but  would  here 
exaggerate  the  contrast,  and  so 
would  be  unnatural.  Note  that 
ptv  and  5<*  always  stand  after 
at  least  one  word  of  their  re- 
spective members.  Hence  they 
are  called  postpositive  words 
(Latin  post  and  pono) . 


6.  KaT&rrqo-c  :    appointed. 
Here  the  character  of  the  sub- 
ject   and    objects — a  king,    a 
young  man,  governor  —  shows 
clearly  what  kind  of  establish- 
ing is  meant.  —  o-aTpdirrjv :  sec- 
ond obj.  w.  KaT&rr?7<re,  as  with 
like  verbs  in  Lathi. 

7.  iraiSa:   pred.   ace.   after 
6vTa,  agreeing  with  rbv  vc&rcpov. 
We  say  while  still  a  boy. 

3.  cpaorCXcvo-e :  in  this  con- 
text reigned  is  about  the  same 
thing  as  became  king,  began  to 
reign.  Compare  the  Old  Tes- 
tament phrase,  as  in  1  Kings 
15,  8 :  "  Abijam  slept  with  his 
fathers,  and  Asa  his  son  reigned 
in  his  stead."  This  is  a  fre- 
quent use  of  the  aorist,  which, 
when  so  used,  is  called  the  in- 
ceptive aorist  (Latin  incipio'), 
because  it  denotes  the  begin- 
ning of  an  action.  It  is  only 
the  context  which  tells  whether 
the  aorist  is  inceptive  or  not. 

9.  dXXd :  of  stronger  adver- 
sative force  than  6t.  —  licwXii- 
o-€v :  the  object  is  often  omitted 
when  it  can  easily  be  supplied 
from  the  context. 


128 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[125— 


io  'Apra^ep^s.  —  rl    Aape£o?     ov     /carecrT^cre     Kvpov 
e/5    TTJV    Pacn\eiav ;  —  eiravcrav    fiev    rov    TroXeyico^, 
Se  /ca/ca  j3ov\evovcnv. 

to  take  e£s  with  the  ace.  in- 
stead of  tv  with  the  dat.  This 
difference  of  idiom  between 
Greek  and  English  will  appear 
often  with  this  and  other 
words. 

12.   Kaicd:   here  used  as  a 
noun. 


10.  rC:    what    determines 
here  whether  rl  means  what  ? 
or  why  ? 

11.  els  TT]V   pacriXeicLv:    the 
motion  implied  in  the  primary 
meaning  of  KaOLo-T-rj/ju  was  prom- 
inent enough  in  the  mind  of 
the  Greek  to  cause  the  word 


II.   Translate  into  Greek. 

What  stopped  the  music? — Did  you  ever  (vrore, 
enclitic)  hear  the  legend  of  the  seven  wise  men?  — 
I  was  planning  to  hear  music  in  the  theatre,  but 
the  young  boys  in  the  street  prevented  it.  —  Why 
did  the  king  appoint  Cyrus  satrap  ?  —  War  caused 
the  work  to  stop.  —  We  were  establishing  a  new 
gymnasium.  —  The  king  of  the  Persians  got  the 
city  into  a  war.  —  Cyrus  was  (fiv)  a  son  of  Dareios 

7.  got :  the  word  get  has  a 
great  variety  of  uses  in  Eng- 
lish ;  watch  the  context  to  de- 
termine the  meaning.  Here 
use  Ka0t<rTr)/ju. 

8  f.  son,  brother:  mark 
the  contrast  in  Greek,  though 
we  hardly  think  of  it  in  Eng- 
lish. 

In  the  last  sentence  what 
words  are  contrasted? 


3.  -was  planning :  there  is 
a  contrast  here  between  was 
planning  and  prevented,  which 
the  Greek  would  mark  by  ptv 
and  5^ ;  this  contrast  makes  the 
two  verbs  the  most  prominent 
words  in  their  clauses  ;  hence 
the  verbs  are  to  be  placed  first. 

4.  It :  cf .  I.,  9  and  note. 

5  f .   caused  ...  to  stop : 
evidently  equivalent  to  stopped  ; 


126]  THE  MIDDLE  VOICE. 

and  brother  of  Artaxerxes.  —  The  elder  citizens 
were  planning  good  things,  but  the  younger  pre-  10 
vented  them. 

THE  MIDDLE  VOICE. 

126.  Forms  with  middle  endings  have  thus  far  been  treated 
almost  entirely  as  passive  or  deponent,  since  they  often  are 
so,  especially  in  the  present,  where  the  passive  has  no  sepa- 
rate form  (see  69).  But  other  uses  of  the  middle  are  very 
common.  It  is  necessary  to  watch  the  voice  carefully  in 
reading,  in  order  to  learn  its  shades  of  meaning;  for  many 
of  the  ideas  which  this  voice  expresses  in  Greek,  English 
must  express  in  some  other  way.  Sometimes,  too,  English 
does  not  express  at  all  the  slight  difference  between  the 
active  and  middle,  but  leaves  it  to  be  understood.  Some 
verbs,  from  their  meaning,  give  no  occasion  for  the  use  of  a 
middle ;  as  /2ao-iAevo>. 

a.  The  middle  endings  commonly  represent  the 
subject  as  acting  upon  itself,  or  with  reference  to 
itself.     Thus  in  ^aivo^ai  show  one's  self  and  iravo- 
fjiat,  stop  one's  self,  cease   (or  stop  used  intransi- 
tively), the  subject  is  at  the  same  time  the  direct 
object.     These  are  examples  of  the  direct  middle. 
This  is  the  simplest  use  of  the  voice,  and  is  very 
like  the  passive ;  but  not  many  verbs  are  used  in 
this  way. 

b.  For  example,  \vo^ai  does  not  mean  loose  one's 
self  (that  is  expressed  by  \va)  with  the  pronoun 
meaning  myself,  etc.),  but  loose  for  one's  self,  or 
get  loosed  for  one's  self  by  some  one  else.     Thus 


130 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[127— 


\verai  rbv  a8e\$oV  would  be  said  of  one  whose 
brother  had  been  taken  in  war,  and  who  buys  the 
captive  off  ;  Tie  gets  his  brother  released,  or  ransoms 
his  brother.  This  is  one  example  of  the  indirect 
middle.  In  the  case  of  \vo^ai  there  is  a  causative 
force,  which  is  prominent  in  the  middle  voice  of 
many  verbs. 

c.  The  middle  of  lo-rrjfju,  is  used  both  as  a  direct 
middle,  set  or  station  one's  self,  and  as  an  indirect 
middle,  set  or  station  for  one's  self.  As  this  verb 
is  very  common,  both  in  composition  and  alone, 
every  use  of  it  must  be  carefully  noted. 


127. 


Present  System,  Mid. 


First    Aorist 
System,  Mid. 


PRESENT. 

IMPERFECT. 

/  set  myself, 
etc. 

/  was  setting 
myself,  etc. 

I  set  myself,  etc. 

S.  1 

2 

f/ 

i-crra-crat, 

t-trrd-fJ/qv 

f-crra-ao 

?               f 

£~GTfl~(TCL'~LLrfl  V 
€~&TtJ~&CO 

3 

i-crra-Tai, 

T-ara-ro 

t-vrfaa-TO 

D.  2 

3 

i-crra-crOov 
l-crra-aOov 

f-crra-affov 

€-aTtf-cra-cr0ov 
e-crTr)'crd-C70rj  v 

P.  1 

l-ard-fjie0a 

t-(TTd-fJL€0a 

€-aT<r)-<rd-/ji€0a 

2 
3 

L-o-ra-o-06 

r/ 

f-crra-(T0€ 
T-ara-vro 

€-o-Tij-cra-(r06 
e-crrrf-aa-VTO 

THE  MIDDLE  VOICE. 


131 


PRESENT. 

IMPERFECT. 

S.  1 
2 
3 

/  ransom,  etc. 

\V-O-/JLCU 
\v-rj  or  \v-6i, 
\v-e-rai 

/  was  ransom- 
ing, etc.    t 

€-\v-6-/Ji'r]V 
e-\v-ov 
e-\v-€-ro 

I  ransomed,  etc. 
€-\v-a-d-^7]v 

€-\V-(TC0 

e-\v-aa-TO 

D.  2 

\v-e-cr6ov 

€-\v~€-cr0ov 

e-\v-(ra-(r0ov 

3 

\v-e-cr9ov 

e^ju-e-aOriv 

€-\v-(rd-cr0'r)v 

P.  1 

2 

\v-d-/jL€0a 
\v-6-a06 

e-\v-6-fJL€0a 

€-\V'€-a0€ 

e-\v-crd-iJL€0a 
e-\v-cra-a-0€ 

3 

\V-O-VTCLL 

€-\V-0-VTO 

e-\v-<ra-VTO 

128.  Comparing  these  forms  with  the  active  we  find 
that  (a)  the  themes  are  the  same,  except  that  the  present 
and  imperfect  middle  of  IOTT///.*  have  only  the  short  form 
ora-;  (6)  the  augments  are  the  same,  temporal  in  krra/Ar/v, 
etc.,  syllabic  elsewhere ;  (c)  the  tense  suffixes  are  the  same, 
in  the  present  system  of  the  /u-verb  none,  in  the  present 
system  of  the  co-verb  -%-,  in  the  aorists  throughout  -era-.     But 

129.  The  personal  endings  of  the  middle  differ 
from  those  of  the  active.    They  are  seen  unchanged 
in  the  present  system  of  the  /^-verb,  and  are 


Primary. 
(Principal  Tenses.) 
Sing.  1  -pat, 


Secondary. 
(Historical  Tenses.) 


2 
3 


-crat, 
-rat, 


-(TO 
-TO 


132 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[130- 


-0-00V 

~(70r)V 


Primary.  Secondary. 

(Principal  Tenses.)     (Historical  Tenses.) 
Dual  2  -0-00V 

3  '(700V 

Plu.    1  -fji€0a 

2  -(70€  -(70€ 

3  -vrai  -vro 

130.  In  some  forms  the  tense  suffix  and  ending  have  run 
together,  \v-rj  and  Xv-ct  are  for  Av-e-aat  ;  cr  of  the  ending  is 
dropped,  as  it  often  is  between  two  vowels,  and  -e-ai  contracts 
to  -17  or  -ct.  i\vov  is  for  eAv-c-cro  ;  cr  is  dropped  and  -e-o  con- 
tracted to  -ov.  In  like  manner  eor^cra)  is  for 
and  cAvtro)  for  eAi;-ora-(o')o. 


131.    Vocabulary.1 
Athenian. 


-a,  -ov 
(a?ro  +  crra-, 


imp.  d(f)-tcrTr)v 
aor.  a 


\,  especially 

Mid.    (dir.)    set 
one's  self  off,  revolt. 

Asia. 

'plan.  Mid.  (indir.)  plan 
for  one's  self  or  with 
one's  self,  hence  delib- 
erate. 


1  Inflect  all  words  contained  in  the  vocabulary. 


131] 


THE  MIDDLE   VOICE. 


133 


imp.  crvv-eftovXevov 
aor. 


-a? 

o  '  fttcToyp,  -0/009 
Kara-\vco    (/cara  4 
imp. 
aor. 


€7TL-BoV\€VQ)  (llTi  +  BoV-  \        , 

,  plan  against,  plots?  scheme 

>      against.     Middle  forms 

imp.  €7T-€pOV\€VOV  ,          , 

,      0   ,  used  only  as  passive. 

aor.  €7T-€/30V\€VO'(l  f 

(rvfji,-/3ov\€vco       (GTVV+  \  plan  with  another,  advise. 
I       Mid.  (indir.)  plan  with 
(     another  for   one's  self, 
)       ask  advice,  consult  with. 
democracy. 
Hektor  or  Hector. 
\  break  down,  destroy.    Mid. 
>•     (indir.)  destroy  for  one's 
)       self,  get  destroyed, 
establish,    sometimes    get 
or  bring  into  a  certain 
place  or  condition.  Dir. 
mid.,  establish  one's  self, 
get  one's  self  into  a  place 
or    condition.       Indir. 
mid.,  establish  for  one's 
self,  sometimes  appoint. 
Lacedaemonian,  Spartan, 
be  about  to  do  something, 
intend,  be  going  to  do 
something.     No   mid. ; 
aor.   scarcely    used    in 
this  sense. 
month  (Lat.  mensis). 


(/cara  • 


crra-,  CTTT;-) 
imp.  KaO-teryv 
aor.  Kar-ea-rrjaa 


-a, 


imp.   €fjL€\\OV 


-09 


134 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[132— 


6/crd),  indecl., 
97 


TTCLVCO  (jrav-) 


,  -ou 
indecl., 
o  Tvpavvos,  -ov 

Tvpavvevo)  (rvpavvev-) 


eight  (Lat.  octo). 

oligarchy. 

stop  (transitive).  Mid. 
(dir.)  stop  one's  self, 
stop  (intrans.),  cease. 

Priam,  king  of  Troy. 

thirty. 

absolute  ruler,  tyrant, 

be  or  act  as  absolute  ruler 
or  tyrant,  tyrannize. 


132.  Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 

fjv  (was)  TTO\VV  %povov  rofc  ' 
777)09    roi>9    Aa/ceSaifjioviovs  •    pera    Se   TOV  7rd\€/jiov 
JJLCV  * KOyvaiow  rrjv  Brj/JLOKparidv  ol  Aa/ce- 
Se  /carearrja'av  rrjv  T&V  rpia- 


often  in  Lat.  Literally,  for  the 
Ath. ;  but  we  should  say  of  the 
Athenians. 

4.  oXi-yapxCdv  84:  the  two 
clauses  Kart\v<rav  .  .  .  Aajce- 
dai/jidvLoi  and  <5Aryap%/av  .  .  . 
TpidicovTa  are  contrasted,  rather 
than  single  words ;  but  in  those 
clauses  the  most  important 
words  are  KCLT&VO-CLV  and  6X1- 
yapxtdv,  which  are  therefore 
put  first  in  their  respective 
members,  and  followed,  one  by 
n{i>,  the  other  by  5^.  —  -H)v :  the 


Latin,  denotes  extent  of  time  ; 
TroXOp  XP°VOV  is  the  common 
phrase  for  a  long  while.  — 
*A0T]vaCois:  dat.  of  possessor, 
as  in  Latin. 

2.  irp6s :  with  the  ace.  means 
to  or  towards.    Where  we  say 
between  the  Athenians  and  the 
Spartans,  the  Greek  says  to  the 
Athenians  towards  the  Spar- 
tans.— Note  the  Greek  colon  (•). 

3.  'A6Tjva£ois :    here  dat.  of 
interest    or    disadvantage,    as 


132] 


THE  MIDDLE   VOICE. 


135 


Kovra.     KOI    ol   rpia/covra    ep,e\\ov  pev  Srj    VO/JLOV?     5 
TiOevai,  Kaff  ou?  apX€LV  efi€\\ov  •  avrl  Se  rov  VO/JLOV? 
riOevcu  €7T€/3ov\€V(rav  TCH?  iroKtrais  ical  ervpdvvevov 
fjirjvas  o/crd).     6  Se  Srjfjbos  a7T€(mj(TaTO  fiev  O.TTO  r&v 
rpiaKovra,  Karea-njo-aro  Se  iraXiv  rrjv  Srj/jLOKparidv. 

6  /3a<Ti\ev<;  eKvcraro  rov  iralSa  f/E#Topa.   10 
6a  TO)  aTrocrroXft)  Trepl  rov  VO/JLOV. 


We  use  here  the  verbal  noun 
in  -ing,  which  happens  to  have 
the  same  form  as  the  present 
active  pple.  in  -ing,  but  is  in 
fact  of  different  origin.  Such 
verbal  nouns,  like  the  Greek 
and  Latin  infinitive  and  the 
Latin  gerund,  retain  enough 
verbal  force  to  take  a  direct 
object  or  an  adverbial  modifier, 
but  can  be  used  only  in  short 
and  simple  phrases ;  we  shall 
see  that  in  Greek  such  infinitive 
clauses  may  be  of  almost  any 
length  and  very  complicated. 

7.   iroXtrais :   dat.  after  ^TTI- 
in  £TT€f3ov\€V(rav. 

&  f.  dir€0"Hj<raTO,  icaT€<rrfj- 
o-aro:  what  in  the  context 
makes  it  clear  whether  these 
verbs  have  the  force  of  the  dir. 
mid.  or  the  indir.  ?  Notice  that 
while  Kareo-r^o-aro  is  in  the 
mid.,  Kar^rTT/o-aj/  above  is  ac- 
tive. The  mid.  is  naturally 
used  of  a  people  setting  up  a 
government  of  their  own. 
*  11.  <rvv€|3ovX.€v<rd|j,€0a :  for 


form  shows  what  this  and  the 
following  words  belong  with ; 
the  effect  of  thus  postponing 
the  modifier  is  given  perfectly 
in  this  instance  in  English  by 
translating  r-f)v  that  and  reserv- 
ing the  whole  phrase  till  the 
end  of  the  sentence. 

The  war  referred  to  is  the 
Peloponnesian  war,  431-404 
B.C.,  in  which  the  Spartans  were 
victorious.  The  "  Thirty  Ty- 
rants" were  deposed  in  the 
summer  of  403  B.C. 

5.  8-fj :  a  particle  whose 
various  uses  must  be  carefully 
watched.  Here  its  force  may 
be  given  by  as  they  said,  im- 
plying that  they  did  not  really 
intend  to  do  so. 

6.  ri0€vai :  the  verb  regularly 
used  of  making  laws.  —  icaO*  : 
for  KO.T&  ;  the  same  change  as 
in  KaB-Lo-rjjfjLt.  KO.T&  with  the 
ace.  often  means,  as  here,  ac- 
cording to.  —  TOV:  marks  the 
phrase  PO'/XOUS  Tt0^cu  as  a  noun 
in  the  gen.,  governed  by  dvrl. 


136 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[132— 


—  ov    (TVvejiovXeva-aTe  rois  TroMraLs  Traveo-Oai  rov 
7ro\€/Jiov  ;  —  ol  r/EX\77^€9  ol  ev  rfj  'Acrta  d 
rov  /3acr^Xeco5.  —  aTrecrr^cre  rov$ 


15  r&v  Hepcr&v. 


voice,  see  vocabulary  above.  — 
dative  after  <rvt>-  in 


13.   iroX^ov:  here   a  from 
gen.,  denoting  separation,  after 


CLTTO 


In  600  B.C.  the  Greek  colo- 
nies in  Asia  Minor,  which  had 
been  subdued  by  the  Persians, 
revolted  ;  this  is  known  as  the 
Ionian  revolt. 


II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

The  Spartans  were  planning  the  war  a  long 
time.  —  The  Greeks  in  Asia  schemed  against  the 
Persians,  and  got  themselves  into  a  war.  —  The 
tyrant  broke  down  the  strength  of  the  city. — 

5  The  people  plotted  against  the  oligarchy,  but  es- 
tablished over  themselves  a  tyrant.  —  Were  you 
consulting  with  friends  ?  —  We  advised  the  tyrant 
to  rule  according  to  the  laws.  —  After  the  war  I 
procured  the  release  of  many  citizens.  —  Why  did 

10  you  get  the  Greeks  to  revolt  from  the  Persians? — 
Many  cities  took  counsel  with  the  Lacedaemonians 
and  revolted  from  the  Athenians.  —  There  was  war 


3.  got  .  .  .  into:  mid.  of 
/jiL  and  els. 

5  f.  Mark  the  contrast  be- 
tween the  members  by  ptv  and 
5^.  —  over  themselves :  suf- 
ficiently expressed  by  the  mid. 
voice  of  the  verb. 


9.  procured  the   release 

of :  expressed  by  one  word. 

10.  did  you  get  to    re- 
volt :  expressed  by  one  word. 

12  f .  Of.  132,  I.,  1  f.,  and 

put  the  word  for  Greeks  in  the 
dat. 


134] 


THE  FUTURE  SYSTEM. 


137 


for  many  months  between  the  Greeks  and  the  Per- 
sians. 

THE  FUTURE  SYSTEM. 

133.  The  future  tense  is  used  like  the  English 
future.  There  is  no  difference  in  the  future  be- 
tween /u-verbs  and  co-verbs.  The  active  and 
middle  differ  only  in  the  personal  endings,  and 
together  make  up  the  future  system. 

134.  Future  System. 


ACTIVE. 

MIDDLE. 

/  shall  loose,  etc. 

/  shall  ransom,  etc. 

S.  1 
2 

\V-(TG) 

\v-crei? 

\v-cro-fjucu 

3 

\v-a-et 

\v-a-6-rai, 

D.  2 

\v-cre-Tov 

\v-ae-a-6ov 

3 

\v-cre-rov 

\V-(T€-(T00V 

P.  1 
2 

\V-O"0-fJL€V 
\V-(T€-T€ 

\v-a6-fjLeOa 

3 

\v-crovcri 

\v-ao-vrai, 

In  the  same  way  are  inflected  most  futures,  as  crnyo-a> 
1  shall  set,  and  OTT/-CTO-/X(U  /  shall  set  myself,  etc.,  from  ixmy/u 
(OTOT,  crrrf)  ; 

f3ov\ev-<T(a  1  shall  plan,  and  flovXev-cro-pjai  1  shall  deliberate, 
etc.,  from 


138  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [135- 


)  1  shall  stop,  and  7rav'-<ro-/>uu  /  shall  cease,  etc.,  from 
v'o)  (TTCIU-). 

135.    a.  The  future  tense  suffix  is  -<r%-,  with  -o- 
before  /x  or  y,  elsewhere  -e-. 

b.  The  theme   usually  takes   the  longer   form 
in    the   future,  if   there   are    two    forms  ;    as    in 
a-rtf-aco.     Thus  the  future  tense-stem  of  io-r^/ja  is 
O-TIJ-O-%-. 

c.  The  primary  endings  are  used,  and  the  same 
changes   occur   as   in   the    co-present.      Thus    \v- 
(rovcn   is    for    \v-a  o-(y)  GI\    \tharj   and   Xu-cret    for 


FIRST  PASSIVE  SYSTEM. 

136.  The  passive  voice  has  a  separate  form 
from  the  middle  in  the  aorist  and  future  only. 
The  aorist  passive  and  future  passive  are  formed 
with  the  same  passive  suffix,  and  are  so  related 
that  if  one  is  given  the  other  can  always  be 
known.  Hence  they  are  grouped  together  in 
one  system,  called  the  passive  system,  the  mark 
of  which  is  the  passive  suffix.  In  this  system 
there  is  no  difference  between  /u-verbs  and  co- 
verbs. 

NOTE.  —  It  will  assist  in  keeping  in  mind  the  true  relation  of 
forms,  if  the  pupil  is  always  required,  when  writing  verbs  on 
the  board,  to  put  at  the  head  the  tense-stem  of  the  system  to 
which  the  forms  belong.  The  analysis  of  forms  should  be 
called  for  often, 


138]  FIRST  PASSIVE  SYSTEM. 

137.   First  Passive  System. 


139 


AORIST. 

FUTURE. 

/  was  loosed  or  ran- 
somed, etc. 

/  shall  be  loosed  or  ran- 
somed, etc. 

S.  1 
2 
3 

€-\v-0r}-$ 
€-\v-0r] 

\v-0ij-arj  or  -&€i 

D.  2 
3 

€-\V-0rj-TOV 

\v-0ij-a-e-o-0ov 

\V-0rj-<T€-(T00V 

P.  1 

2 
3 

6-\V-07)-/JL€V 

\v-0rj-o'  6-  jj,€0  a 
\v-0rj-o-  e-(T0€ 
\v-6r\-GQ-VTai 

In  the  same  way  are  inflected  most  vowel  themes,  as  €-ora- 
OYJ-V  I  was  set,  and  <rra-077-cro-/Luu  1  shall  be  set,  etc.,  from 
to-r^/At  (crra-,  (rrrj-)  ', 

€-7rav-Orf-v  I  was  stopped,  and  Trav-O-q-o-o-fuu  1  shall  be  stopped, 
etc.,  from  TraJo)  (7rav-)  ; 

e-KtoXv-Orj-v  1  was  hindered,  and  Kw\-v-Orj-<TO-iM.i  I  shall  be 
hindered,  etc.,  from  KwXvco  (KoAv-, 


138.  a.  The  passive  suffix  of  the  first  passive 
sj^stem  is,  in  the  indicative,  -Or]-.  (On  taking  up 
the  other  modes  we  shall  find  that  this  suffix  takes 
the  form  -0rj-  only  before  a  single  consonant  ;  else- 
where —  that  is,  before  two  consonants  or  a  vowel 
—  it  is  -0e-.) 

b.  The  theme  sometimes  takes  the  long  form, 


140  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [139— 

but  often  the  short  form,  if  there  are  two.  Thus 
the  passive  stem  of  larrj^L  is  a-ra-drj-  ;  of  \£G>,  Xu- 
0rj-  ;  of  /JouXevo),  /3ou  Xei>-#?;-. 

c.  In  the  aorist  passive  there  is  no  tense  suffix  ; 
the  secondary   active  endings  are  added  Directly 
to  the  passive  stem,  which  of  course  is  augmented 
in  the  indicative.     This  tense,  therefore,  is  in  all 
verbs  a  /it-formation  (see  121),  and  in  the  third 
plural  takes  -vav. 

d.  In  the  future  passive  the  future  suffix  -<r%- 
is  added  to  the  passive  stem,  and  the  middle  pri- 
mary endings  used.     In  the  second  person  -0-77  and 
-crei  are  for  -<7e-(o-)a£,  as  in  the  present  and  future 
middle. 

139.  Vocabulary. 


/30UX7;-1)  .. 

P   ,    n    ^  ,  >dep/     wish. 

tut.  povKrjaoJiai 

aor.  eft 


1  In  /3ov\ojjjaL  and  some  other  common  verbs  the  theme 
takes  on  the  syllable  -77-  in  some  forms,  apparently  to  prevent 
two  consonants  from  coming  together  which  the  Greeks  could 
not  easily  pronounce. 

2  Compare  71.     In  the  future  and  aorist  some  deponents 
take  the  middle  forms,  others  the  passive.     Those  which 
take  the  passive  forms  in  the  aorist  are  often  called  passive 
deponents  ;  those  which  take  the  middle  forms  in  the  aorist 
are  called   middle   deponents.      There   is  no   difference  in 
meaning. 


140] 


FIRST  PASSIVE  SYSTEM. 


141 


conj., 

-ft>T09 

conj., 

l/cavo$,  -77,  -ov 
vvv,  adv., 

OVTCO  before  a  cons. 
o#rft>9  before  a  vowel 
7roXe/uo9,  -a,  -oz^ 
Trore,  interrog.  adv., 
TTore,  indef.  adv.,  enclitic, 
rore,  demonstrative  adv., 
ore,  rel.  conj., 
o  o-Tpari(f)Tr)<;,  -ov 


for. 

laughter, 
when,  after, 
sufficient,  enough. 


now. 


adv.,  thus,  so. 


ware,  conj., 


hostile;  as  noun,  enemy, 
at  what  time  ?  when  ? 
at  some  time,  ever,  once, 
at  tTiat  time,  then, 
when, 
soldier. 

so  that,  that,  in  a  result 
clause. 


140.  Exercises. 


"Ore 


I.  Translate  into  English. 

Ki)|009  €TI  TTCW  fjv  KOI  eVatSeuero 
ra>v  a\\(ov  TraiScov,  apicrTos  irdvrayv  rjv  ev  rols  e/9 
7rd\€fJ,ov  epyot,?.     eVel  8e  o-arpdirrj^  Karearddrj,  OVTCO 


1.  ptv:  when  ptv  and  5^ 
stand  immediately  after  a  con- 
junction, as  here  after  6re  and 
in  line  3  after  tird,  it  is  usually 
the  entire  clauses,  instead  of 
single  words,  that  are  con- 
trasted. —  liraiSevero :  in  tenses 
that  have  no  separate  passive 
form  the  context  and  the  mean- 


ing  of  the  verb  must  determine 
whether  a  form  is  mid.  or  pass, 
in  meaning. 

2.  els:  of  ten  has  the  derived 
meaning  with  reference  to,  bear- 
ing upon,  useful  for. 

3.  c'p-yois :    activities,    exer- 
cises. —  iireC :  when  tire  is  used 
in  the  sense  of  when,  the  time 


142 


THE  GEEEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[140— 


AcaXo9  KOI  aya0b$  fjv  wcrre  <f)i\oi  pev  eylyvovro  aura> 

5      7TOXX(H,  7TO\€/MOl,    &€    O\lyO(,.       KOl    €V    T(p    TToXe/tft)    O9 


V.     /iera  Se  TOI>  7roXe/io*>,  ore 


O,   roVe  S^  ITepcrafc 
10  (were)  a£ra>  l/cavol  rbv  apiOpov,  efiovXtjOrj   Be  KCU 


of  the  principal  clause  is  gen- 
erally the  same  as  that  of  the 
ic/iett  clause ;  in  other  words, 
while  can  be  substituted  for 
when  without  much  change  of 
meaning.  When  tird  is  used 
in  the  sense  of  when,  the  time 
of  the  principal  clause  is  gener- 
ally later  than  that  of  the  when 
clause ;  in  other  words,  after 
can  usually  be  substituted  for 
when.  But  the  distinction  was 
not  always  observed,  and  fad 
tended  to  crowd  out  5re.  —  cra- 
TpaTTTjs :  pred.  nom. 

4.  KaXos :  is  used  of  charac- 
ter, as  well  as  of  the  appearance; 
KdX6s  Kdl  aya&6s  is  a  common 
phrase  describing  a  thoroughly 
admirable  person ;  honorable 
and  good  is  a  literal  rendering, 
but  is  far  less  common  in  Eng- 
lish than  the  corresponding 
phrase  in  Greek. 

6  f.  <t>t\os  rots  AO.K.  :  he 
aided  them  during  the  last  three 
years  of  the  war  with  ships  and 
large  sums  of  money. 


8.  €jjL€\\€v:  v  movable  may 
be  added  to  any  verb  of  the 
third  person  sing,  in  -e,  as  well 
as  to  verbs  of  the  third  plu. 
in  -0-1,  to  datives  plu.  in  -0-1, 
and  to  tvrl.     Cf.  40,  I.,  4  and 
note. 

9.  8-fj :  here  slightly  empha- 
sizes the  preceding  word. 

10.  avrw  :  lit.  to  Mm,  dat. 
of  possessor.     When  used  thus 
alone,  without  the  article  and 
not  in  apposition,  the  forms  of 
atfr6s  supply  the  place  of  the 
unemphatic  personal  pron.  of 
the  third  person,  of  him,  her, 
etc.      The  nom.  is    never    so 
used,  but  is  always  in  agree- 
ment with  some  word,  either 
expressed    or    understood.  — 
apiBpo'v  :    in  number,   ace.   of 
specification.  —  icaC:    like   Lat. 
et,  Kat  is  not  only  a  conjunc- 
tion, but  also  an  adverb,  call- 
ing attention  to  the  following 
word  or  phrase.     The  context 
shows  whether  also  or  even  is 
called  for  in  English. 


140] 


FIRST  PASSIVE  SYSTEM. 


143 


s,  dptcrroi  jap  efyaivovro 
Twv  Tore.  —  fjv  TTOTC  7roXe/-6O9  rois  'AOrjvalois  7rp09 
rou9  Tlepcrds.  —  €7rel  ol  TratSes  ij/covcrav  TOV  fJLv6ov, 
7roA,U9  ye\co$  TJV.  —  Tore  fjuev  eTravOiycrav  TOV  rvpav- 
vevew  ol  TpicucovTa  VTTO  TOV  SIJ/JLOV,  vvv  Se  Tvpavvevet,  15 
6  &%to9.  —  TTore  TravOrjcreTcu  6  Tvpavvos  T^S 


tion.    Compare  TroX^tou,  132, 1., 
13. 

15.  vnrd    TOV    8-rjfxov :    with 
pass,  verbs  the  agent  is  regularly 
expressed  by  vw6  with  the  gen. 

16.  iroV€ :  compare  carefully 
the  correlatives  7r6re,  TTOT^,  r6re 
and  tire.    All  refer  to  time,  all 
end  in  -ore.     We  shall  find  the 
same  ending  in  other  adverbs  of 
time.  Note  particularly  how  the 
interrogative,  indefinite,  and  de- 
monstrative are  distinguished ; 
all  are  common,  and  students 
are  apt  to  confuse  them. 


11.  (TTpaTwoTas :   in  predi- 
cate apposition  with  "EXXrjvas : 
we  should  say  as  soldiers. — 
•yap :  always  post-positive,  like 
ptv  and  5£ 

12.  TWV  TOTC  :  by  being  put 
thus  after  the  article,  r6re  be- 
comes equivalent  to  an  adjec- 
tive modifier.    The  phrase  is  in 
the  gen.  of  the  whole,  depend- 
ing on  &PHTTOI.    Say  of  those  of 
that  time,  or  of  contemporary 
soldiers. 

14.  TOV  rvpavv€V€iv :  the  inf. 
is  here  in  the  gen.  of  separa- 


II. Translate  into  Greek. 

When  the  satrap  was  honorable  and  good  he 
had  enough  soldiers;  but  after  he  began  to  act 
like  a  tyrant,  the  soldiers  kept  revolting.  —  While 


1  f.  he  had:  use  dat.  of 
possessor,  —  were  to  him  (atf- 
r<?).  Cf.  note  on  I.,  10,  and 
see  vocabulary  under 


began  .  .  .  tyrant :  express  by 
one  word  in  the  aor. 

3.   kept  revolting  :    what 
tense? 


144  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [141— 

the  older  citizens  were  deliberating,  the  younger 
5    men  got  the  city  into  a  war  which  destroyed  the 
city's  power.  —  When   were   the   thirty   deposed 
from  the  government?  —  There  was  once  a  king 
who  wished  to  rule  the  whole  earth. — When  the 
Greeks  were   revolting,  the   Persians   wished  to 
10  prevent  them.  —  The  people  will  some  time  delib- 
erate about  the  matter,  and  then  the  war  will  be 
stopped.  —  When  will  the  soldiers  be  released?  — 
The  enemy  will  some  time  be  ransomed.  —  Then 
the  children's  laughter  used  to  be  stopped  by  their 
15  elders,  but  the  children  of  to-day  sometimes  (eW- 
ore)  rule  the  house.  —  A  word  to  the  wise  is  enough. 


4.    older,    younger  :     ntv 

and  5(*  cannot  be  used  here, 
because  5^  is  a  conjunction, 
and  there  is  no  but  or  and  here. 
The  contrast  of  ideas  is  left 
unmarked,  as  it  is  in  English. 

6.  deposed: 

7.  once :  since  irort  is  en- 
clitic it  should  not  be  put  first. 


10.  them:    use   avrovs   if 
anything. 

11.  matter  :  IT  pay  pa. 

14.  used  to  be  stopped : 
one    verb-form.  —  their  :    use 
the  article. 

15.  the   children    of   to- 
day:   in  Greek  the  now  chil- 
dren. 


FIRST  PERFECT  SYSTEM. 
141.   The  perfect  tense,  indicative,  represents 

1.  Usually  an  act  completed  in  present  time,  as 
/ce/ccoXvfca  I  have  prevented  ; 

2.  Sometimes  a  continued  state,  the  effect  of  an 
act  now  completed,  as  earvfca  I  have  stationed  (my- 
self), and  so  I  am  standing  ;  the  latter  is  the  com- 
mon meaning  of  this  form  of  IO- 


143] 


FIRST  PERFECT  SYSTEM. 


145 


The  first  use  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  English  perfect 
and  the  Latin  perfect  definite.  The  second  use  is  frequent 
in  a  few  verbs,  and  is  seen  also  in  Latin  memini,  I  remember. 

142.   The  pluperfect  tense,  indicative,  represents 

1.  Usually  an  act  completed  in  past  time,  as 
e/c€Ka)\v/crj  I  had  prevented. 

2.  Sometimes  a  state  continued  in  the  past,  as  e/- 
a-TtJKrj  I  had  stationed  (myself),  and  so  I  was  stand- 
ing ;  the  latter  is  the  common  meaning  of  this  form 
of 


The  pluperfect  is  to  the  perfect  as  the  imperfect  is  to  the 
present.  As  the  pluperfect  is  always  formed  in  the  same 
way  from  the  perfect,  both  are  grouped  in  the  same  tense 
system.  But  the  perfect  active  system  differs  from  the  per- 
fect middle  system. 

143.  First  Perfect  System. 


PERFECT  ACTIVE. 

PLUPERFECT  ACTIVE. 

/  have  loosed,  etc. 

/  had  loosed,  etc. 

S.  1 

2 
3 

\e-\v-Ka 
\€-\v-/ca-s 

\€-\V-K€ 

€-\€-\V-K7J,  Or  -K€L-V 

€-\€-\v-/crj-$,  or  -#e*-s 

D.  2 
3 

\e-\v-fca-Tov 

\€-\V-KCL-TOV 

€-\€-X  V-KGL-TOV 

€-\e-\v-Kei-rrjv 

P.  1 

2 
3 

\€-\V-fCd-/Ji€V 

\e-\v-fca-T€ 
\e-\v-Kacn 

€-\€-\V-K€l,-fJL€V 
€-\€-\V-/C€l-T€ 

€-\€-\v-K€-crav 

146 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[144— 


s.  i 

2 
3 


PERFECT  ACTIVE. 
I  stand,  etc.. 


etc. 


PLUPERFECT  ACTIVE. 
I  was  standing,  etc. 
7,  or  -K,ei-v 
9,  or  -/cet-9 


etc. 


In  the  same  way  are  inflected  most  vowel  themes,  as 

Tre-TratSeu-Ka  1  have  educated,  c-Tre-TratSev-K^  I  had  educated, 
from  TraiSeJa)  (?rai8eu-)  ; 

avfJi-/3€-flovX.€v-Ka  I  have  advised,  <rvv-e-/3c-/3ov\eu-Kr]  I  had 
advised,  from  cru/x/foiAei/a)  (ow  +  /SovAcu-)  ; 

d<#>-€-crT7^Ka  /  am  m  re?;o^  (^ave  se^  myself  off), 
7  ^as  in  revolt  (had  revolted),  from   a 


144.  a.  The  theme  in  the  first  perfect  system 
takes  the  shorter  form  in  some  verbs,  the  longer 
form  in  others. 

b.  To  the  theme  is  prefixed  the  reduplication, 
which  is  the  special  sign  of  completed  action. 
The  simplest  form  of  the  reduplication  is  seen  in 
\€-\v-tca  ;  it  consists  of  the  initial  consonant  of  the 
theme  with  e.  Other  forms  of  the  reduplication 
will  be  noticed  later.  e-o-Tvj-tca  is  for  the  older 
form  o-e-o-rrj'/ca  ;  initial  a  has  been  weakened  to 
the  rough  breathing,  just  as  in  ib-nj/u  for  cricrTTjfjit,. 
Note  that  the  vowel  of  the  perfect  reduplication  is 
always  e,  of  the  present  reduplication  is  t. 


145]  FIRST  PERFECT  SYSTEM.  147 

c.  The  tense  suffix  of  the  first  perfect  is  -/ca-  (in 
the  third  singular  -#e-). 

d.  The  primary  endings  are  used.     But  in  the 
first   and   third   persons   singular   the    ending    is 
omitted.     In  the  third  person   plural   -a-vcri   has 
become  -aai  by  dropping  v  and  lengthening  a. 

e.  The  examples  show  that  in  compounds  the 
preposition  stands  first  of  all. 

145.   In  the  pluperfect 

a.  The  theme  and  reduplication  are  the  same  as 
in  the  perfect. 

b.  The  augment  is  prefixed  to  the  reduplicated 
theme.     In  elarrj/cij  (for  older  e-cre-crT?;-*:?;)  ei-  has 
resulted  from  dropping  a  and  contracting  e-e. 

c.  The  tense  suffix  is  -/crj-  or  -tcei-  in  the  first  and 
second  persons  singular,  -/ce-  in  the  third  person 
plural,  elsewhere  -KCL-.     (The    difference   of  pro- 
nunciation in  the  three  forms  was  of  course  very 
slight.) 

d.  The  secondary  endings  are  used,  with  -aav  in 
the  third  person  plural.     In  the  first  person  singu- 
lar after  -/crj  the  ending  is  omitted. 

It  is  clear,  then,  that  the  pluperfect  active  is  in 
all  verbs  a  /u-formation  (121). 


148  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.         [146— 

146.  PERFECT  MIDDLE  SYSTEM. 


PERFECT  MID.  (PASS.). 

PLUPERFECT  MID.  (PASS.). 

/  have  ransomed  (or  been 
loosed),  etc. 

/  had  ransomed  (or  been 
loosed),  etc. 

S.  1 

\€-\V-/JL(U 

e-Xe-Xu-///?7*> 

2 

\e-\v-crai, 

l-Xe-Xu-cro 

3 

\e-\v-rai, 

6-Xe-Xu-ro 

D.  2 

\e-\v-a0ov 

€-\€-\V-(T00V 

3 

\e-\v-cr6ov 

t-\e-\v-o-0r)v 

P.  1 

\€-\V-fJL€0a 

€-\€-\V-fJL€0a 

2 

\€-\V-(T0€ 

€-\€-\V-(70€ 

3 

\e-\v-vrat, 

.e-Xe'-Xz^To 

In  the  same  way  are  inflected  most  vowel  themes,  as 

7r€-7rau-/jwu  /  have  stopped  (been  stopped),  c-Trc-Trav-//.^  /  had 
stopped  (been  stopped),  from  7rava>  (TTOLV-)  ; 

(7VfJi-ft€-/3ov\€v-fjLai  I  have  consulted,  (rvv-£-/3e-/3ov\€v-fjLr}v  I 
had  consulted,  from  o-v/x^ovXevcu  ( crvv  +  flovXtv-)  ; 

jSe-^ovXr^-jiuxt  /  have  wished,  €-(3e-j3ov\rj-fJir]v  1  had  wished, 
from  POV \ofjuca  ((3ov\-,  fiovXrj-). 

NOTE.  —  The  perfect  and  pluperfect  middle  of  ftrr^/u  are  not 
used,  except  in  a  few  compounds,  and  in  these  not  often ;  their 
place  is  supplied  in  this  verb  by  the  peculiar  turn  of  meaning 
given  to  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  active,  and  by  other  verbs. 

147.   In  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  middle 

a.  The  theme  takes  the  shorter  form  in  some 
verbs,  the  longer  form  in  others. 

b.  The  reduplication  is  the  same  as  in  the  per- 
fect active ;  the  pluperfect  takes  the  augment. 


149]  THE  Mi-AOEIST.  149 

c.  There  is  no  tense  suffix;  the  endings  are 
added  directly  to  the  reduplicated  theme,  in  the 
perfect  the  primary  endings,  in  the  pluperfect  the 
secondary  endings.  The  system  is  therefore  a  /u- 
formation  (121). 


THE 

148.  A  few  common  verbs  have  an  aorist  formed 
without  a  tense  suffix,  the  endings  being  added 
directly  to  the  theme.  This  is  called  the  ^6-aorist, 
after  the  analogy  of  the  /u-present.  lo-rrjiJLi  has 
this  aorist  in  addition  to  the  regular  first  aorist, 
but  with  a  different  meaning  ;  while  the  first  aorist 
60-rrja-a  is  transitive,  the  /u-aorist  ea-rrjv  is  intransi- 
tive, and  is  generally  used  instead  of  the  direct 
middle  eo-rrja-d/jLrjv  in  the  sense  /  set  myself,  took 
my  place,  stood  (not  I  was  standing  ;  that  is  et- 
O-TT;*;?;).  The  same  meaning  appears  also  in  the 
numerous  compounds  of  this  verb.  yiyvwo-Kco  has 
no  first  aorist,  but  a  /u-aorist  instead,  with  the 
ordinary  aorist  meaning. 

149.    Mi-aorist  of  tW^/u  and 


/  set  myself,  etc. 

1  perceived,  knew,  etc. 

S.  1 

V 

V 

2 

€-(7T?7-9 

>r 

3 

e-arrj 

V 

150 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[150— 


/  set  myself,  etc. 

I  perceived,  knew,  etc. 

D.  2 

e-crrrj-TOV 

e-yva>-TOV 

3 

L-crrtj-rrjv 

e-yvco-rrjv 

P.  1 

e-<JT?7-/iej> 

€-<yV(0-fJi€V 

2 

€-(TTrj-T€ 

€-yva)-T€ 

3 

e-Grrj-aav 

€-yva)-(7av 

a.  The  formation  is  very  simple.  The  aug- 
mented theme,  in  the  longer  form,  takes  the  sec- 
ondary endings,  with  -aav  in  the  third  person 
plural.  Neither  eo-rrjv  nor  eyvcov  has  any  mid- 
dle. 

150.  By  the  principal  parts  of  a  verb  we  mean 
the  first  form  of  every  tense  system  used  in  that  verb. 
They  are  so  called  because,  if  these  are  known,  all 
the  forms  of  the  verb  can  be  inferred  from  them. 
The  following  table  gives  the  principal  parts  of 
most  of  the  verbs  hitherto  introduced,  so  far  as 
they  are  in  common  use.  Not  all  compounds  are 
given,  since  these  can  be  formed  from  the  simple 
verbs.  It  is  necessary  to  learn  the  principal  parts 
of  all  common  verbs,  because  that  is  the  easiest 
way  of  mastering  their  forms ;  and  until  one  knows 
thoroughly  all  the  common  verb  forms,  so  that 
each  one  is  recognized  instantly  in  its  full  mean- 
ing, it  is  impossible  to  read  with  any  satisfactory 
results. 


151] 


THE  Mi-AOBIST. 


151 


f£     XL 
(£    -» 


•    " 


<S    T 

41 


2.2- 


II 


152 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[151— 


W 
> 


2 

a 

H 


l 


i  * 

w 

d  'O 

t  Q3 


tf 
o 


a 

- 


55 

w 


M 

^0      03 


b 
3    « 


I 


i 


152]  THE  Mi-AORIST.  153 

152.    Vocabulary. 
ava-yiyvGtHTKco  (dva  +  yvo-,  ~\ 

yvw-),       dvayvdxio^ai,   >  read, 
dveyvcov,  dveyvco/ca         ) 

o  ftdpftapos,  -ov  foreigner,  barbarian. 

77  Paa-i\eid,  -£9  kingdom,  royal  power. 

o  SouA,o9,  "ov  slave. 

e\ev6epos,  -d,  -ov  free. 

77877,  adv.,  already. 

Ionic. 

(  Marathon,  town  on  the 
(      eastern  side  of  Attica. 
77  mKrj,  -779  victory. 

vlKao)  (yiica-,  vl/crj-  f  r .  vf/crj\  \ 

.    ,        ,  .  I  conquer,    be    victorious, 

vifcricrG),  em/crjcra,  vew/crj-  > 

,       /71  surpass, 

/ca,  veviicrinai,  evlfcrjvrjv  ) 

{Xerxes,  king  of  Persia, 
B.C.  485-464. 
on,  conj.,  that, 

a-rparevco     (crrparev-    fr. N 


crrpaTo?  army,  cf .  a-rpa- 
rtcoTT/9),  o-Tparevo-co, 
ear  par  ever  a,  ecnpd- 


pedition.    Often  used 
as  deponent. 
ecrTparevdrjv 
G>9,  rel.  adv.(conj.),  proclitic,  as. 


take  the  field,  serve  as 
soldier,  make  an  ex- 


1 


When  the  reduplication  syllable  is  followed  by  two  con- 
sonants (or  a  double  consonant  ;  see  212),  the  reduplication 


154 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[153— 


153.    Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 

oKi^/ap^iai  Kara\€\WTCU  VTTO  BTJ/JLCOV, 
TroXXat  Be  BTj/jLO/cpariat,  VTTO  rvpdvvcov. —  i 
VIKCLS,  &  crTpcLTiwrai,  o~vv  ro2<;  6eol<$ 
eVel  o  ptfrcop  dveyvco  rrjv  rov  ftaa"t\€ 
5  rore  Brj  eyvtocrav  ol  vroXmu  on  eVeySeySouXeui/TO.  — ol 
f/EXX?7ve9  eveviKecrav  77877  TOU?  TLepaas  eV 
ore  Hep^779  IcrTpdrevcrev  eV  aurou?.  —  at 


1  f  .  iroXXal  p.€v  .  .  .  iroXXal 
8^:  when,  as  here,  a  word  of 
some  importance  is  used  in 
both  the  contrasted  clauses, 
that  word  is  usually  put  first 
in  each  clause  and  followed  by 
ntv  and  5e  respectively.  The 
contrast  here  is  rather  between 


often  means  the 
democratic  faction  among  the 
people;  in  the  plural,  demo- 
cratic factions. 

3.  vtKcis  :  cognate  ace.  with 
veviK-fiKare.  Cf  .  English  die  the 
death.  We  cannot  say  conquer 
victories,  but  must  say  win  vic- 
tories, or  the  like.  —  <rvv:  ren- 
der with  the  help  of. 

5.  €ir€p€povX€WTO  :  the  mean- 
ing of  the  verb  and  the  context 


show  that  the  form  must  here 
be  taken  as  pass. 

6.  MapaOwvi :  the  battle  of 
Marathon  was  fought  490  B.C. 

7  f .  ITT*  :  a  final  short  vowel 
of  prepositions,  and  a  few  other 
words,  is  often  elided  (cut  off) 
before  an  initial  vowel,  even 
when  not  in  composition.  Com- 
pare dvr  for  avrl  and  dXX'  for 
dXXd  (12).  Probably  in  speak- 
ing and  reading  the  Greeks 
made  such  elisions  very  freely, 
but  in  writing  they  were  some- 
times indicated,  sometimes  not. 
— 'IcoviKcd  irdXcis :  a  name  often 
given  to  the  cities  on  the  cen- 
tral-western coast  of  Asia 
Minor,  colonized  by  Ionic 
Greeks,  who  were  one  of  the 
three  large  branches  of  the 


usually  consists  of 
Cf . 


only,  omitting  the  initial  consonant. 


153] 


THE  Mi-AORIST. 


155 


Tracrai  a<p€(7rrJKacn  rov 

€<yva)  ore  al  'Icovi/cal  TroXe^?  a<f)€{,(TTiJK€(7av.  — 
o  crarpaTrr]^  €7T(,/3€j3ov\€VK€  ro3  /3acn\€i  KOI  ireirav-  10 
rat  Trjs  cipXn^t  Kal  aXXo?  Karacrrad^a-erai  aarpaTr^ 
CLVT  avrov.  —  TreTraiSev/Jieda  ov%  a>9  SovXot,  aXX'  009 
e\evdepoL  7ro\lrai.  —  Trore  vevlicrjicacriv  fSdpftapoi 
fXX?7^a9  ;  —  Trdre  /carearrj  ' Apra^ep^rjs  et9 
ySacrfXe/az/ ;  - — o^  crvfjL/3€/3ov\€Vcr0€  rois  api<TTQis  15 


8.  TOV  f3a<ri\&i>s :  gen.  of 
separation ;  the  preposition  is 
often  not  repeated  after 


race.  The  other  two  were 
the  Dorian  and  the  Aeolian 
branches.  The  Athenians  were 
lonians,  the  Spartans  Dorians. 


II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

We  have  not  yet  (OUTTCD)  surpassed  the  Greeks 
in  wisdom.  —  The  land  has  been  ruled  by  kings  a 
long  time.  —  The  power  of  the  people  is  already 
established.  —  The  slaves  revolted  from  their  mas- 
ters. —  The  slave  has  never  ceased  to  plot  against 
his  master.  —  The  orator  is  already  standing  beside 
his  antagonist.  —  The  king  had  not  reigned  many 
months  when  he  was  deposed.  —  The  Athenians 

5.  never :  that  is,  not  ever, 
ov  TTore,  or  as  one  word  ovirore. 
A  proclitic  before  an  enclitic 
takes  the  acute  accent.  —  to 
plot :  use  the  inf .  with  the  ar- 
ticle, in  the  gen. 

8.  was  deposed :  Travw  in 
aor.  pass. 


1.  surpassed: 

2.  in  wisdom :  dat.  of  re- 
spect. —  has   been  ruled  by 
kings :  expressed  by  one  word. 

3  f.  is  established:  pert 
act.  of  KaOia-rrjfjLL.  —  revolted : 
use  the  /xt-aorist.  —  their :  the 
article  is  enough. 


156 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[154— 


were  free  and  did  not  wish  to  be  reigned  over.  — 
10  I  perceive  that  you  have  not  yet  read  the  tale.  — 
Why  have   the   boys   not  yet  read  the   orator's 
speech  ? 


9.  to  be  reigned  over :  ex- 
pressed by  one  word. 


12.   speech:    \6yos,   which 
has  a  wide  range  of  meaning. 


THE  INFINITIVE  MODE. 

154.  The  infinitive  is  a  verbal  noun ;  that  is,  like 
a  noun  it  is  used  as  subject,  object,  etc.,  in  all  cases 
but  the  vocative;  but  it  is  so  far  a  verb  that  it 
may  take  a  subject  in  the  accusative,  and  any  of 
the  modifiers  which  any  part  of  the  verb  can  take. 
There  is  an  infinitive  in  each  tense  system. 

a.  Except  in  indirect  discourse 

The  present  infinitive  denotes  an  action  simply 
as  continued  or  repeated :  as  \vew  to  be  loosing  (at 
any  time) ; 

The  aorist  denotes  an  action  simply  as  brought 
to  pass :  as  \vaai  to  loose  (at  any  time)  ; 

The  perfect  denotes  an  action  simply  as  com- 
pleted: as  \e\vK<=vai,  to  have  loosed  (at  any  time). 

In  all  these  the  time  is  determined  only  by  the 
context. 

5.  The  future  infinitive  denotes  an  action  as 
future  relatively  to  that  of  the  principal  verb ;  it  is 
used  (1)  in  indirect  discourse  to  represent  a  future 
indicative  of  the  direct,  (2)  as  the  complement  of 


156] 


THE  INFINITIVE  MODE. 


157 


/ji€\\Q) :  thus  <f)r}alv  TOU?  <f>i\ov$  /3ov\evcr6(r0ai,  Jie 
says  the  friends  will  deliberate,  €<f>r)  rov?  <f>l\ovs 
j3ov\eva-€a-dcu  he  said  the  friends  would  deliberate, 
€/j,e\\ov  /3ov\€vo-€o-0ai  they  were  about  to  delib- 
erate. (/-teXXo)  may  take  either  the  present  or 
the  future  infinitive  with  no  especial  difference  of 
meaning). 

155.  Infinitives  of  tirr^/u  (<rra-,  CTTTJ-). 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE.  PASSIVE. 


Pres. 

t-crra-veu 

i-crra-a-flai 

[Like  the  mid.] 

Fut. 

(oriT-cre-cv) 

<7Trf-<T€W 

o'Tiq-o'e-crOai 

(TTa-Oij-(T£~crOa.L 

1st  Aor. 

(TT^-o-at 

VTiq-a'a-o'Oai 

(TTa-Orj-vai 

Mi-aor. 

0"rrj-vaL 

1st  Perf  . 

€-0-T7/-K€-VOt 

156.  Infinitives  of  \va  (\v-,  Xu-). 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE.  PASSIVE. 


Pres. 

(Xv-e-cv) 
\v-uv 

Xv-c-o-^at 

[Like  the  mid.] 

Fut. 

(Av-o-e-ev) 
Xv-aciv 

Xv-cre-cr&u 

\v-0-q-cre-cr0ai 

1st  Aor. 

Xv-crat 

Xv-aa-o'Oai 

\vOfj-vai 

1st  Perf. 

Ac-Xv-K€-vat 

\t-\v-crOaLi 

[Like  the  mid.] 

158 


THE  GHEES:  OF  XENOPHON. 


157.  Infinitives  of  TraiBevco 
ACTIVE.  MIDDLE. 


PASSIVE. 


Pres. 


[Like  the  mid.] 


Fut. 


TratSev-o'C-cr&u 


1st  Aor. 


1st  Perf . 


Tre-TratSev-Ke-vat 


[Like  the  mid.] 


NOTE.  —  Similar  tables  should  be  formed  to  show  the  infini- 
tives of  other  verbs,  simple  and  compound. 

158.  The  endings  of  the  infinitive  are 
Active,  -ev  (contracted  with  preceding  -e-  to  -€6i>), 

or  -vai ; 

Middle,  -adai. 

These  are  added  to  the  tense-stem,  as  the  per- 
sonal endings  are. 

a.  Of  the  active  endings  -vat,  is  used  in  //^-forma- 
tions (//^-present,  /-u-aorist,  aorist  passive),  and  in 
the  perfect  active ;  in  the  perfect  active  the  tense 
suffix  before  -VCLL  becomes  -/ce-. 

b.  In  the  first  aorist  active  the  wholly  irregular 
-aai  stands  for  the  tense  suffix  and  infinitive  end- 
ing together. 

159.  a.  All  infinitives  in  -vai  accent  the  penult. 
b.  The  first  aorist  infinitive  active  accents  the 

penult. 


161]  THE  PARTICIPLE. 

c.  The  perfect  middle  infinitive  accents  the  pe- 
nult. 

THE  PARTICIPLE. 

160.  The  participle  is  a  verbal  adjective;  that 
is,  it  has  the  declension  and  construction  of  an 
adjective,  agreeing  with  a  noun  or  pronoun  ;  but 
it  is  so  far  a  verb  that  it  may  take  an  object  or 
other  modifiers  of  the  verb.  Participles  are  formed 
in  every  tense  system. 

a.  Participles  generally  denote  time  relatively 
to  that  of  the  leading  verb.  The  aorist  participle 
denotes  an  act  relatively  past,  and  is  often  trans- 
lated by  our  perfect  participle,  as  \vcras  having 
loosed.  The  perfect  participle  denotes  an  act  com- 
pleted at  the  time  of  the  leading  verb,  as  XeXu/coi? 
having  loosed.  It  often  happens  that  English  does 
not  distinguish  between  the  two.  The  present 
participle  has  the  same  meaning  as  in  English. 
Sometimes  the  present,  aorist,  and  perfect  partici- 
ples differ  only  as  the  same  tenses  of  the  infinitive 
do  (see  154,  a).  The  future  participle  may  in  the 
paradigms  be  rendered  by  about  to,  as  \va-cov  about 
to  loose. 

161.    Participles  of  la-rrjfu  (crra-,  crrrj-'). 


Pres.  ACT.  (t-ora-vr-,  t-(7Ta(rd-). 

N.    i-oras  t-OTacra  l-ard-v 

G.    i-ora-vT-os  t-orao^s  etc.,  see  166. 


160  TEE  GHEES:  OF  XENOPEON.        [iei— 

MID.  (t-oTa-//,evo-,  [-ora-//.evd-). 

N.    i-ora-/>ievo-s  t-(rra-/x€n/  l-(TTa-/x€vo-v 

G.    [-(TTa-fjitvov  t-(7ra-/w,€j^s  etc.,  see  163,  a. 


Fut.  ACT.  (o-Tiy-o-o-vT-,  o-Trj-crovad-). 


G.    OTiy-cro-vT-os  OT^O-OVCT^S  etc.,  see  165. 

MID.  ((7T77-cro-/jievo-, 


G.    cTTrj-(To-fjL€vov          (TTrj-cro-fJievrjs  etc.,  see  163,  a. 

PASS.  (oTa-077-(TO-/Aevo-, 
N.     crra-Orj-cro-iJievo-s     (r 
G.     arTa-Orj-oro-fJievov      (TTa-Orj-cro-iJicvrjs         etc.,  see  163,  a. 


1st  Aor.  ACT.  (aT^cra-vr-,  oT^-(nxcrd-)  . 


.    o-T7;-o-ds  cmy-cra-cra 

G.    o-T>;-(ra-vr-os  o-Trj-crd-o-rjs  etc.,  see  16G. 


MID. 

N".     O"T?y-(ra-/xevo-s 
G.    oT77-cra-/A€Vov          crTrj-cra-fjLtvrjs  etc.,  see  163,  a. 

PASS.  (ora-06-i/T-,  o-ra-^etcrd-)  . 
N.    o-ra-^et?  (rra-^eto-a  ora-tfe'-v 

G.    aTa-^€-vT-o5  o-ra-^cto-^s  etc.,  see  167. 


Mi-  ACT.  ACT.  (ora-vr-,  oTacrd-). 

N.  crras  (rrao-a  ara-v 

G.  crra-vT-os  (rra-cr^s  etc.,  see  166. 

1st  Perf.  ACT.  (C-CTT^-KOT-,  l- 

N.  €-crr?7-K(os  k-crr-q-Kma. 

G.  e-CTT^-KOT-OS  €-<7T7^/CVtds  etc.,  S66  168. 


162]  THE  PARTICIPLE.  161 

162.  Participles  of  ircuSeva)  (TratSeu-). 

Pres.  ACT.  (7rai8cv-o-rr-,  TratSev-ovcra-). 

N.  TratSev-wv  TrtuScv-ovcra  TratScv-o-v 

G.  TraiScv-o-vT-os  TraiScv-ovo^s  etc. 


MID. 

N.  TrcuSev-o-fievo-s 
G.  7rat8ev-o-^€vov 


TraiSev-o-fJLtvrjs 


7rat8ev-a-/xcvo-v 
etc. 


Fut.  ACT.  (TratSev-ao-rr-, 

N.  7rat8eJ-ora)v  TratSev-aovcra 

G.  TratScv-ao-vr-os 

MID. 


etc. 


N. 

G.  7rat8ciM7O-/xeVov         7rat8ev-o-o-/i€K7;s 

PASS.  (7rai8€v-0T7-cro-/u,€vo-, 

N.  7r 
G. 


etc. 


etc. 


1st  Aor.          ACT.  (TratSev-aa-vr-, 
N.  •7rat8eJ-<rds  TratSev-crdera 

G.  TratScv-era-vr-os         TratSev-aacr^?  etc. 


MID. 

N.  ?rat8c 

G.  7rat8ei>o-a-/x€vov 

PASS.  ( 
N.  7rat8cv-^ets 
G.  TratScv-^c-vr-os 


-,  7rcu8ev-(ra-/xcv-d-) 

t8ev 
etc. 


etc. 


162  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [163— 

Perf.  ACT.  (Tre-rraiSev-Kor-,  7re-7rai8ev-Kwd-). 

N.  7rc-7rat8cu-K(os  Tre-TratSev-Kwa 

G.  Tre-TraiSev-KOT-os        Tre-TraiScu-Kw'ds  etc. 


MID.  (7T€-7rat8ev-/xevo-, 

N.  Tre-TratSev'/xeVo-s        7re-7raiSev 

G.  7T€-7rat8€v-//,€vov         7re-7raiSev-)U,€v?7S  etc. 


163.  The  participial  endings  are 

Active,  -i/T-  (but  in  the  perfect  active  -or-) ; 

Middle,  -pevo-. 

These  are  added  to  (or,  in  the  perfect  active,  com- 
bined with)  the  tense  stem,  and  the  entire  parti- 
cipial stem  is  then  declined  as  an  adjective. 

a.  The  middle  ending  -pevo-  presents  no  diffi- 
culty ;  participles  with  this  ending  are  declined 
like  ordinary  adjectives  of  the  vowel  declension. 

164.  The  accent  of  the  participles  is  exceptional 
in  the  following  respects ;  the  rules  apply  to  the 
nominative  singular  masculine. 

a.  All  third-declension  participles  in  -9,  except 
that  of  the  first  aorist  active,  are  oxytone  (that  is, 
have  the  acute  on  the  ultima).     This  applies  to 
the  /u-present,  /u-aorist,  perfect  active,  and  aorist 
passive :    /CTTO?,  <rra$,  TreTratSeu/cw,  irai§ev6eis. 

b.  The    perfect   middle   participle    accents    the 
penult   (as  does  the   perfect  middle   infinitive)  : 


166]  THE  PARTICIPLE.  163 

165.    Participles  in  -o)i>,  -ov<ra,  -ov  are  declined 
like  \vcov  (\vovr-,  \vovad-)  : 


Sing.  N.V.        \v<ov 

G.                     XUOPTO? 

\vovcra 

XUOUO"?/? 

X0oi> 

X6oi/T09 

D.                    \VOVTi 

Xuouo"?; 

Xuoi^Tt 

A.              \vovra 

\vovdav 

XOoi/ 

DualN.  A.V.  \vovre 

\vovcrd 

X6oi/T€ 

G.  D.           \VOVTOiV 

\vov<raiv 

\VOVTOIV 

Plu.   N.V.         \vovres 

\vovaaL 

\vowra 

G.                    \IOVTCOV 

\vovcrcov 

\VOVTO)  V 

D.                    \VOVai 

\vovcrcus 

\vovcri, 

A.              \vovras 

\vovcrds 

\VOVTCL 

166.  Participles  in  -a?, 
*    (                       -  \  . 

-da  a,  -av  are 

declined  like 

Sing.  N.  V.         <7Ta? 

« 
^ 

ardv 
ardvros 

D.              a-rdvTi 
A.              crrdvra 

ardarj 
ardaav 

ardv 

Dual  N.  A.  V.  a-rdvre 

araad 

aravre 

G.  D.         (rrdvTOiv 

araacuv 

ardvroiv 

Plu.    N.  V.        o-raj/re? 

ardacu 

ardvra 

G.                     (TTaVTCOV 

arda&v 

f 

aTCLVTWV 

D~2~. 
•                     (TTCLG  L 

/ 

ardai 

A.              o-rdvras 

crra<7a9 

ardvra 

This  is  like  Tra?  except  as  to  the  accent  of  the  first  form 
and  the  quantity  and  accent  of  TTO.V.  The  accent  of  the  first 
aorist  active  participle  (Xveras,  TraiSev'cras)  is  recessive. 


164 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[167— 


167,  Aorist  passive  participles  are  declined  like 
(\v06vr-. 


Sing.  N.  V. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


\v0evTo? 


\v6evra 


Dual  N.  A.  V.  \v6bre 
G.  D.        \v0evroiv 


Plu.  N.V. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


\v6evres 
\v0evrcov 
\v6el<ri 
\vOevTas 


\v0eicra 

\v0ev 

\v0ei<T<r)s 

\v0evros 

\v06iarj 
\v6ela-av 

\v6evrt, 
\v0ev 

\v0eicra 

\v6evre 

\v0eiaaiv 

\v0evroiv 

\vdelcrai        \vdevra 


\vdeia-i 
\v6evra 


168.   Perfect  active  participles  are  declined  like 


XeXu/coi? 


Sing.  N.  V. 
G. 
D. 
A. 

Dual  N.  A.  V. 
G.D. 

Plu.   N.V. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


•-,  \e\vicviar) : 

\e\vxv2a 


\e\VKOTt, 

\e\VKora 


\e\vfcvla 
\e\vicvlav 


XeXu/co? 


\e\VKvLa        \e\VKore 

\e\VKOTOW       \e\VKViCLLV       \€\VKOTOLV 

\e\VKora 


XeXf/core? 
\€\v/cdcri 


\e\vKviai 

\€\V/CVIO)V 

\e\vfcvlais     \€\VKO<TI, 
XeXv/cora 


170] 


THE  PARTICIPLE. 


165 


169.    The  /u-aorist  participle  of  yt,yvob(r/cco  is  as 
follows : 

(ryvovT-,  yvovaar). 

Sing.  N.  V.  yvovs  yvovcra  yvdv 

G.  yvdvTOS  ryvovarjs  yvovTO? 

D.  ryvdvri  yvovcrr) 

A.  ryvdvTa  yvovcrav 


yvov 


Dual  N.  A.  V.  yz/oWe 

G.  D.  ryVOVTOLV 

Plu.   N.V. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


yvovTcov 
yvovat, 

yVOVTCLS 


yvovaa 
yvovcraw 

yvova-cu 
yvovcr&v 


yvdvToiv 
yvovra 


ryvovads 


yvovat, 
yvdvTa 


170.  a.  If  the  participial  ending  -VT-  follows  a 
tense  suffix  ending  in  -o-,  the  nominative  singular 
masculine  rejects  the  case-ending  -9,  drops  -r,  and 
lengthens  o  to  o>,  as  in  \vwv  for  \V-O-VT-S.  Other- 
wise -VT-  is  dropped  before  the  case-ending  -9,  and 
the  preceding  vowel  lengthened  in  compensation, 
as  in  /crra?  for  IO-TCI-VT-S  :  e  then  becomes  e^,  as  in 
\v0eis  for  Xt^^e-z/r-?,  o  becomes  ou,  as  in  yvovs  for 
<yvo-vT-s.  The  dative  plural  also  shows  this  latter 
change.  The  nominative  singular  neuter  simply 
drops  -T  without  lengthening,  as  in  \vov  for  \V-O-VT. 

b.  In  the  perfect  active  participle  -KOT-  may  be 
called  the  combined  tense  and  participial  suffix; 


166  THE  GEEEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [170— 

the   nominative   singular   masculine    and    neuter 
have  -/C609  and  -#09. 

c.  The   formation   of    the   feminine   participial 
stem  is  somewhat  irregular.     Note  that  all  par- 
ticiples   (and    adjectives)    of    the   consonant   and 
a-declensions  have  short  a  in  the  nominative,  accu- 
sative, and  vocative  singular  feminine  ;  all  partici- 
ples and  adjectives  of  the  o-  and  a-declensions  have 
long  a  or  rj  in  these  forms. 

d.  Comparison  of  the  passive  forms  shows  that 
the  passive  suffix  appears  as  -07)-  before  a  single 
consonant,  elsewhere  as  -6e-.     So  in  the  /u-aorist  a 
theme   vowel  is  long  before  a  single   consonant, 
elsewhere  short. 

The  following  synopses,  giving  the  first  forms  of  each 
tense  and  mode,  will  show  the  relation  of  the  infinitives  and 
participles  to  the  indicative  forms  of  the  same  system.  The 
principal  parts  are  in  full-face  type. 

NOTE.  —  The  participles  of  other  verbs  should  be  given  in 
tabular  form,  as  in  161  and  162. 


171] 


PARTICIPLE. 


167 


7*  7^  7«« 


px  ja     px  ja    ^  Ps  ^^^    j     a 

t  Ml?      '  8  "  T:  ? 


PR 


W 
3 

J 

QD 
H 

B 


H 
fc> 

» 


Kj 

S 


3  1  f 

pK<3>.a 

* 


I 

o 

» 


i 


168 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[172— 


£ 

« 


^    w 

5    CO 

I    * 

H 
•a       OQ 


CO 
H 


HI 


3   3 


VP    P 

CO    60 


A     A 


173] 


alrea) 


THE  PARTICIPLE. 

173.    Vocabulary. 

alrrj-),     alrtjaa), 
yrrjica?    yrrjfjuai,,    yrtf- 


169 


rj  /3otf0ei,a,  -a? 
o  /3&>yu,09,  -oO 
Sov\dco 


,  Sov  X&><7<w, 


,  €Sov\ct)0rjv  (fr.  SoOXo?) 
(Jbvva-,  Svvrj- 

€&vvrj0rjv,  pass.  dep.    f 

eavTov,3  -779,  -of),  reflexive  pron., 

( 

elbevai,  inf.  of  oZSa,  irreg.,  perf .  in 
form,  pres.  in  meaning, 

spaTrevfca,*  re0e-  > 
• 

,  €0€pa7T€V0rjV  ) 

,   0V(TG),   e6v<ra,   re-  ) 
,  erv0rjv  \ 


ask  (for  some- 
thing), de- 
mand. 

help. 

altar. 

>  enslave. 

can,  be  able. 

one 's  self,  him- 
self, herself. 

to  know. 

serve,  worship 
(therapeutics). 

sacrifice. 


1  The  diphthong  at  is  regularly  changed  to  rj  by  the  aug- 
ment.   See  118,  2. 

2  Verbs  beginning  with  a  vowel  lengthen  that  vowel  for 
the  reduplication ;   in  such  verbs,  then,  the  reduplication 
takes  the  same  form  as  the  augment. 

3  Declined  like  avros,  but  from  the  meaning  there  is  no 
occasion  to  use  it  in  the  nominative  or  vocative.     Compare 
Latin  sui,  sibi,  etc. 

4  A  rough  mute  (<£,  0, ;()  becomes  smooth  (TT,  T,  K)  in  the 


170  THE  GEEEK  OF  XENOPHON. 

ol  "Icoves,  -cov 


[173— 


fj,d\\ov,  adv.,  comparative, 

TI  /jid^rj,  -779 

oifcot,,  adv.  (fr.  ol/co^, 

(ol-,  0677-)?  oirj(ro/j,at,) 
v,2  adv., 

7roXXa/a9,2  adv., 
f)  <rlrytf,  -7)9 

,     ,  k          Y  make  an  expedi- 

o-vo-rparevco  (a-vv  +  crrparev-),  av-  .         .  7    .   . 

/  ,1       tionwith,ioin 

a-rparevcra),  --- 

etc.,  reg., 


Tonians. 
common,  public. 
more,  rather. 
battle,  fight. 
at  home. 
think,  suppose. 
everywhere. 
often. 
silence. 


,  . 
in  an  expeai- 

tion. 
Sokrates  or  Soc- 

rci/ces. 
body. 

dare. 


<f>av€po$,  -a,  -6v  (fr.  root  of  </>eu-  )  plain,     evident, 
vco)  j       visible. 


-oi>9,  -ei,  -rjv 

-TO9 

(roXyLta-,     roX/i?;-), 


w9,  adv. 


plainly,  openly. 


reduplication.  See  211.  In  like  manner  the  theme  0v- 
becomes  TV-  in  the  passive  system,  because  the  passive  suffix 
in  the  next  syllable  begins  with  0. 

1  Imperfect  wo/x^v.     See  118,  2,  and  compare  atrew. 

2  Note  the  derivation  and  endings.     We  shall  meet  other 
adverbs  of  place  in  -ov,  and  all  the  numeral  adverbs  but  the 
£rst  three  end  in  -a/as. 


174] 


THE  PARTICIPLE. 


171 


o  <f>i\6(ro(f)o<;,  "Ov 

&v,  ovaa,  6V,1  pres.  pple.  of 


lover  of  wisdom, 

philosopher, 
being. 


174.    ^Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 

Ol  'AOijvalot,,  TWV  'Icovcov  TI^TJ  a^ea-rrjKorcov  CLTTO 
/3a<7fc\e&>9  Kal  alrTjo-civTow  avrov?  /BoijOeiav,  vvve- 
o-rparevcravro  avrols,  oWe?  /cal  avrol  "lave?  TO  761/09. 
Se  i£*i?<ra?  TO  1)9  eV  rfj  *Aaia 


four  meanings  which  we  always 
distinguish  in  English.  The 
first  meaning,  and,  is  familiar. 
Below  in  /cal  rb  <rw/xa  Kal  r^v 
tyvx^v  we  translate  the  first  Kal 
by  both,  the  second  by  and. 
Besides  these  uses  as  a  conj., 
the  word  is  often  an  adv.  em- 
phasizing the  following  word 
or  phrase,  with  the  force  of 
also,  too,  or  of  even.  Deter- 
mine by  the  context  which 
meaning  is  intended.  —  TO  -y€- 
vos :  in  race ;  ace.  of  specifica- 
tion. 

4  f .  Adpctos :  Dareios  I.,  son 
of  Hystaspes,  king  of  Persia 
521-486  B.C.  — viK^jcrds,  8ovX<&- 
<rds :  having  conquered  and  hav- 
ing enslaved;  or  better  after 
conquering  and  enslaving.  The 


1    f.     TWV    'IwVWV    d<()€CrTT|K6- 

T<OV,  atrqo-dvTwv :  a  noun  and 
pple.  may  stand  together  in 
the  gen.,  not  directly  connected 
with  any  other  word;  this  is 
called  the  genitive  absolute. 
Its  uses  are  similar  to  those  of 
the  Latin  abl.  absolute.  It 
should  most  often  be  translated 
by  a  clause;  thus  here,  when 
the  lonians,  etc. 

2.  avrovs,  po^|0€iav :  objects 
of   aiT-rjo-di'Twv.     As   in   Latin, 
verbs  of  asking,  teaching,  and 
some  others  may  take  two  ac- 
cusatives, one  of  the  person, 
the  other  of  the  thing. 

3.  avTots :    dat.  of  associa- 
tion after  <rvv-  in  <rvve<7Tpa.Teij- 
<ravTo.  —  KCU  :    also.      Compare 
140,  I,   10  and  note.     Kal  has 


1  Gen.  OVTOS,  ovvrjs,  ovros,  etc.,  like  AiW,  165. 


172 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[174- 


5    TroXXaZ? 


/cal    &ov\ct)o"ds    7rd\i,v    rot>9    a?ro- 
/cal   TOU9    ' A.0rjvaiov$   SovXcocrat 
€<f>'  eavrov  arparevaacrdaL.     ov- 
7ro\efJLioi    (fravepcos    eyiyvovro    Tlep&at,    /cal 


/Jia\\ov  r&v  7ro\\a)V.     ol 


Oepairevcov 
yap 


aor.  pples.  here  denote  actions 
which  preceded  that  of  the  verb 


5  f  .  pdxais  :  dat.  of  means, 
though  in  translating  we  should 
use  in.  —  rot>s  oL-iroo-Tavras  : 
practically  a  noun,  object  of 
dov\6<ras  :  translate  by  a  rel. 
clause. 

7.  TOVS   ToXji'/jtravras  :    the 
repetition  of  TOVS   shows  that 
the  pple.  belongs  to  'AOyvalovs. 
Translate  by  a  rel.  clause. 

8.  ovv:  accordingly,  or  an 
unemphatic  therefore  or  then. 
Another  post-positive  word.  — 
iroXljuoi  :    this  was  really  the 
cause  of  the  Persian  expedition 
against  Athens  and  the  other 
Greeks  of  Greece  proper. 

10.  6€pair€va)v  :  pred.  nom. 
after  <f>ai>epbs  ?iv,  agreeing  with 
the  subject,  Swjcpdrr/s.  This  is 
the  first  instance  of  the  supple- 
mentary pple.,  a  common  idiom 
in  Greek,  to  which  there  is  no 
corresponding  usage  in  English. 
Lit.  Sokrates  was  plain  (or  well- 


known)  worshipping;  i.e.,  it 
was  well  known  that  S.  wor- 
shipped. Oepawetwv  is  thus  an 
essential  part  of  the  predicate, 
and  not  merely  a  loose  modifier. 
In  distinction  from  the  supple- 
mentary pple.,  the  usage  in  the 
gen.  abs.,  and  in  6vres,  vlirfi- 
(ras,  5oi>Xc6(ras,  is  called  the 
circumstantial  pple. ;  that  in 
Tofls  dTrocrrdvras,  roi)s  roX/x^- 
a-avras,  is  called  the  attributive 
pple. 

11.  iroXv:  much;  adver- 
bial ace.,  so  frequent  as  to  be 
practically  an  adverb.  —  TWV 
iroXXwv:  gen.  of  comparison 
after  nSXKov.  Comparatives 
without  TJ  (than)  are  followed 
by  the  gen.  Cf.  the  Latin  use 
of  the  abl.  after  comparatives 
without  quam.  The  phrase 
ol  iro\\oL  (lit.  the  many)  is 
often  used  in  the  sense  of 
the  mass  of  men,  most  peo- 
ple. —  |i€v  -yap :  notice  the  posi- 
tion, between  the  article  and 

TToXXo/. 


174] 


THE  PARTICIPLE. 


173 


TroXXot.  olovrai  rovs  Oeovs  rd  pev  el&evai  rd  &'  OVK 
elbevai,  •  ^to/cpdrrjs  Se  Trdvra  fjuev  cSero  6eov<$  elSevai, 
rd  re  \€<yd/ji€va  /cal  Trpdrro/Jieva  /cal  ra  o'lyfj  /3ov- 

,  7ravra%ov  Se  irapelvai  (are  present),     /cal  15 
\v  ?roXXa/a9  /j,ev  oll/coi  7roXXa/a9  S*  eirl 

ToXeft>9    /3co/JLO)V.       A:aXft)9    Be    7T€7rCU- 

Sevfjievo?  r)V  KOI  TO  <rw/Jia  /cal  rrjv  ^v^tjv  •  rot>9  jap 
jjirj  &vva/ji€vov$  eavr&v  apfteiv  OVK  €</>?)  Swrfo'ea'dat, 
aXXo)i/  deiv.  20 


12.  rd  fUv,  rd  84:  some 
things,  other  things.  In  this 
and  some  like  phrases  the  ar- 
ticle retains  its  earlier  force  as 
a  pronoun. 

14.  T€  :  both.    Enclitic  par- 
ticle slightly  weaker  than  /ca/, 
like  Latin  que.     re  ...  KaL  is  a 
little  less  strong,  both  .  .  .  and, 
than  KaL  . . .  KaL  —  irpa/rrdficva : 
without  the    article,  therefore 
still  affected  by  the  ra  before 
\ey6fjLeva.      Therefore    ra  .  .  . 
TrpaTT6fji€va  as  one   phrase    is 
parallel   with    ra    pov\ev6fjL€i>a, 
and  re  is  correlative  with  the 
KaL  before  the  latter   phrase. 
-irparru  is  the  common  Attic 
prose  form  for  the  older  irpdo-o-u. 
So  y\u>rra  for  y\uxr<ra,  and  in 
other  words  containing  rr  or 
<r<r.  —  (riyfj :  dat.  of  manner. 

15.  iravraxov     84  :      with 
which  per  is  this  5t  correlative  ? 

16.  iroXXdicis  .  .  . 


cf .  153, 1.,  1  f . iro\\al  fUv...  iro\- 
\al  5^  and  note.  —  4ir£:  in  the 
literal  sense  of  on  something 
brL  usually  takes  the  gen.  in 
prose. 

17  f.  KO.XWS:  well;  adv.  of 
manner  from  /caX6s.  Compare 
(pavep&s  from  <f>avep6s.  Adverbs 
of  manner  in  -ws  are  formed 
from  most  adjectives ;  the  ac- 
cent is  like  that  of  the  gen. 
plur.  of  the  adjective. — ireircu- 
Scvplvos :  trained,  disciplined. 
—  TO  o-cojia,  TTJV  +VX^V  :  acc«  °^ 

specification. 

19.  jrfj:  TIO^.  The  differ- 
ence between  ^  and  ov  must 
be  learned  by  careful  observa- 
tion. Here  TOI)S  IJL^J  dwa^vovs 
is  general,  meaning  any  one 
who  cannot ;  while  roi)s  otf  5v- 
va/j.evovs  would  be  particular,  re- 
ferring only  to  certain  definite 
persons  whom  the  writer  has  in 
mind.  —  «f>T] :  imperfect  of 


174 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[174 


(0a-,  ^77-),  conjugated  like  Iffryv, 
except  in  the  2d  sing.,  thus  : 


e<f>a<rav. 
but 


modules 


when  <t>r)nl  introduces  a  nega- 
tive clause,  the  negative  regu- 
larly stands  just  before  the 
form  of  0i?/u/,  as  if  compounded 
with  it.  Compare  Latin  nego. 


n.  Translate  into  Greek. 

I  did  not  think  the  Greeks  knew  everything.  — 
He  said  he  did  not  know  the  man  who  was  caus- 
ing the  lonians  to  revolt.  —  The  barbarians  wished 
to  enslave  the  Greeks,  but  the  Greeks  declared 
5  they  would  be  unable  to  do  so.  —  The  lonians, 
having  revolted  from  the  king,  asked  help  of  the 
Athenians,  who  were  themselves  also  lonians  in 
race.  —  Sokrates  evidently  thought  that  the  best 
way  to  ruling  others  was  through  conquering 


1.  knew :  use  the  inf. 

2  f.  the  man  •who  was 
causing  to  revolt:  express 
by  the  article  and  the  attribu- 
tive pple. ;  in  the  pres.  tense, 
because  the  time  referred  to  is 
the  same  as  that  of  he  said. 

4.  declared:  0i^. 

5.  they :  if  this  referred  to 
the  Greeks,  the  subject  of  de- 
clared,  it  would    not    be   ex- 
pressed   in    Greek  ;     since    it 
refers  to  some  one  else  than 
the   subject    of    the    principal 
verb,  it  must  be  expressed. 

7.  who  were :  pple. ;  them- 
selves and  lonians,  being  predi- 


cate words  denoting  the  same 
persons  as  Athenians,  must 
agree  with  Athenians. 

8.  evidently  thought :  use 
the   supplementary  pple.:   lit. 
was  evident  thinking. 

9.  to  ruling  others:    use 
tirl  with  an  inf.  clause  preceded 
by  rb  to  mark  the  clause  as 
ace.  governed  by  tnl.     Euling 
is  here  a  verbal  noun  of  the 
same  nature  as  the  Greek  inf. 
So  conquering.  —  was :  use  the 
inf.  el  vat.  —  through  conquer- 
ing :  did  with  an  inf.  clause  pre- 
ceded by  TOV  to  mark  it  as  be- 
ing in  the  gen.  governed  by  5id. 


174] 


THE  PARTICIPLE. 


175 


one's  self ;  for  he  that  could  not  rule  himself  was  10 
already  himself  enslaved;  and  he  used  to  advise 
all  his  friends  to  'know  themselves.'  —  When  the 
Persians,  after  being  defeated  by  the  Athenians  in 
the  battle  at  Marathon,  were  planning  another  ex- 
pedition against  them,  the  Athenians  asked  the  15 
Spartans  for  help ;  for  the  contest,  they  said,  was 
a  common  one.  —  Though  few,  the  Greeks  dared 
to  take  their  place  in  battle  against  the  barbarians, 
who  were  many. 


10.   he  that  could    not: 

attributive  pple.,  with  ^t  be- 
cause the  statement  is  general. 
The  tense  of  could  and  icas  in- 
dicates that  this  statement  is 
given  as  that  of  Sokrates;  in 
other  words,  that  the  clause  is 
an  indirect  quotation.  This  re- 
lation is  marked  in  Greek  by 
putting  the  principal  verb  of 
the  clause  (was  enslaved)  in 
the  inf.  Note  the  position  of 
ydp.  The  first  himself  is  re- 
flexive; the  second  is  merely 
intended  to  emphasize  the  sub- 
ject of  was  enslaved,  and  should 
therefore  be  expressed  by  avrov. 
12.  know  themselves  : 
use  the  aor.  There  was  an 
inscription  in  the  vestibule  of 
the  temple  of  Apollo  at  Delphi, 
"Know  thyself"  (yv&Oi  <rav- 
r6v),  which  Sokrates  often 
quoted.  —  -when :  #re. 


13.  after  being  defeated : 

express  by  a  circumstantial 
pple.,  aor.  pass. 

14  f.  another  expedi- 
tion :  lit.  to-make-an-expedition 
again. 

16.  they  said  :  can  be 
sufficiently  expressed  by  put- 
ting the  clause,  for  the  con- 
test was  a  common  one,  in  the 
inf. 

17  ff.  though  few,  etc. :  in 
Greek  say  the  Greeks,  being 
few,  dared  .  .  .  against  the  bar- 
barians, being  many.  —  take 
their  place:  /u-aor.  of  Ka.01- 
a-Trjfjn,  followed  by  ets  with  the 
ace.  because  of  the  motion 
implied.  —  against  the  bar- 
barians: dat.  of  association 
with  iJLdxyv.  (We  say  fight 
with,  using  with  of  hostile,  as 
well  as  of  friendly,  associa- 
tion.) 


176 


THE  GKEEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[176- 


CONTRACT  VERBS. 

175.  Verbs  in  -aw,  -eca,  and  -6co  are  contracted 
throughout  the  present  system.     That  is,  final  a, 
e,  or  o  of   the   theme  unites  with  the  following 
vowel  or  diphthong,  according  to  certain  rules,  to 
form  one  long  vowel  or  diphthong.     The  uncon- 
tracted  forms  are  like  those  of  other  ^-presents ; 
but  the  contracted  forms  are  alone  used  in  Attic 
prose. 

176.  Present  System  of  vlKaco  (ylica-)  conquer. 

INDICATIVE. 


Pres. 
S.  1 
2 
3 

D.2 
3 

P.  1 

2 
3 


Active. 
viAcd-co  vZ/coi 


n/ca-€i  viKa 

vZ/cd-e-TOv       vZ/carov 
vZ/carov 


vlKa-ovcrt 


Middle  (Passive) 
i/ZK<i-o-^uxi  vZ/ca)l 
vZKa-T|  or  -€i  vZ/ca 


vZKa-6-//,e^a 
vZKa-o-vrat        vZKwvrat 


Impf. 
S.  1 
2 
3 

D.2 
3 


Active. 

c-n/ca-o-v        evf/ccav 


Middle  (Passive). 


c-vZ/cd-ov 

e-vZ/cd-c-ro         evZ/caro 


c-viKA-6-rov     cvl/carov 


177] 


CONTEACT  VERBS. 


177 


Impf. 

P.I 

2 

3 


Active. 

€-I/lKO,-O-/A€V 


evZ/care 


c-vt/ca-o-v 


Middle  (Passive). 


c-vZ/cd-o-vro       cvZicaivTO 


INFINITIVE. 


Middle  (Passive). 


PARTICIPLES. 


i'tKot-a>j/ 


v/cav 
vZ/caivros 


vZ/cd-ovo-a 


etc. 

<0>V 

etc. 


Middle  (Passive). 

vZKa-6-/icvos,  -77,  -ov 
ievav,  -lys,  etc. 


-17,  -ov 
-r/5,  etc. 


177.  The  contractions  of  verbs  in  -a&>  are  all 
included  in  the  following  rule  : 

(1)  a  +  an  e-sound1  (e,  77,  e^,  rf)  gives  a  (a) ; 

(2)  a  +  an  0-sound  (o,  o>,  o^,2  ov)  gives  o>  (w) ; 

(3)  Original  i  is  retained  as  i  subscript. 

a.  In  vlKav  (from  vZKaeiv)  t  is  not  retained,  because  it  was 
not  in  the  original  form.  That  is,  vZ/ca-civ  is  contracted  from 
vZ/ca-e-cv,  ct  being  here  merely  a  way  of  writing  the  long 

1  In  giving  this  rule  pronounce  the  e-  in  e-sound  as  in  prey. 

2  In  the  forms  thus  far  given  the  combination  a  +  ot  does 
not  occur,  but  it  will  occur  later. 


178 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[178- 


sound  of  c  (practically  the  same  as  French  e  prolonged,  or 
German  long  e).     In  such  cases  the  i  was  never  pronounced. 

178.  The  contract  syllable  takes  an  accent  only 
when  one  of  the  syllables  contracted  had  one  ;  it 
takes 

The  circumflex  if  the  first  syllable  was  accented, 
The  acute  if  the  second  was  accented. 


179.  Present  System  of 

INDICATIVE. 


love. 


Pres. 

S.  1 
2 
3 

D.  2 
3 

P.I 
2 
3 


Active. 


Middle  (Passive). 

</)tX^-0-jLWU 


Impf. 

S.I 
2 
3 

D.  2 
3 

P.I 
2 
3 


Active. 

€<f>L\OVV 


Middle  (Passive). 


€<t>L\€L(T00V 


€<J>L\OVV 


€-<f>l\i-0-VTO       €<f>l\OVVTO 


181] 


CONTRACT  VERBS. 
INFINITIVE. 


179 


Active. 


Middle  (Passive). 


PAKTICIPLES. 


Active. 


<f>lXoVVTOS 


etc. 

<f>iXovv 
etc. 


Middle  (Passive). 
»;,  -ov 


^>tXc-o-/xei/ov,  -lys,  etc. 

^>tXov/xevo9,  -17,  -ov 
ys,  etc. 


180.   The  contractions  of  verbs  in  -ew  are  all  in 
eluded  in  the  following  rule  : 

(1)  e  +  e  gives  et; 

(2)  e  +  o  gives  ov ; 

(3)  e  before  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong  is  ab- 
sorbed. 

181.  Present  System  of  SovXaco  (SouXo-)  enslave. 
INDICATIVE. 


Pres. 


Active. 


2  j  8oiA6-€i5 
3 


Middle  (Passive). 

SovXovjMU 
8ovX6--g  or  -€i    SovXol 

SovXorrat 


D.  2 
3 


SovXovrov 


180 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[181— 


Pres. 
P.  1 
2 
3 


Active. 

8ouA<5-o-/x,ev      SovAov/xcv 
8ouA6-€-re         8ouAo9rc 
8ouA6-ovcn 


Middle  (Passive). 
8ovAov/x 
SovAowfle 


Impf. 

S.  1 

2 

3 

D.  2 
3 

P.  1 
2 
3 


Active. 


c-oWAo-o-v 
€-8ouAo-€-s 


cSovAovv 


e-SovAo-o-v 


tW/e  (Passive). 


c-8ovA<5-€-ro 


€-8ovAo-6-/x,e0a   c 

C-8ovA<J-€-O"^€        € 

€-8ovA6-o-vro     e 


INFINITIVE. 


SovAovv 


Middle  (Passive). 


PARTICIPLES. 


Active. 


etc. 

SovAwv  SovAovcra       SovAovv 

SovAovvros     SovAovo-^?        etc. 


Middle  (Passive). 
;,  -ov 


8ovAo-o-/xei/ov,  -^5,  etc. 

8ovAov/xcvo5,  -77,  -ov 
8ovAov/i€vov,  -779,  etc. 


182]  CONTRACT  VERBS.  181 

182.  The  contractions  of  verbs  in  -6co  are  all  in- 
cluded in  the  following  rule  : 

(1)  o  +  e  or  o  or  ov  gives  ov ; 

(2)  o  +  ?; l  or  &  gives  o> ; 

(3)  o  +  an  ^-diphthong  (et,  ot,1 77)  gives  ot,. 

a.  In  SovXow  (from  8ovXo-cti/)  t  is  not  retained,  because  it 
was  not  in  the  original  form,  &>vA.o-c-ev,  and  was  never  pro- 
nounced. Compare  177,  a. 

The  following  synopses  show  that  the  remaining  parts  of 
these  contract  verbs  are  perfectly  regular. 

1  In  the  forms  thus  far  given  the  combination  o  +  rj  and 
o  +  01  do  not  occur,  but  they  will  occur  later. 

For  the  convenience  of  teachers  who  wish  at  this  point  to 
group  the  principles  of  contraction  in  a  more  general  form, 
the  rules  given  in  the  Hadley- Allen  Grammar  are  appended, 
with  slight  changes. 

a.  An  open  vowel  before  a  close  forms  a  diphthong 
with  it. 

6.  Two  like  vowels  unite  in  the  common  long. 

c.  An  o-sound  absorbs  an  a-  or  an  e-sound  and  becomes  CD. 

d.  If  an  a-  and  an  e-sound  come  together,  the  first  in  order 
absorbs  the  second,  and  becomes  long. 

e.  But  e-e  gives  a ;  c-o,  o-c,  o-o  give  ov. 

f.  A  simple  vowel  before  a  diphthong  is  often  contracted 
with  the  first  vowel  of  the  diphthong :  the  last  vowel,  if  it  is 
i,  becomes  subscript. 

g.  But  c  and  o  are  absorbed  in  01  or  ov  without  further 
change. 

h.  And  o-ci,  o-j;  give  ot ;  a-ov  gives  o>. 

(The  close  vowels  are  c  and  v ;  all  others  are  open.) 


182 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[183— 


g  X 

§  « 

x"*\  * 

^  CO 


CO 

So 


CO 
H 


. 


mi 

1  1  s  i 


c 

1  'II  I 


H 
CL, 


a   3  - 

b    b    b 

"v 


c3 


3  ai 


i 


184] 


CONTRACT  VERBS. 


183 


~  s   </• 

5>^vl»  V3 


S- 


184 


THE  GREEK   OF  XENOPHON. 


[185— 


s 

H 

OQ 


tf 


CQ 


.-    « 


O     * 
CO    02 

^   W 
.*     § 


H 


CO   CO   CO   CO 


•43 


g      CO    CO    CO   CO 

^     co  co  co  co 


CO    CO 


^    M 

1  1J1 

*  331 


">J       O 


**S     <*%  ^-H       *^  /^     '^ 

CO   CO  CO  CO   CO 


^0000 
^»    co  co  co  co 


CO  CO  CO 


186]  CONTRACT   VERBS.  185 

186.  The  interrogative  pronoun  is  rt?,  rl  who? 
which?  what?  Its  accent  never  changes  to  the 
grave,  this  being  the  only  exception  to  the  rule  in 
13.  The  same  word  when  enclitic  is  the  indefinite 
pronoun  some,  any. 

Interrogative.  Indefinite. 

M.    F.  N.  M.    F.  N. 

S.  N.         rk  rl  rfe  rl 

G*  *  f          / 

TIVO<$,  TOV  TIVQS,  TOV 

Df  *  /          / 

rivu  TO)  TIVI*  TCO 

I  '         t 

A.        riva  TI  Tiva  T\ 

D.  N.  A.  Tive  Tive 

G.  D.  rtvow  Tivolv 

P.  N.         TH/e?  riva  TIV&  Tiva 

G.  TIVCOV  TIV&V 

D/  / 

TI<JI  Tiai 

A  I  It  f 

Tiva<$  Tiva  TIVOS  Tiva 


a.  In  the  genitive  and  dative  singular  the  forms  TOV,  ro> 
are  quite  as  common  as  the  longer  forms,  and  must  be  care- 
fully distinguished  from  the  article. 

b.  The  accents  printed  in  the  forms  of  the  indefinite  pro- 
noun are  those  which  the  forms  take  when,  by  the  regular 
rules  for  enclitics  (55),  they  come  to  have  an  accent.     (In 
the  case  of  rts,  rl  the  grave  accent  is  merely  a  conventional 
way  of  distinguishing  these,  when  spoken  of  separately,  from 
the  interrogative  forms.) 


186 


-ov 


THE  GEEEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [187— 

187.   Vocabulary. 

worthy. 

worthy,  think 


eZra,  adv., 


ro9,  -77,  -6v  (fr.  $vva/JLai) ,       able,  capable, 
si,  conj.,  proclitic,  if. 

afterwards,      then, 

secondly. 
,  adv.,  still. 

adv.  (comparative  /xaX-  )  very,  much  (more, 
\ov,  superl.  /j,d\icrTa),  )      most*). 

01  MLYJOOI,  -G>V  M.ecles. 

o  Bevocfrcov,  -wz>ro9  XenopTion. 

0409,   oia,    olov,   rel.   pron.    of  )  of    what    sort,    as 

quality,  )      (Lat.  qualis). 

6fio\ojea)    (0/^0X076-,     o/ioXo- 
777-),     0^0X07770-0),     coy 


7770-a, 


0)^0X0777^77^  (fr.  6/-&0- 


TO  6WyLfca,  -TO9 


>  agree. 


name. 


1  Further  illustrations  of  the  temporal  augment,  and  of 
the  fact  that  the  reduplication  and  augment  have  the  same 
form  if  the  theme  begins  with  a  vowel.     (Cf .  atrco)  173  and 
note.) 

2  6/x.d-A.oyos,  of  the  same  word,  agreeing  (OJJLO-  having  the 
same  root  as  o/xotos  and  English  same))  has  given  us  homolo- 
gous. 


188]  CONTRACT  VERBS.  187 


Treipdco  (ireipa-,  Tre^pa-),  Tret-  A  test,  make  trial  of; 
paa-to,  eirelpcura,  TreireipaKa,  I  (indir.  mid.)  try 
7T€7r€ipdfjiaii  €7T€i,pa0r]v  (fr.  j  for  one's  self,  en- 
7T€Lpd)  J  deavor,  try. 

TrjcrTo?,  -?;,  -6v  faithful. 

o  7roVo9,  -ov  toil,  work. 

(7Tft>Xe-,  7Tft)X^-),  -^crw,  A 

e7ra>X?7/ca,  TreTreo-  >  seK. 
^0rjv 

6  a-vvep<y6s,  -ov  (GVV,  epyov)  helper. 

rlfjidco  (rlfjia-,  rtyu,^-1)  -770-0),  ert-  A 

,    rerifirjKa,   rert^/Lta^,   >  honor. 
ifAijd'rjv  (fr.  rl^irf)  ) 

r/,  inter,  pron.,  ^Aol*  which?  what? 

.    .    ,  «  (  som^,  anv  (-one  or 

t?,  rl,  mdef.  pron.,  '.     *  v 

(      -thing). 

188.   Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 
e'cr^e    (received)    /JLCV   TO    6Vo/ia   a?ro    TOV 
K.vpov  TOV  e%  dpxf)<>  TOU? 


1  f .   6'vofjLa :  this  is  the  form 
used  histead   of  6wfM  hi  the 


Attic    dialect.  —  TOV 
distinguished   by  this   epithet 


1  Enough  examples  have  been  given  to  illustrate  the  fact 
that  verbs  in  -ao>,  -ew,  and  -dw  regularly  have  the  final  vowel 
of  the  theme  long  outside  of  the  present  system  ;  and  here- 
after, for  such  verbs,  only  the  short  form  of  the  theme  will 
be  given,  a  lengthens  to  d  after  p ;  elsewhere  to  rj.  Of  the 
principal  parts  of  vowel  verbs  hereafter  only  the  present  and 
future  will  be  given,  if  the  rest  are  formed  regularly. 


188 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[188— 


Svvacrdat  Se  fyaviv  rj\iov  TO  ovof^a.     r]V  Se  r&v  pera 

Kvpov  TOP  ap^alov  Il€po-a>v  dfycoraros    ap^eiv,   o>9 

5    6fJLo\,o<yeiTcu  VTTO  TTCUVT^V   rwv    IJVODKOTCDV   olos   yv. 

KOI  €<f>i\ovv  avrov,  w  (frrjo-i  Sevoffr&v,  TroXXol  Sia 


ancient  from  the  younger  Cy- 
rus ;  we  call  him  the  Elder,  or 
the  Great.  He  conquered  the 
Medes  about  559  B.C. 

2.  TOV  .  .  .  VIKWVTOS  :  trans- 
late this  attributive  pple.  by  a 
relative  clause.  —  !£  dp x"ns  : 
originally,  first.  In  many  such 
phrases  the  Greek  says  from 
where  we  say  in. 

3  f.  SvvcurOai  :  signifies; 
so  dtvafus  is  used  for  the  force 
or  meaning  of  a  word.  The 
English  order  of  the  clause 
would  be  <pdffl  5£  rb  tivopa  5tiva- 
o-Oai  7J\iov,  but  this  would  be 
colorless,  without  expression, 
in  Greek,  —  as  if  one  should 
in  English  make  the  statement 
in  a  perfectly  monotonous  tone. 
There  is  an  antithesis  (100, 
10,  a)  between  the  source  of 
the  name  and  its  meaning; 
therefore  dvi>acr6ai  is  the  most 
prominent  or  emphasized  word 
of  its  clause,  and  is  for  that 
reason  put  first.  <pda-i  is  im- 
portant grammatically,  and  so 
may  properly  stand  early,  while 
it  was  rather  a  habit  to  put  a 
form  of  <f>r]fjLt  within  the  quota- 
tion which  it  introduces, 


is  the  least  important  word  in 
the  clause,  being  a  mere  repeti- 
tion of  6vojjia  in  the  first  line, 
and  therefore  is  put  last,  in  the 
place  of  least  emphasis  ;  ^Xtov, 
telling  what  the  name  signi- 
fies, is  far  more  important  and 
is  placed  before  it.  —  TWV  .  .  . 
Ilcpo-ttv  :  gen.  of  the  whole, 
with  the  superlative  —  the  same 
usage  as.  in  Latin.  —  jjtcrd  Kv- 
pov :  say  since  Cyrus. 

4.  dJiw-Taros  :    superl.    of 
#£ios,  formed  by  adding  -raros, 
-TJ,  -QV  to  the  stem  of  the  posi- 
tive.   For  the  lengthening  of  o 
of  the  stem  to  a  compare  ved- 
re/oos,  125,  I.,  5. 

5.  TWV     l-yvwKOTwv  :     those 
who  have  discerned.     uW  with 
the  gen.  is  the  regular  way  of 
expressing  the  agent  with  pas- 
sive verbs. 

6.  ws:  a  proclitic  before  an 
enclitic  takes  the  acute  ac- 
cent. —  g€vo<|>a>v :  in  the  An- 
abasis and  elsewhere  Xenophon 
represents  Cyrus  as  a  very  at- 
tractive man,  of  many  virtues 
and  few  faults.  —  8td :  with  the 
ace.  means  because  o/,  on  ac- 
count of:  8ia  TroXXd  for  many 


188] 


CONTRACT  VERBS. 


189 


TroXXa.  Trpcorov  fjuev  yap  Trepl  TTCLVTOS  eVotetro,  el 
VTTOCT^OLTO  (promised)  T6,  ical  TTOLCLV  avro  •  elra  Se 
fjt,d\a  (fravepbs  TJV  Treiptopevos  vlitav  rov?  fjuev  <f>i\ov$ 

€V    TTOltoV   TOt>9    Se    7rO\€/ALOV$    KafCO)?    TTOltoV.       TTlCTTol    IO 

ovv  r)crav  avrS  ol  (f)i\o^  /ecu  eVet/owz/ro  a>9  /-taXtcrra 
e&vvavro  crvvepryol  avrq)  ajaffol  elvai.  eVel  yap 
KOpd?  nva  TTICTTOV  re  /cal  SvvaTov  ovra, 


reasons.  There  is  a  strong 
tendency  in  Greek  to  place 
near  each  other  words  of  allied 
or  of  contrasted  meaning,  or 
two  forms  of  the  same  word  in 
different  constructions,  as  here 
iro\\ol  and  iro\\d.  This  rhe- 
torical device  for  enhancing  the 
force  of  both  words  was  called 
Trapovo/JLCLffld  (Trapd,  tfpo/xa)  paro- 
nomasia. 

7.  irpwrov :  neut.  form  used 
adverbially :  in  the  first  place. 
—  ircpl   iravros   €iroi€iTO :    idio- 
matic phrase  for  considered  it 
of    the    highest     importance; 
<?7r<uetTo,   indir.   mid.,  made  it 
for  himself  beyond  everything 
(irepl  retaining  here  an  earlier 
meaning). 

8.  \nr6<rxoiTO  :  the  form  will 
be  explained  later.  —  KCU  :  not 
and. 

9.  VIKCLV:  surpass. 

10.  €t»  iroiwv :  eft  7roieu>  and 
/ca/cws  TTOLCIV  are  often  thus  con- 
trasted in  the  sense  of  do  good 
to  and  do  harm  to  ;  both  phrases 


take  the  ace.  of  the  person,  not 
the  dat.  as  we  might  expect. 
Here  <f>i\ovs  and  iroXe^tovs  stand 
as  the  objects  of  both  VIKO.V  and 
TroiCjv.  To  hate  and  harm  ene- 
mies was  commonly  considered 
the  duty  of  a  good  man,  as 
much  as  love  for  one's  friends. 
Yet  Sokrates  and  Plato  taught 
the  golden  rule. 

11  f.  «s  .  .  .  €8vvavro :  lit. 
as  they  most  could,  i.e.  to  the 
best  of  their  ability. 

12.  avTw  :  dat.  after  <rvv-  ID 
rwepyol,  which  is  in  the  pred. 
after  elvai  and  agrees  with  the 
subject  of  ^TreipcDvTO. 

13  f .  eyvw  .  .  .  rivet  ovra :  74- 
yv6<TKw  and  other  verbs  of 
knowing,  perceiving,  remem- 
bering, and  their  contraries  take 
a  supplementary  pple.  agreeing 
with  the  object,  where  we  use 
an  infinitive  or  clause.  An 
expression  like  /  saw  him  com- 
ing is  the  nearest  approach  that 
English  has  to  this  very  com- 
mon Greek  construction. 


190 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[188— 


rjglov    avrov    en    /juaXXov    rl/AacrOai,,    KOI 
15  €7roi€L    TWV    a\\<ov     ware    ol   /jLev    ajadol 

€<f>aivovTo  afyovpevoi  eV  rfj  K.vpov  apxy,  ol  Be  tcafcol 

v 
0V. 

T&v  TTOIHOV  7ra>\ov<riv  rjplv  (to  us)  TTCLVTO, 
ol  Oeoi. 


14.  T|JCov  avrdv :  he  deemed 
him  worthy.  —  ert  (idXXov :  put 
with  rl/jid<rOcu.  —  otpxcvra :  pres. 
act.  pple.  of  &PX&  used  as  a 
noun. 

15.  d-ya0wv :  neut. ;  gen.  af- 
ter d^Lov/jievoi.  d^iw  takes  the 
gen.  after  the  analogy  of  its 
primitive,  A£ios.  —  wo-re :  acute 
accent,  not  circumflex,  because 
made  up  of  cJs  proclitic  and  re 
enclitic.  Cf.  w's  <t>rj(ri  6. 

16.  dgiovfjievoi :  supplemen- 
tary pple.  after  tyalvovTo,  agree- 
ing    with     &ya.6oL      tyalvovro 
a£iov/ju-voi  is  equivalent  to  <f>ave- 
pol  fjffav  d%iovjjt£voi :  cf .  174, 1.,  10 
and  note.  —  dpxfj :  province. 

17.  ov:  a  proclitic  at  the 


end  of  a  clause  takes  the  acute 
accent,  since  there  is  nothing 
for  it  to  '  lean  upon.' 

18.  irdvttv :  price  is  denoted 
by  the  gen.  —  rd-ydO* :  for  rd 
ayaOd.  The  running  together 
of  a  final  and  a  following  initial 
vowel  is  called  crasis  (icpdcris 
from  Kepdwviu  mix).  The  ac- 
cent of  dyaBd  is  thrown  back 
on  the  penult  because  the  ac- 
cented a  is  elided.  Oxytone 
prepositions  and  conjunctions 
lose  their  accent  in  elision ; 
other  oxytone  words  throw  it 
back  on  the  penult.  The  sen- 
tence is  a  line  (trochaic  tetra- 
meter) from  Epicharmos  (about 
480  B.C.). 


II.  Translate  into  Greek. 


When  Xerxes  was  attempting  to   enslave   the 
Greeks,  the  Athenians,  daring  to  enter  into  battle 


2  f.  daring :  the  Greek 
would  probably  use  an  aor. 
pple.  instead  of  a  present. — 


enter  into  battle  with:  cf. 
174,  II.,  18,  take  their  place  in 
battle,  and  note. 


188] 


CONTRACT  VERBS. 


191 


with  him,  were  victorious  with  the  help  of  the 
gods.  —  In  war  the  possessions  of  the  vanquished 
all  belong  to  the  victors.  —  Those  who  try  to  do  5 
good  to  others  are  most  loved  by  others.  —  Those 
who  recognize  what  sort  of  a  man  Cyrus  was  all 
agree  that  he  was  more  worthy  to  be  loved  than 
his  brother ;  but  Artaxerxes  became  king,  accord- 
ing to  the  law  of  the  Persians,  because  of  his  being  10 
the  elder.  —  When  we  became  aware  that  Cyrus 
honored  faithful  helpers  more  than  the  king  did, 
we  kept  trying,  as  much  as  we  could,  to  do  such 
things  as  we  thought  Cyrus  wished.  —  Who,  pray, 


3.  with  the  help  of :  <rvv. 

4.  the  possessions :  rd  w. 

the  gen. 

5.  belong  to:   lit.  are  of; 
but  a  neut.  pi.  subject  generally 
takes  the  verb  in  the  sing. — 
the  victors:    pres.  act.  pple. 
—  Those  -who  try :  attributive 
pple. 

6  f .  by  others :  virt>  w.  the 
gen.  —  Those  who  recognize, 
etc. :  lit.,  those  recognizing  Cy- 
rus, of  what  sort  he  was. 

8.  more  worthy:  d£i6-Te- 
pos,  like  veti-repos.  —  than :  ex- 
pressed by  putting  the  word 
for  brother  in  the  gen.;  cf. 
T&V  TroXXwv  174,  I.,  11  and 
note. 

10.  because  of  his  be- 
ing :  did  rb  Trpefffivrepov  afobv 


elvat.  elvai  is  the  inf.  of  the 
verb  meaning  to  be,  aMv  is 
its  subject,  the  whole  inf. 
clause  is  in  the  ace.  governed 
by  did. 

11  f .  became  aware :  one 
word  in  Greek.  —  that  Cyrus 
honored :  supplementary  pple.; 
lit.  became  aware  of  Cyrus  hon- 
oring. 

12.  than  the  king:  may 
be  expressed  by  the  gen.  Or 
to  avoid  all  ambiguity  we  may 
use  here  TJ  (than)  followed 
by  the  nom.  Omit  did  in 
Greek. 

13  f .  such  things  as :  use 
the  neut.  pi.  of  ofos,  omitting 
the  antecedent.  —  wished :  inf. 

14.  pray :  the  effect  of  this 
in  making  the  interrogative 


192 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


when  king,  does  not  think  it  fitting  that  he  should 
be  honored  more  than  even  the  best  of  those 
who  are  not  kings  ?  —  Sokrates  tried  most  of 
all  men  to  be  a  good  citizen  and  to  know  him- 
self. 


prominent  is  given  in  Greek  by 
the  enclitic  TTOT£  (Compare 
the  vulgar  English  expression, 
Who  ever  can  it  be  ?) 

15  f .  -when  king :  circum- 
stantial pple.  denoting  time ; 
lit.  being  king,  but  in  reverse 


order,  because  king  is  the  more 
important  word.  —  that  he 
should  be  honored :  inf. 

16  f .  even  :  KO.L  —  those 
who  are  not  :  attributive 
pple. ;  neg.  ^  ;  cf.  rods  ^  6vva- 
174,  I.,  19  and  note. 


LIQUID  VERBS. 

189.  The  letters  X,  /*,  v,  p  are  called  liquids,  because  their 
sound  is  smooth  and  easily  prolonged.     The  combination  of 
a  liquid  with  a  following  &  was  avoided  by  the  Greeks.   This 
produced  changes  in  the  future  and  first  aorist  systems  of 
liquid  verbs  (that  is,  of  verbs  whose  themes  end  in  a  liquid), 
because  the   ordinary  tense   suffixes   -<r%-   and    -<ra  begin 
with  o-. 

190.  Liquid  verbs  in  the  future  insert  e  before 
the  tense  suffix  -<r%- ;  a  then  drops  out  (as  it  usu- 
ally does  between  two  vowels) ;  this   leaves  -€%- 
as  the  future  tense  suffix  of  liquid  verbs ;  then  the 
same  contractions  are  made  as  in  the  present  sys- 
tem of  (f)i\€Q)  (compare  179  and  180).     Thus  the 
future  of  crre\\o)  (crreX-)  send  is  (o-reXew)  crreXco, 
etc.,  as  follows : 


192]  LIQUID   VERBS. 

191.  Future  System  of  o-reXXeo  (0-reX-)  send 
INDICATIVE. 


193 


Active. 

Middle. 

S.  1 

o-reXw 

<TT€\OV/JiCU 

2 

o-reXefc 

trreX^,  or  -el 

3 

0-reXei 

<TT€\elrat, 

D.  2 

(7T€\€ITOV 

0-T€\€l(T00V 

3 

areKelrov 

tnekelcrOov 

P.  1 

<7T€\OV/Ji€V 

<TT€\OV/Ji€0a 

2 

(TT€\€lr€ 

o-T€\el(r0€ 

3 

(7T€\OV<n, 

<TT€\OVVTat, 

INFINITIVE. 


Active. 


Middle. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Active. 


crreXovv 


Middle. 


-ov 


192.  In  the  first  aorist  liquid  verbs  drop  o-  and 
lengthen  the  theme  vowel ;  a  becomes  a  after  e,  t,, 
p,  elsewhere  77;  e  becomes  «.  Otherwise  the  in- 
flection is  like  e\vara. 


194 


THE  GEEEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[193- 


193,  First  Aorist  System  of  o-reXXw  (o-reX-). 
INDICATIVE. 


Active. 

Middle. 

S.  1 

€-O"T€l\-a 

6-0-T€L\-d-MV 

2 

e-o-retX-a-? 

€-(TT€i\rO) 

3 

e-crre^X-e 

e-o-reiX-a-ro 

D.  2 

€-(TT€i\-a-TOV 

€~O"T€i\rCi"'O'uOV 

3 

€-o-T6i\-d-rrjv 

6~O"T€AX~Cl~O"6'77  V 

P.  1 

€-(TT€L\-a-/JL€V 

€-o-T€i\-d-pe0a 

2 

€-(TT€i\-a-T€ 

€"CT  T€  1  X~ft-0"  (/  € 

3 

t-*™\-a-v 

€-0-T€l\-a-VTO 

INFINITIVE. 

Active. 


Middle. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Active. 


crr6?X-a-z/ 


Middle. 


-77,  -ov 


SECOND  PASSIVE  SYSTEM. 
194,   Some  verbs  form  their  passive  system  with 
the  passive  suffix  -77-  (-e-)  instead  of  -0rj-  (-0e-)  ; 
this  formation  is  called  the  second  passive  instead 


195] 


SECOND  PASSIVE  SYSTEM. 


195 


of  the  first  passive.  As  in  the  first  passive,  -??-  is 
used  before  a  single  consonant,  elsewhere  -e-;  in 
every  respect  the  inflection  is  like  that  of  the  first 
passive,  except  for  the  omission  of  0;  and  the 
meaning  is  the  same. 

195.    Second  Passive    System   of  <7Te'XXa>    (o-reX-, 


INDICATIVE. 


S.  1 
2 
3 

D.  2 
3 

P.  1 
2 
3 


Aorist. 


Future. 


<7TaX-i7-cr?7,  or  -et, 


INFINITIVE. 


Aorist. 


Future. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Aorist. 


o-raX-e/9) 


Future. 


196 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[196— 


a.  The  change  of  the  theme  oreA-  to  orctA-  is  of  the  same 
nature  as  those  referred  to  in  87,  b.  The  sounds  a,  €,  o  are 
nearly  related,  and  often  pass  into  one  another  in  the  inflec- 
tion and  derivation  of  words. 

The  coming  together  of  consonants  often  produces 
changes.  Some  of  the  commonest  are  seen  in  the 

196,    Perfect   Middle    System    of   o-reXXw    (o-reX-, 

0-raX-). 
INDICATIVE. 


Perfect  Mid.  (Pass.). 

Pluperfect  Mid.  (Pass.). 

S.  1 

e-<7TaX-/iat 

e-ard\-Mv 

2 

6-crraX-crat 

e-ardX-a-o 

3 

e-<7raX-T<u 

e-o-raX-TO 

D.  2 

e-(TTO\-00V 

€-(TTa\-00V 

3 

e-(na\-6ov 

€-(TTd\-0<nV 

P.  1 

t-(TTd\-/JLe0a 

€-a-rd\-/iJL€0a 

2 

e-crrak-Oe 

€-o-Ta\-0e 

3 

€~(7TCL\-fJL€VOt>  €LO"L 

e-(TTa\-fJi€VOi,  rjaav 

INFINITIVE. 


PARTICIPLE. 


e-ardX-Ocu 


e-(7TaX-/4ei>09,  -77,  -ov 


a.  The  reduplication  omits  the  consonant  and 
consists  of  e-  only,  if  the  theme  begins  with  two 


197]  SECOND  PASSIVE  SYSTEM.  197 

consonants ,  a  double  consonant  (£,  i/r,  £),  or  p.  In 
such  cases  the  pluperfect  is  not  usually  aug- 
mented. (Compare  152,  note  1.) 

b.  When  the  theme  ends  in  a  consonant,  the 
addition  of  the  endings  -<70oz/,  -adyv,  -c70e,  -&0ai, 
-VTCLI,  and  -I/TO  produced  combinations  difficult  for 
the  Greek  to  pronounce.  Hence 

(1)  a  between  two  consonants  is  dropped. 

(2)  Consonant  themes  in  the  perfect  and  pluper- 
fect middle  indicative  third  plural  use  the  perfect 
middle  participle  with  ela-l  they  are  and  fj<rav  they 
were. 

197.  The  verb  orcAAw  illustrates  also  another  way  of 
forming  the  present  stem,  and  it  is  now  time  to  group 
together  the  present  formations  thus  far  introduced.  It  is 
convenient  to  classify  verbs  in  the  present  system  according 
to  the  way  of  forming  the  stem  from  the  theme. 

a.  Variable    Vowel    Class.  —  This   includes   all 
verbs  which  form  the  present  stem  by  adding  the 
suffix  -%-  to  the  simple  theme :  as  \vco  (Xu-),  pres- 
ent stem  \v%-.     So  most  of  the  verbs  whose  inflec- 
tion has  been  described. 

b.  Iota  Class.  —  This  includes  all  verbs  which 
form  the  present  stem  by  adding  the  suffix  -i%-  to 
the  theme.      This  suffix  always  produces  sound 
changes.      X  with  i  produces  XX:   thus  <7TeX-*%- 
gives  (TTe\\%-  for  the  present  stem,  o-reXXo)  for  the 
present  indicative  active  first  singular.     (Compare 

and  Latin  alius.) 


198  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [197— 

c.  Inceptive    Class.  —  This    includes    all   verbs 
which  form  the  present  stem  by  adding  -O-K%-  to 
the  theme,  with  or  without  reduplication :  as  yi- 
<yv(i)-a-K(o   (jyvo-,  7^0)-),   present   stem    <yi-yva)-o-K%-. 
The  class  is  so  named  because  some  verbs  belong- 
ing to  it  have  the  sense  of  beginning  or  becoming 
(Latin  incipio,  begin).     Thus  ycyvGoo-Kco  means  be- 
gin to  know,  come  to  a  knowledge  of  something,  dis- 
cern, etc. 

d.  Root  Class.  —  This  includes  all  verbs  in  which 
the  theme  itself,  with  or  without  reduplication, 
but  without  any  tense  suffix,  serves  as  the  present 
stem:  as  i-o-rrj-fjn  (crra-,  CTTT;-),  present  stem  lara-, 
larij".     Such  presents  must  of  course  be  of  the 
/u-form  (121). 

e.  Other  classes  will  be  noticed  later.     Observe  that  this 
classification  has  reference  properly  to  the  present  system  only. 
The  present  suffixes  -%-,  -i%-,  -O-K%-,  are  parallel  with  the 
future  suffixes  -0-%-  and  -e%-,  the  first  aorist  suffix  -era-  or  -a-, 
the  perfect  suffix  -/ca-  and  pluperfect  suffix  -KT/-,  -KCI-,  -KC-,  and 
the  passive  suffixes --ftp-  (-0e-)  and  -rj-  (-e-).     So  the  names 
variable  vowel  class,  iota  class,  inceptive  class,  root  class,  etc., 
for  the  present  system,  are  parallel  with  the  names  liquid 
future,  first  aorist,  /xt-aorist,  liquid  aorist,  first  and  second 
passive,  etc.     They  are  merely  ways  of  naming  the  manner 
in  which  each  system  is  formed  from  the  theme.     The  theme, 
not  the  present  indicative,  is  to  be  thought  of  as  the  basis  of 
every  verb  form. 

The  following  synopsis  gives  a  view  of  the  formation  of 
every  system  of 


198] 


SECOND  PASSIVE  SYSTEM. 


199 


•SB.    g.      -SB 

0>     '  •  CD     * 


u 


II!  i 


?- 


$ 

M 

OQ 

H 
3 

s?  - 

3    o 


H      H 

»r 


o    2, 
?  ^ 

GC    q 

11 


CO 


200  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 

SECOND  AORIST. 


[199— 


199.  Another  liquid  verb  of  the  iota  class,  /3aXX&> 
08aA-),  illustrates  the  formation  of  the  second  aor- 
ist  active  and  middle.  The  meaning  is  the  same 
as  that  of  the  first  aorist. 

200.  Second  Aorist  System  of  /3aXXo>  (/3aX-)  throw. 
INDICATIVE. 


Active. 

Middle. 

S.  1 

e-pa\-OT> 

e-pa\-6-fJLr)V 

2 
3 

e-/3aX-e-9 
e-/3aX-e 

e-/3aX-ou 
.    e-ySaX-e-ro 

D.  2 
3 

!-/3aX-e-roz> 

€-/3d\-6-(700V 

P.  1 

2 
3 

€-/3d\,-0-/JL€V 

e-/3aX-e-re 
e-/3a\-o-v 

€-/3d\-€-(T0€ 
€-/3d\-0-VTO 

INFINITIVE. 


Active. 


Middle. 
/3a\-e-cr0ai, 


PARTICIPLES. 


Active. 


-v 


Middle. 


/3aX-o-/^ez>09,  -77,  -oi/ 


200]  SECOND  AORIST.  201 

a.  The   theme   always   appears   in  its  simplest 
form. 

b.  The  tense  suffix  is  the  variable  vowel  -%-. 

c.  The  infinitive  and  participle  accent  the  end  of 
the  stem,  i.e.  the  variable  vowel;   fta\elv  is   for 
/3a\-e-€v ;  for  f3a\6p,evo<;  this  gives  the  same  accent 
as  the  ordinary  rule. 

d.  There  is  evidently  a  close  resemblance  between  this 
system  and  the  imperfect,  infinitive,  and  participle  of  the 
present  system  of  the  co-form,  since  the  augment  and  end- 
ings are  the  same,  and  the  tense  stem  of  each  system  ends 
in  the  variable  vowel.     But  it  will  always  be  found  that  the 
tense  stems  of  the  two  systems  differ  in  some  way.     Thus  in 
/&xXXa>  the  present  tense  suffix  is  -6%-,  which  gives  XX  in  the 
present  stem  ^oXX%-,  while  the  theme,  and  therefore  the 
second  aorist,  has  but  one  X.     The  accent  of  the  infinitive 
and  of  the  active  participle  is  also  different. 

The  synopsis  on  the  following  page  gives  a  view  of 
/SoXXw  throughout.  In  the  perfect  and  passive  systems  the 
theme  becomes  ^8X77-  by  transposition  and  lengthening. 

NOTE.  —  Care  should  be  taken  to  distinguish  in  pronuncia- 
tion between  the  forms  with  one  X  and  those  with  XX ;  compare 
p.  119,  Note. 


202 


THE  GEEEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


p 

H 


I 


•« 


S 


II 


Hi 


^ 

w  <3 

44 


*     ^< 


« 

W 

PH 


eg.  eg.  eg. 


5   r- 

ci  vi 
vu     0 


i  H  1 


g   02.  02.  02.  02. 
»<5  «vw 


"S    'S 


QQ 


H     • 


> 


CQ. 


" 


SECOND  PERFECT. 


203 


SECOKD  PERFECT. 

202.  The  second  perfect  differs  from  the  first 
perfect  only  by  the  omission  of  /e,  so  that  the  tense 
suffixes  are  -a-  in  the  perfect  indicative,  -?;-,  -e^-,  -e- 
in  the  pluperfect,  -e-  in  the  infinitive,  -or-  in  the 
participle.  The  theme  often  shows  a  change  of 
vowel.  Thus  yez/-,  the  theme  of  yiyvopai,  becomes 
yov-. 

203.   Second  Perfect  System  of  ylyvo/j,ai  (761*-,  701;-) 
become. 

INDICATIVE. 


Perfect. 

Pluperfect. 

S.  1 

ye-yov-a 

6-ye-ydiMj,  or  -ei-v 

2 

ye-yov-a-s 

e-ye-yov-rj-s,  or  -et-9 

3 

76-70  1/-6 

e-ye-ydv-et, 

D.  2 

ye-yov-a-rov 

€-ye-yov-6t,-Tov 

3 

ye-ydv-a-rov 

e-ye-yov-eL-Trjv 

P.  1 

ye-yov-a-fjiev 

t-rye-ytp-ec-fJieV 

2 

ye-yov-a-re 

z-ye-yov-ec-re 

3 

ye-yov-da'i 

e-ye-ydv-e-aav 

INFINITIVE. 


PARTICIPLE. 


ye-yov-e-vat, 


76-701^605,  ye-yov-vla, 


204  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [204— 

a.  The  present  belongs  to  the  variable  vowel 
class  ;  ylyvofjiai,  is  for  ryi-yev-o-/jicu,  e  being  cut  out. 
In  the  future  the  theme  becomes  yevrj-,  giving 
yevtf-ao-fjiai,  (cf.  ftovXija-ofjiat,  from  ^ovKofJuaC).  There 
is  also  a  perfect  middle  ry€-yevr)-/jiai  with  the  same 
form  of  the  theme  ;  there  is  no  difference  in  mean- 
ing between  the  perfect  active  and  the  perfect 
middle  of  this  verb.  The  aorist  is  of  the  second 
form, 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

204.  The  usual  ending  of  the  comparative  de- 
gree is  -re/009,  -repd,  -repov  (stem  -repo-)  ;  of  the 
superlative,  -raros,  -rarrj^  -rarov  (stem  -raro-). 
These  endings  are  applied  to  the  masculine  stem 
of  the  positive.  Adjectives  in  -05  with  short  penult 
lengthen  -o-  to  -&>-.  Thus  : 

POSITIVE.  COMPARATIVE.  SUPERLATIVE. 


young  vec-Tepos,  -a,  -ov    veco-raro^  -77,  -ov 

worthy  a^oo-re/w 

o-o</>o'-5  wise  o-o<£o)-Tep09 

6p06-?  upright  6p66-T€po<t  opOo-raros 

)1  old  Trpeo-pv-repos 


1  The  positive  is  not  used  in  Attic  prose  in  this  sense, 
though  the  plural  is  common  in  the  derived  sense  of  ambas- 
sadors. 


206]  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES.  205 

205.  A  less  frequent  ending  of  the  comparative 
is  -Zeal/,  -lov  (stem  -lov-')  ;  of  the  superlative,  -£(7x09, 
-icrrr),  -KTTOV  (stem  -40-To-).  These  endings  appear 
in  a  few  very  common  words,  some  of  which  are 
irregular.  Thus  : 

POSITIVE.  COMPARATIVE.  SUPERLATIVE. 

bad  KdKlCDV  WOTS6  KCLKIVTO*  WOTSt 

os  good      fteXrf&v  better  ft€\Ti<7TO<;  best 


or  a/jL€ivo)v.OidfjL€mQ)v)  apiaro? 
or 


kos  beautiful  /ca\\£cov 

206,   Comparatives  in  -wv  are  declined  like 

better. 


M.  F. 
S.  N.  /3eXTto>i/ 

G.  ySeXrf  01^09 

D. 

A.  /SeXrfoj/a,  ^e\rtco 

V. 


D.N.A.V. 

Gr.  D.  /3e\Tlbv-oiv 

P.  N.  V. 


A. 


206  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [207— 

a.  The  forms  in  -ov  have  recessive  accent.  The  shorter 
forms  in  the  accusative  singular  and  nominative  and  accusa- 
tive plural  are  contracted  forms  from  a  different  stem  in 
-co--,  which  loses  o~  between  two  vowels. 

207.   Vocabulary. 

dyrye\\Q)1  (a^eX-),  0776X0),  777-  ^ 

rjyj€\fca,     tfyyeXjuu,  >  announce,  report. 
) 

proclaim;     mid.2 
7eX«,  etc.,  }       offer,  promise. 

al  'Adrjvai,  -&v  Athens. 

(ama-),  alnaaQ^ai,  )  blame,  find  fault 

etc.,  reg.,  )       with. 

f          "  (  Boiotian  or  Boeo- 

0  DOICOTOS,  -OV 

I      tian. 

01  AeX^ot7,  -&v  Delphi. 
e/e/3aXXft>   (l/c  +  /8aX-),   €Kf3a\S>,\ 

e%efia\ov,   €icpefi\r)Ka,  e/cySe-  >  cast  out,  drive  out. 

) 


r)\6ov,  e\tj\v 


1  The  XX  of  the  pres.  mark  it  as  belonging  to  the  iota 
class,  the  pres.  stem  being  dyyeXX%-  for  dyycX-t%. 

2  Lit.  announce  to  (another)  from  one's  self.     This  use,  a 
little  different  both  from  the  dir.  and  from  the  indir.  mid., 
is  called  the  subjective  mid. 

8  The  pres.  belongs  to  the  variable  vowel  class,  but  the 
2d  aor.  and  perf.  are  from  a  different  theme.     The  2d  aor. 


207]  COMPARISON   OF  ADJECTIVES.  207 


epcordco     (epcara-1),     ep&>rr;<7fc>,  ^ 

etc.,  reg.  ;  also  2d  aor.  77/70-  >ask  (a  question). 
/*?7i>  (e/?-1),  dep., 

Kpivo)     {icpiv-?     fcpi>-)i     fcpivG),  \  (1)  separate,  pick 
eicplva,      fce/cpL/ca,     KeKpt^ai,  V      out; 
ercpldrjv  )  (2)  decide. 

(a?ro  +  Kpiv-,  Kpi>-),  ^ 
ii    aTre/cplvafjujv,   >  answer,  reply. 
mid.  dep.,  ) 

<  .,  (  (1)  guest  or  A0s£; 

o  f  ei/09,  -ou  <   ,ox          ,  *  .      ,o 

(  (2)  guest-friend.3 

ovT€  .  .  .  oiire4  neither  .  .  .  nor. 

rj  Trarp/9,  -tSo?  (fr.  Trarrjp)  fatherland. 


inf.  and  pple.  are  cAfletv,  cX^wv.  In  the  perf.  we  have  an- 
other form  of  reduplication,  called  the  Attic  reduplication. 
This  consists  in  prefixing  the  initial  vowel  and  following 
consonant;  the  vowel  of  the  second  syllable  is  then  length- 
ened :  €\-rj\vO-  from  eAv#-.  The  plup.  in  such  verbs  is  not 
augmented.  The  future  of  this  verb  is  not  used  in  Attic 
prose. 

1  Ipayra-  is  derived  from  the  shorter  form  cp-.    The  2d  aor. 
inf.  and  pple.  are  IptcrOcu  and  €po/>t€vos. 

2  Pres.  of  the  iota  class  ;   Kptv-t%-,  by  transposition  of  v 
and  i  with   contraction  of   i-i  to  I,  becomes  Kplv%-.     The 
lengthening  in  the  liquid  1st  aor.  is  regular.     The  perf.  and 
pass,  employ  the  shorter  theme  Kpi-. 

3  Private  hospitality  filled  a  great  place  in  ancient  Greek 
life.     If  one  person  was  entertained  in  a  foreign  city  by  an- 
other, this  act   of  hospitality  formed   a  tie  of  friendship 
between  host  and  guest  and  between  their  families.     Per- 
sons in  this  relation  were  called  £ei>oi  to  each  other. 

4  For  the  accent  cf.  wore,  188,  I.,  15,  note. 


208  TBE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [208— 

Pisidians. 
\  make  war. 


o 


etc.,  reg., 
av/Ji7ro\€/Ji€a)      (aw  +  TroXe^e-),  *\ 

avjjL7ro\€fjujo'a>i    (rvveTroXe/jMy-  V  make  war  with. 

o-a,  etc.,  reg.,  J 

97  o-TpaTia,  -a$l  army. 

•VO)     (VTTO  +  O7TT6U-)     V7TO- 

VTTCx)-    v 

•  suspect. 


V7TCD- 


j,  impersonal  verb, 


(  ought  (Lat.  opor- 
\      te£). 


208.  Exercises. 
I.  How  Xenophon  joined  the  expedition  of  Cyrus. 

Tlapijv  ev  rfj  Kvpov  arparta  tlevocfrtov  1 A.6r)valo<; , 
ovre  dp%(0v  ovre  crrparLcorr)^  &v,  aXXa  Tlpolfevds  rt? 
Bo^o>T09  yrrjcrev  avrov  eXdeiv,  %evo<$  <bv  ap^alo?. 
€7rrjyj€i\aro  Se  ITpo^e^o?  <j>l\ov  avrov  TLvpw  TTOITJ- 


1.  Ilapfjv  :     was    present; 
compound  of  irapd  and  ^v  was. 

2.  apxwv:  j)ple.  used  as  a 
noun,   in  the  pred.   after  wv. 
Cf.   Apxovra  188,   I.,  14.  —  TIS  : 
a  certain. 

3.  avr6v:  cf.  a^roi/s  174,  I., 
2  and  note.     The  second  obj. 


is  here  t\0eTv.  Or  one  may  re- 
gard avrbv  as  the  subj.  of  ^X- 
Beiv. 

4.  <|>CXov :  second  object  of 
Troi^ff-eip,  put  first  in  its  clause 
for  emphasis.  The  subject  of 
Tronri<T€iv  is  not  expressed,  be- 
cause it  is  the  same  as  the 


1  Cf .  OT/DCITOS,  (TTpaTrjyos,  OT/oanoJTTjs, 


208] 


COMPAB1SON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


209 


TT?    5 


crew,    ov    avros    ecj>rj    Kpeirra)    eavra)    oizcrQai 
7rar/)/So9.      6  Se  Hez/o<£&>z>  avayvovs   rrjv 

<7VfJL/3oV\€V€Tai,  ^Q)KpaT€L  *    KOI  6  ^CO/Cpdrr)?  V7T07TT€V- 

rrjv  TTO\IV  alnacrecrdai  n  *3<€Vo<f)(*)VTa  el  K.vpG) 
<y€vtfcr€Tai)  Sta  TO  Kvpov  roZ?  Aa/ceSatfJLovtoi,? 
€7rl    ra?    'Adtyittfe    <7VjjL7ro\€fjirjo-ai,)   crvfi^ovXevei    rcS  10 
€\66vTa  et?   AeX0ov9  epwrav  rov  Oebv 


subject  of  the  principal  verb. 
(This  is  contrary  to  the  rule  in 
Latin. ) 

5.  avr6s :  in  apposition  with 
the  subject  of  €$77,  but  is  to 
be    connected    in    translation 
with  ofecrflcu.  —  Kpei-rrw  :  in  the 
sense  of  more  useful.    KpetrTuv 
and  KpdTio-Tos  differ  in  meaning 
somewhat  from  diielvwv,  &pi<r- 
ros  and  from  jSeXrfwi/,  jSArttrros. 
The   first  pair  are  connected 
with  Kpdros  strength,  and  often 
mean    stronger,    strongest.  — 
ccump:    dat.    of   interest  with 
KpelTTO) ;  for  himself. 

6.  irarpCSos:   gen.  of  com- 
parison. —  6  g€vo<|>a>v :  the  ar- 
ticle is  often  used  with  proper 
names  in  Greek,  sometimes  to 
mark  the  person  as  one  already 
mentioned ;  it  tends  to  give  a 
familiar    conversational    tone, 
and  is  less  likely  ta  be  used  in 
a  dignified  or  stately  style. 

8.  TI  :  cognate  ace.  with 
atTLao-eo-dai ;  would  blame  X. 
somewhat. 


9.  •y€v^<r€T<u :  as  the  whole 
narrative  refers  to  past  time, 
we  must  say  should  become, 
although  the  Greek  can  use  the 
fut.  ind.,  which  would  be  used 
in  the  direct  form :  the  city  will 
blame  you  if  you  (shall)  become. 

9  f.    Sid  TO  ...  crvfnroXefAfj- 

oreu:  another  inf.  clause  used 
as  a  noun,  marked  by  TO  as 
being  in  the  ace.  Within  the 
clause  Kvpoif  is  the  subject.  We 
should  say  on  account  of  the 
fact  that  (or  more  simply,  be- 
cause) Cyrus,  etc. 

11.  €\66vTa  :  agrees  with 
the  understood  subj.  of  tpwrav. 
—  Delphi  was  the  seat  of  the 
most  famous  oracle  of  ancient 
times.  It  was  believed  that 
Apollo  answered  the  questions 
put  to  him,  by  inspiring  the 
priestess,  who  seated  herself 
upon  a  tripod  and  submitted 
to  the  intoxicating  influence  of 
a  gas  that  came  from  a  chasm 
in  the  earth.  The  priests  took 
down  the  response  which  she 


210 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[208— 


I 


7T6/H     T?79     OOOV.        €\.tfO)V     O€     O     £3€ 

'ATroXXo)  rlvt  6e&v  dvcov  /cdXX.iO'Ta  Kai  dpiara 
Trotijaerai,  rrjv  6B6v  •  /cal  Xeyet  aura)  'ATroXXw^  6eol$ 
15  0*9  %pr)  Oveiv.  eirel  Be  TraKiv  fj\6ev,  jjyyet\ev  TO* 
^cofcpdrei,  a  6  Oebs  dTre/cptvaro.  6  8'  ^TLCLTO  avrov 
OTI  ov  Trp&rov  r)pd>ra  el  fieKrlov  e<m  arparev- 
ecrffat,  77  ov.  'Evrel  Se  ovrws  ijpov,  OVTCOS,  e(f>rj^ 

uttered  under  this  influence, 
and  gave  the  response  to  the 
worshiper  in  hexameter  verse. 

12.  68ov :  here  journey. 

13.  ' AiroXXw  :  like  compar- 
atives in  -iwv,  'A7T6XXWV  has  in 


the   ace.   both  'A 
'A7r6XXw.  —  6vwv  : 


and 
the  circum- 


stantial pple.,  like  the  pple.  in 
Latin,  may  imply  various  re- 
lations, such  as  time,  manner, 
means,  a  condition,  etc.  Here 
we  should  say  by  sacrificing,  em- 
ploying our  verbal  noun  in  -ing 


translate  here  in  the  most  suc- 
cessful and  best  way. 

14.  iroi-fjo-cTcu :  indir.  mid. 
—  0€ots :  for  6eots,  attracted  to 
the  case  of  the  rel.  which  stands 
next  to  it. 

16.  6  84 :  beginning  a  clause 
in  this  way  and  not  followed 
by  a  noun  to  which  it  belongs, 
6  is  a  demonstrative  pron.,  usu- 
ally implying  a  change  of  sub- 
ject from  the  previous  clause 
or  sentence ;  but  he,  meaning 
Sokrates.  Cf.  r&  tfv  .  .  .  ™  5^ 


with  a  prep,  to  mark  plainly  1 174,  I.,  12  and  note, 
the  idea  of  means,  which  the  I       17.  &ri :   because,  a  mean- 
Greek  pple.  merely  suggests.  —  i  ing  about  as  common  as  that ; 
KoLXXwrra,   apio-ra :    the  neut.  j  the  two  are  closely  connected, 
pi.  ace.  of  superlative  adjs.  is  j  as  may  be  seen  in  Latin  quod, 


regularly  used  as  the  superla- 
tive adv.  For  the  comparative 
adv.  is  regularly  used  the  neut. 
sing.  ace.  of  the  comparative 
adj.  Thus  the  adv.  from  /caX6s 
is  compared  /caXws,  /cdXXto*/,  /cdX- 
Xicrra  ;  of  &ya06v,  eft  (which  is 
independent  of  dya06s),  &f*eivov, 
&PHTTO.,  or  pt\Ti6v,  /S^Xrto-ra,  or 
KpdTHTTa.  We  might 


and  in  such  English  sentences 
as  "  Her  eyes  are  mad  that  they 
have  wept  till  now"  (Shak. 
Yen.  and  Ad.  1062);  or  "I  am 
sorry  that  you  are  ill." — cl: 
whether.  We  often  use  if  in 
this  sense,  but  if  would  hardly 
be  suitable  here. 

18.  6-ircC :  since.    The  causal 
meaning  is  a  development  from 


COMPARISON   OF  ADJECTIVES. 


211 


irotelv  0)9  o  0609  €\€j6V.     6  Be  Eevocftcov 
€pX€rat/  7rapQ'  IZ-vpov  /cal  eyevero  <£tXo9  avrq).     /cal  20 
Hpo!;€vov  T€  /cal  JLvpov  alrovvrtov   earparevero  &>9 
€7rl  Hl(7iSdsi  01)9  e(f>rj  Ku/009  j3ov\€(r6ai  e/c/3a\eiv  e/c 

T?79  77/9- 


the  temporal,  as  in  Latin  cum 
and  English  since. 

19.  0vcrdfj.€vos :  indir.  mid., 
have  sacrifice  offered  for  one's 
self,  used  especially,  as  here, 
of  taking  the  omens  in  sacri- 
fice. 

20.  irapd:    takes  the  ace. 
after  verbs  of  motion ;  to  Cyrus. 

21.  npo^'vov  . .  .  O.ITOVVTCOV  : 

something  of  cause  is  here  im- 


plied in  the  gen.  abs.  —  ws : 
even  in  a  literal  translation  of 
the  phrase  it  is  clear  that  cJs 
implies  that  it  was  Xenophori*s 
belief  that  the  expedition  was 
against  the  Pisidians.  This  is 
a  use  of  ws  which  has  a  wide 
development,  especially  with 
pples. 

23.  -yf]s:  land,  as  the  con- 
text shows. 


U.   Translate  into  Greek. 

Xenophon  became  a  friend  of  Sokrates  while 
still  a  young  man.  —  Sokrates  often  advised  his 
friends  to  go  to  Delphi  and  inquire  of  Apollo, 
when  they  were  about  to  do  something,  whether  it 
was  better  to  do  it  or  not.  —  A  certain  friend  of 
the  philosopher,  going  once  to  Delphi,  asked  the 


1  f .  of  Sokrates :  use  the 
dat.  SwKpdrei.  —  while  still, 
etc. :  lit.  being  still  young,  but 
in  reverse  order,  still  young 
being. 

3.  to  go  .  .  .  and :  best  ex- 
pressed by  a  circumstantial 
pple.  (aor.),  which  may  agree 


with  the  word  for  friends  or 
with  the  understood  subject  of 
the  inf. 

4  f.  whether  it  was:  lit. 
if  it  icas.  Greek  can  retain 
here  the  tense  and  mode  of  the 
dir.  form.  So  in  7,  if  any  one 
was. 


212 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[209— 


god  if  any  one  was  wiser  than  Sokrates;  and  Apollo 
answered  that  Sokrates  was  the  wisest  of  mankind. 
He,  however,  declared  that  he  did  not  know  what 

10  Apollo  meant.  —  The  Greeks  thought  that  Apollo 
replied  to  his  worshipers  when  they  asked  him 
what  they  ought  to  do.  —  Neither  Xenophon  nor 
Proxenos  supposed  that  Cyrus  was  going  against 
his  brother.  —  The  Athenians  blamed  Xenophon, 

15  because  he  fought  with  the  Spartans  against  Ath- 
ens after  he  came  back  from  Asia. 


thought  that:   ofo/ucu  usually 
takes  the  inf. 

11.  replied:  not aor.  Why? 
—  his  worshipers  :    use  the 
attributive  pple. 

12.  what  they  ought  to 
do :    they    need    not    be    ex- 
pressed. 

15.   fought  with  :  use 


7.  than  Sokrates :  use  the 

gen.  Sw/cpdrous. 

8.  answered:   takes  a  6Vt 
clause,  not  the  inf.,  as  object. 
— of  mankind :  say  of  all  men. 

9.  He,  however:   6  W. — 
declared  .  .  .  not :  put  OVK  be- 
fore 60T7.  Cf .  174, 1.,  19  and  note. 

10.  meant :  X£y«,  an  idio- 
matic   use    of    the    word.  — 


CLASSIFICATION  OF  CONSONANTS. 

209.  We  have  seen  that  when  consonants  come  together 
changes  are  often  made  for  ease  of  pronunciation.  To 
understand  some  of  these  changes  it  is  necessary  to  notice 
the  character  of  the  sounds.  The  student  should  practice 
giving  aloud  the  sounds  (not  the  names)  of  the  different 
letters  as  they  are  described  in  the  following  sections  (re- 
membering that  the  name  of  each  letter  begins  with  the 
sound  of  that  letter),  and  should  observe  always  what  organs 
and  muscles  are  active  in  making  each  sound. 

It  is  not  always  easy  for  us  to  see  why  combinations  were 
difficult  for  the  Greeks,  and  avoided  by  them,  which  we  find 


211]         CLASSIFICATION   OF  CONSONANTS.        213 

easy,  while  on  the  other  hand  they  found  some  combinations 
easy  which  we  find  hard.  Thus  it  is  difficult  for  us  to  pro- 
nounce r  final  or  before  a  consonant  (as  in  fire,  horse)  and 
we  usually  make  only  a  partial  approach  to  the  sound  in 
such  places.  So  we  have  to  make  an  effort  at  first  in  order 
to  pronounce  initial  kn,  ks,  kt,  pn,  tl,  with  which  the  Greek 
had  no  trouble.  Some  of  these  combinations,  too,  a  German 
finds  easy,  though  an  English  th,  or  final  £>,  c?,  or  g,  is  to  him 
almost  impossible.  National  habit  in  such  matters  can 
hardly  be  explained,  but  must  be  recognized  as  a  fact. 

210.  a.  The  sounds  of  TT,  /3,  </>  are  made  with  the 
lips ;  these  letters  are  therefore  called  labials  (or 
lip-letters,  Lat.  labrum,  lip). 

b.  The  sounds  of  r,  8,  6  are  made  with  the  tip 
of  the  tongue  placed  just  back  of  the  upper  teeth ; 
these  letters  are  therefore  called  linguals  (or  tongue- 
letters,  Lat.  lingua,  tongue)  or  dentals  (tooth-letters, 
Lat.  dens,  tooth). 

c.  The  sounds  of  K,  7,  %  are  made  with  the  back 
of  the  tongue  pressed  against  the  palate  or  back 
part  of  the  roof  of  the  mouth;   these  letters  are 
therefore  called  palatals. 

d.  All  these  sounds  are  so  weak,  or  so  little 
resonant,  when  made  alone,  that  these  nine  letters 
are  called  mutes. 

211.  a.  Again,  the  sounds  of  TT,  r,  K  are  merely 
whispered;   they  are  therefore  called  surd  (Lat. 
surdus,  dulT)  or  smooth  mutes. 

b.  The  sounds  of  ft,  S,  7  are  made  with  the  lips 
or  tongue  in  the  same  position  as  for  TT,  r,  K,  but 


214  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [212— 

they  contain  another  element,  that  of  voice.  That 
is,  in  uttering  /3,  8,  7,  as  in  uttering  the  vowels, 
the  vocal  chords  in  the  upper  part  of  the  windpipe 
vibrate  (the  vibration  can  even  be  felt  by  putting 
the  finger  on  the  outside  of  the  throat) ;  hence  /3, 
8,  7,  like  the  vowels,  are  called  sonant  (Lat.  sonans, 
sounding')  mutes.  Greek  grammarians  called  them 
middle  mutes,  and  some  still  use  that  term. 

c.  The  sounds  of  </>,  0,  %  are  also  surd,  but  they 
differ  from  TT,  T,  K  in  having  the  distinct  A-sound 
added  in  the  ancient  pronunciation ;  hence  they 
are  called  aspirates  (Lat.  aspiratus,  Ireathed  on) 
or  rough  mutes. 

212.  Of   the   other  consonants,  notice   for   the 
present  that  a  is  also  lingual  and  surd ;  and  that 
•>/r  and  £  are  double  and  surd.     ^  is  but  another 
way  of  writing  TTCT,  and  £  another  way  of  writing 
/ccr.     £  is  also  a  double  consonant  (it  probably  had 
the  sound  of  dz),  and  is  sonant. 

213.  The  following  table  will  render  this  classi- 
fication easier  to  remember. 

MUTES.  DOUBLE  CON- 

SONANTS. 

Smooth.    Middle.      Rough. 

(Surd)  (Sonant)  (Aspirate) 

Labial         TT           /3             <f>  ty 

Lingual       r             8              0  a-  % 

Palatal        K            7             %  £ 

a.  The  mutes  in  the  same  horizontal  line  are  cognate  with 


214] 


MUTE   THEMES. 


215 


each  other  (Lat.  co-gnatus,  born  together),  because  made  with 
the  same  organs.  Those  in  the  same  perpendicular  line  are 
coordinate  with  each  other,  or  mutes  of  the  same  order. 

214.  The  conjugation  of  themes  ending  in  a 
lingual  mute  is  illustrated  by  7re/#o>  (?re^-)  per- 
suade; middle  (direct)  persuade  one's  self,  believe. 

a.  The  present  system  is  like  \vco. 

b.  In  the  future  system  6  before  the  tense  suffix 
-cr%-  is  dropped,  giving  Trei-crco,  etc. ;  inflected  like 

\V(7Ct). 

c.  In  the  first  aorist  system  6  before  the  tense 
suffix  -era-  is  dropped,  giving  e-Tre^-o-a,  etc.,  inflected 
like  e'Xto-a. 

d.  In  the  first  perfect  system  6  before  the  tense 
suffix  -/ea-,  etc.,  is  dropped,  giving  Tre-Trei-Ka,  etc., 
inflected  like  \e\v/ca. 

e.  The  perfect  middle  system  is  as  follows  : 

INDICATIVE. 


s.  i 

2 
3 

D.  2 
3 

P.  1 
2 
3 


Perfect. 


Tre-jrei-aOov 


Pluperfect. 

e-7re-7re  la-fArj  v 
>     / 


€-7re-7T€i-(r()ov 


-pevoi  rj<rav 


216  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [215— 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 


-?;,  -ov 


Here  also  6  before  a-  is  dropped,  and  before  p, 
and  T  is  changed  to  cr,  which  is,  like  #,  a  lingual, 
and  more  easily  pronounced  with  those  conso- 
nants. 

/.  In  the  first  passive  system  0  before  6  of  the 
passive  suffix  is  changed  to  cr,  just  as  before  r. 
This  gives  e-Tre/o--^?;-^,  etc.,  inflected  like  e\u- 


The  same  changes  are  made  in  other  lingual  themes,  and 
are  summed  up  in  the  following  rule  : 

215.  A  lingual  mute  (r,  8,  0) 

before  a  or  K  is  dropped, 
before  another  lingual  or  JJL  is  changed 
to  cr. 


Thus    aOpoifa   (aOpoiS-)  l  assemble    (transitive)  ;    middle 
(direct)    assemble   one's   self,   assemble    (intransitive)   makes 
ot-o-o),  7jf'0/ooi-o-a,  TJOpoi-Ka,  rjOpoLcr-fJuai,  rjOpoi(T-Or]V. 


216.  The  conjugation  of  themes  ending  in  a 
labial  mute  is  illustrated  by  Tre/mco  (?reyLi7r-) 
send. 

a.  In  the  future  system  TT  and  the  cr  of  the  tense 

1  For  the  formation  of  the  pres,  stem  see  241,  note  8. 


216] 


MUTE   THEMES. 


217 


suffix  -cr%-  are  written  as  i/r,  giving  Tre/i^o),  etc. 
(for  7re/,67r-<ja>). 

b.  So  in  the  first  aorist  system  e-Tre/jiTr-o-a  is  writ- 
ten e-7re/i^a,  etc. 

c.  In  the  perfect  active  system  the  second  per- 
fect  and   pluperfect  suffixes  -a-  (-?;-,  -a-,  -e-)  are 
used,  and  before  these  (as  is  often  the  case  in  the 
second  perfect)  the  final  consonant  of  the  theme 
is  aspirated,  becoming  <£;   at  the  same   time  the 
theme  vowel  e  varies  to  o,  giving  7re-7ro/x<£-a,  etc., 
like  yeyoz/a  (203). 

d.  The  perfect  middle  l  system  is  as  follows  : 


INDICATIVE. 


S.  1 
2 
3 

D.  2 

3 

P.  1 
2 
3 


Perfect. 


Pluperfect. 


e-Tre-Treyu-TT-ro 


1  It  happens  that  the  entire  middle  of  this  verb  is  used 
only  in  compounds. 


218  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [217— 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 


7T€-7r€/jL<f)-0ai, 


7re-7re/4-yLtez>09,  -77,  -ov 


TT  before  -yL6at,  -/4e0a,  -pevos  is  changed  to  //,,  and 
in  this  verb  (since  three  /*'s  could  hardly  be  pro- 
nounced otherwise  than  two)  one  JJL  was  dropped. 
TTCT  is  of  course  written  ty.  In  -aOov,  -o-Orjv,  -aOe 
cr  is  dropped  between  two  consonants  (see  196, 
5,  (1)  ;  then  ?r  before  6  is  changed  to  the  cog- 
nate rough  mute  <£,  that  is,  is  made  coordinate 
with  0. 

e.  In  the  first  passive  system  TT  is  made  coor- 
dinate with  the  following  0,  giving  e-7reV</>-0??-J'> 
etc. 

Like  changes  are  made  in  other  labial  themes  and  are 
included  in  the  following  rule  : 

217.  A  labial  mute  (TT,  &  0) 

before  p  becomes  & 
with  cr  forms  i/r, 

before  a  lingual  mute  (r,  8,  0)  is  made 
coordinate. 

218,  So  \a/jL/3dva>  l  (Xa/3-,  X^yS-)  forms 
(for  X?;/3-cro-/<ta£),  2d  aor.  e-Xa/3-oz/,  2d  perf.  ei- 
(with  quite  irregular  reduplication  e^-),  ei-\rjfji-fjLcu 
(for  et-X^/3-^at),  k-\r]^-Qj]-v  (for  €- 


1  For  the  formation  of  the  present  see  221, 


219]  MUTE  THEMES.  219 

a.  The  perfect  middle  of  \a/i/3ai/ft>  is  as  follows  : 
INDICATIVE. 


S.  1 
2 
3 

D.  2 
3 

P.  1 

2 
3 


Perfect. 


elaL 


Pluperfect. 


rjcrav 


INFINITIVE. 


PARTICIPLE. 


-ov 


Here  /3-/A  become 

/3-a-  become  i|r, 

)S-r  become  TT-T, 

/3-^  become  </>-0,  by  the  rule  in  217. 

219.  The  conjugation  of  themes  ending  in  a 
palatal  mute  is  illustrated  by  Sel/cvvjAi  (Se^-)  point 
out,  show. 

a.  The  present  system  assumes  the  suffix  -w- 


220 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPRON. 


(see  221,  5),  and  is  thus  of  the  /u-form,  conjugated 
like  Keparvvv'^L  (102),  as  follows: 


INDICATIVE. 

Pres. 

Active. 

Middle. 

S.  1 
2 

O€iK-VV-U>i 
$€l/C-VV-$ 

Sei/c-vv-fjicu 
Sel/c-vv-aai 

3 

Sei/c-vv-a-i 

Seltc-vv-Tai 

D.  2 

SeiK-vv-rov 

SeiK-vv-adov 

3 

Sel/c-vv-rov 

SeiK-vv-crffov 

P.  1 

SetWv-/A€i> 

Setvvv-peda 

2 

SelfC-VV-T€ 

SeiK-vv-crOe 

3 

Sei/c-vv-dcn 

SelK-vv-VTai 

Impf. 
S.  1 

A  ctive. 

Middle. 

2 

€-$€lK-VV-S 

e-Sel/c-vv-o-o 

3 

e'-SetVi^ 

e-Sel/c-vv-ro 

D.  2 

e-Sel/c-vv-Tov 

€-0€i/C-W~O'00V 

3 

e-Sei/c-vv-Trjv 

€-B€l/C~VV-O'0'nV 

P.  1 

Uelic-w-pev 

e-$€i,K-vv-/j,e0a 

2 

e-Sel/c-vv-re 

€-O€LK-W-(T0€ 

3 

e-Sel/c-vv-crav 

€~o€LK"W-VTO 

1  v  is  lengthened  in  the  sing,  of  the  pres.  and  imperf .  ind. 
act.,  as  is  a  of 


219] 


MUTE  THEMES. 
INFINITIVE. 


221 


Sei/c-vv-vat, 


PARTICIPLE. 


-vv~v 


etc.,  like  l 


-97,  -ov 


b.  In  the  future  and  first  aorist  tc-<r  are  writ- 
ten £,  giving  felga)  (for  Se^-o-o))  and  e-Se^a  (for 


c.  In  the  second  perfect  K,  is  aspirated,  giving 
Se^-a.     (Compare  7T€7ro/i<£a,  et\r)<f)a.) 

d.  The  perfect  middle  system  is  as  follows  : 


INDICATIVE. 


S.  1 
2 
3 

D.  2 
3 

P.  1 

2 
3 


Perfect. 


Pluperfect. 


*&•&*£* 

e-Se-Seitc-TO 


Se-Seiy-fJievot,  fja-av 


222  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [220- 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 


-77,  -ov 


Here  K-/A  become 
K-V  become  £, 
K-6  become  ^-0,  a-  between  two  consonants 

being  dropped  as  always. 

e.  In  the  first  passive  system  K  before  0  is  made 
coordinate,  giving  e-Set'%-0?7-z/,  etc. 

Like  changes  are  made  in  other  palatal  themes,  and  are 
included  in  the  following  rule  : 

220.  A  palatal  mute  (/e,  7,  %) 

before  JJL  becomes  7, 
with  <r  forms  £, 

before   a   lingual   mute   becomes    coor- 
dinate. 

221.  The  verbs    7ret#ft>,  Xayu-/3av&>,  and  Se//ci/£yu 
illustrate  other  modes  of  forming  the  present  stem, 
and  for   completeness  the  remaining  classes  are 
here  described. 

a.  Strong  Vowel  Class.  —  The  present  suffix  -%- 
is  added  to  the  theme  and  the  theme  vowel  is 
lengthened,  i  becoming  e^.  Thus,  we  find  in  a 
second  aorist  of  Trelffa),  used  only  in  poetry,  that 
the  theme  is  properly  7n0~.  In  the  present  this 
becomes  TreiO-,  so  that  the  present  stem  is  fjreiO-%-. 
Like  most  verbs  of  this  class,  Trelffco  retains  the 


223]  MUTE  THEMES.  223 

strong  (or  lengthened)  form  everywhere,  ex- 
cept in  the  second  aorist;  and  in  this  verb,  as 
was  said,  the  second  aorist  is  not  used  in  Attic 
prose. 

b.  Nasal  Class.  —  A  suffix  containing  v  is  added 
to  the  theme,  and  sometimes  a  nasal  inserted  in 
the  theme.     Thus  in  SelK-vu-fiL  the  suffix  -vv-  is 
added.     In  \a/jL/3dvco  the  suffix  -av%-  is  added,  and 
/JL  inserted. 

c.  Tan  Class.  —  The  suffix  -r%-  is  added  to  the 
theme.     Thus,  KpvTr-ra)  (/cpt><£-)  hide,  present  stem 
/cpV7r-T%-  (future  Kpv-^roi). 

222.  The  common  varieties  of  verb  formation  have  all 
been  given  in  the  modes  most  used,  and  the  student  is  now 
ready,  if  what  precedes  has  been  well  learned,  to  begin  an 
easy  author.      The   subjunctive,   optative,   and   imperative, 
modes  will  be  taken  up  gradually  as  they  are  needed.     The 
pupil  should  obtain  a  Grammar,  to  which  reference  will  now 
begin  to  be  made,  G.  standing  for  Goodwin's,  and  H.  for 
that  of  Hadley  and  Allen. 

The  reading  lessons  that  follow  are  the  opening  pages 
of  Xenophon's  "Anabasis,"  or  "Expedition  of  Cyrus."  The 
information  which  one  should  have  before  beginning  that 
work  has  been  in  great  part  given  in  the  preceding  lessons, 
but  for  convenience  it  is  brought  together  here. 

223.  Xenophon  was   an  Athenian,  born,  prob- 
ably, a  little  before  the  beginning  of  the  Pelo- 
ponnesian  war  (431  B.C.).     In  early  manhood  he 
became  acquainted  with  Sokrates,  and  for  about 
ten   years,   probably,   remained  in   close   relation 


224  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 

with  the  philosopher,  to  whom  he  owed  much  of 
his  moral  and  intellectual  development.  It  was 
in  401  B.C.  that  his  friend  Proxenos  invited  him 
to  come  to  Asia  Minor  and  make  the  acquaintance 
of  Cyrus,  as  narrated  in  the  last  Exercise.  Cyrus 
was  then  not  over  twenty-three  years  old,  and  had 
for  six  years  been  governor  of  a  large  extent  of 
territory.  He  was  energetic  and  ambitious,  and 
determined,  if  possible,  to  make  himself  king  in 
place  of  his  brother,  Artaxerxes.  The  only  ground 
which  he  had  for  a  claim  upon  the  throne  was 
that  Artaxerxes,  though  the  elder,  had  been  born 
before  his  father  became  king,  while  Cyrus  was 
the  eldest  son  born  after  that  event,  and  was 
therefore  the  eldest  son  of  the  king.  Xerxes  I., 
successor  of  Dareios  I.  and  great-grandfather  of 
Cyrus,  is  said  to  have  used  the  same  argument 
successfully.  The  account  of  the  expedition,  in 
the  latter  part  of  which  Xenophon  was  the  real 
leader,  was  written  several  years  afterwards. 


224.   Vocabulary. 

dfjL<f>OT€po$,  -d,  -ov  both. 

(airo  +  Se^/c-),  A 
d-Tre'Se^a,  CLTTO-  I     ' 
[ 


ANABASIS,  /.,  1,  1-2.  225 


acrOevea)   (acrffeve-),  0,06  evri-  )  ,  7    ,       .  7 

7    [  6e  weak,  be  sick. 
a-®,1  etc.,  reg.,  ) 

/3az/-,    /8a-),   firjcro- 


avaBaivcd  (dva+Bav-,  Ba-),  )  .  7      , 

,H  go  up,  ffo  inland. 

avaprjcro/jiai,  etc.,  ) 

(  journey  up,  or  towards 

•    ,     ' 
interior. 

or    (T'fflo'a),     ea^ov,  V  have. 

Kastolos  or  Castolus. 


;  ^     in_ 
^        ^  ^ 

,g 
^ 

Xenias. 

C  heavy-armed    soldier, 
j 


1  From  its  meaning  this  verb  has  no  middle. 

2  The  pres.  belongs  to  the  iota  class ;  the  theme  (3av-  takes 
the  pres.  suffix  -t%-,  v  and  t  are  transposed,  and  i  forms  a 
diphthong  with  the  preceding  a,  giving  for  the  pres.  stem 
PO.IV%-.     Elsewhere  the  stem  appears  in  the  shorter  form 
(3a-.     The  future  is   deponent.     (Compare   ytyvwcr/co),  Xa/x- 
/?ava>,  and  others.) 

8  A  /u-aorist,  conjugated  like  ccmyv  (149). 

4  For  full  explanation  of  the  forms  of  this  verb  see  239. 


226 


THE  GBEEK  OF  XENOPBON. 


[225— 


„  (  how   much,    as   much 
-??,  -or,  rel.  pron.   ot  I  ,     7 

,       r  .  <       as;  pi.,  A0w  many, 

quantity  and  number, 

V 


, 
Uappatrw,  -a,  -ov 

77  Hapvo-arL^  -^809 
TO  TreoYoz/,  -ov 


as  many  as. 
Parrhasian,  of  Par- 


Pary  satis. 
plain. 
.,  make,  do. 


rj  re\€v  T??,  -779 
o  Ticro'acfrepv'rjs,  -OU9,1  -e^, 
-ai,  -a 


TissapTiernes. 
three  hundred. 

happen,  chance. 


rerv^rj/ca  or  rerev^a 


225.  Anabasis,  I.,  1,  1-2. 
1.  Aape/ou  /<m  Hapf  crdriSos  yiyvoVTCU  7ratSe9 


7Tpecr/3vT€po$ 

1.    Adpeiou,      ZlapwrdTiSos : 

gen.  of  source.  H.  750 ;  G. 
1130.  —  -yC-yvovTai  :  historical 
present,  common  in  Greek,  as 
in  Latin.  —  8vo  :  there  were  four 
sons  in  all ;  but  the  two  younger 
sons  are  left  out  of  view  because 


& 

they  are  not  concerned  in  this 
story.  Note  that  a  numeral  or 
other  adjective  is  likely  to  fol- 
low its  noun,  unless  the  adjec- 
tive has  some  emphasis  upon  it 
or  the  noun  has  the  article. 


2. 


Artaxerxes 


1  For  declension  see  H.  191,  193 ;  G.  228,  230. 

2  Of  the  nasal  class ;   the  theme  rv^-  aspumes  the  pres. 
suffix  -av%-,  and  inserts  the  palatal  nasal  before  the  palatal 
mute  x-     Compare  Xa/x^avcu,  which  inserts  the  labial  nasal 
before  the  labial  mute  /3. 

8  Second  aorist,  like  €/?aAoi/  (200). 


225] 


ANABASIS,   L,  I,  1-2. 


227 


€7rel  Se  rja-Qevei  kapelos  KOI  v7ra)7TT€ve  reXevrrjv  rov 

/3/OU,  €/3oV\€TO    TOD    TTCliSe    d/Ji<f)OT6pCO    7Tap€LVai,.       2.   O 

fiev  ovv  7rp€cr/3vT€pos    Trapcov    €Tvy%av€  •    Kuyooz/  Se 
fjL€Ta7re/ji7r€Tai,   airo  rf)?  apx*js   ^9   avrov 
e,  /cal  arparrjyov  Se  avrov 


II.,  called  fjL^fjLOJv  unf or  getting, 
for  his  remarkable  memory.  It 
was  said  that  he  remembered 
the  names  of  all  his  soldiers. 
The  line  of  Persian  kings  was 
Cyrus  the  Great,  Kambyses, 
Dareios  I.,  Xerxes  I.,  Arta- 
xerxes  I.,  Dareios  II.,  Arta- 
xerxes  II. 

3.  T|<r0€V€i  Adpeios :  the  pred. 
here  stands  before  the  subject 
because  the  former  is  the  more 
important,  containing  the  real 
point  of  the  new  statement. 
The  general  principle  is  that 
the  more  important  precedes  the 
less  important,  other  things  be- 
ing equal.  But  other  things 
are  often  not  equal,  and  hence 
other  principles  come  in  play, 
some  of  which  will  be  noticed 
later.  When  the  relative  im- 
portance of  words  is  merely 
grammatical  importance,  as  is 
often  the  case  in  simple  narra- 
tive, then  we  have  nearly  the 
ordinary  English  order;  but 
the  more  feeling  is  expressed, 
the  more  the  order  in  Greek  is 
likely  to  differ  from  that  in 
English.  Note  that  the  final 


place  in  a  clause  is  likely  to 
contain  an  important  word  in 
English,  but  an  unimportant 
one  in  Greek. 

4.  irapcivcu :  to  be  near  him  ; 
made  up  of  irapd  near  and  eivai 
to  be. 

5.  jt€v    ovv:    each    particle 
has  its  proper  force;   fdv,  al- 
though translated  only  by  the 
tone  in  which  the  whole  phrase 
is  spoken,  shows  that  the  writer 
has   in  mind  something    con- 
trasted with  6  IT  pea- pfo  epos,  while 
ofiv  connects  the  statement  with 
the  former  sentence  as  our  ac- 
cordingly does.  —  irapwv:  sup- 
plementary pple.  with 
agreeing  with  the  subj.  6 
ptirepos.       With     rvyxdvw    the 
pple.  really  contains  the  main 
statement.     We  say,   chanced 
to  be  present,  or  was  at  hand, 
as  it  happened.    H.  980,  984  ; 
G.  1578,  1586. 

6.  fi,€Tair€jj,ir€Tcu :  indir.  mid., 
sends  for  to  come  to  himself, 
summons.  —  apx^s :    province, 
a  meaning  easily  derived  from 
that  of  government. 

7.  eiroifjo-c:    the    Greek    is 


228 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[225— 


O<TOI  eh  Ka<TTQ)\ov 
ovv  o  Ku/309  Xa/3ft)i> 


often  content  to  describe  an  act 
by  the  aor.  merely  as  occurring 
in  the  past,  where  we  are  care- 
ful to  describe  it  by  the  plup.  as 
completed  in  the  past.  Hence 
the  plup.  is  far  less  common 
in  Greek,  and  we  must  often 
use  the  plup.  to  translate  an 
aor.  ind. ;  so  with  dir{dei%e.  — 
ical  orrpaTTj-yov  8c :  as  8{  is  al- 
ways a  conj.,  Kal  must  here  be 
the  adv.  meaning  also.  The 
writer  drops  the  rel.  clause  and 
practically  begins  a  new  sen- 
tence. Greek  often  does  this 
rather  than  extend  the  rel. 
clause  to  two  or  more  members 
as  we  do. 

8.  oo-oi :  since  we  have  no 
single  rel.  pron.  ref  erring  espe- 
cially to  quantity  or  number, 
and  as  many  as  is  clumsy,  we 
we  may  translate  who.  But 
Greek  generally  uses  fooi  for 
icho  after  an  indefinite  word 
of  number  like  irdvrwv. —  Ka- 
o-TwXov  ircSCov :  practically  one 
proper  name ;  hence  the  omis- 
sion of  the  article.  In  the  ace. 
because  of  the  motion  implied 
in  dBpolfrvrai  (dir.  mid.).  In 
Anab.  I.,  9,  7  Xenophon  tells 
US  that  Cyrus  Kareir^^dTj  vir6 
TOV  irarpbs  (ivas  sent  down  by 
his  father)  aaTpdirys  A.v5tds  re 


avafiaivei 
real  rwv 


a>9 


Kal   &pvyids    Kal    K 

&s  §£  Kal  iravruv  dire- 
ols  Kad-fjK^  (whose  duty 
it  is)  eis  Kao-rwXoO  TredLov  ddpoi- 
£e<r6at.  This  was  the  central 
mustering  place  of  a  wide  re- 
gion. —  &va|3aiv€i  :  note  the 
position  and  the  reason  for 
it.  This  journey  was  made  in 
405  B.C.  dvd  in  composition 
with  verbs  of  motion  is  used  to 
denote  travel  from  the  coast 
inland,  as  we  often  use  up. 
Hence  dv.dpao-is  means  a  jour- 
ney from  the  coast  inland ;  it 
is  the  title  given  properly  to 
Xenophon' s  account  of  the 
march  of  Cyrus  up  to  the  neigh- 
borhood of  Babylon.  This  ac- 
count is  contained  in  the  first 
eight  chapters  of  Book  I.,  and 
the  remaining  six  Books  de- 
scribe the  return  of  the  Greeks ; 
but  the  title  is  used  as  that  of 
the  entire  work. 

9.  Tioro-a4>€pvr]v :  really  an 
enemy  of  Cyrus,  to  whom  had 
been  given  a  large  part  of  the 
power  formerly  held  by  Tis- 
saphernes.  Doubtless  Cyrus 
distrusted  him,  and  for  that 
reason  was  unwilling  to  leave 
him  behind  during  an  ab- 
sence certain  to  last  several 
months, 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MODE. 


229 


Se  avrwv  ^evicuv  Tlappdcriov. 


ap^ovra   10 


10.  €\wv :  having  under  his 
command,  as  a  body-guard.  We 
may  translate  with;  but  ob- 
serve that  in  this  sense  ex(t)V 
can  be  used  only  of  a  superior, 
who  can  be  said  to  have  under 
him  soldiers  or  other  inferiors. 
Cyrus  had  seen  clearly  the  ex- 
cellence of  Greek  soldiers  as 
compared  with  Asiatics. — 6-irXt- 
TO.S:  men  fully  armed  with  a 
heavy  shield,  a  bronze  cuirass, 
helmet,  and  greaves  (which 
clasped  around  the  leg  and  pro- 
tected it  from  the  knee  to  the 
ankle),  together  with  a  sword 
and  long  spear  for  weapons  of 
offense.  This  armor  all  to- 
gether was  called  forXa  (ti-n-Xov 
in  the  sing,  means  implement 
in  general),  hence  oTrXfr^s  with 


the  same  derivative  ending  as 
in  TroXiTTjs  from  TTO'XIS.  — dve'pTj : 
the  change  from  the  historical 
pres.  to  the  aor.  and  from  aor. 
to  historical  pres.  is  very  com- 
mon.—  Tpia,Ko<rCovs :  added  af- 
ter the  clause  is  apparently 
complete,  as  if  it  were  an  after- 
thought, the  number  thus  re- 
ceives a  certain  prominence. 
A  word  so  added  is  in  fact 
made  the  beginning  of  a  new 
rhetorical  group,  as  we  might 
say  in  English,  "  Some  Greek 
soldiers  also  accompanied  him, 
three  hundred  in  number."  In 
this  way  a  word  standing  at 
the  end  of  a  clause  may  be  an 
emphatic  one. 

11.   Ilappdo-iov  :  Parrhasia 
was  in  southwestern  Arcadia. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MODE. 

226.  The  subjunctive  mode  has,  in  principal 
clauses,1  only  three  uses,  which  are  all  found  in 
Latin. 

a.  The  first  person  is  used  to  express  a  request 


1  The  uses  of  the  subjunctive  in  subordinate  clauses  will 
be  described  as  they  occur. 


230  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [227— 


or  proposal  (hortative  subjunctive)  :  avaft&nev  let 
us  go  up. 

b.  The  second  and  third  persons  are  used  with 
fjuj  (not*)  in  prohibitions,  but  only  in  the  aorist  :  prj 
aOpoicrrjcrOe  do  not  assemble. 

c.  The  first  person  is  used  in  questions  as  to 
what  may  be   done  with  propriety  or  advantage 
(deliberative  subjunctive)  :  ri  TTOI&ILGV  ;  what  had 
we  better  do  f 

In  each  of  these  uses  it  is  clear  that  there  is  some  refer- 
ence to  future  time  ;  and  in  almost  all  uses  of  this  mode  in 
subordinate  clauses  as  well,  the  connection  and  the  nature 
of  the  situation  show  more  or  less  of  reference  to  the  future. 
But 

227.  The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  do  not  mark 
distinctions  of  time,  but  have  the  following  force  : 

The  present  denotes  an  action  simply  as  con- 
tinued or  repeated  (at  any  time)  ; 

The  aorist  denotes  an  action  simply  as  brought 
to  pass  (at  any  time)  ; 

The  perfect  denotes  an  action  simply  as  com- 
pleted  (at  any  time). 

The  context  alone  indicates  what  time  is  re- 
ferred to.  Compare  154,  a  on  the  infinitive. 

228.  There    is    no    future  subjunctive.      Each 
tense  system  except  the   future   has   a  subjunc- 
tive ;   there  is  no  subjunctive   imperfect  or  plu- 
perfect. ' 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MODE. 


231 


229.  Subjunctive  of  \vco  (\i>-,  \ih). 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE.  PASSIVE. 


Pres.  S.  1 

\v-co 

\V-0)-/JLCU 

2 

Xz)-?;? 

\v-rj 

3 

XU-T; 

\v-rj-rai 

D.2 

\V-T]-TOV 

\v-rj-o-0ov 

3 

X£-77-TOZ/ 

\V-1)-(T00V 

P.I 

\V-0)-fJL€V 

\v-a>-tJL€0a 

2 

\v~rj-re 

\v-rj-a0€ 

3 

\V-GMTI, 

\v-c0-VTat, 

lAor.S.  1 

\v-<r<o 

\faa-liM 

\V-00) 

2 

XV-0-779 

\v-<rrj 

\v-0fjs 

3 

\v-a-rj 

\v-o-rj-rcu 

\v-0fj 

D.2 

\v-a-rj-rov 

\v-<rr)-(T0ov 

\V-0fj-TOV 

3 

Xv-arj-TOV 

\v-a-rj-o-0ov 

\v-0rj-rov 

P.I 

\V-(7CO-fJL€V 

\v-crco-fjie0a 

\V-0W-  fji€V 

2 

\v-a-rj-re 

\v-a-rj-a-0e 

\v-0rj-re 

3 

\v-a-coa-L 

XWco-i/ra^ 

\v-eauTL 

Perf.  S.  1 

\e-\v-fcco 

Xe-Xv-^i/o?  & 

2 

\€-\v-/crp 

"        y<* 

3 

\e-\v-Krj 

44        w 

D.2 

\e-\v-/crj-rov 

\€-\V-fJL€VCO  fJTOV 

3 

\e-\v-  icy-rov 

44           TITOV 

P.I 

\€-\V-KQ)-/JL€V 

\e-\V-fJL€VOl  &fJL€V 

2 

\€-\V-Kr]-T€ 

44               fjT€ 

3 

\€'\V-/CCOCTL 

far* 

232  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [230— 

230.  The  mode  suffix  of  the  subjunctive  is  the 
lengthened  variable  vowel  -%- ;  co  when  the  end- 
ing begins  with  p  or  v,  elsewhere  77. 

a.  If  the  indicative  has  a  tense  suffix  ending  in 
-%-  or  a,  the  corresponding  subjunctive  puts  -%-  in 
place  of  that  vowel.     Otherwise  the  subjunctive 
adds  -%-  to  the  tense  stem;  a,  e,  or  o  contracts 
with  a  following  •%-. 

This  amounts  to  the  same  thing  as  saying  that  the  sub- 
junctive adds  -"Iff  in  /u-tenses,  and  elsewhere  puts  -<%,-  in 
place  o/the  final  vowel  of  the  tense  stem. 

b.  But  the  perfect  middle  system  has  only  com- 
pound forms,  made  up  of  the  perfect  middle  parti- 
ciple and  the  present  subjunctive  of  the  verb  elfii 
am. 

These  forms  of  ct/xt  are  easily  remembered,  because  they 
are  exactly  like  the  combined  mode  suffix  and  endings  of 
all  active  subjunctives.  The  participle  is  of  course  declined 
to  agree  with  the  subject. 

c.  In  the  aorist  passive  the  passive  suffix  is  -0e- 
by  the  rule  in  170,  d.     The  accent  is  according  to 
the  rule  in  178. 

231.  The  subjunctive  takes  the  primary  endings, 
omitting  -/u  in  the  first  singular;   i  subscript  is 
written  where  the  indicative  has  i. 

The  subjunctive  forms  in  ^u-tenses,  in  the  second  aorist, 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MODE. 


233 


and  in  contracted  presents,  are  shown  in  the  following  para- 
digms. In  the  tenses  not  given,  these  verbs  are  like  the 
corresponding  tenses  of  A.VOJ. 


232.  Subjunctive  of 

ACTIVE. 


(crra-, 

MIDDLE  (PASSIVE). 


Pres.  S.  1 

f           /•» 

£-<rro> 

L"O"TO)~LL(tt/ 

2 

/-err?}? 

L~O'T'yj 

3 

l-arp 

hrtfrnu 

D.  2 

l-a-rrj-rov 

l"O"Tll~O'(/OV 

3 

l-CTTrj-TOV 

i~(n"fl~(Tvo  v 

P.  1 

i-o-rti-fJiev 

l-(TTci)-/Ji€0a 

2 

i-o-rfj-re 

i-crrrj-a-Oe 

3 

i-arw 

ivT&VTIU 

a.   In  the  /xt-aorist 

Mt-Aor.  S.  1 

(7TO) 

subjunctive  the  theme 

2 

M 

has  the  short  form  ac- 

3 

N 

cording  to  170,  d.    In 

tJ 

O-TT; 

both  present  and  fu- 

D.  2 

O"T>77~T"0  1' 

aorist  the  contraction 

3 

(TTTj-TOl' 

of  a-rj  is  77,  contrary 

to  177,  (1);  but  these 

P.  1 

(TT&-fJL€V 

forms  are   easily   re- 

2 

o-r^-re 

membered,      because 

3 

<7TW-(7fc 

they  show  the  mode 

suffix  the  more  plainly. 

234  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [233— 

233.  Mi-aorist  Subjunctive  of  yiyvwa/co)  (71/0-,  <yva)-). 


S.  1 

yva) 

a.  The  theme  has 

2 

7Z>ft)5 

the  short  form  accord- 

3 

7^cS 

ing  to  the  rule  in  170, 

d.    The  contraction  of 

D.  2 

yvco-rov 

o-r/ando-cois  according 

3 

ryv&-Tov 

to  the  rule  in  182,  (2); 

P-j 

but  0-77  gives  a),  con- 

.   1 

<yv&-fjL€V 

trary  to  182,  (3),  so  that 

2 

ryV&-T€ 

CD  appears  throughout 

3 

ryVWCTi 

the  paradigm. 

234.  Aorist  Subjunctive  of  areXXco  ((jreX-,  crraX-). 
ACTIVE.  MIDDLE. 


IstAor.S.  1 
2 
3 

D.2 

3 

P.I 

2 
3 


<TT€i\-CO 


<7T€i\-7)-T€ 


a-reiK-rj-dOov 


235]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MODE. 

PASSIVE. 


235 


2d  Aor.  S.  1 

2 
3 

D.2 
3 

P.  1 
2 
3 


crraX-Tj-re 


a.  The  subjunctive 
in  the  liquid  first  aorist 
and  in  the  second 
aorist  passive  differs 
from  that  of  the  <ra- 
aorist  and  the  first 
aorist  passive  only  in 
the  part  that  precedes 
the  mode  suffix. 


235.  Second  Aorist  and  Second  Perfect  Subjunctive 
of  \afjt,/3dvo)  (Xa/3-,  X?7y8-). 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


2d  Aor.  S.  1 
2 
3 

D.  2 
3 

P.  1 

2 
3 


Xa/3-w 
\dfrg 


\d/3-rj-(T0ov 


\d/3-CO-VTCU 


236    THE  GHEES:  OF  XENOPHON. 

ACTIVE. 


[236— 


2dPerf.S.  1 

€l-\7)(p-(*) 

a.  The  second  aorist 

2 

€lr\,Ti<p-'rjs 

subjunctive  active  and 

3 

middle  consists  merely 

€i~  W'V 

of  theme,  mode  suffix, 

D.2 

6  t,-\1J  <p-7)~TO  V 

ending.     The   second 

3 

€i'\TJ  (D-7J-TO  V 

perfect       subjunctive 

differs  from  the  first 

P.I 

€L~\/n  d)~(t)-LL€V 

perfect    only    in    the 

2 

€6-X^</)-77-Te 

part  that  precedes  the 

3 

el-X^-axn 

mode  suffix. 

236.   Present  Subjunctive  of  vlfcda) 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE  (PASSIVE). 


S.  1 
2 
3 

D.2 

3 

P.  1 

2 
3 


vlK(a-rf)a-rov 
w«(a-(»)ft)-/i.6i' 


a-co 


a.  In  reading  the  paradigms,  omit  the  syllable  next  after 
the  parenthesis  to  obtain  the  uncontracted  form ;  to  obtain 
the  contracted  form  omit  the  letters  in  the  parenthesis. 

The  contractions  here  follow  the  rule  in  177. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MODE. 


237 


237.    Present  Subjunctive  of  ^Xeea 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE  (PASSIVE). 


s.  i 

2 
.    3 

D.  2 

3 

P.  1 

2 
3 


a.  These  contractions  follow  the  rule  in  180,  (3). 

238.   Present  Subjunctive  of  SouXo'w  (SowXo-). 
ACTIVE.  MIDDLE  (PASSIVE). 


S.  1 
2 
3 

D.  2 

3 

P.  1 

2 
3 


So  uX  (0-779)  06? 


SowX  (O'-T;)  <W-TO  z/ 
So  uX  (  0-77)  W-TO  z^ 


(  6-ft))  ft)-yLUU 

SouX  (0-77)0^ 


SoV\  (0-77) 


So  v  X  (o-a>)  co-vrat, 


a.  These  contractions  follow  the  rule  in  182,  (2) 
and  (3). 


288  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [239— 

239.  The  verb  fya)  is  so  common  and  has  so  many  pecu- 
liarities that  a  full  description  of  it  is  here  given. 

a.  The  theme  was  originally  <r£\- ;  initial  <r,  as  in  ivrqfju, 
VTTO,  vTrep,  CTTTCI  (compare  Latin  sisto,  sub,  super,  septem)  was 
weakened  to  the  rough  breathing  in  some  forms,  and  in 
others  (wherever  ^  remained  unchanged)  was  still  further 
weakened  to  the  smooth  breathing.     This  gives  the  present 
indicative  l^w,  etc.     The  imperfect  takes  the  syllabic  aug- 
ment, remaining  from  the  time  when  the  <r  was  still  pro- 
nounced ;  e-e^-o-v  gives  by  contraction  ct^ov. 

b.  The  future  !fo>  is  for  l^-o-co,  the  initial  rough  breathing 
being  here  retained  because  the  aspiration  of  x  disappears 
in  f .     The  other  future,  0^770-0),  shows  another  form  of  the 
theme,  cr^rj-.     €^<o  is  much  more  common. 

c.  The  second  aorist  lo-^ov  is  for  l-cre^-o-v,  the  theme  ap- 
pearing as  (r\-.     The  subjunctive  is  cr^to,  ar^ys,  °"X?f>  o"X*7TOV> 
cryrjTov,  crx&fjitv,  o^re,  cr^wo-t ;  the  infinitive,  o^etv ;  the  par- 
ticiple, o-^wv,  cr^ovo-a,  o-\6v. 

d.  The  perfects  ecrxrjKa  and  toyflnai  are  regularly  formed 
from  the  theme  o^-;   the  reduplication  is  e-  only,  by  the 
rule  in  196,  a.    There  is  no  aorist  passive  until  a  late  period, 
that  system  being  supplied  by  other  verbs. 

240.  The  verb  elfit  am,  of  which  some  forms 
have  already  been  given,  should  now  be  learned  in 
full  (except  the  optative  and  imperative  modes) 
from  H.  4T8,  479,  480;  G.  806,  1-3. 

Observe  that  in  Tra/oci/u  (compounded  of  Trapa  and  ct/u) 
the  participle  Trapwv  retains  the  accent  of  the  simple  verb. 
In  the  imperfect  Trapfjv,  Trapfja-Oa,  etc.,  the  accent  remains  on 
the  rj  in  accordance  with  H.  391  b ;  G.  133,  1. 


241]  ANABASIS,  /.,  7,  3-4.  239 

241.    Vocabulary. 

^ 


>-,2     KTOV-), 

,  aireicTeiva,  aTreicTova  }       death. 
(a?ro  +  7re//,7r-,   TTO/^^)-),  \ 

re/^^/rct),  aTreTreuilra,  aTTOTre-  [          7 

^r  ,'       ,        \send  away. 
a,  aTTOTTeTrefjifjiai,  a7T€7re/i<p-  [ 

ATV 

arladfo      (drt/^aS-3),      a,Tiu,av<»),\     ,.  ,  ,. 

;  ^b  >_^  I  dishonor,     dis- 

rjri.fjiaa'a*    nriLLa/ca*    77Ttua<7uat,    > 

.   -     /    /,  I       ^«^- 

rjTi/jiacrv'rjv  ) 

Sia/3d\\co  (&a  +  £aX-,  /8X^-),  S^a-^  slander,  bring 
/3aX<w,  S^eySaXoz/,  Sta/SeySX^/ca,  >  iwto  discred- 
SiafteftXrj/jiai,,  &i€/3\ij0r)v  )  it. 

eav?  conj.  followed  by  subjv.  (jf. 

e^aireo)  (e^  +  aZre-),  e^airijcrco,  etc.,  )  J^  o^*,  /ree  Jy 
reg.,  )  entreaty. 

77,  conj., 


1  For  the  accent  see  H.  391  J ;  G.  133,  1. 

2  Liquid  theme ;  the  present  of  the  iota  class,  formed  like 
uvco  (see  224,  note  2). 

8  From  art/xos  unhonored,  which  is  from  a  privative  and 
honor.  The  present  is  of  the  iota  class,  the  present 
stem  being  aTt/Aa£%-  for  drt/xa8-t%-,  8-t  forming  £.  Cf. 
a#poi'£a>,  which  is  in  like  manner  derived  from  the  adj.  d0/ooos 
together. 

4  Compounded  of  et  z/  and  the  particle  avf  which  marks 
the  action  as  contingent. 


240  THE 'GREEK  OF  XENOPBON.  [242— 

-1),  KivSvvevo-co, 


Kiv$vv€vco 
etc.,  reg., 
e,  adv., 


,  -r/>o9  (H.  189;  G.  274) 


be  in  danger. 
(Lat. 


7r/>o9,  prep.  w.  ace., 


never. 

mother 
mater). 

to,  in  the  pres- 
ence of. 

how? 


how. 


7rcJ)9,2  interrog.  adv., 

O7ree>9,  adv.,  indir.  interrog.  or  in- 

def .  rel., 

(7v\Xa/ji/3dvQ)    (a-vv  +  \af3-,   X?7/3-),  ^  (1)  take  toget Ti~ 
i,  avve\aj3ov,  avvei-  V      er;  (2)  seize, 

i,  <Twe\r}<j)9'r]v  )       arrest. 

T€\€vrdco    (reXeura-),    r€\€VTtjcra)  )  (1)  end; 

etc.,  reg.,  i  (2)  die. 

(^Tro  +  a/o^-),     vTrdpgco,  )  begin  to  be,  sub- 

\       sist,  exist. 


242.  Anabasis,  I.,  1,  3-4. 
3.  'Evrel  &e  €T€\€vrrjo-e  Aapeto?  KOLI  Karea-rrj  efc  rrjv 


rov 


1.  eireC:  see  140,  I.,  3,  note 
on  tirel.  —  KaT€<rr»]  ets :  entered 
on,  became  established  in'y  cf. 


KaTto-Tyo-e  125,  I.,  6  and  note, 
also  188,  II.,  2  and  note. 

2.  8iapdX\€i :  how  this  com- 


1  From  KiVSuvos  danger.     Verbs  derived  from  nouns  or 
adjectives,  like  d^pot^o>,  aTtfUi£a),  KtvSuveva),  8ovXoa>,  reAevrao), 
are  called  denominatives. 

2  The  series  TTWS  A0w  ?  OTTWS  how,  TTWS  (enclitic)  m  some 
way,  cus  as,  OVTCDS  ^ws  are  correlatives,  like  TTOTC,  TTOTC,  rorc, 


242] 


ANABASIS,  Jr.,  1,  3-4. 


241 


Kvpov  vrpo?  roz;  dSe\<f)bv  o>9  €7ri/3ov\evei 

ireiOerai  /cal  a-vKKappdvet,  Kvpov  a>9  dTro/crevwv  •  77 

avrov    aTTOTrefiTrei,    ird\iv    5 


stituted  without  changing  the 
meaning.  But  hi  the  sentence, 
"I,  not  remembering  how  I 
cried  out  then,  will  cry  it  o'er 
again,"  how  is  very  nearly  the 
same  as  that.  The  change  of 
meaning  in  a;  s  is  the  same,  but 
cJs  in  the  sense  of  6n  is  far 
more  common  than  how  in  the 
sense  of  that.  —  6  8^ :  but  he, 
that  is,  the  king.  A  frequent 
way  of  beginning  a  sentence, 
when  there  is  change  of  sub- 
ject, and  the  new  subject  is 
made  prominent  by  the  con- 
text. Cf.  208,  I.,  16  and  note. 

4.  «s  diroKTCvwv :  lit.,  as  about 
to  kill  him ;  that  is,  apparently 
to  put  him  to  death.  The  fut. 
pple.  here,  as  in  Latin,  denotes 
purpose,  and  cJs  marks  the 
purpose,  not  as  one  of  which 
the  writer  is  certain,  but  as 
one  which  people  inferred 
from  Artaxerxes1  words  and 
actions. 

5.  €£<uTTj<raji£vT| :  indir.  mid. ; 
the  force  of  the  voice  is  lost  in 
translation. 


pound  of  $«£  and  j3<£XXo>  came 
to  have  this  special  meaning  is 
uncertain.  Xenophon  was  a 
warm  admirer  of  Cyrus  and 
evidently  did  not  believe  the 
story.  Plutarch  tells  us  hi  his 
life  of  Artaxerxes,  that  Cyrus 
was  accused  of  planning  to  kill 
his  brother  at  the  ceremony  of 
coronation.  Tissaphernes  was 
doubtless  glad  to  get  Cyrus  into 
trouble,  but  we  cannot  be  cer- 
tain whether  his  accusation  was 
true  or  not. 

3.  ws :  the  first  instance  of 
cJs  in  the  sense  of  tfn  that.  cJs 
is,  in  its  origin,  an  adv.  of  man- 
ner from  the  rel.  pron.  6s  (like 
/caXws  from  /caXo's,  etc. ;  cf.  174, 
L,  17  and  note),  and  therefore 
means  in  what  way,  as,  how. 
In  Shakspere's  lines,  "  There's 
a  divinity  that  shapes  our  ends, 
rough-hew  tHem  how  we  will ;" 
and  "  How  thou  pleasest,  God, 
dispose  the  day,"  how  is  the 
exact  equivalent  of  «'$  in  the 
first  sense,  and  in  each  sen- 
tence quoted  as  could  be  sub- 


ore. Observe  that  the  TTOJ?  series,  all  adverbs  of  manner, 
have  the  same  ending  with  KoAws  and  other  adverbs  of 
manner. 


242 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[242— 


eirl  rr)V  ap^rjv.  4.  o  S'  &>? 
/cal  arlfJiacrOels,  ftov\€V€TCU,  OTTCDS  /JLiJTrore  CTL  earai 
€7rl  TO*  aSeX<£<:3,  aXXa,  eav  Svvrjrat^  j3acn\£vcrei,  avr 
eiceivov.  Tlapvcrans  /Aev  Srj  rj  fAiJTrjp  VTrrjpxe  rcS 
10  Ku/oft),  <f>i\ovcra  avrbv  /taXXoz/  TJ  TOV  ftacri\evovTa 


6  f.  a>s  dirfiX0€:  ws  is  here 
temporal,  when.  As  shows  a 
like  change  of  meaning ;  for 
example,  "He  greeted  me  as 
he  entered"  ;  "As  mine  eyes 
opened  I  saw  their  weapons 
drawn." — KivSvvevo-ds  Kal  drt- 
|iacr0€Ls:  English  does  not  use 
pples.  so  freely  as  Greek ;  trans- 
late after  being  in  danger  and 
disgrace. 

7.  oircos  .  .  .  €<TTat :  lit.,  how 
he  shall  never  again  be.     This 
is  really  an  expression  of  pur- 
pose;  see  H.  885;  G.  1372.— 
}i^7roT€:  ov  expresses  negation 
simply ;    /x^    expresses    it    as 
willed  or  as  thought  of.    The 
same  distinction  appears  in  all 
their  compounds.     It  is  evident 
that  a  purpose  clause  expresses 
something  willed  /  hence  a  neg- 
ative clause  of  purpose  always 
has  rf.    H.  1018, 1021 ;  G.  1610 
(2d  sentence).   Instances  of  the 
second  use  of  ^  are  seen  in 
/-nj  with  pples. ;  cf.  188,  II.,  17 
and  note. 

8.  €irl  T<J  a8c\<|>cp  :  twi  with 


the  dat.  often  means  on,  upon, 
in  a  figurative  or  derived  sense ; 
here,  dependent  on,  in  the  power 
of.  On  in  the  literal  sense 
is  more  usually,  in  prose,  M 
with  the  gen.  —  &v  SVVTJTCU: 
dvvafjLai  is  one  of  three  verbs 
which,  though  the  theme  (dwa-) 
ends  in  a,  have  recessive  ac- 
cent in  the  pres.  subjv.  The 
conditional  clause  refers  to  fu- 
ture time,  and  is  viewed  as  not 
improbable ;  that  is,  it  is  of  the 
future,  more  vivid  form.  H. 
898 ;  G.  1403,  1404. 

91  8Vj:  of  course.  —  virnpx€ 
T<J>  Kvpw :  lit.,  existed  for  Cy- 
rus, that  is,  was  on  his  side, 
supported  Cyrus.  *  For  the  ac* 
cent  of  vTTTjpxe  see  H.  391,  b ; 
G.  133, 1.  -Ktptf  is  a  dat.  of  in- 
terest. H.  767  ;  G.  1165. 

11.  'ApTale'pfrjv :  compara- 
tives with  TJ  (like  comparatives 
with  quam  in  Latin)  are  fol- 
lowed by  the  case  of  the  corre- 
sponding noun  before  the  com- 
parative. H.  643  and  a. 


243] 


ANABASIS,   /.,  7,  3-4. 


243 


243.    Translate  into  Greek. 

When  Dareios  fell  sick,  Cyrus  chanced  to  be 
in  the  province  of  which  Dareios  had  made  him 
satrap.  Accordingly  he  was  summoned,  for  the 
king  desired  to  see  both  his  sons  before  his  death. 
—  Let  us  send  for  Cyrus,  for  the  king  wishes  to 
see  him  also.  —  Cyrus  wished,  before  the  death  of 
Dareios,  to  be  king ;  but  Xenophon  does  not  be- 
lieve that  he  plotted  against  his  brother,  as  Tissa- 
phernes  affirmed.  —  We  chanced  to  be  present 
when  some  one  was  slandering  the  boy.  —  Do  not  10 
appoint  the  young  man  general,  for  if  the  enemy 
come  against  him,  he  will  not  be  able  to  conquer 
them  and  so  will  be  disgraced.  —  Whom  shall  we 
appoint  as  commander?  —  If  the  Persians  attempt 
to  enslave  Athens,  the  Greeks  will  have  better  15 
generals  and  more  effective  soldiers. 

See  236,5. 


1.  feU  sick:   inceptive  aor. 
dffOevfa.     H.  841  ;  G.  1260. 

— to  be:  supplementary  pple. 

2.  had  made :  use  the  aor. 

3.  accordingly:  remember 
that  otiv  is  postpositive. 

5.  Let  us  send  for :  horta- 
tive subjv.  in  the  aor.  See  226, 
a.  H.  866,  1 ;  G.  1344. 

6  ff.  Cyrus  wished,  etc. : 
the  antithesis  between  the  state- 
ments of  the  two  members  of 
the  sentence  should  be  indi- 
cated by  ntv  ...  5^. 

JO  f.   Do  not  appoint:  ^ 


with  the  aor.  subjv. 
H.  866,  2  ;  G.  1346. 

11  f .  if  the  enemy  come : 
a  condition  like  &v  SUVTJTCU, 
242,  8.  H.  898  ;  G.  1403.  As 
to  tense,  the  aor.  is  preferable 
here,  since  the  action  is  more 
naturally  conceived  as  merely 
occurring  than  as  continued. 

13  f.  "Whom  shall  we  ap- 
point :  deliberative  subjv.  See 
236,  c.  H.  866,  3  ;  G.  1358.  — 
as :  omit  in  Greek. 

16.  more  effective :  Kpelr- 


244  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


THE  OPTATIVE  MODE. 


[244— 


244.  The  optative  mode  has,  in  principal  clauses,1 
only  two  uses,  both  of  which  belong  in  Latin  to 
the  subjunctive. 

a.  The  optative  is  used  to  express  a  wish  that 
something   may  happen;   this   is   the   use   which 
gives  the  name  to  the  mode  (Latin  opto,  wish) : 
e\6oi  may  he  come.     Such  a  wish  always  refers  to 
future  time.     H.  870  and  d ;  G.  1507. 

b.  The  optative  is  used  with  av  as  a  less  posi- 
tive expression  for  the  future  (or  present)  indica- 
tive, and  is  translated  with  may,  might,  would,  etc. ; 
this  is  called  the  potential  optative:    e'X0ot  av  he 
would  (might)  come.     H.  872  and  b ;  G.  1327  ff. 

245.  The  tenses  of  the  optative  do  not  mark 
distinctions  of  time,  but  differ  as  those  of  the  sub- 
junctive  do   (227).     Each  tense   system   has   an 
optative,  but  the  future  optative  has  but  one  use, 
which  will  be  described  later.     There  is  no  opta- 
tive imperfect  or  pluperfect. 

4- 
246.    Optative  of  Xva>  (Xf-,  Xu-). 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE.  PASSIVE. 


Pres.  S.  1 

\V-OL-fjLL 

\v-oi-fJLrjv 

2 

Xi5-0£-5 

\V-OL-O 

3 

XU-CM 

\V-Oi-TO 

1  The  uses  of  the  optative  in  subordinate  clauses  will  be 
described  as  they  occur, 


THE  OPTATIVE  MODE.  245 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE.  PASSIVE. 


D.2 

\V-Ol-TOV 

\t-oi-aeov 

3 

\ihoi-Trjv 

\v-oi-a6riv 

P.I 

\V-Ot,-fJi€V 

\v-ol-fjL€0a 

2 

\V-OL-T€ 

\v-oi-(T0e 

3 

\v-oie~v 

\V-Ol-VTO 

Fut.   S.I 

\V-(70t,-fJL(, 

\v-croi-fJLrjv 

\v-0rj-(TO  l-fir)  v 

2 

\v-a-oi-? 

\V-(TOl-O 

\V-0T)-(TOi-0 

3 

\v-aoi 

\V-(TOl-TO 

\v-6rj-aoL-TO 

D.2 

\V'(70l-TOV 

\v-aoi,-(70ov 

\v-0tf-cro  i-a-0  ov 

3 

\v-a-oi-Trjv 

\v-croi-cr  6  r)v 

\v-0rj-a-oi-o-  0rj  v 

P.I 

\lhO-  01-/JL6V 

\V-(TOl-fJL€0a 

\v-0rj-o~o  i-/JL€0a 

2 

\V-(TO(,-T€ 

\v-croi-cr6e 

\v-0rj-a  oi-dOe 

3 

\V-(TOl€-V 

\V-(TOl-VTO 

\v-0rj-croi-VTO 

lAor.S.l 

\v-crai-/jii, 

\t-a-ai-MV 

\v-0elrj-v 

2 

\v-o-eia-s, 

\v-aai-o 

\v-6eifr]-s 

\v-a~ai-s 

3 

\v-<T€L€,\v-<rai 

\v-aai-ro 

\v-6ei-rj 

D.2 

\V-CTCU-TOV 

\v-aai-cr0ov 

\v-6el-rov, 

\v-6e  irj-rov 

3 

\v-(ral-rirjv 

\v-crai-a-0rjv 

\v-0el-Trjv, 

P.I 

\V-(TCU-fJL€V 

K«aW 

JSSZT' 

2 

\V-(TCU-T€ 

\V-(7ai-(T0€ 

\V~(/€if]~lli€V 
~\i\J~\j€lf~T€^ 

3 

\v-aeia-v, 

\v-aai~VTo 

\v-6ele-V) 

Xv-o-atc-v 

Xv-Octrj-crav 

246  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE. 


[247- 


Perf.  S.  1 

\e-\v-Koi-jJbi, 

\€-\v-fji€VO<?   elr)-v 

2 

\e-\v-KOi-s 

"            erw-9 

3 

\€-\V-KOI 

"             €irj 

D.2 

\e-\v-KOi-rov 

\€-\V-fJL6VCO      el-TOZ/,  elt)-TOV 

3 

\e-\v-fco  l-rrjv 

ec-TTjv,  elrrrnv 

P.I 

\e-\v-icoirpev 

\e-\v-fievoi,    €i-fJL€V)  eirj-^ev 

2 

\e-\v-KOi-re 

"             eZ-re,  etrf-re 

3 

\6-\v-fcot,e-v 

"             €i€-v,  efy-crav 

247.  The  mode  suffix  of  the  optative  has  four 
forms,  -£-,  -677-,  -£e-,  -ia-.  These  are  added  to  the 
tense-stem,  i  forming  a  diphthong  with  the  pre- 
ceding vowel.  Before  this  i  the  variable  vowel 
has  the  form  o,  and  in  the  perfect  active  o  is  sub- 
stituted for  the  a  of  the  indicative  tense  suffix. 
The  perfect  middle  has  only  compound  forms, 
made  up  of  the  perfect  middle  participle  and  the 
present  optative  of  efal.  H.  478,  479 ;  G.  806. 

a.  The  mode  suffix  is  -i-  always  in  the  middle, 
and  usually  in  the  active  and  passive ;  but  in  the 
third  plural  before  the  ending  -v  it  is  always  -^e-. 
In  the  singular  of  /u-tenses  (active,  and  aorist 
passive)  -irj-  is  always  used ;  in  the  plural  of  these 
tenses,  -i-  or  -^7-  may  be  used,  but  the  third  plural 
forms  in  -lycrav  are  late. 


248] 


THE  OPTATIVE  NODE. 


247 


b.  In  the  first  aorist  active  the  common  forms  of 
the  second  and  third  singular  and  the  third  plural 
are  irregular.     The  tense  suffix  here  has  e  instead 
of  a,  and  the  mode  suffix  is  -la-  in  the  second  sin- 
gular and  third  plural,  -ie-  in  the  third  singular. 

c.  The  optative  takes   the   secondary  endings, 
but  in  the  first  singular  active   after  the  mode 
suffix  -L-  the  ending  is  -fja  (after  ~ir)-,  however,  the 
ending  is  -v). 

d.  For  the  accent  of  Xkot,  Xtoxu,  \vcrat,,  \e\v/coi, 
see  EL  102,  a  and  b  ;  G.  113.     The  accent  of  \vOel- 
TOV,  \v6elfjLev,  \v6elre,  \v6elev  is  in  accordance  with 
the  rule  that  in  optatives  of  the  /it-inflection  the 
accent  cannot  stand  back  of  the  mode  suffix  -6-. 
H.  388. 

The  optative  forms  in  /u-tenses,  in  the  second  aorist,  and 
in  contract  presents,  are  shown  in  the  following  paradigms. 
In  the  tenses  not  here  given  these  verbs  are  like  the  corre- 
sponding tenses  of  Avo>. 


248.    Optative  of  um?/u  (era-, 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE. 


Pres. 


S.  1 
2 
3 

D.2 
3 


-(na-Tov  or   -crrarj-rov 


-a-ra-o 


l-crral-crOov 


248  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [249— 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE. 


P.I 

l-arairrn,       l-a-rai^ev 

l-crral-fjieda 

2 

l-arai-re         l-araiy-re 

l-aral-crOe 

3 

i-GTaie-V           i-o'Tairj-o'av 

l-crrai-VTo 

Mt-Aor.  S.  1 

(rralrj-v 

2 

/ 

a.    In  like 

3 

(IT  airj 

manner     the 

D.2 

3 

(rrai-Tov  or  o-ralrj-rov 
o-rai-rrjv        o-rairj-Trjv 

/xt-aorist  opta- 
tive of  /2aiVo> 
(/3a-,  )8av-)  is 

P.I 

~                      ' 

j8a«y-v,  /3airj-s, 

2 

aral-re          crraLrj-re 

etc. 

3 

(7Tai€-V           CTTairj-vav 

249.    Optative  of  jiyvmcncco  (71*0-,  °/va)-~). 

ACTIVE. 


Mt-Aor.  S.  1 
2 
3 

D.2 
3 

P.I 

2 
3 


ryvo-rov  or 

ryvoi-rrjv 

ryvoi-/jiev 


yvorj-re 


250] 


THE  OPTATIVE  NODE. 


249 


250.    Optative  of  o-re'XXo)  (o-reX-,  0-raX-). 
ACTIVE.  MIDDLE. 


IstAor.S.  1 

2 


D.2 

3 

P.I 

2 
3 


oreiX-ai 


0-rctX-atc-v 


erretX-at-ro 
<TT€i\-ai,-(rdov 


ffT€t,\-ai-fieda 
<TT€i\-ai-cr0e 


PASSIVE. 


2d  Aor.  S.  1 
2 
3 

D.2 
3 

P.I 

2 
3 


or 


<7TO,\-€L-fjL€V 
<TTa\-€L-T€ 


250 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[251— 


251.    Optative  of 


ACTIVE. 


(\ay8-,  X??/?-). 
MIDDLE. 


2dAor.  S.  1 
2 
3 

D.  2 
3 

P.  1 
2 
3 


Xay8-ot 
\aj3-ol-T7jv 

\d/3-OL-T€ 


Xa/3-ot-ro 

\df3-oi-crdov 

Xa/3-o  i-<T0r]v 

\a/3-oi-/Ji€0a 

\djS-ot-o-6e 

\d/3-oi-vro 


2dPerf.S.  1 
2 
3 

D.  2 
3 

P.I 
2 
3 


252.    Present  Optative  of  vl/cdco  (mica-*). 
ACTIVE.  MIDDLE. 


s.i 

2 
3 


V~uc(a-Ol)<p 


vl/c  (a-o  /)  w 
vl/c(d-oi)q)~o 


253] 


THE  OPTATIVE  NODE.  251 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE. 


D.  2 
3 

P.  1 

2 
3 


vlic  (a-o  L)O)-TOV 
VLK  (a-o  C)(p-Triv 


(a-o  i  )  GO-O-  0rj  v 


253.   Present  Optative  of  <f>i\ea) 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE. 


s.  i 

2 
3 

D.  2 
3 

P.  1 

2 
3 


^t\(e-oi)owy-1'  or 
e-ot')oM/-?  or 
<f>i\(_e-oC).ofa)  or 


€-0      0  - 


252 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[254— 


254.    Present  Optative  of  Sov\dco  (SouXo-). 
ACTIVE.  MIDDLE. 


s.  i 

2 
3 

D.  2 
3 

P.  1 

2 
3 


Soi>X(o-o/)o/?7-z>  or 
So v\ (0-01)0/77-9  or 
SouX(o-o')o/?7  or 


Sou  X  (o-o  t  )  o  t-fjLrjv 


SouX  (o-ot)  ol-vro 


255.  ^N"o  further  special  vocabularies  will  be  given; 
henceforth  the  learner  should  look  for  new  words  at  the  end 
of  the  book.  Further,  on  each  lesson  the  learner  should 
make  out  for  himself,  from  the  general  vocabulary,  a  list  on 
the  model  of  the  special  vocabularies  hitherto  given,  though 
it  is  not  necessary  to  put  the  words  in  alphabetical  order. 
This  list  should  contain  all  words,  with  their  meanings, 
which  the  pupil  was  obliged  to  look  up,  and  should  be  thor- 
oughly committed  to  memory,  so  that  the  English  can  be 
given  from  the  Greek  or  the  Greek  from  the  English,  aloud. 
By  following  this  plan  on  every  lesson,  it  will  be  found  that 
one's  vocabulary  is  rapidly  increasing,  until  a  whole  page 
will  furnish  a  shorter  list  than  a  single  section  did  at  first. 
In  learning  such  lists,  one  should  always  associate  together 
words  which  are  related  in  derivation  or  meaning. 


256] 


ANABASIS,  I.,  2,  5-7. 


253 


256.  Anabasis,  L,  1,  5-7. 

5.  f/O(7T£9  8'  a^HKvelro  r&v  irapa  y8a<r£\e&)9  TT/OO? 
Trdvras    ovra)    SiarcOel?    aTreTre/XTrero 


coare 


avrcp  fjia\\ov  <f)i\ov$  eLvai  77 
eaurft)    Se    /3ap/3dpcov 
ifcavol   elriaav  /cal   evvoiK&s 


1.  &O-TIS  :  learn  H.  280  and 
a  ;     G.    425-427.  —  TWV    irapd 
pa<ri\€ws :  lit.  of  those  from  the 
king ;  the  motion  expressed  in 
d<J>lKveiTo  leads  the  Greek  to  use 
with  irapd  the  case  which  will 
continue  to  suggest  the  same 
motion  from  the  king ;  English 
idiom  would  lead  us  to  expect 
rCov  irapa  /SacriXe?,  and  we  should 
translate    of   those    at    court. 
/Sao-tXetfs,  when  used  of  the  king 
of  Persia,  regularly  omits  the 
article,  being  thought  of  almost 
as  a  proper  name. 

2.  SiariGcis :  for  $ia-ri-0e-j>T-s, 
pres.  act.  pple.  nom.  sing.  masc. 
of  5ia-Tl0t)iJLL  dispose  (Lat.  dis- 
pono),  bring  into  a  certain  dis- 
position. —  dir€ir^ir€TO :    indir. 
mid.,  sentfaom  himself,  let  go. 
Note  that  the  rel.  clause  pre- 
cedes the  antec.  irdvras,  as  is 
more  often  the  case  in  both 
Greek  and  Latin ;  also  that  5ta- 
riOels  is  more  prominent  than 
direTr^fjLTreTo.      We   should    say 
rather,  brought  them  all  into 
such  a  disposition  before  dis- 
missing them.    It  was  part  of 


irap 

ft>9    7roXe/*,e£i>    re 
ejfoiev   avTu>.      6.    rrjv 

his  plan  to  win  over  to  his 
cause  as  many  nobles  and  cour- 
tiers as  he  could.  The  imperf. 
here,  as  in  d</>t/cvetro,  denotes 
repetition  of  the  act. 

3.  avrcp :  dat.  with  </>fXous. 
H.  765;  G.  1174.  — ctvai:  werre 
denoting  result  takes  the  in- 
die, or  the  inf.  H.  927 ;  G.  1449, 
1450. 

3  f.    Kal   Ttav   trap'    CCLVTW  Sc 

since  5^  is  the  conj., 
must  here  be  an  adv.  irap* 
lit.  beside  him,  that  is, 
at  his  court,  dt  is  farther  than 
usual  from  the  beginning  of  the 
clause.  The  gen.  is  governed 
by  <?7re/xeXerTo.  H.  742 ;  G.  1102. 

4  f .  <os  .  .  .  €iT](rav,  .  . .  k'xoicv  : 
for  the  opt.  see  H.  881 ;  G.  1362, 
1365.    Xenophon  is  fond  of  als 
to  introduce  purpose  clauses; 
other  Attic  prose  writers  em- 
ploy  ws   very   rarely   in   this 
way.     See  vocab.  under  ws. — 
evvotKws  €\oi€v:    equivalent  to 
evvol'Kol   et^ffav.      £xw   with   an 
adv.  frequently  has  the  force 
of  dpi  with  an  adj.    See  vocab. 
under  exw. 


254 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[256— 


eSvvaro 

OTTCD?  on,  aTrapacTKevdrarov  \d(3oi, 
J3a<ri\ea.     a>8e  ovv  eTTOielro  rrjv  <rv\\oy)jv.     oTrocra? 
eZ^e  (f>v\a,Ka$  ev  rat?  ir6\€crt,  7raptfyyei\€  rot?  </>pov- 
10  pdp^ot,?  e/cdo-Tois  \apl3dvew  avSpas 


6  f .   a>s  .  .  .  €irncp\nrr6ji,€vos : 

lit.  concealing  himself  as  he 
most  could ;  that  is,  as  secretly 
as  he  could.  Cf.  188,  I.,  11. 
From  such  phrases  as  cJs  / 
Xicrra  t5vva.ro  arises,  by  omis- 
sion of  the  form  of  5wa/xcu,  the 
practice  of  using  ws  and  6'n 
with  the  sup.  to  denote  the 
highest  possible  degree  of  a 
quality.  So  8n  airoipaffKCvb 
TOV  (7)  as  unprepared  as  possi- 
ble, STL  ir\€t(7Tovs  /cat  /SeXr/trrous 
(11)  as  many  and  brave  as  pos- 
sible. 

7.  oircos :  here  used  like  ws, 
as  often  in  Xenophon,  to  intro- 
duce a  purpose  clause.      The 
common  prose  word  for  this  is 
Iva.  —  XdjSoi :   cf.  efytrav,  exoiev 
(5)  and  note. 

8.  «8€:    thus,   referring  to 
what  follows;  adv.  of  manner 
from  85e  this,  as  ourws  is  the 
adv.  of  manner  from  OVTOS  this, 
that.    Learn  H.  271,  272  and  c ; 
G.  409.     ode  =  Lat.  hie}  OVTOS  = 
Lat.  is,  ^60/0$  =  Lat.  ille.  —  &TTOI- 
€iro  :  indir.  mid.  —  6ir6<rds :  in- 
def.  rel.  pron.  corresponding  to 
trot  (see  225,  8);  H.  282;  G. 


429 ;  in  the  table  the 
iroffbs,  T0(r6<rde,  TOVOVTOS,  3<ro5, 
6ir6(ros.  It  is  easier  to  remem- 
ber these  common  words  if  one 
groups  them  together,  noting 
carefully  their  likeness  and  un- 
likeness  in  form  and  meaning. 
In  this  sentence  observe  that 
again  the  rel.  clause  precedes 
the  antec.  Lit.  how  many  gar- 
risons he  had  in  the  cities,  he 
ordered  the  commandants  each 
to  take,  etc.  We  should  re- 
verse the  order  of  the  clauses, 
and  say,  he  ordered  the  com- 
mandants of  all  the  garrisons, 
which  he  had,  etc. 

10.     avSpas  :      from     dv/ip. 
Learn  the  declension  of  iraT-fjp, 

TTTJp,     6vy&TT)p,     CLV7)p.        H.   188, 

189 ;  G.  274,  1 ;  278.  At  the 
close  of  the  Peloponnesian  war, 
404  B.C.,  large  bodies  of  men, 
especially  Peloponnesians,  who 
had  spent  many  years  in  a  sol- 
dier's life,  were  thrown  out  of 
the  employment  to  which  they 
were  most  accustomed.  They 
were  ready,  therefore,  to  hire 
themselves  out  to  any  one  who 
would  pay  them  and  give  them 


256] 


ANABASIS,  /.,  7,  5-7. 


255 


OTI  7r\e/(TTOU9  fcal  /8e\T/a*TOf99  ft>9 
Tt,<r<7a<j>epvov<;  rals  7ro\ecn.  KOI  jap  rjcrav  at  'Icovt,- 
KCLI  7roXe£9  Ticro-acfrepvovs  TO  ap^alov,  e/c  ftacriXecos 
SeSoytteW^,  TOT€  S'  afaicrTtf/cecrav  777309  Kvpoz/  Tracrat, 

those  opportunities  for  plunder 
which  accompanied  war.  Thus 
it  was  easy  for  Cyrus  and  his 
lieutenants  to  get  together  large 
mercenary  forces  of  Greeks, 
whom  he  knew  to  be  far  better 
soldiers  than  the  Persians,  not 
only  in  equipment  and  tactics, 
but  above  all  in  courage,  intel- 
ligence, and  fidelity. 

11.  irX€(<TTOvs:  sup.   of  TTO- 
Xvs;  H.254,  5;  G.361,8.  —  ws: 
has  here,  with  ^Trt/SouXeuo^ros,  a 
force  to  which  there  is  no  an- 
alogy in  English.     It  indicates 
that  the  statement  in  &ri/3ou- 
Xeuovros  Tt<T(ra<t>£pvovs  is  given, 
not  as  the  writer's,  but  as  made 
by  some  one  else ;  who  that  is 
we  are  to  infer  from  the  con- 
text ;   in  this  case  Cyrus.     cJs 
with  the  pple.  very  often  has 
this  effect,  marking  the  pple. 
as  hi  a  sort  of  indir.  discourse. 
Render,  asserting  that  Tissa- 
phernes,  etc.     The  gen.  abs. 
here  denotes  cause. 

12.  teal  -ydp :  a  frequent  com- 
bination, like  Lat.  etenim.    Or- 
iginally the  expression  involved 
an  ellipsis,  as,  and  (he  could 
reasonably    give    this    excuse) 
for;   but  the  omitted   clause 


was  not  usually  thought  of  dis- 
tinctly, and  it  would  be  clumsy 
to  supply  it  in  Eng.  It  is  gen- 
erally best,  therefore,  to  leave 
that  and  the  Kal  to  be  under- 
stood, translating  only  the  ydp. 
—  rjo-av  :  the  effect  of  the  posi- 
tion may  be  given  by  translat- 
ing :  belonged  in  fact  to  Tissa- 
phernes  originally. 

13.  Tur<ra4>^pvovs  :     pred. 
gen.  denoting  possession.  —  rd 
dpxaiov:   neut.   adj.   used  ad- 
verbially  (H.   719  and   6;   G. 
1060),  about  equiv.  to  #  dpxfjs 
(188,  I.,  2).  — IK  Pcuri\&>s:  lit. 
from  the  king,  instead  of  the 
more  usual  vir6  /3a<rt\^w$. 

14.  8e8ofj.€vaL :  from  dtSufu. 
Even  without  knowing  the  full 
conjugation,  the  formation  of 
this  word  is  clear  when  it  is 
seen  that  do-  is  the  theme  ;  cf . 
\e-\v-ptvai.   The  passage  shows 
that  these  Greek  cities  along 
the  coast  were  not  included  in 
Cyrus's  satrapy,  but  remained 
subject  to  Tissaphernes.    They 
knew   they  would   be    better 
treated  by  Cyrus,  and  it  was 
for  his  interest  to  have  control 
of  the  seacoast.     Perhaps  he 
had  stirred  them  up  to  revolt. 


256  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [256— 

15  7T\rjv  MF\T;TOU  •    7.  ev  MZX?;rou  Se  Ticro'atyepvrjs  irpo- 
aiaQo^VQ^  ra  avra  ravra  /3oiA,euo///eVou9,  arKOdfrr\vai 
v,  TO t/9  ///ez/  aTrercreive  rou9  8*  e%efta\ev.    o  Se 
/  TOU9  <f)€vyovras  crvX\e^d^  crrpdrev^a 
€7ro\c6p/c€i  M.i\r)TOv  /cal  /cara  ryrjv  Kal  Kara  daXarrav 
20  Kal  €7T€ipdTo  Kardj€LV  TOU9  eKTreTTTcoKoras.     Kal  avrrj 


av  aXX?; 


rjv 


rov  aOpoi^ 


16.  TO,  avrd  raOra :  obj.  of 
the  following  pple. ;  pi.  because 
the  Greek  conceived  of  the  re- 
volt as  made  up  of  many  sepa- 
rate acts.     We  conceive  of  it 
rather  as  a  whole,  and  should 
use  the  sing.  —  povXcvojicvovs : 
supplementary    pple.   agreeing 
with    the  understood    obj.    of 
Trpoaurebnevos.     H.  980,  982  ;  G. 
1578,    1582.  —  diroo-Tfjvai  :    in 
apposition  with  rd  atrd. 

17.  TOVS  fxev,  TOVS  B€  :  cf .  174, 
I.,  12,  and  see  H.  654 ;  G.  981. 

18.  v-iroXapcov:    taking  un- 
der his  protection.  —  TOVS  <j>cv- 
•yovras:    in  most  Greek  cities 
revolutions  occurred  often,  and 
were  generally  followed  by  the 
banishment  of  leading    mem- 
bers   of    the    defeated    party. 
Hence  exiles,   endeavoring  to 
get  back  home  by  one  means 
or  another,  were  familiar  fig- 
ures in  Greek  life  everywhere, 
and  there  were  several  com- 
mon expressions  to  denote  men 
in  that  situation.     The  pple. 


used  as  a  noun,  was 
one  such  term. 

20.  Kard-yctv :  the  verb  reg- 
ularly used  of  one  who  restored 
such  exiles  to  their  homes,  as 
/car^pxo/xat  was  regularly  used 
of  the  exiles  themselves  who  re- 
turned ;  Kard  in  both  verbs  has 
come  to  mean  practically  to  their 
homes. — CKireirrcoKOTas :  the  syl- 
lables -K6ras  mark  the  word  as  a 
perf  .act.  pple.  in  the  ace.  pi.  mas. 
It  is  from  ^/cTrt7rrco,usedvirtually 
as  the  pass,  of  e/c/3dXXw,  and  is 
another  common  term  for  exiles. 

21.  irpo<t>ao-is :  without  the 
article,  therefore  avrrj  does  not 
agree  with  it  directly  (see  H. 
673 ;  G.  974),  hence  irpt><t>a<ns  is 
^predicate  noun.  H.  669 ;  G.  956. 
avTT]  is  attracted  to  the  gender  of 
the  predicate  noun.     H.  632,  a. 
Translate  freely,  in  this,  again, 
he  had,  etc. — TOV:  shows  that 
the  clause  d6pol£eiv  (rrpdrevfjia  is 
a  noun  in  the  gen.  depending 
on   irp6(f>a(rLs ;   we   should  say, 
pretext  for  gathering  an  army. 


258] 


THE 


MODE. 


257 


THE  IMPERATIVE  MODE. 

257.  The  imperative  represents  the  action  as 
commanded :  Xeye  speak.  There  is  an  imperative 
in  every  present  and  aorist  system,  and  in  the  per- 
fect when  that  denotes  a  continued  state.  The 
perfect  middle  so  often  has  this  force  that  it  regu- 
larly makes  an  imperative ;  the  perfect  active  has 
one  in  comparatively  few  verbs. 

a.  The  distinction  in  meaning  between  the  pres- 
ent and  aorist  imperative  is  the  same  as  in  the 
subjunctive  and  optative  (see  227,  245).  By  its 
nature,  a  command  in  any  tense  necessarily  refers 
to  future  time. 


258.   Imperative  of  \VCD  (Xv-,  \u-). 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE.  PASSIVE. 


Pres.  S.  2 
3 

\V-€ 
\V-e-TG) 

\v-ov 
\v-e-a-0a) 

D.2 

3 

\V-€-TOV 

\v-e-rwv 

\v-e-cr0ov 

\V-€-(T0a)V 

P.  2 

3 

\V-€-T€ 

\v-6-VTC0v  or 
Av-e-Toxrai/ 

\v-e-crOe 
\v-e-cr6  (ov  or 
Xv-€-<r0<j)(rcLv 

lAor.S.  2 
3 

\v-aov 
\v-crd-TO) 

\v-crai 
\v-o-d-a0a) 

\V-01J-Tl, 
\V-0rj-TG) 

258  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [259— 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE.  PASSIVE. 


lAor.D.2 
3 

\v-aa-Tov 
\v-<rd-TO)v 

\v-cra-cr0ov 
\v-ad-a-0a)V 

\v-0rj-rov 

\V-0tf-TCOV 

P.  2 

3 

\v-ara-T€ 
\v-ad-vrci)  v  or 
\v-(ra-T(ticrav 

\v-cr  a-(70€ 
\v-a-  d-(T0a)V  or 
Xv-o'd-o'Owcrav 

\v-0rj-re 
\v-0e-VTC0v  or 

Xv-Orj-T<J)<TCLV 

Perf.   S.  2 
3 

\€-\V-(70 
\€-\V-(T0CO 

D.2 
3 

\4-\v-crOov 

\€-\V-(T0Q)V 

P.  2 
3 

\€-\V-<T0€ 

\€-\v-(T0a)v  or 
\e-\v-crOa)<Tav 

259.    Imperative  of 
ACTIVE. 


(o-ra-,  <rrr)-). 
MIDDLE.        PASSIVE. 


Pres.      S.  2 

lorn 

i-crra-ao 

3 

l-o-rd-ra) 

l-(TTd-a-0a> 

D.2 

i-ara-Tov 

i/~(frc(/~&t/ov 

3 

l-o-rd-TW 

l~&TCL'~O?\sCt)V 

P.  2 

i-ara-Te 

i'O-Ta-o-06 

3 

l-crrd-VTCov  or 

l-(TTd-cr0a)v  or 

t-crra-Tcocrav 

i-a-Td-o-Oaxrav 

260]  THE  IMPERATIVE  MODE.  259 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE.        PASSIVE. 


IstAor.S.  2 
3 


a-rrj-crov 

<TT7]-(rd-TG) 

etc.,  as  in  AT; d>. 


etc. 


ard-Orj-Ti 

-Olj 

etc. 


M*-Aor.S.  2 
3 

D.2 
3 

P.  2 

3 


(7T1-TOi) 

(TTT^TOV 
(TTIJ-TCQV 


M*-Perf.S.2 
3 

D.2 
3 

P.  2 
3 


e-crra-ra) 

e-ara-Tov 
e-o-rd-rcov 

e-o-ra-re 


260.  The  formation  of  the  imperative  is  best 
seen  in  the  /u-tenses.  The  imperative  has  no 
mode  suffix,  but  takes  personal  endings  which 
are  in  part  different  from  those  of  the  other 
finite  modes;  these  distinguish  the  forms  clearly 
enough. 


260  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [260— 

a.  The  imperative  endings  are : 

Active.  Middle. 

So  2        -0i  -era 

3  -TO)  -(700) 

D.  2         -TOP  -<r0ov 

3  -TG)l>  -(T0a)V 

P.  2         -re  -<70e 

3  -VTCOV  (-Toxrav)         -(r0(DV  (-crtfaxrav) 

The  endings  -roxjai/  and  -crtftocrav  are  not  found  in  Attic 
until  a  late  period. 

b.  The  endings  are  added  to  the  tense  stem  as 
it  appears  in  the  indicative   (of  course  without 
augment).     Variable- vowel  stems  have  -o-  before 
-VTW,  elsewhere  -e-. 

c.  After  the  variable  vowel,  -61  is  dropped ;  -o-o 
loses  o-  between  vowels,  and  e-o  contract  to  -ov. 
In  /it-presents  -0i  is  omitted  and  the  stem  vowel 
lengthened.     In  the  first  aorist  passive  -0i  become 
-TL  after  -#?;-,  to  prevent  two  successive  syllables 
from  beginning  with  an  aspirate. 

d.  In  //,£-aorists,  active  voice,  and  in  the  aorist 
passive  (which  has  active  endings),  the  stem  vowel 
is  long  before  one  consonant,  short  before  two. 
Of.  170,  d. 

e.  The  first  aorist  second  singular  active  and 
middle   are   irregular,   and   the    explanation    un- 
known. 

/.  Instead  of  the  first  perfect  of  timy/u  is  found 


THE  IMPERATIVE  MODE. 


261 


a  second  perfect  of  the  pi-form,  or  /u-perfect,  with- 
out tense  suffix.  It  consists  of  the  reduplicated 
theme,  in  the  short  form,  with  the  ending  un- 
changed. It  means  be  standing,  etc. 

Other  common  forms  of  the  imperative  are  shown  in  the 
following  paradigms. 

261.   Mi-Aorist  Imperative  of  yiyvcoo-fco)  (fyvo-,  yvco-). 


S.  2 
3 

D.  2 
3 

P.  2 
3 


ryvco-rcov 

7Z/W-T6 


or  yvo>-Ta)<rav 


262,   Aorist  Imperative  of  crreXXa)  (o-reX-,  <rraX-). 
ACTIVE.  MIDDLE.  PASSIVE. 


S.  2 
3 

D.2 

3 

P.  2 
3 


<7T€t\-a-TO) 

crretX-a-Tov 


crre/X-a-re 
(TT€i\-d-VTa)v  or 
OTeiA-a-rcocrav 


crretX-a-cr$ft> 
ffreC\-a-<rdov 


<TT€i\-a-(70€ 

G"r€L\-d-cr6wv  or 
(rretX-a-cr^cacrav 


(TTa\-e-VTC0v  or 
<TTaX-i7-TO)crav 


262  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [263— 

263.  Second  Aorist  Imperative  of  \anf$dvc0  (Xa/3-, 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


S.  2 
3 

Xa/3-e 
Xa/3-e-ra) 

Xa/3-oO 
Xa/3-e-cr#a> 

D.  2 
3 

Xa/3-e-roz/ 
Xay8-e-Tft>z/ 

\d/3-e-(T0QV 
\a/3-e-(70ct)v 

P.  2 
3 

Xa/3-e-re 
\a/3-6-vrcov  or 
Aa^-e-raxrav 

Xa/3-e-a-(9€ 
\ap-e-<T0a)v  or 
Xa/3-€-crOoio-av 

a.  The  second  aorist  imperative  second  singular 
accents  the  end  of  the  stem  (1)  regularly  in  the 
middle :  \af3ov  (for  Xa/3-e-cro) ;  (2)  in  five  active 
forms,  of  which  e'X0-e  and  Xa^S-e  are  two.  (The 
others  belong  to  verbs  that  have  not  yet  occurred 
in  this  book.) 

264.  Present  Imperative  of  m/cdo)  (vl/ca-). 
ACTIVE.  MIDDLE. 


S.  2 
3 

D.  2 
3 


vlic  (a-e)  d-a~0a) 


vl/c  (a-e  )  a-a  dco  v 


266]  THE  IMPERATIVE  MODE.  263 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE. 


P.  2 
3 


vlfc(a-6^)(i)-VTCov  or 
viK(a-e)  a-raxrav 


vlK(a-e)a-cr6<i)v  or 


265.  Present  Imperative  of  <f)i,\eco 

ACTIVE.  MIDDLE. 


S.  2 
3 

D.  2 

3 

P.  2 
3 


)  et-raxrav 


266.  Present  Imperative  of  Sov\dco  (SouXo-). 
ACTIVE.  MIDDLE. 


S.  2 
3 

D.  2 

3 

P.  2 
3 


Bov  X  (o-e  )  ou-rct) 
Sou  X(o-e)  ov-rov 


o\)uX(o-o/)ov-z>T&>z>  or 
SovX  (  o-e)  ov-ro)crav 


SouX(o-e)  OV-CT0Q) 

Sov\(6-e)ov-a0ov 


Sov\(d-e)ov-(r06 
§ov\(o-e)ov-crO(DV  or 
8ovX(o-€) 


264 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[267— 


267.    Perfect  Middle  Imperative  of  Consonant 
Themes. 


<rr 


,  0-raX-)  . 


S.  2 
3 

D.  2 

3 

P.  2 
3 


e-<7raX-<7o 


€~(TTa\r00V 


€-<TT(i\-6a)V  or 


Tre-Trela-ffcov  or 


vct)  (Xa/3-,  XTyyS-) . 


S.  2 
3 

D.  2 
3 

P.  2 
3 


el-\r}<l)-6tt>v  or 


or 
Se-Set^-^axrav 


a.  The  euphonic  changes  in  the  imperative  are  the  same 
as  those  in  the  indicative;  see  215,  217,  220,  196,  b,  (1). 

268.  The  entire  conjugation  of  the  regular  verb  has  now 
been  given,  except  the  future  perfect  (which  does  not  occur 
often  and  is  very  simple),  the  verbals,  and  some  less  com- 


268]  THE  IMPERATIVE  MODE.  265 

mon  forms  of  icrrrjfu.  The  learner  should  now  accustom 
himself  to  grouping  the  forms  of  each  verb  in  complete  syn- 
opses, similar  to  those  already  given  in  this  book,  but  with 
the  subjunctive,  optative,  and  imperative  added.  Let  Avo> 
be  taken  as  the  first  model,  H.  313 ;  G.  474.  For  the  future 
perfect  middle,  see  H.  318  (p.  89),  466  and  a;  G.  474  (p.  97 
at  the  bottom)  and  703.  For  the  verbals,  see  H.  475 ;  G.  776. 
(The  future  perfect  and  the  verbals  need  not  be  insisted 
upon  until  they  are  met  in  reading.)  Next  the  synopsis  of 
£cm//u  should  be  taken  in  hand,  omitting  for  the  present  the 
second  perfect  forms,  except  in  the  imperative,  H.  351; 
G.  509.  For  the  peculiar  future  perfect  active  in  this  verb, 
see  H.  467 ;  G.  705.  Note  that  the  tense  called  in  this  book 
fu-aorist  is  called  in  the  Grammars  second  aorist  of  the  pi-form. 
This  longer  designation  amounts  to  the  same  thing ;  but  it 
seems  unnecessary  to  add  the  word  second,  and  the  shorter 
term,  while  equally  descriptive  and  more  convenient,  avoids 
confusion  with  the  totally  different  second  aorists  like  IAa- 
/3ov.  (If  Goodwin's  Grammar  is  used,  it  will  be  necessary 
for  the  teacher  to  assist  in  making  out  the  synopsis  of 
to-TT/^t.)  Next  may  be  taken  SCIKVU/U,  H.  352 ;  present 
system,  £1.  332.  (If  Goodwin's  Grammar  is  used,  it  will 
again  be  necessary  for  the  teacher  to  assist  in  making  out 
the  synopsis.)  To  these  may  be  added  i/t/cao>  on  the  model  of 
rlfjuio),  H.  337 ;  <£tAeco  and  Trote'to,  H.  339  ;  SovA.oo>  and  877X60), 
H.  341 ;  crrcAXa),  H.  342 ;  TretUo,  H.  347.  (These  synopses  are 
not  given  in  G.,  but  can  easily  be  made  out  for  the  class 
by  the  teacher.)  Next  Aa//,/3avo>  and  other  common  verbs 
should  be  written  out  in  the  same  way;  for  it  is  of  great 
importance  that  each  verb  should  be  clearly  understood,  in  its 
formation,  as  a  whole.  It  is  worth  while  to  spend  enough 
time  in  review  at  this  point  to  accomplish  that  end,  the 
details  of  the  review  naturally  varying  according  to  the  cir- 
cumstances of  the  class, 


266  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 

Also  in  reading  the  remaining  sections  of  the  Anabasis 
in  this  book,  care  should  be  taken  not  to  read  too  fast,  due 
regard  being  paid  to  the  number  of  new  words  occurring 
and  the  amount  of  grammatical  work  involved.  For  a  con- 
siderable time  to  come,  alongside  of  the  task  of  learning 
new  words,  it  is  important  that  the  pupil  should  gradually 
be  systematizing  his  knowledge  of  grammar,  grouping  to- 
gether, whenever  possible,  what  were  first  learned  as  isolated 
facts;  only  thus  can  grammatical  facts  and  principles  be 
held  in  such  form  as  to  be  of  practical  use.  Hints  to  this 
end  will  be  given  in  the  notes ;  but  a  large  amount  of  read- 
ing must  be  done  before  the  end  can  be  fully  reached.  Set 
reviews  of  the  declensions  and  conjugations  in  the  Grammar 
used  by  the  class  will  of  course  be  necessary ;  but  the  exact 
time  and  amount  of  this  review  will  vary  with  different 
classes,  and  are  best  left  to  the  judgment  of  the  teacher. 

269.   Translate  into  Greek. 

Arrest  the  man  and  put  him  to  death,  for  he 
has  plotted  against  the  king.  —  Let  us  go  away 
and  consider  how  we  may  never  again  be  thus  dis- 
graced.—  Let  us  give  our  attention  to  the  sol- 
diers, that  they  may  be  both  capable  of  making 


1.  Arrest . * .  put  to  death : 

use  the  aor.  impv.  The  rule 
for  exceptional  accent  of  Xa/3<? 
does  not  apply  to  compounds ; 
the  accent  in  both  impvs.  of 
this  sentence  is  recessive. 

2.  Let  us  go  away,  etc.  : 
hortative  subjv. 

3.  never:  since  the  nega- 
tion is  here  willed, 


be  used  instead  of  OUTTOTC.     H. 
1018,  1021 ;  G.  1610. 

4.  Let  us  give  our  atten- 
tion to :  express  by  one  word, 
which  governs  the  gen. 

5.  that  they  may  be,  etc.  : 
since  this  purpose  clause  does 
not  depend  upon  a  past  tense, 
the   mode  to  be  used  is  the 
subjv.,  H.  881  j  G.  1365, 


ANABASIS,  I.,  1,  5-2 


267 


war  and  friendly  to  the  city.  —  May  lie  never 
again  be  in  danger.  —  He  would  never  again  be  in 
danger.  —  We  had  many  garrisons  in  the  cities, 
but  all  revolted  to  the  enemy.  —  They  are  plan- 
ning how  they  can  revolt  to  the  enemy.  —  When  10 
Cyrus  was  arrested,  and  was  about  to  die,  his 
mother  begged  him  off.  —  Let  them  collect  the 
Greek  force  as  secretly  as  they  can,  that  we  may 
catch  the  king  as  unprepared  as  possible. 

this  sentence  expressed  by  ov- 
Trore. 

8  f.  We  had  ...  but  aU 
revolted  :  the  Greek  would 
mark  the  contrast  by  pkv  .  .  . 
9*. 

10.    how  they  can:    use 


6  f .  May  he  ...  be :  a  wish, 
therefore  hi  the  opt.  H.  870 ; 
G.  1507.  A  wish  is  always  an 
expression  of  will;  hence  the 
neg.  in  a  wish  must  be  ^.  H. 
1020 ;  G.  1610,  end. 

7.  He  would  never,  etc. : 


use  the  potential  opt.,  with  the 
particle  &v.  This  word  &v  can- 
not be  separately  translated 
into  Eng. ;  it  is  always  post- 
positive, and  is  inclined  to  stand 
after  some  rather  prominent 
word ;  a  favorite  position  is 
after  a  negative.  Never  is  in 


the  fut. 

12.  Let  them  collect:  use 

the  impv.,  with  the  idiom  seen 
in  256,  6  f. ;  the  pple.  here  must 
be  plural. 

13  f .  that  we  may  catch : 
present  purpose  ;  therefore  the 
subjv. 


270.  Anabasis,  I.,  1,  8-11. 

8TT      ^  5*\/O  "v    '  ""  f  '  f*  ^ 

.  11/009   oe   pacrtXea  TrefiTrwv  rj^iov 

avrov  SoOrjvcu  ol  ravras  ra9  7r6\ei,$  fia\\ov  rj 

1.  riJCov :  from  the  meaning  but  these  two  must  be  carefully 

deem  worthy  or  fitting  is  devel-  distinguished  from   <?/owrdw.  — 

oped  the  meaning  ask  as  proper  wv :  which  use  of  the  pple.  ? 
or  fair,  as  here.     In  this  use        2.  SoOfjvcu:  without  knowing 

differs  little  from  a^T^w,  the  full  inflection  of  dldufu  one 


268 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[270— 


avTO)V)  /cai  i]  jjujriyp  crvveTrparrev 
ravra  •    ware  ftacri\€v<$  rrjv  /j,ev  Trpb?  eavrov 
5    €7Ti/3ov\r)v    OVK    rjcrOdvero,    ^icraafyepvei    Se 
TroKefJLOVVTa  avrov  a/Ji^l  ra  arparev/juara 
W(JT€  ovSev  ij^Oero  avr&v  7ro\€/j,ovvra)V.     Kal  jap  6 


can  easily  distinguish  the  three 
elements  of  do-Orj-vai,,  and  see 
that  it  is  an  aor.  pass.  inf.  The 
clause  dodTjvai .  .  .  ir6\eis  is  the 
obj.  of  ii&ov. — ol :  learn  the  de- 
clension in  H.  261,  third  col.;  G. 
389,  third  col.  The  forms  o 5,  of,  2, 
<r<}>lcrL  are  enclitic,  but  ol  is  here 
accented  because  emphasized 
by  the  contrast  with  Ti<r<ra<j>{p- 
vf\v.  In  Attic  prose  this  pron. 
is  always  reflexive.  H.  685 ;  G. 
987.  eaury  might  have  been 
used  instead.  —  ravrds  :  note 
the  position.  H.  673 ;  G.  974. 

3.  apx«iv  avrwv:  the  pres. 
tense  denotes  continuance : 
should  continue  to  rule  them. 
The  passage  shows  that  these 
cities  were  still  nominally  a 
part  of  Tissaphernes'  prov- 
ince. We  receive  a  vivid  im- 
pression of  the  looseness  of  the" 
king's  authority,  when  two 
governors  and  their  subjects 
could  carry  on  such  a  war  with- 
out interference  from  the  king, 
while  each  was  appealing  to 
him  for  support. 

3  f.  crvWirpaTT€v  avr<5  ravra: 
lit.  was  doing  these  things  with 


him;  that  is,  was  acting  with 
him  in  this.  For  atfry,  see  H. 
775;  G.  1179. 

4.  irpos  lavrov  :  has  the  same 
force  with  tirLpov^v  which  the 
simple  dat.  has  with  ^Tri/SoiAetfo;. 

5  f.  Ticr<ra<|>€pv€i  Tro\ep.ovv- 
ra:  phrase  contrasted  with  T^V 
Trpbs  eavrov  eTri/SouX^v,  this  con- 
trast being  marked  by  ptv  and 
§<?.  To  give  due  prominence  in 
English  to  these  phrases,  we 
should  put  them  at  the  end  of 
their  respective  members,  trans- 
lating in  the  order:  /3a<riXei)s 
otf/c  'QffOdvero  TTJV  .  .  .  ^TTL^OV\I^V 
and  avrbv  dairavdv  d/x0i  rd 


This  natural  Eng.  order  would 
be  bad  Greek  order,  because  it 
would  suggest  a  false  empha- 
sis; it  is  given  only  to  make 
clear  the  difference.  —  €v6|u£€  : 
this  verb  takes  a  dependent  inf. 
with  subj.  ace.  The  synopsis 
of  the  entire  verb  is  like  that 
of  Kofdfa  H.  348. 

7.  ov5ev:  learn  the  declen- 
sion of  efs  and  ovdels  and  wdets, 
H.  290  and  a;  G.  375,  378. 
While  eft  has  the  circumflex, 


270] 


ANABASIS,  I.,  1,  8-11. 


269 


Kupo?  a7T€7re/i7re  rot>9 


9.   aXXo  Se  <TTpdr€v/jLa  aurcS  o-ui/eXeyero   ez>  Xeppo-  10 
/car'  avrnrepas  'A/36Sou  roVSe  TOZ>  rpoirov. 
Aa/ceScu/Jidvios  cfrvya?  rjv  •  TOUTO)  crvyyevo- 


5  and  note.  e?xe  would  here 
express  all  that  is  intended. 
Tvyxd™  with  pple.  is  some- 
times a  mere  circumlocution 
for  a  form  of  the  verb  to  which 
the  pple.  belongs. 

10.  avrw :    dat.    of   advan- 
tage.   H. 762, 766, 767 ;  G.  1157, 
1165. 

11.  KttT*  avTiirlpds :  a  phrase 
with  the  force  of  a  single  prep., 
like  our  equivalent  over  against. 
—  rov8€  TOV  Tp6irov:    for  posi- 
tion of  r6vde,  cf.  ratfras,  2  and 
note.     For  syntax  of  rpbirov, 
see  H.  719  and  a  ;  G.  1060. 

12.  <|nryds:   in  Anab.  II.,  6 
Xenophon  describes  the  char- 
acter of  Klearchos   and    tells 
why  he  was  exiled.    In  408  B.C., 
when  commanding  for  the  Spar- 
tans in  Byzantium  (now  Con- 
stantinople),   he    treated    the 
people    with    such    harshness 
that  they  surrendered  the  town 
to  the  Athenians  to  get  rid  of 
him.     After  the  close   of  the 
Peloponnesian  war  the  Spartan 
authorities  sent  him  to  Thrace 
to  protect  the  Greek  colonists 
there  from  the  native  tribes, 


oiidels  and  /x?7$e/s  have  the  acute ; 
otherwise  the  compounds  are 
accented  like  forms  of  els.  ou5^i> 
is  in  the  adverbial  ace.  denot- 
ing degree,  with  faO*™-  H.  719 
and  6  ;  G.  1060.  —  avrwv  iro\€- 
jiovvTuv :  at  their  being  at  war  / 
gen.  abs.  denoting  cause.  H. 
970, 971  and  a  ;  G.  1568 ;  1563, 
2.  —  Kal  -yap:  the  ellipsis  here 
might  be  thus  supplied:  and 
(there  was  another  reason)  for, 
etc.  But  the  effect  is  best  re- 
produced in  Eng.  by  saying, 
besides,  Cyrus  kept  sending,  etc. 
This  leaves  the  causal  relation 
to  be  understood. 

8.  -yi-yvo^vovs  :     accruing, 
coming   due.  —  f3a<ri\€i  :    with 
TT^/XTTW  the  person  is  often  ex- 
pressed by  the  simple  indir. 
obj.,   although  Lat.    mitto  re- 
quires the  ace.  with  a  prep. 

9.  «v:   attracted  from  the 
ace.,  as  obj.  of  €%wj/,  to  the  case 
of  its  antec.    close  beside   it. 
Such    attraction    occurs    fre- 
quently.   H.  993,  994 ;  G.  1019, 
1031. — Turcra4>€'pvox>s :  posses- 
sive gen.  with  <Sv.  —  €Tv<yxav€v 
6X«v :  cf.  iroipwv  Myxav€i  225, 


270 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[270— 


o  K0p09  rj^dcrdt]  re  avrov  KOI  StfotHriV  avrq) 
fjivpiov?  Sdpei/covs.     6    Se   \a/3o»v   TO   %pvalov   crrpd- 
15  rev/Act    crvve\e%ev    OLTTO    TOVTCOV   rwv    xprj/jidrcov    /cal 

€7TO\€/JL€i    €K    XeppOVlJOTOV    6 p fJid) fJb€V 0$   Tofc   ®pOL^l    TO£9 

VTrep  cE\\ijcr7rovTov  olfcovcri  KOI  a)(f>e\€(,  rov?  f/EXX?;- 

vas  •   &(7T€  /cal  xptj/AaTa  crvv€/3d\\ovTO  avrfi  6/9  rrjv 

rpocfrrjv  r&v  <TTpaTio)Twv  at  'TfiXXTja-TTOvTiatcal  7roXe^9 

20  e/covcrai.     rovro   S'  av   OVTCD   rpe^ofievov  e\dv6avev 


but  recalled  him  before  he  had 
left  Greece.  He  refused  to 
obey,  and  for  this  disobedience 
was  banished.  Yet  he  was  an 
able  soldier,  and  soon  became 
the  virtual  leader  of  the  Greeks 
in  the  expedition  with  Cyrus. 

13.  T)-ycur0Ti:  inceptive  aor. 
H.  841 ;  G.  1260. 

14.  (xvpCovs  SdpciKovs :  about 
$54000,  but  worth -several  times 
as  much  as  that  sum  now  in 
purchasing    power.      Such    a 
present  was  not  given  out  of 
mere  personal  affection.  Doubt- 
less Cyrus  came  to  some  un- 
derstanding with  him  even  thus 
early,  to  the  effect  that  Klear- 
chos  was  to  get  together  an 
army  and  hold  it  in  readiness 
for  service  with  Cyrus  later.  — 
6  U :  cf .  6  5<?  242,  3  and  note. 

15.  diro  .  .  .  \pi\}ia,T<t>v :  lit. 
from  this  money,   where  our 
idiom  leads  us  to  expect  a  dat. 
of  means,  which  also  would  be 
correct  here. 


16.  liroXIjtti  :     notice    the 
change  of  tense :  was  now  car- 
rying on  war.  —  0po££ :  dat.  of 
association.     H.  772 ;  G.  1175. 
We  also  say  fight  with,  as  well 
as  fight  against. 

17.  w<|>4\6i:  notice  the  ac- 
cent. 

18.  KaC :  with  xp^ara  has 
almost  the  effect  of  &\\a  xp^~ 
fjLara.  —  <rvv€poX.XovTO :   subjec- 
tive mid.     H.  814;  G.  1244.— 
avrtp  :  dat.  of  advantage. 

18  f.  els  TTJV  Tpo^-fjv:  ex- 
presses purpose,  like  Lat.  ad  or 
in  with  the  ace. 

20.  €Kov<rai:  pred.  adj.  in 
agreement  with  the  subj.,  to  be 
rendered  by  an  adv.  H.  619 ; 
G.  926.  For  position,  cf.  r/ua- 
KOO-LOVS  225,  10  and  note.  — rpc- 
<(>6jx€vov:  supplementary  pple. 
agreeing  with  the  subj.  of  t\dv- 
Oave.  Cf.  Myxav€J/  *X(av  9 
and  note.  From  our  point  of 
view  the  pple.  here  seems  to 
contain  the  main  thought,  and 


270] 


ANABASIS, 


,  8-11. 


r     (Trprev/jua. 


10. 


Se 


VTTO 


TWV    OLKOi    a.VTl(TTa<TitoTO)V    €p%€TCU    7T/909    TOI> 

Kal    alrel   avrov    els    §ia")(iKlov<s    %evov<$    /cat    rpi&v 

fJLTJV&V      /M(T0dV)      ft>9       OVTCO      7T6piy€v6lJL€VOS      UV      TWV    2$ 


we  should  translate,  was  being 
secretly  supported. 

21.  TO  <TTpdT€vfia:  might 
have  been  omitted,  since  rouro 
plainly  refers  back  to  &\\o 
o-rpdrevfjia  10 ;  inserted,  in  the 
least  prominent  place  in  the 
sentence,  merely  to  cut  off  all 
chance  of  misunderstanding. 

23.  oteoi :  has  the  force  of 
an  adj.     In  the  same  way  we 
say,  his  opponents  at  home. 

24.  ds  :    with    a    number 
often  means  about.    Yet  it  is 
more  likely  that  one  would  ask 
for  pay  for  troops  than  that 
one  would  ask  for  so  large  a 
body  of  troops  themselves.     It 
is  not  probable  that  Cyrus  could 
or  would  lend  so  large  a  force, 
but  he  could  easily  give  a  large 
sum  of  money  with  which  to 
raise  the  force  ;  and  that  would 
aid    Cyrus    later    still    more. 
Therefore  it  is  better  to  take 
els  as  in  els  r^v  Tpo^v  18.    The 
translation    then    is,  pay  for 
2000  mercenaries  and  for  three 
months.  —  glvovs :  the  term  JJLL- 
(rOuroL    (hirelings,    fr.    /u<r06s) 
was  so  blunt  a  recognition  of 


the  tie  between  mercenary 
troops  and  their  employer  that 
it  was  not  a  pleasant  word  to 
use  to  such  soldiers ;  people 
have  always  recognized  a  dif- 
ference between  one  who  fights 
from  love  of  country  and  one 
who  fights  for  pay.  Therefore 
such  troops  were  more  often 
euphemistically  called  #wi, 
men  bound  by  a  tie  of  hospitality 
to  him  who  supported  them.  — 
rpiwv :  declined  H.  290  ;  G.  375. 

25.      0>S     OVTCD     TT€pl'y€v6}UVOS 

av:  more  concise  expression 
for  \tywv  tin  ovTkj  TrepiytvoiTO 
SLV.  For  the  force  of  w's,  cf.  w's 
tTTipovXetovTos  256,  11  and  note. 
Here  it  is  Aristippos  whose 
statement  is  thus  indirectly 
quoted.  The  i  of  irepL  does  not 
suffer  elision ;  hence  in  the 
impf.  ind.,  irepu-yLyvbwv.  Note 
also  that  irepL-  here  has  the 
force  of  beyond,  as  in  the  phrase 

irepl  Travrbs  £TTOL€ITO  188,  I.,  7. 
&v  is  used  with  an  inf.  or  pple. 
when  a  finite  verb  in  its  place 
would  take  &v.  Here  irepLyevb- 
fievos  &v  stands  for  a  potential 
opt.  H.  861,  872 ;  G.  1308, 1327. 


272 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[270— 


6  Be  KD£>09  Sl&oHTiv  avTto  et9  rerpa- 
teal  e£  /Jirjvwv  {JLiaOdv,  teal  &€ircu  avrov 
fjurj   Trpoa-Oev    KaraKvaai    777)09    TOU?    avTio-Tao-icords 
Trplv    av    avrw    avfjL/Sov^vcrrjTai.      ovrco    Se    av    TO 
30  eV  OerraXta  e\dv6avev  CLVTM  rpe^ojjievov  crrpdrev^a. 
11.  TIpogevov  Se  rbv  Botwr^o^  %evov  ovra  e/ceXefcre 
\af3bvTa  avSpas  OTL  TrXe/o-rou?  Trapayeveada^  0)9  e/9 

arevecrda^    a>9    TT  pay  par  a 
rfj  eavrov 


26.  avTUTTCwricoTwv :  H.  749 ; 
G.  1120. 

26  f.  els  T€TpaKi<rxtMovs 
Kal  If  ji-qvwv :  cf .  the  phrase  in 
24  f.,  and  note. 

27.  SCITCU  :  for  the  contrac- 
tion of  this  verb,  see  H.  411 ; 
G.  495. —  avrov :  gen.  of  source. 
H.  750,  743,  a;  G.  1130. 

28.  JX-/J:  used  instead  of  otf 
because  ^  KaraXuo-cu  is  some- 
thing willed  by  Cyrus.  —  irpd- 
<r6ev :  anticipates  irplv,  and  need 
not  be  translated   separately. 
—  KaraXvo-ai    irpos :     come    to 
terms  with.     See  vocab.  under 

Ka.TO.\V(i). 

29.  irplv  av  .  .  .  <ru|j,|3ovX.€v- 
<rivrai:  H.  921,  924;   G.  1465, 
1469.    Cf.  the  use  of  Lat.  donee, 
etc. 

30.  4v   0€TTa\Cq,:   standing 
just  after  the  article,  is  an  at- 
tributive modifier  of  o-Tpdrev/ma. 
Probably  it  is  mainly  for  vari- 
ety that  the  order  of  this  sen- 


tence is  different  from  that  in 
20  f. 

31.  |K^X€VO-€:  in  the  perf. 
mid.  and  aor.  pass,  this  verb, 
with  some  others,  adds  <r  to 
the  theme  ;  the  inflection  of 
these  systems  is  thus  like  the 
same  systems  of  7re/0w  (214,  e 
and  /).  H.  461,  469  ;  G.  640. 
So  'yiyvdjffKbj  has  cywacrfuii, 
and  dKotfw  has  ijKot- 


32  f.    <us  ...  pov\6(ji€vos  :  cf  . 
ws  Trepiyevb/jievos  25  and  note.  — 
els  IIicrC8ds:    we    cannot    say 
into  the  Pisidians,   but  must 
say  either  against  or  into  the 
country  of.    The  Pisidians  were 
an    unsubdued    tribe    in    the 
mountains,    150  to  200   miles 
southeast   of    Sardis,   Cyrus's 
capital. 

33  f.    irpd-yjiaTa     Tra,pt\6v- 
T(ov  :  translate  the  gen.  abs.  by 
a  clause  :  were  making  trouble. 
7rpdyfj,a  has  as  wide  a  range  of 


272] 


AXASAS1S,  I.,  Jf,  8-2 


273 


verov  Se  TOV 
%evov  ?  6Wa?  / 
r<z9  e\6elv  on 
vei  crvv  T06 

OVTOt)?  OVTOl 


meaning  as  Lat.  res.  Notice 
the  three  instances  of  ws  with 
the  pple.  in  this  section. 


KOI  ^( 
€K€\ev(T€V 


TOV  'A^cuoV,  35 


€7roiovv 


37.    o>s 

them  to  understand  that  he  was 
going  to  make  war  on. 


271.  Complete  the  list  of  common  pronouns  by 
learning : 

'a.  The  personal  pronouns  €7^  and  <ru,  H.  261, 
262,263;  G.  389,  390,141,1. 

b.  The  reflexive  pronouns,  H.  266  and  a;    G. 
401. 

c.  The  reciprocal  pronoun,  H.  268 ;  G.  404. 

d.  The  possessive  pronouns,  H.  269  and  a;  G. 
406. 

272.   Translate  into  Greek. 

From  the  means  that  we  have  we  will  willingly 
contribute  largely  to  the  support  of  Cyrus's  army, 
for  we  admire  him.  When  we  chanced  to  be  ex- 


2.  largely :  lit.  many,  agree- 
ing with  xpifiwra  understood. 

3.  When,    etc. :    a    Greek 
would  express  by  yap  the  fact 
that  this  sentence  gives  the  rea- 
son for  the  preceding  statement. 


1.     means  : 

which:  let  the  rel.  here  be 
attracted  to  the  case  of  the  an- 
tec. ;  cf.  r&v  Tr6\ewv  wv  270,  9. 
—  willingly :  make  a  pred. 
adj. :  cf.  e/coC<rcu  270,  20. 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOP&OX. 


[272- 


iles  he  took  us  under  his  protection  and  restored 
5  us  to  our  homes.  Now  therefore  when  Tissapher- 
nes  is  falsely  accusing  him  and  when  his  enemies 
are  making  trouble  for  his  province,  we  will  en- 
deavor to  cooperate  with  Cyrus  in  what  he  wishes 
to  do.  Let  us  therefore  send  him  these  soldiers, 
10  and  enlist  as  many  other  men  of  the  Peloponnesus 
as  possible,  and  let  us  go  ourselves  to  him,  that 
the  king  may  perceive  that  we  are  friends  to 
Cyrus ;  and  may  he  conquer  all  his  enemies.  If 
he  ever  wishes  to  make  an  expedition  against  the 
15  king  even,  with  the  aid  of  the  force  which  is  being 
secretly  collected  for  him  he  would  get  the  better 
of  his  brother.  But  of  course  he  will  not  attempt 
to  make  war  on  the  king  until  he  has  consulted 
with  you. 


4.  took  under  his  protec- 
tion :  express  by  one  word. 

5  f .  when  .  .  .  when :  6Ve 
ptv  .  .  .  tire  5t. 

8.  cooperate  with  Cyrus 
in  what:  lit.  accomplish  with 
C.  what  (things). 

10.  as  many  other  men 
of  the  Peloponnesus :  follow 
the  order  of  256,  10  f. 

12.  that  we  are :  use  the 
supplementary  pple. 

13.  all  his  enemies:    H. 
672 ;  G.  979. 

13  f.  If  he  ever  wishes: 
condition  like  tav  dtvyrai  242, 8. 


14  f.    against    the    king 
even:   Ko.1  M  j3a<n\^d. 

15  f.    with    the    aid    of: 
<rtv.  —  is  being  secretly  col- 
lected :  lit.  escapes  notice  (\av- 
Oavu}  being  collected. 

16.  would  get  the  better 
of:   irepLyiyvo/mai  in  the  poten- 
tial opt.     Cf.  the  note  on  ircpi- 
yev6fji,evos  &v  270,  25  f. 

17.  of  course  .  .  .  not :   ov 
dj. 

18.  until    he    has    con- 
sulted: irplv  &v  with  the  aor. 
subjv.     Cf.  the  note  on  270, 
29. 


273] 


ANABASIS,   I.,  2,  1-12. 


275 


273.  Anabasis,  I.,  2,  1-12. 
1.  'E-Trel  S'  ISdfcei,  avrq)  r/S?;  Tropevea-Qai  avo),  rrjv 


e/c   T 

67rl  TOUTOU9  TO  re  fiapftapiicov   KOI   TO   ' 
evravda  7rapayye\\eL  ro3  re  KXeap^ft)  \aj36vrt,  ij/ceiv    5 
oVoz^  ^z/  aurc5  o-rpdrev/jLa,  fcal  rw  'Ap^crT/TTTTft)  cruz/aX- 
\ayevri   Trpo?  rou9  ol'/co^  aTTOTre^^ai  TTpbs  eavrov  o 

ical   &€via   rc3   'Ap/cdSi,   09    aura3 

TOV    €V    TCUS    TToXeCTfc    %€ViKOV,  iJK€lV  TTdp- 

l/cavol  10 


1.  €86K€i:    #    seemed    best. 
irop€ij€(r6ai  &vu   is   the   subj.  — 
ava> :  adv.  with  the  same  force 
as  ct^a-  in  avajSalvctj. 

2.  (x€v :  the  idea  contrasted 
with  rr;j>   /i£j>    irp6<t>a<rtv  is  no- 
where expressed,  being  easily 
understood.  —  liroictro  :    indir. 
mid.  —  MS  Pov\6(j,€vos  :    ^a^  Tie 
wished,   as  he   said.     Yet  the 
word  pretext   for   icpbfyajffiv  so 
clearly  implies  the  idea  as  Tie 
satfd,  that  this  phrase  is  better 
omitted  in  translation. 

3.  ws :  we  say  as  if. 

4.  pappapiKov  :  supply  crrpd- 
reu/xa.  Xenophon  usually  speaks 
of  the  Persians  and  their  sub- 
jects by  the  term  pdppapoi  in- 
stead of  Il^po-ai. 

5.  IvravOa:  in  these  circum- 
stances, thereupon. 


6.  bcrov  TJ  v  avrco  crrpdr€V|JLa  : 
cf.  07r6<ras  el^e  <f>v\aKcts  256,  8  f. 
and  o  el%e  trr/x£reu/xa  just  be- 
low. In  each  sentence  the  an- 
tec.  is  taken  up  into  the  rel. 
clause,  and  the  rel.  is  then 
made  to  agree  with  the  noun 
adjectively.  This  is  called  in- 
corporation. H.  995 ;  G.  1037. 
It  is  far  more  common  in  Greek 
than  in  Eng.,  and  therefore 
must  often  be  resolved,  in 
translating,  into  the  fuller 
form. 

9.  irpo€i(TT^K€i :  observe  the 
tense  and  its  force.  —  TOV  gcvi- 
KOV:   for  the  case  cf.  dj/Tio-ra- 
ffiwr&v  270,  26  and  note.    Ob- 
serve the  ending  -i*6s  and  cf. 
fiap(3ap-iK6s  and  *E\\r)v-iK6s. 

10.  Xapovra:    agrees  with 
the  understood  subj.  of  %K€iy 


276 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[273— 


rj&av  ra?  afcpoiroXeis  <f)V\drT€iv.     2.   e/cd\ecre  Se  /cal 
TOV?  Mt\7jrov  TroXiopKovvraS)  KOI  rovs  <j)vyd&a$  e/ce- 


el  tfaXw?  tear  aTrpa^e  Lev  eft  a  ecrrparevero^  /JLTJ  Trpd- 
15  (T0ev  Travaecrdai  jrplv  avrovs  Karaydyoi  oH/caSe.    ol  Be 


instead  of  being  attracted  to 
the  case  of  He^£,  as  \afi6vTi  in 
5  is  to  the  case  of  KXec^xy. 
Xaj36j>ri  stands  close  beside 
KXedpxv?  while  \ap6vra  is 
widely  separated  from  Eevty. 
—  irXrjv  oirdtroi :  for  irXfyv  rotroi/- 
T(*)v  6ir6<roi. 

11.  CKdXecrc :  final  e  of  the 
theme  is  not  lengthened.  H. 
504,  5  (with  cross-reference) ; 
G.  639. 

13.  viro<r\dji€vos :  see  UTTKT- 
xvtoftai.  Observe  that  the  ac- 
tion of  ^7ro<rx6^ews  does  not 
precede  that  of  ^Xeu<re,  but 
coincides  with  it  in  time.  The 
promise  was  a  part  of  his  sum- 
mons, an  inducement  to  the 
exiles  to  come.  H.  856,  b ; 
G. 1290. 

14  f .  cl  .  .  .  of  KaSe :  indir. 
discourse.  The  dir.  form  would 
be  :  taiv  Karairpafa  (aor.  subjv.) 

€(f>       0.     <TTpaT€VOfJLai,      Ol)     7Tp6(r0€J> 

iravo-ofjiai  irplv  SLV  u/xas  Karaydyu 
of/ca5e  If  I  accomplish  that  for 
which  I  am  making  the  expedi- 
tion, I  will  not  stop  till  I  re- 
store you  to  your  homes,  toiv 
fcarairpd^  is  a  condition  like 


&v  dvvnrai  (242,  8).  H.  898; 
G.  1403,  1404.  The  conclu- 
sion is  ov  TraiHTOfjLai.  irplv  dv 
vfjids  Karaydyu  is  like  irplv  &v 
o-v/jL^ov\€va"rjTaL  (270,  29  with 
note) .  In  changing  this  to  the 
indir.  form  (1)  the  principal 
verb  iravo-o/jLCLi  is  changed  to  the 
inf.  of  the  same  tense  ;  (2)  other 
forms  in  the  1st  and  2d  person 
(AcaraTrpa^w,  <rrparei;o/xat,  /cara- 
ydyw,  vpas')  are  changed  to 
the  3d  pers. ;  (3)  the  subjvs. 
Karairpd^cij  and  Karaydyw  are 
changed  to  the  opt.,  and  a-rpa- 
TevofjLaL  to  the  impf .  ind. ;  (4) 
the  &v  of  tdv  is  dropped  (since 
tdv  goes  only  with  the  subjv.) 
and  el  alone  is  retained  with 
the  opt. ;  in  like  manner  irplv 
&v  becomes  irplv  alone.  Read 
carefully  H.  928-936  ;  G.  1475, 
1476,  1481,  1487,  1497.  The 
neg.  otf  would  regularly  be  re- 
tained in  the  indir. ;  but  wher- 
ever there  is  a  suggestion  of 
wish  or  of  will,  as  with  verbs 
of  hoping,  promising,  and  the 
like,  the  inf.  is  inclined  to  take 
nt  even  in  indir.  disc.  H.  1024, 
end ;  G.  1496, 


273] 


ANABASIS,   I.,  2,  1-12. 


277 


?5Se&>9  €7T€idovTO 
ra  oVXa  7rapr)<rav 
rot>9  e 


yap  avTto  •  /ecu  Xa/3oWe9 
3.   SeWa?   //,ez>   S?) 
e/9  l^dpSeis 
TLpo%evo$    Se    Trapfjv 
OTrXira?  /^ez/  €69  TrevraKoa-Lovs  KOI  xl\iovs,  71^-  20 
Se  Trez/Ta/cocr/of?,  So^aiWro?  Se  o  SruyL60aXto9 
arr)?  Se  6  'A%aios  077X1- 
TIacrlcov  Se  6  Meyapev? 
jj,ev  07rXtra9,  TpiaKocrlovs  Be  7reXra<7Ta9 
Trapeyevero  •  rjv  Se  fcal  ouro9  /cat  o  ^co/cpdr'rjs  25 
a/i</>l  MfX?;To^  o-Tparevo/juevcDv.     4.  ouro^  /Ltez/  6/9 
e£9  a^Tft)  a<f>t/covTO.     TKT<ra<f)epvr)<}  Se  /caravotf- 
raura,  Aral  pei^ova  rjyrjad^evo^  elvai  rj  009  eVt 
r^i/  Trapaa/cevijv,  Tropevercu  a>9  j3acri\€d  f/ 
rd^o-ra    linrtas    eywv    a>9    TrevraKOcriovs.  30 


Learn  H.  247,  236  ;  G.  346,  358. 
—  Tj-yTjcraiAcvos :  deeming,  think- 
ing. Cf .  Lat.  duco.  —  r\  ws :  lit. 
greater  than  as,  etc. ;  that  is, 
too  great  to  be,  etc. 

29  f .  o>s :  with  names  and 
other  words  denoting  persons, 
ws  is  a  prep,  like  irp6s,  meaning 
to. — rf :  used  adverbially,  prac- 
tically =  ws  in  its  primary  signif- 
icance. 77  edvvaro  r&x^ra.  as 
quickly  as  he  could.  —  TCLXIO-TCI  : 
sup.  adv.  from  raxus.  For  the 
comparison,  see  H.  253  with 
list ;  G.  357  with  list.  For  the 
formation  of  advs.,  see  H.  257, 
258,  259  ;  G.  365,  367-369.  r«- 


17.  2ap8€is:  declined  like 
the  pi.  of  7r6\is.  H.  201 ;  G.  250. 
In  the  nom.  pi.  -ees  is  in  Attic 
prose  contracted  to  -e«.  So  in 
stems  in  -eu-  like  /Sao-iXeus.  H. 
206;  G.  263.  Sardis  was  the 
capital  of  Lydia,  and  the  resi- 
dence of  Cyrus. 

19.  els :  about.     So  in  20. 

23  f.  ws:  about. — Tpioxoo-t- 
ovs  [tAv  .  .  .  rpioiKOo-Covs  8e :  cf . 
153,  1  f.  and  note.  In  20  f .  we 
have  oTrXtras  IL£V  .  .  .  yv/mvyTas 
84. 

26.     TWV   .   .   .   CTTpaT€VOfJ.€VCOV  : 

pred.  gen.  of  the  whole. 
28.   ncCtova :  comp. 


278 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[273— 


5.   KCU  /3ao-i,\€v<;  /Jiev  S??,  eVel  rjicovcre 
TOV  Kvpov  (TToXoz>,  avTiTrapecr/cevd^ero. 

Se  €%cov  ou?   €iprj/ca  atp/JLaro  aTrb 


Trapa- 


35  (rdyyd?  eltcocri  /cal  Svo  €7rl  rbv 


xvs  is  declined  like  ydvs  H.  229 ; 
like  y\vKvs  G.  320.  raxvs  and 
words  like  it  come  under  the 
rule  that  adjs.  of  the  consonant 
and  vowel  declensions  have 
short  a  in  the  fern.  sing,  nom., 
ace.,  and  voc. 

31  f.  tjicov(r€:  note  that 
CLKOVW  has  the  Attic  reduplica- 
tion (H.  368,  358,  6  ;  G.  529, 
533)  in  the  perf.  act.,  but  the 
ordinary  reduplication  in  the 
perf.  mid. ;  also  that  the  theme 
assumes  a-  in  the  perf.  mid. 
syst.  and  the  passive  syst.  (Cf . 
KeXeuw.)  — Tior<ra4>€pvo\>s}  <TTO- 
Xov:  gen.  of  source  together 
with  the  dir.  obj.  H.  742,  c; 
G.  1103.  We  must  here  trans- 
late rjKovae  heard  of.  The  pri- 
mary meaning  of  o-rAXw  is  set 
in  order,  array,  especially  with 
the  idea  of  equipping,  as  for  a 
voyage  or  expedition.  <rr6Xos 
equipment  retains  the  earlier 
meaning,  while  o-r^XXw  itself  in 
Attic  prose  came  to  signify 
send,  especially  to  send  on  a 
journey. 

33.  €i'pr|Ka:  see  ^wl.  The 
pres.  is  supplied  by 


or  (in  composition)  by 
We  in  like  manner  group  to- 
gether go,  went,  gone  j  am,  was, 
been,  making  up  the  full  para- 
digm from  two  or  more  roots, 
each  of  which  taken  alone  lacks 
some  parts. 

34.  c§€\avv€i :  since  the  word 
originally  meant  drive  forth,  it 
is  not  -often  used,  in  the  sense 
of  march,  of  any  one  that  can- 
not   be    regarded    as   driving. 
Thus    of    a    commander   who 
rides,  and  of  cavalry,  ^eXaiW 
may  be  used ;   but  seldom  of 
foot-soldiers ;  these  iropevovrai. 
—  o-TaOpovs:  properly  halting- 
places,  then  days'1  march;  like 
irapacrdyyas,     ace.     of     extent. 
H.  720,  6  ;  G.  1062.  —  rpets :  for 
the  decl.  see  H.  290  ;  G.  375. 

35.  TOV  Ma£av8pov  TTOTOHO'V  : 
the  fixed  order  when  a  river  is 
named.     This  river  runs  for  a 
long  distance  through  a  plain, 
winding  and  turning  back  upon 
itself   extraordinarily.     Hence 
the  meaning  of  our  word  me- 
ander, and  Milton's  expression 
(Comus,  232)  "  By  slow  Maean- 
der's  margent  green," 


273] 


ANABASIS,  I.,  2,  1-12. 


279 


TOVTOV  TO 


6.  TOVTOV  Sia/3a%  e%e\avvet,  Sia 
ld?  orTaffjjibv  eva  Trapao-dyyd?  6/cTO)  et?  KoXocr- 


0*09, 
evTavOa 


/ca 


oTrXfra? 


evrra  •    KOL    rj/ce    Mevcov    6  40 
teal  7T€\Ta(TTas  irev- 


36.  TOVTOV  :  It  is  a  striking 
characteristic  of  Greek  style 
that  nearly  every  sentence  is 
connected  with  the  preceding 
one  by  a  conj.  Up  to  this  point 
in  the  Anabasis  nearly  two- 
thirds  of  the  complete  sentences 
are  introduced  by  $<?,  about  one- 
sixth  by  Kalj  and  a  few  by  in- 
ferential offv.  Of  the  remainder 
two  have  ^v  drf  inserted  after 
the  first  word,  5^  having  a  force 
very  similar  to  that  of  otv.  In 
the  other  four  cases  the  sen- 
tence either  begins  with  a  dem., 
or  is  preceded  by  a  dem.  which 
looks  forward  to  and  intro- 
duces it.  The  words  of  this 
class  which  have  occurred  are 
cJ5e,  r6v5e  rbv  Tp6wov,  ^j/raC0a, 
OVTOS.  It  is  evident  that  a  dem. 
in  such  a  position  really  con- 
tains a  connective  idea,  in  that 
it  refers  to  something  in  the 
preceding  or  following  sen- 
tence. We  see  then  that  nearly 
every  sentence  is  connected 
with  the  preceding  context  by 
some  conj.  j  if,  however,  the 


sentence  is  introduced  by  a 
dem.  pron.  or  adv.,  the  conj.  is 
often  omitted.  Such  omission 
of  the  conj.  was  so  infrequent 
that  Greek  rhetoricians  gave 
it  the  special  name  asyndeton 
(d-crw-de-roj',  a  priv.  and  <rvv- 
5&o,  bind  together).  —  cvpos: 
declined  like  ytvos  H.  191 ;  G. 
228.  The  contractions  are  the 
same  as  in  verbs  in  -^w.  (The 
contraction  of  e-e  to  17  in  the 
nom.  dual  is  late ;  in  inscrip- 
tions of  the  classical  time  e-e 
becomes  et  here  as  elsewhere.) 
37.  4£€vy}i€VT) :  for  the  red., 
see  H.  365 ;  G.  523.  A  bridge 
joined  by  seven  boats  we  should 
call  a  pontoon  bridge  of  seven 
boats.  —  TOVTOV:  what? 

39.  otKovjt^vT]v :    inhabited. 
Even  at  this  early  time  there 
were  in  Asia,  as  now,  many 
cities  which  had  been  deserted, 
the  ruins  still  retaining  the  old 
names.  —  €vSai|j,ova  :   for  decl. 
see  H.  234,  235  ;  G.  312,  313. 

40.  Note  the  asyndeton. — 
Mevwv ;  sent  by  Aristippos, 


280 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[273— 


AoXovra?  /cal  Alwava?  KOI  'O\vv0iov$. 
7.  evrevOev  e%e\avvei  a-TaOpovs  rpeh  Trapaadyyd? 
et/coa-iv  eh  KeXatz^a?,  r^9  <&pv<yi 

45  /JL€<yd\r)V  /cal  ev$al/j,ova.     evravOa 

/cal  TrapdSeicros  /L&eya?  dypicov  Oypicov  TrX^/o?;?,  a  e/cel- 
vo<$  eOrjpevev  diro  tTTTrou,  OTrore  yv/juvdcrai,  ftov\0iro 
eavrbv  re  /cal  rou?  ETTTTOI;?.  Sia  /juecrov  Se  rov  Trapa- 
Seiaov  pel  o  MalavSpos  Trora/Lto?  •  al  Se  Trrjyal  avrov 

50  elcriv  €/c  TWV  jSacriXeicov  •  pel  Se  /cal  Sid  Tr)$ 


43.  €VT€00€v :  asyndeton.  The 
ending  -Oev  appears  in  several 
advs.  denoting  motion  from  a 
place. 

43  f.  irap  curacy  "yds  el'Kocriv  : 
the  distances  covered  in  these 
first  days,  six  to  eight  para- 
sangs  daily,  were  greater  than 
the  later  average. 

45.  pao-iXcia  :    distinguish 
from  jSao-tXetd.     The  neut.  pi. 
is  used  for  palace,  probably  be- 
cause of  the  numerous  apart- 
ments. 

46.  nfyas :  H-  247  i  G-  346- 
—  e^ptwv:  H.  743,  753  and  c; 
G.  1112,  1139,  1140.  —  irXVjp^s: 
declined   (except    for  the  ac- 
cent) like  evyerfs  H.  230 ;  like 
dXi^j  G.  313. 

47.  diro  iirirov :  lit.  from  a 
horse;  we  say   on  horseback. 
The  Greek  is  inclined  to  look 
at  an  act  as  proceeding  from  a 
place,  when  we  look  at  it  as 


occurring  in  a  place.  In  re- 
gard to  this  phrase  observe  that 
the  number  of  horses  must  be 
the  same  as  the  number  of 
riders ;  hence  they  hunt  on 
horseback  would  be  Orjpevovo-iv 
curb  iTrirwv.  —  oirore  povXoiro  :  a 
rel.  clause  implying  a  past  gen- 
eral condition.  H.  912,  913, 
914  B,  (2),  894,  2;  G.  1428, 
1429,  1431,  2,  1393,  2. 

48.  (X€orov :  for  the  position, 
see  H.  671 ;  G.  978. 

50.  €K  TCOV  pcuriXeicov:  we 
should  say  in  the  palace;  cf. 
note  on  airb  'iirirov  47.  A  /3atrt- 
Xeia,  like  a  mediaeval  castle, 
was  a  fortress  as  well  as  royal 
residence  ;  for  such  a  collection 
of  buildings,  containing  quar- 
ters for  troops  as  well  as  for 
court  officials,  a  good  supply  of 
water  was  essential,  and  an 
abundant  spring  was  usually 
included  within  the  walls. 


273] 


ANABASIS,   /.,  2,  1-12. 


281 


8.  eo"Ti  Se  K 

eV  KeXa^afc  epvfjuva  eVl  raZ?  Trrjyais  rov  Map&vov 
TTorafMov   VTTO   rfj   aicpOTroKei  •    pel  Se  /cat  ovro?  Sea 
Tr;9  7ro'Xefc>9  /cat  €fji/3dX\,€i  669  TOZ>  MatavBpov  •  rov  Be 
Mapavov  TO   6^/009  eanv  ei/coo-i   ical   irevre   vroSw^.  55 
evravOa  \ey€rai  'ATroXXcoi/  6/cSeipai  Mapcrvdv 
<ra9  epi^ovrd  ol  Trepl  (TO^>/«9,  /cal  TO  Se^a 
ev  TcS  dvrpq)  o6ev  al  Trrjyai  •  Bta  Be  rovro  6 
Ka\elrai  Mapavas.     9.  evravOa  Sepgrjs,  ore  e/c  rrj? 

OLKO-  60 


51.  «TTI:  H.  480,2;  G.  144,5. 

55.  iroSwv :  pred.  gen.  where 
we  should  expect  the  nom. 

56.  licScipai:   the  inf.  here 
stands  in  indir.  discourse  for 
the  aor.  indie,  of  the  dir.  form  ; 
in  such  cases  the  aor.  inf.  does 
denote  past  time,  as  the  indie, 
would.     H.  851,  852,  854;   G. 
1280.     The  dir.  form  would  be 
<Wa00a  'A7r6X\a>*>  t&detpe.     The 
story  is  often  alluded  to,  and 
parts  of  it  are  told  in  several 
works  of  art  that  have  come 
down  to  us.    It  is  said  that 
Athena  invented  the  flute  (a#- 
X6s,  more  like   our  clarinet)  ; 
but  catching  sight  of  her  own 
image    in    the  water   as    she 
playedr  she  determined  never 
again  to  distend  her  cheeks  in 
such  an  ugly  manner,  and  threw 
the  pipe  away.    The  satyr  Mar- 
syas,  who  had  been  listening 


with  delight,  at  once  caught  it 
up,  and  soon  was  so  proud  of 
his  own  music  thereon  that  he 
challenged  Apollo  himself,  the 
god  of  music,  to  a  contest, 
Apollo  to  use  his  lyre.  The 
victor  might  punish  the  van- 
quished as  he  pleased,  and 
the  Muses  were  to  be  the 
judges.  Of  course  Apollo  won, 
and  he  punished  the  presumptu- 
ous satyr  in  the  way  described 
in  the  text. 

57.  ol:    enclitic,   therefore 
not  the  art.  but  the  pron.    Cf. 
erf  270,  2.  —  crowds:  here  skill, 
art.    Translate  after  defeating 
him  in  a  contest  of  skill  in 
music.  —  Scpjxa  :    from    5e//>w, 
theme    §e/>-,   with  the  ending 

-fJLCLT-. 

58.  o6€v  =  e£  o v :  cf .  tvrev-dev. 

59.  Mapo-vds :  pred.  nom. 

60.  rfj    jxaxu  :     the    well- 


282 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[273— 


$o/jLrj(7ai  ravrd  re  ra  /3a<ri\ei,a  KOI  rrjv 
d/cp07ro\LV.  evravOa  epewe  Kvpo?  rj/jLepd?  rpiaKovra  • 
KOI  Tj/ce  KXea/^09  o  AaKeSai/jiovios  <j)vya$  e^cov  OTrXi- 
r«9  fXJL\lovs  /cal  TreXrao-ra?  ®pa/cas  o/cra/coalov^  KOI 
65  To£ora9  Kj07?ra9  Sid/cocrlovs.  a/jia  Se  KOI  Swcrt? 
Trapfjv  6  ^vpd/c6(7i,o$  e%a>v  OTfXtrd^  rpiaKocriovs,  KCLI 


KOI 


OTrXtra? 

/cal  apiOfJbov  rcov  'l 
),   KOI    eyevovro    ol 
KOI  %i\(,oii  TreXracrral  Se 
10.  evrevOev  e%e\avvet,  araO- 
Svo  Trapao-dyyd?  Se/ca  et?  ITeXra?,  iroKiV  ol/cov- 
evravO*  efjueuvev  rjfJLepds  rpel?  •  ev  als  HeWa? 
ra  Avfcaia  eOvcre  /cal  d<ya)va  Wrjice  •  ra  &e 
^pvaal  •  edeapei  Se  rov  dycova 


6   'Ap/ca? 
evravOa  Ku/oo?  e 
€7rolri<T€V   ev  TW 
70  Trai/re?  oirKlrai  fjuev 
rovs 


75  a6\a  rjcrav 


known  battle  of  Salamis,  480 
B.C.  Dat.  of  means,  H.  776 ; 
G.  1181. —  Xeycrai  olKoSo|j,fj(rai : 
Cf.  X<fyerai  ticdeipai  56  and  note. 

68.  dpiOfxov :   here  the  ac- 
tion of    numbering;   an  enu- 
meration. 

69.  €-y€vovro :  amounted  to. 
71.    dfjicjH    TOVS   SwrxtXCovs : 

H.  664,  c;  G.  948,  (6).  The 
numbers  do  not  agree  with 
those  previously  given. 

74  f.  TO,  AvKcua:  cognate  ace. 
H.  715,  b ;  G.  1051 :  celebrated 
the  Lycaean  festival  with  sacri- 
fice. This  festival  of  Zei>s  Ai5- 
KCLLOS  was  the  common  festival 
of  the  Arcadians.  Every  such 


festival  had  for  its  central  point 
a  sacrifice,  which  was  followed 
by  athletic  contests,  these  also 
being  in  honor  of  the  god. — 
€0T]K€:  a  1st  aor.  ind.  act.  3d 
sing,  from  ri6r}^  with  -*e-  for 
the  tense  suffix  instead  of  -ere-. 
ridriiju.  is  the  verb  regularly  used 
for  appointing  or  arranging 
a  contest. — rjo-av  :  pi.,  even 
though  the  subj.  is  in  the  neut. 
H.  604  and  b ;  G.  899,  2. 

75.  <rT\€Yy£8€s :  in  Greek 
gymnasiums  and  wrestling- 
schools  boys  and  young  men 
took  their  exercise  naked  ;  they 
rubbed  themselves  thoroughly 
with  olive  oil,  to  make  the 


273] 


ANABASIS,  I.,  2,  1-12. 


283 


KOLI  K{)po9.  evrevOev  e^e\avv€i  crraOfJiovs  Svo  Trapa- 
ds  ScaSe/co,  els  Kepd/mcov  dyopav,  TTQ\LV  olKOVfjue- 
Trpbs  rfj  Mucrta  ^wp'i.  11.  evrevdev 
crraQ  /JLOVS  rpecs  Trapacrdyyds  Tpid/covTa  els 
Kavarpov  TreSiov,  rjro\iv  ol/cov/jLevrjv.  evravO*  epeivev  80 
rjpepds  7T€VT€  •  /cal  TO  2<$  err  pander  ais  ox^e/Xero  fiio'Oos 

7T\€OV    T!    TplWV    /JL'TJVtoVi  KOI  7TO\\dfCLS    l()VT€S    €7rl    TO? 

dvpds  ctTryrovv.     6  Se  eXvr/Sa?  \€<ycov  Sirjye  KOI  Sij\os 
rjv  avltofievos  •    ov  yap  rjv  Trpos   rov   Ktpou  rpOTrov 


muscles  supple,  and  the  fine 
sand  with  which  the  place  was 
strewn  would  naturally  stick 
to  their  oiled  flesh,  so  that  with 
oil,  dirt,  and  sweat  together,  a 
youth  after  an  hour's  exercise 
was  probably  as  thickly  coated 
as  the  contestants  on  a  muddy 
foot-ball  field  nowadays.  To 
remove  this  coating  before  the 
necessary  bath,  <TT\eyyl  des  were 
in  everyday  use.  Those  made  of 
gold  were  not  for  use,  but  me- 
morials. —  xP^°"at  :  li^6  aTrXoOs 
H.  223,  224;  x/>u(ro0s  G.  310. 
Learn  at  the  same  time  vovs 
H.  157  ;  G.  201,  2.  (Since  the 
dual  is  nowhere  used  in  authors 
read  in  school  and  college,  it  is 
better  omitted.) 

78.  lo-xdrqv  irpo's  :  lit.  far- 
thest near  ;  that  is,  on  the  bor- 
der towards. 

82  f  .  irXc'ov  %  :  H.  647,  2d 
sentence.  —  p/qvwv  :  depends  on 
and  is  not  affected  in 


case  by  ir\tov.  —  loVres:  give 
the  meaning  of  each  element 
(/-6-i/r-es) .  Learn  the  entire 
inflection.  H.  477  ;  G.  808.  The 
irreg.  impf.  is  like  a  plup. ;  the 
ind.,  impv.,  and  inf.  are  tu- 
forms,  while  the  subjv.,  opt., 
and  pple.  are  of  the  w-form.  In 
the  impv.,  however,  i-6-vrav  has 
the  var.  vow.  as  tense  suffix. 
In  l-tvai  the  ending  is  -evai  in- 
stead of  -vai.  —  ras  0vpds:  lit. 
the  doors ;  a  common  Oriental 
expression  for  house  or  gen- 
eral's quarters,  especially  for 
the  king's  palace ;  to  the  pres- 
ent day  our  term  for  the  court 
of  the  Sultan  of  Turkey  is  The 
Sublime  Porte,  lit.  the  high  gate. 

83.  4Xirt8as  Xc'-ycov :  lit.  speak- 
ing hopes;  that  is,  speaking 
hopefully.  —  SfjXos  TJV 
vos:  cf.  <f>av€pbs  ?jv  de 
174,  I.,  10. 

84  f .    irpos  TOV  rpo-rrov :    in 
accordance  with  the  character. 


284 


THE  GHEES:  OF  XENOPHON. 


[273— 


85  e^ovra    p/rj    aTroSiSovai.       12.     evravda 
'E7rua£a  77  ^vevveaios  yvvrj  rov  T£i\L/ca) 
Trapa    Kvpov  •    /cal    e'Xeyero    Kvpa)   Sovvcu 
TroXXa.     rfi    &'    ovv    crTparta    Tore   aTreSco/ce    Kvpos 
jMcrOov  Terrdptov  /JLIJVOJV.     el^e  Se  97  Ki\i(rara  <f)V\a- 

90  /c?)z;  7re/H  avrrjv  K/Xt/ea?  /cat  'A<77rez>8tot>9  •  eXeyero 
Se  /cat  a-v<y<yevecr6ai  Kvpov  rfj 


:  circumstantial  pple., 
agrees  with  the  understood 
subj.  of  &iro5i86vai.  Lit.  wo^  ^o 
^«2/,  (when)  having  (money)  ^ 
was  not,  etc. ;  more  freely,  it 
was  not  like  Cyrus  not  to  pay, 
when  he  had  money.  —  jx^j :  H. 
1018,  1023  ;  G.  1611.  — diroSiSo- 
vcu:  &ir6  in  composition,  as 
here  and  in  airyTovv  above, 
often  suggests  that  something 
is  due.  It  is  now  time  to  learn 
the  entire  verb  5/Sw/xi,  H.  350, 
330,  334 ;  G.  506.  Note  care- 
fully the  following  irregulari- 
ties. (1)  In  the  pres.  syst. 
impf.  ind.  act.  sing.,  H.  419,  a ; 
G.  630.  Impv.  act.  2d  sing. 
5l8ov,  H.  415,  b  •  G.  755.  Pple. 
act.  didovs,  H.  382  and  56 ;  G. 
770  and  335.  (Cf.  yvovs  169, 
170,  a.)  (2)  In  the  /xi-aor.  there 
is  a  mid.  as  well  as  act.,  but 
the  sing,  of  the  hid.  act.  is 
wanting,  those  forms  being  sup- 
plied by  the  peculiar  1st  aor.  in 
-*a-,  H.  432  ;  G.  802,  2.  The 
other  peculiarities  of  this  sys- 


tem are  described  in  H.  443, 
a-c ;  G.  802,  1.  Note  particu- 
larly that  the  theme  vowel  o  is 
not  lengthened,  and  that  dovvai 
has  the  ending  -emt,  with  which 
cf .  t-tvai.  Outside  of  the  pres. 
and  aor.  syst.  didwfu  is  regular. 
86.  <yvWj:  H.  216,  4 ;  G.291, 
8.  —  pao-iXe'ws  :  subject,  how- 
ever, to  the  king  of  Persia. 
Syennesis  and  Epyaxa  seem  to 
have  played  a  double  part,  fa- 
voring both  sides,  in  order  that 
they  might  retain  their  throne, 
whichever  should  win. 

88.  8*  ovv :  at  any  rate,  im- 
plying that  the  statement  as  to 
"her  giving  Cyrus  money  is  mere 
hearsay ;  but  however  that  may 
be,  his  paying  the  army  was  a 
fact. 

89.  T€TTopo)v:  H.290;  G.375. 
90  f.   &£ycTO   Kvpov:   here 

the  impers.  construction  of  A<?- 
76TO  is  used,  although  A<fyero 
dovvoLi  87  is  in  the  personal  con- 
struction. For  tense  cf.  note 
on  oiKo5oiJ,7)<rai  60. 


274] 


ANABASIS,  L,  2,  13-27. 


285 


€-    5 


274.  Anabasis  L,  2,  13-27. 
13.  ^VTevOev  ej~e\avvet,  o-raOfAous  Svo 
Se/ca  e^9  ©vfA/Spiov,  TTO\LV  OiKOvjj,evrjv.     evravOa 
Trapa  rrjv  6Sbv  /cptfvr)  f)  M/Soi;  /caXovfievrj  TOV 
ja)v  /3a0YXe&>9,  e<f>    rj  \eyeraL   Mt'Sa 
6r)p€V(rai    Oiva)    /cepdads    avrrfv.     14.    evrevOev 
\avvei   crraO/jiovs   Svo  Trapaa-dyyds  Se/ca  els  Tvpid- 
euov,    ir6\tv    olKov^evrjv.       evravOa    epewev 
rpei$.     KOI  \€<y€Tcu  Serjffijvcu  rj  Kl\i,(rcra  Ktpov 
Sel^at,  TO  (TTpaTevfjia  avTrj  •  /3oiA,o'//.ez>o9  ovv  eT 
!;ai  e^eTaariv  TroieiTai  ev  rcS  7reS/6>  TWV  ' 
/3ap/3dpcov.     15.  €tC€\€V<r€  &e  row 
avTols  669  (JLafflVi  OVTCO  Ta%()rjvat,  /cal 

i  S*  €/cacrTOV  rou9  eavTov.     eTa^Orjcrav  ovv 
€7rl  TCTTapcov  •  el'xe  Se  TO  fjuev  Segibv  M.€VQ)v  /cal  ol 
avv  aurcS,  TO  Se  evcavv/jiov  KXeap^O9  /cal  ol  €/c€ivov,  15 
TO    Be  fJiicrov  ol  a\\oi  aTpaTrjyoL     16.  effecopet  ovv 


/ca    10 


3.  MCSou:  pred.  gen.  after 
KaXovfjitvr)  :  lit.  the  spring  called 
Midas'1  s.  We  say,  the  so-called 
spring  of  Midas. 

5.  ol'vu)  Kcpdcrds  avr-qv  :  lit. 
mixing  it  with  wine;  we  say 
rather,  mixing  wine  with  it. 
The  story  is  that  the  satyr 
drank  so  much  of  the  wine 
from  the  spring  that  he  became 
an  easy  prey. 

12.  vopos  :  custom,  the  ear- 
lier meaning  of  the  word  ;  the 
earliest  law  was  merely  custom. 
Supply  fy. 


13.   IKCUTTOV:    supply 


14.  lirl  T€TTapo>v  :  four  deep, 
to  make  the  line  long,  and  so 
make  the  army  appear  large.  — 
TO  SeJuSv:  supply  ictpas  wing. 
The  right  was  the  post  of  dan- 
ger (and  therefore  of  honor), 
because  the  shield  was  carried 
on  the  left  arm,  so  that  the  right 
side  was  unprotected.  Hence 
an  enemy  always  tried  to  attack 
on  the  right,  and  fortifications 
were  so  planned  that  an  enter- 
ing force  must  expose  that  side. 


286 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[274— 


6  Kvp09  irp&TOV  aev  rou9  /Bapftdpovs  •  ol 
\avvov  Teray/Jievoi,  Kara  fXa?  /cal  Kara  rdgeis  •  elra 
Be  rots'  f/EXX?;i>a9,  TrapeXavvcov  e<£'  ap/jLaro?   /cal  rj 
^>'   apaaad^r)?.      €^XOV   ^   Trdvres   /cpdvrj 
teal  ^iT&vas  (froivl/covs  /cal  KvrjfuBa^  /cal  ra9 
9    €/cK€fca\vfji/JL€vds.       17.   eTreiBrj    Be    Trdvra? 

cmjo'ds     TO     apua    Trpo    rr)$ 
jLyfrd^    Tllryprjra    TOP    eparjved   Trapa 
25  (TTpaTrjyovs    T&V    'TZXXrjvatv   e/ceXevae   7rpo/3a\ea0a(, 
TCL  oVXa  fcal  eTn^copijo-ai  o\rjv  T^V  </>d\a<y<ya.     ol  Be 


TavTa  TrpoeiTTov  rot9  crrpaTtcoTa^  •    Kal  eTrel 


7rpo/3a\6/ji,€voi,  TCL  oVXa  eTrycrav.     e/c  Be  TOV- 
TOV   OaTTOV  TrpolovTCdV  <rvv  tcpavyf)  diro  roO  avTo- 


17.  irpwrov:  H.  719,  6;  G. 
1060.  Trpwros  is  the  ordinal 
numeral  corresponding  to  els. 
See  list,  H.  288 ;  G.  372. 

19.  irap€\avvo>v :  here  the 
original  meaning  of  tXatvw  ap- 
pears. 

21.  \a\Kcl,   <J>OIVIKOVS  :   de- 
clined like  x/)i)crous ;  see  x/wo-cu 
273,  75  and  note. 

22.  £KK€Ka\v|jL(j.€vds :  observe 
the  effect  of  the  pred.  position : 
a  lit.  translation  in  the  Greek 
order   gives    the   same   force. 
H.  670,    a;   G.    972.     On  the 
march    shields    were    usually 
protected  by  leathern  covers. 
—  TrdvTds :    governed    by   the 
irapa-  (along,  or  past}  in 


24.  fJ.6CTT)S   :       Cf.       fJL^ffOV      TOV 

irapadela-ov  273,  48  and  note. 

25.  irpopaX&rOcu  :        indir. 
mid. ;  lit.  throw  their  arms  be- 
fore them  ;   that  is,   put   the 
shield  and  spear  in  position  for 
attack.    The  subj.  is  the  Greek 
soldiers,  or  ryv  <j>d\ayya. 

26.  oX-qv :    pred.    position  ; 
in  a  body.     H.  672,  c ;  G.  979. 

27.  lo-dXiriyfc  :     the    subj. 
(raXTrry/cr^s  or  ris  omitted,  as 
often  with  ffcCkirlfa. 

28  f.  lirfjo-av  :  i  subscript 
marks  the  form  as  from  efyu, 
not  elpl.  Cf.  ^7rixw/>?7<rcu  26, 
with  the  same  meaning.  —  €K 
TOVTOV  :  thereupon.  —  irpouSv- 
T«V:  gen.  abs.  with  the  subj. 
p  omitted. 


274] 


ANABASIS,  I.,  2,  13-27. 


287 


Spo/xo?    eyevero    rofc    crrpaTKorais    €7rl    ra?  30 
.      18.    rcoz>  Se  fiapftdpcov  <£o/3o9  vroXu?,  /tal 
re  Kt  \icro-a  efywyev  eirl  7-779  dpfJiafjid^rj^  /ecu  ol  etc 
T}?   dyopds   fcara\i,7rdvT€s    rd   &via   e<f)V<yov.     ol    Se 

TIW  <ye\Q)Ti,  &rrl  ra9  a-/crjvas  r}\6ov.     f]  Se    . 
ISovo-a  rrjv  \afjL7rp6rrjra  /cal  rrjv  rd%iv  rov  35 
crTpaT€V/jLaTO<;    eOavjjiacre.      KOpo?    Se    rjcrOrj    rbv    €K 
TWV    rft\\r)V(0v    et9    TOU9    j3ap/3dpovs    (frdftov    IScov. 
19.  zvrevOev  c%e\avv€t  crTadpovs  rpeis  Trapao-dyyd? 


etfcocriv 


evravOa  e^eive  rpei?  fj 
r?)9  Avfcdovtds   a-ra 
KOVTCL.     ravrijv  rrjv 


evrevOev  e%e\avvet  Sid  40 
irevre   Trapacrdyyds   rpiar 
eTrerpei/re  Siap7rd(rcu 
ovcrav.     20. 


29  f .    airo    TOV 

of  their  own  accord.  —  Spopos 
€-y€V€TO  TOIS  o-Tpartwrais :  lit. 
running  arose  to  the  soldiers  / 
that  is,  the  soldiers  began  to  run. 

32  f .  ol  €K  TTJS  d-yopds :  for 
ol  £v  rrj  dyopq..  Cf.  TtDf  irapa 
/3ao-t\^ws  256,  1  and  tic  r&v  paffi- 
\elwv  273,  50. 

35.  I8ov<ra :  see  opdaj.  The 
impv.  i'5<?  belongs  with  dirt, 
i\0t,  and  XajS^.  H.  387,  6  ;  G. 
131,  2.  For  the  tense  cf.  l$6v 
37,  and  UTTOO-X^WS  273, 13  and 
note. 

36  f .  HO-OT]  :  for  ^5-^  from 
T;§O/AGU. — IK  TWV  'EXXrjvcov  its 
TOVS  Pappdpovs  :  the  preps, 
mark  clearly  the  source  and 


goal  of  the  feeling,  while  the 
position  between  art.  and  noun 
shows  that  the  phrase  is  an 
attributive  modifier  of  <t>6pov, 
we  must  use  a  rel.  clause,  as, 
the  fear  which  the  Greeks  in- 
spired in  the  Orientals.  One 
object  of  the  display  was  to 
impress  the  Orientals  with  the 
superiority  of  the  Greeks ; 
Cyrus  was  naturally  pleased 
at  the  success  in  that  direction. 

42.  Siapirdo-ai :  inf.  denot- 
ing purpose,  as  in  Eng.     The 
inf.  was  originally  the  dat.  of 
a   verbal   noun ;    the    original 
force   appears    in   this   usage. 
H.  951 ;  G.  1532. 

43.  ws  TToXejjudv  ovcrav:  cf. 


288 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[274 


45 


TLi\icrcrav    €69    rrjv    Ki\i/cidv    aTTOTreyt&Tre*-    rrjv 
6S6v  •    KOI   avveTrefji'^ev  avry  roi>9   arpa- 
01)9  Me^o>z>  eZ^e  Kal  avrov.      K£yj09  Se 
rcov   ahXcov   el;e\avv€t,    Sea   Ka7T7raSo/aa9    a 
rerrapa^   Trapacrdyyds  ell/coo"^  Kal  vreWe  e/9  ®6ava, 
7ro\iv  olfcov/jievrjv,  /Ji€jd\r]v  fcal  ev&al/jiova.     evravOa 
50  efjieivav  rj^epd^  r/oet9  *  ev  cS  Kvp09  aTre/creivev  avSpa 

/ecu 


erepov   nva   TWV   vTrap^cov 
eTriftovXeveiv  avr(S.     21.  evrevdev  €7 

55  bpOld  la")(yp&s  KOI  d/JL^^avo^  elcre\6elv 

el  T£9  €K(t)\vev.  €\e<y€TO  Se  /cal  l^vevvecns  elvai  eVl 
TCOV  aKpwv  <f)V\drTc0v  rr)V  elcrf3o\r}V  •  810  efjueivav 
fjjjiepdv  ev  rc3  TreSt'w.  rfj  S'  varepaia  fjicev  ay<y€\o<? 
Xeycov  OTL  XeXo67Tft)9  efy  ^vevvecris  ra  a/cpa,  eirel 

60  r)a6eTO  QTI  TO  Me^o)^o9  (TTpdrevfjia  'tjSrj  ev  KtX^/c/a 

w$  tirt(3ov\&jovTos  256,   11  and 
note  ;     ws    TT pay /xara 
rwv  270,   33  f. ;    cJs   /3 
273,  2. 

44  f.   TT|V    Ta\i<rTT] 
H.  719,  a ;  G.  1060. 

46.    avrov:  supply 

50.   4v  w  :  supply 

53.    €mpovX€i>€iv  :    depends 
on  aiTid<rdfj,€vos :  of  plotting. 

55.     €l<T€X0€tV     <TTpaT€V|JLaTl  : 

both  depend  on  d/x^xaws.     H. 
952,  766,  767;  G.  1528,  1165. 

58.    rfj    vo-T€pcua  :     supply 

o$.    H.  782  ;  G.  1192. 


68ov  : 


59.  XcXonrws  ctrj :  the  com- 
pound form  (as  often  in  the 
perf.   opt.)  for  XeXo^Troi.     For 
the  mode  see  H.  932,  2  ;   G. 
1487.     But  notice  the  mode  of 
TJo-Oero  and  ^v  in  the  two  fol- 
lowing lines,  and  cf.  H.  935,  b 
and  c ;  G.  1482,  1499. 

60.  TJ'<r6€TO  on  :  cf .  jSouXeuo- 
fjitvovs  256,  16,  which  illustrates 
the  more  usual  construction  of 
a  clause  dependent  on  alo-0d- 
VO/JLCLI.     Xenophon   might  have 
written  here  ycrBero  rb  M^VWPOS 


2T4] 


ANABASIS,  L,  2,  13-27. 


289 


T)V     €i<TO)     TtoV     Op  ft)  I/, 


OTt 


7J/COV6    7T€pl- 


/cat  avrov  Ktijoou.  22.  KOpo?  8' 
67rl  ra  oprj  ovSevbs  /CCO\VOVTO$,  /cal  elSe 
ra?  cr/c^va?  ov  ol  K/X^/ee?  e<£uA,aTToz/.  evrevOev  Se  65 
Kareftaivev  ek  ireSlov  /A€ya  KOI  Ka\6v,  eirippVTOV, 
KOI  SevSpcov  TravroSaTTtov  <rvp,7r\ewv  KOI  a/ji7re\cov  • 
Be  teal  crrj<ra/j,ov  /cal  p,e\iv7)v  /cal  Ke 
/cal  tcplOas  (frepei.  0/309 


avro 


61  f .  KaC :  must  connect  the 
clauses  of  which  ya-Bero  and 
17/coue  are  the  verbs ;  therefore 
the  next  word  3rt  must  mean 
because,  not  that.  —  Tpirjp€is : 
for  the  decl.  see  H.  232 ;  G.  234. 
When  TrepnrXeofoas  is  reached, 
it  is  seen  that  r/u^peis  is  in  the 
ace.  pi.;  and  it  then  appears 
as  if  rpnypeis  TrepurXeoiJo-ds  were 
obj.  and  supplementary  pple. 
with  TJKove.  But  when  further 
TafjL&v  and  ZXOVTCL  appear,  it  is 
found  that  rptrjpets  must  be  the 
obj.  of  exoj/ra,  which  is  itself  a 
supplementary  pple.  with  Ta/x<2j/ 
after  TJKOVC,  while  Tre/UTrAeoiVas 
is  a  circumstantial  pple.  This 
momentary  ambiguity  must 
have  been  felt  by  a  Greek 
reader  as  well  as  by  us.  The 
sentence  therefore  cannot  be 
called  well  constructed  gram- 
matically ;  yet  as  regards  their 
relative  importance 


7r\eoi5(7as  and  Ta/uwv  cxoira  are 
placed  naturally.  —  For  the  ab- 
sence of  contraction  in  -irXeotf- 
<rds  see  H.  411 ;  G.  495,  1. 

63  f.      TOS          AdKcScUfAOVLCOV, 

etc. :  added  as  an  afterthought 
to  rpi^peis.  —  8*  ovv :  cf.  273,  88. 
—  cISc :  see  bpaw. 

65.  ov:  rel.  adv.  of  place; 
H.  283;  G.  436.  —  4<|>vXaTTOv : 
seems  to  be  used  here  for  the 
plup.,  had  been  on  guard,  or 
were  before  on  guard;  cf.  fjo-av 
. . .  Tiffffa^tpvovs  rb  dpx&?ov  256, 
12  f.  The  Greek  expresses  the 
past  continuance  of  the  action, 
leaving  unexpressed  the  fact 
that  the  action  was  completed 
in  the  past. 

67.  ScvSpcov,  dfi-ireXcov :  cf. 
0rjpiwv  273,  46  and  note.  — <rvji- 
irXcwv:  declined  like  ?Xewj  H. 
226,  227,  with  159;  G.  306 
with  196,  197. 

69.    avTo  :  that  is,  r6  iredlov. 


290 


THE  GKEEK  OF  XENOPBON. 


[274- 


70  o^vpov  KOI  vtyqXbv  irdvrrj  e/c  0a\drrr}^  els  0d\ar- 
rav.     23.  /carafias  Se  Bid  TOVTOV  rov  TreSlov  7/Xacre 
rerrapa^  Trapaa'dyyd^  vrevre  KOI  eiicoaiv 
%  KfcX£/aa9  TTO\LV  fJLeyd\r)v  KOI  evBal- 
.    evda  rjv  rd  ^vevvecrios  ftaaiKeia  rov 
75  /SacriXecos  •    Sia   ftecrov  Se  rfjs   TroXecy?   pel 

KuSi/o?  6Vo/Aa,  evpos  Svo  7r\e0pcov.     24.  Tavrrjv  rrjv 
7ro\iv  e£e\i7rov   ol  evoucovvres  perd  ^vevvecnos  et9 
o'xypov   eTTi   rd   0/377   irhrjv   ol  rd   KcnrrjKela 
•     ejjbeivav    Se    /cal    ol    Trapd    rrjv    6d\arrav 
80  oircovvres   ev   So\o^9   KOI   ev  'Icrcrofc.      25.  ' 

Se  ?;  ^vevveaios  <yvvrj  TTporepd  Ifcupov  TreVre  rjfjiep 
669  Ta/)crou9  d^iKero  •  e^  Se  T^  vTrepftdXy  rcov  op&v 
rrj  els  TO  ire^iov  Bvo  \6%ot,  rov  Mevcovo?  crrpareii- 
/jLaro?  aTrdSKovro  •  06  /xez^  efyacrav  dpTrd^ovrds  TL 
85  KaraKOTrrjvaL  VTTO  TWV  K^Xt/cco^,  o/  Se  v7ro\ei<f)0evTas 
/cal  ov  BvvafjLevov?  evpelv  TO  aXXo  crrpdrevp^a  ovBe 
T09  0801)9  elra  ir\ava)iJievov<$  airoKevQai  •  rjcrav  S'  ouz^ 


75.  )i€(rov  T-qs  iroXews :  here 
/A^O-OU  is  used  substantively,  r^s 
7r6Xeo;s  depending  on  it.     Cf. 
7-97$  <f>d\ayyos  /xeo-^s  23  f. 

76.  ovojxa,   evpos  :    H.    718 
and   6  ;    G.    1058.  —  irXc'epwv  : 
gen.    of    measure   with    Trora- 
jpi6t. 

77  f.  €ls  x»ptov,  iTrl  TOL  opt] : 
ace.  because  of  the  motion  im- 
plied in  €&\LTTOV  :  abandoned 
for  a  secure  stronghold  on  the 
mountains.  —  irXrjv  :  here  a 


conj.,  hence  the  nom.  after  it. 
Cf.  Eng.  except,  used  both  as 
prep,  and  as  conj. 

81.  irpoTcpol:  H.  619  and  a; 
G.  926.  Cf .  <?/coC<rcu  270,  20  and 
note.  —  T]n*pais :  H.  781;  G. 
1184. 

84  f.  ol  JJK'V,  olSe':  H.  654; 
G.  981.—  itycurav:  H.  481  and 
«;  G.  812;  141,  3. 

86.  TO  aXXo  0-Tpa.Tevfxa. :  the 
rest  of  the  army. 

87.  8*  oflv :  cf.  63  f. 


274] 


ANABASIS,   /.,  2,  13-27. 


291 


e/carov  oirXlrai.      26.  ol  S'  a\\oi  eTrel  fj/cov, 
re  7ro\iv  rovs  Tapcrovs  SitfpTraaav,  Sia  rbv  6'Xe- 
Opov  T&V  o-vcrTparicDTWv  opyi^ofjLevoi,  /cal  ra  /3a<rl-  90 
\eia  ra  ev  avrrj.      K{)po9  Se  eTrel  elafaacrev  els  rrjv 

7TO\IV,  fJL€T€7r€fJL7T€TO  TOV  ^V€VV€(71V  7T/309  ZCiVTOV    O   S' 

ovre  7rpoT€pov  ovSevi  TTW  KpeLrrovi  eavrov  els  X€^Pa^ 
e\6elv  €(f)7j  OVT€  rare  Kvpcp  livai  r^6e\ey  jrplv  r]  yvvrj 

eXaySe.     27.  pera  Se  ravra  95 
p,ev    eSco/ce 
Se 

ITTTTOV 
/cal 


avTov  eTretcre  /ca 


crvveyevovTO 
Xpij/JMTa  TroXXa 
S&pa  a  vo^L^eTai  irapa 

KOI  crrpeTTTOv  xpvaovv  /cal 


88.  ol   8*   aXXot  :    subj.    of 
^ACOJ/,    placed    before    tiret   for 
greater  prominence. 

89.  TOVS  Tap<rovs:   in  app. 
with  T7)v  ir6\iv. 

91.    Kvpos :  cf .  oi  5'  &\\OL  88 
and  note. 

92.  irpos  iavTov :  to  come  to 
him. 

93.  o*8ev£:  H.  767  ;  G.1165. 
We  must  translate  as  if  it  were 
gen.    So  Kvpy  94.    Observe  the 
Greek  way  of  repeating  the  neg. 
where  we  now  use  but  one  neg. 
H.  1030 ;  G.  1619.    Yet  in  old 
Eng.  we  find  the  same  practice 
as  in  Greek.     Thus  Chaucer 
has,  "  And  wol  not  suffren  hem 
by  noon  assent  |  Nother  to  ben 
y-buried  nor  y-brent"   (mod- 
ernized, "And  will  not  suffer 


them  by  no  assent  neither  to 
be  buried  nor  burnt")  ;  and 
Shakspere,  "  I  cannot  choose 
one  nor  refuse  none."  Among 
the  uneducated  this  old  usage 
is  still  common,  and  children 
are  apt  to  adopt  it  uncon- 
sciously as  the  more  natural 
way  of  speaking. 

95.  eXafk:  the  subj.  is  not 
ij  yvv/i,  but  Zvtvveo-is.  Such  a 
change  of  subj.  is  often  left  to 
be  understood  in  Greek,  al- 
though in  Eng.  the  new  subj. 
must  be  expressed,  nplv  here 
takes  the  indie,  instead  of  the 
subjv.,  because  the  action  is 
one  which  actually  occurred. 
H.  922,  924;  G.  1469,  1464. 
Cf.  irplv  cLv  <rvfj,(3ov\€ti<rr)Tai  270, 
29, 


292 


THE  GEEEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[275— 


iood/clvd/cr]v   ^pvcrovv   KOI   (rroXrjv   Tlepcn/ctfv,    KOI    rrjv 

SiapTrd&a-Oai, '     ra     Se 
fiv  TTOV  evrv<y%dva)cn,v, 


100  ff.  TTJV  \copdv  .  .  .  Siap- 
ird£eo-0cu  and  rd  Tjpircwriuva 
.  .  .  diroXa}Apdv€iv  are  also  objs. 


of 


cf. 


understood.  —  diro- 
:  for  the  force  of  dir6 
,  85  and  note. 


FORMATION  OF  WORDS. 

275.  In  mastering  the  vocabulary  of  a  language,  it  is  a 
great  help  to  observe  how  words  are  formed.  New  words 
are  directly  formed  from  existing  words  in  two  ways,  — 
(1)  by  composition,  (2)  by  derivation. 

a.  Composition  is  putting  together  two  existing  words  to 
make  a  new  one,  as  o,K/oo-7roAis  from  aKpos  and  TroAis,  Trpo- 
/3aAAo>  from  Trpo  and  /2aAA.<o.     Some  slight  change  of  form 
often  occurs,  especially  in  the  first  member.     The  simpler 
cases  of  composition  are  easily  recognized   and  the   com- 
pound easily  remembered,  if  the  parts  were  already  known  ; 
the  more  detailed  study  of  compounds  may  be  postponed  a 
while  longer. 

b.  Derivation  consists  in  adding  to  the  stem  or  root  of  a 
word  a  suffix,  which  modifies  the  meaning  of  the  stem  or 
root,  but  is  not  itself  used  as  a  separate  word,  as 


The  most  common  modes  of  derivation  have  now  been 
illustrated  abundantly,  and  are  grouped  together  in  the 
following  sections.  The  most  important  examples  that  have 
occurred  are  first  given,  then  the  suffix  is  pointed  out,  and  a 
reference  given  to  the  Grammar. 


276]  FORMATION   OF  WORDS.  293 

Primitive  Nouns. 

276.   Words  formed  immediately  from  a  root  or  verb 
theme  are  called  primitives. 

a.  Xo-y-o-s  (Xo-y-o-)  speech,  word,   from  X^-yw  (Xe-y-)  speak. 
8p6fA-o-s  (8po(ji-o-)  running,  8paji-€iv  (Spaji-)  run. 
Tpoir-o-sCTpoir-o-)  turn,  manner,          rpe'irw  (rpcir-)  turn. 
Tvir-o-s  (TVTT-O-)  stroke,  type,               TVTTTW  (TV-IT-)  strike. 
orroX-o-s  (o-roX-o-)  equipment,  \  (  o-reXXw  (crrcX-)  equip, 

expedition,  J  \     send. 

v6|i-o-s  (vofi-o-)  law,  v€jjLw  (v€|i-)  distribute. 

apx-o-s  (dpx-o-)  ruler,  a-px"  (a-px-)  rule. 

(vir-apxos  subordinate  ruler.) 

a/ywy-6-s  (d-ywy-o-)  leader,  a-yw  (ot-y-)  lead. 

(stem  reduplicated.  ) 

Suffix  -o-,  H.  548  ;  G.  832. 

b.  dpx-^i  (dpx-d-)  beginning,  rule,  from  apx"  (apx-)  begin,  rule. 
Tpod>-Ti      Crpo<i>-d-)    nurture,  ^ 

support,  }          ^4""  ^P'*-)  WOUTOft- 


garrison, 
povX--/j  (povX-d-)  ^s^,  p?aw,  povXojtai  (povX-)  wish. 


(<ruX-XoY-d-)  gath-  \  (  o-vX-Xc-yw    (<rvv  +  Xe-y-) 

ering,  levy,                           f  \     gather. 

t<r-poX-^     (€l<r-poX-d-)    pass\  f  € 

into,                                      /  \ 

poX-^(v'ir€p-poX-d-)^roto->>  f  vircp-pdXXa)          (virep- 

r  beyond,  passage  over,    f  \     paX-)  throw  beyond. 

(K-aX-»-)  battle,  licxxoK-ai  (jiax-)  ^^- 
Suffix  -d-,  H.  548  and  b  ;  G.  832. 

c.    Kpt-TTj-s  (Kpt-rd-)  judge,  from  Kptvw  (Kpi-)  decide. 

•n-oiTj-T'/j-s(iroiT]-Ta-)  maker,  poet,          irotca)  (irow-)  make. 

'-*\  s*a\       -\     ^i  +  rdOXew  (d0X€-)  contend 

aOX-n-r^-s  (aOX-n-ra-)  athlete,  1      s  • 

\    for  a  prize. 

^k  f  dvT-avwv(tco       (dvri  + 

avT-_av»vlo-T<,.S(avT-a1f»vl«r.  I  '  } 

TO-)  antagomst,  ]  \     ^.J 


Suffix  -ra-,  H.  550  and  a  ;  G.  833,  1. 


294               THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [277— 

d.  Xv-<ri-s  (Xv-<ri-)  loosing,            from  XVCD  (Xv-,  Xv-)  loose. 

€-<ri-)  putting,  position,  TCOijju  (6€-)  put. 

c.)  birth, 

(dva-pa-o-i-)  00-  )  f  dva-pcuvu>  (dva  +  Pa-) 

ing  up,                                 ]  \     go  up. 

Trp6-<t>a-cri.-s  (irpo-<|>a-cri-)  pre-\  f  irpo-<|>aCva>  (irpo+<|>av-, 

text,                                       |  \     <|>a-)  show  before. 

4J-£ra-<ri-s      (€{-€Ta-<ri-)     re-  ^  J  €|-€TO^<O       (ef  +  4ra8-) 

view,                                      )  (.     inspect. 
TO£I-S  (TO£I-  for  Tav-crt-)  ar-  ") 

ranyement, 

irCo-Tt-s(mo-Ti-form9-Ti-)/a#&,  ir€£9a>  (iriO-)  persuade. 

Suffix  -<ri-,  -TI-,  H.  551,  1  ;  G.  834. 

e.  5pd-|Aa  (8pd-fi,aT-)  deed,  drama,  from  8paa>  (Spa-)  do. 

vpau,-u,a  (vpau.-u.aT-  for  •vpad)-  ") 

r    \ir  r  r                          i  .vpadxo  (vpa<b-) 
jiar-)  writing,                        / 

irpay-ixa    (irpdv-uar-)     thing} 

done,  «/«£•, 

8€p-u,a  (Scp-jiar-)  Mde,  Seipca  (8€p-)  /«?/,  skin. 

86v-u,a     (8ov-uiaT-    for    SOK-)  „  ,c      N 

r  ,   v     I,1".                        V  8oK€i  (8oK-)  seems  6es«. 
jiar-)  resolution,                  J 

(TTparcv-fxa       (o-Tparev-jxaT-)  "i  f  crrparcva)     (orrpaTev-) 

army,                                   f  \     make  an  expedition. 

Suffix  -nar-,  H.  553,  1  ;  G.  837. 


-  ") 

TaTTW 


/.  TTcuSei'd  (iraiScid-)  education,     from  irai86va)(i 

pacriXcid  (pacriXeid-)  kingdom,  pa<riX€vw(pa<riX€u-)re^w. 

Suffix  -id-,  H.  522,  G.  836. 


Denominative  Nouns. 

277.   Words  formed  immediately  from  a  noun  (or  adjec- 
tive) stem  are  called  denominatives. 

a.  lirir€v»-s  (iinr-€t>-)  horseman,      from  i'-inro-s  horse. 
Upcv-s  (lep-€v-)  priest,  Up6-s  sacred. 


278]'  FORMATION   OF  WORDS.  295 


s,  Hermes,  mes- 

v-)  interpreter,  senger  of  Zeus  and 

(.     god  of  trade. 

Suffix  -€v-,  H.  557,  1  ;  G.  841. 

b.  iroXf-Ttj-s  (iro\l-Ta,-)  .citizen,      from  ir<5Xi-s  city,  state. 
TO|O-TT)-S  (Tofo-To,-)  bowman,  rojo-v  bow. 
6-irXt-TTj-s  (oirXl-TcL-)  hoplite,               8-irXa  arms. 

Suffix  -TCI-,  H.  557,  2  ;  G.  841. 

c.  xpv<r-£o-v  (\p\5cr-io-)  gold  piece,  from  xpv<rd-s 
0i]p-£o-v  (Orjp-io-)  beast,  Orjp  beast. 
Xwp-Co-v  (xwp-to-)  fortress,                 x«P°-s> 
ircS-Co-v  (ircS-io-)  plain,  ircSo-v  ground. 
ptpX-Co-v  (Ptpx-io-)  6ooA:,  p£pXo-s  papyrus. 

Suffix  -to-,  H.  558,  1  ;  G.  844.    Many  diminutives  have  lost  the 
diminutive  meaning. 

278.  Denominative  Adjectives. 

a.  dpxato-s  (for  dpxa-io-s)  ancient,  from  apx^  (apxd-)  beginning. 
1  A0t]vato-s  (for  '  Ae^va-io-s)  \  (  *  A6fjvai  ('Ae^vcL-)  Ath- 

Athenian,  /  \     6ns. 

pYos     (dVpo-) 
(Lat.  ager). 

(for  paa-iXcv-io-s)  \  (  pacriXevs 

kingly,  f  \     king. 

MlX^jo-to-s    (for  MiXrjT-io-s)  \  (  MfX-qros      (MlX-qro-) 

Milesian,  f  \     Miletos. 

op0-io-s  steep,  opOos  (op0o-)  upright. 

•iroX€|j,-io-s  hostile,  enemy,  iroXcfxos  (iroXcfjio-)  war. 

honorable,  T^H-^  (TIJIO-)  honor. 

Suffix  -io-,  H.  564  with  a  and  b  ;  G.  850. 


b.  pappap-iK6-s  barbarian,  from  {  PaPPaP0's  (PapPapo-) 

I    foreigner. 

6-s  (for  oapei-iKo-s)  daric,  <          . 

:6-s  Hellenic,  "TH\\r\v  ('EXXr^v-)  Greek. 


296  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [279— 

Ionic,  "Iwv-cs  (*Iwv-)  lonians. 

f  Ilepo-n-s  (Il€p<rd-)Per- 
» 


j€v-iic6-s  mercenary,  ^vo-s(£€vo-)  guest-friend. 

Suffix  -IKO-,  H.  565  ;  G.  851,  1. 

^°"-€°-s)  golden,  from  xpvo-6-s  (xpvoro-)  gold. 
(for  va\K-€o-s)  of}  \   j     /     \      \-L 

bronze,  }          X<***-«  (X^KO-)  bronze. 

4>oivlKov-s    (for    <|>otviK-€o-s)  \  /  <|>oivij   (<)>OIVIK-)  pur- 

purple-red,  ]  t     pie-red  dye. 

Suffix  -co-,  H.  566  ;  G.  852. 


279.  Denominative  Verbs. 

a.  aft6-a>  deem  worthy,  from  a|io-s  worthy. 
8ovX6-w  enslave,  8ov\o-s  slave. 

H.  570,  571,  1 ;  G.  861,  3. 

b.  8airava-a>  expend,  from  Sairavr)  expense. 
TcXcvTa-a)  end,  die,  T€\€vH]  end,  death. 
ir€ipd-o|xai  attempt,  ircipa  attempt. 

accuse,  alrCd  cause,  charge, 

be  worsted,  TJTTWV  ivorse. 

H.  571,  2 ;  G.  861,  1. 

c.  olK€*-a>  dwell,  inhabit,  from  ottco-s  house. 
iro\€fi€-o>  make  war,  iroXcjio-s  war. 
Xcopc-o)  withdraw,  move,                     X"P°-s  P^acc. 
eewp^-w  view?,                                        0€<op6-s  spectator. 

H.  571,  3;  G.  861,  2. 

d.  pao-iXcv-w  reign,  from  paonXcv-s  king. 

)  suspect,  vir-o-rrrTj-s  suspicious, 

educate,  irais 

p^an,  povX-/j 

iruTT€v-w  «rws^,'  iricrrd-s  faithful 


FORMATION   OF  WORDS. 


297 


Kiv8vv€v-«  be  in  danger,  icCv8vvo-s  danger. 

ev-w  make  proceed,  iropo-s  passage. 

hunt,  8rjp  wild  beast. 

H.  571,  4 ;  G.  861,  4. 

e.   cpC£«  (for  IpiS-iu)  strive,  from  epis  (epiS-)  strife. 

^o)     (for     <raXiriyy-u0) )  f  o-dXm-yJ 

trumpet,  /           t     trumpet, 

assemble,  d0poo-s  together. 

H.  571,  5;  G.  861,  6;  864. 

/.  •yvp.vdfcw  exercise,  from  •yviivo-s  naked. 

d.Ti|ioLJ;<i>  dishonor,  arlpo-s  without  honor. 

^a)  wonder  at,  6avjxa  wonder. 

H.  571,  6;  G.  861,  5;  864. 


280.   Translate  into  Greek. 

At  my  summons  the  Greeks  assembled  at  Sar- 
dis ;  for  I  intended  to  march  with  them  against  the 
king,  but  they  did  not  suspect  it.  We  traveled 
for  many  days  through  many  large  cities  and  prov- 
inces, crossing  rivers  and  ascending  mountains,  5 


1.  At  my  summons :  gen. 
abs.,  I  calling. 

2.  intended :  use  juAXw.  — 
march :  here  (rrparei/o/xat ;  for 
it  is  not  merely  the  act  of  march- 
ing that  is  meant,  but  rather  the 
making  a  military  expedition. 

3.  but  they:   cf.   274,  17. 
tKeivoi.  might  be  used,  but  would 
make    the    new  subj.   unduly 
prominent.  —  We    traveled  : 
use  a  connective  in  Greek. 


4  f .  for :  expressed  by  the 
ace.  of  extent.  —  many  large : 
the  Greek  would  always  say 
many  and  large.  —  cities  and 
provinces :  use  re  Kai. 

5.  crossing  rivers  and  as- 
cending mountains :  the  Greek 
would  contrast  these  phrases, 
which  we  merely  coordinate. 
Put  the  nouns  before  the  pples., 
to  give  them  the  same  relative 
prominence  as  in  English,  and 


298 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[280— 


and  the  Greeks  gladly  obeyed  their  generals  in 
everything.  When  we  were  at  Kaystros  Plain, 
the  soldiers  came  again  and  again  to  my  head- 
quarters and  asked  for  their  pay.  I  kept  telling 

10  them  that  I  could  not  pay  them  until  I  got  the 

means ;  but  they  saw  that  I  was  distressed,  for  it 

is  not  like  me  not  to  pay  my  debts.     But  after 

Epyaxa  came,  I  paid  them  four  months'  wages. 

At  one  town  I  held  a  general  review.  The  Greeks 

15  were  drawn  up  and  took  position  as  is  their  custom 
for  battle,  each  general  arranging  his  own  troops ; 
and  when,  as  their  line  was  advancing  in  a  body, 
the  Greek  began  to  run,  it  was  a  fine  thing  to  see 


mark  the  contrast  by  ptv  and 
5£  Since  certain  definite  rivers 
and  mountains  are  had  in 
mind,  use  the  article.  We  thus 
get  rods  jj.tv  7TOTajuoi>s  diapal- 
vovres  tiri  dt  ra  6pi)  dvapaivovrcs. 
6  f .  generals :  H.  763  ;  764, 
2;  G.  1158,  1160.— in  every- 
thing: Trdvra,  cognate  ace. — 
at:  ev. 

8.  again  and  again:   TroX- 
Xd/as.  —  my :  use  the  personal 
pron.    in    the  gen.      For    the 
position  see  H.  673,  6  ;  G.  977, 1. 

9.  I  kept  telling :  the  Greek 
would  indicate  the  contrast  be- 
tween the  new  subject  and  that 
of  the  preceding  sentence  by 
expressing  ty&  and  using  5<?, 
which  will  also  properly  con- 


nect the  sentence  with  the  for- 
mer one.  For  kept  telling  use 
a  single  word  in  Greek. 

10.  could  not :  opt.  H.  932, 
2 ;  G.  1487.     Or  the  impf .  ind. 
may  be  used,  H.  936;  G.  1489. 
—  until :  cf .  trplv  &v  (ru/A/3ouXetf- 
(rijTcu  270,  29,  and  irplv  /carcryd- 
701  273,  15,  with  notes. 

11.  they  saw  that  I  -was : 
lit.  /  was  plain  being  distressed. 

12.  my    debts  :     lit.    the 
things  owed,  pres.  pass.  pple. 
used  substantively. 

14.    At  one  town:    /cai  ev 
nvL  w6\€i.  —  general:  lit.  of  all. 

16.  troops:  omit. 

17.  as  ...  in  a  body :  gen. 
abs. 

18.  the  Greeks  began  to 


281] 


ANABASIS,  /.,  <9,  1-12. 


299 


the  fear  of  the  Persians.     There  for  the  first  time 
it  became  clear  how  much  better  soldiers  these  20 
Greeks  are  than  my  own  people  ;  and  with  them 
as  auxiliaries  I  think  I  shall  be  able  to  defeat 
Artaxerxes. 


run  :  cf  .  274,  30.  —  fine  :  fca\6s. 
—  thing:  omit. 

19.    for    the    first    time: 


20.  how  much  :  dat.  sing. 
neut.  (H.  781  ;  G.  1184)  of  the 
indef.  rel.  that  is  correlative 
with  foos.  See  H.  282  ;  G.  429. 


21  f.  my  own  people :  the 

article  with  the  gen.  of  the  re- 
flexive pron.  — with :  either  crtfv 
or  exwi/  may  be  used. 

22.  as  auxiliaries:  put  in 
apposition  with  the  word  for 
them.  Do  not  use  w's.  —  I  shall 
be  able :  H.  940 ;  G.  895,  2. 


281.   Anabasis,  L,  3,  1-12. 

1.  ^vravOa  epewe  Kvpo?  /cal  77  err  par  ta 
eiKoenv  -  ol  jap  crrpanwrai  ov/c  ecfracrav  levai  rov 
Trpocra)  •  VTTcoTrrevov  jap  rfSr)  CTTL  ftacriKed  ievat, ' 
Se  ov/c  eirl  TOVTCO  €<fra(rav.  7r/ocoTO9  Se 
TOU?  avrov  o-Tpancord^  e/3m£eTO  ievai  *  5 


alone,  is  virtually  made  a  noun 
by  prefixing  the  art. ;  this 
phrase-noun  is  then  treated  as 
an  ace.  of  extent  or  adverbial 
ace.,  or  (as  here)  a  gen.  of 
place.  H.  760,  a  ;  G.  1138. 

4.  eirl  TOVTW:  on  this  basis;  for 
this.— rrpwros:  H.619,5;  G.926. 

5.  avTov :  note  the  position. 
So  in  10.  —  €pidt€To:  for  deri- 
vation  cf.   279,  /.    For  tense 
see  H.  832 ;  G.  1255. 


1.  ^ivc :  H.  607 ;  G.  901. 

2  f.  OVK  €(()a<rav  :  refused. 
Cf.  174,  I.,  19  and  note.  It 
was  now  plain  that  Cyrus's 
pretense  about  the  Pisidians 
was  false.  The  march  had  al- 
ready lasted  three  months,  and 
they  had  passed  directly  by 
the  Pisidians.  —  TOV  -rrpoo-w  : 
the  adv.  alone  would  have 
been  sufficient.  But  sometimes 
an  adv. ,  instead  of  being  used 


300 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[281— 


ol  Be  avrov  re  e/3a\\ov  KOI  ra  vTrotyyia  ra 
eVel  ap^aivro  Trpoievcu.     2.   KXe'a/r^o?   Se  rore 
filKpov  €^€(f>vy€  pr)  KaraTreTpcodijvai)  vcrrepov  S' 
Zyvco  on  ov  Svvtfo-erai,  ftiacracrQai,  (rvvtfyayev  € 
10  criav  rcov  avrov  (rrpancDTWv.     fcal  Trpcorov  pev  eSa- 

ve  7TO\VV  ftpOVOV  60-TC09  *    Ol    Se    0/3CO^T€9   €0CLV/Jia%OV 

€(Tt,(i)7rQ)v  •    elra    Se    eXe^e   rotate.      3.  vA^S/?e? 
jJbrj   OavfJid^ere  on  ^aXeTrw?  <f>epa)  rot? 


6.  epaXXov :    supply    \L6ois : 
lit.  ^reio  at  (repeatedly)  with 
stones. 

7.  ap£aivTo:  indir.  mid.  H. 
813  ;  816,  4  ;  G.  1242,  2  and  3. 
<?7re£  is  a  rel.  conj.,  and  com- 
bined with  the  opt.  mode  of 
tLpZcLLVTo  means  whenever.  Thus 
the  clause  implies  the  condi- 
tion if  ever  they  began.    This 
is  a  general  condition  referring 
to  past  time,  and  takes  the  opt. 
H.  890  ;  894,  2  ;  912  ;  913  ;  914, 
B,  (2);    G.  1393,  2;   1428,  1; 
1431,  2. 

8.  juKpdv :  H.  719  and  b ;  G. 
1060.   Translate  barely  escaped. 
—  (jrij :  H.  1029  ;  G.  1615.     The 
same  idiom  appears  in  older 
Eng. ;   as,  uYou  may  as  well 
forbid  the  mountain  pines  |  To 
wag  their  high  tops  and  to  make 
no  noise"  (Shakspere),  where 
we  find  the  modern  and  the 
Greek  idiom  combined. 

9.  Sryvw:  recognized.  —  Svvfj- 
<r€T<u :  retains  the  mode  as  well 


as  the  tense  of  the  dir.  form. 
What  he  thought  was  otf  dwri- 
crofjicu. 

11.  lo-n&s :  peculiar  2d  perf . 
act.  pple.  of  i<rr?7/u,  more  com- 
mon than  effTyKds.   H.  336,  454, 
244  and  a ;  G.  507,  508 ;  342. 
Translate,   he  stood  and  wept. 
Although  the  Greeks  expressed 
their  emotion  more  freely  than 
we  do,  yet  this  action  of  the 
veteran  soldier  could  not  but 
excite  attention  and  sympathy, 
as  it  was  intended  to  do. 

12.  "Av8p€s :  regularly  used 
as  a  general  form  of  respectful 
address,  followed  by  the  more 
particular  title,  as  TroXtrcu,  Si/ca- 
<rral    ( judges) ,    or   o-rpartwrai. 
Translate  the  second  title  only. 

13.  \LV\  Oav|j,a£€T€:   the  neg. 
/^,  suggesting  an  exercise  of 
will,    shows   that    flav/xdfere   is 
impv.  instead  of  indie.  H.  874 
and    a  ;    G.    1346.  —  xaXcirws 
<j>€p(o:    am    sorrowful,    or    de- 
pressed. 


281] 


ANABASIS,  /.,  3,  1-12. 


301 


Trapovo-L  TTpaypacnv.     e/Aol  yap  £ez/o?  KCyjo?  eyevero 
Kal  fji€  favyovra  e/c  TT}?  TrarpiSos  rd  re  a\\a  ert/i^o-e  15 
Kal  pipiovs  €&a)K€  SdpeiKOV?  •  oft?  eyco  Aa/3&)i>  ov/c  e& 
TO   tSiov  Kare6e^r]v   efjiol  ovSe  KaO^VTrdOrjaa^  a\V 
efc  v/jid$  e&aTrdvtov.     4.  Kal  Trpwrov  pev  Trpbs  roi>9 


14.  irpaYH-curi :    H.  778 ;   G. 
1181.    Translate  the  phrase,  at 
the  present  situation. 

15.  rd   aXXa:    cf.    /xl/cp6^  8 
and  note. 

16  f.     |J,Vp(oVS      €S(i)K€      5dp€L- 

KOVS  :  the  effect  of  the  order  is 
to  give  considerable  promi- 
nence to  fjivplovs  and  edw/ce.  In 
a  lively  or  earnest  style,  such 
as  this  speech  exhibits,  a  favor- 
ite way  of  ending  a  sentence 
in  which  the  verb  is  accompa- 
nied by  a  dependent  noun 
with  an  adjective  modifier,  is 
this  arrangement :  (1)  adjective 
modifier,  (2)  verb,  (3)  depend- 
ent noun.  —  OVK  €ls  TO  t8iov 
Ko.T€6l|AT]v  ejjoC:  did  not  lay  up 
(lit.  deposit)  for  my  private 
advantage.  Kar-e-d^-^v  is  in 
the  ju-aor.  mid.  ind.  1st  sing. 

The  entire  conjugation  of 
TlOtifu  should  be  learned  at  this 
point.  H.  349,  329,  333;  G. 
504,  506.  Note  carefully  the 
following  irregularities.  (For 
future  convenience  it  is  well  to 
put  the  references  against  the 
form,  in  the  paradigm,  which 
is  explained.)  (1)  In  the  pres. 


syst.  rttfets,  MOets,  trlOei  and 
the  opt.  riOolwv  etc.,  H.  419,  a ; 
G.  630.  Accent  of  Tt0etVov, 
Titfef/xej',  Ti0e?re,  TiOeTev,  rtOeTro, 
Ti0oto,  H.  388  ;  G.  131,  3.  rl0€i, 
H.  415,  & ;  G.  753.  TtOels  (for 
Ti-0e-ir-s),  H.  382,  56  ;  G.  335  ; 
131,  5.  (2)  In  the  /u-aor.  the 
sing,  of  the  ind.  act.  is  wanting, 
and  is  supplied  by  the  peculiar 
1st  aor.  in  -*a-,  H.  432  ;  G.  670. 
The  other  peculiarities  of  this 
system  are  described  H.  443, 
a— e\  G.  802.  Note  particu- 
larly that  e  of  the  theme  is  not 
lengthened,  and  that  OeTvai  (for 
6e-€vai)  has  the  ending  -emt, 
with  which  compare  l-tvai  and 
dovvai.  (3)  The  perl  act.  rt- 
6ei-Ka  is  wholly  irregular  for 
T^-6-rj-Ka  ;  and  in  fact  Tt-0y-Ka 
etc.  are  the  classical  forms, 
rtOeiKa  etc.  not  appearing  in 
inscriptions  before  100  B.C. 
There  is  a  close  resemblance 
in  inflection  between  ri0rifu 
and  5£5o>/xi. 

18  f.   ISairavwv:    note    the 
change   of   tense.  —  irpos  TOVS 
equiv.  to  rots  6/>?££.  — 
in  behalf  of. 


302 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[281— 


eTroXefjirjcra,  /cal  virep  TT}?  'EXXaSo? 

20   pOVjJbTJV    peff    V/JL&V,    €K     TT)<$     X.eppOVr)(TOV    CLVTOVS    €%€- 

\avvwv  /3ofXo/>ceVoi;5  afyaipelaOai,  rou?  evoi/covvra? 
rrjv  <yfjv.     eTreiSrj  Se  KO/oo?  eKaXei,  \a/3a>v 
Vi   Iva   el  TI   Seotro  axpeXoirjv  avrov 
av6*  &v  ev  €7ra0ov  VTT  e/ceivov.     5.  ejrel  Se  v/juels  ov 
25  /3ov\€(T0€    crvfjuTropeveaffai,,    avdy/ctj    81$   JJLOL   rj    uyita? 
rfj   Kvpou  <f)i\ia  xpijaffai,  rj  TT/OO?  eicelvov 
'  V/JL&V  elvai.     el  fjuev  Srj  Sl/caia  TTOL- 


20  f .  IJeXavvwv :  in  the  orig- 
inal, not  the  secondary,  mean- 
ing. —  povXojAc'vovs :  notice  the 
agreement. 

22.  "EXXTjvas  TTJV  -yfiv:   H. 
724 ;  G.  1069. 

23.  A  TI   S&HTO:    what  he 
thought  was  t&v  n  dfyrai  (H. 
898 ;   G.  1403)  ;  this  becomes 
opt.  in  the  implied  indir.  dis- 
course because  introduced  by  a 
past  tense,  tiropevbwv.   H.  937  ; 
G.    1502.  —  W^€\O£T]V  :    H.    881 
and  a  ;  G.  1365,  1369. 

24.  dv0*  wv :  =  avry  ticelvajv  & : 
in  such  phrases  the  antec.  is 
regularly  omitted  when  it  is 
indef.  — cv  ciraBov :  7rd<rxw  does 
not  in  itself  imply  an  unpleas- 
ant feeling,  but  means  merely 
experience  something ;  e&  makes 
it  clear  that  the  experience  was 
a  pleasant  one.     Taken  by  it- 
self, then,  the  phrase  e$  eiraBov 
is  equivalent  to  had  been  well 


treated  (for  tense  see  H.  837), 
and  so  takes  the  gen.  of  the 
agent  with  U7r6,  like  a  pass. 
The  entire  clause  must  be  trans- 
lated freely,  in  return  for  the 
\favors  which  I  had  received 
from  him.  —  vjwis:  emphatic, 
and  so  complimentary  to  the 
troops.  The  whole  address  is 
intended  to  tickle  their  sense 
of  their  own  importance  and 
so  win  their  confidence,  while 
suggesting  that  there  are  diffi- 
culties before  them  if  they  take 
this  course,  and  barely  hinting 
at  the  claims  of  honor. 

25.  dvcfyKT] :  supply  fart.  — 
8if :    of  course. 

26.  irpoSovra:    cf.    \ap6j>ra 
273,  10.  —  <t>iXl£:   H.  777;  G. 
1183.  —  xP^°"®at:  f°r  XP&effQai"> 
irreg.  contraction.     H.  412  ;  G. 
496.     Translate  enjoy. 

27.  el :  whether,  introducing 
an  indir.  question.    Eng.  if  is 


281] 


ANABASIS,  /.,  3,  1-12. 


303 


OVK  olSa,  aiptfcrofjLai  S'  ovv  vfjias  /cal  <rvv  V/JLLV 
o  rt,   av  Bey  TreicrofJiaL.       /cal  ovTrore  epel  ovSels  ft>9 
eyco  "}£\\r)vas  dyaycbv  els  rovs  /3ap/3dpov$,  TrpoSou?  30 
TOT)?  f/EXX?7i>a9  rrjv  rcov  /3ap/3dpcov  fyiXiav  ei\6fjirjv. 
6.  aXX'  eirel  vaeis  e/Jiol  OVK  etfeXere  TreidecrOcu, 
crvv  vfilv  e^ofjLai  /cal  o  TI  av  Sep  Trelo-o/jiai. 
yap  v/jias   efjiol   elvai    /cal  irarplSa   /cal  tf>t\ov?   /cal 
o-vfi/jid^ov^  /cal  <TVV  vfjblv  /J,ev  av  olfjiat,  zivai  rt/i^o?  35 
OTTOV  av  c5,  vjjicov  Se  'eprj/Aos  cov  ov/c  av  iKavos  olfiac 
elvai  OVT  av  <f>i\ov  QxfreXrjcrat,  ovr    av  e^dpbv  aXe^a- 
cr6ai.     to?   efjiov   ovv  IOVTO?  OTrrj  av  /cal  Vfjbels  OVTQ> 


often  used  in  the  same  way. 
Observe  that  indir.  questions 
do  not  take  the  subjv.  in  Greek. 

28.  otSa:   learn  the  conju- 
gation,  H.  491 ;  G.  820.  —  alptf- 
<ro|iai :  H.  816,  1 ;  G.  1246. 

29.  '6  TI    av    S^TJ  :    supply 
Trdexeiv-     For  the  mode  see  H. 
912,  913,  916  (with  example), 
898 ;  G.  1428,  1  and  2  ;  1434 ; 
1403.  — imo-ofj.o.1 :  from  ird<rxu  ; 
the  form  from  TrdBw  would  not 
yield  a  meaning  suited  to  the 
context.  —  oviroT€    ovSeis  :    H. 
1030  ;  G.  1619.    Cf.  274,  93  and 
note. 

30.  €ls:    among,    into    the 
land  of. 

32.  v>€is  €jioC:  put  side  by 
side  for  contrast.      So  in  34 

i 


33.  crvv:  omitinEng.    £TTO- 
u  takes  either  the  simple  dat. 


of  association  (H.772;  G.  1175) 
or  the  dat.  with  <rtv. 

35.  av:  belongs  with  eli/at, 
which  is  thus  shown  to  stand 
for  a  potential  opt.  H.  964 ;  G. 
1308.  Cf.  7re/H7ei>6/>iej>os  Av  270, 
25  and  note. 

36  f.  Sirov  av  w:  cf.  8n  &v 
dty  29  and  note.  —  vjxwv:  gen. 
of  separation.  H.  753,  g\  G. 
1139, 1140, 1112.  The  reminder 
that  he  is  an  exile  is  an  appeal 
to  their  sympathy.  —  av  Uavos 
otficu  ctvat :  cf .  civ  ol/xai  rf/xtos 
35.  —  OVT'  av :  this  &v  is  merely 
a  repetition  of  &  v  in  36 ;  it  adds 
nothing,  except  that  it  lends  a 
slight  emphasis  to  the  preced- 
ing oUre.  H.  864  ;  G.  1312. 

38.  <os:  belongs  with  the 
pple.  —  Ijiov  IOVTOS:  gen. 


I  where  we  might  expect  rather 
l  tin  ty&  elfjit.  —  oirrj  av  Kal  vp.€is  : 


304 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[281— 


rr)V  yvcojjirjv  e^ere.  7.  ravra  elirev  •  ol  Se 
40  rat,  01  re  avrov  erceivov  KOL  ol  aXXot  ravra  dtcovcrav- 
T€9  on  ov  $air)  Trapa  f3aa-i\ea  TropeveaOai  eiryveo-av  • 
Trapa  Se  Bevlov  KCU  Hdalayvos  7r\elovs  rf  $icr')(t\ioi, 
XaySoVre?  ra  oVXa  KOI  ra  o-/cevo<f)6pa  eo-TparoTreo'ev- 
aavro  Trapa  K.\eap%ov.  8.  Kvpo?  Se  TOVTOIS  aTro- 

45    pWV  T€  Kal  \V7TOV/Ji€VOS  fjL€T€7T6/ji7r€TO   TOV 

6  Se  levai  fiev  ov/c  f)6e\e,  \d6pa  Se  rwv 
TrefJLTrwv  avrat  a<yy€\ov  e\€<y€  dappelv  ct>9 
ao/Jievcov  TOVTCOV  €t?  TO  Seov.  fjieTaTre/jLTrecrOai,  8' 
€/ce\€vev  avrdv  aura?  S'  ov/c  €(f)rj  levai.  9.  /juera  Se 
50  ravra  o~vvayaja)V  rovs  6*  eavrov  err pan  cor a$  KOI 


supply  fr;re,  and  cf .  8  TL  &v  29  and 
tiirov  &v  36.  Translate  freely, 
Be  quite  sure  therefore  that  I 
am  going  whichever  way  you  do. 

40.  01  re :  for  accent  of  the 
art.  see  H.  112,  c ;  G.  143,  4.— 
avTov:  emphasizes  ejceiVov,  for 
which  in  Eng.  use  the  proper 
name. 

41.  on  :  because.  —  ov :  for 
position    cf.    OVK    e^ao-av    2.  — 
4>atT] :  what  does  the  mode  in- 
dicate ?  —  iropevWBeu :  like  ibv- 
TOS  38  and  Uvai  2,  fut.  in  mean- 
ing.   So  in  Eng.  am  going. — 
€irrfv€crav :  see  eiraivtu.    For  the 
retention  of  e  at  the  end  of  the 
theme  cf.  AcaX^w,  ^/cdXecra. 

44.  irapd  K\4apxov :  ace.  be- 
cause of  the  motion  implied  in 
the  verb. 


46.  TWV   crrpaTuoTwv :    gen. 
of  separation  with  \d6pg..     H. 
756;  G.  1150. 

47.  €\€-y€  6app€iv:  told  him 
to  be  of  good  courage.    Only  in 
this  sense  of  bid  does  X<?7a>  in 
the  act.  ordinarily   admit  the 
inf.  in  classical  prose.  —  o>s :  in- 
dicates that  the  following  gen. 
abs.  is  Klearchos's  statement. 
Translate,   assuring    him  that 
this  matter  would  be  settled  in 
the  right  way. 

48.  (i€Tair€ji,'rr€o-0ai :  thetense 
denotes  repetition :  keep  send- 
ing for.      The   object  was  to 
make  it  appear  to  the  soldiers 
that  Klearchos  was  really  at 
enmity  with  Cyrus. 

50.   6* :  for  re.     H.  79,  82 ; 
G.  48,  92. 


281] 


ANABASIS,   I.,  3,  1-1 


305 


rou9  7rpoo-€\06vTa$  aurc3  /eal  TWV  aXXcov  TOV 

fjievov,   eXe^e   rotaSe.      "Az/Spe9   crrpaTiwrai,   ra  /JLCV 

Srj   Kvpov  8rj\ov  OTL  01/70)9  G^CL  7rpo9   ^7/ia9    axTTrep 

TCL  rjfJLerepa  irpos   e/ceivov  •    ovre  yap  ^pel?   e/cewov 

€TL  (TTpaTLtoTaL)  eirei  rye  ov  (rvveTro^eOa  avrq),  ovre  55 

e/ceZz/09  €TL  fjplv  fjnaOoSorrj^.     OTL  ^evro 

vo/jii^ei,  v<f>*  rjfjL(f)v  olSa '     10.  &crre  Kal 

fjuevov    avrov    OVK    e0e\co    e\6elv9    TO    /J,ev 

ala"xyv6ii€vo<$  OTL  crvvoLSa  €/j,avTq>  TTCLVTCL  e 

CLVTOV,  €7T€LTa  Kal  Se&w  fjirj  \a/3d)v  fie  BLK^JV  €7TL0rj  60 


51.  avr^  :  dat.  after  Trpos-  m 

TTpO(T€\66vTaS. TOV  POV\O|1€VOV  : 

any  one  icho  desired. 

52  f .  TO,  Kvpov :  the  relation 
of  Cyrus,  subj.  of  6x«.  —  8f]\ov 
8n :  virtually  =  an  adv.  5iJXws. 
In  the  original  construction  5^- 
\6v  ten  was  the  principal 
clause,  with  a  8n  clause  as 
its  subj.  Next  5ij\ov  8ri,  with 
tcrrl  omitted,  was  used  par- 
enthetically, as  here.  —  OVTWS 

€X€l  :     Cf.    €VVOi'K&S    €XOL€V    256,    5 

and  note.  Translate,  the  re- 
lation of  Cyrus  to  us  is  evi- 
dently (5iJ  and  S^Xov  8n  to- 
gether) the  same  as  ours  to 
him. 

55.  Y€:  cannot  here  be 
translated;  at  least  is  too  clumsy. 
In  actual  speech  the  e  was  elided 
before  a  vowel,  so  that  the  word 
did  not  even  make  a  separate 
syllable. 


56.  jtwr0o8oTtis :  that  their 
pay  has  stopped  is  merely  the 
first  of  the  disadvantages  sug- 
gested as  resulting  from  their 
changed  relation  to  Cyrus. — 
d8iK€io-0ai:  since  no  subj.  is 
expressed,  while  one  is  required, 
it  must  be  the  same  as  that  of 
the  governing  verb.  H.  940 ; 
G.  895,  2. 

57  f.  Kal  p.€rair€|xirofj,€vov  av- 
TOV  :  even  though  he  keeps  send- 
ing for  me.  H.  969,  e  and  Rem. ; 
971,  c;  G.  1663,  6;  1568.  — TO 
ptva-Tov:  chiefly;  H.  626,  6; 
G.  915. 

59.  alcrxvvofj.€vos  :      from 
shame.    H.  969,  b  and  Eem. ; 
G.  1563,  2.  — 4|iavTw  :  dat.  after 
<rvv-   in    avvotda.  —  i\|/€vo*|i€vos  : 
supplementary    pple.  agreeing 
with  the  subj.     H.  982  and  a  ; 
G.  1578,  1590. 

60.  €ir€iTd :  correl.  with  pAv 


306 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[281— 


vofjLi%ei  VTT    efjiov  rjSi/cfjcrffai.     11.   efjbol  ovv  So/eel 
&pd    elvai   rjjJilv   /caOevSeiv   ovS*    afJbe\elv   rjfjiwv 
&v,  d\\a  (3ov\evecr6ai  o  TL  %prj  nroielv  CK  TOVTCOV. 
/col  60)5  re  fjievofjiev  avrov  cr/ceTrTeov  yuoi  Sofcei 
65  OTTO)?  a(7(f)a\eo'TaTa  fjuevov/Aev,  el  re  rjSTj  Bofcel 
evai,  OTTO)?  acr^aXecrrara  aTTifJbev,  KOI  6V&>5  ra  67 

avev  jap  TOVTCOV  OVTC  crTpaTrjyov  cure 
o^>e\o5  ovBev.     12.   6   8'   avrjp   TroXXoO 


58.  —  SeStws  :  cf .  note  on  at<rxv- 
vb/jLevos,  59.  —  jxrf :  lest,  that.  — 
8iKT]v  :  punishment.  —  liriOfj :  H. 
887  ;  G.  1378. 

61.  wv :  for  Toirrwp  &j  cf. 
avd'  wv  24  and  note.  TOVTWV 
would  depend  on  dlicy  •  since 
the  antec.  is  omitted,  the  rel. 
is  made  to  depend  on  dticrjv,  in- 
stead of  being  left  in  its  proper 
construction,  the  cognate  ace. 
with  ijdLKrj(T0ai.  H.  996,  a,  (2)  ; 
G.  1031, 1032.  Translate,  pun- 
ishment for  the  wrongs  he 
thinks  he  has  received  from 
me.  —  8oK6i :  impers.,  to  me 
therefore  it  seems  to  be  no  time. 

62  f.  TJJIIV:  H.  767;  G.  1165. 

—  Ka0€v8civ:    depends  on  a>'/>a. 
H.   952;    G.  1521.  —  w&v  a*- 
TWV:    H.  742;    G.  1102.  — POV- 
Xe v€cr0ai :  supply  doKeT  wpa  elvai. 

—  '6  TI:   here  indir.  interrog., 
not  indef.  rel.  as  in  29  and  33. 
We  use  what  in  both  senses. 
6  TI  xpy  Troie'iv  is  the  indir.  form 
of  rl  xpi)  TroLfTv ;  which  is  equiv- 


alent  to  rl  Troi&pev  ;  with  the 
deliberative  subjv.  —  CK  TOVTWV  : 
"next,  expressing  time  (se- 
quence) with  an  implied  idea 
of  consequence,  in  considera- 
tion o/,  in  consequence  o/,  the 
present  circumstances." 

64.  avTov:  adv.,  here.    Cf. 
TTOU,  TTOU,  which  were  originally 
genitives.  —  O-KCTTTCOV  :    verbal 
from  (r/c&rTojucu.     For  the  for- 
mation, H.  475  ;  G.  776,  1  and 
3.    For  the  syntax,  H.  988,  990; 
G.  1594,  1597. 

65.  SITUS  |j.€vovfx€v:    an  ex- 
cellent illustration  of  the  way 
in  which  purpose  clauses  (H. 
880,  885  ;  G.  1362,  1372)  arise 
from  the  indir.  question  and 
indef.  rel.  clause.  —  SOK€I  :  seems 
best;  commonly  called  impers., 
but  really  having    airitvat    as 
subj. 

66.  airijiev  :    fut.  in  mean- 
ing, parallel  with  ^evov^ev  and 


68.   iroXXov:  H.  753,  /;  G. 


ANABASIS,  L,  3,  13-21. 


307 


KOI 


v  KOI 

vavTiicr)V  r\v  Traz/re?     /a)<?  opw/JLev  re  /ca 
KOI  yap  ouSe  Trdppa)  So/covfjuev  /JLOL  av- 
rov  tcadrjcrOai.     &are  &pd  Xeyeiv  o  TL  n 
apicrrov  elvcu.     ravra  eiTrtov  eVaucraro. 


-  70 


1135.  —  |*4v  :  here  stands  within 
the  phrase  (TroXXou  d^tos  0fXos) 
which  is  contrasted  with  xa^e- 


69.  <o  av  (JH\OS  -Q:  implies 
the  condition  £av  <f>l\os  y.  H. 
765  ;  912  ;  913  ;  914  ;  B.  (1)  ; 
894,  1  ;  G.  1174  ;  1428  ;  1431,  1  ; 
1393,  1.  So  (f  SLV  iroMfjLios  y. 

72  f  .  ov8€  :  here  adverbial, 
slightly  emphasizing  -n-bppu.  — 
SoKov|i€v  |ioi  :  we  should  use 
the  impers.  construction.  The 
mild  form  of  statement,  as  if 


the  fact  which  is  obvious  to  all 
were  doubtful,  makes  all  real- 
ize more  forcibly  the  signifi- 
cance of  the  fact.  —  avrov :  gen. 
of  separation  with  irbppu. — 
Ka9fjo-0cu :  to  be  encamped. 
Learn  rj^an  and  KdOrjfjLcu,  H. 
483,  484  and  a;  G.  814-816. 
—  wpd :  supply  tarl.  —  X£y€iv : 
cf.  KaOevdetv  62.  —  •yryvwo-Kei  : 
judges,  Lat.  sentit.  Note  that 
the  ind.  is  here  used,  not  the 
subjv.  Although  6  TL  and  rls 
are  indef . ,  the  time  is  not. 


282.  Anabasis  L,  3,  13-21. 

13.  'EA;  Se  rovrov  avitTTawro  ol  pev  e/c  TOV  avro- 
/JLCLTOV,  Xe^oi/re?  a  eylyvcocr/cov^  ol  Se  /ecu  VTT  e/celvov 

oid  ellrj   r)   airopid  avev 


yvdxTKw  frequently  means  form 
a  judgment,  and  hold  an  opin- 
ion. 

3.  oi'd :  the  Greek  is  inclined 
to  speak  of  the  quality  of  things, 
as  here  (lit.  of  what  sort) ,  where 
we  think  rather  of  the  magni- 


1.  IK  TOVTOV:  cf.   e/c  TOVTWV 
281,  63.  —  dvto-TavTo  :  force  of 
the  tense  ? 

2.  \€'£ovT€s:    H.  969,  c;    G. 
1563,    4.  —  €^ryvcocrKOV  :    really 
thought,   as  opposed  to  those 
who  are  next  mentioned.    71- 


308 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[282— 


r?79  Kvpov  jvca/Ar]?  fcal  fjueveiv  /cal  dirievai.     14.  el? 
5    Se   Srj   eZvre,   TrpoaTroiov/Jievos   (TTrevSeiv   co?    rd^iara 
7rop€V€cr@at,  €£9   rrjv  'EXXaSa,  arparrjyov^   /jiev   eXe- 
>9  ra^(7Ta,  e/  yu/^  /BovXerai  KXea/^09 

\P»>5  /C>J>  /  4*          /I  fO>?»  X 

ra  o   eTTirrjoet,    a^opa^ecruai  —  i]  6    ayopa 
rjv  ev  TW  /3ap/3apt,/cq)   arparev/jLarL  —  /cal   ava/cevd- 
10  £ecr0ai  •    eXOovras  Se  KO/ooz/  alrelv  TrXom,   009  avro- 
7r\€oi€V  •    eaz/    Se    yu/^    S^SoS    raura,    rjye/Jidva    alrelv 
TLvpov  oc7T^9  S^a  <f)i\tds  7-779  %<w/3«9  aTrd^ei.     eav  Se 


tude   (Tio^  great),  or  content 
ourselves  with  the  less  definite 


4.  THS  Ktfpov  -yvcofx-qs:     Cfy- 
rws's  consent.  —  (xmiv,  airUvai  : 
depend  on   airopla.     Cf.  X^yeip 
281,  73  and  note. 

5.  8rj:  in  particular. 

6  f  .  4X.€<r0ai  :  the  mode  shows 
that  elTre  5  was  used  in  the  sense 
of  bade,  told  them.  Cf.  e\e7e 
0appeii>  281,  47  and  note.  —  pov- 
X€TCU  :  the  form  of  the  dir.  dis- 
course retained.  Observe  that 
simple  conditions  take  the  in- 
die., as  in  Eng.  and  Lat. 

8  f  .  ij  8c  d^opd  .  .  .  (TTpaTev- 
jxan  :  not  part  of  the  speech, 
but  thrown  in  parenthetically 
by  Xenophon  to  show  the  man- 
ifest and  intentional  absurdity 
of  the  proposal. 

10  f.  diroir\&H€v:  H.  881; 
G.  1365. 

11.  alr€iv  :  the  force  of  elTre 
6  still  continues. 


12.  SO-TIS  :  has  for  its  antec. 
not  Kvpov  but  the  more  em- 
phatic yye/jibva.  —  (jnXids  :  the 
predicate  position  (H.  594,  6 ; 
670  and  a ;  G.  971-973)  and 
place  of  emphasis  make  the 
meaning  very  different  from 
that  of  5ta  T?}S  (fitXlds  %c6/oas, 
or  5i<i  <j>i\las  %cfy>as.  Lit.  would 
lead  them  back  through  the 
land  friendly  /  that  is,  render 
the  land  friendly  through  which 
he  was  to  lead  them.  This  form 
of  predication  is  a  slight  exten- 
sion of  the  usage  seen  in  such 
familiar  sentences  as,  He  wipes 
his  face  dry.  The  fact  that  a 
guide  given  by  Cyrus  was  lead- 
ing them  would  render  the 
population  friendly,  elxov  ras 

CL(TTr[§aS         ^KK€KA\VfJL^VOL3        274, 

20  ff.,  exhibits  nearly  the  same 
construction.  —  dirogci :  H.  911  ; 
G.  1442.  The  clause  is  essen- 
tially the  same  in  character  as 
tfnrws  pevovfAev  281,  65. 


ANABASIS,  I.,  3,  13-21. 


309 


Se 


o>,    crvvTaTreo-Oai,    rrjv 

rakri'^ro^evov^  ra  dfcpa,  OTTCO? 
/-ir;  <fr0dcrco(ri  ^re  KOpo?  /i^re  06  Ki\i,K6$  tcaraXa-  15 

/30Z>T€9,     WI/     TTOXXOV?     KOi     TToXXa     %prjp,aTa     6%Ofji€V 

dvrjpTT  a/core^.  ofiro?  /*<ez>  roiavra  elire  •  fjuera  Se 
TOVTOV  K\eap^o9  eZvre  TOCTOVTOV.  15.  '-fl?  //<ez/  arpa- 
e/^e  ravrrjv  rrjv  crrparri^idv  yu-^Sel? 


13  f.  n^8^:  adv.  Translate, 
i/  /ie  should  not  give  them  a 
guide  either,  or,  i/  ^e  should 
refuse  to  give  them  a  guide  too. 

—  <nivTaTT6<r0at,    ir€'ju|s<u :    the 
force  of  elTre  5  still  continues. 

—  TTJV  TaxCo-TTjv:  H.  719,  a,  3d 
line ;  G.  1060,  2d  example.  Cf . 
T^\V  rax^TT/j/  odbv  274,  44  f. 

14.  •irpOKaTaX'qt|/ojJL€vovs:  note 
the  force  of  each  element.  We 
need  not  suppose  that  the  Greek 
reader  supplied  dvdpas  or  any 
such  word  ;  the  ending  -ous  ex- 
presses the  idea  of  dvSpas  dis- 
tinctly enough,  just  as  in  TTO\- 
\ovs  in  the  next  line.  For  tense 
cf.  \t£ovTes  2  and  note.  There 
is  no  more  emphasis  on  &Kpa 
than  on  irpo- :  to  seize  the  heights 
in  advance  (first). 

15  f .  <|>6curaxri :  pi.  because 
the  subj.  is  at  first  thought  of 
as  general ;  it  is  then  divided 
up  into  Kupos  and  oi  K/Xt/ces.  — 
Kara\apo'vT€s  :  supplementary 
pple.  with  00d<rw<rt  agreeing 
with  the  subj.  H.  984  ;  G.  1586. 


For  tense  cf .  I5ov<ra  274,  35.  — 
«v:  relates  to  KJXi/ces,  and  de- 
pends on  TroXXous  and  x/^A«*Ta. 
—  €\O|X€v  dvt]pTraKOT€S  :  each 
word  has  its  full  ordinary  force. 
Translate  freely,  many  of  whom 
we  hold  as  prisoners  along  with 
much  of  their  property  that  we 
have  carried  off.  Observe  the 
change  to  the  dir.  discourse. 
In  the  preceding  indir.  quota- 
tion /SovXercu  7,  5i5<?  11  and  13, 
d7rd£ei  12,  and  tpSfowi  15  are 
in  the  same  form  as  in  the  dir. 
This  gives  a  liveliness  of  tone 
that  leads  up  to  the  change  in 

€X<>fJ<€V. 

18  f.  TOO-OVTOV  :  only  so 
much.  The  sets  of  correl. 
prons.  and  advs.  (H.  282,  283 ; 
G.  429,  436)  should  gradually 
be  thoroughly  learned.  —  «s 
<rTpaTTiyr{<rovTa  €(X€:  ace.  abs., 
a  not  infrequent  construction 
in  Xenophon.  H.  973,  974  ;  G. 
1569,  1570.  The  gen.  abs.  <Js 
(TTpaTr)yr)<rovTOS  C/JLOV  would  have 
had  the  same  meaning.  Cf.  ws 


310 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[282— 


20    \€J€T(O  '    TTOXXa  <ydp  €VOpO)  &i     a  €/JLOi  TOVTO    OV    TTOLrj- 

Teov  •  <i)9  Se  rc5  dvSpl  ov  av  €\rjcr6e  TrelcrofJiai  f  Svva- 
TOV  ^aXiarra,  riva  el&rjTe  on  /cal  dp^eadai  ^i 
<W9  T£9  fcal  aXXo9  fjbd\io~ra  dvOpcoTrcov.  16. 
TOVTOV  aXXo9  dvecrTrj)  eiT&eiicvvs  fjiev  rrjv 
25  TOV  ra  7r\ola  alrelv  /ceXetoz^T099  coo-Trep  7rd\iv  TOV 
crTO\ov  Kvpov  TToiov/jievoV)  €7riS€i/cvv$  Se  a>9 


tfJLOV  ofiv  loVTOS  .  .  .  OVTbJ  T7]V  yvd)- 
/J.r)V  €X€T€  281,  38  f.  0-TpaTT]- 

•yCdv:  cognate  ace.  Translate, 
Let  no  one  of  you  speak  in  the 
belief  that  I  (note  the  emphatic 
form  <?ju<Q  will  be  general  in  this 
campaign. 

20  f.  €H,O(:  H.991;  G.  1597. 
—  iroiT]T€Ov :  supply  fort.  —  o>s 
8e':  though  correl.  with  ws  ptv 
18  in  form  and  in  thought,  cos 
does  not  here  have  the  same 
office  as  above,  but  is  declara- 
tive, equivalent  to  tin.  The 
clause  depends  upon  a  verb 
like  tare  be  assured,  in  the 
mind  of  the  speaker,  —  the  op- 
posite of  fjurjdels  Xe7^rw,  which 
suggests  it.  —  imcrofjLcu :  from 
ireiOw  or  Trda^w  ?  —  TJ  8vvar6v 
fjLcxXi<TTa :  cf .  rj  tdvvaro  rdx^rra 
273,  29  f. 

22.  elSiJTe:  do  not  confuse 
the  forms  from  o!5a  (^5r/,  ei'Sa), 
eideiyv,  foOi,  ddtvai,  e/5c6s)  and 
those  from  eidov  (f5w,  ?5o/u,  tdt, 
ideip,  id 6 »>).  Though  derived 
from  the  same  root,  the  forms 


and  meanings  are  entirely  dis- 
tinct. 

23.     COS     TIS      .     .     .     dvOpCUTTCOV  : 

lit.  as  any  one  else  also  of  men 
most;  that  is,  as  well  as  any 
one  else  whatever. 

25  f ;     TOV     .      .     .     K€\€VOVTOS  I 

translate  by  a  rel.  clause.  — 
wcnrrep  Kvpov  iroioufuvou :  gen. 
abs.,  uxrirep  denoting  a  com- 
parison, which  we  must  denote 
by  as  if,  although  the  Greek 
phrase  does  not  imply  a  condi- 
tion :  just  as  if  Cyrus  were 
making  his  expedition  back 
again,  a  slightly  humorous  way 
of  saying  giving  up  his  pro- 
ject and  marching  back,  as  he 
would  have  to  do  if  he  assented 
to  the  demand.  —  ciriSeiicvvs  Se : 
cf.  rpiaKoatovs  fttv,  TpiaKocrlovs 
5t  273,  24  and  note.  We  may 
give  the  effect  of  ptv  and  5<* 
combined  with  the  repetition 
by  saying,  pointing  out  on  the 
one  hand  .  .  .  and  on  the  other 
hand.  —  o>s :  there  is  nothing  in 
the  context  to  determine  which 


ANABASIS,  L,  3,  13-21. 


311 


eirj  rjye/jLova  alrelv  jrapa  rovrov  q>  \v/jLaivdfJi€0a  rrjv 
7rpa%iv.  el  Se  /cal  TO>  rjye^ovi  incrrev cro /JL€V  bv  av 
K£y>o9  So3,  ri  Kco\V€L  teal  ra  d/cpa  rjfjblv  K€\eu€iv 
Kvpov  7rpofcara\a/3eiv  ;  17.  eyco  yap  6/cvolrjv  fjuev  30 
av  et9  ra  rr\ola  epftaiveiv  a  rjfuv  £0/77,  fjirj  77/^9  rat? 
rpiripeai  /caraSvcry,  (frofioi/JLrjv  S'  av  roS  rjyefjiovi,  cS 
Solrj  €7T€a-0a^  firj  77^9  aydyrj  oOev  OVK  ecrrai 


shade  of  meaning  is  intended 
here,  that  which  we  express  by 
that,  or  the  one  which  we  ex- 
press by  ftow.  The  Greek  did 
not  distinguish  them,  but  we 
are  obliged  to  do  so. 

27.  irapd    TOVTOV  :    instead 
of  the  ace.  of  the  person,  which 
was  used  in  10.  —  § :    dat.  of 
disadvantage  ;  we  say  whose  en- 
terprise.— \v(iatvo'fx€0a:  sudden 
change  to  the  dir.  form,  as  in  16. 

28.  €t  irurT€v<ro|X€v :  H.  893, 
c;  G.  1391. 

29.  TJHIV  :  dat.  of  advantage. 

30.  Kvpov :  obj.  of 
supply  r} pas  as  subj.  of 

The  sentence  is  ironical,  the 
thought  being,  If  we  are  to 
assume  that  he  will  be  so  kind 
as  to  give  us  a  guide  in  order 
to  make  our  return  safe  and 
easy,  we  might  as  well  trust 
his  good  nature  a  little  farther 
and  ask  him  to  occupy  the 
heights  in  order  to  defend  us 
from  the  Cilicians ;  of  course 
he  would  do  neither,  —  4-yw 


•yap :  introduces  the  reason  for 
the  statement  in  the  previous 
section,  that  it  was  silly  to  talk 
of  asking  such  favors  of  the 
man  whom  they  were  injuring. 
In  Eng.  it  is  more  idiomatic  to 
begin  this  sentence  without  for, 
leaving  the  causal  relation  to 
be  understood. 

31  f.  a  SoCrp  implies  the 
condition  el  afca  Sofy,  H.  917, 
900  ;  G.  1436, 1408.  —  rats  Tpirf- 
p€<ri :  with  his  war-ships,  dat.  of 
means.  —  KaraStKrn  :  cf .  tiri0y 
281,  60  and  note.  —  <f>of3oCjn]v 
8*  av:  correl.  with  dKvot-rjv  ^v 
&v  30  f.  The  two  synonyms 
differ  but  little  here,  although 
<f>o^oLfjLf)v  is  stronger,  and  the 
order  is  similar  to  that  in  24 
and  26.  —  $  :  attracted  (H.  994 ; 
G.  1031)  to  the  case  of  ^ye^vi, 
for  which  cf.  <rbi>  ifuv  281,  33 
and  note,  also  avrf  281,  55. 

33.  SofTj:  cf.«oMl.  —  80€v: 
the  antec.  (<?/cet<re)  is  omitted, 
being  indef .  —  O$K  Ko-rai :  it  will 
be  impossible. 


312 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[282— 


Oelv  •  ftov\ol/ji'r)v  S'  av  CLKOVTOS  cnritov  Kvpov  \a6elv 
35  avrbv   a7re\6(i)v  •    o    ov    Svvarov  ecrriv.      aXX'    €700 
ravra  p,ev  <f*\vapia$  elvai  •     18.   So/cei  Se  /JLOL 
e\66vTd<s  777909  Kvpov,  o'irives  eTrtT^Setot,  avv 
epcorav  eicelvov  TI  j3ov\€rai  r^pZv  %pf](rOai,  • 
/cat   eav    /Jiev  r)    Trpagis    y    TrapaTr^rjaia  o'lairep   KOI 
40  irpbcrOev  e^prjro  rofe  ^ez/ot?,  eirecrOai  KOI  rj/uas  fcal 
/j,rj  Kcuciovs  elvai  T&V  irpoa'Oev  rovra)  crvvava/3dvTO)v 
19.   lav  Se  /Jielfav  r]  Trpafy^  T%  TTpocrdev 


34  f .  aKOvros :  put  with  Ku- 
poi/.  —  XaGeiv  avrov :  shows  the 
primary  meaning  of  \av0dvw 
and  the  common  construction 
with  it.  The  emphasis  falls 
upon  &KOVTOS  and  \a0etV.  — dircX- 
0«v:  nowise  different,  except 
in  tense,  from  diritbv.  With 
\av0dvw  and  QOdvu  the  supple- 
mentary pple.  regularly  has  the 
same  tense  as  the  finite  verb ; 
with  TU7xd^w  the  pple.  com- 
monly agrees  in  tense,  but 
there  are  many  exceptions. 
Cf.  <j>0d(rt*)<ri  Kara\a(36vT€s  15  f.  ; 
also  Tpe<j>6fjL€i>ov  tXdvOave  and 
wv  trvyxave  270,  20  f.  Trans- 
late, I  should  like,  if  I  go 
away  without  Cyrus's  con- 
sent, to  go  without  his  know- 
ing it. 

36.  8oK€i  |ioi :  it  seems  best 
to  me,  the  subj.  being  the  clause 
beginning  with  dvdpas  and  end- 
ing with  Pov\€ve<r0ai  48,  in  which 
the  leading  infinitives  are  tyw- 


rav,  ^7T€(T0aL,  elvai,  d%iovv,  dway- 
7e?Xcu,  (3ov\ev€<r0ai. 

37.  €iriTT]8€ioi :  has  here  its 
primary  meaning,  suitable  ;  the 
meaning  seen  in  &rn-^5eia  8  is 
secondary,  and  is  found  only 
in  the  neut.  pi. 

38.  T(:    cognate  ace.  with 
Xpi)<r0ai,  what  use  he  wishes  to 
make  of  us. 

39.  lav    if:    the    condition 
refers  to  fut.  time ;  if  the  en- 
terprise proves  to  be.  —  ot$ircp : 
we  should  expect  ticdvy  yvircp  ; 
instead  of  that  the  antec.  is 
omitted,  though  it  is  here  defi- 
nite, and  the  rel.  of  quality  used 
(cf.  note  on  oi'a  3)  in  the  case 
of  the  omitted  antec.    ywrep  or 
o'ldvirep   would  have   had  with 
txpfjro  the   same  construction 
as  rl  38. 

40.  irpoVOev:    the    journey 
mentioned  in  225,  8  ff. 

42.    Ttis     irpoV0€v  :     supply 


ANABASIS,  I.,  3,  13-21. 


313 


Kal    €7ri7TOVQ)T€pd    KOl    €7UKl,vSvVOT€pd)    d^LOVV    Tj 

cravra  fjfjbds  ayeiv  rj  TreiaOevra  Trpo?  <j>i\idv  afylevau  • 
ovro)  yap  KOI  eTrofievoi  av  <f>l\ot,  aura)  /ecu  Trpodv/jioi,  45 
€7rol/ji€0a  Kal  cnrLovTes  do"0aXw9  av  aTrioi^ev  •  o  TL 
8'  av  7T/009  ravra  Xey?;  aTrayyeiXai,  Sevpo  •  97/^9  S' 
nrpos    ravra    j3ov\ev€crdaL.       20.   eSo^e 
fcal  dvSpas  e\djji€vot,  avv  KXea/o^ft)  Treyu/Trof- 
i/,  ot  rjpcorcov  Kvpov  ra  Sd^avra  rfj  a-rparia.     6  8*  50 
OTI  a/covoi  'Aftpo/cdfjidv  €%0pbv  avBpa  eirl 


43  f .  ireicravTa.  TTCLG  0evra  : 
agree  with  Kupoi>  understood, 
subj.  of  dyeiv  and  d0i^j/at.  His 
readiest  means  of  persuading 
the  soldiers  would  of  course  be 
an  offer  of  higher  pay ;  this  is 
what  is  hinted  at  in  TreLo-avra. 
—  irpos  <|>iX£dv :  in  friendship. 
We  may  give  the  general  effect 
of  the  parallelism  of  the  sen- 
tence thus:  that  they  should 
ask  that  he  either  win  our  con- 
sent before  leading  us  on,  or  let 
us  go  in  friendship  with  his 
consent.  — d<jnevcu:  from  d<j>iri- 
/u.  The  form  from  #7rei/u  go 
away  would  be  air^vai.  Learn 
the  conjugation  of  ITJIJU,  H.  476  ; 
G.  810.  Note  the  resemblance 
to,  and  the  few  differences  from 
TWyfju,  which  should  be  thor- 
oughly reviewed  with  fy/u.  The 
long  I  in  the  pres.  reduplication 
is  irregular. 

45.  €iropi€voi;    translate   as 


if    it    were    e£    tirol^a.      So 
d7ri6jTes  as  if  it  were  el  dirioi- 

fUV. 

47.  Sevpo :  instead  of  tvBdde 
(here)  because  of  the  motion 
implied  in  dirayyc'tXai. 

48.  irpos  ravra  :  with  refer- 
ence to  this.  —  €'8ofj€  TavTa :  this 
was  agreed  to.     e5o£e  is  regu- 
larly used  to  denote  the  passage 
of  a  resolution.    For  the  time 
being  the  Greek  army  has  be- 
come a  mass-meeting,  in  which 
proposals  are  made,  advocated 
by  speeches,  and  put  to  vote ; 
the    question    is    decided    by 
majority  of  hands  raised,  and 
the  minority  submit.    This  pro- 
cedure was  as  familiar  to  the 
democratic  states  of  Greece  as 
to    us ;    indeed    it    originated 
among  them. 

50.  Td  86£avTa:  the  ques- 
tions agreed  upon.  — -rjj  <rrpa- 
TI£  :  indir.  obj.  of  d6%avra. 


314 


THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON. 


[282— 


TO)  EtV(f)parrj  Trora/Jiq)  elvai,  a^re^ovra  Sct)Se/ca  araO- 
7T/30?  TOVTOV  ovv  €(f>r)  /3oi\€<rO(u  e\0elv  •  KCLV 
e/cei,  rrjv  Sl/c^v  e</>??  Xpy&iv  € 
55  eav  Se  <j>v<yrj)  rjpels  e/cel  TT/OO?  ravra 

21.  afcovaavres  Se  ravra  ol  alperol  a7rayye\\ov(7L 
T069  o-TparitoTais  •  Tofc  Se  VTTO^id  fji€V  r]V  fin,  dyoi 
7T/009  /3a<7tXea,  oyLto)9  Se  eSd/cei  eireaOat,.  Trpoaai- 
TOLO-L  Se  fjbiaOov  •  6  Se  Kvpos  VTrior^velrai  rjjjiiokiov 
60  Trdcri  Saxreiv  ov  Trporepov  efapov,  avrl  Sdpei/cov  rpia 
rov  /Jirjvbs  rcS  arpaTKOTrj  •  on  Se  €7rl 
ayoi  oi>Se  evrai/Oa  rjKovcrev  ovSels  ev  <ye  rc3 


52.  etvai :  CLKOVCO,  like  opdw, 
at<r0dvofjiai,  o?5a,  takes  the  sup- 
plementary  pple.    more   often 
than  the  inf.    The  inf.  proba- 
bly marks  the  statement  more 
distinctly  as  an  indir.  speech, 
that  is,  as  a  matter  of  mere 
hearsay. 

53.  K5,v :  for  /cai  ^a v,  by  era- 
sis,  H.  76  and  b  ;  G.  42. 

54.  Vf:    cf.    note   on   y   39. 
The  condition  is  of  the  same 
sort  as  in  <j>vyr)  55. 

55.  TJfwts :  again  the  change 
to  the  more  lively  dir.  form. 

57.   TOIS  8€  viroxl/Cd  TJV  :  =  ol 


58  f.  TrpocrcuTovo-i  jjucrOov : 
lit.  demand  pay  in  addition. 
We  put  the  idea  of  irpos-  in 
the  form  of  a  modifier  of  />u- 
<r6bv,  and  say,  demand  higher 
pay. 

60.  ov:    for  TOVTOV  o:  gen. 
after  ^/u6\ioj/,  which  has  a  com- 
parative force,  a  half  more.  — 
€<|>€pov :  were  receiving. 

61.  rpCa  TJfuSapciKa :  we  say 
a  daric  and  a  half. 

62  f .  cv  *y€  rep  cj>av€pw  :  this 
expression  makes  it  evident 
that  some,  probably  most,  un- 
derstood pretty  well  what  the 
real  purpose  of  Cyrus  was. 


285]  SUBJUNCTIVE  AND  OPTATIVE.  315 

USES  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  AND  OPTATIVE. 

283.  All  the  common  uses  of  the  subjunctive  and  opta- 
tive have  now  been  illustrated  and  should  at  this  point  be 
thoroughly  reviewed.  To  assist  in  this,  summaries  are  here 
given,  with  references  to  the  Grammar.  The  pupil  should 
collect  out  of  the  text  as  many  examples  of  each  construc- 
tion as  possible.  The  uses  of  these  modes  can  easily  be  so 
learned  at  this  point  that  they  will  give  no  serious  trouble 
hereafter. 

284.  The  Subjunctive. 

1.  In  Principal  Clauses. 

a.  Hortative.    H.  866,  1;  G.  1344. 

b.  In  prohibitions,   in  the  aorist  only.    H.  866,  2;   G. 
1346. 

c.  Deliberative.     H.  866,  3 ;  G.  1358. 

2.  In  Subordinate  Clauses. 

a.  Denoting  pure  purpose.    H.  881 ;  G.  1365. 

b.  After  expressions  of  fear.     H.  887 ;  G.  1378. 

c.  In  conditions 

(1)  of  the  present  general  form.    H.  894, 1 ;  G.  1393, 1. 

(2)  of  the  future  more  vivid  form.     H.  898 ;  G.  1403. 
Also  in  relative  clauses  implying  such  conditions.   H.  912, 

913 ;  G.  1428 ;  1431,  1 ;  1434. 

d.  With  coos  and  other  words  signifying  until,  and  with 
irpw  before,  until,  when  they  imply  expectation.    H.  921,  924 ; 
G.  1465,  1469. 

285.  The  Optative. 

1.  In  Principal  Clauses. 

a.  In  wishes,  referring  to  future  time  (without  av).  H. 
870;  G.  1507. 


316  THE  GREEK  OF  XENOPHON.  [W6— 

b.  Potential  (with  Sv).     H.  872;  G.  1327. 

So  in  conclusions  of  less  vivid  future  conditions.    H.  900 ; 
G.  1408. 
2.  In  Dependent  Clauses. 

a.  Denoting  pure  purpose,  after  past  tenses.    H.  881; 
G.  1365. 

b.  After  expressions  of  fear,  after  past  tenses.    H.  887 ; 
G.  1378. 

c.  In  conditions 

(1)  of  the  past  general  form.     H.  894,  2 ;  G.  1393,  2. 

(2)  of  the  future  less  vivid  form.     H.  900 ;  G.  1408. 
Also  in  relative  clauses  implying  such  conditions.    H.  912, 

913 ;  G.  1431,  2 ;  1436. 

d.  With  cws  and  other  words  signifying  until,  and  with 
Trpw  before,  until,  when  they  imply  expectation,  after  past 
tenses.     H.  921,  924 ;  G.  1465,  1469. 

e.  In  indirect  discourse,  after  past  tenses.    H.  932, 2 ;  937 ; 
G.  1481,  2;  1502. 

Observe  that  those  uses  of  the  optative  which  involve  the 
principles  of  indirect  quotation  (namely,  a,  b,  d,  e  under  2) 
are  permissive  only,  not  required.  The  forms  of  direct 
speech  may  be  retained  after  past  tenses,  and  are  retained  in 
nearly  half  the  cases.  To  retain  them  gives  the  same  effect 
of  liveliness  which  is  produced  by  the  historical  present,  or 
by  the  sudden  changes  from  indirect  to  direct  form  in  prin- 
cipal clauses. 

CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES,  INDIRECT  DISCOURSE. 

286.  All  common  forms  of  conditional  sentences  have 
been  illustrated,  except  those  contrary  to  reality.  With 
some  classes  it  may  be  well  to  postpone  the  connected  review 
of  these  sentences  until  later ;  but  in  any  case,  as  soon  as 
the  forms  yet  lacking  occur,  the  entire  subject  should  be 


286]  INDIRECT  DISCOURSE.  317 

reviewed  as  presented  in  H.  889-900,  912-918 ;  G.  1381-1420, 
omitting  the  paragraphs  in  the  smallest  type  and  the  less 
important  paragraphs  in  type  of  the  second  size. 

In  the  same  way  should  be  reviewed  the  subject  of  indi- 
rect discourse  as  presented  in  H.  928-937,  946;  G.  1475- 
1503,  1522,  1523. 


NOTE.  — In  the  Greek-English  vocabulary  the  theme  of  each  verb  is  given 
in  parenthesis  immediately  after  the  first  form;  next  follows  the  class  to 
which  the  present  belongs,  unless  it  is  of  the  variable-vowel  class.  Under 
most  compound  verbs  the  theme  is  given  as  a  compound  of  the  preposition 
and  the  simple  theme;  for  the  principal  parts  look  under  the  simple  verb. 
The  derivation  or  composition,  when  known,  is  generally  indicated  in  square 
brackets  [  ]  just  before  the  translation.  This  matter  is  so  given  that  the 
student  can  trace  the  successive  steps  in  word -formation  more  precisely 
than  in  most  vocabularies  or  dictionaries.  For  example,  it  is  indicated  that 
e7ri/3ovAevo>  is  a  compound  of  CTTI  and  /3ovAevo>,  that  /SovAeuw  is  formed  from 
povAr?,  and  ]8ouA^  from  0ov'Ao/uai.  Unless  care  is  taken  in  clear  cases  to 
impress  upon  students  the  historical  order  of  word-formation,  the  whole 
subject  of  etymology  is  likely  to  appear  a  mass  of  guess-work,  and  so  be  of 
little  use  and  some  positive  harm.  In  cases  of  doubt  of  course  the  matter 
should  not  be  pressed.  Words  which  occur  only  in  Part  I.  are  treated  less 
fully  than  the  others.  The  English-Greek  vocabulary  is  complete  for  the 
Exercises  that  precede  the  beginning  of  the  Anabasis.  The  additional  words 
needed  for  the  four  exercises  based  on  the  early  sections  of  the  Anabasis  are 
not  included,  because  it  is  better  for  the  student  to  accustom  himself  to  rely, 
for  such  words,  upon  the  Greek  text. 

The  following  abbreviations  are  used  in  the  book,  with  some  others  that 
need  no  explanation. 


act.  =  active, 
adj.  =  adjective, 
adv.  =  adverb, 
antec.  =  antecedent, 
aor.  =  aorist. 
app.  =  apposition, 
art.  =  article, 
cf .  =  confer,  compare, 
cl.  =  class. 

comp.  =  comparative, 
conj.  =  conjunction, 
correl.  =  correlative, 
decl.  =  declension, 
dem.  =  demonstrative, 
dep.  =  deponent, 
dir.  =  direct, 
e.g.  =  for  example. 
Eng.  =  English, 
equiv.  =  equivalent, 
f .,  ff.  =  following, 
fut.  =  future. 
i.e.  =  that  is. 
impers.  =  impersonal, 
impf .  =  imperfect, 
impv.  =  imperative, 
indef .  =  indefinite, 
indie.  =  indicative, 
indir.  =  indirect, 
inf.  =  infinitive, 
interr.  =  interrogative. 

318 


intr.  =  intransitive. 

Lat.  =  Latin. 

lit.  =*  literal,  literally. 

mid.  =  middle. 

neg.  =  negative. 

obj.  =  object. 

opt.  =  optative. 

p.,  pp.  =  page,  pages. 

pass.  =  passive. 

pass.  s.  =  passive  suffix. 

perf .  =  perfect. 

pers.  =  person. 

plup.  =  pluperfect. 

pple.  =  participle. 

pred.  =  predicate. 

prep.  =  preposition. 

pres.  =  present. 

priv.  =  privative. 

pron.  =  pronoun. 

red.  =  reduplication. 

rel.  =  relative. 

subj.  =  subject. 

subjv.  =  subjunctive. 

subst.  =  substantive. 

sup.  =  superlative. 

syst.  =  system. 

trans.  =  transitive. 

t.  s.  =  tense  suffix. 

var.  vow.  =  variable  vowel. 

vocab.  =  vocabulary. 


GREEK-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


A. 

s,   -a    (H.    149;    G. 

188,   3,    end),    6,    Abroko- 

mas. 

"ApvSos,  -ov,  -f),  Abydos. 
d-yaOos,  -•(],  -6*v,  good.     Comp. 

d|i€(va)v,    pcXrtwv.    KpeiTTcov, 

sup.  apurros,  P^XTWTTOS,  Kpd- 

TKTTOS. 

d-yajxat  (d-ya-,  root  cl.  ,  H.  404  ; 

G.  619),  Tfydo-Oiiv,  admire. 
ayy&Xca  (dyy€\-,  i-cl.,  H.  399  ; 

G.    593),    d^€\w,    ti 


0i]v,  announce,  report. 
d-yy€\os,  -ov,  6,  messenger. 
d*yopa,  -as,  T|,  [d-yeCpw  assem- 

ble^assembly  ;  market-place, 

market. 
d^opdt«(dYopa8-,  i-cl.,  H.  398  ; 

G.  584,  585,  587), 


buy.      (Cf.    our  verb  mar- 
ket.) 

a-ypios,    -a,    -ov,   [<rypos  field, 
country'],  wild. 


aY«    (d-Y-),   a{w,    rj-ya-yov    (H. 

436;   G.   535),  fa*,  TO"", 

TJxBtjv,  drive,  lead. 
d-ywy6s,  -ov,  6,  [<vy«],  leader, 


d-ywv,   d-ywvos,  6,   [<rya>],  con- 
test. 

d-yci)v^o|iai,   [d-ywv],  struggle, 
engage  in  a  contest. 

d8€\<|>6s,  -ov,  6,  brother. 

dSiK€o>  (dSiK€-),  dSiKTjo-co,  etc., 
[dSiKos],  injure,  wrong. 

aSiKos,  -ov,  [a  priv.,  8CKT]],  un- 
just, wrong. 

drip,  a€pos,  6,  air. 

*A9f]vai,  -«v,  at,  Athens. 

'AO-qvatos,  -a,  -ov,  [*A6f}vai], 
Athenian. 

d9\T]TT|s,  -ov,  6,  athlete. 

a6\ov,  -ov,  TO,  prize. 

,  -ov,  6,  athletic  game. 
w  (dBpotS-,  i-cl.,  H.  396, 
398  ;  G.  579,  584,  585,  587), 
d0pot<ra>,  TjOpoura,  TJGpoiKa, 
T]0pour|Aai,  T|0poCo-0i]v,  [d0po- 
os  together'],  assemble,  mus- 
ter, (trans.)  ;  dir.  mid.  as- 
semble (intr.). 

319 


320 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


Alvidves.  -«v,  ol,  Ainidnes  or 

Aenianians,m  southwestern 

Thessaly. 
alp€Tos,  -i\,  -6v,  verbal  of  alpe'w ; 

ol  alperoi,  the  men  chosen, 

the  committee. 
alp€a>      (alpe-,     4X-),     alpt]o-a>, 

€lXov,  (8X«,  etc.,  H.  359,  a ; 

G.  537  and  2),  TJ'pTjica,  TJ'pt]- 

}iai,.T)p€0'qv,  seize,  ta&e;  in- 

dir.  mid.,  choose,  elect. 
alo-0dvojiai  (ato-9-,  alcrO-r]-,  nas. 

cl.,  H.  402,  6;  G.  603,605), 

alo-0Ticrop.au  flcr06|AT)v,  TJ'ar0T]- 

pai,  perceive. 
alo~xvva>  (alo~xw-,  i-cl.,  H.  400  ; 

G.  596),   alo~xwa>,  •rjfo'xvva, 

tjorxvv0T]v,       [cf.       a,icr\vvr\ 

shame"],  put  to  shame;  dir. 

mid.,  be  ashamed. 

(alT€-),  alr^cra),  TJ'TT]<ra, 
a,  fJTT]|xai,  TJT^)0T]v,  asA: 

/or,  demand,  entreat. 
lTtdojiai     (alria-) ,     airiouro- 

fi,ai,  etc.,  [alrCd  cause],  give 

as  the  cause,  accuse,  blame. 
KivaKT]s,     -ov,     6,     [Persian 

word],  short  sword. 
T|.  -fjs,  TJ,  summit,  prime. 
(aKov-),      dKovcrojxai, 

tjKovo-a,  dK^JKoa  (H.  368,  44  ; 

G.  529),  tjicou<r|xai,  ^KovcrO-qv, 

hear. 
aicpoiroXis,  -€a>s,  T|,  [aKpos,  iro- 

Xis],  acropolis. 
aKpos,  -a,  -ov,  at  the  point  or 


end  (H.  671  ;   G.  978)  ;   r6 

aKpov,  the  top  or  end;  rd 

ctKpa,  ^e  heights. 
OLKCOV,  (XKovo-a,  aKov,  [a  priy., 

IKCOV],  unwilling. 
aX-yos,  -cos,  r6,  pain. 

XcK-),  dX€'go|j,ai, 
,  toarc?  o^",  defend 

one's  self  against. 
dXXd,      [dXXos],     but,     more 

strongly  adversative  than  Be*. 
dXXdTTo  (dXXa^-,  i-cl.,  H.  397  ; 

G.  584,  588),  dXXd£«,  tjXXa£a, 


or  •qXXdxO'nv,  exchange. 
dXXtjXw,  -a,  -w,  only  du.  and 

pi.,  oblique  cases,  [dXXos], 

each  other. 
dXXos,  -T],  -o,  other  ;  after  the 

art.  often  the  remaining,  the 

rest  of. 

&(ia,  adv.,  at  the  same  time. 
ajiaja,    -TJS,    TJ,    [&jia,    a-ya>], 

wagon. 
djiaJiTos,    -6v,    [Afiaja,    cljjii], 

traversed  by  wagons;  686s 

-  ,  wagon-road. 

e'w  (djJicXe-),  djxeXf^o-ft),  etc., 

[djxeX^s],  neglect,  be  care- 

less. 
fxcX^s,  -^s,  [a  priv.,  plXci  ^  is 

a  c«re],  careless,  neglectful. 


Xav^j],   without  device,  im- 
practicable. 
dpireXos,  -ov,  TJ,  vine, 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


321 


dfx<j>£,  prep.  w.  ace.,  about,  in 

connection  with. 
d(jLc()6T€pos,  -d,  -ov,  both. 
av,     post-pos.    adv.,     cannot 

be     translated     by     itself. 

Its     uses     are     described 

in   H.   857-862;    G.    1299- 

1316. 
dvapaivo)  (dva+pav-,  pa-),  go 

up,  go  inland. 


ascent,  journey  inland. 
dva-yi'yvtto-Kft)  (dva+Yvo-),  read. 
dvd-yKi],  -TJS,  fj,  necessity  ;  with 

IcrrC    expressed    or   under- 

stood, it  is  necessary. 
dva-yvovs,  see  dvcrja^vwo-KW. 
dvdXvo-is-     -€a>s,    T)    [dvaXvw], 

undoing,  analysis. 
dvaXvw,  unloose,  take  apart, 

analyze. 
dvapird£a>  (dva+dpiraS-),  snatch 

up,  carry  off  as  booty. 
dvSpdiroSov,    -ov,    TO.     [dvr)p, 

-iro8ov  being  perhaps  a  de- 

rivative ending],  slave. 
avev,  improper  prep.  w.  gen., 

without. 
dvt)p,  dv8p6s,  6,  man  as  dis- 

tinguished  from  woman,  dif- 

fering   from    dvOptouos    as 

Lat.  vir  from  homo. 
dv0os,  -€os,  TO,  flower. 
avOpuiros,  -ov,  6,  man,  human 

being,  Lat.  homo. 
dvidw  (d  via-)  ,  dvtcurw.  Tjvtdcra. 


T|viaBt]v,  [dvtd  grief '] ,  grieve, 
distress. 

dv£o-n]|jii  (dva  +  o-ra-),  raise 
up,  cause  to  stand  up  j  dir. 
mid.  and  jii-aor.,  arise. 

-ov,    6,    [dvri, 
,  antagonist. 

dvrC,  prep.  w.  gen.,  instead  of; 
in  comp.  the  older  mean- 
ing against,  in  opposition,  is 
often  retained. 

dvTiirapcurK€vd£a>  (dvrt  +  irapa- 
o-K€va8-) ,  prepare  in  turn  or 
in  opposition. 

avTiir^pas  [dvrC,  tr^pds  on  the 
other  side],  adv.  w. gen.,  over 
against. 

avrCo-Tao-is,  -€a>s,  TJ,  [dvrC,  o-rd- 
<r is  party,  from  UTTTIJU],  op- 
posing party. 

dvTio-TCuruoTT]s,  -ov,  6,  [dv- 
rCo-Tao-is],  political  oppo- 
nent, member  of  the  oppos- 
ing party. 

avTpov,  -ov,  r6,  cave. 

av«,  adv.  [dvd],  upward, 
above;  inland. 

d^ios,  -d,  -ov,  worthy. 

d|idw  (agio-),  djiwo-w,  etc., 
[djios],  deem  worthy,  think 
Jit,  claim  as  proper,  re- 
quest. 

diraY'Y^XXw  (diro  +  d-yycX-), 
bring  back  word,  report. 

aird-yco  (diro  +  d-y-) ,  lead  away 
or  back. 


322 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


dirairla)  (diro  +  alre-)  ,  ask   as 

due,  demand. 
dirapdo-K€vos,  -ov  [apriv.,irapa- 

o-K€v^j],  unprepared. 
aim}!!.  (diro  +  t-,  see  €tju),  go 

away. 
dirlpxoficu     (d-rro  +  4p\-,    «X0-, 

4Xv0-),  dirijXOov, 

go  or  come  away. 


<TX-,  o-X'n-)?  hold  off*  oe  dis- 

tant. 

dirf)X0ov,  see  dirlpxo|iai. 
dir6,  prep.  w.  gen.,  from,  away 

from.    In  comp.  off,  away  ; 

often  indicates  that  some- 

thing is  due  (see 


diroSeticvvfu   (diro  +  SeiK-)  ,  ap- 

point. 
diroS£Sco|ii     (diro  +  80-),     give 

what  is  due,  hence  pay. 
<vrroKptvo|Acu  (diro  +  Kpiv-,  Kpi-), 

diroKpivov|xai,    dTT€Kplvd|JH]v, 

diroKCKpifjiai,  reply. 

CLTTOKTeiVCO  (dlTO  +  KT€V-,  KTOV-), 

kill,  put  to  death,  execute. 

aTroXajipavw  (diro  +  Xa^-, 

XT^P-),  take  back,  receive 
back. 

diroXXvju  (diro  +  6X-,  oXe-,  nas. 
cl.,  H.  402,  e;  G.  608;  SX- 
Xii|u  is  prob.  for  oXvvju), 
diroXu,  onrwXecra.  dira>X6fi,T]v, 
diroXtoXcKa,  onroXwXa,  in  the 
act.  pres.,  fut.,  1st  aor.,  1st 


perf.,  lose,  destroy;  in  the 
mid.  pres.,  fut.,  2d  aor., 
and  in  the  2d  perf.  act.,  be 
lost  or  destroyed,  perish. 

'Airo'XXwv,  -coves,  6,  Apollo, 
son  of  Zeus  and  Leto,  god 
of  the  sun,  of  health,  of  div- 
ination, of  music  and  poetry. 

diroir€fi,irci)  (<xiro+ir€|jnr-,  iro|i<)>-), 
send  away,  send  back;  in- 
dir.  mid.,  send  from  one's 
self,  dismiss,  let  go. 

ciiroirX&o    (diro  +  irXv-, 
sail  away. 

diropeo)     (diropc-), 

etc. ,  [airopos] ,  be  perplexed. 

diropCd,  -as,  T|,  [diropos],  diffi- 
culty, perplexity. 

diropos,  -ov  [a  priv.,  iro'pos], 
without  resource,  hence  per- 
plexed. 

diroo-T^XXw  (diro  +  o~T€X-, 

o-raX-),  send  away. 

diroVroXos,  -ov,  6,  [diroo-rcX- 
Xw],  envoy,  ambassador. 

diroxwpcw  (diro  +  XWP€~)  ->  with- 
draw, retreat. 

dpi0|ila>  [dpi0jxo's],  count. 

dpi0|j,o'$,  -ov,  6,  number,  enum- 
eration. 

'ApCo-Tiiriros,  -ov,  6,  [dpiorros, 
iiriros],  Aristippos. 

apio-ros,  -T],  -ov,  sup.  of  d-ya- 
0os. 

'ApKas,  -a8os,  6,  Arcadian. 

ctpjia,  -aros,  TO',  chariot. 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


323 


-T]S,  TJ,  [apjia, 
afj.a|a],  covered  carriage. 

dpTrd£a>  (dp-iraS-,  i-cl.,  H.  398  ; 
G.  584,  585,  586),  dpird<ra>, 
TJpiracra,  TjpTraica,  {Jpirao-^xai, 
Tjp-Trdo-B^v,  seize,  plunder. 

'ApTa|€pfr]s,  -ov,  o,  Artaxerxes. 

dpxaios,  -a,  -ov  [dpx^|],  an- 
cient; TO  dpxatov,  of  old, 
formerly. 

<*PX^  -to  *\>  [&PX»]>  ^gin- 
ning ;  government  ;  province. 


hence  begin,  and  rwZe. 
pxov,  pple.  of  dpx«  as  subst., 

commander. 
cr6€v€to   (do-0€V€-),   do-Oevrjo-o), 

etc.  [do-06v^s],  be  weak  or 


-&    [a  priv., 

strength],  weak. 
'Acrid,  -as,  T|,  Asia. 
*Acrir€v8ios,  -a,  -ov,   ["Acrircv- 

8os  city  in  Pamphylia],  As- 

pendian. 

do-irts,  -C8os,  TJ,  shield. 
do-Tpov,  -ov,  TO',  star. 
do-<|)a\€crTaTa,  sup.  of  a<r<|>a\(os. 
do-c))a\T|s,  -^s,  [a  priv.,  o-<t>d\\w 

make  fall~],  safe,  secure. 
acr<|>aXws    [do-<|>aX^s],   safely; 

comp.    do-<j>a\€crT€pov,    sup. 

dcr<|>a\€crTaTa. 
dTljxdtw     (dTljxaS-,     i-cl.,     H. 

398;    G.    584,    585,    587), 


(XTiji,dcra>,  T)Tt(j.acra.  T| 

TjTtfJLaCT|JiaL.  T|TlJJ,d 

JJLOS],  disgrace,  dishonor. 

aTijios,  -ov  [a  priv.,  Tijt^j], 
without  honor,  unhonored. 

av,  postpos.  adv.,  again,  in 
turn. 

avXo's,  -ov,  6,  pipe. 

avTOfxaTOS-  -T],  -ov,  [ttVTo's,  root 
(ia-  will],  self-acting;  diro 
(or  CK)  TOV  avTojidTov,  volun- 
tarily, of  one's  own  accord. 

avTo's,  -^,  -o',  self,  myself,  him- 
self, etc.  (l)Lat.ipse.  This 
is  always  the  meaning  of  the 
word  when  in  the  pred.  posi- 
tion with  a  substantive,  and 
when  standing  alone  in  the 
nom.  (2)  When  preceded 
by  the  article,  Lat.  idem. 
(3)  Standing  alone  in  any 
case  but  the  nom.  it  serves 
as  the  personal  pron.  of  the 
3d  pers.,  him,  her,  it,  etc. 

avTov,  adv.,  here. 

avTov,  -fjs,  contracted  from 
cavrov,  etc. 

d,4>cup€'co  (euro  +  alpc-,  4X-),  take 
away  from,  deprive,  often  in 
indir.  mid. 

d<f>tT]|xi  (diro  +  4-),  send  away, 
let  go. 

doJuKV€O|icu  (airo  +  iK-,  nas.  cl., 
H.  402,  d;  G.  607),  do>C£o- 
fiat.  d<{)lKO}j.T|v,  d<))iYH.at,  ar- 
rive, come. 


324 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


(diro  +  <rra-)  ,    diro- 


d<j>€o-ri]Ka,  dirco-TdOTjv,  set 
off,  cause  to  revolt;  dir. 
mid.,  ju-aor.,  and  perf.  act., 
revolt. 

o's,  -a,  -o'v,  Achaian. 

(dX0-,  dX0€-),  dX0€- 
i,  TjX0€a-0T]v,  [cf.  TO  aX- 
0os  burden],  be  burdened, 
troubled. 


paCva>  (Pav-,  Pa-,  i-cl.,  H. 
400;  G.  594,  610),  p^jo-o- 
ficu,  €'p-.]v.  pep^Ka.  -P^pajxai 
in  comp.,  -4pd0T)v  in  comp., 
go. 

pdXXco  (paX-,  pXrj-,  t-cl.,  H. 
399;  G.  593),  paXw,  e'pa- 
Xov,  p^pXtjKa,  p^pXT]|xai,4pXTJ- 
0i]v,  throw,  throw  at. 

pappapiKo's.  -V|,  -o'v,  [pdppa- 
pos],  connected  with  foreign- 
ers j  TO  pappapiKo'v,  foreign 
or  Persian  force. 

Pdppapos,  -ov,  6,  foreigner, 
barbarian. 

pdpos,  -cos,  TO',  weight. 

pcuriXetd,  -ds,  r\,  [pao-iXevo>], 
act  of  ruling,  royal  power, 
kingdom,  throne. 

pcurCXcios,  -d,  -ov,  [  {3curi\€vs]  ? 
l)  kingly ;  subst.  in  the 


neut.  pi.,   fortified  palace, 

castle. 

pcuriXcvs,  -^ws,  6,  king. 
pacriAevw       (paonXeij-  ),      pacru- 

Xcvo'w,   etc.,    [pao-iXevs],   be 

king,  reign. 
PC'XTIO-TOS,  -TJ,  -ov,  sup.  of  crya- 

0o's. 
ptdtofiat  (Pia8-,  i-cl.,  H.  398  ; 

G.   587),   pido-oncu, 

|JLT]V,     p€pCao-|j.ai, 

[pid/orce],  compel,  force. 
pipXCov,  -ov,  TO',  book. 
pipXioircoXTjs,  -ov,  6, 

ira)X€(o],  bookseller. 
P£OS,  -ov,  6,  life. 
,  -as, 

succor. 


,  etc., 

[poT)0o's  helper],  help,  suc- 

cor. 

BOUOTIOS,  -a,  -ov,  Boeotian. 
BOIWTO'S,  -ov,  6,  Boeotian. 
pop€as,  -ov,  6,  north-wind. 
poTavt],  -TJS,  TJ,  grass,  herb. 
povXevco    (povXev-),    povXevo*a), 

etc.,  [povX-tfj],  plan;  indir. 

mid.,  plan  for  or  with  one's 

self,  deliberate,  consider. 
povX^j,  -fis,  T),  [povXojxai],  will, 

wish  ;  commonly  plan,  coun- 

sel; also  council. 
povXofxcu  (povX-,  povXt)-),  POV- 

X^o-O)iai,   pcpovXt^fxai,    epov- 

,  wish,  desire. 
O'S,  -ov,  6,  altar. 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


325 


r. 

s,  -ov,  6,  marriage. 
•yap,  postpos.  conj.,  for. 
•yc,  enclitic  particle,  emphasiz- 
ing the  preceding  word  by 
restriction,  at  least;  often 
not  to  be  rendered  by  a  sep- 
arate word. 

s,  -WTOS,  6,  laughter. 
€d,  -as,  f|,  [/yfyvojiat,],  fam- 


•y€V€<ris,    -€«s,     T|, 

birth,  origin,  genesis. 

•y€*vos,  -cos,  TO,  [-yC-yvojxai],  race. 

•ye<j>vpa,  -as,  TJ,  bridge. 

YH>  "VHS,  T|,  earth,  land. 

'ytyvoncu  (?€v-,  <y€vr|-,  -yov-), 
•y€vf}cro|j.ai,  ryevofujv,  -yfyova, 
•ye-ye'vTjuai,  become,  be  born, 
(of  events)  take  place. 

•yi-yvwa'Ktt  ("yvo-,  incep.  cl.,  H. 
403;  G.  613),  <yv(&<ronai,  2^- 
vwv,  €-yvcuKa.  c-yvoxr^Jtai,  €-yv<o- 
o-0T]v,come  ^o  know,  perceive, 
become  aware,  recognize, 
come  to  hold  an  opinion; 
the  aor.  and  perf.  may 
sometimes  be  rendered 
know,  but  the  ordinary 
words  for  know  are  ot8a  and 


•y\v<|>a>,  carve. 

•yXwcnra   or    •yXw-rra,     -t^s,    TJ, 
tongue,  language. 
-TJS,    T|, 


judgment,    thought,     mind, 
consent  ;  also  proverb. 
pdjxpia,    -aros,    TO,    [Ypd<|>Ci>], 
writing,  letter  (of  the  alpha- 
bet). 


w  (-yvp-vaS-,  i-cl.,  H. 
398;  G.  584,  585,  587), 
•yv|i,vdo-cD,  €<yv|j,vao-a, 
vaKa,  <y€<yvfi.vao-|xai, 
o-6r|v,  [-yvjivo's],  exercise. 
•yvfjivdo-iov,  -ov,  TO', 
gymnasium. 

^V|lVf^S,       -f|TOS,       6, 

light-armed  soldier. 
•yvjxvo's,  -f^,  -o'v,  naked,  bare. 
•ywf},    -ywaiKo's,    TJ,     woman, 

wife. 
•ywvCd,  -as,  TJ,  corner,  angle. 

A. 

SaCpcov,  -ovos,  6,  divinity,  spirit. 
SaKpva>      (SaKpv-),      SaKpvo-a>, 

ISaKpvo-a,  ScSaKpvKa,  weep. 
Sairavdo)    (Sairava-),    Sairavtfj- 

o-w,  etc.,  [8airdvT|  expense], 

expend. 
SapeiKo's,      -ov,     6,     [Aapctos], 

daric,  a  Persian  gold  coin, 

worth  $5.40  in  our  gold. 
Aapctos,  -ov,  6,  Dareios  or  Da- 

rius. 
Sao-|xo's,  -ov,  6,  tribute. 


326 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


&,  postpos.  conj.,  indicating 
a  slight  contrast  with  some- 
thing preceding  ;  but,  and, 
often  correl.  with  JJL^V. 

ScSuos,  pple.  of  2d  perf.  S&ta 
(H.  490,  5;  G.  804  SeCSw), 
fearing. 

ScCicvv|u  (8€iK-,  nas.  cl.,  H.  402, 
e;  G.  608),  S€C£a>, 


point  out,  show. 
8€*ica,  indecl.,  ten. 
ScKas,  -dSos,  fj,  company  of 

ten,  decad. 
AeX4>ou  -tov,  ol,  Delphi. 
SlvSpov,  -ov,  TO,  tree. 
Scfjio's,  -d,  -ov,  right  (opp.  to 

left). 
S&v,  SC'OVTOS,  TO',  neut.   pple. 

of  Set,  £fta£  which  is  need- 

ful:   €ls   TO    S&v    satisfac- 

torily. 

-TOS,  TO',    [84pw], 


-,  Sap-), 

,  48dpT|v,  flay. 
S,  -ov,  6,  master. 
8€vpo,  adv.,  hither. 
8&i>   (Se-,  Set]-), 

SeSe'TjKo,,  lack,  want;  impers., 
Set,  8eT)creu  ISc^tre.  SeSe'i^Ke. 
i/iere  ^s  nee^  o/,  ^  is  neces- 
sary, must,  ought,  Lat. 
est  ;  mid.,  Seo  fj.au 


-fj,  postpos.  particle.  Its  mean- 
ings are  very  elusive  ;  they 
may  be  grouped  under  two 
heads,  which  cannot  always 
be  clearly  distinguished. 
(1)  Its  force  falls  on  a  sin- 
gle word  or.  phrase,  marking 
the  idea  as  being  immedi- 
ately present  to  the  mind, 
giving  greater  definiteness 
or  positiveness.  The  word 
thus  made  prominent  is  the 
one  immediately  preceding 
8-fj  (yet  another  particle,  as 
jx^v,  may  intervene).  The 
effect  can  sometimes  be  ren- 
dered in  English  by  the  tone 
of  the  voice  only,  sometimes 
indeed,  clearly,  may  be  used. 
TO'TC  8ij,  then  indeed.  Some- 
times it  has  an  ironical  force, 
of  course  !  (2)  It  belongs  to 
the  entire  clause.  It  then 
stands  near  the  beginning,, 
and  often  marks  the  state- 
ment as  obvious,  or  to  be 
expected  under  the  known 
circumstances.  This  effect 
may  be  given  by  of  course, 
plainly,  obviously.  When 
inferential,  like  ovv,  it  may 
be  rendered  accordingly,  un- 
emphatic  now  or  so.  jiev  Srj 
is  a  frequent  combination; 
each  particle  usually  has  its 
full  separate  force. 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


327 


SfjXos,  -tj,  -ov,  plain,  evident. 

STjpoicpaTid,  -as,  TJ,  [S-qptos, 
KpaT€w].  democracy. 

Sfifjios,  -ov,  6,  people  ;  often  the 
democratic  party  as  opposed 
to  the  oligarchical  faction. 

8id,  prep.,  (1)  w.  gen.,  through  ; 
(2)  w.  ace.,  on  account  of, 
because  of;  Sid  iroXXd  for 
many  reasons. 

Siapai  vw  (Sia  +  |3av-,  pa-) ,  go 
through,  cross. 

8iapdXXa>  (6ia  -  (3aX-.  pXt]-), 
attack  the  character  of,  slan- 
der, accuse  falsely. 

Sid-yco  (8ia+d-y-) ,  lead  through  ; 
pass  one's  time,  and  so  con- 
tinue. Xe-ywv  8if)-yc,  contin- 
ued to  speak,  kept  speaking. 

Siaipew,  divide. 

Siaira,  -TJS,  TJ,  mode  of  life. 

810x60-101,  -ai,  -a,  two  hundred. 

SiaX^yopai,  converse. 

Siapird£a>  (8ia  +  dpira8-) ,  plun- 
der, sack. 

8iaT(0Tjju  (8ia  +  0€-,  root  cl., 
H.  404;  G.  619),  8ia0rfj<r«, 
8ie'9r|Ka.  8iar46T]Ka  or  8iar€- 

0€LKa.      8iaT€0€lp,ai,       8l€T€0t]V 

(for  8t€0€0Ti v) ,  dispose,  bring 
into  a  certain  disposition, 
treat. 

Si8duric<i>,  teach. 

8£8«|u  (80-,  root  cl.,  H.  404; 
G.  619),  ScGa-w,  €'8a)Ka,  Se'Sw- 
Ka,  SeSojxai,  4860T)v,  give. 


s,   -a,   -ov,    [8iKt]],   just, 
right. 

j,  -TJS,  T|,  decision  of  a  judge; 
sentence,  penalty  ;  right,  jus- 
tice. 

816  (for  Sid  8),  on  account 
of  which,  wherefore,  there- 
fore. 

8Cs,  twice. 

SurxtXioi,  -at.  -a,  (S($,  \tXioi), 
two  thousand. 

867^,  -aros,  r6,  opinion. 

8oK€'w  (8oK€-,  SOK-),  86$a>,^So$a, 
Se'So-yjiaL,  4S6\0T]v,  think, 
seem;  3d  sing,  impers., 
seems,  seems  best ;  of  a  pro- 
posal in  an  assembly,  be 
adopted,  pass. 

AoXoircs,  -wv,  ol,  Dolopes,  tribe 
on  the  southwest  borders  of 
Thessaly. 

8o£a,  -TJS,  T|,  opinion. 

SoOXos.  -ov,  6,  slave. 

8ovX6a>  (SovXo-),  8ovXw(rw,etc., 
[8ovXos],  enslave. 

Spdfia.  -TOS,  r6,  deed ;  drama. 

Spdco,  do,  accomplish. 

Spo^os,  -ov,  6,  [Spajxciv  run], 
running,  race. 

Svvajxat  (Svva-,  root  cl.,  H. 
404;  G.  619),  8vv^<ro|jLai, 
SeSvvtifjiai,  ISw^O-qv,  can,  be 
able  ;  of  words,  signify. 

Svvafus,  -€o>s,  T|,  [Svvafxai], 
force,  power;  also  signifi- 
cance, meaning. 


328 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


Svvdo-Ttjs,    -ov,     6,    powerful 

man,  nobleman. 
8  wards.     -TJ,    -6v,    [Svvajxai], 

able  ;  of  things,  possible. 
8vo,  SVCHV.  two. 
Siiw    (8v-,    8x>-),    Sticrco,    €8vo~a, 

cSvv,  Sc'Svica.  ScSvfiai,  cSvO^v, 

cause   to  sink,  also  enter; 

dir.  mid.,  with  jii-aor.  and 

perf.  act.,  sink,  intrans. 
8<68€Ka,   indecl.,    [8vo,   Se'ica], 

twelve. 
Swpov,  -ov,  TO,  [SiStoju],  gift. 

E. 

lav,  [cl,  av],  if,  with  the  subjv. 

Also  written  av  and  fjv. 
cavrov,  -f]s,  -ov,  [stem  !-,  av- 
r6s],  reflex,  pron.,  one"1  s  self, 
himself,  herself,  itself.   Also 
written  avrov,  etc. 
s,  -dSos,  TJ,  wee^. 
,  -ij,  -ov,  seventh. 

S,    -OV,     [€V,    K€\€Va>], 

bidden,  incited. 
(0,  CJJLOV,  or  jjiov,  /. 


e  will- 

ing, in  Attic  prose  almost 
always  implying  less  distinct 
choice  and  desire  than  0ov- 
Xopai  wish.  (In  poetry  this 
difference  is  not  made.  ) 
cl,  proclit.  conj.,  if;  sometimes 
whether, 


ctSlvai,  €l8f]T€,  see  otSa. 

€t8ov.  see  6pda>. 

ctSos,  -cos,  TO',  shape,  figure. 

€\Ir](rav,  see  elfiC. 

€\IKOCTI,  indecl.,  twenty. 

€lK<&v,  -ovos,  T|,  image,  statue. 

elfxC  (!>.,  root  cl.,H.  404,  478; 

G.  619,  806),  carofiai,  am,  be. 
€t|ii  (1-,  root  cl.,  H.  477;   G. 

808,  1-3),  go,  often  future 

in  meaning. 
etvai,  see  eljjit. 

ellTOV,    See  <|>T]|At. 

€tpT]Ka,  €LpT]|jiai,  see  4>-q(Ai. 
els,  proclitic  prep.  w.  ace.,  into, 

in  with  verbs   of  motion  ; 

for  (denoting  purpose)  ,  with 

reference  to,  bearing  upon; 

with  numbers,  about. 
els,  pta,  ev,  one. 
€io-pd\Xw     (els+paX-,     PXt)-), 

^roio  m^o;  7?iaA;e  entrance 

into,  enter. 
€tcrpoX^,    -fjs,    ^,    [€lo-pdXXa>], 

pass  into  a  region,  entrance. 
cto-eXavvo)  (els  +  cXa-),  n'^e  or 

march  into. 

(els  +  i*px-,    IX0-, 


€to-C(v),  (they)  are;  see  el^C. 

or  €o-w,    adv.    w.    gen., 
[els],  within,  inside. 

adv.,   afterwards,  then, 
secondly. 
CK,  see  4£. 
f€KacrTos,  -1],  -ov, 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


329 


Ifcaro'v,  indecl.,  one  hundred. 

€icpdXXa>  (cJ  +  paX-,  pXrj-),  cast 
out,  expel,  banish. 

€K&pa>  (€K  +  8€P-,  Sap-),  flay, 
skin. 

€K€i,  adv.,  yonder,  there. 

€K€ivos,  -TJ,  -o,  dem.  pron., 
[€K€i],  he  (the  more  re- 
mote), Lat.  ille. 

iKKoXlw  (Ifj  +  KaXc-,  K\T]-),  call 
out. 

€KKaXvTTTO>     (4J;  +  KttXvp-),     UU- 

cover. 

€KK\T]<rCd,  -as,  f|,  [eKKtxXcw], 
assembly. 

CKXeCirco  (IJ+Xiir-,  XCIIT-,  XOIIT-), 
leave  by  going  out,  aban- 
don. 

CK-irtlTTtt  (4£  +  1T€T-,  ir€CT-,  IPTO)-), 

fall  out,  be  banished,  used 
as  pass,  of  £icf3aXXa>. 

"EKTO>P,  -opos,  6,  Hektor  or 
Hector. 

4K<t>€v?a>  (^  +  4>v^-,  <t>€vY-).  es- 
cape. 

IKWV,  -ovora,  -6v,  decl.  like  an 
aor.  pple.,  willing,  volun- 
tarily. 

IXavvco  (4Xa-,  nas.  cl. ,  H.  402,  e ; 
G.  603,  612),  4X«,  (H.  424; 
G.  665,  1  and  2),  -fjXao-a, 
IX^Xaica,  cX^Xapai,  TjXa0T]v, 
drive.  (IXavvco  is  prob.  for 
cXa-w-w.) 

IX&rOai,  see  alp^w. 

s,  -a,  -ov,  free. 


,  see  epxofJtaL. 
'EXXds,  -d8os,  TI,  Greece,  Hellas. 
"EXXrjv,  -os,  6,  Greek,  Hellene. 
'EXXTjviico's,  -^j,  -ov,  ["EXXr]v], 

Grecian,  Greek;  TO  'EXXi]- 

VIKO'V,  Greek  force. 
'EXX-qo-irovTiaKo's,  -i\,  -o'v,  ['EX- 

X^O-ITOVTOS],      Hellespontic, 

on  the  Hellespont. 
cEXX^orirovTOs,  -ov,  6,  ["EXXtj, 

ITOVTOS  sea],  Hellespont,  or 

sea  of  Helle,  who  was  said 

to  have  been  drowned  there ; 

now  the  Dardanelles. 
iXirCs,  C8os,  -TJ,  hope. 
€|iavTov,    [4jx^,   avrds],  reflex. 

pron.,  not  used  in  nom.,  of 

myself. 
€npa£va>  (4v+pav-,  fa-),  go  on 

board,  embark. 
IfipdXXca     (4v+paX-,     pXt]-), 

throw  in;  of  rivers,  empty 

into. 

4v,  proclitic  prep.  w.  dat. ,  in. 
€v6a,  adv.,  [4v],  dem.,  there; 

rel.,  where. 
€voiK€&>  (4v  +  olK€-),  dwell  in  ;  oi 

CVOIKOVVTCS,  the  inhabitants. 
Ivopdco  (4v  +  opa-),  see  in  some- 
thing, see  therein. 
cvraOOa,  adv.,  [4v],  there,  here; 

thereupon,  then. 
€VT6v9€v,  adv.,  [4v],  thence. 
Ivrvyxdvo)    (4v  +  TV\-,    TVX.T]-, 

T€V\-),  chance  upon,  fall  in 

with,  meet, 


330 


GBEEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


4J,  before  consonants  IK,  pro- 
clitic prep.  w.  gen.,  out  of, 
from. 

!£,  indecl.,  six. 

4£aiT€«  (€Jj  +  atT€-),  ask  from  ; 
indir.  mid.,  beg  out,  ob- 
tain the  release  of  by  en- 
treaty. 

4$€\avva>  (cfj  +  IXa-),  drive  out, 
drive  forth;  intrans.  (IV- 
irov  omitted),  march  forth, 
march. 

IgeXOiiv,  see 


come  out. 
IjjcTcuris,  -€«s,  T),  [e£-€Ta£«  scru- 

tinize, inspect},   inspection, 

review. 
<[Ja>,  outside. 
errayy4XX.a>  (liri  +  dyycX-)  ,  pro- 

claim; subjective  mid.,  an- 

nounce from  one's  self,  offer, 

promise. 

eiraOov,  see  <rrdo*x<«>. 
€ircuv€co    (lirt  +  alvc-), 

croficu,     eTrrfvco-a, 

[alve'co  is  from  at  vos  praise}, 

praise,  commend,  applaud. 
4-ireC,    conj.,    temporal,    when, 

after  ;  causal,  since. 
€TT€iSTj  [eireC,  8^],  conj.,  when, 

after. 
€ir€i|u  (lirt  +  ccr-,  see  €l|iC),  be 

upon  or  over. 
Iimpi  («irt  +  l-,  see  etju),  ad- 

vance, attach 


€TT€ira,  adv.,  [4irC,  clra],  there- 
upon, next,  secondly. 

4ir£,  prep.,  on,  upon.  (1)  W. 
gen.,  on,  upon.  (2)  W.  dat., 
on,  upon  ;  in  dependence  on, 
in  the  power  of,  for.  (3)  W. 
ace.,  to,  towards,  against. 
In  comj).,  upon,  against,  in 
addition;  eirl  Terrapwv,  by 
fours,  four  deep. 


plot,  or  scheme  against. 


plot,  design  against  one. 
lm8e(Kvv|u  (liri+.SciK-),  show 

to,   exhibit,   display;  point 

out. 
4iriK(v8vvos,    -ov,    [eirt,    KivSv- 

vos]  ,  dangerous.   Comp.  4-irt- 

Klv8vVOT€pOS,    SUp.    CTTlKlvSli- 
VOTttTOS. 

4-iriKpvirTa)  (iiri  +  Kpv<|>-)  ,  cover 

over,  conceal. 
€7ri|ieX€0|Jiai  (eiri  +  jxcXe-)  ,  lirijic- 

irifX€)JL€XT])Xai,    €1T€- 

,  take  care  of,  attend 

to,  give  attention  to. 
cirCirovos,     -ov,     [en-C,     irovos], 

laborious,  toilsome.    Comp. 

€irnrovc&T€pos,  sup.  liriirovw- 

TCITOS. 
cirCppvros,  -ov,  [verbal  of  €irip- 

p€w  flow   upon],  well  wat- 

ered. 
lirCo-Koiros,    -ov,    6,    overseer, 

guardian. 


GREEK-EN GL1SS  VOCABULARY. 


331 


lirCorrafxai  (lirurra-),  errurnr]- 
crojxaL,  TjirwrTTJOTjv,  know,  un- 
derstand. 

emo-ToXTJ,  -f]s,  TJ,  letter,  epistle. 

ImT^jSeios,  -a,  -ov,  suitable,  fit  j 
TO,  &nvrtfjScia,  supplies,  provi- 


eiriT£0T]ju  (eiri  +  0€-),  put  upon  ; 
StKTjv  €iriTi0ii)u,  inflict  pun- 
ishment on. 

€iriTp€ira>  (4-iri  +  rpcir-,  rpo<|>-, 
Tpair-),  turn  over  to,  give 
up  to. 

€irtx»p&«>  (4iri  +  x«p«-))  ad- 
vance. 

)ir-,  €ir-),  €\|/o|iai, 
(for  €<r(€)'irojit]v, 
rough  breathing  irregularly 
taken  from  pres. ;  synopsis, 
orircofxai,  <riroCjiT]v,  o-irov,  o-ir^- 
o-0ai,  criro|X€vos) ,  follow. 

€irra,  indecl.,  seven. 

'Eirvaja,  -TJS,  TJ,  Epyaxa. 

ep'yov,  -ov,  TO,  work. 

€pTj[ios,  -tj,  -ov,  lonely,  solitary, 
bereft. 

IpCItt  (4pt8-,  i-cl.,  H.  398;  G. 
584,  585),  tjpura,  [€pis,  -1805, 
strife"]  i  contend. 

€pjJLT]V€VS,         -^0>S,        6,         ['EpH-fjS 

Hermes,  messenger  of  Zeus] , 

interpreter. 
Ipvjxvo's,     -i\,     -o'v,    fortified, 

strong. 
<fpXon<u  (4PX-,  4X6-,  4\v6-,  H. 

539, 2  and  a  ;  G.  621),  ^ 


4\T|Xv0a,  come,  go.  The  fut. 
is  supplied  generally  by 

€t|JLt. 

€pw,  see  4>iuiC. 

epcordw  (Ipcora-,  cp-),  €pcoTT|(ra>, 
etc. ;  also  2d  aor.  TJpo'iiTjv, 
ask,  inquire. 

€OTCU,  see  d\iL 

€O-T£(V),  is;  see  clpC. 

€o-xo.Tos,  -i\,  -ov,  last,  farthest, 
extreme. 

€<rci>,  see  ci'o-co. 

€T€pos,  -d,  -ov,  o^er  (generally, 
one  of  ^o). 

CTI,  adv.  Of  time,  referring 
to  the  pres.  or  past,  still, 
yet,  longer;  referring  to  the 
fat.,  further,  longer,  again. 
Of  degree,  yet,  still. 

€Tvjios,  -tj,  -ov,  true,  real, 
genuine. 

cv,  adv.,  well. 

€vSaC|i,o>v,  -ov,  [cv,  8a.ip.wv], 
fortunate,  happy,  prosper- 
ous. 

€v^j0€ia,  -as,  -T|,  [€v^0T]s],  sim- 
plicity, folly. 

€^0^5,     €«T!0€S,      [€«,     TJ00S],     Of 

good  character;  then  sim- 
ple-hearted, silly,  foolish. 

CVVOIKO'S,  -i\,  -o'v,  [€$,  vovs 
mind} ,  kindly,  friendly. 

€vvotK«s,  adv.,  [evvoiKo's],  in 
a  kindly  way ;  €VVOIKWS 
€'x«,  be  kindly  disposed  or 
loyal. 


332 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


€vpio-Ko)  (€vp-,  €vp€-,  inceptive 
cl.,  H.  403;  G.  613),  €vp*jo-«, 


pe'0T]v,  find.     (2d  aor.  impv. 

€vp*,  H.  387,  b  ;  G.  131,  2.) 
cvpos,  -ovs,  TO,  width. 
Ev4>pdrr]s,  -ov,  6,  Euphrates. 
evwvv^os,   -ov,    [€v,   ovvfxa],   of 

good  name;  left,  used  for 

dpicrrepos    left   to   avoid   a 

word  of  bad  omen. 
4x0pos,   -a,   -ov,    [>'x0a>  hate], 

hateful,      hostile  ;     subst., 

enemy. 


*]-,  see  239),  l£a>  or 

,  €<rxov,  €<rxT]Ka,  €o-XTl|Jiat, 

e.  The  pres.  pple.  may 
often  be  translated  having 
under  one's  command^  and 
so  with.  Accompanied  by 
an  adv.  €'xo>  often  means  be 
in  a  certain  state,  which  the 
adv.  denotes  ;  the  phrase  is 
then  nearly  equivalent  to 
€l|i(  with  the  adj.  to  which 
the  adv.  corresponds  ;  €vvo'i- 
KO>S  ^x40'  oe  weM  disposed. 
5(a>s,  conj.,  while,  until. 

Z. 

t€v<Y'^  nas-  cl-» 
H.  402,  e\  G.  608),  trffu, 
ct€v|a,  ^vyjjLat,  etv^v,  join, 
yoke. 


v,  -ov,  r 

,  -ov,  TO',  animal. 


•fj,  conj.,  or;  afteracomp.,£ftem. 
tlpT],  -TJS,  4|,  yoM^. 

TJ^HIWV,      -OVOS,      6,      [T|-y€'0|UU], 

leader,  guide. 


i,  [a-yw],  ? 
think,  believe,  consider. 

s,  adv.,  [rjSvs],  f/Za^??/. 
•fjST],  adv.,  now,  already. 
t]So|iai  (T|8-),  1JO-0TJV,  be  pleased. 
TjSviraOeo)    (Tj8vira0€-)  ,    rjSvira- 
0^0-w,  etc.,  [Tj8vira0^s  having 
pleasant  sensations,  enjoying 
one's  self,  TjSvs,  ira0os],  live 


•fjSvs,  -€ia,  -v,  pleasant,  deli- 
cious, (figuratively)  sweet. 

TJ00S,  -€os,  TO',  character. 

fj,  adv.,  dat.  sing.  fern,  of  os, 
in  what  way,  as. 

•fJKtt  (T|K-),  TJ|<«),  come,  return; 
pres.  generally  perf .  in  mean- 
ing, am  come. 

T]Xios,  -ov,  6,  sun. 
-as,  t|,  day. 
,  -a,  -ov,  [T)|i€ts],  our. 

T)(jtiSap€iKo'v,  -ov,  TO',  [TJJJLI-  half, 
SdpeiKo's],  half-daric. 

Tjjxio'Xios,  -a,  -ov,  [TJJII-  half, 
<JXos],  containing  one  and  a 
half,  half  as  much  more. 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


333 


TJV,  see  clfiC. 
T)£IOV.  see  d£io'a>. 
•qo-av,  see  etjxC. 


(r|TTa-),  fj-rHjo-ouai, 
•qTTT|(iai,  f|TT-i]0T]v,  [ifrra  de- 
feat, TJTTWV  inferior'],  be  de- 
feated, used  as  pass,  of 

VIKCUO. 

0. 

OdXarra,  -TJS,  f|,  sea. 

Bavaros,  -ov,  6,  death. 

Oappcw  (9app€-),  0apprj<rci>,  etc., 
[0dpo-os,  Bdppos  courage], 
be  of  good  courage. 

0a,TTOv,  adv.,  comp.  of  Ta\^o>s. 

0av|idta>  (0avfia8-,  i-cl.,H.398  ; 
G.  584,  585,  587),  0av|id<ra>, 
€0avfJLa<ra,  TeOavpaica,  rcOav- 
p.ao-(a.at.  €0av|id(r0T]v,  won- 
der, wonder  at,  admire. 

0^d,  -as,  T|,  sight,  show. 

0€arpov,  -ov,  TO,  theatre. 

0€o's,  -ov,  6,  a  god,  God. 

0€pair€v<i>  (0€pair€v-).  0€pair€v- 
o-w,  etc.,  serve,  worship. 

0epp.ov.  -ov,  TO',  heat. 

OcVis,  -€<«)§,  TJ,  position,  putting. 

0«TTaX£d,  -as,  TJ,  Thessaly. 

06TTaXo's,  -ov,  6,  Thessalian. 

0ewpta),  (0€0>p€-),  0ecopT|cra>.  etc., 
[0€wpo's  spectator,  from  04d], 
view,  witness,  review  an 
army. 

0T|p€lJW    (0«qp€V- 

beast],  hunt. 


0T]p(ov,  -ov,  TO',  [0-fjp  beast], 
beast. 

0o'ava,  -wv,  Ta,  Thoana. 

0pa|,  0pdKo's,  6,  Thracian. 

0vfi(3piov,  -ov,  TO',  Thymbrion. 

0vpd,  -as,  T|,  gate,  door,  at 
0vpai,  residence,  quarters, 
especially  of  the  Persian 
king. 

0v«  (0v-,  0v-),  0vo-o),  €0vo-a, 
T€0vKa,  T€0v(iai,  4Tv0T]v,  sac- 
rifice. 


t8ios,  -a,, -ov, one' sown, private. 

tSi(o-rr|s,  -ov,  6,  [t8ios] ,  private 
person,  private  soldier. 

tSovo-a,  see  opduo. 

Up€vs,  -&DS,  o,  priest. 
,  -a,  -o'v,  sacred. 
(c-,  root  cl.,  H.  476;   G. 
810),  tjcrco,  T]Ka,  ctKa,  clfxai, 
€i0T]v,  set  in  motion,  send. 

licavo's,  --fj,  -o'v,  [root  IK-  seen 
ind<|)tKv^oji,ai],  capable,  com- 
petent, sufficient,  enough. 

"Iico'viov,  -ov,  TO',  Ikonion  or 
Iconium. 

tXt),  --qs,  T|,  troop,  squadron. 

iva,  conj.,  where;  in  order 
that,  that  denoting  purpose. 

l*irir€vs,  -€<os,  6,  [i'lnros],  horse- 
man, cavalryman. 

liririKo's,  -"f\,  -o'v,  [tinros],  per- 
taining to  horses;  8vva|xis 
liririK^i,  cavalry. 


334 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


firiros,  -ov,  6,  horse. 
i'cros,  -T],  -ov,  equal. 
'lo-o-oC,  -«v,  ol,  or  'Lro-o's,  -ov, 

Issos  or  /ssws. 

to-rrjju  (o-ra-,  root  cl.,  H.  404 ; 
G.  619),  <TT^<ra>,  £<rn)<ra, 
co-njv,  &rTi]Ka,  (-2(TTa|iai  in 
a  few  compounds),  lo-TaOrjv, 
se£,  station,  cause  to  stand; 
dir.  mid.  and  ju-aor.,  station 
one's  self,  take  one's  stand; 
perf.  and  fut.  perf.  act., 
stand. 

l<rropCd,  -ds,  f|,  history,  story. 

lo-xvpo's,  -a,  -ov,  [lo-xvs 
strength],  strong. 

t<rxvp«s,  adv.,  [lo-xvfxS],  ex- 
tremely. 

"lams,  -cov,  ol,  lonians. 

'IcovCd,  -ds,  T|,  [Alcoves],  Ionia, 
the  central  part  of  the  west- 
ern coast-region  of  Asia 
Minor. 

•*),  -o'v,["Ia>v€s],/om'c. 


(icara  +  cvS-,  €-uST|-), 
impf.  4Ka0€v8ov  (H.  361 ;  G. 
544),  or  Ka0T)vSov, 


squander  in    luxury,   revel 
away. 

Kd9T]jj,ai  (Kara  +  TJO--,  root  cl., 
H.  483,  484;   G.  814,  816, 


816),  sit,  be  seated;  be  en- 
camped. 

Ka6t<rrT]|u  (Kara  +  o-ra-) ,  Kara- 
<rr/j<ra>,  KaT&mjo-a,  Kar^- 
OTT]V,  KaOcVr^Ka,  Ka0€<rra- 
jjiat,  KaT€o-Ta0T]v,  set  down, 
station,  establish,  appoint; 
dir.  mid.,  with  the  ju-aor.  and 
perf.  act.,  take  one's  place, 
become  or  be  established. 

KaC,  (1)  conj.,  and;  icaC . . .  icaf, 
both  . . .  and;  (2)  adv.,  also, 
too,  even,  throwing  its  force 
upon  the  next  following 
word  or  phrase. 

KCIKO'S,  -tf\,  -ov,  bad,  cowardly. 
Comp.  KttKiwv,  sup.  Kcuao-ros. 

KaXlco     (icaXc-,     K\t]- 
(H.  423;  G.  665), 

K€K\T)Ka,    K€K\T)fiaU 

call,  summon. 

KaXXos,  -€os,  TO,  beauty. 

KaXo's,  -i\,  -ov,  beautiful;  also 
of  character,  noble,  honora- 
ble. Comp.  KdXXfwv,  sup. 

KoXXlO-TOS- 

KaXvirrw  (KaXvp-,  r-cl.,  H.395; 
G.  576),  KaXv+w,  ^KaXv^a, 
KCKaXvfifxai,  €KaXv(f>0T]v,  cover. 

KaXws,  adv.,  [KaXo's],  well,  suc- 
cessfully. 

Kavwv,  -o'vos,  6,  measuring-rod. 

KairT)X€iov,    -ov,    TO.    [  Ka-rrTjXos 

retail  dealer],  shop  for  retail 
trade,  especially  for  provis- 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


335 


KairiraSoicCd,  -as,  fj,  Kappado- 
kia  or  Cappadocia. 

Kao-TwXo's,  -ov,  o,  Kastolos  or 
Castolus. 

Kara,  prep.,  down.  (1)  W. 
gen.  down  from,  down  un- 
der, down  upon  ;  (2)  w.  ace., 
down  along,  according  to, 
opposite.  Kara  yf\v,  Kara 
edXarrav,  by  land,  by  sea. 
Kara  ¥Xds,  by  troops.  In 
comp.,  down,  home. 

Karapcuvw  (Kara+pav-,  fa-), 
go  down,  descend. 

K arcry  w  (  Kara + d-y-) ,  lead  down , 
lead  home,  restore  an  exile. 

KaraSvo)  ((cara  +  Sv-),  sink. 

KaraKoirra)  (Kara  +  KOir-),  cut 
down. 

(Kara  +  Xaf-, 
seize. 

(Kara  +  XMT-,  Xciir-, 
Xoitr-),  leave  in  place,  leave 
behind. 

KaraXva)  (Kara  +  Xv-,  Xv-), 
bring  to  an  end,  destroy  ;  in- 
dir.  mid.,  bring  a  war  or 
quarrel  to  an  end,  come  to 
terms,  become  reconciled. 

Karavoe'w  (Kara  +  vo€-),  notice, 
observe. 

KcrraTreTpcKo      (Kara  +  ircrpo-) , 

KaTaTT€TpW(TC«).     CtC.,      [iTCTpOS 

stone'],  stone  to  death. 
KarairpaTTO)      (Kara  +  irpdy-) , 
do  thoroughly,  accomplish. 


Ko,TCLTi0r)fju  (Kara  +  0€-) ,  de- 
posit, lay  up. 

KavoTTtKos,  -i\,  -ov,  burning. 

Kavo-rpos,  -ov,  6,  Kaystros  or 
Cayster. 

KavVrpov  ireSCov,  Kaystros 
Plain. 

•caw,  burn. 

K€-yxP°S)  -°v>  o?  a  ^in(i  of  mil- 
let. 

KeXcuvcu,  -wv,  at,  Kelainai  or 
Celaenae. 

K€\€VW     (K€X€V-), 

Xevcra. 

o-|iai,  cKcXcvVO^v,  bid,  urge. 
K€vo's.  -1\,  ov,  empty. 
Kcpajiwv  d-ypopa,  Keramoi-  or 

Cer 'ami-market. 
K€pavvvp,i  (K€pa-,  Kpd-,  nas.  cl., 

H.  402,  e;  G.  608), 

K€Kpd|iai,  €Kpaj9r]v  or 

o-0T]v,  mix. 
Kcpas,  K^pdros,  TO',  horn  ;  wing 

of  an  army. 
K€cj>aXT|.  -i\s,  T|,  head. 
KiXiKCd,  -ds,  T|,  Kilikia  or  Cili- 

cia. 
KCXif,   -IKOS,   6,   Kilikian    or 

Cilician. 
KiXto-ora,  -t]s,  T|,  Kilikian  or 

Cilician  (woman,  queen). 

KlvSvV€VO>      (Klv8i>V€V-),      KlvSv- 

V€VO*<D,  etc.,  [KivSvvos],  be  in 
or  encounter  danger. 

KtvSvvos,  -ov,  6,  danger. 

K\au>.  break. 


336 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


.  -ov,  6,  Klearchos 
or  Clearchus. 

K\i|xa|,  -KOS,  fj,  ladder. 

KVT](jtts,  -1805,  fj,  [Kvrfjfu]  leg'], 
greave. 

KOIVO'S,  ->f\,  -ov,  common,  pub- 
lic, 

KoXoo-o-aC,  -«v,  al,  Kolossai 
or  Colossae. 

Ko'irrtt  (KO-JT-,  T-cl.,  H.  395  ;  G. 

576),    KOX|/W,     €KO\|/a,     K€KOCJ>a. 

K€KOfip,ai.  liroVijv,  c?^. 

Koo-fjL€w,  adorn. 

KoVpos,  -ov,  6,  order;  orna- 
ment; the  universe,  world. 

Kpavos,  -ovs,  TO',  helmet. 

Kpareco,  rwZe. 

KpdTTjp,  -fjpos,  6,  mixing-bowl. 

Kparos,  -cos,  TO,  strength. 

KpavyTJ,  -f]s,  T|,  shout. 

Kp€iTTwv,  KpeiTTOv,  [root  seen 
in  KpaTos] ,  comp.  of  d'yaOos, 
better,  stronger,  more  pow- 
erful. 

Kp€|xdvvv|u    (Kp€|xa-,    nas.    cl., 
402,  e;    G.  608),  €Kp€>a<ra, 
€Kp€fiacr0T]v,  hang. 
T],  -T]S,  T|,  spring. 
s,  KPTJTO'S,  o',  Cretan. 

Kpi0-/i,  -fjs,  T|,  mostly  in  pi., 
barley. 

Kptvo)  (Kpiv-,  Kpi-,  i-cl.,  H.  400  ; 
G.  596),  Kptvw,  c'Kpiva,  K^- 

KplKa,    K^KplfXai,  €KpL0T]V.  tilS- 

cern,  distinguish,  judge. 
,  -ov,  6,  judge,  umpire. 


Kpvirra)    (icpv<|>-,  r-cl.,   H.   395 
and  a  ;  G.  576),  Kpv\|/<o,  €Kpv- 


conceal,  hide. 
Kpvo*TaX\os,  -ov,  6,  ice. 

KTtlVW     (KT€V-,     KTOV-,    l-Cl.,     H. 


400;  G.  596),KT€va>,€KT€iva, 

-€KTova,  kill. 
KvSvos,    -ov,    6,    Kydnos    or 

Cydnus. 

KVK\OS,  -ov,  6,  circle. 
Kvpos,  -ov,  6,  Cyrus. 
KwXvco  (KO)\V-,  KO)Xv-),Ko)Xvo-a), 

€K<oXv<ra,  K€KcoXvKa,  K€K<oXv- 

l&at,  €Ka)Xv9i]v,  hinder,  pre- 

vent. 

A. 

XaOpa,    adv.,     [XavOdvw],    se- 

cretly,  without    the  knowl- 

edge of. 
AaKcSaijxovios,  -a,  -ov,  Lace- 

daemonian, Spartan. 

(Xap-,  X^P-,  nas.  cl., 

H.  402,  c;  G.  605,  6),  X^o- 


jxai,  4X^4>OT)v,  take,  receive, 

capture. 
Xajjnrpo'TTjs,  -T]TOS,  T),  [Xajjurpo's 

splendid],     splendor,     bril- 

liancy. 
XavOdvo)  (Xa9-,  Xt]9-,  nas.  cl., 

H.  402,  c;  G.  605,  6),  X4)<r«! 

cXaOov,     XtX-qOa,    XeX^o-fJiai, 

lie  hid,  escape  the  notice  of, 

be  concealed. 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULAEY.  337 

M. 


Xopvyg,  -yyos,  o,  throat,  lar- 
ynx. 

Xfyco  (Xry-)>  k€'i 
Ka) ,  \€\€-y  [xai, 
say,  tell. 

XcCirco     (Xiir-,      Xeiir-,     XOITT-, 
strong-vow,  cl.,  H.  394;  G. 

572),        X€tya>,        &11TOV,        X€'- 

Xoiira, 


XCOos,  -ov,  6,  stone. 

Xo'-yos,  -ov,  6,  word,  talk,  ac- 

count, description. 
Xo\os,  -ov,  6,  company  of  sol- 

diers. 

AvSCa,  -as,  TJ,  Lydia. 
Avicaia,  -wv,  ra,  ^e  Lykaia  or 

Lycaean  festival,  celebrated 

by  Arcadians  in  honor  of 

Zevs  AVKCUOS.  or  AvKaios. 
AvKctovCol,  -as,  TI,  Lykaonia  or 

Lycaonia. 
XvfjLatvofAaL    (Xvpav-,    i-cl.,    H. 

400;   G.   594), 


€Xvp.av0T]v,   [XvjjiT]  outrage], 
maltreat,  damage. 

(Xtnre-),  Xvir^crw,  etc., 
],  distress,  grieve. 

Xv<ris,  -€a>s,  T|,  a  loosing,  set- 
ting free. 

Xva>  (Xv-,  Xv-),  Xvo-co,  eXvcra, 
XcXvKa,  Xc'Xvpai,  4Xv0T]v, 
loose,  set  free  ;  indir.  mid., 
set  free  for  one's  self,  get 
release^  ransom,  deliver. 


|ia9r||jLa,  -TOS,  TO,  lesson. 
Mai'avSpos,  -ov,  6,  Maiandros 

or  Maeander. 

jxaKpo's,  -a,  -o'v,  long,  large. 
(xaXa,  very,  much  ;  comp.  |wLX- 

Xov,  more,  rather,  sup.  na- 

Xto-ra,  most. 
|iav0ava>,  learn. 
jiavTis,    -c«s,    6,    soothsayer, 

prophet. 

MapaOwv,  -wvos,  6,  Marathon. 
Mapcrvas,  -ov,  6,  Marsyas. 


,  -TJS,  T|, 
tle,  fight. 


»  bat- 


s, 6, 

Megarian. 

fxc'-ya,     large, 

great,  big.     Comp.  luC^wv, 

sup.  ^•y'-o'TOs. 
Mc-ya<)>^pvT|s,  -ov,  6,  Megapher- 

nes. 

jU-yio-ros,  -T|,  -ov,  see  jUyas. 
p.€^wv,  see  fU'yas. 
|ieXCvT|,  -T|S,  T|,  millet,  a  kind  of 

grain. 
jjAXco    (pcXX-,    ixcXX-q-),    jjieX- 

X.TJO-CO,  €|i€'XXT]cra,  be  about  to 

do  something,  intend,  be  go- 

ing to  do  ;  also  delay. 
lUXos,  -cos,  TO',  song,  strain  of 

music. 
|i€v*,  postpos.  particle,  indicat- 

ing that  something  not  yet 

mentioned  is  thought  of  as 


338 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


contrasted  with  the  word  be- 
fore ji^v,  or  with  the  phrase 
in  which  ji^v  stands ;  usually 
translated  by  the  tone  of 
voice  only,  sometimes  by  on 
the  one  hand,  in  the  first 
place,  indeed. 
jjL€VToi,  conj.,  however,  yet. 

fJLCVCO  (|1€V-,   |1€VT]-),  |X€VW,  €fX€lva, 

remain. 
v,  -os,  6,  Menon. 

|x€<ros,  -T],  -ov,  in  the  pred.  posi- 
tion, the  middle  part  of,  the 
midst  of  (H.  671  ;  G.  978)  ; 
TO  jx&rov,  the  midst,  centre. 

JWTOL,  prep.,  w.  gen.,  with;  w. 
ace.,  after. 

}j,€Tair€|j.ira>  (fiera  +  ircixir-, 
ITOJI,<|>-) ,  send  after;  indir. 
mid.,  send  for,  summon. 

fierpov,  -ov,  TO',  measure. 

jx-fj,  adv.,  not,  marking  the  ne- 
gation as  willed  or  aimed  at, 
or  as  merely  conceived.  Also 
conj.,  to  denote  neg.  pur- 
pose, that  not ;  after  expres- 
sion of  fear,  lest,  that. 

|iT|Sl,  conj.  and  adv.,  used  for 
ov8€  in  all  senses,  to  marl  the 
negation  as  willed  or  aimed 
at,  or  as  merely  thought  of. 

|iT)Sc£s,  |iT)8€|iCa,  fiTjSc'v,  indef. 
pron.,  no  one,  used  instead 
of  ovScCs  to  mark  the  nega- 
tion as  willed  or  aimed  at, 
or  as  merely  thought  of. 


Mf)8os,  -ov,  6,  Mede. 

JJIT]K€TI,     adv.,      Qjdj,     €Tl,      K     Hl- 

serted  from  analogy  with 
OVK€TI],  no  longer,  used  hi- 
st ead  of  ovjceVi  to  mark  the 
negation  as  willed  or  aimed 
at,  or  as  merely  thought  of. 
jx-fjv,  -o's,  6,  month. 

,  never,  used  instead  of 
oviroT€  to  mark  the  negation 
as  willed  or  aimed  at,  or  as 
merely  thought  of. 

C,  conj.,  used  for  OVT€  to 
mark  the  negation  as  willed 
or  aimed  at,  or  as  merely 
thought  of. 

,  -Tpo's,  T),  mother. 
j,  -fjs,  TJ,  machine. 
MCSds,  -ov,  6,  Midas. 
jxiKpo's,  -d,  -o'v,  small,  little; 
neut.  fjuKpo'v  as  adv.,  barely. 
MlX^o-tos,  -d,  -ov, 
Milesian. 

,  -ov,  T|,  Miletos. 
i,  imitate. 
,  -ov,  6,  imitator. 

,      -OV,      6, 

SoV-qs  giver,  fr.  SCScofxi],  pay- 
master. 
fuo-Oo's,  -ov,  o,  pay,  wages. 

( |ito-6o-) ,  |iur0<6cra>,  etc., 
[jiicrObs],  let  for  hire;  mid., 
make  another  let  to  one's 
self,  hire ;  pass.,  be  hired. 
,  -cos,  TO',  hatred. 
J,  -TJS,  TJ,  memory. 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


339 


o'vos,  -TJ,  -ov,  alone,  only,  only 
one. 

,  -fis,  f|,  form. 
.  -TJS,  f),  muse. 
|Aovo-€lov,  -ov,  TO,  house  of  the 

muses,  museum. 
JJLOVO-IK^,  -i]s,  f|,  music. 
HV00S,  -ov,  6,  tale,  legend. 
tivpuu,  -ai,  -a,  ten  thousand. 
Mvo-ios,  -a,  -ov,  Mysian. 
jivo-T^piov,  -ov,  r6,  secret  doc- 
trine, mystery. 
PVO-TIKOS,  -f\,  -ov,  secret,  mys- 
tic. 

N. 

vavs,  v€<&s,  f|,  ship.  H.  206; 
G.  268,  269. 

vavTT|s,  -ov,  6,  sailor. 

vavriKos,  -"f\,  -6v,  [vavs],  naval. 

v€icp6s,  -d,  -6v.  dead. 

v€|ia>,  deal  out,  distribute. 

ve'os,  -d,-ov,  new,  young  ;  comp. 
veampos.  sup.  vcwraros. 

(viKa-),    viK^cro),    etc., 
],  conquer,  defeat,  sur- 
pass, be  victorious. 

viKt],  --qs,  TJ,  victory. 

vo€a>  (vo€-) ,  vo-fyrco,  etc.,  [vdos] , 
observe. 

vo|i£ta>  (vojiiS-,  i-cl.,  H.  398; 
G.  584,  585),  vojuw  (H.  425; 
G.  665, 3),  Iv6[iura,  vcvofiiKa, 
v€vo'|j.icr[iaL.  €vop.icr0T]v.  [vo'- 

j*os],  hold  as  custom;  com- 


monly  consider,  think,  be- 

lieve. 
vojios,  -ov,  6,  [vejtco],  custom, 

laic. 
vo'os,  contracted  vovs,  vov,  6, 

mind. 


jEfcvids,  -ov,  6,  Xenias. 

|€VLKO'S,    -i\,    -ov,    [J^vos],    CCM- 

nected  with  Jcvoi;   TO  gcvt- 
KO'V,  mercenary  force. 

{cvos,  -ov,  6,  foreigner;  one 
connected  by  a  tie  of  hospi- 
tality, guest-friend;  merce- 
nary soldier. 

Q€VO<|)WV,  -WVTOS,  6,  Xeno- 
phon. 

,  -ov,  6,  JEerxes. 


O. 

6,  TJ,  TO',  the.  Often  translated 
his,  her,  its,  their.  Some- 
times retains  its  earlier  force 
as  dem.  pron.,  he,  she,  it; 
as  6  8^,  but  he ;  TO,  |i^v  .  .  . 
Td  8c,  some  things  . .  .  other 
things ;  6  jiev  . .  .  6  8e,  this 
.  .  .  that,  the  one  .  .  .  the 
other. 

o8€,  rj8€,  TO'S€,  dem.  pron.,  [o, 
enclit.  -Be],  this  (Lat.  hie). 

68os,  -ov,  TJ,  road,  way. 

o0€v,  rel.  adv.,  [os],  whence. 


340 


GEEEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


ot8a,  perf.  in  form,  pres.  in 
meaning  (see  H.  491;  G. 
820),  cto-ofxai,  know. 

oticaSc,  adv.,  [olicos],  home- 
ward, home. 

olK€w   (OIKC-).  olKTJcro),    ipKTjcra, 

etc.,  [O!KOS],  inhabit;  also 
intrans.,  dwell,  live. 
olKoSop.€co  (olico8o|j.e-),  olicoSo- 

|J,T]0-CO.    U)Ko8o'[JLT|0-a,     I'll'.,     [ol- 

KoSo'jxos  house-builder;    ot- 
KOS,  8€jj,a>  build},  build. 
i,  adv.,  [olicos],  at  home. 
s,  -ov,  6,  house,  home. 

otvos,  -ov,  6,  wine. 

ofopcu  or  otjxai  (ol-,  olij-),  ol-fj- 
(rojjiai,  cp^0T]v,  think,  sup- 
pose, deem. 

olos,  -a,  -ov,  rel.  pron.  of  qual- 
ity, of  what  sort. 

oloVircp,  oia/rrep,  olo'vircp, 
strengthened  form  of  olos. 

OKV€CO       (OKV6-),      OKVTJCTtt,      6tC., 

[OKVOS  hesitation],  hesitate, 
shrink  from. 

OKTaKo'criOL,  -ai,  -a,  [OKTW], 
eight  hundred. 

OKTW,  indecl.,  eight. 

6\€0pos,  -ov,  6,  [o'XXvjjLi],  de- 
struction, death. 

6\i-yapx(a,  -as,  T|,  [oXC-yot, 
apx«],  oligarchy. 

6Xi-yot,  -ai,  -a,  few. 

8Xos,  -TJ,  -ov,  whole. 

'OXvvOios,  -a,  -ov,  Olynthian. 

ojiaXo's,  -Vj,  -o'v,  even,  level. 


ofioios,  -a,  -ov,  [cf.  ajxa,  ojiov], 
like,  similar. 

6|io(ws,  adv.,  [ofjiotos],  in  like 
manner,  alike. 

OfioXo'y^CD  (6fj.o\o*y€-),  bpoXoy-f]- 
o-w,  etc.,  [ojxo'-Xo-yos  agree- 
ing], agree. 

6[*ov,  adv.,  [cf.  apa],  together. 

OJJLWS,  adv.,  [cf.  afxa],  neverthe- 
less, yet. 

ovofia,  -TOS,  TO',  name. 

ovvfxa,  dialectic  form  of  6Vo|ia. 

oTqj,  indef.  rel.  adv.  and  conj., 
in  what  way,  wherever. 

oirXtnjs,  -ov,  6,  [oirXa],  heavy- 
armed  soldier,  hoplite. 

frn-Xov,  -ov,  TO',  implement;  pi. 
arms. 

oirocros,  -t|,  -ov,  indef.  rel. 
pron.,  how  much,  as  much 
as;  pi.  how  many,  as  many 
as. 

OTTO'TC,  indef.  rel.  conj.,  when- 
ever. 

8irov,  indef.  rel.  adv.  and  conj., 
where. 

oirws,  indef.  rel.  adv.  and  conj., 
originally  denoting  manner, 
in  what  way,  how ;  in  order 
that,  that. 

opdw  (opa-,  oir-,  18-),  impf. 
iwpwv  (H.  359  and  6;  G. 
638),  6\|/ofjiat,  elSov  (synop. 
¥8<o,  ¥80411,  184,  ISciv,  t8(Gv), 

eo'paKa   or   IcopciKa,    €  cap  ap.au 

see. 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


341 


6'p-yavov,  -ov,  TO,  instrument. 

op-yCtofxai  (6><yi8-,  i-cl.,  H.  398  ; 
G.  584,  585,  587),  opYiov^at, 
wp'yaa-fj.cu,  cup^(cr0r|v.  [opyfj 
temper,  anger~\,  be  angry. 

opOios,  -a,  -ov,  [6p0o's],  steep. 

opOo's,  -4\,  -ov,  straight,  up- 
right, right. 

6p|ia.a>  (opjia-),  6pfiT)<rco,  etc., 
[6pp.TJ  impulse~\,  set  in  mo- 
tion ;  dir.  mid.,  put  one's  self 
in  motion,  set  out. 

opvls,  -i0os,  6,  t|,  bird. 

opos,  -ovs,  TO',  mountain. 

os,  -q,  o,  rel.  pron.,  who,  which, 
that,  what. 

ooros,  -yj,  -ov,  rel.  pron.,  how 
much,  as  much  as;  pi.  how 
many,  as  many  as;  who  or 
which  referring  to  quantity 
or  number. 

OO-TIS,  TJTIS,  <>  TI,  indef.  rel. 
pron.,  [os,  rls],  whoever, 
whatever. 

OTC,  rel.  conj.,  when,  while. 

OTI,  conj.,  originally  the  same 
as  o  TI,  neut.  sing,  of  OO-TIS. 
(1)  Declarative,  introducing 
a  substantive  clause  of  which 
the  verb  is  in  a  finite  mode 
(as  the  article  TO'  introduces 
a  substantive  clause  of  which 
the  verb  is  in  the  inf.), 
that.  (2)  Causal  (showing 
the  same  change  of  mean- 
ing as  that  and  Lat.  quod), 


because.  (3)  Strengthening 
a  superl.  (like  o>s  and  Lat. 
quam)  as,  OTI  irXcurToi  as 
many  as  possible,  quam 
plurimi. 

ov,  OVK,  ov\,  not. 

ov,  rel.  adv.,  [os],  where. 

ov,  ol,  g,  reflex,  pron.,  of  him- 
self, etc. 

ov8€,  conj.  and  adv.  [ov,  84]. 
Conj.,  (1)  but  not,  more 
often  (2)  and  not,  nor, 
continuing  a  preceding  ov. 
Adv.,  neg.  of  adverbial  K<xC, 
calling  special  attention  to 
what  follows,  (1)  also  not, 
not .  .  .  either  ;  (2)  not  even. 
As  transition  from  conj.  to 
adv.  we  find  some  cases 
where  ov84  is  still  a  conj., 
yet  lays  stress  upon  what 
follows,  like  an  adv. ;  neither 
will  usually  render  these 
cases. 

ovSeis.  ovSe^La,  ov8ev,  [ov8€, 
els],  no  one. 

ovv,  post-pos.  conj.,  therefore, 
accordingly.  (X€v  ovv,  un- 
emphatic  now.  8*  ovv,  but 
at  any  rate. 

oviroT€,  adv.,  [ov,  TTOT^],  never. 

OVT€,  conj.,  [ov,  T€],  generally 
repeated,  ovVc  .  .  .  OVT€,  nei- 
ther ...  nor. 

OVTOS,  avTt],  TOVTO,  dem.  pron., 
this,  that  (Lat.  is). 


342 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


ovTft>s,bef  ore  a  cons.  OVTO>,  dem. 

adv.  of  manner,  thus,  so. 
6<f>€tXo>  (6<|>€X-,  i-cl.,  H.  399,  a  •; 

G.  598;  also  6<|>eiX€-),  o<|>€i- 

XTJO-CO.  co4>€i\T]o-a  and  w<j>€\ov. 
a><j>€i\T)Ka,  co<))€i\T|9t]v,  owe. 

o<(>€\o9.  r6  (only  nom.  and 
ace.),  advantage,  good,  ben- 
efit. 

oxvpds,  -a,  -6v,  [ix«],  strong, 
secure. 

ovj/ofiai,  see  6pda>. 

n. 

wdOos,  -€os,  r6,  feeling, passion. 
wai8a-y«-y6s,  -ov,  6,  child-leader, 

teacher,  pedagogue. 
iraiScvco    (waiScv-),    waiSevcra), 

etc.,  [wais],  educate. 
irais,  waiSos,  6,  fj,  child  (son 

or  daughter) . 
wdXiv,  again,  back. 
wavrdwdonv,      adv. ,      [wdvra, 

wdori],  altogether. 
wavraxov,  adv.,   [was],  every- 
where. 
iravrrj,  adv.,    [was],  in  every 

way,  on  every  side. 
wavro8aw6s,  -^,  -6v,  [was,  -8a- 

wos  being  an  adj.  ending], 

of  every  kind. 
wapd,  prep.,  (1)  w.  gen.,  from 

beside,  from;   (2)   w.   dat. 

beside,  near,  with;    (3)  w. 

ace.,  to  the  side  of,  to  (with 


a  word  denoting  a  person)  , 
alongside  of,  along  (with  the 
name  of  an  extended  object, 
as  a  river)  ;  wapd  TOV  vopov, 
contrary  to  the  law;  wapd 
pa<rt\€cos,  from  the  king; 
wapd  pao-iXct,  beside  the  king, 
at  his  court  ;  wapd  pao-iXcd, 
to  the  king.  In  comp.,  be- 
side, along. 

•n-apapdXXw,  compare. 

wapapoX^,  -f]s,  T),  comparison, 
illustration,  parable. 

wapa-yyeXXco  (wapa  +  d-y  Y^X-)  , 
send  word  along,  command, 
give  orders. 

wapaYfyvoixai  (wapa-  +  "yev-, 
•y€vr]-,  yov-),  come  to,  arrive. 

wapaScuros,  -ov,  6,  park. 

wapawX^crtos,  -a,  -ov,  [wapd, 
wX-qo-Cos  near~\,  resembling, 
similar. 

wapao-o/yyTjs,  -ov,  6,  parasang, 
Persian  measure  of  distance, 
something  over  three  miles. 

wapa<TK€vd£o>  (wapa  +  o-KcvaS-, 
i-cl.,  H.  398;  G.  584,  585, 
587),  wapao~K€vdo-a>,  wape- 
o-KCvao-a,  wap€o-K€vaKa,  wa- 


o-0-qv,  [wapao-Kcv/j],  prepare. 
wapao-K€v^,     -i]s,     TJ,      [wapd, 

O-KCVOS],  preparation. 
wdp€i|u  (wapa  +  4<r-,  see  clfiC)  , 

wap^o-o^ai,  be  near  or  pres- 

ent or  at  hand. 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


343 


irapcXavvco  (irapa  +  €\a-) ,  drive 
or  ride  past  or  along,  march 

by. 

irap^xw  (irapa  +  <T€X-,  €\-,  i\-, 
°"X~»  ^X1!'))  hold  beside,  of- 
fer; irpd^ixara  irap^xa),  make 
trouble. 

Ilappdo-tos.  -a,  -ov,  Parrha- 
sian. 

napvo-aris,  -1805,  TJ,  Pary satis. 

TTCIS,  irdcra,  irav,  all,  every. 

IIa<rCa>v,  -os,  6,  Pasion. 

irdxr\<D  (ira0-,  ir€v0-,  irov0-,  in- 
ceptive cl.,  H.  403,  c;  G. 
613, 617),  ir€£<ron<u  (for  ir€v0- 
<rop,ai) ,  ciraOov,  ir^irovOa,  ex- 
perience, be  treated;  cv  (Ka- 
K«S)  ircurx€tv  serve  as  pas- 
sives tO  6V  (KttKWS)  TTOWIV. 

irar^p,  irarpos,  6,  father. 
irarpCs,     -C8os,     TJ,      [irar^p], 

fatherland. 
iravo>  (irav-),  irav<ra>,  etc.,  stop 

(trans.)  ;  dir.  mid.,  stop  (in- 

trans.),  cease. 
ircSCov,  -ov,  TO,  [ir^Sov  ground] , 

plain. 
irc^s,  --f\,  -6v,   [cf.  ire'Sov  and 

TTOVS],  on  foot ;  Svyajjus-ire^, 

infantry. 
ir€t0a>  (-IT10-,  strong-vow,  cl.,  H. 

394  ;  G.  572),  ircCo-w,  €ir€ura, 

ir^irciKa,      ir^ir€io-}j.ai,     cireC- 

o-0T]v,  persuade;  dir.  mid., 

believe,  obey. 
irctpa,  -as,  TJ,  attempt,  trial. 


impa/nrjs,  -ov,  6,  pirate. 
ireipdo)  (impa-)  ,  ircipdura),  etc., 

more  commonly  pass,  dep., 

[ir€ipa],  attempt,  try. 
XleXoirovv^o-ios,  -a,  -ov,  [IIcXo- 

ITOVVTJO-OS],  Peloponnesian. 
IleXoirdvvqo-os,  -ov,  TJ,  [Il€Xo\|/ 

Pelops,  vfjo-os  island],  Pelo- 

ponnesus. 
irt\TO,l<a,     [TT^XTT)],     serve    as 

peltast. 

mXrai,  -wv,  at,  Peltai. 
ircXraa-Tf^s,  -ov,  6,    [ircXTa^a)], 

peltast,  targeteer,  carrying 

the  IT&.TTI,  a  light,  crescent- 

shaped  shield. 
ir€|JLira>  (irejJLir-,  -iro(i 

circfji^a,  ir^irofjL<|>a, 

€ir^<|>0T|v,  send,  conduct. 
irevTaKoorioi,  -ai,  -a,  Jive  hun- 

dred. 

€,  indecl.  ,  five. 
i),  digest. 
C,  prep.,  (1)  w.  gen.,  about, 

concerning;  sometimes  re- 

tains the  meaning  beyond; 

(2)    w.    ace.,    around.      In 

comp.  beyond,  around. 
cpi'yC'yvoixai  (ir€pi+<y€v-,  *Y€VT|-, 

•yov-),    become  superior  to, 

get  the  better  of. 


o^x-,   <TXTJ-),  surround,  en- 
close. 

epiirX^a)  (ir€pi  +  irXv-, 
sail  around. 


344 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


s,  -ov,  6,  Persian. 
s.    -1],    -6v, 

Persian. 

tn\yf\,  -fjs,  T),  spring,  source. 
nc-ypiis,  -TITOS,  6,  Pigres. 
im'to)  (iricS-,  t-cl.,  H.  398;  G. 

584,  585),  irUcro),  4irt€<ra,  liri- 

&r6T|v,  squeeze,  pinch,  press, 

push  hard. 
irtirrw  (TTCT-,  TOO--,  TTTW-),  ir€- 

o-ovjjiai  (H.  426  ;  G.  666),  ihre- 

<rov,  ir£irTa>Ka,  fall,     (irtirra) 

is  for  iriir(c)ra>,  with  irreg. 

lengthening  of  the  redupli- 

cation syllable.) 
IlurtScu,  -wv,  ol,  Pisidians. 
mo~T€va>    (irio~T€v-)  ,   irKTrcvo-o), 

etc.,  [irurrds],  trust. 
irCo-Tis,  -€«s,  TJ,  [ircCOw],  faith, 

trust  ;  token  of  faith,  pledge. 
•jrurT6s,  --fj,  -6v,  [ireCOw],  trusted, 

faithful. 
orXavouo     (irXava-),    irXav^jo-w, 

etc.,     [irXdvTj    wandering]  , 

mislead;  pass.,  wander. 
•rrXcuro-o),  /orm,  mould. 
irX€0pov,  -ov,  r6,  plethron,  = 

100  Greek  feet,  =i  of  a  o-rd- 

Siov. 

irXcto-Tos,  --q,  -ov,  see  iroXvs. 
irX^ov,  see  iroXvs. 
irXcw  (irXv-,  irXev-,  strong-vow. 

cl.,  H.394,a;  G.  574),  irXetf- 

(rojxai, 


improp.  prep.  w.  gen., 


except;  also  as  conj.,  except 

that. 
irX^jptis,    -€S,    [irCji-TrXT^xi,  fill], 

full. 

irXotov,  -ov,  r6,  [irX^w],  boat. 
irvcvjia,  -TOS,  r6,  wind,  breath. 
irvcvjicDv,  -ovos,  6,  lung. 
iroi€0)     (iroi€-),     iroi^o-ca,    etc., 

make,  do  ;  indir.  mid.,  make 

for  one's  self,  consider,  re- 


irotTjT€os,    -a,    -ov,    verbal    of 


,  -ov,  6,  poet. 
iroXe)X€ci>   (iroXcixe- 

etc.,  [ir6X€|xos],  make  war, 

fight. 
iroX^uos,    -d,    -ov,    [iroXcjtos]  , 

hostile  ;  as  subst.,  enemy. 
7ro\€|jios.  -ov,  6,  war. 
iroXiopK€0)      (iroXiopK€-)  ,      iro- 

XiopK'/jcrcD,  etc.,  [iro'Xis,  k'pKos 

fence],  besiege. 
iroXis,  -€<os,  T),  city,  state. 
iroXtTT]s,  -ov,  6,  [iro'Xis]  ,  citizen. 
iroXXaKis,  adv.,  [iroXvs],  many 

times,  often,  again  and  again. 
iroXvs,  iroXX^j,  iroXv,  much,  pi. 

many.      Comp.    irXeCuv    or 

irXc'wv,    neut.    irX^ov  ;     sup. 

irX€l0-TOS,     -TJ,      -OV.       Ol     TTOX- 

XoC,  the  many,  the  mass  of 
men,  most  people;  iroXv,  of- 
ten used  as  an  adv.  (comp. 
irX^ov),  much,  very.  iroXvv 
\po'vov,  a  long  time. 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


345 


iro'vos,  -ov,  6,  [ir^vojxai  work], 
toil,  labor,  work. 

iropeva)  (irop€v-),  irop€vo~a>,  etc., 
[iropos],  make  go,  convey ; 
commonly  pass,  dep.,  pro- 
ceed, march. 

iropos,  -ov,  d,  passage,  (pore 
is  one  application  under  this 
head) ;  means,  resources  (cf . 
our  ways  and  means) . 

iro'ppco,  adv.,  far. 

iroTajjio's,  -ov,  6,  river. 

ITO'TC,  interrog.  adv.,  when? 

ITOT^,  enclitic,  indef.  adv.,  at 
some  time,  ever,  once. 

irov,  adv.,  enclitic,  somewhere, 
anywhere. 

ITOVS,   IToSo's,   O,  fOOt. 

irpd^fAa,  -TOS,  TO',  [irpaTTa>], 
deed,  affair  ;  irpa-yixara  irap- 
t\a>,  make  trouble. 

irpcU-is,  -€«s,  f|,  [irpd-rra)],  ac- 
tion, enterprise. 

irpcurora),  earlier  form  of 
irpd-TTO). 

irpdrTO),  earlier  irpao-o-w  (irpd'y-, 
i-cl.,  H.  397;  G.  580),  irpajw, 
€irpd|a,  ireirpd-ya  or  ir€irpa\a, 
ir^irpd*yp,ai,  tTrpd\Qr\v,  do,  ac- 
complish. 

irp€o-pvT€pos,  -a,  -ov,  comp.  of 
irp€o-pvs,  older,  elder. 

npiap-os.  -ov,  d,  Priam. 

irptv,  conj.,  before. 

irpd,  prep.  w.  gen.,  before. 

(irpo  +  d-yopcv-,  see 


<|>T](x(),      irpoepca,      irpoeiirov, 


pT|6T]v,  speak  before,  proclaim 

publicly. 
TrpoaurOavopai     (irpo  +  atorO-)  , 

perceive  beforehand. 
Trpo|3dXXa>    (irpo  +  paX-,  pXt]-), 

throw  before;  indir.   mid., 

throw  before  one's  self,   irpo- 

paXeVOat  TO,  oirXa,  put  spear 

and  shield  in  position  for 

attack. 
irpoS(Sa>|Ai  (irpo  +  80-),  betray, 

give  up,  be  false  to. 
irpo'eifu  (irpo+l-,  see  ctju),  go 

forward. 

irpoeiirov,  see  irpoa-yopevw. 
77po'0v}JLOs.      -ov,     [irpo',     OVJJLO'S 

spirit,  mind~\,  eager,  zealous. 
irpourn]|u  (irpo  +  o-ra-)  ,  set  or 

station    before;  perf.    act., 

stand  before,  command. 
irpoKO,TaXa|j,pdv<i>  (irpo  +  Kara  + 

Xap-,    X-qp-),    seize    'before- 

hand. 
Hpofcvos,  -ov,  oe,  [irpo',  ^vos], 

Proxenos. 
irpo's,prep.,  (1)  w.  &cc.,towards, 

to,  against,  in  the  presence 

of;  irpos  ravra,  in   regard 

to  this,  sometimes  in  reply  ; 

(2)  w.  gen.,  irpos  TOV  rpo'irov, 
in  accord  with  the  character  ; 

(3)  w.  dat.,  near,  at,  in  addi- 
tion to.    In  comp.,  in  addi- 
tion, further. 


346 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


Trpo<raiT^oD  (irpos  +  alr€-,  see 
O.IT&O) ,  demand  further,  ask 
in  addition. 

•jrpoo-cpxojACU  (irpos  +  €px-,  €\0-, 
4\v0-),  come  or  go  to,  come 
over  to. 

irpdo-Bev,  adv.,  [irpos],  before- 
hand, before,  formerly. 

irpocriroi€O|j,ai  (irpos  +  -iroi€-) , 
take  to  one's  self,  claim,  pre- 
tend. 

•n-poVw,  adv.,  [irpos],  forward. 

irpoTcpos,  -d,  -ov,  [irpo'],  ear- 
lier /  neut.  irpoT€pov  as  adv., 
before. 

7rpo'cj>acris.  -CCDS,  T|,  [irpo<|>a(va> 
show  before'] ,  pretext,  excuse. 

irpwTOs,  -TJ,  -ov,  [irpo],  first. 
irpwrov  jiev,  in  the  first  place, 


iri)p,  irvpo's,  TO',  fire. 
•jrvpo's,  -ov,  d,  wheat. 
irco,  adv.,  enclitic,  hitherto,  yet, 

after  a  neg. 
ircoXco)  (irwXe-),  ircoX^o-o),  etc., 

sell. 

P. 

pco>  (pv-,  p€v-,  pvt]-,  strong-vow, 
cl.,  H.  394,  a;  G.  574),  fcv- 
crojiai,  €ppvt]Ka,  4ppvt]V  (as 
act.),  ^010. 

pTJrcop,  -opos,  o',  orator. 

pts,  plvo's,  -f),  nose. 

po'Sov,  -ov,  TO',  rose. 


2. 

ordXiriyg,  -tvyos,  TJ,  trumpet. 

o-aXirC^w  (o-aXiri-yy-,  i-cl.,  H. 
398,6;  G.  584,  588),  €o-dX- 
irt-yla,  [o-dXiri-yJ]  ,  sound  the 
trumpet. 

Sap6eis,   -€(ov,  al,    Sardeis  or 


o-dp^,  -KO'S,  TJ,  flesh. 
o-aTpdirrjs,  -ov,  oc,  satrap,  Per- 

sian governor  of  a  prov- 
ince. 

2dTvpos,  -ov,  o',  satyr.  The 
satyrs  were  supposed  to 
have  flat  noses,  pointed  ears, 
and  tails  of  horses,  and  to 
be  very  fond  of  wine. 

cnf]o~a|xov,  -ov,  TO',  sesame,  a 
kind  of  grain. 

o-iyfj,  -f]s,  T),  silence. 

cr  twTrdco     (crieoTra-)  ,    a 


silence'],  be  silent. 
o-K€irT€os,    -d,    -ov,    verbal    of 


(O-KCIT-,  T-C!.,  H. 
395;  G.  576),  o-K^ofiat, 
eo-K€\|/dfXT|v,  €o-K€jj.fjiai,  view, 
examine,  consider.  In  the 
pres.,  Attic  generally  uses 


(o-K€va8-,     i-cl.,     H. 
398;     G.    584,    585,     587), 
,  earK€vao-a,  eo-Kcva- 
[o-K€vos]  ,  prepare. 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


347 


crK€vos,  -ovs,  TO,  utensil,  espe- 
cially in  pi.  military  equip- 
ments, baggage. 

<TK€VO(f>o'pOS,     -OV,     [o-KCVOS,     4>O- 

pos  bearing,  fr.  <f>€pw],  bag- 
gage-carrying ;  rd  O-KCVO- 
4>o'pa,  baggage-train. 

o-KTjv-fj,  -ijs,  TJ,  tewZ,  made  of 
hides. 

o-K-nirrpov,  -ov,  TO',  staff,  scep- 
tre. 

o-Koiro's,  -ov,  6,  watcher,  look- 
out. 

So'Xoi,  -«v,  ol,  Soli. 

2o<t>aiv€Tos,-ov,  6,Sophainetos. 

o~o<|>id,  -as,  TJ,  [o-o<|>o's] ,  wisdom, 
skill  (as  in  music). 

a-o<t>£$o(iai,  be  clever  or  wise. 

o-o<j>o's,  -^j,  -o'v,  wise. 

o"ir€v8«  (o-ircvS-),  O"ir€vo-a>, 
€o-ir€vo-a,  hasten. 

0-Ttt0}JLo's,  -OV,  O,   [i'o-T1]JJLl],  StOp- 

ping-place,  station;  day's 
journey. 

O-TC'XXO)    (0"T6\-,   O-TdX-,  l-Cl.,   H. 

399;  G.  593),  o-TcXw,  €o-T€i\a, 
-€O-TaXKa,  ca-TaX^xai,  €CTTCI- 
\t\v,  send,  (originally  equip). 

o-T€p€o's,  -d,  -o'v,  firm,  solid. 

OTTIXOS,  -ov,  o',  line  (as  of  writ- 
ing). 

o-TX€yy£s,-C8os,TJ,/esft-  scraper, 
Lat.  strigilis. 

o-ToXVj,  -fjs,  T],  [o-T€XX«],  robe. 

o-T6Xos,  -ov,  6,  [o-T€'XX<o] ,  equip- 
ment, expedition. 


arpaT€Vfia,    -aTOs,    TO,    [orrpa- 

T€VW],  army. 
o-TpaTCvw     (o-TpaT€v-)  ,     o-Tpa- 

T€vo-a>,     €o-TpaT€vo-a,    lorrpa- 
€o-TpaT€V)jiai,    [o-Tpa- 
,  take  the  field,  serve  as 

a  soldier,  make  an  expedi- 

tion ;  often  dep. 
o-TpaTT]-y&o  (o-TpaTTj-ye-)  ,  o-Tpa- 

TTI^O-W,   etc.,    [o-TpaTT^^ds], 

act  as  general,  command. 
o-Tparq-yid,    -as,    TJ,     [o-TpaTT]- 

•yds],  office  or  act  of  a  gen- 

eral, command. 
crTpaTTj'yds,   -ov,   6,    [o-TpaT6s, 

a-yw],  general. 
o-TpaTtd,  -as,  rj,  [cf.  o-TpaT6s], 

army. 
o-TpaTtwTT]s,  -ov,  6,  [o-TpaTid], 

soldier. 


etc.,  [o-TpaToireSov]  ,  encamp. 
o-TpaToircSov,    -ov,   TO,    [o"Tpa- 
TOS,  irc'Sov  ground],  camp. 
,  -ov,  6,  army. 

,         -OV,        6,         [<TTpe'4>W 

twist],  collar  of  twisted  or 
linked  metal.     Lat.  torques. 

ZTU|A<J>CiLXlOS.    -d,    -OV, 

Xos],  Stymphalian. 
o-v,  o-ov,  thou,  you. 
o-vyyC-yvojxat  (o-vv  +  ^v-, 

•yov-)  ,     become     acquainted 

with,  associate  with;  have 

intercourse  with. 


348 


QUEER-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


HWvvccns,  -ios,  6, 

crvXXafxpavco  (<rvv  +  Xap-, 

),  arrest. 
y  a)     (<rvv  +  X€-y-,     Xox-)  ? 


Xo\a, 

•yt]v,  gather,  collect,  levy. 

s,    ij,    [crvXX£y«], 
?/,  gathering  of  troops. 

(crvv  +  paX-,   pXrj-), 
together;   subjective 
mid.,  contribute. 

vto  (<rvv  +  povXev-), 
oiY/i,  advise;  indir. 
mid.,  pZa/i  toftft  another  for 
one's  self,  ask  advice,  con- 
sult with. 

s,  -ov,  6,   [<rvv,  jia\o- 
],  ally. 

s,    --n-cura,    -irav,     [<rvv, 
was],  all  together. 

(<rvv  + 
)  ,  send  with. 
s,    -cov,     [<rvv, 
full~\,  quite  full. 
v)JLiroXe|JL4a>       (<rvv  + 
make  war  with. 
v|ATropex>o}jLcu      (<rvv  + 
proceed  or  march  with. 
vnirpaTTO)    (<rvv  +  irpaY-)  ,    c?o 
or  accomplish  with,  aid  in 


o-vv,  prep.  w.  dat.,  with,  with 
the  help  of.  In  comp.,  with. 

crvvayw  (<rvv  +  d-y-),  bring  to- 
gether, convene. 


orvvaXXaTTw  (<rvv  +  dXXa-y-), 
reconcile  ;  pass.,  become  rec- 
onciled with. 

(rvvavapaCvo)  (<rvv  +  dva  +  Pav-. 
pa-),  go  up  with. 

o-vvcTTOfxai  (<rvv  +  <r(€)ir-,  cir-), 
accompany,  follow. 

<rvv€p-y6s,  -ov,  6,  [<rvv,  cp-yov], 
fellow-worker,  helper. 

<rvv0€o-is,  -€ws,  T]C,  a  putting  to- 
gether, composition. 

<rvvoiSa,  [crvv,  olSa],  know 
with,  be  conscious  of. 

<rvvTa,TTCD  (<rvv  +  ra-y-),  ar- 
range together,  array,  draw 
up.  . 

<rvvTt0Tjiu,  put  together. 

2vpaKoo-ios,  -a,  -ov,  [2vpdtKOv- 
o-at  Syracuse'],  Syracusan. 

O*V(rK€Va^<i>          (o-VV  +  O-K6VO.8-), 

put  baggage  together,  pack 
up. 

crvo-TpaT€vojxai       (o-vv  +  o-rpa- 
T€V-),   make  an   expedition 
with,  join  an  expedition. 
<rvo-TpaTi<oTT)s,    -ov,     6,     [crvv, 
o-TpaTicoTTjs],  fellow-soldier. 
o-<j>aipa,  -as,  rj,  ball,  sphere. 
>,  split. 

Jw,  have  leisure. 
j,  -fjs,  TJ,  leisure,  school. 
2a>KpaTT)s,  -ovs,  6,   [o-ws  safe, 
Kparos],    Sokrates    or    So- 
crates. 

a-cojia.  -aros,  r6,  body. 
s,  -ios,  6, 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


349 


T. 

s,  -«,  o,  Tamos. 
rajts,    -€«s,    ij,    [T<£TT«],   ar- 

rangement,  order;  division, 

company. 
Tapo-oi,    -a>v,    ot,    Tarsoi    or 


TCUTO-O),  older  form  of  TCITTW. 
TCLTTW  (ra-y-,  i-cl.,  H.  398;  G. 

588),   TO£O>,   €Ta£a,    T€Ta\a, 

T^Ta-yjicu,  4T<£xOt]v,  arrange. 
rctyos,  -ov,  6,  grave,  tomb. 
Tax&>s,  adv.,  [TO.XVS],  quickly. 

Comp.  0&TTOV,  sup.  Tax«-0"Ta. 

-TJ,  -ov,  see  TO-X^S. 
S,    rax€ia,    raxv,    swift, 

quick,  speedy.     Comp.  6dr- 

TWV,   SUp.  TaXKTTOS. 

T«,  postpos.  enclitic  conj.,  and  ; 
rt  .  .  .  ri  or  T^  .  .  .  KaC,  both 
.  .  .  and. 


<ra>,  etc.,  [T€\€VT^],  end;  die. 
TeXcvTfj,   -fjs,  tj,   [r^Xos  end~], 
end;  death. 

T6JJLVO),   CUt. 

T€Tpaias,  [r^TTap€s],/owr  times. 
T€TpaKt<rxtXioi,    -at,    -a,   four 
thousand. 

s,  r^rrapa,  four. 
I,  -T]S,  TJ,  art,  skill. 
TT|\€,  at  a  distance,  afar. 
TCe^i   (0€-,  root  cl.,  H.  404; 
G.  619),  0^<rw,  ^Ka,  r&i\- 
Ka  or  T€0€iKa,  rc'Ocipai,  tri- 


0-qv,  put,  place;   vdjxovs  rC- 
0t]|ii,  /ay  ^O^TI  or  make  laws. 

(rljia-),    Tijjtfjo-a),    etc., 

],  honor. 


rtjitos,  -a,  -ov,  [Ti|i-#i],  precious, 
honored,  honorable. 


etc.,  [rtjxwpos  avenger],  be 
an  avenger,  avenge;  mid., 
take  vengeance  on,  punish. 

rCs,  T(,  interrog.  pron.,  who  f 
what  ?  T£  is  often  used  as 
adv.,  why  ? 

rls,  rl,  indef.  pron.,  anyone  or 
-thing,  a  certain  onet  some- 
body or  -thing. 

Tio-o-a<|>€pvT]s,  -ovs,  6,  Tissa- 
phernes. 

roioV$€,  roidSc,  roio'v8€,  indef. 
dem.  pron.,  such,  differing 
from  TOIOVTOS  as  o8c  from 
OVTOS  ;  roioiSc  as  follows. 

TOIOVTOS,    TOiaVTT],    TOlOVTo(v), 

indef.  dem.  pron.,  such; 
differs  from  ToioVSc  as  OVTOS 
from  88€. 


etc.,  [To'Xjia  boldness'],  dare. 
Tofo'TT|s,   -ov,   6,   [TO'JOV  6010], 

archer,  bowman. 
TO'TTOS,  -ov,  6,  place. 
TOO-OVTOS,  Tocravrq,  TOO-OV- 

TO(V),  indef.  dem.  pron.,  so 

great,  so  much,  pi.,  so  many. 


350 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


TO'TC,  adv.,  at  that  time,  then. 
s,  TpCa,  three. 

(Tp€7r-,   Tpo<|>-,   Tpair-), 

J'W.     €Tp€\|/d, 


rp€<|>-,  Tpa<J>-),  0p€v}/co 
(H.  74,  c;  G.  95  and  5), 
€0p€v|/a,  T€0pafj.p.cu.  4rpd<|>T)v, 
nourish,  support. 

TpiaKovra,  indecl.,  thirty. 

TpiaKo'crioi,  -ai,  -a,  three  hun- 
dred. 

Tpi^jprjs,  -ovs,  -€i,  -tj;  du.  -tj, 
-otv  ;  pi.  -€is,  -wv,  -€<rt,  -€is, 
[rp€is,  root  4p-  roi^],  tri- 
reme, ship  of  war  with  three 
banks  of  oars. 

Tpoiros,  -ov,  6,  [TP£JTG>],  turnt 
way,  manner  ;  character. 
^,   -fjs,  ij, 
e,  support. 
(TVX-, 

nas.  cl.,  H.  402,  c;  G.  603, 
605  and  6)  ,  T€V£O(I<U,  Irvxov, 
rervx^Ka,  T€T€vxa,  happen, 
chance. 

TVTTOS,  -ov,  6,  type. 

TvirT<i>,  strike. 

Tvpavvcvw  (rvpavvcv-),  rvpav- 
v€vcra>,  etc.,  [rvpavvos],  ac^ 
«s  tyrant,  tyrannize. 

rvpavvos,  -ov,  ol,  absolute 
ruler,  tyrant. 

Tvpiociov,  -ov,  TO,  Tyria- 
eion. 


Y. 

-as,  T|,  health. 
,   vSaros,   TO',  water.     H. 

182,  a  ;  G.  291,  34. 
vfuts,   see  o*v. 
virapxos,   -ov,  o,    [viro,   apxos 

ruler,  fr.  apxw],  lieutenant, 

subordinate  commander. 
virapx«    (viro  +  dpx-),    begin; 

exist;  virapx^v  TivC,  be  on 

one's  side,  favor,  support. 
vir^p,  prep.,  (1)  w.  gen.,  over, 

above,  in  behalf  of;  (2)  w. 

ace.,  beyond. 
v-rreppaXXw,  outdo,  excel. 
vircppoXV),  --qs,  f|,  [vircppaXXw]  , 

excess,    extravagance  ;    also 

passage  over  mountains. 

(viro  +  <T(€)X-, 
.  cl.,    H.  402,  d\ 

G.607,Urx-for(o-)ur(f)x-)» 


i,    promise    (hold 
one's  self  under). 

viro,  prep.,  (1)  w.  gen.,  under; 
denoting  the  agent  with 
pass,  verbs,  by  ;  (2)  w.  dat., 
under,  at  the  foot  of.  In 
comp.,  under,  somewhat. 

viro^v-yiov,  -ov,  TO',  [VITO,  £v- 
•yov],  draught  animal,  beast 
of  burden. 

viroKptvofxai,  answer;  play  a 
part  on  the  stage. 

,  -ov,  6,  actor. 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


351 


(viro  +  Xa(3-. 
),  take  under  one^s  pro- 

tection. 
viroXct'ira)     (viro  +  Xtir-,     Xctir-, 

XOITT-),  leave  behind. 
viroirrevco  (viro  +  oinrcv-),  viro-Tr- 

T6v<ra>,       v-irwirrevo-a,       etc., 

[viro'irrr]s  suspicious],   sus- 

pect, apprehend. 
viro\|/£d,  -as,  T),  [viro,  root  6ir-], 

suspicion. 
•6<rT€patos,   -a,   -ov,    [v<TT€pos], 

belonging  to  the  next  day  ; 

TQ  vo-T€paia  (fijic'pq;),  on  the 

next  day. 
vcrrepos,  -a,  -ov,  late  /  vorepov, 

adv.,  afterwards. 
v^/TjXos,    -rfj,    -ov,     [cf.    v\|ros 

height],  high,  lofty. 


(^a-yeiv,  inf.,  to  eat. 

<(>a£va>  (<|)av-,  i-cl.,  H.  400  ;  G. 

594),  4>ava>,  €<|>T|va, 

(H.  55,  6;  G.  78), 

7r€'4>aor^ai,  4<j>av0T]v    or 

vi]v,  show,  cause  to  appear  / 

dir.  mid.  (and  pass.)  with 

the  2d  perf.,  appear. 
<|>aXa-yg,  -a-y-yos,  TJ,  battle-line, 

army  in  battle  order,  Lat. 

acies. 
<|>av€po's,     -a,     -o'v,      [<j>a£vw], 

plain,   evident;   4v  TW   <j>a- 

v€p«p,  in  public. 


4>ap|j.aKov,  -ov,  TO',  drug. 

<(>€>«    (<)>€p-,  ol-,   4v€K-, 

Ivc-yK-),  oi'cra),  T]V€<yKa  (H. 
438),  TJvc-yicov,  cvifvoxa, 
€VT)V€-y}xai,  "nvexOilv,  bear, 
carry. 

(J^v-yw  (<|>vy-,  <|>€vy-,  strong- 
vow,  cl.,  H.  394;  G.  572), 
4>€v^ofiau  e(|>vyov,  tr€<|>€vya, 
flee  ;  go  into  exile,  be  in  ex- 
ile. 

<|>T]|iC  (<|>a-,  root  cl.,  H.  404  ;  G. 
619),  <j>T|crw  or  6pw.  c(|>T]o-a  or 
ctirov,  €l'pT)Ka.  6\IpT]|Aai,  Ipp^j- 
0t]v,  sa?/,  declare,  speak.  0(1 
<j>Tl|it,  say  •  •  •  n°ti  refuse, 
deny.  The  root  of  €pw  was 
originally  F€p- ;  €tpT]Ka  is  for 
F€Fpt]Ka  (Fpil-)^  €^pr)|jiat  for 
FtFpT][j.cu.  eppTjO-qv  for  cFpi]- 
6t]v.  The  root  of  ctirov  was 
originally  petr-  ;  synopsis 

€Lirca.      €IUOL}1L.      €llT€,      cllTClV, 

clircov.  In  compounds  the 
pres.  syst.  is  usually  supplied 
by  d'yopcvo). 

<(>0av<o  (4>8a-,  nas.  cl.,  H0  402, 
a  ;  G.  603),  ^Grfo-ojiai,  «|>8a- 
o-a  or  €<)>0T)v,  e<)>6aKa,  get  the 
start  of,  anticipate. 

(jnXc'a)  (4>iX€-),  4>tXT](rw,  etc., 
[<(>£Xos],  love. 

<|>iX£d,  -as,  T|,  [<|)CXos],  friend- 
ship. 

<|>£Xu>s,  -a,  -ov,  [<J>fXos], 
friendly. 


352 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


4>(Xos,  -TJ,  -ov,  friendly,  dear. 
As  subst.,  friend. 

<jnXo'<ro<|>os,  -ov,  d,  [<|>CXos,  <ro- 
<|>o's] ,  lover  of  wisdom,  phi- 
losopher. 

4>XvdpC6L,  -ds,  TJ,  nonsense,  folly. 

<f>op€w  (4>ope-),  4>opTJcrco,  etc., 
[<(>6pos],  frighten;  pass.,  to 
be  afraid,  fear. 

4>6pos,  -ov,  o',  fear. 

4>OlVLKLOrTTJS,    -OV,    O,    [<j>OtVlKl£w 

fr.  <j>oivi|],  purple-wearer; 
<|>.  Pao-(\€ios,  wearer  of  the 
royal  purple,  a  nobleman 
allowed  by  the  king  to  wear 
the  royal  color. 
(JXHVIKOVS,  -fj,  -ovv,  contracted 

fr.    <|>OlvtK€OS,     -61,     -OV,     [<j>OL- 

vij  purple-red  dye~\,  purple- 
red,  red. 

<|>pa£tt,  make  known,  tell. 

4>povpapxos,  -ov,  o,  [(jjpovpd 
garrison,  apx«] ,  comman- 
der of  a  garrison,  comman- 
dant. 

$pvy£d,  -ds,  fj,  Phrygia. 

^>pvf,  <£pvyo's,  oc,  Phrygian. 

<j>vycxs,  -oSos,  oc,  [4>€v-Y<«>],  ban- 
ished man,  exile. 

<|>vXaKT]',  -f]s,  TI,  [<j>vXaTTw],  the 
act  of  guarding  /  garrison, 
guard. 

4>vXa|,  -aKos,  oe,  guard. 

<J>vXciTT<i)  (<)>vXaK-,  i-cl.,  H.  397  ; 
G.  580),  <|>vXa£<o,  «<|>v'Xa|a, 


axri  v,     [^v'Xag] ,     guard ; 

dir.  mid.,  guard  one's  self 

against. 

4>vVis,  -€ws,  TJ,  nature. 
<|)vToV,  -ov,  TO',  plant. 
<|>ijci),  make  grow. 
4>covT),  -f|s,  TJ,  sound,  voice. 
<j>a>s,  <|)WTO'S,  TO',  light. 


,  -TJ,  -o'v,  difficult,  hard  ; 

of    persons,    harsh,    bitter, 

dangerous. 
XaXcirws,      adv.,      [xaXciro's] , 

with  difficulty,  hardly ;  \o,- 

Xcirws  <|>€pw»  bear  hardly,  be 

sorrowful. 
XaXKovs,   -fj,  -ovv,  contracted 

from  XO^XKCOS,  -d,  -ov,  [xa^- 

KO'S     bronze],     brazen,     of 

bronze. 

XapaKTTjp,  -fjpos,  of,  mark. 
Xapcuro-o),  scratch. 
X€ip,    -o's,   Tj,   (but   Du.  G.  D. 

X«potv,  PI.  dat.  x€po*C),  hand. 

XcppOVTJO-OS,      -OV,     TJ,      [X^PPOS, 

earlier  x^po"°s  ^y  land,  vfj- 
o-os  island],  peninsula,  es- 
pecially the  Thracian  Cher- 
sonesos. 

xtXtot,  -at,  -a,  a  thousand. 
pa,  -as,  TJ,  she-goat. 
,  -wvos,  o,  garment  worn 
next  the  skin,  tunic. 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


353 


Xpoo|A<u 


v,  use,  enjoy  (primarily 
serve  one's  self,  hence  taking 
the  dat.  of  means).  In  the 
pres.  syst.  a-€  contracts  to  tj, 
H.  412  ;  G.  496. 
prj,  impers.  verb,  Lat.  oportet, 
one  ought,  must,  it  is  neces- 


XPrit«   (XPflS-,   i-cl.,   H.   398; 
G.  584,  585),  want,  desire. 

XP%a»  -TOS,  T0'>  [XP^F""]*  in 

the  pi.  property,  money. 
Xpo'vos,  -ov,  o,  time. 
Xpvo-Cov,    -ov,     TO,     [xpvo-os], 

gold  coin,  money. 
Xpvo-ovs,    -fj,    -ovv,    contr.  fr. 

XpvVeos,   -a,  -ov,   [xpva-os], 

golden. 

Xpvo-o's,  -ov,  of,  gold. 
Xpvo-oxaXivos,     -ov,    [xpv<ro's, 

XaXivds  bridle],  with  gold- 

mounted  bridle. 
Xpa>|ia,  -TOS,  TO',  color. 
X»pa,  -as,  T|,  land. 

X«P11»'»»  etc-> 
place],  make  place, 
withdraw,  go. 

X»p£ov  -ov,  T6,  [x«pos  place], 
place,  stronghold. 


t|/&iov,  -ov,  TO',  bracelet,  arm- 
let. 


\|/€vSos,  -€os,  TO',  falsehood. 

\|f€v'Sa>  (t|/6v8-),  xj/evVw,  €\|/€vo-a. 
€\|/€vo-fxat,  €\|/€vV6T]v,  deceive 
by  falsehood,  prove  false  to ; 
often  dep. 
TJ,  --qs,  TJ, 


n. 

wSe,  adv.,  [88c],  thus,  as  fol- 
lows. 

<p8t|,  -fjs,  T|,  sow^,  ode. 
wv,   ovo-a,    6v,   pres.   pple.  of 

€1(XC. 

oivios,  -a,  -ov,  [wvos  price] ,  for 
sale.  Td  wvia,  wares,  goods 
for  sale. 

«pd,  -as,  T|,  season,  time. 

u>s,  proclitic,  originally  a  rel. 
adv.  of  manner,  [8s],  in 
which  way,  as,  how;  then 
a  conj.  with  many  derived 
meanings.  (1)  Comparative, 
as,  how;  special  uses  are, 
(a)  to  strengthen  a  super!., 
o>s  Taxio-Ta,  as  quickly  as 
possible  ;  (&)  to  denote  that 
a  participle  states  the  idea 
of  some  one  else  than  the 
writer,  where  we  use  various 
phrases,  as  saying  that,  pre- 
tending that,  supposing  that, 
as  he  claimed,  etc.  (2)  Tem- 
poral =  8T€,  as,  when.  (3) 
Causal  =  cireiS-if,  as,  since. 


354 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


(4)  Declarative  =  8™,  how, 
that.  (5)  Final  =  i'va,  in 
order  that.  (6)  Prep.  w.  ace. 
of  a  word  referring  to  a  per- 
son =  irapd,  to. 
wo-ir€p,  rel.  adv.  of  manner, 


strengthened  from  «s,  just 
as. 

WO-T€,  conj.,  [o>s,  T£],  so  as,  so 
that. 

(U(f>eXeCi)         (0)4>€\€-),         0)4>€\T]0-CO. 

etc.,  [^><|>€Xos],  benefit,  help. 


ENGLISH-GREEK   VOCABULARY. 


A. 

Able,  am 
About,  7rf.pi  w.  gen. 
Accomplish,  opda>. 
According  to,  Kara  w.  ace. 
Account,  Aoyos,  -ov,  6. 
Acropolis,  aKpoVoAts,  -eo>s,  17. 
Act  like  a  tyrant,  Tvpai/vcvw. 

Actor,  VTTOKplTyS,  -OV,  6. 

Adorn,  Kooy/,€(o. 

Advise,  o-v//,/2ovAeva). 

Afar,  TiJAe. 

Affair,  7rpay//.a,  -ros,  TO. 

Affirm,  <£r7/xi. 

After,   prep.,   /xcra  w.  ace. ; 

COnj.,   eVei. 

Again,  TroAiv. 

Against,  cm  or  Trpos  w.  ace. 

Agree,  6//,oAoyea>. 

Air,  a?/p,  a  epos,  6. 

All,  ?ras,  Trao'a,  Trav. 

Alone,  /xoVos,  -7y,  -ov. 

Already,  ^8?;. 

Also,  /cat. 

Ambassador,  aTrooroAos,  -ov, 

6. 

Analysis,  dVoAvo'is,  -ews,  ^. 
Analyze, 


Ancient,  dpxa'°?)  •«,  -ov. 

And,  /cat. 

Angle,  ytovta,  -as,  17. 

Animal,  f<oov,  -ov,  TO. 

Announce,  dyyeAAco. 

Answer,  aTTOKptvo/xat. 

Antagonist, 

<•«      c 

-ov,  o. 

Any  one,  Tts,  Tt. 
Apollo,  ATroAAan/,  -os,  6. 
Appear, 
Appoint, 


Are,  they  -  ,  cto-t(v). 
Around,  Trept  w.  ace. 
Arrange,  Touro-a). 
Arrangement,  Ta^ts,  -ews,  ^. 
Art,  Ttxvrj,  ^  %- 
Artaxerxes,  'ApTa^epf^s,  -ov, 

c 
O. 

As,  ojs. 

Asia,  'Aat'a,  -as,  17. 

Ask,  atT€(o,  epcoTaa). 

As  much  as  we  could,  lit.  as 

we  most  could. 
Assembly,  dyopa,  -as,  17. 
At,  cv. 

At  a  distance,  T^Ac. 
Athenians,  'A^vaiot,  -a)v,  ot. 
355 


356 


ENGLISH-GREEK  VOCABULARY. 


Athlete,  aOXrjTys,  -ov,  6. 
Athletic  game,  a#Xos,  -ov,  6. 
Attempt,  noun,  Treipa,  -as,  77  ; 

verb,  Tretpaofuu. 
At  the  side  of,  Trapa  w.  dat. 
Aware,  become  -  ,  ytyvco- 


Away  from,  dbrd  w.  gen. 


B. 

Back,  TroXiv. 

Bad,  KaKos,  -77,  -dv. 

Ball,  o~<£atpa,  -as,  77. 

Barbarian,  fidpflapos,  -ov,  6. 

Bare,  yv//,vos,  -77,  -ov. 

Battle,  /Aax77,  -77$,  rj- 

Be  about  (to),  /xeXXto. 

Bear,  <£epeo. 

Beautiful,  KoXos,  -97,  -ov. 

Beauty,  KoXXos,  -eos,  TO. 

Because,  on;  8ta  w.  article 
and  inf.  in  the  ace. 

Become,  yiyvofuu. 

Before,  irpo  w.  gen. 

Begin,  apx<*>-  Often  ex- 
pressed by  the  inceptive 
aor. 

Beginning,  apxfj,  -fc,  ^- 

Beside,  Trapa  w.  dat. 

Best,  aptoros,  -77,  -ov; 
O~TOS,  -77,  -ov. 

Better,  /^eXrfwv, 

Beyond,  iro-cp  w.  ace. 

Bird,  opvls,  -0os,  6  or  77. 

Birth,  yeveo-ts,  -eo>s,  */. 

Blame,  atrtao/xoi. 


,  -ov, 


Book,  yStjSXt'ov,  -ov,  TO. 
Bookseller,  ySt^XtoTrwX 

c 
O. 

Born,  be  -  ,  ycyvopxu. 

Boy,  Trats,  TratSos,  6. 

Break,   KXao>  ;    break  down, 


Breath,  Trvev/xa,  -TOS,  TO. 
Brother,  d8eA</>os,  -ov,  6. 
Burn,  /caw. 

Burning,  Kavo-TtKOs,  ->;,  -o'v. 
But,  dAAa,  8e. 

By,  denoting  agency,  VTTO  w. 
gen. 

C. 

Can, 
Carry, 
Carve, 

Cause  to  revolt,  d 
Cause  to  stop,  Travco. 
Caustic,  Kavo~TtKos,  -77,  -ov. 
Certain,  a  -  ,  TIS,  Tt. 
Character,  ?^0os,  -eos,  TO. 
Child,  Trats,  TraiSos,  6  or  77. 
Choose,  mid.  of  atpe'co. 
Circle,  KVAcXos,  -ov,  6. 
Citadel,  d/cpoVoXts,  -eos,  77. 
Citizen,  7roXtTr7S,  -ov,  6. 
City,  TroXts,  -ccos,  77. 
Color,  xpco/xa,  -TOS,  TO. 
Common,  KOIVOS,  -77,  -ov. 
Compare,  Trapa^oXXo). 
Comparison,  Trapa/BoXy,  -775,  77. 
Composition,   o-vv0eo-is,  -ccos, 

^ 

Conceal, 


ENGLISH-GREEK  VOCABULARY. 


357 


Concerning,  Trepi  w.  gen. 
Conquer,  viKaa>. 
Consult,  mid.  of  o-v//,/?ovAevo>. 
Contest,  dyoiv,  dytovos,  6. 
Converse,  StoAeyo/Aat. 
Corner,  ytovtd,  -as,  y. 
Counsel,  take  counsel  with, 

mid.  of  o-v/A/SovAevw. 
Count,  dpi0/Aeo>. 

Cut,  T€jUVa>. 

Cyrus,  Kvpos,  -ov,  6. 
D. 


Dare, 

Dead,  ve/cpds,  -a,  -ov. 
Decad,  Se/<as,  -8os>  17. 
Declare,  <£r;/u. 
Deed,  Spdfux,  -ros,  TO. 
Defeat,  vZ/cdo),  Kparcw. 
Deliberate,  mid.  of  /SovAevco. 
Delphi,  AeA<£ot,  -tov,  ot. 
Depose,  Travw  r^s  dpx^5. 
Description,  Xdyos,  -ov,  6. 
Destroy,  KaraXvw. 
Digest,  7T€7rra). 
Discourse,  A.oyos,  -ov,  6. 
Distance,  at  a  -  ,  TTJ\€. 
Distribute,  ve/^o). 
Divide,  8tatpea>. 
Divinity,  Sat/xwv,  -ovos,  6. 
Do,  Trotea),  Spaa). 
Do  good  to,  cv  Trotea)  w.  ace. 
Drama,  8pajw,a,  -ros,  TO. 
Drug,  <£dpjnaKov,  -ov,  TO. 
Dwell  in,  otKeo). 
Dynast,  Svvdo-T^s,  -ov,  6. 


E. 

Earth,  y^,  y^s,  17. 

Eat,  to  -  ,  inf.,  <£ayetv. 

Educate,  TratSevto. 

Elder,  7rpeo-/3vrepos,  -a,  -ov. 

Empty,  KCVOS,  -rj,  -ov. 

Enemy,  7roXep,tos,  -ov,  6. 

Enough,    t/cavds,   -77,   -ov;    to 

avoid    ambiguity    apiOpov 

may  be  added. 
Enslave,  SovAdo). 
Envoy,  aTrocrroAos,  -ov,  6. 
Epistle,  eTrto-ToATy,  -T)S,  ^. 
Equal,  to-os,  -ry,  -ov. 
Establish,  KaOca-TrjfJU.. 
Even,   adj.,    6/xaAds,  -17,   ov; 

adv.,  /cat. 

Ever,  7TOT6  enclitic. 
Everything    =    all      things, 


Evident,  c^avepds,  -a,  -ov. 
Examine,  o-KeVTo/xat. 
Excel,  VTrep/3dAAo). 
Excess,  vTrepjSoAr/,  -^5,  17. 
Exercise,  yv/wi£<o. 
Expedition,   make   an  -  , 

orpaTevo),  usually  mid. 
Extravagance,  vT 


F. 

Faithful,  TTICTTOS,  -17,  -ov. 
Falsehood,  i/^vSos,  -eos,  TO. 
Family,  yevea,  -as,  17. 
Far,  T^Ae. 
Fear,  ^o/Sos,  -ov,  6. 


358 


ENGLISH-GREEK  VOCABULARY. 


Feeling,  Traces,  -eos,  TO. 
Few,  oXtyot,  -at,  -a. 
Figure,  ctSos,  -eos,  TO. 
Fire,  Trvp,  Trvpds,  TO. 
Firm,  o~Tepeds,  -a,  -ov. 
First,  7rpu>Tos,  -77,  -ov. 

Fitting,  think ,  dfioto. 

Flesh,  o-dp£,  o-apKos,  17. 
Flower,  dv#os,  -eos,  TO. 

Foot,  7TOVS,  TToSds,  6. 

For,  conj.,  yap. 

For   many  months,   ace.   of 

extent. 

Force,  Svva^is,  -ea>s,  17. 
Form,  noun,  pop<j>y,  -77$,  17; 

verb,  7rXao"o~a). 
Free,  eXev0epos,  -a,  -ov. 
Friend,  <£i'Xos,  -ov,  6. 
From,  aTTO  w.  gen.,  or  ef  w. 

gen. 

G. 

Game,  a0Xos,  -ov,  6. 
Genuine,  ITV/AOS,  -77,  -ov. 
Get    into,    sometimes    KaOi- 

O-TrjfU  €15. 

Get  to  revolt, 
Give,  oY8a>/Ai. 
Go,  Ip^o/xat,  et/xt. 
God,  0eos,  -ov,  6. 
Gold,  xp^o"05>  -<™>  o. 
Good,  dya^o?,  -^,  -ov. 
Good  health,  vytcta,  -a?,  T). 
Government,  dp^,  ->7S,  17. 
Grasp,  atpcco. 
Grass,  flordvrj,  -775,  T). 
Grave,  Ta<^os,  -ov,  6. 


Greek,  "EXX^v,  -os,  6. 

Grow,  make ,  <£vo>. 

Guardian,  CTmrKOTros,  -ov,  6. 
Guide,  dywyos,  -ov,  6. 
Gymnasium,   yv/xvdo-tov,  -ov, 
TO. 

H. 

Hand,  x^tp,  -os,  >;. 
Hatred,  /x,to;os,  TO. 

Have,  l^^j  c^/xt/  w<  ^a^'  °^ 
possessor. 

Have  leisure,  o-xoXd£a>. 

He,  she,  it,  as  subj.,  not  ex- 
pressed unless  emphatic ; 
when  emphatic,  OVTOS,  €Ket- 
vos.  But  he,  6  8c.  His, 
her,  its,  their,  often  ex- 
pressed by  the  article  only, 
sometimes  by  the  gen.  of 
avTOs.  Him,  her,  it,  them, 
as  obj.,  ace.  of  avTos. 

Head,  Ke^aXry,  -775,  7). 

Health,  vyteta,  -as,  7;. 

Hear,  d/<ovo). 

Heat,  OepjjLov,  -ov,  TO. 

Help,  fioYJOeta,  -as,  77. 

Helper,  orvvepyds,  -ov,  6. 

Her,  poss.,  translated  by  the 
article. 

Herb,  Pordvr),  -779,  77. 

Hide,  Sep/xa,  -TOS,  TO. 

Himself,  herself,  etc.,  avro?, 
-77,  -d;  when  reflexive,  cav- 
TOV,  -^s,  -ov. 

Hippopotamus,  t7T7ro7r6Va//,os, 
-ov,  6. 


ENGLISH-GREEK  VOCABULARY. 


359 


His,  see  He. 
History,  toroptd,  -as,  17. 
Honor,  Tt//,aa>. 
Honorable,  /coAos,  -17,  -ov. 
Horn,  /cepas,  /ceparo>,  TO. 
Horse,  TTTTTOS,  -ov,  6. 
House,  OIKOS,  -ov,  6. 
House    of   the   muses, 
crciov,  -ov,  TO. 


I. 

I,  eyw,  e//,ov  or  p&v. 

Ice,  KpvoTaAA,os,  -ov,  6. 

If,  el,  lav. 

Illustration,  irapa/3oXfy  -^s,  17. 

Image,  CIKUJV,  -ovos,  17. 

Imitate,  /xi/x€o/>uu. 

Imitator,  JUU/AOS,  -ov,  6. 

In,  cv  w.  dat. 

Inhabit,  ot/cew. 

Inquire,  cptoraw. 

Inside,  Icrw. 

Instead  of,  avTt  w.  gen. 

Instrument,  opyavov,  -ov,  TO. 

Into,  cts  w.  ace. 

Ionian s,  *Io>ves,  -vo>v,  ot. 

Is,  ccm'(V). 

It,  see  jfiTe. 

Its,  translated  by  the  article. 

Itself,  avros,  -17,  -o. 


J. 

Judge,    verb,    /cpfvw;    noun, 
,  -ov,  6. 


K. 

Kept  trying,  imperf  .  of  verb 

for  try. 

Kind,  yevos,  -cos,  TO. 
King,  /3ao~iAevs,  -e<os,  6. 
Know,     ot8a,     inf. 

sometimes   inf.   and   perf. 

of    yiyvwo-Kco.      Learn    to 

know,  ytyv(oo"/co). 
Known,  make 

L. 

Ladder,  KA.i)ua£,  -KOS,  17. 
Land,  y^,  y>/s,  17- 
Language,  yAwo-o-a,  -i;s,  17. 
Large,  /Aa/cpos,  -a,  -ov. 
Laughter,  yeA.o>s,  -WTOS,  6. 
Law,  VO/AOS,  -ov,  6. 
Lead,  ayw. 

Leader,  dywyds,  -ov,  6. 
Learn,  jjuavOdvo). 
Learn  to  know,  ytyv<oo-/«o. 
Legend,  //,v0os,  -ov,  6. 
Leisure,  o*^oA?7,  -^s,  17  ;  have 

leisure,  o~xoAa£a>. 
Lesson,  /xa^^/xa,  -ros,  TO. 
Letter    (of    the    alphabet), 

ypa//yxa,  -ros,  TO. 
Letter     (epistle), 


Level,  6/xaA.os,  -17,  -ov. 

Life,  yStos,  -ov,  6. 

Life,  mode   of  -  ,  oYan-a, 


Light,  <^>cos, 

Like,  o/Aotos,  -a,  -ov. 


360 


ENGLISH-GREEK  VOCABULARY. 


Line,  crrt^os,  -ov,  6. 
Little,  /u/cpds,  -a,  -ov. 
Live,  oiAcea). 
Lonely,  e/jTy/xos,  -77,  -ov. 
Long,  ^a/epos,  -a,  -ov ;  a  long 

time,  TroAvv  \povov. 
Loose,  Avo>. 
Loosing,  Averts,  -ecus,  77. 

Lung,  TTVCV/ACOV,  -OV09,  6. 

M. 

Machine, 
Make,  7roteo>. 
Make  grow,  <£ 
Make  known, 
Man,  av0po)7ros,  -ov,  6. 
Many,  TroAAoi,  TroAAat,  ?roAAa. 
Marathon,  Mapafltov,  -coves,  6. 
Mariner,  vavr^s,  -or,  6. 
Mark,  ^apa/crT/p,  -^pos,  6. 
Marriage,  ya^os,  -ov,  6. 
Master,  SecrTroV^s,  -ov,  6. 
Matter,  ?rpay/xa,  -ros,  TO. 
Measure,  ^terpov,  -ov,  TO. 
Measuring-rod,  Kavwv,  -dvos, 

6. 

Memory,  fwrjprj,  -779,  ?;. 
Messenger,  ayyeAos,  -ov,  6. 
Mix,  K€pavvv/xt. 
Mixing-bowl,  /cpaT^p,  -^pos, 

6. 

Mode  of  life,  oYaiTa,  -175,  T). 
Month,  /U.T/V,  /xryvds,  6. 
Most,  adv.,  fjLaAi<rTa. 
Mould,  TrAao^o-o). 
Much,  iroAvs,  TroAA^,  TroAv. 


Muse,  /xovo-a,  -779,  ?). 
Museum,  /xovo-etov,  -ov,  TO. 
Music,  fjiovo-LKrjj  -i}s,  T). 


N. 

Naked,  yvjiu/ds,  -97,  -ov. 
Name,  ovv/xa,  -TOS,  TO. 
Nature,  <£vVis,  -€<os,  77. 
Neither  .  .  .  nor,  OVTC  . 

OVT€. 

Never,  OVTTOTC,  /AT^TTOTC. 
New,  veos,  -a,  -ov. 
North-wind,  /3opeds,  -ov, 
Nose,  pfs,  ptvds,  77. 
Not,  ov,  OVK,  ov^,  ^77. 
Not  yet,  OVTTO). 
Now,  vvv. 
Number,  ap^ftds,  -ov,  6. 


O. 

Ode,  (0877,  -779,  77. 
Often,  TToAAaKts. 
Older,  Trpeo-ySvTcpos,  -a,  -ov. 
Oligarchy,  oAtyapxtd,  -as,  77. 
On,  €7Ti  w.  dat. 
Once,  ?roT€,  enclitic. 
One's  self,  lavTov,  -775,  -ov. 
Only,  only  one,  /xdvos,  -77,  -ov. 
Opinion,  Sofa,  -775,  rj  ;  Soyyma, 

-TOS,  TO. 

Orator,  p77Ta>p,  -opos,  6. 
Origin,  yev€0"ts,  -ecus,  17. 
Other,  aAAos,  -77,  -ov  ;  erepos, 

-a,  -ov. 
Ought,  xp77,  impers.,  w.  inf. 


ENGLISH-GREEK  VOCABULARY. 


361 


Outdo,  v? 

Out  of,  c£,  €/c,  w.  gen. 

Outside,  cf  <o. 

Overseer,  eTria-Korros,  -ov,  6. 

Own,  one's  own,  i&os,  -a,  -ov. 

P. 

Pain,  oAyos,  -eos,  TO. 
Park,  TrapaSeto-os,  -ov,  6. 
Passion,  7ra0os,  -cos,  TO. 
Pedagogue,   TraiSaytoyos,  -ov, 

6. 

People,  &7/xos,  -ov,  6. 
Perceive,   aicr0avo/xai,   yiyvco- 

O7CO). 

Persian,  Ilepo-T/s,  -ov,  6. 
Philosopher,  <£iAoo-o</>os,  -ov, 

6. 

Pipe,  avAos,  -ov,  6. 
Pirate,  TreipaTiys,  -ov,  6. 
Place,   noun,   TOTTOS,  -ov,   6; 

verb,  riOrjfu. 

Place,  take ,  yiyvojLuu. 

Plan,  )8ovAcvo). 
Plant,  <£VTOV,  -ov,  TO. 
Plot  against,  cVi/itovAcva). 
Poet,  TTOI^T^S,  -ov,  6. 
Position,  0«ns,  -cws,  17. 
Power,  8vva/us,  -ca>s,  ^. 
Prevent,  /ccoAvo). 
Priest,  tcpevs,  -ccos,  6. 
Prime,  aK/xrJ,  -i}s,  ^. 
Private,  tStos,  -a,  -ov. 
Prize,  a^Aov,  -ov,  TO. 
Procure  the  release  of,  mid. 

of  Avw, 


Prophet,  /xavTts,  -ea>s,  6. 
Put,  TiOrjfU. 

Put  together,  owrt'0i?/u. 
Putting    together,    o-v 
-€(os,  17. 

R. 

Race,  kind,  yei/os,  -eos,  TO. 
Race,  running,  Spo/ios,  -ov,  6. 
Ransom,  mid.  of  Avo>. 
Read,  dvaytyv(oo*K(o. 
Real,  ITV/XOS,  -17,  -ov. 
Recognize,  ytyvwo-Kto. 
Reign,  reign  over,  /?ao-iAevo>. 
Release,  Avo>. 
Reply,  aTTOKptvo/xat. 
Report,  ayyeAAo). 
Revolt,  mid.  (with  /u-aor.  and 

perf.  act.)  of  <l<£icrn7/Ai. 
Right,  op#os,  -ry,  -ov. 
River,  TroTa/xos,  -ov,  6. 
Road,  6805,  -ov,  17. 
Rose,  poSov,  -ov,  TO. 
Rule,  noun,  /cavcov,  -ovos,  6; 

verb,  apx«>' 

Ruler,  Svvao-Tr/s,  -ov,  6. 
Running,  8po/xos,  -ov,  6. 

S. 

Sacred,  tepos,  -a,  -ov. 
Sailor,  vavT^s,  -ov,  6. 
Same,  6  avros,  ^  avTiy,  TO 

avTo. 

Satrap,  o-aTpctTr^s,  -ov,  6. 
Say,  <f>r]iAL,  Acyco. 
Sceptre,  cnaJTrrpov,  -ov?  TO. 


362 


ENGLISH-GEEEE:  VOCABULABY. 


Scheme  against,  €7ri/:tovA.ei;'(o. 
School,  o~xoA.T7,  -775,  77. 
Scratch,  xapacroxo. 
Season,  copa,  -as,  77. 
Secret,  /AVOTIKOS,  -77,  -ov. 
Secret    doctrine,    //.vor^piov, 

-OV,  TO. 

See,  6paa> ;  fut.  ctyo/xai. 

Seize,  aipeco. 

Sell,  7ra)A.€O). 

Send,  aWAAo). 

Send  away,  aTrooreAAci). 

Set  up,  fcrrr//^. 

Seven,  CTTTOI. 

Seventh,  c/3So/xos,  -77,  -ov. 

Shape,  cISos,  -eos,  TO. 

She-goat,  ^t/iatpa,  -as,  77. 

Ship,  vavs,  vews,  77. 

Show,  noun,  fled,  -as,  77 ;  verb, 

</>atVto. 
Side,  at  the  side  of,  7ra/oa  w. 

dat. 

Sight,  ^ea,  -as,  17. 
Skill,  TexvT?,  -775,  ^. 
Skin,  8ep/u.a,  -ros,  TO. 
Slave,  SovXos,  -ov,  6. 
Small,  /xt/cpos,  -d,  -ov. 
So,  OVTO>(S). 

Sokrates,  5a>KpaT?7S,  -ovs,  6. 
Soldier,  o"TpaTta)T77S,  -ov,  6. 
Solid,  orepeos,  -a,  -ov. 
Solitary,  €p77/x,os,  -17,  -ov. 
Something,  TI,  enclitic. 
Sometime,  -TTOTC,  enclitic. 
Son,  Trats,  7rat8os,  6. 
Song,  ode,  0)877,  "^?  ^  5  strain 

of  music,  ^c'Aos,  -eos,  TO. 


Soothsayer,  /AavTts,  -ca>s,  6. 
Sort,  what  -  of  a,  otos,  -a, 
-ov. 

Soul,  \fixn)  -fa  ft- 

Sound,  noun,   ^>a)v>7,  -775,  17  ; 

verb,  <^a)V€a>. 
Spartans,  Aa/ceSat/Aovtot,  -a>v, 

c 
01. 

Speak,  Xcyo). 

Sphere,  o"^)arpa,  -as,  77. 

Spirit,  8at/>ta)v,  -ovos,  6. 

Split,  o-xt'£a>. 

Staff,  cr/c^TTTpov,  -ov,  TO. 

Stand,  perf.,  plup.,  and  fut. 

perf.  act.  of  io-Trjfu. 
Star,  ao-Tpov,  -ov,  TO. 
Statue,  ctkwv,  -ovos,  77. 
Stone,  At^os,  -ov,  6. 

Stop,  TTttVO). 

Story,  lo~Topt'a,  -as,  77. 
Straight,  op^os,  -77,  -ov. 
Street,  68os,  -ov,  77. 
Strength,  /cpaTos,  -eos,  TO. 
Strike,  TVTTTO). 
Struggle,  dycovt^o/xat. 
Summit,  0,^77,  -775,  »). 
Sun,  77X105,  -ov,  6. 
Suppose,  oto/Aat. 
Surpass,  vtKaa>. 

T. 


Take,  . 

Take  apart,  dvoAvo). 

Take  counsel  with,  mid.  of 

<TVjJi/3oV\€V<l). 

Take  place,  ytyvo/xat. 


ENGLISH-GREEK  VOCABULARY. 


363 


Taking  apart,  dvoAvo-is,  -eo>s, 

* 

Tale,  jjivOos,  -ov,  6. 

Talk,  Aoyos,  -ov,  6. 

Teach,  StScurjcco. 

Teacher,  SiSao-KoAos,  -ov,  6. 

Tell,  <£pa£<o,  Ae'yw. 

Ten,  SeKa. 

Than,  77,  or  the  gen.  case. 

That,  conj.,  on;  after  ^TJ/U 
and  some  other  verbs,  ex- 
pressed by  the  inf.  mode. 

That,  rel.  pron.,  os,  77,  o. 

The,  6,  77,  TO. 

Theatre,  ^earpov,  -ov,  TO. 

Their,  see  JETe. 

Them,  see  He. 

Themselves,  see  Himself. 

Then,  TOTC. 

There,  often  not  translated 
at  the  beginning  of  a  sent. 

They,  see  He. 

Thing,  often  omitted,  some- 
times Trpayfta,  -ros,  TO. 

Think,  oto/xat. 

Thirty,  TptaKovra. 

Three,  Tpets. 

Throat,  Aapuy£,  -7705,  6. 

Through,  8ta  w.  gen. 

Throw,  /?aXXa>. 

Time,  ^povos,  -ov,  6 ;  season, 
wpd,  -a?,  17. 

To,  with  verbs  of  motion, 
€TU  or  €ts  w.  ace. 

Together,  6/xov. 

Tomb,  Ta^)os,  -or,  6. 

Tongue,  yXwo-o-a,  -779,  ^. 


Top,  aKpov,  -ov,  TO. 

Tree,  SevSpov,  -ov,  TO. 

True,  6TV/X05,  -77,  -ov. 

Try,  Tretpaojitat. 

Turn,    verb,    TpeVw;    noun, 

TpO7TO9,  -OV,  6. 

Type,  TVTTOS,  -ov,  6. 
Tyrant,  Tvpawos,  -ov,  6. 

U. 

Unable,  be ,  ov  SvVa/juit. 

Under,  VTTO  w.  dat. 
Undo,  X'jw. 
Unloose,  dvoAvo). 
Upon,  €7rt  w.  dat. 
Upright,  op0os,  -77,  -ov. 
Used   to,  expressed  by  the 
imperf.  tense. 

V. 

Vanquish,  vt/ccuo. 

Victorious,  be ,  vt/caw. 

View,  o~K€7TTo/xat. 
Voice,  <^a>vi7,  -779,  77. 

W. 

War,  TroXc/Aos,  -ov,  6. 
Was,  T^V. 

Water,  vSwp,  V&ITOS,  TO. 
Way,  6809,  -ov,  17. 
Week,  I^So/xcis,  -01805,  r). 
Weight,  /3apos,  -€05,  TO. 
Well,  cv. 
Were, 


364 


ENGLISH-GREEK  VOCABULARY. 


What?  TL. 

When,  ore,  CTTCI,  see  note  on 

140,  I.,  3. 
When  ?  TroVe. 
Which,  see  Who. 
While,  ore. 
Who,  which,  that,  what,  rel. 

pron.,  os,  17,  o. 
Who?  TI'S. 
Whole,  oAos,  -r;,  -ov. 
Why?  TI'. 

Wind,  Trvev/xa,  -ros,  TO. 
Wisdom,  oxx^ia,  -as,  17. 
Wise,  oxx^os,  -•>/,  -ov. 
Wish,  /3ov\ofjjai. 
With,  /xcra  w.  gen.,  cruv  w. 

dat.,     or     sometimes    the 

simple  dat. 


Within,  ccro). 
Word,  Xoyos,  -ov,  6. 
Work,  €pyov,  -ov,  TO. 
World,  Koo-ftos,  -ov,  6. 
W'orship,  0epa7rev(i>. 
Write,  ypa<#)w. 
Writing,  ypa/x^na,  -TOS,  TO. 

X. 

Xenophon,  Hcvo^wv,  -WVTOS, 


Xerxes, 


,  -ov,  6. 


Y. 


Young,  veos,  -a,  -ov. 
Younger,  vecoTcpos,  -a,  -ov. 
Youth,  17)817,  -^s,  ^. 


INDEX   OF  ENGLISH   DERIVATIVES. 


A-,  an-  (privative)  60,  3,  b. 
Acephalous  31,  5. 
Acme  29;  31,  1. 
Acoustic  34 ;  36,  1. 
Acoustics  36,  1 ;  36,  6. 
Acropolis  94. 
Acrostic  94;  96,  1. 
Adelphi  58 ;  59,  I,  9. 
Aerate  86,  2. 
Aerial  86,  2. 
Aeriform  86,  2. 
Aerolite  86,  2. 
Aeronaut  86,  2. 
Aesthetic  78,  1 ;  78,  11. 
Aesthetics  78,  1. 
Agatha  66. 
Agnostic  60,  3,  b. 
Agonize  84. 
Agony  84 ;  86,  1. 
Air  84  ;  86,  2. 
Albuminoid  91,  5. 
Allopathy  89 ;  91,  1. 
Alpha  and  Omega  2,  a. 
Alphabet  2. 
Amnesty  100,  9. 
Amorphous  60,  3,  b. 
Amphibious  57,  6. 
Amphitheatre  57,  6. 


Anabaptist  51,  5,  b. 
Anachronism  51,  5,  b. 
Anaesthesia  78,  1. 
Anaesthetic  78,  1. 
Anagram  51,  5,  b. 
Analogon  51,  5,  b. 
Analogous  51,  5,  b. 
Analogue  51,  5,  b. 
Analogy  51,  5,  b. 
Analysis  94;  96,  7;  100, 10,  a. 
Analytic  96,  7. 
Analyze  94. 
Anarchy  82,  1,  b. 
Anathema  100,  10,  c. 
Anathematize  100,  10,  c. 
Anatomy  105,  10. 
Anchor  6,  a. 
Anecdote  100,  3. 
Angel  58. 

Anhydrous  60,  3,  b. 
Annapolis  96,  11. 
Anomalous  103 ;  105,  7. 
Anomaly  105,  7. 
Anonymous  91,  9. 
Antagonist  84. 
Antagonize  84. 
Anthem  68,  1. 
Anther  98. 


366       INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  JDEBIVATIVES. 


Anthology  100,  1. 
Anthropoid  91,  5. 
Anthropology  49. 
Anthropomorphic  59,  I,  12. 
Anthropomorphism  60,  6. 
Anthropophagi  77, 1,  2. 
Anthropophagous  77,  I,  2. 
Anti-  68,  1. 
Antidote  100,  3. 
Antinomian  68,  1. 
Antinomy  68,  1. 
Antipathy  91,  10. 
Antiperiodic  68,  1. 
Antiphone  68,  1. 
Antipode  82,  7. 
Antipodes  80 ;  82,  7. 
Antislavery  68,  1. 
Antithesis  100,  10,  a. 
Antithetic  100,  10,  a. 
Apathetic  91,  10. 
Apathy  91,  10. 
Aphelion  56,  II,  4. 
Apocrypha  110,  7. 
Apogee  31,  3;  57,  1. 
Apologetic  57,  1. 
Apologize  57,  1. 
Apologue  57,  1. 
Apology  54 ;  57,  1. 
Apostasy  105,  5. 
Apostate  105,  5. 
Apostle  58 ;  60,  7. 
Apostolic  60,  7. 
Apothecary  100,  10,  b. 
Apotheosis  60,  3,  c. 
Arch-  82,  1,  b. 
Archaeology  80 ;  82,  1,  a. 


Archaic  82,  1,  a. 
Archaism  82,  1,  a. 
Archangel  82,  1,  b. 
Archbishop  82,  1,  b ;  74,  9. 
Archduke  82,  1,  b. 
Archetype  82,  1,  a. 
Archi-  82,  1,  b. 
Archiepiscopal  82, 1,  b ;  74,  9. 
Architect  82,  1,  b. 
Archives  82,  1,  b. 
Archthief  82,  1,  b. 
Aristocracy  90, 1,  1 ;  91,  7. 
Aristocrat  89;  90, 1,  1;  91,  7. 
Arithmetic  76. 
Aster  68,  2. 
Asterisk  68,  2. 
Asteroid  91,  5. 
Astral  66. 
Astrology  68,  2. 
Astronomy  67,  II,  9 ;  68,  2. 
Atheist  60,  3,  b. 
Athlete  84. 
Atom  105,  10. 

Autobiography  66 ;  67, 1,  2. 
Autocrat  91,  7. 
Autograph  67,  I,  2. 
Automatic  68,  3,  a. 
Automaton  68,  3,  a. 
Autonomous  67,  1,  3 ;  68,  3,  a. 
Autonomy  68,  3,  a. 
Autopsy  78,  5. 
Autotype  78,  9. 

Baptize  51,  5,  b. 
Baritone  110,  3. 
Barometer  108. 


INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES.       367 


Barytone  110,  3. 
Basil  96,  2. 
Basilica  96,  2. 
Basilisk  96,  2. 
Bible  66. 

Bibliography  68,  4. 
Bibliomancy  100,  7. 
Bibliomania  68,  4. 
Bibliophile  68,  4. 
Bibliopole  66. 
Bibliotheke  100,  10,  b. 
Bicycle  60,  5. 
Bigamy  91,  2. 
Bimetallist  68,  9. 
Biography  49;  50,1,2;  51,1. 
Biology  50,  II,  5;  51,  1. 
Bishop  74,  9. 
Boreas  44. 
Botanic  31,  2. 
Botanist  31,  2. 
Botany  29;  31,  2. 
Bureaucracy  91 ,  7. 
Bureaucrat  91,  7. 

Cacodoxy  68,  7. 
Cacography  68,  7. 
Cacophony  66 ;  68,  7. 
Calligraphy  91,  6. 
Callisthenics  91,  6. 
Canon  84 ;  86,  6. 
Canonical  86,  6. 
Canonize  86,  6. 
Catacomb  51,  5,  c. 
Catalogue  51,  5,  c. 
Catarrh  7. 
Catholic  110,  10. 


Caustic  108. 
Cauterize  110,  6. 
Cautery  110,  6. 
Cenotaph  98 ;  99,  I,  3. 
Cephalalgia  31,  5;  110,2. 
Cephalic  29;  31,5. 
Cephalopod  82,  7. 
Character  84;  86,  10. 
Characteristic  86,  10. 
Characterize  86,  10. 
Chimaera,  or  Chimera  39 ;  41, 

5. 

Chimerical  41,  5. 
Chirography  34 ;  35,  1,3. 
Chiromancy  100,  7. 
Chiropodist  82,  7. 
Chord  110,  11. 
Chromatic  91,  14. 
Chrome  89. 
Chromo91,  14. 
Chromolithograph  91 ,  14. 
Chronic  51,  7. 
Chronicle  51,  7. 
Chronology  49 ;  50,  II,  1 ;  51, 1. 
Chronometer  56,  II,  1. 
Chrysalis  76;  78,  10. 
Chrysanthemum  78,  10. 
Chryselephantine  78,  10. 
Chrysolite  78,  10. 
Climacteric  78,  3. 
Climax  76. 
Comedy  31,  7. 
Constantinople  96,  11. 
Cosmetic  49 ;  51,  4. 
Cosmic  51,  4. 
Cosmical  51,  4. 


368        INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  LEEIVATIVES. 


Cosmogony  91,  3;  95,  I,  2. 
Cosmopolitan  51,  4. 
Cosmopolite  50,  II,  1 ;  51,  1 ; 

51,4. 

Cosmorama  49 ;  51,  4. 
Cosmos  49;  51,  4. 
-cracy  91,  7. 
-crat  91,  7. 
Crater  103;  105,  6. 
Crisis  46,  1. 
Criterion  46,  1. 
Critic  44 ;  46,  1. 
Critical  46,  1. 
Criticism  46,  1. 
Criticise  46,  1. 
Crypt  108. 
Crystal  58. 
Cycle  58. 
Cyclone  58. 
Cyclopaedia  82,  6. 

Daemon  86,  3. 
Daemonic  86,  3. 
Daimon  86,  3. 
Daimonic  86,  3. 
Decad  68,  9 ;  80. 
Decade  80. 

Decagon  80;  81,  II,  1. 
Decagram  82,  3;  91,  4. 
Decalogue  82,  3. 
Decameter  82,  3. 
Decarchy  82,  1,  b. 
Delta  2,  a. 
Deltoid  91,  5. 
Demagogue  72 ;  73,  I,  1. 
Democracy  90, 1,  2 ;  91,  7. 


Democrat  91,  7. 
Demon  84 ;  86,  3. 
Demonic  86,  3. 
Demonology  86,  3. 
Demotic  74,  1. 
Derm  98. 
Despot  44. 
Devil  46,  3;  60,7. 
Di-  96,  1. 
Dia-  78,  8. 

Diabolical  46,  3 ;  60,  7. 
Diacritical  78,  8. 
Diaeresis  105,  1. 
Diagnosis  78,  8. 
Diagonal  82,  2. 
DialectlOS;  105,2. 
Dialectics  105,  2. 
Dialogue  105,  2. 
Diameter  54;  56, 1,  3. 
Diapason  110,  11. 
Diaphanous  72;  74,  11. 
Diastole  78,  8. 
Didactic  108 ;  110,  4. 
DieresislOS;  105,  1. 
Diet  39;  41,  3;  41,5. 
Digraph  96,  1. 
Dilemma  110,  8. 
Dimorphic,  -ous  96,  1. 
Diorama  57,  2. 
Diphthong  5;  68,  9;  96,  1. 
Dissyllable  110,  8. 
Distich  96,  1. 
Dogma  108 ;  110,  5. 
Dogmatic  110,  5. 
Dogmatize  110,  5. 
Dose  98 ;  100,  3, 


INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES.       369 


Doxology  68,  5. 
Drama  98. 
Dramatic  100,  4. 
Dramatist  100,  4. 
Dramaturgy  100,  4. 
Drastic  100,  4. 
Dromedary  51,  3. 
Dynamic  96,  5. 
Dynamite  94. 
Dynamo  96,  5. 
Dynamo-electric  96,  5. 
Dynast  94. 
Dynasty  94. 
Dyspepsia  103 ;  105,  8. 
Dyspeptic  105,  8. 

Eclectic  100,  1. 
Economy  74,  6. 
Ecstasy  105,  5. 
Ecstatic  105,  5. 
Electricity  96,  5. 
Elephant  78,  10. 
Emphasis  74,  11. 
Emphatic  74,  11. 
Empiric  108 ;  110,  12. 
Empyrean  86,  8. 
Encephalon  30,  II,  5 ;  31,  5. 
Encyclical  59,  I,  5. 
Encyclopaedia  82,  6. 
Energy  54;  56,  II,  5. 
Entomology  105,  10. 
Eph-  68,  6. 
Ephemeral  68,  6. 
Ephemeris  68,  6. 
Epi-  68,  6. 
Epidemic  74,  1 ;  105,  3. 


Epidermis  100,  2. 
Epiglottis  68,  6. 
Epigram  68,  6;  91,  4. 
Epigraphy  68,  6. 
Epilepsy  110,  8. 
Epilogue  68,  6. 
Epiphany  74,  11. 
Epiphyte  96,  14. 
Episcopacy,  74,  9. 
Episcopal  72 ;  74,  9. 
Epistle  58 ;  60,  7. 
Epistolary  60,  7. 
Epitaph  99, 1,  2. 
Epithet  100,  10,  a. 
Epitome  105,  10. 
Epizootic  105,  3. 
Epode  68,  6. 
Eponym,  91,  9. 
Eponymous  91,  9. 
Eremite  84 ;  86,  5. 
Esoteric  80;  82,  5. 
Ethic  100,  5. 
Ethical  100,  5. 
Ethics  98;  100,5. 
Etymology  72 ;  74,  2. 
Etymon  74,  2. 
Eugene  91,  3. 
Eugenia  91,  3. 
Eugenie  91,  3. 
Eulogium  51,  5,  a. 
Eulogize  51,  5,  a. 
Eulogy  51,  5,  a. 
Eupepsia  105,  8. 
Eupeptic  104,  I,  8;  105,8. 
Euphemism  108 ;  110,  15. 
Euphemistic  110,  15, 


370       INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES. 


Euphony  34 ;  35,  I,  5 ;  36,  2 ; 

68,  7. 

Evangel  60,  1. 
Evangelical  60,  1. 
Evangelize  60,  1. 
Exodus  57,  3. 
Exoteric  82,  5. 
Exotic  80 ;  82,  5. 

Fancy  74,  11. 
Fantastic  74,  11. 
Fantasy  74,  11. 

Genealogy  89. 

Genesis  94 ;  96,  3. 

Genetic  96,  3. 

Geography  29;  30,1,8;  31,3. 

Geology  31,  3;  50,  11,5. 

Geometry  31,  3;  57,  4. 

George  57,  4. 

Gloss  41,  1. 

Glossary  39 ;  41,  1. 

Glottis  41,  1. 

Gnome  51,  2. 

Gnostic  49;  51,  2;  60,  3,  b. 

Goniometer  82,  2. 

Grammar  91,  4. 

Grammatical  91,  4. 

Graphic  31,  4;  82,  10. 

Graphite  31,  4. 

Gymnasium  76. 

Gymnast  78,  2. 

Gymnastic '78,  2. 

Gymnic  78,  2. 

Hades  7,  a. 


Harmony  51,  7. 
Hebdomadal  80 ;  82,  4. 
Hebe  29. 
Heliacal  57,  5. 
Helianthus  100,  1. 
Heliometer  57,  5. 
Heliotrope  54 ;  56,  II,  9. 
Heliotype  78,  9. 
Hemi-  41,  3. 
Hemisphere  41,  3. 
Heptarchy  80;  82,  1,  b. 
Heresy  105,  1. 
Heretic  103;  105,  1. 
Hermit  86,  5. 
Heterodox  66 ;  68,  5. 
Heterogeneous  91,  3. 
Heterophemy  110,  15. 
Hexagon  82,  2. 
Hierarchy  94;  95,11,  1. 
Hieratic  74,  1;  96,  6. 
Hieroglyphic  94. 
Hieroglyphics  96,  6. 
Hieronymus  96,  6. 
Hierophant  96,  6. 
Hippodrome  58 ;  60,  4. 
Hippopotamus  58 ;  59, 1,  2. 
Historiographer  35,  II,  5. 
History  34 ;  36,  3. 
Holocaust  108 ;  110,  10. 
Homer  7. 
Homoeopathy  89 ;  90,  II,  10 ; 

91,  1. 

Homogeneous  91,  3;  91,  8. 
Homonym  91,  8;  91,  9. 
Homonymous  91,  8. 
Holography  30, 1,  9 ;  31,  3. 


INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES.        371 


Horologe  31,  8;  51,  5,  a. 
Horometer  31,  8;  57,  4. 
Horoscope  31,  8 ;  74,  9. 
Hour  29 ;  31,  8. 
Hydra  60,  9. 
Hydrant  60,  9. 
Hydraulic  58;  59,1,  1. 
Hydraulics  58;  59,  I,  1. 
Hydrography  60,  9. 
Hydrometer  60,  9. 
Hydropathy  91,  10. 
Hydrophobia  58 ;  60,  9. 
Hydrostatics  105,  5. 
Hygeia39;  41,  4. 
Hygiene  41,  4. 
Hygienic  41,  4. 
Hyper-  46,  6. 
Hyperbole  45. 

Hyperborean  45,  I,  8 ;  46,  6. 
Hypercritical  44 ;  46,  6. 
Hypo- 100,  2. 
Hypocrisy  76. 
Hypocrite  76. 
Hypodermis  100,  2. 
Hypodermic  100,  2. 
Hypothecate  100,  10,  b. 
Hypothesis  100,  10,  a. 

-ic  78,  11. 

Iconoclasm  84 ;  86,  4. 
Iconoclast  85,  I,  10;  86,  4. 
Iconography  86,  4. 
-ide  91,  5. 
Idiocrasy  105,  5. 
Idiom  103 ;  105,  4. 
Idiomatic  105,  4. 


Idiopathic  104,  II,  1. 

Idiosyncrasy  105,  6. 

Idiot  105,  4. 

Indianapolis  96,  11. 

Iota  2,  a. 

-ise  86,  11. 

-ism  86,  11. 

Isochronous  74,  3. 

Isometric  74,  3. 

Isosceles  74,  3. 

Isothermal  72 ;  73, 1, 12 ;  74, 3. 

-ist  78,  11;  86,  11. 

-He  31,  4.  f 

-ize  86,  11.' 

Jerome  96,  6. 
Jot  2,  a. 

Kaleidoscopic  89;  90,  I,  10. 

Laryngoscope  77, 1,  5. 
Larynx  76. 

Lithograph  66 ;  67,  1,4. 
Lithology  68,  8. 
Logic  51,  5,  a. 

Machine  34;  36,4. 
Macrocephalous  74,  4. 
Macrocosm  73, 1,  5. 
Macrometer  74,  4. 
Macron  72 ;  74,  4. 
Macroscopic  74,  4. 
Mantic  100,  7. 
Mathematics  108 ;  110,  9. 
Mechanic  34 ;  36,  4. 
Mechanism  36,  4, 


372        INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES. 


Melodrama  100,  8. 
Melody  98,  100,  8;  31,7. 
Metal  68,  9. 
Metamorphosis  60,  6. 
Metaphor  82,  9. 
Metaphysics  96,  13. 
Metempsychosis  60,  6. 
Meter  54. 
Method  57,  3. 
Metonymy  91,  9. 
Metric  54. 

Metronome  66;  68,  10. 
Metropolis  96,  11.. 
Metropolitan  96,  11. 
Microcephalous  74,  5. 
Microcosm  73, 1,  5 ;  95,  II,  9. 
Micrometer  74,  5. 
Micronesia  74,  5. 
Microscope  72;  74,  5;  74,  9. 
Mime  76;  78,  4. 
Mimetic  78,  4. 
Mimic  78,  4. 
Misanthrope  94. 
Misanthropy  95,  I,  8. 
Misogamist  96,  10. 
Misogynist  96,  10. 
Mnemonic  98 ;  100,  9. 
Mnemonics  100,  9. 
Mobocracy  91,  7. 
Monachism  68,  9. 
Monad  68,  9. 
Monarch  81,  I,  9. 
Monarchy  82,  1,  b. 
Monastery  68,  9. 
Monastic  68,  9. 
Monk  68,  9, 


Monoceros  100,  6. 
Monochrome  91,  14. 
Monody  68,  9. 
Monogamy  91,  2. 
Monogram  66;  68,  9;  91,  4. 
Monograph  68,  9. 
Monolith  68,  9. 
Monologue  68,  9. 
Monomania  68,  9. 
Monometallist  68,  9. 
Monophthong  68,  9. 
Monopoly  67,  II,  1. 
Monosyllable  68,  9. 
Monotheism  68,  9. 
Monotone  68,  9. 
Morpheus  60,  6. 
Morphine  60,  6. 
Morphology  58. 
Muse  39;  41,2. 
Museum  58. 
Music  39;  41,  2. 
Mystery  108. 
Mystic  108. 
Myth  49. 
Mythology  50,  I,  3. 

Naples  95,  I,  5. 
Nausea  84;  86,  7. 
Nautical  84. 
Nautilus  86,  7. 
Neapolis95,  I,  5;  96,  11. 
Necrology  96,  8. 
Necromancy  98 ;  100,  7. 
Necromantic  100,  7. 
Necropolis  94;  95,  I,  6. 
Nemesis  66 1  68,  10, 


INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES.        373 


Neo-  96,  9. 
Neologism  96,  9. 
Neology  96,  9. 
Neophyte  94 ;  96,  9. 
Neoplatonism  96,  9. 
Neuralgia  108 ;  110,  2. 
Nomad  68,  10. 

Ochlocracy  91,  7. 
Ode  29. 
Odometer  49. 
Oeconomy  72;  74,  6. 
Oecumenical  74,  7. 
-oid91,5. 

Oligarchy  80;  81,  I,  1. 
Ology  51,  5,  a. 
Omega  2,  a. 
Optic  78,  5;  78,  11. 
Optics  78,  5. 
*  *        Organ  54. 

Ornithology  80. 
Orthodox  66 ;  67,  II,  2 ;  68,  5. 
Orthodoxy  68,  7. 
Orthoepy  68,  11. 
Orthography  68,  11. 
Orthopedy  82,  6. 
Ovoid  91,  5. 

Pachyderm  99,  II,  6. 
Pachydermatous  100,  2. 
Paedagogue  80. 
Palimpsest  31,  6. 
Palindrome  31,6;  49;  51,  3. 
Palingenesis  31,  6;  96,  3. 
Palinode  29 ;  30,  II,  4. 
Palsy  96,  7. 


Pan- 110,  11. 
Panacea  110,  11. 
Pandemonium  110,  11. 
Panegyric  110,  11. 
Panevangelical  110,  11. 
Panoply  110,  11. 
Panorama  57,  2 ;  108;  110,11. 
Pan-Slavism  110,  11. 
Pantheism  110,  11. 
Pantheon  110,  11. 
Pantomime  78,  4;  110,  11. 
Pantophagous  110,  11. 
Para-  46,  5. 

Parable  44;  46,  3;  60,  7. 
Parabolical  46,  3 ;  60,  7. 
Paradise  58. 
Paradox  68,  5. 

Paragraph  44 ;  45, 1,  2 ;  46,  5. 
Paralysis  96,  7. 
Paralytic  96,  7. 
Paraphrase  105,  11. 
Parenthesis  100,  10,  a. 
Parenthetic  100,  10,  a. 
Parody  31,  7;  46,5. 
Pathetic  91,  10. 
Pathology  91,  10. 
Pathos  89. 
Patriarch  82,  1,  b. 
Patronymic  91,  9. 
Pedagogue  80. 
Pedobaptist  82,  6. 
Perigee  56,  II,  3. 
Perihelion  56,  I,  3. 
Perimeter  54. 
Period  56, 1,  3. 
Periphery  82,  9, 


374       INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES. 


Periphrasis  105,  11. 
Periphrastic  105,  11. 
Phaenomenon  74,  11. 
Phantasm  74,  11. 
Phantasmagoria  108;  110,  1. 
Phantastic  74,  11. 
Phantasy  74,  11. 
Phantom  74,  11. 
Pharmacist  99,  I,  6. 
Pharmacopoeia  100,  11. 
Pharmacy  98. 
Phase  74,  11. 
Phenomenon  72;  74,  11. 
Phil-,  philo-, -phileSl,  6. 
Philadelphia  59,  I,  3 ;  60,  2. 
Philanthropist  50,  I,  4. 
Philanthropy  49 ;  51,6. 
Philharmonic  51,  6. 
Philhellenic  51,  6.    . 
Philip  59,  I,  4. 
Philology  51,  6. 
Philomath  108 ;  110,  9. 
Philosopher  67,  II,  4. 
Philo-Turkish  51,  6. 
Philter  51,  6. 
Phonetic  36,  6. 
Phonetics  36,  6. 
Phonograph  34;  35,  I,  2. 
Phonography  35,  II,  7. 
Phonology  50,  I,  3. 
Phonotype  78,  9. 
Phosphorus  82,  10. 
Photograph  80 ;  82,  10. 
Photolithograph  82,  10. 
Photometer  82,  10. 
Photosphere  82, 10. 


Phrase  103;  105,  11. 

Phraseology  105,  11. 

Physic  96,  13. 

Physical  94;  96,  13. 

Physician  96,  13. 

Physics  96,  13. 

Physiognomy  96,  13. 

Physiology  96,  13. 

Piracy  110,  12. 

Pirate  108 ;  110,  12. 

Plaster  105,  9. 

Plastic  105,  9. 

Plutocracy  91 ,  7. 

Plutocrat  91,  7. 

Pneumatic  91,  11. 

Pneumonia  89. 

Poem  50,  II,  7. 

Poesy  46,  4. 

Poet  39;  44;  46,  4. 

Poetry  46,  4. 

Polemic-s  58. 

Police  46,  2. 

Policy  46,  2. 

Politic  46,  2. 

Political  46,  2. 

Politics  44 ;  46,  2. 

Polity  46,  2. 

Poly- 91,  12. 

Polychrome  90,  I,  11 ;  91,  14. 

Polygamy  89  ;  91,  2. 

Polyglot  41,  1. 

Polygon  82,  2. 

Polyp  82,  7. 

Polypus  82,  7. 

Polytechnic  60,  8. 

Polytheism  60,  3,  c. 


INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES.        375 


Practical  108;  110,  13. 
Practice  110, 13. 
Pragmatic  108 ;  110,  13. 
Praxis  110,  13. 
Presbyter  72;  74,8. 
Prester  74,  8. 
Priest  74,  8. 
Prognosis  91,  13. 
Prognostic  91,  13. 
Prognosticate  91,  13. 
Program  89;  91,  4. 
Prologue  51,  5,  a;  68,6. 
Prophecy  110, 16. 
Prophesy  110,  15. 
Prophet  110,  15. 
Prophetic  110,  15. 
Prosody  31,  7. 
Protagonist  86,  1. 
Prototype  76;  78,  9. 
Pseudonym  89;  91,  9. 
Psyche  49. 
Psychic  51,  8. 
Psychology  50,  I,  6;   51,  8; 

96,  13. 
Pyre  86,  8. 
Pyromancy  100,  7. 
Pyrotechnics  84;  86,  8. 

Rehypothecate  100,  10,  b. 

Rhapsody  31,  7. 

Rhetor  84. 

Rhetoric  86,  9. 

Rhinoceros  98 ;  99, 1, 5 ;  100, 6. 

Rhododendron  54 ;  56, 1,  1. 

Sarcasm  78,  6. 


Sarcophagus  76;  78,  6. 
Sceptic  74,  9. 
Sceptre  54. 
Schism  108;  110,  14. 
Schismatic  110,  14. 
Scholar  36,  5. 
Scholastic  36,  5. 
Scholiast  36,  5. 
Scholium  36,  5. 
School  34;  36,  5. 
Scope  74,  9. 
Skeptic  72 ;  74,  9. 
Slavophile  51,  6. 
Sophia  66. 
Sophism  74,  10. 
Sophist  72;  74,  10. 
Sophistical  74,  10. 
Sophisticate  74,  10. 
Sophisticated  74,  10. 
Sophistry  74,  10. 
Spectroscope  74,  9. 
Sphere  39;  41,  3. 
Spheroid  91,  5. 
Static  103 ;  105,  5. 
Statics  105,  5. 
Stereopticon  78,  7. 
Stereoscope  78,  7. 
Stereotype  76 ;  77,  II,  6 ;  78,  7. 
Story  34;  36,  3. 
Syllable  108 ;  110,  8. 
Syllabus  110,  8. 
Syllogism  78,  8. 
Symmetry  78,  8. 
Sympathy  91,  10. 
Symphony  78,  8. 
Synagogue  78,  8. 


376       INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES. 


Synchronism  78,  8. 

Theogony  91,  3. 

Synchronous  78,  8. 

Theology  58;  60,  3,  a. 

Synod  78,  8. 

Theosoph66;  68,  12. 

Synonym  89;  91,  9. 

theosophist  68,  12. 

Synopsis  76  ;  78,  8. 

Theosophy  68,  12. 

Synoptic  78,  8. 

Thermal  54. 

Syntactic  96,  12. 

Thermometer  56,  I,  4. 

Syntax  94;  96,  12. 

Thesis  98;  100,  10,  a. 

Synthesis  98  ;  100,  10,  a. 

Tome  103;  105,  10. 

System  105,  5. 

Tone  68,  9. 

Systematic  105,  5. 

Topography  58  ;  59,  I,  4 

Systematize  105,  5. 

Tragedy  31,  7. 

Systole  78,  8. 

Tricycle  80;  82,  8. 

Triglyph  96,  4. 

Tactic  96,  12. 

Trigonometry  82,  2. 

Tactics  94;  96,  12. 

Trilogy  82,  8. 

Tautology  67,  I,  10;  68,  3,  b. 

Tripod  82,  7. 

Taxidermy  100,  2. 

Trisyllable  110,  8. 

Technical  60,  8. 

Trope  54. 

Technique  60,  8. 

Trophy  57,  7. 

Technology  58  ;  59,  II,  6  ;  60,  8. 

Tropic  57,  7. 

Telegram  89. 

Turcophile  51,  6. 

Telegraph  35,  II,  1. 

Type  76;  78,9. 

Telephone  34;  35,1,  1. 

Typical  78,  9. 

Telescope  74,  9. 

Typography  77,  II,  3. 

Theatre  29;  54;  57,6. 

Theism  60,  3,  a. 

Unsophisticated  74,  10. 

Theist  60,  3,  a. 

Thematic  100,  10,  c. 

Zodiac  105,  3. 

Theme  100,  10,  c. 

Zoology  103. 

Theocracy  91,  7. 

Zoophyte  105,  3. 

Theodore  60,  3,  c. 

Zootomy  105,  10. 

GREEK  AND  LATIN. 

THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  First  Lessons  in  Greek, 
with  special  reference  to  the  etymology  of  English  words  of 
Greek  origin.  By  T.  D.  GOODELL,  Ph.D.  i6mo. 

This  book  attempts  to  teach  that  limited  portion  of  Greek  which  col- 
lege men  remember  after  they  have  forgotten  vastly  more.  That  is  the 
portion  which  even  those  who  wish  to  banish  the  study  of  Greek  from 
our  schools  would  admit  can  least  easily  be  spared,  and  that  portion  is 
essential  to  a  ready  command  of  the  English  tongue. 

The  first  idea  of  the  book  arose  from  hearing  a  woman  of  unusual  in- 
telligence and  considerable  reading,  talking  about  altruists,  when  she 
meant  agnostics.  Similar  confusions — confusing,  ultimately,  to  the 
speaker,  and  constantly  to  the  listener — are  of  not  infrequent  occurrence 
in  conversation  on  topics  interesting  only  to  the  4 1  educated. "  Moreover, 
much  as  the  Greek  element  of  English  appears  in  conversation,  it  ap- 
pears much  more  in  literature,  and  carries  many  of  the  key-words  to  the 
thought.  He  to  whom  these  key-words  are  not  alive  with  meaning  is  at 
great  disadvantage.  Many  a  man  who  thinks  he  has  retained  nothing 
whatever  from  his  Greek,  except  a  lively  sense  of  the  exact  meaning  of 
such  words  as  metaphysics,  agnostic,  synthetic,  anarchy,  Russophobe, 
nevertheless  regards  that  sense  as  an  intellectual  acquisition  worth  all  it 
cost.  But  after  all,  how  great  the  cost  of  this  one  acquisition  has  been  ! 
Surely  this  one  result  of  the  study  of  Greek  can  be  reached  without  de- 
voting to  it  years  of  time.  And  yet  mere  dictionaries  or  etymological 
handbooks  alone  cannot  give  what  is  wanted.  It  is  not  enough  to  read 
or  be  told,  even  repeatedly,  that  synthetic  is  derived  from  such  and 
such  Greek  words,  and  therefore  has  such  and  such  a  meaning.  The 
words  in  their  Greek  form,  and  with  some  fragment  of  their  Greek 
associations,  must  become  somewhat  familiar  before  one  can  be  sensible 
of  that  grasp  of  their  English  derivatives  which  will  enable  one  to  use 
those  derivatives  correctly  and  fearlessly. 

The  Greek  vocabulary  surviving  in  English  can  be  so  presented  in  a 
sort  of  Greek  primer,  with  its  relations  to  English  so  pointed  out,  that 
even  young  pupils  will  find  the  study  far  from  dull ;  and  thus,  of  just 
that  part  of  Greek  which  they  will  always  use  in  reading  current  litera- 
ture, they  will  be  apt  to  remember  more  than  the  much-abused 
"  average  college  graduate." 

This  book  tries  to  accomplish  these  results  without  waste  of  time  and 
brain-tissue  in  * *  mental  discipline"  of  doubtful  value.  But  the  writer  has 
no  faith  in  royal  roads  to  learning,  does  not  profess  to  have  compounded 
an  educational  nostrum  which  will,  in  a  few  weeks'  time,  electrify  a  boy 
or  girl  into  the  mastery  of  a  difficult  tongue,  and  does  believe  heartily  in 
giving  an  important  place  in  our  educational  system,  for  some  genera- 
tions yet,  to  the  patient  and  thorough  study  of  the  Greek  language  and 
literature.  This  book  is  not  intended  to  lessen  the  number  of  those 
who  shall  enter  upon  such  a  course  of  study,  but  it  is  hoped  that  it  may 
increase  that  number.  Yet  it  is  not  a  sufficient  introduction  to  the 
reading  of  a  classic  author,  and  hence  is  not  a  rival  of  the  various  ex- 
cellent "  First  Lessons  "  in  use.  In  putting  these  ideas  into  practice  the 
material  has  been  grouped  about  a  grammatical  outline,  because  the 
thorough  memorizing  of  a  few  inflections  will  save  time  and  labor  in 
the  end,  by  enabling  the  pupil  from  the  outset  to  make  a  certain  limited 
use  of  the  language  on  rational  principles.  In  no  other  way  can  the  re- 
quisite familiarity  with  the  Greek  words  be  as  easily  gained.  Besides, 


GREEK  AND  LA  TIN. 

while  the  book  is  intended  primarily  for  those  who  without  it  would 
never  study  Greek  at  all,  those  have  also  been  kept  in  mind  who  will 
afterwards  continue  the  study.  Yet  with  the  possible  exception  of  the 
dual  number,  the  memorizing  of  which  is  but  a  trifle,  no  feature  what- 
ever has  been  introduced  which  could  involve  labor  outside  of  the  main 
purpose,  as  set  forth  above. 

AN  INTRODUCTION  TO  ATTIC  GREEK.    By  JABEZ 
BROOKS,  Professor  in  the  University  of  Minnesota.     I2mo. 

Presents  essentials  in  such  manner  that  the  learner  may  enter  without 
needless  detention  upon  an  intelligent  and  successful  reading  of  Attic 
Greek. 

The  fundamental  idea — that  nine  years'  experience  in  applying  has 
shown  to  be  practicable — is  to  begin  the  study  of  Greek  with  a  con- 
nected text,  and  to  so  work  this  text  over  as  to  derive  from  it  all  the 
grammar  involved,  and  then  to  attach  to  the  framework  thus  formed 
whatever  further  grammatical  apparatus  is  necessary.  In  this  way  the 
learner's  activities  are  incited  to  discover  for  himself  the  laws  of  con- 
struction, and  the  author  studied  is  made  to  appear  as  their  true  source. 

The  first  chapter  of  the  Anabasis  has  been  found  to  contain  a  stock 
of  words  sufficiently  varied  to  illustrate  all  the  essential  forms  of  the 
accidence,  and  is  accordingly  taken  as  a  basis  for  work. 

Conversation  and  dictation  exercises,  appealing  to  the  learner's  powers 
of  imitation,  form  an  integral  part  of  the  plan,  and,  it  has  been  found, 
give  him  a  natural  and  unconscious  grip  of  the  language  exceeding  that 
obtained  by  any  other  exercise. 

GREEK    LITERATURE.      By  THOMAS    SARGENT    PERRY. 
8vo. 

A  compendious  philosophical  account  of  the  growth  of  Greek  litera- 
ture and  of  its  relations  to  the  physical  surroundings  and  political  and 
social  history  of  the  people.  In  this  setting  appear  the  outlines  of  the 
great  masterpieces,  with  English  translations  of  their  more  interesting 
or  representative  passages.  The  comparative  method  is  followed,  the 
English  reader's  familiarity  with  his  own  literature  being  made  to  help 
along  his  acquaintance  with  Greek  authors.  It  is  believed  that  the 
college-bred  man  who  got  from  his  study  of  these  classics  in  the  origi- 
nal but  faint  and  distorted  views  of  their  beauties  will  here  find  assist- 
ance in  extending  and  organizing  his  knowledge  ;  and  also  that  the  man 
who  knows  little  or  no  Greek  may  by  this  book  put  himself  in  closer 
contact  with  the  spirit  of  Greek  literature  than  most  students  of  the 
language  have  attained. 

PREPARATORY    LATIN    AND   GREEK    TEXTS.    Re- 

quired  for  Admission  to  American  Colleges.    i6mo.    pp.  767. 
Latin  and  Greek  parts  can  also  be  had  separately. 

The  Latin  part  contains  five  books  of  Caesar,  seven  of  Cicero's  Ora- 
tions, 177  pages  of  selections  from  Ovid's  Metamorphoses,  and  six 
books  of  the  JEneid  and  the  Bucolics.  The  Greek  part  contains  three 
books  of  the  Anabasis  and  the  same  number  of  the  Iliad. 


GREEK  AND  LATIN. 

SCRIVENER'S  (F.    H.   A.)    GREEK    TESTAMENT.— 

(H  KAINH  4IA&HKH.)    Novum  Testamentum.    Textfts 

Stephanici  A.D.   1550,   cum   Variis  Lectionibus  Editionum 

Bezae,     Elzeviri,    Lachmanni,    Tischendorfii,    Tregellesii, 

Westcott-Hortii,  Versionis  Anglicanae  emendatorum,  Cu- 

rante,  F.  H.  A.  SCRIVENER,  A.M.,  D.C.L.,  LL.D.    Accedunt 

Parallela  S.  Scripturae  Loca.     i6mo.     598  pp.     Cloth. 

The  text  is  that  of  the  Authorized  Version  (Stephens,  1550),  with  the 

various  readings  approved  by  Westcott  and  Hort,  and  those  finally 

adopted  by  the  Revisers.     Dr.  Scrivener  has  added  the  Eurelian  Canons 

and  Capitula,  and  references  specially  bearing  on  usage  of  words.     The 

passages  in  which  variations  occur  are  printed  in  black  type  so  that  the 

eye  can  readily  distinguish  them. 

SUETONIUS'S  LIVES   OF  THE   C>ESARS.— GAI  SVE- 
TONI    TRANQVILLI    DE    VITA    CAESARVM.      LIBRI    Dvo. 
Edited,  with  an  Introduction  and  Commentary,  by  HARRY 
THURSTON  PECK,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  the  Latin  Language 
and  Literature  in  Columbia  College.     I2mo,  pp.  xxxv,  215. 
It  is  difficult  to  ascertain  the  reason  why  the  Lives  of  Suetonius  have 
been  suffered  to  remain  so  long  unedited  by  English-speaking  scholars. 
No  work  of  equal  size  that  has  come  down  to  us  from  classical  antiquity 
possesses  a  more  real  interest  or  a  more  enduring  value.     In  the  his- 
torical significance  of  the  period  that  it  covers,  in  the  light  it  throws 
upon  so  many  points  of  Roman    custom,   and  in  the  impartiality, 
thoroughness,  and  conscientious  accuracy  of  its  author,  it  has  always 
been  regarded  as  a  most  important  source  of  information  concerning 
the  men  and  measures  of  the  Early  Empire.     It  is  also  a  rich  mine  of 
personal  anecdote,  giving  innumerable  glimpses  of  many  famous  Ro- 
mans, divested  of  the  stage  properties  with  which  we  almost  always 
find  them  in  the  pages  of  the  professional  historians. 

It  is,  then,  with  the  hope  of  gaining  for  the  Roman  Plutarch  a  wider 
circle  of  appreciative  readers  that  the  present  volume  is  given  to  the 
public.  The  first  two  books  of  the  Lives  have  been  selected  because  they 
have  to  do  with  that  period  of  transition  which,  with  its  tremendous 
moral,  social,  and  political  revolution,  forms  perhaps  the  most  remark- 
able era  of  Roman  history  ;  and  also  because  their  subject  is  the  per- 
sonality of  the  two  great  Caesars  who  laid  the  foundation  of  an  empire 
whose  influence  is  still  moulding  the  development  of  modern  Europe, 
as  its  grandeur  is  still  potent  in  the  realm  of  imagination. 

The  text  of  the  present  edition  is  based  upon  the  text  of  C.  L.  Roth 
(Leipzig,  1886).  Some  variations  from  his  readings  have  been  noted 
and  defended  in  the  Commentary.  To  obviate  any  reasonable  ob- 
jections to  Suetonius's  plainness  of  speech,  a  few  sentences  have  been 
relegated  to  the  notes,  but  without  any  alteration  in  the  original  num- 
bering of  the  sections.  These  textual  omissions  have  been  made  with 
a  sparing  hand  ;  for  experience  has  only  served  to  strengthen  the  con- 
viction of  the  editor,  that  the  application  to  a  classic  author  of  any  ex- 
tended system  of  expurgation  is  at  once  a  moral  blunder  and  a  literary 
crime. 

HENRY  HOLT  &  CO.,  PUBLISHERS,  N.  Y. 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL   BE  ASSESSED    FOR    FAILURE  TO    RETURN 
^   ^  THIS    BOOK   ON    THE   DATE   DUE.    THE   PENALTY 

WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 


DAY    AND     TO     $1.OO     ON     THE    SEVENTH     DAY 
OVERDUE. 

MAR     131935 

4K.  14  fo-r 

>-  AJ/                 •    r"r*i%        i*f  ^nc*c 

p|             FEB     71955 

^H                            \  it 

§ 

t\95S^ 

REC^D  LD 

AUG  1  1  wfin 

*•*  W  U     1      I 

*/l  AV     A   ^    9flfijl 

KHT  0  AI  ^uu^ 

^ 

*v^ 

i 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


